Tekla - Document

Basic Modeling 2
Engineering
Tekla Structures 19.1

2013 Engineering Basic Training
Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
Copyright© 1992-2013 Tekla Corporation. All rights reserved.
This Software Manual has been developed for use with the referenced Software. Use of the
Software, and use of this Software Manual are governed by a License Agreement. Among other
provisions, the License Agreement sets certain warranties for the Software and this Manual,
disclaims other warranties, limits recoverable damages, defines permitted uses of the Software,
and determines whether you are an authorized user of the Software. Please refer to the License
Agreement for important obligations and applicable limitations and restrictions on your rights.
In addition, this Software Manual is protected by copyright law and by international treaties.
Unauthorized reproduction, display, modification, or distribution of this Manual, or any
portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
full extent permitted by law.
Tekla, Xcity, Xengineer, Xpipe, Xpower, Xsteel, and Xstreet are either registered trademarks
or trademarks of Tekla Corporation in the European Union, the United States, and/or other
countries. Other product and company names mentioned in this Manual are or may be
trademarks of their respective owners. By referring to a third-party product or brand, Tekla
does not intend to suggest an affiliation with or endorsement by such third party and disclaims
any such affiliation or endorsement, except where otherwise expressly stated.
Elements of the software described in this Manual may be the subject of pending patent
applications in the European Union and/or other countries.
Contents
3 Basic Modeling 2 ............................................................................... 3

In This Lesson .......................................................................................................... 3
3.1 Start Tekla Structures .............................................................................................. 4
3.2 Create a New Model – Eng_Model ......................................................................... 5
Start a New Model.................................................................................................... 5
Save the Model ........................................................................................................ 6
Setting Up Job Specific Information ........................................................................ 7
3.3 Create the Grid ......................................................................................................... 9
Create the Grid ......................................................................................................... 9
Rotate Grid ............................................................................................................. 11
Set Work Plane to a New Position ........................................................................ 12
Fit Work Area ......................................................................................................... 12
Verifying Grids against Reference Files ............................................................... 13
Create Plane Views along Gridlines ..................................................................... 14
Create View on Skewed Grid ................................................................................ 15
3.4 Create Foundation System .................................................................................... 16
Model Pad Footings ............................................................................................... 17
Model Strip Footings .............................................................................................. 19
Model Concrete Columns ...................................................................................... 21
Model Concrete Beams ......................................................................................... 23
Model Foundation Walls ........................................................................................ 26
Model the Main Level Slabs .................................................................................. 29
3.5 Create Steel Framing System ............................................................................... 31
Model Steel Columns at Grid Line 1 ..................................................................... 31
Model a Steel Rafter at Grid Line 1....................................................................... 33
Establish Work Points for Roof Elements ............................................................. 33
Model Roof Bracing & Joists ................................................................................. 37
Modify Columns...................................................................................................... 40
Model Eave Bracing ............................................................................................... 41
3.6 Create Mezzanine Framing ................................................................................... 41
Model Interior Columns .......................................................................................... 42
Model Mezzanine Beams ...................................................................................... 43
Model Vertical Bracing ........................................................................................... 47
3.7 Model Quality Review ............................................................................................ 48
Using Selection Filters ........................................................................................... 48
Using Interactive Reports ...................................................................................... 50
Using Object Representation ................................................................................ 51
Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation 3-i
3-ii Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
3 Basic Modeling 2
In This Lesson
In this lesson we will cover some preliminary tasks that you need to complete before starting
to model a real project. We will create a new model and recap the basic functions introduced
in lesson 2. After that, you will learn some additional basic functions.
You will learn how to:
Set up project information
Define part properties
Work in true planes (sloped, skewed)
Create your own select filters
Verify model integrity

Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation 3-3
3.1 Start Tekla Structures
To start Tekla Structures, click the Windows Start button. Navigate through All Programs >
Tekla Structures 19.1 > Tekla Structures 19.1. Alternately, you can double-click on the
desktop icon Tekla Structures 19.1.
The login dialog box will open. This login allows you to select the environment you want to
work in – typically US Imperial or US Metric, depending on your installation. You will
also be able to select your role. The role options in Tekla Structures tailor the program to fit
your needs and help you more easily and quickly find the settings you need.
For this training, we will be working in the US Imperial Environment, using the Engineering
Role and your available license.
1. Make sure these options are selected, and click OK.

The modeling interface is now opened. At first, most of the
menu options and icons are gray, indicating that they are
inactive. When you open an existing model or create a new
model the icons and available menu options will become
active.
You can open or create models from the Welcome to Tekla
Structures dialog box, or you can use the File menu or
toolbar icons.

3-4 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
3.2 Create a New Model – Eng_Model
To start a new model, you first need to create an empty model database with a unique name.
In this lesson we will use the name Eng_Model followed by your initials.
Start a New Model

1. Select New model from the Welcome to Tekla Structures dialog box, select File >
New… from the pull-down menu (keyboard shortcut: Ctrl+N), or select the New icon in
the standard toolbar to open the New dialog box.
2. Use the Browse… button to select your model storage directory. The full path of the
model folder is shown in the dialog box field after selection.
The Engineering folder should have been created with the setup files provided as part of
this training. Contact your instructor for further information on obtaining these files.
3. Tekla Structures suggests the name New Model for the model. Name the model
Eng_Model-yourinitials (Adding your initials to the model name helps us to quickly
review your model when you submit it for review).
4. Select the ENG_BaseTemplate for the model template option if it is not already provided
as the Model template.
You can use model templates as a basis when creating new models. Model templates
consist of predefined settings. The ENG_BaseTemplate, for example, provides custom
dialog boxes and selection and view filters for engineering specific data. The
ENG_PlateworkModel is provided as a plate work example.
When using a model template, all projects are started in Single-user mode. The model
can later be opened in Multi-user mode, if desired. The Multi-User function in Tekla
Structures allows multiple users in one model. This is particularly useful when a
number of modelers are working on one contract.
5. Click OK to create the new model.

The menus and icons activate and the model name appears in the title bar of the Tekla
Structures window.

Every model must have a unique name. Tekla Structures does not allow duplicate model
names within the same folder. Do not use special marks ( / \ ; : |, etc. ) in model
names.
You can only have one model open at a time. If you already have a model open, Tekla
Structures prompts you to save that model before exiting.
The Views dialog box (also called the Views List) is shown with the standard 3d view listed in
the Named views panel.
1. To open the 3d view, select it in the Named views panel and use the arrow button to
“push” it to the Visible views: panel. Alternatively, you can double-click on the listing to
move it to the other panel.
The arrow button is handy when opening or closing several views at once, you can use
the Shift or Ctrl key to select multiple views and move them between the Named views
and Visible views panels.
2. Close the Views dialog box by clicking OK.

The default 3d view and grid are shown.
Dash-and-dot lines show the projections of the grids that are visible on the view plane. Tekla
Structures indicates the work area of a view using a green, dashed line box.
For more information see Tekla User Assistance: Home > Instructions > Modeling Guide >
Setting up the workspace.
Save the Model

1. Select File > Save from the pull-down menu (keyboard shortcut: Ctrl+S) or select the
Save icon in the Standard toolbar.

Remember to save your model often, and always save when opening a new model or
exiting a Tekla Structures model.
Tekla Structures also includes an auto save feature that backs up and saves your work
automatically at set intervals. To set the Autosave intervals select Tools > Options >
Options …: General.
After you make any desired changes, remember to click the Apply button to retain the
changes – the OK button does the same but also closes the dialog box.
For more information on saving and auto saving see Tekla User Assistance: Home >
Instructions > Modeling Guide > Creating 3D models > Saving a model.
There are several ways to execute commands in Tekla Structures:

Icons
Commands in main pull-down menu
Commands in pop-up menu
By default, all of the commands are found in pull-down menus and most of them in the
icons. A pop-up menu appears when you click the right mouse button (right-click). If
you have an object selected, the commands on the pop-up menu relate to that object.
In this training manual we will use the context-sensitive right-click menu to activate
some commands.
For more information on Tekla Structures screen layout and toolbars see Tekla
User Assistance: Home > Instructions > Basics of Tekla Structures >
Interface overview.
Setting Up Job Specific Information

Prior to adding any parts, we will set up the necessary job specific information for the model:
Project properties
Preferences
Part properties

Project Properties
Project properties are common to all drawings and can be used to fill in typical information in
the title blocks.
1. Open the Project Properties dialog box by selecting File > Project Properties… from
the menu.
2. Note below that default information has been added in the dialog box. This is the
information that will show you what will be applied on templates. Replace the defaults
with project information. The User-defined attributes … dialog box, which can be
customized, stores further project related information.
The value fields on the main dialog box may need to be reserved for use by the detailer
or fabricator if the model is being shared. In this case, the User-defined attributes
relating to the engineering team on the Project Team tab should be used.
3. Click OK.
Preferences
Before starting to model check that preferences are set up correctly. For additional information
see Tekla User Assistance: Home > Instructions > System Guide > Files and folders > Files
storing options and advanced options > Settings in the Options dialog box.
Verify that your preferences are set up correctly before you start modeling. If you
change your settings in Options, Tekla Structures only applies the new settings to items
you create subsequently. Items you created prior to changing the preferences are not
affected.
1. Select Tools > Options > Options… from the menu bar.

2. Select Load modeling on the left side and check that the Current code on the right side is
set as desired.
3. Click OK.
Part Properties
The Engineering role and template provide a set of example Engineering attributes to model
various elements for this tutorial. These settings have been pre-defined such that the modeled
parts will correspond with the pre-defined construction drawing settings. See the section on
Modeling Discipline in the Coordination Practices chapter for more information.
The supplied settings provide a consistent set of attributes across the various disciplines using
Tekla Structures. Changes should be coordinated through your Tekla Structures administrator.
3.3 Create the Grid

We will now create a grid for the model according to the work plane (the current local
coordinate system, which is aligned to the global coordinate system of the model). We will
then rotate the grid to the desired position, align the work plane to this new position, and reset
the work area. Finally, we will compare our grid with a reference grid provided by another
trade and create views based on our new grid system.
For more information on grids and dialog box buttons see Tekla User Assistance: Home >
Instructions > Basics of Tekla Structures > Interface overview > Common buttons.
You can also create a skewed grid by setting the work plane to the desired skewed
position and creating the grid from that position – offset not required.
Create the Grid

1. Delete the default grid.
2. Select Modeling > Create Grid… from the menu.

3. Edit the grid information, in the Grid dialog box, according to the figure below
(Coordinates and Labels).
4. Click Create.
5. Enter ENG_Grid in the Save as field.
6. Click the Save as button to save the grid values.
7. Click Close to close the dialog box.
It is a good idea to save settings that you may need again. For instance, if the grid was
accidentally deleted then it would be a simple matter of reloading the settings to recreate
the grid.

Rotate Grid
Now we can rotate our grid as desired.
1. Select the grid.
2. Right-click and select Move Special > Rotate…
3. Pick the intersection of grid lines C and 1 (C|1).
The Move – Rotate dialog box will reflect the new origin point that was selected.
4. Enter 15 for the degrees of rotation around that origin point.
5. Click Move.
6. Click Expand.
If we were to start modeling parts now, especially footings and columns, they would come in
square to the global coordinate system. The work plane must be modified to follow the skew
of the building before any parts are modeled.
The red coordinate arrow symbol indicates the work plane, which is the current local
coordinate system of the model. Most of the commands that are coordinate system
dependent use the work plane coordinates.

Set Work Plane to a New Position
Now we need to set our work plane to the new skew so that our modeled parts will have the
correct orientation.
1. Select View > Set Work Plane > Using Two Points.
2. Pick the intersection C|1 to set the new origin.
3. Pick a point along grid line C to indicate the new positive X direction.
If the work plane is not “set” correctly relative to the global coordinate symbol, reset the
work plane to the 3d view using the View > Set Work plane > Parallel to View Plane
tool and try again.
The tools will stay active until you interrupt them. To stop them, right-click and select
Interrupt from the pop-up menu, or press the Esc key.
To restart the last tool used, press Enter.
Fit Work Area

Since the current work area is larger than needed we will reduce it to fit our soon to be
modeled parts.
1. Click anywhere on the view’s background to select it (a red bounding box outlines it).
2. Right-click and select Fit Work Area to Entire Model.

Verifying Grids against Reference Files
Users can verify their structural grid layouts against those provided by other disciplines’ grids
Below is an example of how a structural engineer can reference an architect's 2D DWG grid
plan.
1. Double-click the Insert reference model icon.
2. Browse to the desired file path where the reference drawing is located.
(C:\TeklaStructuresModels\Engineering\CAD).
3. Select the reference drawing (S101_DWG.dwg).
This path and reference object file are provided by the Engineering Pre-Training package
and the provided path is correct if you used the root folder of your C drive as the
extraction location. If your path is too long or you want to set the path relative to the
model, you can use the “..\” switch to indicate that it is a folder back and in the CAD
folder.
4. Define a Scale which corresponds with the scale used in creating the drawing. This
example uses 96 which correlates to the 1'-0" = 1/8" scale of the plan.
5. Select OK within the Reference Model Properties dialog box.
The user is prompted, in the lower left corner, to select a point of origin for the reference
model.
6. Select grid intersection C|1. The reference drawing will appear in the view.
7. Do not expand the view when prompted.
8. Adjust the location of the reference file as needed to align the first grid intersection.

The user can move the reference object around by selecting it and moving it like any
other type of object. The user can also use the measure tools with the reference drawing
lines or objects by snapping to them. To snap to the points in the reference object, make
sure the Snap to geometry lines / points snap tool is selected.
9. Once the grid systems are verified, the user can turn off the reference drawing visibility by
selecting File > Reference Model List … and turning the S101_DWG reference object
Visibility to Hidden in the Reference Models dialog box.
10. De-activate the Snap to geometry lines / points command.
To remove a reference object from the model, highlight the reference to be removed in
the Reference Models dialog box (accessed from the File menu) and select Delete from
the Edit menu. Alternatively, you can select the reference object in an open view and
right-click > Delete.
Create Plane Views along Gridlines

We will now create Elevation and Plan views along the gridlines.
1. Select the grid.
2. Right-click and select Create View > Along Grid Lines… from the context menu.
3. Click Create in the Creation of Views Along Grid Lines dialog box.
4. The named Views dialog box opens with the newly available views listed.
The Show… button after each view plane option allows you to open the View
Properties dialog box and set the view properties as desired for each plane type before
generating the grid line based views.

Create View on Skewed Grid
If you switch the View Angle of the 3d view to Plane, either by changing the properties or
using the Ctrl+P toggle, the grid system is angled in the view window. This is because the view
was created with the work plane aligned to the global coordinate system.
Open any of the plan views and you should see that the grid system is aligned to the view
window.
To create a new 3d view that aligns the grid system to the view window:
1. Select View > View Properties …
2. Load the 3d View settings.
3. Change the Name to something appropriate, such as 3d aligned to skew.
4. Click OK.
5. If the work plane is aligned to the grid select View > Create View of Model > On Work
Plane; otherwise, reset the work plane to the grid first.

3.4 Create Foundation System
Generally, Structural Modelers will build the model from the foundation up. We recommend,
however, that you don’t add too much detail into the foundation system if the Structural
Engineer is pressed for time in completing the structural frame analysis model. The Structural
Modelers can add more detail to the foundation plan after the initial foundation layout is
created and the super-structure is generated for the Structural Engineer. Then, as the
Structural Engineer exports the super-structure to the analysis engine of choice, the Structural
Modelers can continue modeling foundation details or even move on to generating plan
drawings.
An example of this workflow is that the pad footings and/or drilled piers are modeled,
followed by the steel frame. After the analysis model is exported from Tekla Structures, the
Structural Modeler continues adding in strip footings and wall elements.
For simplicity, we will model the entire foundation system comprised of pad footings and strip
footings.
If you have re-opened your model, the work plane will have reset to the global
coordinate system. You can use the Set Work Plane … Using Two Points
(from View menu), Using Three Points (icon or View menu), or Parallel to
View Plane (icon or View menu). To use the Parallel to View Plane you need
to select one of the grid plane views, such as the PLAN AT EL. 0” when
prompted.
Any view that is not aligned with your selected view window will be shown
skewed when the Ctrl+P View Angle toggle is used.
The cross-hair cursor will always be aligned to the global coordinate system.

Model Pad Footings
At Grid Lines 1 & 7
1. Shift+click on the Create pad footing icon to open the Pad Footing Properties dialog
box.
2. Load the saved pad_F10 settings. Note the pad footing size is 120”*120” (10' x 10') and
the Position defines a 2'-6" thick footing with TFE = 0'-0".
3. In the User-defined attributes, you can define a numbering scheme for drawing schedules
by entering the desired Label/Mark in the Design Group Mark value field (under the
Design Properties tab). If needed, an alternate part name can be entered in the Design
Name value field.
4. Click OK in the Pad footing (1) (User-defined attributes) dialog box.

5. Click Apply in the Pad Footing Properties dialog box.
6. Place pad footings at grid intersections C|1 and D|1.
7. Load the saved pad_F12 settings.

8. Click Apply.
9. Place pad footings at grid intersections E|1 and F|1.
10. End the command by right-clicking and selecting Interrupt from the pop-up menu or
pressing the Esc key.
11. Select the four pad footings by dragging a selection fence around them (Hold down the left
button on mouse). For more information see Tekla User Assistance: Home > Instructions
> Basics of Tekla Structures > Selecting objects > Selecting multiple objects.
12. Right-click on the screen and select Copy. Click to select grid intersection F|1. Then click
to select grid intersection F|7. The footings should now look like those shown below.
At Grid Lines 2, 4, & 6

1. Load the pad_F8 pad footing settings and select Apply.
2. Click the Create pad footing icon once to activate the tool.
3. Model pad footings at grid intersections C|2 and F|2.
4. Stop the tool.
5. Select these two new pad footings by using either a selection box or the Ctrl key.
6. Right-click, select Copy and pick D|2 as the original position and then D|4 and D|6.

At Grid Lines 3 & 5
1. Load the pad_F10 pad footing setting and select OK.
2. Restart the tool and add pad footings with these settings at grid intersections C|3, D|3,
E|3, and F|3.
3. Stop the tool and Copy the pad footings along grid line 3 to grid line 5. Alternately, you
can pick the grid intersections along grid line 5 to model these pad footings.
Model Strip Footings

We will now create strip footings. Strip footings are typically modeled below walls and pre-
cast panels. They can also be defined as grade beams which act as collector beams between
adjacent pad footings.
Check that your work plane is aligned to your grid before proceeding.
1. Open or go to the 3d view. Note this view was created with the grid at 0" elevation.
Therefore, modeling objects in this view will place the handle points at that elevation.
Alternately, you can use the PLAN AT EL. 0” view for modeling the strip footings.
2. Open the Strip Footing Properties dialog box by double-clicking on the Create strip
footing icon.
3. Load the StripFooting attribute and change the Shape to 24"*24".

4. Select OK.
5. Select the grid intersection C|1 as the start point of the first strip footing.
6. Select the grid intersection D|1 as the next, or end, point of the strip footing – the status
bar should be prompting you to Pick polygon position.
7. Click the middle-mouse button to finish selecting points for the strip footing.
You can also finish the endpoint selection by clicking the left mouse button twice
(double-click).
8. Add a strip footing between grid intersections D|1 and E|1 following the process presented
in steps 5 -7 above.
9. Add a strip footing between grid intersections E|1 and F|1 following the process presented
in steps 5 -7 above.
10. Add three strip footings along grid 7, as outlined in the steps above.
Fitting the Strip Footings to the Pad Footings

Note that the strip footing mass overlaps the pad footing mass and should be removed for
correct quantities. To remove the overlapping masses, we will use a component to “fit” the
parts.
1. To fit the strip footing to the pad footing, find and select the Cip Fitting from the
Component Catalog (binocular icon or Ctrl-F shortcut).
2. At the Pick main part status bar prompt, select the pad footing at grid intersection F|1.

3. At the Pick secondary part (at the maximum 1) status bar prompt, select the strip
footing between grid intersections E|1 and F|1. A fitting object will be created between
the pad footing and the strip footing.
4. Select the pad footing at grid intersection E|1 and the strip footing between grid
intersections E|1 and F|1. A fitting is placed on the other end of this strip footing.
5. Repeat the above steps with the remaining pad and strip footings along grid lines 1 & 7.
Several strip footings can be modeled with one command by single clicking on the
intermediate points of a strip footing line. However, this method is not recommended
because you can’t use the fitting tool for continuous strip footings.
Model Concrete Columns

Now we will create the concrete columns that support the first level.
Model Rectangular Columns on Grid Line 1

1. Double-click on the Create concrete column icon.
2. Load the pre-saved Cip_Column properties.
3. On the Position tab set the Bottom at 0'-0" and the Top at 23'-6".

4. Enter the information in the Attributes tab for a 36”*24” (3’-0*2’-0) column.
5. Click Apply.
6. Pick the grid intersections C|1 and F|1.
Model Square Columns on Grid Line 1

While the Create column tool is still active:
1. Complete the dialog box for 24”X24” (2’-0*2’-0) columns.
2. Click OK.
3. Create these columns at grid intersections D|1 and E|1.

Copy the Rectangular Columns
1. Select the columns at grid intersections C|1 and F|1.
2. Right-click and select Copy Special > Linear… on the pop-up context menu.
3. Pick… two points to show the translation vector (19’-8” in x direction).
4. Type in the number of copies (6).
5. Click Copy, and end the command.
Copy the Square Columns

1. Select the columns at grid intersections D|1 and E|1.
2. Right-click and select Copy Special > Linear… on the pop-up context menu. If the dialog
is still open you can click Pick... to restart the tool.
3. Pick a point on grid line 1 then on grid line 3 to show the translation vector (39’-4” in x
direction).
4. Type in the number of copies (3).
5. Click Copy, and end the command.
Model Concrete Beams

We will now create the concrete beams along gridlines 1 and 3 at level 23’-6” and then create
rotated copies of them for the other half of the structure.

Model Ledger Beams on Grid Lines 1 & 3

1. Shift- click, or double-click, on the Create concrete beam icon.
2. Click the button next to the Shape field to open the Select Profile dialog box in order to
enter the values required.
3. Select the LBEAM parametric profile from the Others category.

4. Enter the values so that a=16", b=24", c=6", and d=8" for the beams on gridline 1.
5. Click Apply.
The LBEAM and ITBEAM profiles used in this section are custom profiles in the model
template. If they are not available in your profile catalog you will need to import them.
Contact your instructor for further information and assistance.
6. Pick the top of the column at C|1. Pick the top point of the column at D|1.

7. Create the other two beams on gridline 1 in the same manner.
8. Open the Select Profile dialog box once again.
9. Select the ITBEAM profile.
10. Enter the information for the beams on gridline 3 to reflect values so that a=24", b=5",
c=5", d=8”, f=8", and g=16".
11. Set the At depth position to Middle.
12. Click Apply.
13. Create the gridline 3 beams.
The model should now look as shown below.
An easy way to view the profiles of the model is to change the view display to wire-frame
by pressing Ctrl+2. To return to solid rendering press Ctrl+4.
Copy the Ledger Beams

1. Select the beams just created on gridlines 1 and 3; you can select them individually or with
a selection box in conjunction with the Cip_Beam selection filter.
2. Use the Copy Special > Rotate… command to easily place the beams on the other end of
the structure by selecting the midpoint of gridline 4 as the center of rotation. The origin
fields will auto-populate with coordinates for the point based on the work plane location.
3. Number of copies should be 1 and the Angle of rotation should be set to 180.

4. Click Copy.
5. If you used a selection filter be sure to set it back to standard.
The model now looks as shown below.
Mirroring objects is strongly discouraged, though it can be used in certain situations

without ill effects.
Model Foundation Walls

Concrete walls or panels can be defined using the Create concrete panel icon or the
Create concrete slab icon. This example shows how to model walls using the Create
concrete panel icon. See Model Discipline chapter for when to best use these different
modeling techniques for concrete.

Model Wall along Grid 1

1. Open two Views: 3d and PLAN AT EL. 23'-6". Go to Windows > Tile Vertically to show
both views on your screen.
2. Open the Concrete Panel Properties dialog box by shift-clicking, or double-clicking, on
the Create concrete panel icon.
3. Define a wall profile of 23'6*12 (do not enter a dash or inch marks), which is from
elevation 23'-6" to the top of strip footing at an elevation of 0".
4. Switch to the Position tab. Define in the In plane settings as Left and 1'-0" for the offset
and the In depth settings as Behind and 0".
5. Select Apply.
6. Activate the Snap to geometry lines / points selector icon.
7. With the Create concrete panel command active, pick, in the plan view, the first point
to start the wall. Pick the bottom edge of the concrete column along gridline 1, just below
gridline E (the midpoint snap should highlight).
8. Pick the second point along gridline 1, just above gridline F at the top edge of the concrete
column (the midpoint snap should highlight).

9. Middle-mouse-click to finish picking points for the tool.
10. Select Do not expand and the wall should be placed such that the ends of wall are flush
with the concrete columns at F|1 and E|1.
Model Wall Along Grid 7

1. Adjust the two views, 3D and PLAN AT EL. 23'-6", so that the area between the columns
at E|7 and F|7 is visible.
2. Reactivate the Concrete Panel tool by single-clicking on the Create concrete panel
icon.
Here we will practice following a precast detailing workflow and model
the wall to follow a clockwise erection plan.
3. With the Create concrete panel icon selected, pick, in the plan view,
the first point to start the wall. Pick at the top edge of the concrete
column along gridline 7, just above gridline F (the midpoint snap
should highlight).
4. Pick the second point along gridline 7, just below gridline E at the
bottom edge of the concrete column (the midpoint snap should
highlight).
5. Middle-mouse-click to finish the command.
6. The wall should be placed such that its ends are flush with the concrete
columns at F|7 and E|7.
7. Turn off the Snap to geometry lines / points select switch.

Since the wall’s start and end handles are located on the grid, the plane of the wall's
analysis nodes will also be created on grid line. This is a typical assumption by engineers
when modeling shear walls. If the engineer wants the plane of the wall analysis nodes
to be off grid, he or she can define them using the analysis node offsets or model them
off grid. See Analysis & Design chapter for more information.
Modify Strip Footings

Since the current strip footings do not extend under the wall panels, we will change their size.
1. Select the strip footing between E|1 and F|1.
2. Right-click and select Properties…
3. Click the Select/Deselect toggle button to uncheck all of the boxes.
4. Change the Shape value to 24”*48” and click Modify.
5. Select the box next to the Shape field.
6. Select the strip footing between E|7 and F|7 and click Modify.
Model the Main Level Slabs

This model uses hollow core slabs that are supported by the ledger beams modeled earlier.
1. Open the PLAN AT ELEV 23'-6” view.

2. Shift+click on the Create concrete beam icon.
3. Load the Precast_HC_Plank settings.

4. Verify that the Beam Properties are as shown.
5. In the PLAN AT EL. 23'-6” view select
the grid intersections of C|1 and C|3 to
place the hollow core unit. End the
command.
6. Select the hollow core unit.
7. Right-click and select Copy Special >
Linear… from the pop-up context
menu.
8. Enter a dY value of 24" and 38 copies. Then click Copy. You should now have one bay
filled.
9. Rotate the model (Ctrl + middle-mouse click & drag) as necessary to facilitate a crossing
selection (right to left) of the hollow core units.

10. Click the Pick … button in the Copy – Linear dialog box to re-activate the command.
11. Select the grid intersections of C|1 and C|3 to populate the dX value field.
12. Enter 2 in the Number of copies value field and click Copy.
The remaining two bays should now be filled.
3.5 Create Steel Framing System

First, we will create two columns on gridline 1 and then a sloping beam, or rafter, between
them. After that, we will create the construction points needed to add the horizontal bracing
and joists. We will then copy the completed portal frame and points across the model.
Then to emulate a change in the contract, we will remove the concrete columns on gridlines 2,
4 and 6, and modify the upper steel columns so that they become full-length steel columns.
Utilizing a sloping work plane and view planes, we will model the horizontal bracing and
joists. Then, horizontal beams along gridlines C and F will be added for stability. Finally, a
mezzanine level will be created along with some vertical bracing on gridlines C and F.
If you reopen your model the work plane will reset to the global coordinate
system. You can use the Set Work Plane > Using Two Points (from the View
menu), Using Three Points (icon or View menu), or Parallel to View Plane
(icon or View menu). To use Parallel to View Plane you need to select one of
the grid plane views, such as the PLAN AT EL. 0” when prompted.
Model Steel Columns at Grid Line 1

We will first create two W27X94 columns at C|1 and F|1.

1. Shift+click on the Create column icon.
2. Load the Column properties.
3. In the User-defined attributes… under the Design Properties tab, modify the Design
Group Mark value to C1 and click OK.
4. Complete the Column Properties for the W27X94 column at grid intersection C|1. The
columns on grid line C should have a bottom elevation of 23'-6", a top elevation of 66’-3",
and a 90° rotation.
5. Click Apply.
6. Pick grid intersection C|1 to create the column.
7. Complete the Column Properties for the column at grid F|1. The columns on grid line F
should have a bottom elevation of 23'-6" and a top elevation of 59’-8". The Design Group
Mark needs to be set to C2.
8. Click OK.
9. Pick the grid intersection F|1 to create the second column.

Model a Steel Rafter at Grid Line 1
Now we will create a rafter between the two columns that we just created.
1. Open the ELEVATION ON GRID 1 view.
2. Double-click on the Create beam icon.
3. Load the Rafter properties.

4. Enter W30X99 for the rafter Profile and click OK.
5. In the ELEVATION ON GRID 1 view pick C|66’-3” and then F|59’-8”.
Establish Work Points for Roof Elements

We will now create work points for the braces and joists. Along the top of the beam we will
first create the work points for the first and the last brace. Then we will evenly divide the space
between these points. Next, we will copy the points and steel frame to the other grid lines and
finally we will create work points for the joists at grid line 3.
Create First and Last Brace Work Points

1. Double-click on the Add point along extension of two picked points icon.
2. Type -2-6.

3. Select OK (remember to include the 'negative' sign).
The Add point along extension of two picked points tool adds a point along a line,
specified by clicking two points in the model. The points that are picked in the model
define the positive vector, while the positive or negative distance value set in the dialog
box defines the offset from the last point clicked. A positive value means the extension
point will be farther away from the first point clicked, while a negative value means it
will be closer to the first point clicked.
4. Pick one of the grid intersections (C|66'-3” or F|59’-8”), and then the other.
5. Repeat, picking the points in the reverse order to place an offset point at the other end.
Create Intermediate Bracing Work Points

Using the Add points on line command, divide the space between the work points that you
just created into ten equal spaces (9 points).
6. Double-click on the Add points on line icon.
7. Enter 9 as the number of dividing points and select OK.
8. Pick one of the work points that you just created, and then the other.

Copy the Steel Frame and Points
We will now copy the columns, the rafter, and the points to gridlines 2 through 7.
1. Select the columns, the rafter, and the work points. You can use a crossing selection (right
to left) and the grid will be selected but not copied.
2. Right-click and select Copy Special > Linear….

3. In the 3d view, pick two points to show the translation vector (19’-8” in x direction).
4. Type the number of copies (6).
5. Select Copy.
6. You may need to expand the visibility envelope of the 3d view at this point, if your rafters
are not visible. To do this, double-click in open space in the 3d view then change the
dialog box as shown below and select Modify.

Delete Excess Points
The work points copied to grid lines 3, 4, and 5 are not needed and will be in the way later, so
we will delete them now.
1. In the 3d view, rotate the model (Ctrl + middle-mouse click & drag) as necessary for an
easier selection of the work points.
2. Change your selection options to Select points only (you may need to select the switch
twice to toggle the others off).
3. Select multiple points along the beams on grid lines 3, 4, and 5 by using a containing
selection box, which is drawn left to right.
4. Delete the selected points by pressing the Delete key or selecting Delete from the pop-up
context menu accessed by right-clicking.
5. Repeat as necessary.
6. Return your selection switches to the default by clicking on the Select all switch.
We can now use the ELEVATION ON GRID 3 view to create the work points for the joists.
Create First & Last Joist Work Points

1. Double-click on the Add point along extension of two picked points icon.
2. Type -2-0” and click OK.
3. In the ELEVATION ON GRID 3 view, pick grid intersections C|66’-3” and F|59’-8”.
4. Repeat, picking the points in the reverse order to place an offset point at the other end.
Create Intermediate Joist Work Points

5. Using the Add points on line command, divide the space between the work points that
you just created into twelve equal spaces (11 points).

Model Roof Bracing & Joists
The next step is modeling the horizontal bracing and roof joists of the sloped roof. To place the
parts in the correct plane we will first change the work plane (which currently is the local
coordinate system of the model) to the roof slope. Then we will model the bracing at each end
of the roof, followed by the joists.
For more information see Tekla User Assistance: Home > Instructions > Modeling Guide >
Setting up the workspace > Work plane.
Set Work Plane to the Roof Slope

To set the work plane to the roof slope:
1. Pick the Set work plane using three points icon.
2. Pick the top of the C|1 column as the origin.

3. Pick the top of another grid C column to define the positive x-direction.
4. Pick the top of the F|1 column to define the positive y-direction. The work plane is now
positioned to the top plane of the rafters.
5. End the command.
Model Horizontal Bracing

Remember to model in a globally positive direction with the x-direction taking precedence.
2. Load the Horizontal_brace properties.

3. Set the Profile to WT6X15.
4. Set the Position > At depth to Behind with a value of 14"7/8 (half of the rafter’s depth).
5. Select OK.
6. In the 3d view, create the braces shown in the drawing by snapping to the points. You may
wish to disable all snaps except for the Snap to points and grid intersections and Snap
to reference lines / points.

7. Check the position of the braces in the 3d and ELEVATION ON GRID 1 views.
8. Add the braces to the other end of the building (between gridlines 6 and 7).
We will now create the joists by using a true plan view to ensure that the handles will be in the
work plane and the sloping work plane view to establish the rotation of the joists off of
vertical. We will also use a “detailing” joist style, which represents them with a single part
object; this style of joist in Tekla Structures is more fabrication friendly than a composite joist
(made of multiple pieces) and will make for an easier exchange of the joist design data.
Create True Plan View

1. Select View > Create View of Model > On Work Plane to create a temporary view
(indicated by parenthesis around the view name) parallel to the roof plane.
2. Double-click in the view’s background to open the View Properties dialog box.
3. Select and Load the Plan View settings from the options list.
4. Provide an appropriate Name, such as TRUE ROOF PLAN.
5. Click Modify (providing a name that is not contained in parenthesis converts the view
from temporary).
Model Detailing Joists

2. Load the Joist properties.
3. Select a 12K profile for the joists.
4. Change the Position / At depth to: Behind with a -2"1/2 offset and click OK.
5. Pick the joist work point near grid intersection C|3 at the status bar prompt, Pick first
position.
6. At the status bar prompt, Pick second position, pick the point perpendicular to the
rafter along grid line 4.

7. Right-click > Interrupt.
8. Check the ELEVATION ON GRID 3 to ensure that the roof joist is oriented and positioned
correctly.
Copy the Joists

1. In the 3d View, select the joist.
2. Right-click > Copy Special > Linear.
3. Pick two consecutive work points to define the distance in the Copy – Linear dialog box.
4. Enter the Number of copies (12) and click Copy.

6. Select all of the joists.
7. In the Copy – Linear dialog box, click Pick...
8. Select the grid intersections C|3 and C|2.
9. Change the Number of copies to 2 and click Copy.
10. In the Copy – Linear dialog box, click Pick...
11. Select the grid intersections C|4 and C|5.
12. Change the Number of copies to 3 and click Copy.
13. Close the Copy –Linear dialog box.
14. Close the elevation views.

Reset the Work Plane
1. Select View > Set Work Plane > Parallel to View Plane.
2. At the Pick View prompt, click in either the 3d aligned to skew or PLAN AT EL. 0”
view. Don’t forget to Save the model.
You can turn off the visibility of points through the View Properties dialog box for
the views you are using (or you may delete the points).
Modify Columns
We will now remove the concrete columns on gridlines 2, 4 and 6 and modify the steel
columns above them to extend down to the footings.
1. Select the six concrete columns (at C|2, C|4, C|6, F|2, F|4, and F|6) using the Ctrl key for
multiple selection.
2. Press the Delete key or right-click and select Delete from the menu.
3. Select the six steel columns (at C|2, C|4, C|6, F|2, F|4, and F|6) using the Ctrl key for
multiple selection.
4. Rotate the model (Ctrl + middle-mouse click & drag) as necessary to facilitate an area
selection of the yellow column handles.
5. Hold down the Alt key while dragging a containing box (left to right) around the yellow
handles of the columns; the status bar should indicate 0 + 6 object(s) selected.
6. Right-click > Move.

7. Pick one of the highlighted handles (endpoint snap).

8. Pick the corresponding grid intersection below the handle.
Model Eave Bracing

1. Open the Beam Properties dialog box and Load the pre-saved Horizontal_hss_Brace
settings.
2. Use the Create beam, Move, and Copy tools to add in HSS8X4X1/4 beams along
gridlines C and F, 4’-0” below the tops of the columns.
3.6 Create Mezzanine Framing

Now we will add columns, beams, and bracing for the mezzanine level.

If you reopen your model the work plane will reset to the global coordinate
system. You can use the Set Work Plane … Using Two Points (from the View
menu), Using Three Points (icon or View menu), or Parallel to View Plane
(icon or View menu). To use the Parallel to View Plane tool you need to select
one of the grid plane views, such as the PLAN AT EL. 0”, when prompted.
Model Interior Columns

1. Open the PLAN AT EL. 42'-0" view.
2. Double-click on the Create column icon.
3. Load the pre-saved Column properties.
4. Enter the information as indicated (W14X43, 42'-0", 23'-6") and select OK.

5. Pick the grid intersections D|3, D|5, D|7, E|3, E|5 and E|7 to place the six intermediate
columns. Select Do not expand when prompted.
Model Mezzanine Beams

2. Load the Beam properties.
3. Select the W27X94 profile and select Apply. Leave the Beam Properties dialog box
open.
4. Place two beams along gridline D between the columns at D|3, D|5 & D|7.
5. Place two beams along gridline E between the columns at E|3, E|5 & E|7.
6. In the Beam Properties dialog box select the W16X36 profile and select Apply. Leave
the beam dialog box open.

7. Continue to place beams as indicated in figure below (remember the positive global
method of placement for model consistency).
Now we will place a skewed beam.

1. Make sure only the Snap to reference lines / points icon of the two main snap switches
on the right is selected.
2. Make sure the Snap to points and grid intersections and Snap to end points icons are
selected.
Temporary Snap Reference Method:

Hold down the Ctrl key while selecting the reference point to snap from, define the
offset direction desired by engaging a snap point in that direction, then enter the desired
offset dimension.

3. Using the temporary snap reference, place the skewed beam with the left end offset 3'-0
from the C|5 grid intersection, as indicated in the figure below, and the right end at grid
intersection D|7.
4. In the beam dialog box, select the W14X43 profile and select Apply. Leave the Beam
Properties dialog box open.
5. Place the four beams (C|4-C|5, F|5-F|6 offset, F|4-F|5, F|6-F|7) as indicated in the image
below (remember, the positive global method of placement for model consistency).
6. Stop the Create beam tool.
Snap Overrides
Right-click while in a placement command and the pop-up menu presents a list of
temporary snap overrides.
Alternately, you can use the on-screen dimensions and the nearest points snap tool to
model these beams.
7. Use the Add points on line command to divide the skewed beam into four sections to
easily place infill beams.

8. Activate Snap to mid points.
9. In the beam dialog box, select the W14X34 profile. Select OK.
10. Place the beams as indicated in following image (remember the positive global method of
placement for model consistency).
11. The small infill beams are offset 5'-0 (use the temporary snap reference method).
Next, we will add three sets of bracing.

Model Vertical Bracing
1. Click the Open component catalog icon to open the Component Catalog.
2. Select the Custom category from the stored search list.

3. Find the Chevron Bottom component. Double-click it to open the properties dialog box.
4. Select the HSS8X8X1/4 profile, click Apply in the Select Profile dialog box, and then
Apply in the Chevron Bottom components dialog box.
5. The status bar should prompt Pick main part or area; select the mezzanine beam D|3-
E|3 (@ elevation 42'-0").
6. The status bar should prompt Pick first position; select base of the column at D|3. Note
if you rotate the PLAN AT EL. 42’-0” view it is easier to pick the base of the column.

7. The status bar should prompt Pick second position; select base of the column at E|3.
8. Repeat these steps for the bracing at the opposite end (D|7-E|7).
9. Repeat these steps for the final bracing at E|7-F|7 using the HSS7X7X1/4 profile.
10. If you rotated your plan view, reset it to planar using the Ctrl+P toggle.
11. Save the model.
3.7 Model Quality Review

This section shows the modeler’s ability to verify his/her technique and discipline at various
stages of the project. As discussed in the Modeling Discipline section of the Coordination
Practices chapter, there is a certain protocol typically used to ease the drawing and analysis
model creation processes. This protocol will also simplify the transfer of the model
downstream to subcontractors.
Tekla Structures has several tools that allow the user to check information about the model.
Below, several tools are shown with examples.
Using Selection Filters

Selection filters allow the user to only select objects in the model with certain characteristics,
as identified by the user. Selection filters can be used to isolate certain structural systems, one
group at a time. These can be used to modify the properties of object groups, but the user can
also use selection filters to verify that objects have been assigned names or other values,
according to the agreed upon naming convention or company standards. Presented below is an
example:
1. Go to the selection filter option list and select Steel_BraceHSS.
2. Activate the Select objects in components selection switch and select the model.
Only the bracing members are selected.

3. Note that if the Object group - Selection Filter dialog box is opened (see image below),
the user can see what rules have been set up to determine the types of objects selected.
In this case, any object that has a name ending in BRACE and a profile that begins with HSS,
TS, TUBE, or PIPE is included in the selection group.
With the bracing members selected as defined above, the user can now visually inspect the
model for the desired criteria or run a report to list the properties of the objects selected.
1. Select Drawings & Reports > Create Report…
2. Select the 350 Material list report.
3. Click Create from selected.
4. A dialog box opens with a list of material takeoff information. Note that we can see that
two braces are HSS7x7, four are HSS8x8, and 12 are HSS8X4. In reviewing the various
sizes used, the engineer may opt to consolidate the number of sizes.

When finished using a selection filter, remember to set it back to standard. Otherwise,
you cannot select other objects in the model.
Using Interactive Reports

Reports can be used to verify specific information about the model. Below is an example of
how the model can be selected and its properties viewed to quickly assess model data.
1. Set the selection filter to standard.
2. Select the model. All the objects should highlight (note that the number of selected objects
will show up in the lower right corner).
3. In the menu bar, select Drawings & Reports > Create Report…
4. Select the 175 Design Summary report.
5. Click Create from selected.
With this report, the part GUID is listed in the rightmost column. When reports are set up to
include the part GUID, the user can highlight the report row and the corresponding part
highlights in the model (pressing the Z key while selecting the list item will zoom in to the
object. Pressing the F key while selecting the list item will zoom in and fit the work area to the
object). As we see in the image below, the mezzanine beam between D|3-E|3 is highlighted
in the report and in the model. This specific report shows key information like name (Detailing
& Design Group) which can be used for setting up drawing filters, material grade, elevation,
and length. Also, the orientation column identifies which members have different start and end
Z values. The user can use this as a check to determine if sloped beams were modeled
correctly (or if they should be horizontal). Since column objects have different z values they
will show up in the list as sloped.

This report is just one example of the type of data which can be brought into reports to check
the model integrity before moving on to more detailed modeling. We recommend that you
use these reports periodically to verify the model. In fact, the Structural Engineer could
review the Structural Modeler's work using such tools.
Using Object Representation

Object Representation is probably the most powerful visualization tool in Tekla Structures.
Below is an example of how a rule-based filtering system can be used to verify several values
within the foundation system. This exercise can be done prior to creating foundation drawings
so that the designer knows that the foundation elements have been modeled with the correct
data (including object naming convention and design group marks).
1. We will first isolate the foundation elements in the model visually. Double-click on the
background of the 3d view. Set the Visible object group to Cip_Foundation.
2. Click Modify. You should only see the foundation elements (footings, walls, piers, etc). A
forced redraw of the view may be necessary. Note that the user can add object types to the
Cip_Foundation setting. For more information see Tekla User Assistance: Home >
Instructions > Modeling Guide > Grouping parts > Creating an object group .
3. Select View > Representation > Object Representation... from the menu bar.
4. Load the Foundation Check setting.

This visualization set includes rules for all the foundation object types known by the engineer
or designer. For example, the catalog of pad footing types used by the engineering office
(named F1 to F12) is included in the visualization set. Also, walls and strip footings are
included. Each object type is checked to make sure specific information about it matches the
company standard. If that information deviates from the standard, it will display as ghosted
blue in the model.
5. Click Modify to use the settings in the current view.
Several of the pad footings fall into the All object group which and are displayed as blue with
90% transparency. This is because the Design Group Mark is a unique attribute whose value
does not get copied when the object is copied.
If you manually modeled in the footings along column line 5 in lieu of copying them
from column line 3 (ref. page 3-19), the footings along column line 5 should be visible
and gray.
6. Select the footing at C|2, right-click > User-Defined Attributes…

7. Toggle off the check boxes, then on the Design Properties tab turn on the check box for
the Design Group Mark.
8. Select the four F8 pad footings on grid lines 4 and 6 and click Modify.
The pad footings now fit the “rule set” for their size, name, and mark and are no longer
displayed as ghosted.

9. Repeat this process to update the Design Group Mark for the remaining pad footings.
10. After checking your model with Object representation, Load the standard setting back
within the dialog box and click Modify. This setting will filter all the objects based on
Class, as originally done.
11. Change the View Properties setting, Visible Object Group, to standard. Select Modify.
Now the entire model is shown once again.

Connections
Engineering

Contents
4 Connections ...................................................................................... 3
In this lesson............................................................................................................ 3
4.1 About System Components .................................................................................... 4
4.2 Add Connections to Engineering Model ................................................................ 4
Base Plates ............................................................................................................. 4
Beam-to-Beam Connections .................................................................................. 9
Beam-to-Column Connections ............................................................................. 10
Bracing Connections ............................................................................................. 13
Joist to Beam ......................................................................................................... 15
Check a Connection .............................................................................................. 18
Check Clashing Of Steel Structures .................................................................... 21
Engineering: Connections
4-i
4 Connections
In this lesson
Typically, once a project enters the CD phase (construction document phase), the addition of
structural connections to the Tekla Structures model will occur. There are various reasons for
adding structural connections to the model including:
Visualizing constructability issues and load paths by the engineering team
Showing concept connections on engineering drawings
Passing pre-detailed connections to the steel/concrete detailers for their use
Passing the model to the contractor for purposes of clash detection, material
quantities, and/or visualization
The efficiency gained from modeling connections is in the management of the application of
the connections and not in the tools themselves. Knowing when to add the connections to the
project and to what degree to add structural connections is very important to define up front in
the project. See the lesson on Coordination Practices for a more in-depth discussion of this topic.
This lesson introduces the basics of creating structural connections, called system components,
in Tekla Structures.
Create connections
Work with connection properties
Save the properties for later use
Note that images in this lesson may have parts hidden to provide clarity in the image.
Also different rendering states may be presented without instruction to change; this is to
provide clarity in the presented images.
4-3
4.1 About System Components
The greatest benefits of using system components are:
Saving the component properties to a particular name allows the user to access them
later, or in other projects, as well.
When you modify an object’s profile in the model, all of the connections to the object
are automatically modified at the same time.
If you highlight an object and select options such as edit, copy, or mirror, all
connections to the object are automatically included if possible. The connections
copied or mirrored are the same as the originals. The same applies to plates and bolts.
With AutoDefaults, you can create rules defining when to use different connection
properties for the Autoconnection tool.
The Component catalog holds all available system components. There are two ways to access
this: By using Ctrl+F, or by clicking the "binocular" icon on the Detailing toolbar.
When applying a connection that you are unfamiliar with, accept the default properties and
create the connection. Then, look to see what needs to be modified. This is usually quicker
than trying to set the values for the connection before seeing what the connection actually
creates.
Home › Instructions › Detailing Guide › Getting started with components › Creating components
Home › Instructions › Detailing Guide › Getting started with components › Basics of components ›
Component concepts
Selection order
Up direction
Use the Autoonnection setting called Fittings/PrelimMatl to quickly fit or trim

members without applying detailed connections for conceptual cost estimating purposes
and drawing details. See Help on Autoconnection for more information in using this
feature.
4.2 Add Connections to Engineering Model

We will now apply components to specific areas of the model for preliminary drawing
representation. The component examples provided in this chapter are examples of the more
commonly used system components in Tekla Structures.
Base Plates
Initially, we will apply a base plate with the default settings and then modify it to reflect our
requirements. Then, we will create the rest of the base plates with the refined properties.
How to Establish Base Plate Settings
1. Open the Component Catalog by left-clicking on the Open component catalog icon or
by typing Ctrl+F.
2. To see pictures of the connections, make sure the Thumbnails mode is active.
3. Type "base plate" into the upper value field and click Search (or Enter).
4. In the component window, double-click on the Base plate (1004) icon.

5. Click OK to accept the default values.
6. Pick the column at grid intersection C|2
7. Pick the base of the column using the endpoint snap and the base plate will be created.
8. Use the shortcut Ctrl+2 to make the parts displayed in shaded wire frame.
4-5
9. Interrupt the command.
We will change the length of the anchor rods in the base plate by modifying the connection
properties.
10. Double-click on the green connection symbol (or any object in the component with the
Select components selection switch active), and the Base plate dialog box will reopen.
11. Select the Anchor rods tab page in the dialog box.
12. Edit the desired values: Anchor height = 1’-8”, Grout placement is Above the reference
point (picked point), and Position number values are p and 1.
13. Click Modify
14. Click OK to accept the properties for use later and close the dialog box.
To repeat the last command, do one of the following:

Click Edit > Repeat last command
Press Enter
Create Foundation Level Base Plates

Next, create base plates at the 0'-0" level for the remaining columns
1. Press the Enter key to start the base plate command again, or click once on the
component in the Component catalog to restart the tool.
2. Create the rest of the foundation level base plates by picking each column and then the
position for the base plate.
Create Interior Column Base Plates for Mezzanine Level

1. Open the Component Catalog by clicking on the Find component icon or by typing
Ctrl-F.
2. We want to use U.S. Base plate (1047). Type 1047 for the search value.
3. Double-click the component to open the U.S. Base Plate (1047) dialog box.
4. Go to the Anchor Rods tab and change the Grout thickness to be Above the insertion
point.
5. Click Apply to accept these properties and leave the dialog box open.
6. Select the D|3 mezzanine column as the main part.
7. Select the base of the column using the endpoint snap and the base plate connection will
be created.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 for the other mezzanine columns (D|5, D|7, E|3, E|5, & E|7).
Create Perimeter Column Base Plates for Mezzanine Level

1. In the U.S. Base plate (1047) dialog box, select the pre-saved BP_W14pinned settings
and click Load.
2. Select Apply.
3. Select the steel column at grid intersection C|1.
4. Pick the base of the column using the endpoint snap and the base plate will be created.
4-7
5. Interrupt the current command.
6. In the open Base plate properties dialog box switch to the Parts tab, change the plate
height to 2'-8", select the component and select Modify.
7. In the Bolts tab, change the vertical distance value to 16", and click Modify
8. Select OK to set the values for the remaining base plates to be created and close the dialog
box.
9. Create the base plates for the remaining exterior columns.

Steps 6 and 7 above could have been combined into one modify action, but were
broken up to illustrate how to refine the settings of a component gradually as a new
user, which provides a better understanding of the various component settings.
Next, we will model steel-to-steel connections at strategic locations in the model to save time.
For example, we would want to model connections where we plan to make elevation views,
section cuts, and details. Any further modeling beyond those areas may end up being counter-
productive.
Beam-to-Beam Connections
Shear Plate
Use the Shear plate simple (146) connection to make the beam-to-beam web connections at
the skewed ends of the mezzanine level beams. Weld the shear plate to the primary beam web
and bolt to the secondary beam web.
1. Open the Component Catalog dialog box (Ctrl+F or binocular icon) and find the Shear
plate simple (146) connection.
2. Single-click on its icon to activate the tool using the default values.
3. Pick the skewed beam between grid intersections C|5 and D|7 as the
main part of the connection.
4. Pick a filler beam along its length to be the secondary part and the
connection will be created.
5. Repeat to place remaining shear plate connections along the skewed
beam.
To quickly reactivate the connection command, click on the Create current connection
icon. This command uses the last applied connection settings.
Two Sided Clip Angle

We will now use the Two sided clip angle (143) along gridline D at the mezzanine level and
along grid line 6 where two secondary beams meet at a primary beam.
1. In the Component Catalog, find and select the Two sided clip angle
(143) connection.
2. Place the first connection at the D|4 gridline intersection, by selecting

the D|3-D|5 beam as the main part.
3. Then select the C|4-D|4 beam as a secondary part.
4. Next, select the D|4-E|4 beam as a secondary part.
5. Click the middle-mouse button to end the selection process and complete the connection.

7. Modify the connection, if desired, and Apply the new settings.
4-9
8. Reactivate the Two sided clip angle connection.
9. Create the remaining similar connections along grid lines D and E.
Clip Angle
A Clip angle (141) connection needs to be created at the offset beam near the grid intersection
of F|6 and at the beam midway between D|3 and D|4.
1. Open the Component Catalog.
2. Find and select the Clip angle (141) connection.
3. Select the E|6-F|6 beam as the main part.
4. Select the intersecting offset beam as the secondary part. The connection
is created.
5. Select the D|3-D|5 beam as the main part.
6. Select the filler beam between D|3 and D|4 as the secondary part.
Beam-to-Column Connections
Clip Angle
We will create Clip angle (141) connections at the beam-to-column
intersections of D|3, E|3, and F|6 on the mezzanine level.
2. Find and select the Clip angle (141) connection.
3. Select the D|3 column as the main part.
4. Select the intersecting D|3-D|5 beam as the
secondary part. The connection is created.
5. Select the D|3 column again as the main part.
6. Select the D|3-E|3 beam as the secondary part. The
connection is created.
7. Repeat steps 3 through 6 for the E|3 intersection.
8. Repeat once again for the F|6 intersection.
End Plate
We will create End plate (144) connections along gridlines 3 and 6 at the roof level.
1. Open the Component catalog.
2. Find and select the End plate (144) connection.
3. Select the C|3 column as the main part.
4. Select the intersecting C|3-F|3 rafter as the secondary part. The
connection is created.
6. Select the intersecting C|6-F|6 rafter as the secondary part. The connection is created.
7. Repeat steps 3 through 6 for the intersections at F|3 and F|6.
Two Sided End Plate

We will create Two sided end plate (142) connections to the beam-to-column-to-beam
intersections of C|3, F|3, C|6, and F|6.
2. Find and select the Two sided end plate (142) connection.
4. Select the intersecting C|2-C|3 HSS brace as a secondary part.
5. Select the intersecting C|3-C|4 HSS brace as a secondary part.
6. Click the middle mouse button, and the connection is created.
7. Interrupt the command to adjust the component settings.
8. Double-click the placed component to open the Two sided end plate (142) properties
dialog box.
9. In the Plates 1 and Plates 2 tabs change the end plate dimensions (t=1/2, b= 6”1/2, h =
1’-2”).
4-11
10. In the Haunch tab, turn off the haunch plates using the appropriate option image
selection.
11. In the Bolts tab, change the bolt spacing to 11” in the vertical for both sides of the
connection, the gage value to 4”, and the positioning of the bolt groups to Middle.
12. Click Modify.

13. Apply the properties, enter HSS8X4 in the Save As field and click Save as to store the
settings for future use. Click OK to apply the settings for the next created instances and
close the dialog box.
14. Reactivate the component by clicking in the
icon in the Component Catalog.
16. Select the intersecting C|5-C|6 HSS brace as a
secondary part.
17. Select the intersecting C|6-C|7 HSS brace as a
secondary part.
18. Click the middle-mouse button, and the connection is created.
19. Repeat steps 3 through 10 for the intersections at F|3 and F|6.
Bracing Connections
Bolted Gusset
We will use the Bolted Gusset (11) system component along gridline 6 for the horizontal
bracing at the roof level. We will also use a modified version of this connection at the top of
the Chevron Brace on gridline 3.
Roof Bracing
2. Find and select the Bolted Gusset (11) connection.
3. Select the C|6-F|6 rafter as the main part.
4. Select the first brace as a secondary part.
5. Select the adjacent brace as a secondary part.
6. Click the middle-mouse button, and the connection is created.

8. Double-click on the connection to open its properties dialog box.
9. Change the bolt spacing on the Brace bolts 1 and Brace bolts 2 tabs to 2.
10. Click Modify and OK.
11. Re-activate the connection command.

12. Create the remaining brace connections along the C|6-F|6 rafter.
4-13
Chevron Bracing
1. Double-click on one of the Bolted gusset (11) connections to open the component's
properties dialog box.
2. Load the pre-saved HSS_2_Middle_of_Beam settings.
3. Click OK.
4. Activate the Select objects in components select switch.
5. Click the Create current connection icon to

activate the connection command.
6. Select the D|3-E|3 mezzanine beam (elev. 42'-0")
as the main part.
7. Select the two HSS braces as secondary parts.
8. Click the middle mouse button and the connection
is created.
9. Repeat this process to create the connections for the two Chevron Braces along column
line 7.
Welded Gusset
We will use the Welded Gusset (10) connection with pre-saved settings at each base of the
Chevron Brace on gridline 3.
2. Find and Double-click on the Welded Gusset (10) connection.
3. Load the pre-saved HSS_Brace settings.
4. Select OK.
5. Select the D|3 column as the main part.
6. Select the HSS brace as the secondary part.
7. Click the middle-mouse button and the connection is created.
8. Select the E|3 column as the main part.
9. Select the HSS brace as the secondary part.
10. Click the middle mouse button and the connection is created.
11. Repeat this process to create the connections for the two Chevron Braces along column
line 7.
13. Activate the Select component select switch.
Joist-to-Beam Connections
Interior Joist Bearing
We will use the Joist to Beam, type 1 (160) component to create
connections for the joists bearing on beams along grid lines 3 and 6.
1. Open the TRUE ROOF PLAN view and the 3d view (View > View List...)
2. Use the Window > Tile Vertically menu option to arrange the two views side by side, and
zoom in both to where you can see the grid line 3 rafter.
3. Double-click on the Joist to Beam, type 1 (160) icon in the Component Catalog and
load the Not_Bolted attribute. Click Apply and add the component to one of the interior
joists along grid line 3 by selecting the rafter first and then the joist. Then right click >
Interrupt to stop the component application.
Note that the joist runs to the beam centerline; this needs to be adjusted for joists bearing end
to end.
4-15
4. If the component’s dialog box is open, select the component. If it is not, double-click on
the component to open it.
5. On the Picture tab, change the projection of the top chord to -1/2”, and click Modify.
6. Click OK to apply the properties and close the dialog box.

In order to easily apply this component to all of the joists that bear on column lines 2 and 3, we
will need to modify the view properties so that only rafters and joists are visible. This is
required because components do not use selection filters when picking the primary and
secondary members.
7. Double-click in the background of the TRUE ROOF PLAN view to open the View
Properties dialog box and then click on the Object Group button.
8. Enter RAFTER JOIST in the value field of the row that has Part > Name > Equals and
click Modify.
9. Reactivate the component and select the rafter on grid line 3.

10. In the TRUE ROOF PLAN view, drag a box from right to left, starting on the right side of
column line 3, around all of the joists that are bearing on that beam, and ending on the left
side of column line 3 near F line – this is a crossing selection.
All the joists crossed by the selection window now have the connections created.
11. Repeat this for the joists along grid lines 2 and 6.
With the view selected you can use the right-click > Redraw view option to clean up
the view according to the Display options.
Perimeter Joist Bearing

Next, apply the current component settings to the joist closest to grid D|1. These joists will
need to have the top chord extended in order to support the roof deck.
1. If the component dialog is open, select the component symbol (pyramid or cone). If it is
not, double-click on the symbol to open it.
2. Change the top chord extension to 6”, and click Modify.
4-17
The top chord is now extended beyond the beam centerline.
3. Click OK and create the component using this setting to all of the perimeter joists along
columns lines 1 and 7.
Intermediate panel points

To create conceptual joists with panel openings, use the Joist Panel Opening
tool. This tool works with conceptual (detailing) joists that have end connections
in place and is designed to create a drawing and collaboration friendly model.
4. Open the Component catalog (Ctrl+F).
1. Enable the Snap to Geometry Lines / Points (F5) button.
2. Double-click on the Joist Panel Opening component.
3. Enter 10 in Number of panels field.
4. Click OK.
5. Select the joist between column lines 1 & 2 that is closest to line C.
6. Select the near side of the cut in the joist web as the start point.
7. Select the near side of the cut in the joist web as the end point.
8. Select the connection symbol (the green pyramid).

9. Right click and select Copy Special > To Another Object.
10. Select this joist as the source object.

11. Select all of the joists between column lines 1&2, 2&3, and 6&7 as the destination objects.
4-19
12. Double-click in the background of the TRUE ROOF PLAN view, set the Object Group
back to standard, and click Modify.
If you know that you need to create the visual web openings for a collaborative model,
you can add the end connections and panel openings to one joist before copying.
Components will copy with a part even if the part is the only thing selected.
Check a Connection
To make it easier to check the connection you created, you can create views from different
sides of a selected connection. In the view, the work area is closely fitted around the
connection.
Create Connection Default Views

To create component basic views:
1. Select the connection symbol (the green cone).
2. Right-click and select Create View > Default Views of Component, and four basic views
(front, top, end and perspective) appear.
To remove extra information, such as fitting indicators, and part cuts, from a
view's display, double-click in the view, select Display from the dialog box, de-
select all the items under Visibility In components except for Parts, Bolts, and
Holes. Select Modify to update the view.
Check Clashing Of Steel Structures

Before creating connections, all of the members in the model usually collide with other
members. By using the Clash check tool, we can check which parts in the model collide. We
will run a clash check now.
Home › Instructions › Modeling Guide › Checking the model › Detecting clashes
Check Clashing
1. Activate the Select objects in components select switch.
2. Pick the parts to check by selecting an area in the model.
3. Right-click and select Clash check.
Tekla Structures displays the colliding parts in the Clash Check Manager dialog box. You can
see that many of the parts in the model collide. This is because we did not add components at
every connection in our model. Select any row from the list and Tekla Structures highlights the
parts in the model. Double-click on a row and the active view will be zoomed and fitted to the
clashing parts.
4-21
Drawings
Engineering

Copyright© 1992-2013 Tekla Corporation. All rights reserved.
This Software Manual has been developed for use with the referenced Software. Use of the Software, and use of this
Software Manual are governed by a License Agreement. Among other provisions, the License Agreement sets
certain warranties for the Software and this Manual, disclaims other warranties, limits recoverable damages, defines
permitted uses of the Software, and determines whether you are an authorized user of the Software. Please refer to
the License Agreement for important obligations and applicable limitations and restrictions on your rights.
In addition, this Software Manual is protected by copyright law and by international treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction, display, modification, or distribution of this Manual, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil
and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the full extent permitted by law.
Tekla, Xcity, Xengineer, Xpipe, Xpower, Xsteel, and Xstreet are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Tekla Corporation in the European Union, the United States, and/or other countries. Other product and company
names mentioned in this Manual are or may be trademarks of their respective owners. By referring to a third-party
product or brand, Tekla does not intend to suggest an affiliation with or endorsement by such third party and
disclaims any such affiliation or endorsement, except where otherwise expressly stated.
Elements of the software described in this Manual may be the subject of pending patent applications in the European
Union and/or other countries.
Contents
5 Drawings............................................................................................. 3
5.1 Drawing Basics......................................................................................................... 4
Drawings and Model Integration ............................................................................. 4
Modeling Details vs. Drawing Details .................................................................... 5
Drawing Workflow .................................................................................................... 6
General Arrangement (GA) Drawings..................................................................... 7
5.2 Drawing Properties .................................................................................................. 8
Setting Drawing Properties ...................................................................................... 8
Setting Drawing View Properties............................................................................. 9
5.3 Creating Construction Drawings ........................................................................... 10
Foundation Plan ..................................................................................................... 10
First Floor Framing Plan ........................................................................................ 12
Mezzanine Framing Plan ....................................................................................... 13
Frame Elevation Drawing ...................................................................................... 14
5.4 The Drawing List .................................................................................................... 16
Opening a Drawing ................................................................................................ 17
Closing a Drawing .................................................................................................. 17
Flagging a Drawing as Locked .............................................................................. 17
Flagging a Drawing as Issued ............................................................................... 18
Flagging a Drawing as Revised ............................................................................ 18
Engineering: Drawings
Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation 5-i
5-ii Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
5 Drawings
In this lesson
This lesson introduces the basics of creating construction drawings in Tekla Structures.
You will learn:
Drawing concepts
How to create and apply settings to plan drawings
About the Drawing List
How to create drawing objects
Basic revision control
5.1 Drawing Basics
The construction drawings created from Tekla Structures can display all the information
contained in the physical model database. The appearance of the information (parts, part
marks, tables of data) can be standardized based on the user's needs. The creation and updating
of changed drawings is automated based on the direct link between the physical model and the
drawings. To get this type of drawing automation to work effectively, it is important that the
modeler creates and names parts appropriately so that the pre-defined (or custom) drawing
standards work as expected (see the Model Discipline section in the Coordination Practices lesson).
Tekla has developed some out-of-the-box construction drawing standards using the modeling
attributes contained in the Engineering Role (previously discussed in the Model Discipline
lesson). These drawing settings are for the three main types of views on drawings: plan,
elevation, and section or detail. Engineering firms can use these settings as an example of what
can be accomplished using good model discipline and the corresponding drawing standards.
The ultimate goal is for the engineering firm to determine their own drawing standards which
can then be used with the automation tools to perform much of the initial setup of the project
drawings (border, font height, font style, line weights, etc.), just as the Tekla Engineering
Role settings do. Firms can even correlate their existing layering standards (names, colors, etc)
to their Tekla Structures standards. Engineering firms can greatly improve their drawing
productivity once these standards are established and fully implemented for their office.
You can find more information in Tekla User Assistance: Home > Instructions > Drawing
Guide > Introduction to Drawings.
Drawings and Model Integration

Tekla Structures stores all the important
project information in the model. Drawings
and other printouts such as reports, NC data
files, etc. are output produced directly from
the model.
The Model
The model contains all of the important project
information:
Part geometrical and structural
information
Part marking
Part properties
Bolts
Assembly information
User defined attributes
All of the modifications must be done directly in the model.
The Drawings
The drawings are current views of the members contained in the model with added definitions
for:
the sheet size to be used
the way titles and tables are placed on the sheets
what is dimensioned and how
which marks are displayed and how
and more
You can create drawings at any stage of a project.
Changes in the Model

Changes in the model members can cause out-of-date drawings. The following are examples of
changes that affect the drawings:
Changes in a part's profile or geometry
Adding or deleting parts
Moving parts
Tekla Structures automatically updates the related drawings to changes in the model.
Modeling Details vs. Drawing Details

When Tekla Structures is used to generate
construction drawings, it is most efficient to model
just enough to create accurate drawings. The
drawings in Tekla Structures can be thought of as
"views" rather than drawings. The actual "drawing"
should be minimal if the model is built appropriately.
Of course, lines and text can be added in the Tekla
Structures drawing mode, but a two-dimensional
approach does not capitalize upon the synchronization
between the model and the drawings. For example,
instead of drawing bent plate pour stops or slab
construction joints in the drawing mode, those parts
should be created in the 3D model. Using the system
components and user-defined custom components
can speed this process. The custom components can
be saved with specific settings which then become the
"typical details" for future projects. You can then add
those components to the model at the necessary
locations and cut drawing sections and details.
Drawing Workflow
The figure below illustrates the hierarchy in defining appearance rules within the Tekla
Structures drawings. Baseline rules (level 0) per drawing type can be overwritten on a view-
by-view (level 1) or part-by-part (level 2) level. It is important to note that the Main Drawing
Properties are used to initially set up the drawing and provide general overall settings. Once the
drawing is set up, it is recommended that you make modifications to the View or Part level
settings rather than the Drawing level settings. In the second image below, the buttons circled
in blue should only be used only in the Main Drawing Properties level of settings.
Established standards can be carried into the drawings at the View level (or Drawing level)
through the use of Detailed Object Level Settings, which are rule sets used to sort, or classify,
parts and part marks. The rule sets, or Detailed Object Level Settings, use defined selection sets,
or Filters, in conjunction with defined object settings. Detailed Object Level Settings provide an
automatic method for changing the appearance and content of various drawing objects, i.e.
Parts, Part Marks, Bolt Marks, etc. For example, you can set up all foundation drawings to show
footings as dashed lines and provide the footing size or other design information by default.
Furthermore, you can make an individual footing look solid. The key is to develop Detailed
Object Level Settings that will minimize the time needed to "clean-up" drawings.
Once the views are established on a drawing, they can be modified in three ways:
Modify parts and part marks one by one.
Make the appearance of all parts and the content of part marks the same.
Make the appearance of each part and its part mark unique using Detailed Object Level
Settings at the View (preferred by most) or Drawing (viable for some) Level.
The first two methods of modifying the view appearances will be covered in the Drawings 2
lesson. The important concept to note is that method one in combination with method two
can be a very effective way to generate engineering drawings without the need to set up
Detailed Object Level Settings. Using methods one and two can be a great first step in generating
engineering drawings from Tekla Structures. Once the basics are learned with that approach
the Detailed Object Level Settings can be created to further automate the drawing management
process. This customization of the Detailed Object Level Settings (method 3) is covered in the
Admin Module.
General Arrangement (GA) Drawings

In Tekla Structures, the drawing type which is most useful to engineering firms is the General
Arrangement (GA) drawing. GA drawings can contain several views, including the whole
model or any part of it. With the GA drawing type you can provide erection, foundation and
other plans, as well as details from views in the model.
You can create general arrangement drawings from one or several named model view(s) with
the following options:
Create one drawing for each selected view
Add all selected views to one drawing
Create an empty drawing
When empty drawings are created and opened in the Drawing Mode, you can add named
model views to them, move views from one drawing to another and even create additional
drawing views from existing drawing views.
You cannot modify the view angle of drawing views in Drawing Mode after the view has
been added to the drawing. Therefore, it is a good idea to check and modify the
appearance of model views in Model Mode before creating GA drawings from those
mode views. For example, check that the plan views are really 2D views, and rotate the
rendered 3D views to the orientation which you want them shown in the drawing view.
In the examples in this lesson, we will create general arrangement drawings from our
Eng_Model (created and modified in the previous lessons) by including several named model
views in the drawing.
For those using a Full or Detailing license, you do not need to number the model or
update numbering to create or open general arrangement drawings.
5.2 Drawing Properties

This section discusses how to set up a construction plan drawing using the provided drawing
settings and the model from the Basic Modeling 2 lesson. The out-of-the-box settings are based
on the premise of using the Detailed Object Level Settings at the drawing view level rather than
the drawing level. These allow the user to place plan views, elevation views or section views
(each with potentially different appearance settings) on the same drawing sheet. If your firm
does not place differing view types with differing appearance settings on the same drawing then
the Detailed Object Level Settings can be used at the drawing level quite effectively.
Setting Drawing Properties

Drawings are set up by loading one of the drawing level setting sets listed below or provided
by your Tekla Structures administrator.
Calcs – for letter size sheets with detailed views to aid with markup or calculations
Drawing_Setup – for general, large sized drawing sheets
Pile_Layout – for generating a plan view drawing of pile layout
Using the Drawing_setup to set up your first drawing is recommended because it does not
show part marks by default (and therefore will take less time to open). The other settings do
have some set appearances which the user can experiment with to see what initial drawings
might look like. At this drawing property level, the user will define the:
Name – Drawing Sheet Number
Title – Drawing Sheet Name
Layout – Inside the Layout sub-dialog box, the user can load other options for their
titleblock
The Layout Properties dialog box allows the user to save settings such as sheet size and
related title blocks and/or schedule templates that they want to include on a drawing.
Different layouts can be created for different architectural clients with different title block
borders. Foundation, column, and other schedule templates can also be referenced into a
layout setting (these are generally set up by an administrator).
The provided title block templates are generic templates supplied as examples and can
easily be superseded by placing templates with the same name in the model folder,
project folder, or firm folder.
Setting Drawing View Properties

With the initial drawing size and border set up, the views in the drawing can be modified,
using view settings, after the drawing is created. To apply the engineering Detailed Object Level
Settings to any type of plan drawing, the Plan setting is loaded and applied to the individual
views. Multiple rule sets are used in the Plan view setting which manage the appearance of the
objects and their attributes for most types of plan drawings (foundation plans, floor plans, roof
plans). The settings for both concrete and steel members are defined within this single plan
view Object Level Setting.
Elevations and section detail views should be modified with the Elevation and Section / Detail
view settings, respectively. Note that the Elevation view settings have only a few and the
Section / Detail view settings do not have any Detailed Object Level Settings in use. More can be
added, however, by the user or their Tekla Structures administrator.
5.3 Creating Construction Drawings
It is a good idea to go through the model views that you plan to use to create drawing views in
order to verify that they are displayed in the view orientation the way you want, i.e. they are
set to the plane view and not rotated.
1. Open the PLAN AT EL. 0”, PLAN AT EL. 23'-6, and PLAN AT EL. 42'-0” views.
2. Switch them each back to a planar orientation (Ctrl+P) as required. You may also wish to
reduce the work area by selecting the model, right-clicking, and selecting Fit Workarea to
Selected Parts > In All Views.
3. Check that the View Depth in the display properties is appropriate for each view.
Foundation Plan
First we will create a foundation plan for our model.
Create the Drawing

1. Select Drawings & Reports > Create General Arrangement Drawing…
2. In the dialog box select the plan view to be shown in drawing (PLAN AT EL. 0”).
3. Check the Open drawing check box.
4. Click Drawing properties…
5. In the General arrangement drawing properties dialog box, Load the Drawing_Setup
settings.
6. Name and Title – Add an appropriate name and title for the drawing.
7. Layout – Load the desired title block and tables setting.
8. Click OK in the General – Layout Properties dialog box.

9. Click OK in the General arrangement drawing properties dialog box.
10. Then click Create in the Create General Arrangement Drawing dialog box. A drawing
that contains a plan view of the model should appear; if not, use the Drawing List to open
the drawing.
Change the View Properties
1. Double-click on the view boundary (solid gray line) to open the View Properties dialog
box.
2. Load the pre-saved Plan settings.
3. Verify that the Size box is unchecked as we don't want the view extrema (dashed magenta
line) to change.
4. Select Modify and close the dialog box (Cancel or "x").
5. Adjust the view extrema as needed. If the extrema box is not showing select the view
boundary to select the view.
6. Close the drawing by selecting Close Drawing from the File menu or by clicking on the
red "x" in the upper right corner of the drawing window.
7. Select Yes at the prompt for keeping changes to the drawing. Leave the Create a
snapshot option selected if you want to generate a zoom-able image of the drawing’s
current state.
For more information see Tekla User Assistance: Home > Instructions > Drawing
Guide > Editing Drawings > Drawing Views > Modifying drawing views.
Note that if the elevation values after the "TFE" call out are empty it is because, by
default, the reference elevation for this view is the view itself. In other words, all the
foundation elements are at the elevation of the view cut. To define a datum for the view
level itself, go to the Attributes 2 tab in the View Properties dialog box and change the
Datum point for elevations to Specified. For example change the datum elevation to -
100'-0" which results in the foundation view datum being at 100'-0".
First Floor Framing Plan

The next drawing we will create is a framing plan for the first floor.
Create the Drawing
1. Open the Drawings & Reports > Create General Arrangement Drawing… dialog box.
2. Select the PLAN AT EL. 23’-6” view.
3. Check the Open drawing box.
4. Click the Drawing properties… button, in the dialog box.
5. Name and Title – Type in an appropriate name and title for the drawing.
6. Click OK.
7. Then in the Create General Arrangement Drawing dialog box select Create. A drawing
that contains a plan view should appear; if not, use the Drawing List to open the drawing.

1. Double-click on the view boundary to open the View Properties dialog box.
3. Verify that the Size box is unchecked as we don't want the view extrema to change.
5. Adjust the view extrema as needed.
6. Close and Save the drawing. Remember to save the model as well.
Detailed Object Level Settings for the hollow core slabs have not been created or linked
to the Plan view properties settings, so the general settings are used for the view.
Mezzanine Framing Plan

The last plan drawing we will create is for the mezzanine level.
Create the Drawing
1. Select Drawings & Reports > Create General Arrangement Drawing… to open the
dialog box.
2. Select the PLAN AT EL. 42’-0” view.
4. Click the Drawing properties… button, in the dialog box.
5. Name and Title – Type in an appropriate name and title for the drawing.
6. Click OK.
7. Then, in the Create General Arrangement Drawing dialog box select Create. A drawing
that contains a plan view should appear; if not, use the Drawing List to open the drawing.

1. Double-click on the view boundary to open the View Properties dialog box.
3. Verify that the Size box is unchecked as we don't want the view extrema to change.
5. Save the drawing.
Repeat the same process for each additional plan you generate.
Frame Elevation Drawing

The process for creating elevation drawings is very similar to the process used to create plan
drawings. We will create one as an example.
Create the Drawing
1. Verify that the views of ELEVATION ON GRID 3 and ELEVATION ON GRID 6 are planar.
2. Select Drawing & Reports > Create General Arrangement Drawing… to open the
dialog box.
3. Select the elevation views to be shown in the drawing (GRIDS 3 and 6).
4. Verify that the Options list is set to All selected views to one drawing.
6. Select Drawing properties…

7. In the dialog box, Load the Drawing_Setup settings or use the standard.
8. Name and Title – Type in an appropriate name and title. This information will be
referenced into the drawing border.
9. Scale – Go to the View properties dialog box and change the scale to the desired ratio.
Select Apply.
10. Layout – Load and Apply your border setting. One of two provided borders can be
loaded using the 24x36 or 30x42 presets.
11. Select OK in the General arrangement drawing properties dialog box.
12. Then select Create in the Create General Arrangement Drawing dialog box. A drawing
that contains elevation views should appear.

1. Double-click on a view boundary to open the drawing View Properties dialog box.
2. Load the Elevation settings.
3. Uncheck the Scale and verify that the Size box is unchecked as well.
4. Use the Ctrl key to select the second view.
5. Click Modify.
6. Adjust the view extrema, if needed.
7. Close and Save the drawing.
The bracing members have a partial profile representation and part mark callout that
includes the member size and axial force. These settings are unique to the Elevation view
setting loaded.
5.4 The Drawing List

We will briefly cover the Tekla Structures drawing list.
You can use the drawing list to:
Select and open your drawings for viewing and editing in the Drawing Mode
Update, clone and delete drawings
Update GA drawing labels
Display and filter drawings shown in the list
Choose drawings to select parts in the model, or show only the drawings of the
selected parts in the list (not available for GA drawings)
Lock, freeze and issue drawings
Add revisions to drawings
Modify properties of several drawings at a time
The drawing list also displays the creation and modification dates of the drawings, drawing
sizes, types, etc.
All of your existing drawings are shown in the drawing list. The status of drawings is
represented by flags, which are shown on the left hand side of the drawing list. You can sort
the order of the drawings by clicking the desired header line button in the drawing list. You
can adjust the column widths of the drawing list and Tekla Structures will keep the changes.
Use the buttons on the right hand side of the drawing list to change the status of a drawing.
Alternately, select the drawing in the list, right-click to open the pop-up menu and change the
drawing status.
For more information about drawing status flags, see Tekla User Assistance: Home ›
Instructions › Drawing Guide › Finding and opening drawings › Drawing status flags ›
How to read the drawing status information and Home > Instructions > Drawing Guide
> Finding and opening drawings > What is displayed in the Drawing List. This is accessed
through the Help > Tekla Structures Help menu selection or by pressing F1.
Opening a Drawing
You can only have one drawing open at a time. If you already have a drawing open, Tekla
Structures prompts you to save that drawing before opening the next one.
To open the drawing list and a drawing in Tekla Structures:
1. Select Drawing & Reports > Drawing List… from the menu or click the Open drawing
list icon on the Drawing tools toolbar.
2. In the drawing list select the previously created G [1] drawing.

3. Select Open, or double-click on the drawing to open it in Drawing Mode.
For more information see Tekla User Assistance: Home > Instructions > Drawing Guide >
Finding and opening drawings.
Closing a Drawing
To close the drawing in Drawing Mode:
1. Select Drawing File > Close (Back to Model) from the menu or click the "x" in the
upper right corner of the drawing window.
2. Tekla Structures asks if you want to save the changes when you have made changes to the
drawing. The save option will not appear it you have not made changes to the drawing.
3. Select Yes to keep the changes that you have made to the drawing, or close the drawing
without saving by clicking No.
Freezing – When the model changes, Tekla Structures will update the parts and
drawing objects in frozen drawings, but will not adjust any elements added manually,
such as extra marks or dimensions. For more information see Tekla User Assistance:
Home > Instructions > Drawing Guide > Working with drawings >
Freezing drawings.
Flagging a Drawing as Locked

Lock flags are added to selected drawings when the Lock button is clicked. This
functionality prevents GA and other drawings from accidental deletion.
To lock and unlock a GA drawing:
1. Select the G [1] drawing in the drawing list.
2. Select the Lock - On button and the Locked icon will appear.
3. Try to delete the drawing by selecting Delete.
4. Try to open the drawing by selecting Open.
5. Select the Lock - Off button to reset the lock.
6. Select Open. The drawing opens in the Drawing Mode.
You cannot open or delete a locked drawing without unlocking it.
Flagging a Drawing as Issued

Issue flags are added to the selected drawings when the issue button is clicked. The
flag appears automatically on issued GA drawings that have been modified or changed. To issue
a GA drawing:

2. Select the Issue - On button and the Issued icon will appear.
3. Open the drawing to view the GA drawing title block information.
4. Check that the issue date is shown correctly.
You can reset the Issued flag by toggling the status.
Flagging a Drawing as Revised

A revision mark value can also be tagged to the drawing along with description fields for a
revision block on the drawing.
2. Select the Revision… button and the Revision Handling dialog box will open.
3. Enter the desired Revision Mark and descriptive values in the provided fields.
4. Click Create; the mark is added to the drawing listing and the drawing count is increased
by one. The preset title block does not incorporate the revision data, but others may.
Multiple drawings can be flagged with the same revision data by selecting the drawings to
which the revision data applies and completing the process described above. If the
desired revision mark has already been created, select the drawing where it was created
in addition to the untagged drawings. The revision data will be available and you can
click Create to add the revision to the drawings.
Stairs and Handrails
Lesson

2013 Steel Basic Training
Contents
BT01Stairs and Handrails .......................................................................... 3

BT01.1 Create a Stair ..................................................................................... 4
Create the stair view..................................................................................... 4
Create the stair ............................................................................................. 6
Finishing the bottom of the stringers ......................................................... 11
Create Handrails on Stair ..................................................................................... 14
Create left side Guardrail ........................................................................... 15
Create left side Grab Rail........................................................................... 29
Create right side Guardrail ......................................................................... 37
Create right side Grab Rail ........................................................................ 41
BT01.2 Create Railing at landing and floor ................................................. 45
Create Handrail .......................................................................................... 45
BT01.3 Prepare the Assemblies for drawings ............................................. 58
BT01.4 Create Drawings .............................................................................. 64
Stair Drawing .............................................................................................. 64
Handrail Drawing ........................................................................................ 70
Change the Handrail BOM type ................................................................. 73
Steel: Stairs and Handrails

i
BT01 Stairs and Handrails
In this lesson we will introduce you to some basic miscellaneous modeling tasks that you need
to know when detailing projects with miscellaneous assemblies. We will use the model we
create in lesson 1 and add a stair and handrails to this model. Many of the basic modeling
functions that you learned in previous lessons will be used in this lesson. After the model is
completed we will create the necessary drawings for shop fabrication of these assemblies.
Model in a stair and handrails using several miscellaneous system components
Utilize various components to connect the stair and handrail
Utilize various modeling tools to complete the stair and handrail assemblies
Create a shop drawing of the stair
Create shop drawings of handrail assemblies

3
BT01.1 Create a Stair
In order to add a stair to our model we first must add two points; one at the bottom and one at
the top nosing points. Study the contract drawing to determine the locations of the nosing
points.
Create the stair view

1. Click on the open named view list icon.
2. This opens the Views dialog box shown below. Move the BLDG 1 PLAN AT EL. 12-
7"1/2 view into the Visible views side. Click OK.
3. From the View menu select View Properties…

4. Select and Load the Elevation View attribute and change the Name field to ELEVATION
ON STAIR A.
5. Click OK.
6. Activate the Create view using two points tool.

4 Copyright © 2013 Tekla Corporation
7. Hold CTRL and click at the intersection of grid lines A and 5 to set a reference for the
start point.
8. Aim along grid line 5 towards B and type a distance of 4’-0”, then Enter.
9. Aim to the right and snap perpendicular to grid line 6.
This will create a view at the center of the stair, for inserting it using the stair component.
Create the nosing points
We will now add the point that will mark the center of the top tread nosing by using the Point
Array tool.
1. Select Modeling > Add Points > On Plane... This opens the Point Array command
which will allow you to locate a point at a reference direction and distance from any other
point.
2. Select top of the beam on grid line 5 at El. 12’-7 1/2” – notice the Origin values change
as shown below.

5
3. In the Coordinates section of the Point array dialog box, type the values shown. Then
click Create, which adds the point seen above.
The Point Array tool adds points a defined distance away from a picked origin position in the
model view. We have created a reference for a top nosing point 5” off of grid line 5, 4” above
T.O.S.
4. Now go down to the 0” elevation and click at the intersection of 0” and grid line 6 as a
reference. Again, notice the Origin values change as shown below.
5. In the Coordinates section of the Point Array dialog box, type the values shown. Then
click Create, which adds the point seen above.
Now we have the top and bottom nosing points defined as required by the stair component.
Create the stair

1. Click the Find a component icon.
2. Enter 74 and click Search.

3. Double-click on the Z pan (S74) icon to open up its dialog box.
4. Load Stair_All from the drop-down list.
5. On the Picture tab, change the top and bottom framing conditions and enter the values
shown in the fields below.
6. Apply the properties and Save As BasicTrg_Stair_A.

7. Click OK to close the dialog box.
The picking and selection order for creating a stair is dependent on the
options you select here on the picture tab. If no beams are selected at the
top or bottom, then the picking order should not include those parts in the
model. You cannot change a stair from one type to another after it has been
created.
The bottom nosing option will affect whether or not a tread is created at the
bottom of the stair. Take note of the red point indicated in the dialog box
and whether it is at the nosing for a tread or at finished floor.
8. In the ELEVATION ON STAIR A view, click the lower point just off grid 6 and then the
upper point that we created for the top nosing point near column line 5.

7
9. Next click the top beam where the stair will connect.
10. Finally, middle-mouse-click to end the command and a new stair will be created in the
model.
Always pick the bottom (lower) point first and then the top (upper) point when
using any of the Stair components. Also remember to middle-mouse-click
when you are done picking the 2 points and members if they are being
considered.
Check stair dimensions

1. Check the stair tread and rise values. Using the Measure horizontal distance and
Measure vertical distance tools, add the dimensions shown below to the elevation view.
If everything has been done correctly, the values should come out to 6-3/4” and 11"
Looking at the top of the stairs, you will notice that top fill plate is too long.

1. Make sure Select Components is pressed down.
2. Double-click on any part of the stairs to open up the Z Pan (S74) dialog box.
3. On the Z pan tab enter the values in the fields shown below.
4. Apply the properties and re-save the BasicTrg_Stair_A attribute.
5. Click Modify.
From the image you can see that we are adjusting the distance from the top nosing point to the
back edge of the plate on the beam, and the distance from the bottom nosing point to the
bottom of the plate to the finished floor.
Notice that there is a field for pan thickness and a UDA field for gage. The gage UDA reflects
on reports and drawings, but does not change the physical thickness of the tread. You MUST
change the other field shown below to be the thickness of the gage material. You do not need
to figure what the 128th equivalent is for the gage material. Simply enter in the decimal
thickness and Tekla Structures will convert it to a 128th increment.
After making these changes to the stair, the top fill plate should look like the next image.

9
At the bottom of the stair, the plate will now come down to the finished floor at El. 0’-0”.
Before we added this stair to the model, we loaded the Stair_All setting. That saved attribute
has all of the welds saved as shop welds. If you want to change the assembly, click on the
Welds button and modify the appropriate welds to site welds.

Due to the complex nature of stairs, not all stairs can be created 100% with the
system components. Use the system Stair components to get as much as you can
and then model in the rest.
Finishing the bottom of the stringers

We will now create the bases for the stringers using regular system components. First we
must change the selection switch from Select Components to Select Objects in
Components.
This way we can select individual stringers instead of the overall stair. Otherwise, the system
component we add for the base plate will not know to which member to add the connection.
Also make sure you have Snap to geometry lines/points selected, or you will not be able to
snap to the edges of your stair pans.
1. Double-click Stairs base detail (1043) from the Component catalog. The Stair base
detail (1043) component dialog box opens.
2. Select the Base_Condition_Left settings from the drop-down list and click Load.
Note the small red X and dimensions on the picture tab. The X indicates the point that the
component is expecting us to pick when we actually apply this to a stringer. The dimensions
are the resulting locations/shape from that point. The picked location should be the corner of
the bottom nosing so everything is placed from that point.
3. Make sure the value shown in the next image matches the rise for our bottom nosing – 6-
3/4”.

11
The 1/2" dimension provides clearance from the bottom of the stringer to the finished floor.
4. Click Apply.
To make it easier to see which stringer we are working with, type the ‘V’ key to
relocate the point of rotation and click towards the bottom of your stair. Then
you can rotate your elevation view to look at it from other angles.
5. Pick the left stringer and then the snap point at the bottom tread nosing point as shown.
This cuts the stringer as shown and adds a base angle.

6. With the command still active, load the Base_Condition_Right setting, click Apply, then
modify the right side stringer.

8. Select the stringer and right-click > Inquire > Assembly to see if all intended pieces are
shop attached to the stairs.
This reveals that the bottom riser is not part of the assembly so there is access to the base
angles in the field.

13
Create Handrails on Stair
To create the required handrail system, we will learn to use several system components; S76,
S77, 88, 89, and 90.
So that we can better measure and work on the handrail bends, we will create two model
views, one at each stringer. We will also use these views to ensure that the handrails are on
the center of the stringers.
Create views
1. In the PLAN AT EL. 12’-7”1/2 view, zoom in to the top of the stair.
2. Go to the View > View Properties menu and select Elevation from the drop down menu,
and click Load.
3. Make the changes shown above and click Apply.

4. Using the Create view using two points command, select the mid-point at the end of the
stringer for the first point and then a perpendicular snap at the edge of the beam flange.
5. Go back to the still-open View Properties dialog box, and change the name to Left
Stringer Elev, and click OK.

Use the Create view using two points command again to create the left side stringer view.
6. In the PLAN AT EL. 12’-7”1/2 view, pick the mid-point at the end of the stringer just to
the right of grid 5 for the first point, and then the perpendicular at grid line 5 for the
second point. Right-click > Interrupt.
Create left side Guardrail

Create stanchions
1. Open the Component catalog and search for component S76.

15
2. Double-click on the Stanchions (S76) icon to open the dialog box.
3. Select the Posts_Up_Stringer settings and click Load.

4. We need to change the fields shown above to affect the number of stanchions, and work
point to first and last post distances.
Stanchion height 3’-6”.
3” from start and end points.
4’-0” maximum spacing.
The ‘Use selected’ option under the stair parts selection allows you to pick
multiple objects including landing beams to continue the posts on. This allows
you to include objects that were created manually as well as parts that are
included in a larger component.
The other option, ‘use all’ will group parts that were in the same component –
which may work in some cases but in others may cause problems.

Note the 1” dimension for the nosing line to the top of the stringer – this is taken into account
when determining the length of the post to achieve the desired height of the top rail. This will
not be read from the stair automatically, but must be set to match the current stair in the
model.
5. Click Apply and Save these settings as BasicTrg_StairA.
The red X’s shown on the Picture tab of the Stanchions (S76) dialog box
indicate the beginning and end of the run of posts that will be created. The first
and last posts will be created in relation to these picked locations.
6. At the prompt to Pick first position, in the Left Stringer Elev. view, pick the outside
edge of the closure plate at the end of the stringer.

17
7. At the prompt to Pick second position, pick the edge of the horizontal closure plate on
the top end stringer, on the grid line.
8. At the prompt to Pick objects, click on the stringer, and then the horizontal closure plate.
9. Finish with a middle-mouse-click to finish the command.
It is necessary to choose the horizontal plate, because the last post will be
created beyond the end of the channel flange and will be supported by it. If you
did not choose the plate here, the component would not be created successfully.

Check dimensions
Take a moment to check the dimensions of the posts that were created. The top rail created by
the handrail component we will use soon is located by the top of these posts.
1. Activate the Add construction line tool.
2. Under one of the posts in the middle of the stringer, create a construction line from one
nosing to the next.

19
3. Activate the Measure vertical distance tool.
4. Click on the top of the post above the construction line you created.
5. Activate the Snap to extension lines icon.
6. Aim down and snap to the intersection where the centerline of the post would meet the
construction line, and click.
7. Click to place the dimension to the left. Verify it is 3’-6” from the top of the post to the
nosing line.
8. Turn off Snap to extension lines.
Next measure the post at the top of the stringer that is bearing on the horizontal closure plate.
9. Use Measure vertical distance to check from the top of the post down to the top nosing.

Because the post is on top of the closure plate, it sits 1/4" too high from the nosing/finished
floor level.
Modify Stanchions
1. Press down the Select Components icon.
2. Double-click on one of the posts to open up the S76 dialog box.

3. Change the below value to 1/4" to account for the plate thickness that the post is bearing
on.

21
4. Click Modify.
5. Apply the properties and re-save these settings as BasicTrg_StairA.

6. Next open the Component catalog and search for component S77.
7. Double-Click on the Railings (S77) icon to open the dialog box.

8. Select and Load the PicketRails_Up_Stringer_wBottomreturn setting.
9. On the Picture tab, make the following changes below and shown in the next image.
Distance from top rail to bottom rail – 3’-0”

10. On the Vertical Rails tab make the changes shown below.
Picket spacing to Equal.
11. Click Apply to set these properties.

12. Starting from the bottom, Pick each post in succession until you reach the top, and then
middle-mouse click to finish and create the guard rail.

23
Modify Return Bend Lengths
Next we will modify the return at the bottom of the rail.
Bottom of Rail
The guard rail and the grab rail will end 1’-11” from the bottom nosing. However, the
component works from the last post.
1. Use Measure horizontal distance to find the dimension from the nosing to the first post.
It should measure as 3/4".

2. Highlight the railing with Select components pressed down, and change the fields
below:
Dimension of 1’-11-3/4” from the center of the post to the end of the return.
Dimension of 1’-6” from the top rail to the bottom of return.

3. Click Modify. The result will look like the next image.
Make sure that the dimension to the top rail from the 0’-0” elevation is correct.
4. Use Measure vertical dimension to check the dimension from 0’-0” to the center of the
top rail.

25
It should measure 3’-5-15/16” from the floor. The dimension should be 3’-6”, and in this
situation it may be close enough, in others you may need to adjust the height to meet
specifications.
5. Right-click in the view and select Redraw to remove the dimension.
6. Click the Add construction line icon to activate the command.
7. Hold Ctrl and click on the 0’-0” grid line to set a reference.
8. Type the letter O if necessary to turn on Ortho tracking and aim up in the Z direction.
9. Track to 3’-6” and click, or type 3’-6 and Enter to start the construction line.

10. Click again directly to the side to create a horizontal construction line. This is where we
want the rail to be.
11. Create another construction line using the end points snap along the center of the sloping
section of rail.
12. Use Measure horizontal distance to check from the center of the vertical part of the
return, back to the intersection created by the construction lines.
This is where the bend needs to begin in order to set the return height.
13. Make sure Select Components is pressed down, and highlight the rail component.
14. In the S77 dialog box, change the value shown in the next image to 1’-0” to change where
the bend occurs.

27
15. Delete the construction lines and re-check the dimensions to the rail.
16. Save the railing settings by clicking Apply, then typing BasicTrg_Rail in the save as
field and clicking Save as.
Finish top rail at top post
Zoom back in to where the top rail meets the top post. You can see that the component did not
create a clean corner where they meet. We will use Fit part end cuts to miter the corners.
1. Switch to Select objects in components.

2. Activate the Fit part end command.
3. Select the top rail, and then pick two points at a 45-degree angle to miter the end.
4. Repeat the Fit part end for the post.
The Fit part end command extends as well as trims the part.
Create left side Grab Rail

1. In the S77 dialog box, Load the Grab_Rail settings.
2. On the Picture tab, change the selection option to Use selected.
3. On the Middle Rails tab, change the profile to PIPE1STD.
4. Click Apply.
5. Starting from the bottom, Pick each post in succession until you reach the top, and then
middle-mouse click to finish and create the grab rail.

29
Adjust properties of grab rail
Earlier we added a construction line across the nosing points so we could measure the post
height, now we can use that as a reference to measure the grab rail height.
1. Use Measure vertical distance to measure from the grab rail at the post to the
construction line. Use Snap to extension lines to make it easier.
2. Also measure from the top of the post to the grab rail.
It currently is located 2’-6” from the nosing line, and 1’-0” down from the top of the post. We
will adjust it so the grab rail is 2’-10” from the nosing.

3. On the Middle Rails tab, there is a setting for how many rails to create, and where in
relation to the top rail. Change this to 8”, and click Modify.
4. Re-check the dimensions to verify 2’-10” from the nosing line.
We want the grab rail to extend 1’-0” from the nosing at the top and 1’-11” at the bottom.
First adjust the top. As before, S77 references the posts, so in order to get that dimension we
have to find where the last post is in relation to the last tread.
5. Use Measure horizontal distance to check the dimension from the nosing to the last post.

31
6. In the S77 dialog box, on the Middle Rails tab, enter 10” as shown below to extend the
end of the grab rail at the top of the stair.
Take note that the drop-down option is set to extend from the center of the last post.
7. Click Modify.

If you want the grab rail to be rolled instead of mitered, change the bend option
on the Middle Rails tab.
At the bottom we need to lay out where the bend should stop and the grab rail become flat
with the finished floor.
8. Click the Add construction line icon to activate the command.
9. Hold Ctrl and click on the 0’-0” grid line to set a reference.
10. Type the letter O if necessary to turn on Ortho tracking and aim up in the Z direction.
11. Track to 2’-10” and click, or type 2’-10 and Enter to start the construction line.
12. Create a second construction line along the center of the sloping grab rail.
13. Use Measure horizontal distance to check the dimension from the post to the
construction line intersection, and the intersection to the return as shown in the next
image.
14. On the Middle Rail tab in the S77 dialog box, change the drop-down option for the rail
extension to include both the bend and the flat section.
15. Enter the dimensions you took from the model in the fields shown in the next image.

33
16. Click Modify.
17. Apply and Save these settings as BasicTrg_Grab_Rail.

Finish ends of grab rail
Finally we will finish the ends of the grab rail, returning it to the guard rail return at the low
end, and placing a cap on the high end.
1. At the low end of the grab rail, switch to Select objects in components and double-
click on the rail to open the Beam Properties dialog box.

2. Click OK to apply those properties for the next beam object we will create and close the
dialog box.
3. Click Create beam.
4. Click at the end of the grab rail to place the first point of the return. Because this view is
located at the same plane as the center of the guard rail, the first point is actually there.
To connect to the grab rail we can use relative snap.

5. Type the letter R to activate the relative snap.
6. Enter the values 0,3,0 (0” in the X, 3” in the Y, and 0” in the Z) and type Enter.

35
7. Open the 3d view and zoom in to this location.
8. In the Component Catalog, select the drop-down for search results and choose Stairs
and Railings.
9. Find the Railing_Mitre component and single-click on the thumbnail to activate it.
10. Click on the newly created short pipe section, and then the end of the grab rail.

11. Next zoom to the top of the grab rail.
12. In the Component Catalog, find the Rail end caps component and single-click on the
thumbnail.
13. Click on the rail, and then the end point to place the cap.
Create right side Guardrail

1. Open the Right Stringer Elev view.
2. In the Component Catalog, find and double-click on the Stanchions (S76) component
to open the dialog box.
3. Select the BasicTrg_StairA setting and click Load, then Apply.
4. At the prompt to Pick first position, pick the outside edge of the closure plate at the end
of the stringer.

37
5. At the prompt to Pick second position, pick the edge of the horizontal closure plate on
the top end stringer, on the grid line.
6. At the prompt to Pick objects, click on the stringer, and then the horizontal closure plate.
Finish with a middle-mouse click.

We will create a railing that goes up the stringer, then turns a 180-degree corner and wraps
around the stair opening. To do this, we need to adjust the location of the top post, since the
next post for the handrail will be bearing on the beam flange and they should line up.
The post is currently 3” from the grid line.
7. Switch to Select components and highlight the stanchion component.

8. Change the dimension for the distance to the last post to 1-3/4” as shown in the next
image.
9. Click Modify.

39
10. Click Apply and Save these settings as BasicTrg_StairA_Right.
11. Open the Railings (S77) dialog box.
12. Load the BasicTrg_Rail setting and click Apply.
13. Working from the bottom, pick each post in succession until they are all selected and then
middle-mouse click.

Create right side Grab Rail
1. Select and Load the BasicTrg_Grab_Rail setting in the S77 dialog box. Click Apply.
2. If necessary, single-click on the thumbnail in the Component Catalog to activate the
component, and working from the bottom, pick each post in succession until they are all
selected and then middle-mouse click.
This creates the grab rail, but it is on the wrong side of the guard rail – the outside of the stair.
3. With Select components pressed down, highlight the newly created grab rail.
4. On the Picture tab, change the offset dimension for the middle rail to 3”, and click
Modify.
The grab rail is now on the correct side, but the brackets are not oriented correctly.

41
On the Middle Rails tab, in the bottom right there is a setting that calls in the component that
creates the bracket. There are saved attributes for this bracket to adjust its orientation.
5. Click on the button at the end of the Attribute file field.
6. In the Attribute File List dialog, choose the Post-Right_Side option and click OK.
7. Click Modify in the S77 dialog box.

At the bottom of the right side grab rail create a return to the vertical part of the guard rail
return.
8. Switch to Select objects in components and double-click on the last section of grab rail
to open the Beam Properties dialog box.
9. Click OK to set these properties.
10. Click Create beam.

11. Pick at the end of the grab rail – again, since the view is actually at the center of the
guard rail, this is where the start point will be.
12. Type the letter R to activate the relative snap, and type 0,-3,0 (0” in the X, -3” in the Y,
0” in the Z) and then Enter.

43
13. In the Component Catalog, single-click on the Railing_Mitre component.
14. Pick on the newly created pipe section, and then the existing grab rail.

The grab rail will be wrapping around and continuing along the landing, so there is no need
for the top end to project so far past the post.
15. Switch to Select Components, and double-click on the grab rail to open the S77 dialog
box.
16. On the Middle Rails tab, change the extension value past the last post to 0”, and click
Modify.
17. Click Apply and Save these settings as BasicTrg_Grab_Rail_Right.
BT01.2 Create Railing at landing and floor

Now we will begin adding the horizontal railing along the beam 7’-0” North of grid line A.
We will add this set of posts by working in the PLAN AT EL. 12'-7”1/2 view.
Create Handrail
1. Double-click the Stanchion (S76) component from the Component catalog and Load
the Posts_Offset_Connx2flange setting.
2. On the Picture tab, make the following changes:
Distance to first post from point is 1-3/4”.
6’-0” maximum post spacing.

45
Distance to last post from point is 2”.
Offset the post group 1-1/2” to the right of the handles.
Height of post from finished floor of 3’-6”.
Floor thickness of 4”.
3. Click Apply and Save As BasicTrg_Landing.

4. Now use the Endpoint snap to make sure you click the ends of the beam as shown in the
next image.

5. Once the End Points 1 and 2 have been clicked, select the supporting beams 3, 4, and 5,
then middle-mouse-click. This adds the stanchions as shown on the next page. Notice it
added stanchions based on the spacing we indicating in the dialog box.
6. Now add the stanchions around the corner of the landing. Make the changes as shown
below to Stanchions (S76).
7. Go to the Parts tab and eliminate the first post by entering 0” in the First Stanchion
profile field.
8. Click Apply and Save As BasicTrg_Landing_Return.

9. Pick the first point at the intersection of the beams we finished on for the last run of
stanchions, then the face of the column at A/6 for the second point. Finish by selecting
the beam on 6 line, then middle-mouse-click.

47
The distance from the post to the column face is a critical dimension we need to hold, even if
the column size changes. We can bind the component to the column face so if it gets larger or
smaller, the last post will always remain 4” away.
10. Press Ctrl+4 to change the parts in the view to solid rendering.
11. With Select components pressed down, highlight the last stanchion group so the start
and end handles are visible.
12. Hold down the Alt key and drag a box from left to right around the end (magenta) handle.
13. Right-click and select Bind to plane.

14. Hover over the face of the column so the plane is visible, and click.

This will create a small dimension to indicate the 0” distance binding from the handle to the
face. This will remain 0” even if the column size changes.
If the column size changes, the Stanchions (S76) component will automatically
adjust the spacing of the posts, but the Railings (S77) component will not
automatically adjust. In order to get the rail to adjust to the new post spacing, all
you have to do is double click on the rail to open the component properties and
then click Modify.
Guard Rail
1. Double-click the Railing (S77) component from the Component catalog to open it.
2. Select and Load the BasicTrg_Rail properties, and make the following changes:
Left side return to open ended top and bottom rail.
Dimension of 0” past the first post.
Remove dimension to bend that is no longer there.

49
3. Click Apply and Save As BasicTrg_Rail_Landing.
4. Switch to Select objects in components.
5. Select the stanchions at the landing, first the top post of the stair handrail, then the first
post of the run along the stair opening, then middle mouse click to create the first
section of horizontal rail.
6. Repeat the command for the landing sections of straight rail.
The handrail cannot be applied around a corner as one large section. Apply it in
straight sections and then join them together later.

Grab Rail
1. Select and Load the BasicTrg_Grab_Rail_Right settings.
2. On the Middle Rails tab, change the drop-down setting on the left side to end in a straight
rail, and change the extension past the post dimension to 0”.
3. Click Apply and Save As BasicTrg_Grab_Rail_Landing.

4. With Select objects in components pressed down, apply the grab rail in the same
fashion as the guard rail around the stair opening – each straight section separately.
5. Switch to Select components and highlight the last section of grab rail on grid line 6.
6. On the right side of the dialog (meaning the last post clicked in the model) change the
extension dimension to 1-1/2” and click Modify.

51
Notice how this adds a separate piece of grab rail that is only 1-1/2" long.
7. With Select components pressed down, double click on the grab rail to open the
component properties dialog box.
8. Go to the Parameters tab, change the Middle rail cuts to At max length and click
Modify.
Add end cap

1. In the Stairs and Railings search group in the Component Catalog, activate the Rail
end caps component.
2. With Select objects in components pressed down, select the end piece of the grab rail
near the column at A/6.
3. Click the endpoint of the grab rail to create the end cap.

Create Corner Elbows
1. Double-click the Railing beam to plane (89) component from the Component catalog
to open the properties dialog box.
2. Load the Corner_Bend (Top) attribute and click OK to apply the properties and close the
dialog box.
Select the end post first and then the horizontal rail. The far right corner of the handrail
system should look like the image below.

53
Create elbows on grab rail
1. Double-click the Railing plane to plane (90) component from the Component catalog
to open the properties dialog box.
2. Load the Corner_Bend (Top) attribute and click OK to apply the properties and close the
dialog box.
3. Pick one side of the grab rail and then the other. If the component fails to go in, try
picking in the reverse order.
The result should look like the next image.
4. Repeat at the corners of the grab rail where the stair meets the landing.
Top rail at posts

1. Zoom in to the top of the post at grid line 6, where the railings form a corner.
2. Double-click on the Rail Fitting-Side Outlet Elbow component under the Stairs and
Railings search group to open the dialog box.

Take note of the picking order in the lower left image on the Picture tab of the
dialog box. Also note that this component allows you to create this corner part
as a Bought Out Item – something ordered out of a catalog rather than
fabricated with the rest of the handrail.
3. Bought Out Item should be set to yes, so enter a catalog number in the next field:
SOE150.
4. Click Apply, and then pick the parts carefully noting the order from the dialog box.
Middle-mouse click to finish.
5. Repeat at the end of the run near the top of the stair, as shown in the next image.

55
6. Repeat again at the top of the stair handrail.
The Polybeam bend of the top rail is too close to the post and the component gets created at
the wrong location.
You can see that the fitting is created as if the railing continued up at the same slope.
7. Select the component and right-click > Explode component.
8. Open the Right Stringer Elev view and zoom to the top of the stair.
9. Delete the fitting that is cutting the post on an angle.

10. Activate the Snap to geometry lines / points (F5) button.
11. Select the side out elbow > Right-Click > Move Special > Linear.
12. Pick a point on the top of the side out elbow and then a point on the top of the hand rail.
13. Uncheck the dx and dy coordinates to move the elbow in only the Z direction and click
Move.
14. Use Fit part end to cut the post at the bottom of the side out elbow.

57
BT01.3 Prepare the Assemblies for drawings
1. Select the Select Assemblies selection switch.
2. Move your mouse over the right side handrail and notice that the entire rail system
highlights.

This means that if we were to produce an assembly drawing of this item, everything would be
shown on the drawing and the result would be difficult to read, fabricate, or ship to the field.
To avoid this we will separate this assembly into 3 smaller assemblies by modifying the welds
that join the assemblies at the locations where we want to split the assemblies.
1. Zoom in to the rail fitting component at the top of the guard rail where they form a corner
on grid line 6.
2. Switch to Select components and double-click on the Rail Fitting – Side Outlet Elbow
in the model.
3. On the Welds tab, change the #3 weld to a Site (flag) weld, and click Modify.

59
This is the weld between the corner fitting and the top rail, but the welds still exist in the
model between the top rail and the post. We do not have that level of control over the
individual welds in the S77 component so we will just delete them.
Here you have a choice to keep the rail as an intact component or exploding it
because we are manually modifying the welds.
If you keep it intact, it retains the intelligence and ability to update. If it ever
does update, then the manually edited welds will revert back to how they were
when the rail component was originally created.
If you explode it, you don’t have to worry about the welds changing back, but
then the component loses the ability to update to any changes made.
4. Make welds visible in the model view by double-clicking in the view background to
bring up the View Properties dialog box, and then click Display.
5. Make sure that both boxes under Welds are checked, then click Modify.
You can see two welds show up in the vicinity of where the top rail would meet the post.
6. Switch to Select objects in components and select one of the welds and right-click >
Inquire.
If the top rail and post highlight, then right-click > Delete. Make sure you get both welds.
Moving below that component, the elbow bend we created on the grab rail at the corner also
does not have control for individual welds.

7. Select one of the welds between the grab rail along grid line 6 and the elbow.
8. Right-click > Inquire on the weld.
The rail sections will illuminate to show the parts that this particular weld is joining together.
9. Double-click on the weld symbol.

10. In the Weld Properties dialog box, change the Workshop/Site drop down to select Site
(flag) weld. Click Modify.
This will be necessary at the grab rail for the weld between it and the elbow, and also between
it and the bracket on the corner post (see next image).

61
The component has not created a weld at the bottom rail directly between it and the post, so
there is nothing that needs to be done there in this instance.
11. When you switch back to Select assemblies, you should see just the short section of
landing handrail highlighted as shown in the next image.
Repeat these steps for the other end of the landing railing near the top of the stair.
12. Switch to Select components and double-click on the Rail Fitting – Side Outlet Elbow
in the model.
13. On the Welds tab, change the #2 weld to a Site (flag) weld, and click Modify.
14. Select the 2 welds at the bottom of the side out elbow that attached the post to the rail and
modify them to be site welds.

Make sure to inquire on any weld before making a change to verify the objects being attached
by it.
When finished use Select assemblies to verify 3 separate rail sections on that side.

63
BT01.4 Create Drawings
Stair Drawing
Next we will create an Assembly drawing of the Stairs. First we must get our numbering up
to date.
1. Use what you learned in earlier lessons to load and apply the settings for after creating
drawings and then run a modified numbering.
2. From the Drawings & Reports menu, go to Create Drawings.
3. In the model, press down on Select objects in components and then highlight one of
the stair stringers.

4. In the Master Drawing Catalog, select Stairs_with_BOM (A) and click Create
drawings.
This will create an Assembly drawing of the Stairs, which has been added to our Drawing
List.
5. Click the Drawing list icon to open it.
6. Double-click on the Stair Drawing to open it.
First, we may want to change the scale of the drawing, if we want to add an opposite view for
the other stringer.
7. Double-click in the drawing background to bring up the properties dialog box, click
View.
8. On the following Assembly – view properties dialog box, go to the Attributes tab and
change the scale to 1:16.

65
9. Go to the Shortening tab and set Cut Parts to No.
10. Click Modify.

Edit how the drawing appears
1. Double-click on the view border to open up the View properties dialog box. Change both
the Depth down and Depth up fields to 4” as shown and click Modify.
2. Click OK.
Create section view
3. Click the Create section view icon.

4. In the top view on the drawing, select two points along the heel of the left (bottom)
stringer to define a section view plane.

5. Next select a point to define the corner of the section view we are about to create.
6. Then select a point define the other corner of the section view, on the other end of the
stringer.
7. Finally, pick the insertion point for the section view.
This adds the newly created section view to the drawing.

67
8. Notice that the section view came in upside down since it was cut from the top view.
Select the view border, right-click, and then select Rotate view.
9. In the Angle field type 180 and click Rotate.

10. Double click on the view border of Section A-A to open the View Properties dialog box.
11. Modify the view label as shown in the next image by going to the Label tab, then
clicking on the button at the end of the A1 text field. Highlight the elements in the mark,
then change the height to 1/4" and click Modify.
12. Apply the Mark contents properties and Save as BasicTrg_Name.

13. Apply the View Properties and Save as BasicTrg_Stair_Section.
14. Double Click on the main view to open the View Properties dialog box.
15. Load the BasicTrg_Stair_Section attribute.
16. Go to the Label tab and type B – B in the A1 field and click Modify.
17. Select the view border of Section A-A > Right Click > Align Horizontally.
18. Select the bottom of the stringer in Section A–A to establish the base point.

69
19. Pick the bottom of the stringer in the main view (B–B) to establish the point to align with.
20. Go to the Annotating menu and select the Add section mark command.
21. Along the heel of the right (top) stringer add the section symbol, picking from left to
right.
22. Double-click on one of the new section symbols to open the Section symbol properties
dialog and change the Section Name to B.
23. Click Modify.
24. Finish cleaning up the stair drawing by adding, deleting, and moving any and all
necessary dimensions required for your shop.
25. Once finished, close and save the stair drawing.
Handrail Drawing
1. Repeat the steps to create a drawing for one of the handrails. However, this time use the
setting Handrail_with_BOM (A) from the Master Drawing Catalog list. An example of a
handrail drawing should look like this.

The default setting for handrails is to list Total Length in the drawings BOM.
If this is desired then all part marks need to be removed from the drawings. If not, skip down
to the section about changing this BOM in the Project Setup.
1. Double-click in the drawings background. Then click the Part mark… button.
2. In the Main part section, remove the <<Part position>> element.

71
3. In the Secondary part section, remove the <<Part position>> element.
4. Apply the properties and Save As MainPart_Assembly_Position.
5. Click Modify.
The reason that the part mark for the side out elbow is still visible is
because it is a Bought Out Item. The Handrail_with_BOM drawing
has an Object Level Setting that controls that part mark.

6. Click OK to close the Assembly – Part Mark Properties window.
7. Apply the Assembly Drawing properties and Save As BasicTrg_Handrail_with_BOM.
8. Finish cleaning up the handrail drawing by adding, deleting, and moving any and all
necessary dimensions required for your shop. Remember the 3 levels of editing drawings.
9. Once finished, close and save the handrail drawing.
Change the Handrail BOM type

1. From the File menu, select the Project Properties… option. Then click the User-defined
attributes… button to open up the dialog box shown here.
2. On the More Drawing Switches tab, change the option shown above to No and click
Modify. Click OK.

73
3. Now when you re-open the handrail drawing, the BOM lists each individual part as
shown here.

Tekla Structures
Detailing Guide
Product version 17.0

December 2010
© 2010 Tekla Corporation

© 2010 Tekla Corporation and its licensors. All rights reserved.
Software Manual are governed by a License Agreement. Among other provisions, the License Agreement sets certain
warranties for the Software and this Manual, disclaims other warranties, limits recoverable damages, defines
permitted uses of the Software, and determines whether you are an authorized user of the Software. All information
set forth in this manual is provided with the warranty set forth in the License Agreement. Please refer to the License
Agreement for important obligations and applicable limitations and restrictions on your rights. Tekla does not
guarantee that the text is free of technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Tekla reserves the right to make
changes and additions to this manual due to changes in the software or otherwise.
reproduction, display, modification, or distribution of this Manual, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and
criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the full extent permitted by law.
Tekla, Tekla Structures, Xcity, Xengineer, Xpipe, Xroad, Xpower, Xsteel, and Xstreet are either registered trademarks
or trademarks of Tekla Corporation in the European Union, the United States, and/or other countries. Other product
and company names mentioned in this Manual are or may be trademarks of their respective owners. By referring to a
third-party product or brand, Tekla does not intend to suggest an affiliation with or endorsement by such third party
and disclaims any such affiliation or endorsement, except where otherwise expressly stated.
Portions of this software:
D-Cubed 2D DCM © 2008 Siemens Industry Software Limited. All rights reserved.
EPM toolkit © 1995-2004 EPM Technology a.s., Oslo, Norway. All rights reserved.
XML parser © 1999 The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved.
Project Data Control Library © 2006 - 2007 DlhSoft. All rights reserved.
DWGdirect, DGNdirect and OpenDWG Toolkit/Viewkit libraries © 1998-2005 Open Design Alliance. All rights
reserved.
FlexNet Copyright © 2010 Flexera Software, Inc. and/or InstallShield Co. Inc. All Rights Reserved. This product
contains proprietary and confidential technology, information and creative works owned by Flexera Software, Inc.
and/or InstallShield Co. Inc. and their respective licensors, if any. Any use, copying, publication, distribution, display,
modification, or transmission of such technology in whole or in part in any form or by any means without the prior
express written permission of Flexera Software, Inc. and/or InstallShield Co. Inc. is strictly prohibited. Except where
expressly provided by Flexera Software, Inc. and/or InstallShield Co. Inc. in writing, possession of this technology
shall not be construed to confer any license or rights under any Flexera Software, Inc. and/or InstallShield Co. Inc.
intellectual property rights, whether by estoppel, implication, or otherwise.
The software is protected by U.S. Patent Nos. 7,302,368 and 7,617,076. Also elements of the software described in
this Manual may be the subject of pending patent applications in the European Union and/or other countries including
U.S. patent applications 2004267695, 2005285881, 20060004841, 20060136398, 20080189084, and 20090189887.
Conventions used in this guide
Typographical The following typographical conventions are used in this guide:
conventions
Font Usage
Bold Any text that you see in the user interface appears in bold. This font
is used, for example, for window and dialog box titles, box and
button names, and list items.
Italic bold New terms are in italic bold when they appear in the current context
for the first time.
Monospace Extracts of program code, HTML, or other material that you would
normally edit in a text editor, appear in monospaced font.
This font is also used for file names and folder paths, and for any
text that you should type yourself.
Noteboxes The following types of noteboxes are used in this guide:
A tip might introduce a shortcut, or suggest alternative ways of doing

things.
A note draws attention to details that you might easily overlook. It can
also point you to other information in this guide that you might find
useful.
You should always read very important notes and warnings, like this
one. They will help you avoid making serious mistakes, or wasting your
time.
This symbol indicates advanced or highly technical information that

is usually of interest only to advanced or technically-oriented readers.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 3
Contents
Conventions used in this guide ........................................................................................................................... 3
1 Getting Started........................................................................................... 9
1.1 Basics of components............................................................................................................................. 9
Component concepts ....................................................................................................................... 10
Component dialog box ..................................................................................................................... 11
Selection order ................................................................................................................................. 13
Up direction ...................................................................................................................................... 13
Automatic and default properties ..................................................................................................... 14
General tab ...................................................................................................................................... 15
Design and Design type tabs ........................................................................................................... 16
1.2 Component catalog............................................................................................................................... 17
Using the component catalog........................................................................................................... 18
Symbols ..................................................................................................................................... 19
Pop-up menus ........................................................................................................................... 20
Thumbnail images............................................................................................................................ 21
Descriptions and keywords .............................................................................................................. 21
Grouping components...................................................................................................................... 22
Copying components to another folder ............................................................................................ 22
Customizing and saving components .............................................................................................. 22
1.3 Using components ................................................................................................................................ 23
Creating components ....................................................................................................................... 24
Example: Adding an end plate ......................................................................................................... 24
Example: Adding a base plate and anchor rods .............................................................................. 25
Example: Adding a beam to column connection .............................................................................. 26
Viewing components ........................................................................................................................ 27
Modifying components ..................................................................................................................... 27
Conceptual components .................................................................................................................. 27
Converting a conceptual component to a detailed component .................................................. 28
Tips on working with components .................................................................................................... 29
1.4 Defining parts and plates ...................................................................................................................... 29
Using the dialog box......................................................................................................................... 29
Dimensioning parts .......................................................................................................................... 30
Plates ........................................................................................................................................ 30
Beams ....................................................................................................................................... 30
Part position number ................................................................................................................. 31
Using the Components tab ........................................................................................................ 31
Defining materials ............................................................................................................................ 32
Using the Components tab ........................................................................................................ 33
1.5 Defining bolts and welds....................................................................................................................... 33
Using the Bolts tab ........................................................................................................................... 33
Defining bolts ................................................................................................................................... 35
Increasing bolt length ................................................................................................................ 35
Creating holes.................................................................................................................................. 35
Number of bolts and spacing ........................................................................................................... 36
Bolt group orientation ....................................................................................................................... 36
Bolt group pattern............................................................................................................................. 37
Edge distance .................................................................................................................................. 37
Bolt position...................................................................................................................................... 37
Vertical bolt position .................................................................................................................. 38
Horizontal bolt position .............................................................................................................. 38
Defining slotted holes....................................................................................................................... 39
Deleting bolts ................................................................................................................................... 40
Defining bolt assemblies .................................................................................................................. 41
Welds ............................................................................................................................................... 41
1.6 AutoConnection .................................................................................................................................... 42
Using AutoConnection ..................................................................................................................... 42
1.7 AutoDefaults ......................................................................................................................................... 45
Using AutoDefaults .......................................................................................................................... 45
How to use AutoDefaults effectively................................................................................................. 46
Checking AutoDefaults properties.................................................................................................... 46
Checking AutoDefaults rules............................................................................................................ 46
1.8 Using the joints.def file.......................................................................................................................... 46
About joints.def ................................................................................................................................ 47
How joints.def works ................................................................................................................. 47
How to read joints.def ................................................................................................................ 47
Entering values .......................................................................................................................... 48
Connections that use joints.def ........................................................................................................ 48
Defining general defaults ................................................................................................................. 48
Defining bolt diameter and number of rows ..................................................................................... 50
Clip angle, shear plate, and end plate connections ................................................................... 50
Gusset connections ................................................................................................................... 50
Diagonal connections ................................................................................................................ 51
Defining other bolt and part properties............................................................................................. 51
Gusset connection properties .................................................................................................... 52
Diagonal connection properties ................................................................................................. 55
Profile type-dependent bolt dimensions .................................................................................... 56
How Tekla Structures uses joints.def ............................................................................................... 57
1.9 Using Excel in connection design ......................................................................................................... 58
Setting up Excel files ........................................................................................................................ 59
Sample implementation.................................................................................................................... 59
Indicating component status............................................................................................................. 62
2 Custom Components .............................................................................. 65

2.1 Defining custom components................................................................................................................ 66
Exploding components ..................................................................................................................... 66
Defining a custom component.......................................................................................................... 66
Custom component types................................................................................................................. 70
Custom component basic properties................................................................................................ 72
Custom components in a new Tekla Structures version .................................................................. 73
2.2 Editing custom components.................................................................................................................. 73
Custom component editor ................................................................................................................ 74
Custom component browser ............................................................................................................ 76
2.3 Defining variables.................................................................................................................................. 78
Creating distance variables .............................................................................................................. 79
Creating reference distances ........................................................................................................... 81
Using magnetic construction planes................................................................................................. 84
Creating parameter variables ........................................................................................................... 85
Creating parameters that use formulae............................................................................................ 86
2.4 Functions to use in formulas ................................................................................................................. 87
Arithmetic operators ......................................................................................................................... 87
Logical statement ............................................................................................................................. 88
Reference function ........................................................................................................................... 88
Mathematical functions..................................................................................................................... 89
Statistical functions........................................................................................................................... 90
Data type conversions...................................................................................................................... 91
String operations .............................................................................................................................. 91
Trigonometric functions .................................................................................................................... 93
Framing condition functions ............................................................................................................. 93
2.5 Defining custom component properties................................................................................................. 95
Adding an option to create parts ...................................................................................................... 95
Defining bolt size and standard ........................................................................................................ 96
Defining bolt group location.............................................................................................................. 97
Replacing a sub-component............................................................................................................. 99
Changing the properties file ........................................................................................................... 101
Defining meshes in custom components........................................................................................ 102
Creating surface treatments in custom components ...................................................................... 105
2.6 Managing and using custom components........................................................................................... 105
6 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Custom component dialog box....................................................................................................... 105
Customizing the dialog box ............................................................................................................ 107
Changing the order of fields .................................................................................................... 108
Changing the location of fields ................................................................................................ 108
Renaming tabs ........................................................................................................................ 109
Adding more tabs .................................................................................................................... 109
Adding pictures ........................................................................................................................ 110
Preventing modifications ......................................................................................................... 110
Using a custom component............................................................................................................ 111
Managing custom components ...................................................................................................... 111
Exporting and importing .......................................................................................................... 112
Protecting custom components with passwords ............................................................................ 113
Performing actions on custom components ................................................................................... 113
Using Excel with custom components............................................................................................ 114
Using ASCII files with custom component ..................................................................................... 114
Tips on working with custom components ..................................................................................... 115
2.7 Custom components reference........................................................................................................... 116
Detailing > Component > Define Custom Component... ................................................................ 117
Position type................................................................................................................................... 119
Display variables ............................................................................................................................ 120
Browser .......................................................................................................................................... 124
Plane types .................................................................................................................................... 125
Construction plane ........................................................................................................................ 126
Custom component settings........................................................................................................... 127
Create distance ............................................................................................................................. 128
Create reference distance ............................................................................................................. 129
Automatic distances ...................................................................................................................... 130
3 Reinforcement ....................................................................................... 133

3.1 Getting started with reinforcement...................................................................................................... 133
3.2 Basic reinforcement properties ........................................................................................................... 134
Hooks ............................................................................................................................................. 135
Concrete cover............................................................................................................................... 137
Spacing reinforcing bars ................................................................................................................ 138
Omitting reinforcing bars ................................................................................................................ 138
User-defined attributes of reinforcement........................................................................................ 139
Meshes........................................................................................................................................... 139
3.3 Working with reinforcement ................................................................................................................ 140
Placing reinforcement .................................................................................................................... 140
Attaching reinforcement to parts .................................................................................................... 141
Modifying reinforcement................................................................................................................. 141
Changing reinforcement shape ............................................................................................... 141
Using reinforcement handles ................................................................................................... 142
Using adaptivity ....................................................................................................................... 143
Ungrouping a reinforcement .................................................................................................... 145
Grouping reinforcements ......................................................................................................... 147
Adding points to a reinforcement ............................................................................................. 148
Removing points from a reinforcement .................................................................................... 149
Splitting reinforcing bar groups ................................................................................................ 150
Splitting reinforcing bars in a group ......................................................................................... 150
Combining two reinforcing bars or reinforcing bar groups into one ......................................... 150
Exploding reinforcement .......................................................................................................... 150
Reinforcement geometry validity .................................................................................................... 151
Conceptual reinforcements ............................................................................................................ 151
Converting conceptual reinforcements to detailed reinforcements .......................................... 151
Customizing reinforcement meshes ............................................................................................... 151
Defining custom reinforcement components .................................................................................. 153
3.4 Single bars, bar groups, and meshes ................................................................................................. 154
Reinforcing bar ............................................................................................................................... 155
Reinforcing bar group..................................................................................................................... 156
Curved reinforcing bar group.......................................................................................................... 158
Circular reinforcing bar group......................................................................................................... 160
Reinforcement mesh ...................................................................................................................... 161
Reinforcement strand pattern......................................................................................................... 163
Reinforcement splice...................................................................................................................... 166
4 Reinforcing bar bending types ............................................................ 167

4.1 Reinforcement in templates ................................................................................................................ 188
5 User-defined reinforcing bar bending shapes.................................... 191

5.1 Defining your own reinforcing bar bending shapes ............................................................................. 191
5.2 Defining rules for reinforcing bar bending shapes manually ............................................................... 193
Reinforcing bar bending shape rule settings .................................................................................. 193
1 Getting Started
Introduction Once you have created a frame of parts in your Tekla Structures model, you will need to
connect those parts to complete the model. Tekla Structures contains a wide range of
components that you can use to automate the process of creating a model.
This chapter explains the basics about components - what they are and how to create them
using Tekla Structures. We will begin with the basic concepts, followed by a general
description of components properties. Finally, we will show you how to use components in
practice.
Contents This chapter is divided into the following topics:

• Basics of components (p. 9)
• Component catalog (p. 17)
• Using components (p. 23)
• Defining parts and plates (p. 29)
• Defining bolts and welds (p. 33)
• AutoConnection (p. 42)
• AutoDefaults (p. 45)
• Using the joints.def file (p. 46)
• Using Excel in connection design (p. 58)
1.1 Basics of components

Introduction Components are tools that you can use to automatically create the parts, welds, and bolts
required to connect parts. They are linked to main parts, so, when you modify a main part, the
associated component also changes.
Benefits The main benefits of working with components are:

1. You can save the properties of a component using an easily-identifiable name and keep it
for future use. For example, you could save the properties of a W12x65 column base plate
connection as W12x65.j*, and use it for several projects.
2. When you modify the size of a profile, Tekla Structures automatically modifies the
relevant components.
Getting Started
3. When you copy or move objects, Tekla Structures automatically includes all the associated
components.
Topics Component concepts (p. 10)

Component catalog (p. 17)
Component dialog box (p. 11)
Selection order (p. 13)
Up direction (p. 13)
Automatic and default properties (p. 14)
General tab (p. 15)
Design and Design type tabs (p. 16)
Component concepts
Components are tools that automate tasks and group objects so that Tekla Structures treats
them as a single unit. Components adapt to changes in the model, so that Tekla Structures
automatically modifies a component if you modify the parts it connects.
This is an example of how to apply a connection:
Select the main part.
Select the secondary part.
To see information about the connection, click the connection symbol.

The connection automatically creates the required parts, fittings, bolts,
etc.
Component types Components have the following subtypes:
Getting Started
Componen
t type Description Examples Symbol
Connection Connects two or more parts, and Two-sided clip
creates all the required objects such angle, bolted
as cuts, fittings, parts, bolts, and gusset.
welds. Corbel connection
(14)
Detail Adds a detail or a reinforcement to a Stiffeners, base
main part. A detail is only connected plates, lifting
to one part. When you create a detail, hooks
Tekla Structures prompts you to
Beam
select a part, followed by a point to reinforcement, pad
locate the detail.
footing
reinforcement
Modeling Automatically creates and assembles Stairs, frames,
tool the parts to build a structure, but does towers
not connect the structure to existing
parts. Modeling tools can include
connections and details.
System and Tekla Structures contains hundreds of system components by default. You can also create
custom your own components, custom components. They have following subtypes:
components
• connection
• detail
• part
• seam
All components are stored in the Component catalog (p. 17). To open the component catalog,
use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + F.
See also Custom Components (p. 65)

Exploding components (p. 66)
Component dialog box

The component dialog box is in two sections.
Upper part Use the upper section of the dialog box to save and load predefined settings. For more
information, see Save, Load, Save as buttons. For some components the upper section also
contains buttons for accessing the bolt, weld and DSTV dialog boxes.
For information on handling the saved properties, see Connection properties files.
Getting Started
Tabs
Tekla Structures uses the automatic property value
The parts the component creates appear in yellow

The green symbol indicates the correct direction for the connection or
detail.
The parts you select appear in blue.
Tekla Structures uses the default property value
Lower part The lower section of the dialog box is divided into tabs. This is where you define the properties
of the parts and bolts that the component creates. The most common tabs that appear here are:
• Picture illustrates the component. It shows just one example, but you can usually use one
component in many situations.
• Parts is where you define the properties of the parts the component creates
• Parameters is where you set parameters to control the component (for example, for
stiffeners, end plates, chamfers, etc.)
• Bolts is where you define the number of bolts and their edge distances
• General is where you define the direction of the connection or detail and AutoDefaults
rules
Getting Started
See also Defining parts and plates (p. 29)
Defining bolts and welds (p. 33)
Selection order
To create a connection you need to select or pick existing parts or points. The default selection
order for a connection is:
1. Main part
2. Secondary part(s)
3. If there is more than one secondary part, click the middle mouse button to finish selecting
parts and create the connection.
Some connection dialog boxes illustrate the selection order for parts using numbers, as shown
below. Select the parts in the order shown in the picture:
Details The default selection order for a detail is:

1. Main part.
2. A point in the main part to show the location of the detail.
Modeling tools The default picking order for a modeling tool is:
1. Pick one to three point(s) to show the location of the objects the modeling tool creates.
Up direction
The up direction of a connection or a detail indicates how the connection is rotated around the
secondary part, relative to the current work plane. If there are no secondary parts, Tekla
Structures rotates the connection around the main part. The options are: +x, -x, +y, -y, +z, -z.
The Picture tab in the dialog box shows the up direction Tekla Structures will use. Tekla
Structures also indicates the up direction in the connection symbol:
Getting Started
Manually defining To manually define the up direction:
up direction
1. Double-click the connection symbol to open the connection dialog box.
2. On the General tab, change the x, y, or z direction. Try positive directions first.
3. Click Modify to use the new values.
Automatic and default properties

Some connection dialog boxes contain list boxes that show property options as graphics. You
can select system defaults, AutoDefaults, or have Tekla Structures automatically set the
properties.
System default If you leave fields in connection dialog boxes blank, Tekla Structures uses the system default
properties properties. Manual entries, default, automatic and properties in the joints.def file, all
override these system defaults. You cannot change system default properties.
Getting Started
Default and
automatic
properties Icon Description More information
To have Tekla Structures use a default Using AutoDefaults
property in a connection, select the (p. 45)
option marked with this symbol.
If you use AutoDefaults for the
connection, Tekla Structures uses the
property defined in the AutoDefaults
rules. If you are not using AutoDefaults,
Tekla Structures creates the connection
using the system default property.
If AutoDefaults have been used, the
actual picture in the default option does
not necessairly match the outcome.
To have Tekla Structures automatically
determine which option to use for a
property, select the option marked with
this symbol.
Example, Boomerang bracing
connection (60):
Use the Automatic option on the

Gussetbolt1 tab to have Tekla
Structures determine how the clip angle
is connected to the gusset plate and
beam.
See also Using the joints.def file (p. 46)
General tab
Connections and details have the same General tab. It contains the following properties:
Getting Started
Field Description More information
Up direction Rotates the connection around Up direction (p. 13)
the secondary part or detail
around the main part.
The fields next to the image
define rotation angle around
the x- and y-axis of the
secondary. The upper one is
for y- and the lower one for x.
Position in Available only for details.
relation to Select a checkbox next to the
primary part images to indicate the
position of the definition
point of the detail, relative to
the main part.
Use the Horizontal offset and
Vertical offset fields to define
the horizontal and vertical
alignment of the detail,
relative to the main part.
Locked Prevents modifications. Locking objects
Class A number given to all parts Color settings for
the connection creates. You parts
can use class to define the
color of parts in the model.
Connection Identifies the connection.
code Tekla Structures can display
this connection code in
connection marks in
drawings.
AutoDefaults Automatically sets connection Using AutoDefaults (p.
Rule Group properties according to the 45)
selected rule group. To switch
AutoDefaults off, select the
rule group None.
AutoConnectio Automatically switches the
n Rule Group connection to another
according to the selected rule
group.
Design and Design type tabs

Some component dialog boxes include a Design tab, others include a Design type tab. Use the
options on these pages to check if the component will bear the UDL (uniform distributed load),
according to AISC (ASD) specifications. This design check is intended for use with imperial
units.
The Design tab also contains options to:
• Use AutoDefaults rule groups to automatically modify component properties to take the
calculated load. To define which AutoDefaults rule group to use, go to the General tab and
select the rule in the AutoDefaults rule group list box.
For more information, see Reaction forces and UDL.
Getting Started
• Use information in an Excel spreadsheet to check connection design and automatically
update component properties to bear the UDL. This is useful when you want to check
connection design according to other design codes. See Using Excel in connection design
(p. 58).
Design tab To check the design of a component that has a Design tab page:
1. Go to the Design tab and select Yes in the Use UDL listbox.
2. To use information in an Excel spreadsheet in the UDL calculation, select Excel in the
External design listbox.
3. Enter the information you want to use in the calculation in the remaining fields.
4. Select a connection in the model and click Modify. To view the results of the check, right-
click the component symbol and select Inquire from the pop-up menu.The inquire object
window opens, which contains a summary of the design checks and related information.
See also Using Excel in connection design (p. 58).
Design type tab To check the design of a component that has a Design type tab page:
1. Open the component properties dialog box.
2. Go to the Design type tab and select Yes in the Check connection list box. Tekla
Structures will check the connection each time it is used or changed in a model.
3. Enter the information you want to use in the calculation in the remaining fields.
4. Select a connection in the model and click Modify.
5. Tekla Structures checks the component. A green component symbol indicates that the
connection will bear the UDL, red indicates it will not.
6. To view the results of the check, right-click the component symbol and select Inquire from
the pop-up menu.The inquire object window opens, which contains a summary of the
design checks and related information, for example:
Primary angle, Gross shear [AISC ASD F4-1 (p5-49)]

applied = 250.00, allowable = 190.80, capacity = 1.31
FAIL (t = 0.5000, tmin = 0.6551)
Example of design check information in the Inquire object
dialog box.
• The first row shows the part checked, the name of the check and a reference to the AISC
specification.
• The second row shows the applied and allowed force and how much capacity has been
used.
• The third row shows the results and possible solutions. In this example the primary angle
plate was not thick enough. Tekla Structures has indicated the minimum thickness required
to bear the UDL.
1.2 Component catalog

Tekla Structures contains a component catalog, where all components and sketched cross
sections are stored. See also Sketched cross sections.
To open the component catalog, use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + F, or click the Search
component icon on the component toolbar (see Component catalog example (p. 18)).
Topics Using the component catalog (p. 18)

Thumbnail images (p. 21)
Descriptions and keywords (p. 21)
Getting Started
Grouping components (p. 22)
Customizing and saving components (p. 22)
Using the component catalog

To open the component catalog, use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + F, or click the Search
component icon on the component toolbar.
You can do the following with components and sketched cross sections:
• search using name, number, or keywords
• start creating
• view properties
• collect your own favorites
• define keywords
• edit or add descriptions
• import/export
Component This example shows the search results for the search term "Part":
catalog example
Search
View folders
View details
View thumbnails
Show/ hide descriptions
Getting Started
Create a component using the component tool you used last with its
current properties.
Double-click the name to set the properties and create the component.
Component description
Custom components have yellow symbols.
System components have blue symbols.
To sort a column, click the header cell.
You can create a list of favorite components. To add a component to your

list, right-click the component name in the component catalog, and then
select Add to Favorites in the pop-up menu.
Creating new By default, components are grouped in folders based on their type and framing condition. You
folders can add and remove components, and create folders and subfolders.
To create new folders in the Folders tree view, right-click a level in the tree and select an
option from the pop-up menu:
• Create New Folder to create folder at the same level
• Create New Sub-folder to create a folder one level below
Information on the folders you create is stored in the
ComponentCatalogTreeView.txt file that is located in the
..\TeklaStructuresModels\<model>\attributes\ folder.
For more information, see Copying components to another folder (p. 22).
Modifying • The default view settings for the Search view are stored in the
Search and
Folders views ComponentCatalog.txt file that is located in the ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\<environment>\system folder.
If you modify the file, the Search view and the Search results branch in the Folders view
change.
• The default tree settings for the Folders view are stored in the
ComponentCatalogTreeView.txt file that is located in the ..\Tekla
If you modify the file, the Folders view changes.
Symbols
The first column in the catalog indicates the component types with following symbols:
Symbo
l Component type
System connections
System detail
System modeling tool
Custom connections and seams
Getting Started
Symbo
l Component type
Custom details
Custom parts
Sketched cross sections
Pop-up menus
System Right-click a system component in the Search view list to open a pop-up menu containing the
components following commands:
• Properties...
• Edit Keywords...
• Add to Favorites
• Add to Search Result...
• Remove from Search Result
• Change picture...
• AutoDefaults...
• Import...
Custom Right-click a custom component in the Search view list to open a pop-up menu containing the
components following commands:
• Properties...
• Edit keywords...
• Remove from Search result
• Change Picture...
• Export...
• Import...
• Edit Custom Component
• Delete Custom Component
Sketched cross Right-click a sketch in the Search view list to open a pop-up menu containing the following
sections commands:
• Properties...
• Edit Keywords...
• Remove from Search Result
• Export...
• Import...
• Change Picture...
• Delete
See also Thumbnail images (p. 21)

Descriptions and keywords (p. 21)
Getting Started
Grouping components (p. 22)
Managing custom components (p. 111)
Sketched cross sections
Thumbnail images
Most system components have a default thumbnail image in the component catalog, which
shows you a typical situation where the component can be used. For example, this is what the
thumbnail image for Bolted gusset (11) connection looks like:
To edit a thumbnail image for a component:

1. Create an image and save it in bmp format in ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\nt\bitmaps folder.
To create the image, you can use Create View > Default Views of
Component and Screenshot commands, for example.
2. Press Ctrl + F to open the component catalog.

3. Right-click the component and select Change picture...
4. Locate the thumbnail and select it.
5. Click OK.
6. Tekla Structures links the thumbnail to the component.
Descriptions and keywords

Descriptions To view a component description, select the component in the Component catalog.
Use the button to show or hide descriptions.

You can create new descriptions and edit existing ones:
• The default component descriptions are stored in the xslib.db1 file, located in the
model folder.
• To add or edit a description, type text in the description field. When you select another
component in the component catalog, Tekla Structures prompts you to save the description
you added or edited. After you have saved the description, save the model also.
• Edited component descriptions are model-specific.
Keywords To add or edit keywords, right-click a component in the component catalog, and select Edit
keywords...
Keywords you add or edit are saved in ComponentCatalog.txt file in the current model
folder.
You can combine ComponentCatalog.txt files and move them to the system
folder:..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\<environment>\system.
Getting Started
Grouping components
To create a new folder based on the results of a search:
1. In the Component catalog, enter your search criteria and click Search.
2. To group the search results in a new folder, click Store.
3. In the Store search result dialog box, enter a name for the folder and click OK.
4. The new folder appears in the tree.
Removing To remove components from a group, right-click the component and select:
components from
groups • Remove, if it is a default group.
or
• Remove from search result if the folder was created from a search.
Copying components to another folder

To copy components from one folder to another:
1. In the component catalog, click the Folders icon to open the Folders view.
2. Go to the folder where the component to be copied is located.
3. Select the component, right-click and select Copy.
4. Go to the folder where you want to copy the component.
5. Right-click and select Paste.
If the copying does not succeed for some reason, store the component
temporarily to a new folder.
1. Click the Search icon and search for the component to be copied.
2. Select the component and click Store to create a new folder for the
component.
3. In the Folders view, go to the new folder and copy the component
from there to the desired folder.
Customizing and saving components

Many components are suitable for use in different situations. You can define the properties of a
component to use in a specific situation, then save a copy in the component catalog to use in
similar situations.
For example, we’ll use the Bolted gusset (11) component to connect a single brace at the base
plate of column.
Getting Started
1. To save a copy of the component, we’ll right-click the component symbol in the model,
and select Publish in catalog.... The Publish in catalog dialog box appears.
2. We can add the component to a specific group. By default, the component is added to the
All group.
3. By default the component uses the same thumbnail image as the original component. To
change the thumbnail, see Thumbnail images (p. 21).
1.3 Using components

Introduction This section explains how to use components. It also includes examples.
Topics Creating components (p. 24)

Example: Adding an end plate (p. 24)
Example: Adding a base plate and anchor rods (p. 25)
Example: Adding a beam to column connection (p. 26)
Viewing components (p. 27)
Modifying components (p. 27)
Conceptual components (p. 27)
Converting a conceptual component to a detailed component (p. 28)
Tips on working with components (p. 29)
Getting Started
Creating components
You create different types of component in different ways. For example, you select existing
parts to indicate which members a connection or a detail is attached to. You need to pick
points to indicate the location or length of a detail or a modeling tool. See also Selection order
(p. 13).
When you create connections, Tekla Structures prompts you to select the main part (the part
secondary parts connect to), then the secondary part(s). For an example of using a connection,
see Example: Adding an end plate (p. 24).
Status Tekla Structures uses different-colored component symbols to show the status of connections
and details:
Color Status Tip

Component created
successfully.
Green
Component created, but Often occurs when bolts or
has problems. holes have an edge distance
less than the default value for
that component.
Yellow
Component failed. A common reason is that the
up direction is not
appropriate. See Up
direction (p. 13).
Red
When applying a component that you are unfamiliar with, accept the
default properties and apply the component. Then look to see what needs
to be modified. This is quicker than trying to set the values for the
component before seeing what the component actually creates.
Example: Adding an end plate

This example shows how to create an end plate connection. The End plate (144) connection
connects two beams, or a beam to a column, using a bolted end plate.
To create the end plate connection:
1. In the component catalog, enter 144 and click Search.
2. Double-click the End plate (144) component. Tekla Structures displays the component
dialog box and starts the End plate (144) command.
3. Click Apply to create the component using the default properties.
4. Tekla Structures prompts you to select the main part (column) and then the secondary part
(beam). Tekla Structures creates the connection.
Getting Started
5. Select the next main part or interrupt the command.
If you need to change the number of bolts or plate dimensions, for example, you need to modify
the component. For more information, see Modifying components (p. 27).
If you use incorrect properties, Tekla Structures may fail to create the component. For more
information, see Creating components (p. 24).
Example: Adding a base plate and anchor rods

Component catalog contains several base plate details. This example shows how to create a
base plate and anchor rods.
Before you start:
• create a column
• create an elevation view
To add a base plate to a column:
1. Open an elevation view.
2. Open the component catalog.
3. Enter base plate in the Search field and click Search.
4. To view pictures of the components in the search results, click the Thumbnails icon .
Getting Started
5. Click Base plate (1004). This component creates a base plate with anchor bolts.
6. The prompt Pick part appears on the status bar. Select the column.
7. The prompt Pick position appears on the status bar. Pick the point at the base of the
column to indicate where to create the base plate.
8. Tekla Structures creates the base plate.
9. Examine the component to see if you need to make any changes.
10. Check that the connection symbol is green, which indicates that the connection was
created successfully.
11. Change the dimensions of the anchor rods.
To make it easier to select components, click the Select component icon .

12. Double-click the component to open the Tekla Structures Base plate (1004) dialog box.
13. Go to the Anchor rods tab. Change the dimensions of the anchor rods.
14. To change only this base plate, select Ignore other types in the list in the top section of the
dialog box:
15. Click Modify. Tekla Structures changes the dimensions of the anchor rods.
17. Right-click and select Interrupt from the pop-up menu to end the command.
Example: Adding a beam to column connection

Component catalog contains several beam to column connections. This example shows how to
create a beam to column connection.
Before you start:
• create a beam and a column
• create an elevation view
To create a beam to column connection:
1. Open the component catalog.
Getting Started
2. Select Beam to column connections in the list. The list of beam to column connections
appears in the main pane.
3. Select Column with stiffeners (186).
4. The prompt Pick main part appears on the status bar. Select the column.
5. The prompt Pick secondary part appears on the status bar. Select the beam.
6. Tekla Structures creates the connection.
8. Right-click and select Interrupt from the pop-up menu to end the command.
10. Examine the component to see if you need to make any changes.
Viewing components
You can create several views of a component to view it from different viewpoints.
To create views of a component:
1. Click the component symbol to select the component.
2. To create views, right-click and select Create View > Default Views of Component
from the pop-up menu.
Tekla Structures creates four views: front, end, top, and perspective.
To check dimensions, such as bolt locations and edge distances, work in

the Component front view and use the Measure tool.
Modifying components
To modify a component, double-click the component symbol in the model. The component
dialog box appears. This is where you modify the component properties.
If you have Select component switched on , you do not have to

pick component symbol, but you can just pick any object belonging to a
component. This is the only method for selecting custom parts, because
they do not have any symbol.
You can also indicate which connections and details are affected by the modifications:
• Modify connection type: If you have selected several connections details, clicking the
Modify button modifies all the selected connections and details irrespective of their type. If
the connection type is not the same as in the dialog box, Tekla Structures changes the
connection type.
• Ignore other types: Tekla Structures only modifies connections and details of the type
shown in dialog box.
Conceptual components
Conceptual components are meant to be used as reference information for further fabrication
detailing. Conceptual components look similar to detailed components but do not include the
option to change part numbering or assembly numbering settings.
Getting Started
Conceptual components can be created only with Engineering and Reinforced Concrete
Detailing configurations. However, you can edit conceptual components in Full, Steel
Detailing, or Precast Concrete Detailing configurations.
Conceptual components can be converted to detailed components that include all the
information needed for fabrication, such as assemblies, cast units, and reinforcing bars. The
conversion to detailed components can be done in Full, Steel Detailing, or Precast Concrete
Detailing configurations.
Modifying part properties, such as the size of the component main part, does not automatically
convert a detailed component to a conceptual one, or vice versa. For example, if you use the
Engineering configuration and modify the model, detailed components do not convert back to
conceptual components.
Component Symbol Configuration Description

Conceptual Engineering Conceptual component
does not create
Reinforced
assemblies or cast units.
Concrete Detailing
The dialog box is the
same as in detailed
component, but does not
contain fields for part
and assembly positions.
Rectangular
Detailed Full Detailed component
contains part and
Steel Detailing
assembly numbering
Precast Concrete fields, and creates
Detailing needed assemblies and
cast units.
Round
Detailed components can be converted to conceptual components in

Engineering and Reinforced Concrete Detailing configurations.
See also Converting a conceptual component to a detailed component (p. 28)
Converting a conceptual component to a detailed component

An individual conceptual component that has been created with Engineering or Reinforced
Concrete Detailing configuration can be converted to a detailed component in Full, Steel
Detailing, and Precast Concrete Detailing configurations.
To convert a conceptual component to a detailed component:
1. Select the component symbol.
2. Click Detailing > Component > Convert to Detailing Component.
If you want to convert a detailed component to a conceptual component

in Engineering or Reinforced Concete Detailing configuration, right-
click and select Convert to Conceptual Component.
See also Conceptual components (p. 27)
Getting Started
Tips on working with components
No component If you have difficulty applying a component, check the status bar for prompts. For example,
created you may need to click the middle mouse button to stop selecting parts, before Tekla Structures
creates the component.
Many parts found If you are applying a connection that only allows for one secondary part, you may see the
message Many parts found on the status bar. This means that Tekla Structures cannot
determine which parts to connect. You may have several parts in the same location, or the view
may be set too deep.
Switch parts on/ If the component does not create the parts you need by default (for example, stiffener plates),
off look for a switch to turn them on. If there is no switch, try entering a value in the thickness field
for that part (for example, on the Stiffeners tab).
If the component creates parts you do not need, look for the switch to turn them off. If there is
no switch, enter a zero (0) in the thickness field for that part.
Default: Tekla Structures creates stiffeners or uses

value retrieved from AutoDefaults.
Automatic: Tekla Structures creates or omits stiffeners

depending on the situation in the model.
Tekla Structures does not create stiffeners
Tekla Structures creates stiffeners.
Entering valid You need to specify profiles for some components. If a component fails, try entering a valid
profiles profile.
1.4 Defining parts and plates

Use the Parts tab to define the parts that Tekla Structures creates when you use a component.
Topics Using the dialog box (p. 29)

Dimensioning parts (p. 30)
Defining materials (p. 32)
Using the dialog box

Some components list all parts on one tab, others list parts on separate tabs as shown in the
following examples.
One Parts tab Where there is one tab, the label is usually Parts or Plates.
Getting Started
Several Parts Parts can also appear on separate tabs. For example, in connection 56, Corner tube gusset, the
tabs parts appear on both the Gusset and Brace conn tabs.
Dimensioning parts
Use the Parts tabs to dimension specific part types in components.
To delete a part, enter zero (0) in the t (thickness) field.
Plates
Enter the following dimensions for plates:
Dimension Description
t Plate thickness
b Plate width
h Plate height
You do not have to enter these dimensions for every component type, as Tekla Structures
determines the plate shape differently for different components. For example, in end plate
connections, Tekla Structures calculates width and height using the number of bolts and bolt
edge distances. Click Help in a component dialog box to check which dimensions you need to
enter.
Beams
To specify a library or parametric profile to use for beams:
Getting Started
• Enter the profile name.
• Or click , and select a profile from the profile catalog.
The profile must exist in the profile catalog.
Part position number

Use the Pos_no field to enter the part position number for each part the component creates.
This overrides the settings on the Tools > Options > Options... > Components tab. Specify a
prefix and a start number, as shown below.
Prefix
Start number
Some component dialog boxes have a second row of Pos_no fields for you to enter the
assembly position number.
Using the Components tab

To set the default prefix and start number for all the parts that components create, click Tools >
Options > Options... > Components. You define different prefixes and start numbers
according to the part’s relationship to other parts in the component. Separate the prefix and part
number using the \ character (for example, p\1).
Getting Started
Prefix
Part number
Defining materials
To define the materials for the parts that components create, click against the
Material field. Tekla Structures opens the Select Material dialog box. Click a material type,
then click the material to use for the part.
Getting Started
Using the Components tab
To set the default part material for the parts that components create, click Tools > Options >
Options... > Components tab, and use the Part material field. Tekla Structures uses this
default if you leave the Material field blank in the component dialog box when you apply the
component.
1.5 Defining bolts and welds

Use the Bolts or Welds tabs to define which bolts, assemblies, and welds to use in specific
components.
Topics Using the Bolts tab (p. 33)

Defining bolts (p. 35)
Creating holes (p. 35)
Number of bolts and spacing (p. 36)
Bolt group orientation (p. 36)
Bolt group pattern (p. 37)
Edge distance (p. 37)
Bolt position (p. 37)
Defining slotted holes (p. 39)
Deleting bolts (p. 40)
Defining bolt assemblies (p. 41)
Welds (p. 41)
Using the Bolts tab

This illustration shows the properties you can set on the Bolts tab of component dialog boxes:
Getting Started
Slotted hole dimensions
Slotted to create slotted hole in part
Check bolt components to include (bolt, washer, screw).
Shank length protruding from the nut
Bolt spacing - vertical
Number of bolts
Getting Started
Enter bolt order number of bolt to delete.
Edge distance
Bolt spacing (horizontal)
Number of bolts
Bolt group pattern
Horizontal
Vertical
Defining bolts
Use the following fields on the Bolts tab to specify the type of bolts to use in individual
components:
Dialog box
text Description
Bolt size Must be defined in the bolt assembly catalog. See also The
bolt and bolt assembly catalogs.
Bolt standard The bolt standard to use inside the component. Must be
defined in the bolt assembly catalog.
Tolerance Gap between bolt and hole.
Thread in mat Indicate if the thread can be inside bolted parts when using
bolts with a shaft. Has no effect if using full-threaded
bolts.
Site/Workshop Location where bolts should be attached.
Increasing bolt length

To allow for additional material thickness, increase the length of the bolt on the Bolts tab. For
example, you could use this for painted parts.
Enter extra bolt length
Tekla Structures uses this value in bolt length calculation. See Bolt length calculation.
Creating holes
To only create a hole, deselect all the components in the illustration on the Bolts tab.
Getting Started
Number of bolts and spacing
Use the Bolts tab to specify the number of bolts and bolt spacing, both horizontally and
vertically.
Enter the number of bolts in the shorter field, and the spacing between bolts in the longer field,
as shown below. Use a space to separate bolt spacing values. Enter a value for each space
between bolts.
Example For example, if there are 3 bolts, enter 2 values.
Number of bolts
Bolt spacing
The settings above result in this bolt group layout:
Bolt group orientation

Some connections include the following options on the Bolts tab to orientate bolt groups:
Option Description
Square.
Staggered in the direction of the secondary part.
Sloped in the direction of the secondary part.
Getting Started
Bolt group pattern
For some components you can select different bolt group patterns. You have the following
options:
Option
Edge distance
Edge distance is the distance from the center of a bolt to the edge of the part. Enter top, bottom,
left, and right edge distances on the Bolts tab. A dimension line on the illustration shows each
dimension. See also Using the joints.def file (p. 46).
Edge distance dimension line
Enter edge distances here
Bolt position
In the list box on the Bolts tab, select an option to indicate how to measure dimensions for
vertical and horizontal bolt position.
Then enter the dimension in the fields indicated below. If you leave this field blank, Tekla
Structures uses a system default value.
Getting Started
Enter dimensions
Measure dimension from....
Vertical bolt position

Use these options to indicate how Tekla Structures measures vertical dimensions:
Option Dimension from Illustration

Top Upper edge of secondary part to
uppermost bolt.
Middle Centerline of bolts to centerline of

secondary part.
Bottom Lower edge of secondary part to

lowest bolt.
Horizontal bolt position

Use these options to indicate how Tekla Structures measures horizontal dimensions:
Getting Started
Option Dimension from Illustration
Left Left edge of secondary part to far
left bolt.
Middle Centerline of bolts.
Right Right edge of secondary part to far

right bolt.
Defining slotted holes

To define slotted holes in components:
1. Open the component properties dialog box and click on the Bolts tab. Different bolt
groups may appear on different tabs in different dialog boxes.
2. Set Hole type to Slotted.
3. Select which parts have slotted holes from the Slots in list box. Select No to create round
holes.
4. To shape slotted holes, enter the x or y dimensions of the hole. To produce a round hole,
enter zero (0) for both dimensions.
Getting Started
Slotted hole length = x or y dimension + Bolt size + Tolerance
For some components you can specify which parts have slotted holes
using the Bolts tab. For example, Clip angle (141), Shear plate simple
(146).
You can also use the Bolt command to modify bolt groups after creating components. For more
information, see Holes.
Deleting bolts
To delete bolts from a bolt group:
1. Double click the component symbol to open the component dialog box.
2. Go to the Bolts tab.
3. Check Delete.
4. Enter the bolt number(s) of the bolt(s) to delete, separated by a space. Bolt numbers run
left to right and top down.
5. Click Modify to change the selected component.
6. Click OK to exit the component dialog box.
Example You start with this bolt group:
You enter the following bolt numbers:
The bolt group now looks like this:
Getting Started
Defining bolt assemblies
On the illustration on the Bolts tab, check the pieces to use in the bolt assembly (bolt, washers,
and nuts).
To change the bolt assemblies in the current component:

1. Click the component symbol to select it.
2. Check the pieces to use.
3. Check Effect in modify.
4. Click the Modify button.
Welds
To define the properties of the welds Tekla Structures uses in a component, click the Welds
button in the component properties dialog box. Tekla Structures displays the appropriate weld
dialog box.
The illustration identifies each weld using a number. For each weld, use row 1 to define the
arrow side of the weld, and row 2 for the other side.
Getting Started
See also Welds
1.6 AutoConnection
Introduction Use AutoConnection to automatically select and apply connections with predefined properties
to selected parts. Use AutoConnection to have Tekla Structures automatically create similar
connections for similar framing conditions.
Topics Using AutoConnection (p. 42)
Using AutoConnection
Use AutoConnection to have Tekla Structures automatically create connections using a
predefined set of rules, or rule group.
Creating To create connections using AutoConnection:

connections
1. Pick the parts to connect.
2. Click Detailing > AutoConnection... to display the AutoConnection dialog box.
3. Select a rule group in the first list box on the Rule groups tab as shown below.
Getting Started
Rule group for AutoConnection
Rule group for AutoDefaults
4. Click the Create connections button.

When you use AutoConnection, Tekla Structures ignores the properties in the connection
dialog boxes and creates connections using the properties defined in the rule group. Tekla
Structures does not modify existing connections.
You can change the properties of connections you create using AutoConnection.
Additional Use the options on the Advanced tab to indicate which rule groups you want to use for each
options Framing condition (beam to beam web, beam to beam flange, etc.). You also have the option
not to apply a rule group, or to apply a specific connection.
Getting Started
Example You can use a rule group for all framing types other than beam to column flange, and indicate a
particular connection to use for that framing type.
Options Use Connection selection to indicate your preferences for each framing condition. You have
the following options:
Option Result
None Tekla Structures does not create a connection.
AutoConnection Tekla Structures applies the connection defined in
the rule group you have indicated in the first list
box on the Rule groups tab.
A named connection Click Select to pick from a list of available
connections. Click a connection, then OK.
Tekla Structures creates the connection you specify
using the default properties. See Automatic and
default properties (p. 14).
Use Parameters selection to indicate which connection properties you want to use. The
options are:
Option Result
AutoDefaults Tekla Structures applies the properties of the rule
group you have indicated in the first list box on
Rule groups tab.
No AutoDefaults Tekla Structures applies the default connection
properties. See Automatic and default properties
(p. 14).
Getting Started
1.7 AutoDefaults
Introduction Use AutoDefaults to automatically apply connections. When you use AutoDefaults, Tekla
Structures automatically creates connections with predefined properties.
For example, you can use AutoDefaults to automatically adjust the thickness of each base plate
you create, according to the main part profile. If the main part profile changes, Tekla Structures
will also automatically adjust the thickness of the base plate.
Topics Using AutoConnection (p. 42)

Using AutoDefaults (p. 45)
How to use AutoDefaults effectively (p. 46)
Checking AutoDefaults properties (p. 46)
Checking AutoDefaults rules (p. 46)
Using AutoDefaults
With AutoDefaults you can have Tekla Structures apply connection properties using a
predefined set of rules. You can use AutoDefaults together with AutoConnection to define
connection properties, or separately to define the properties of a single connection.
To use AutoDefaults for a single connection:
1. Open the connection dialog box.
2. On the General tab, select a rule group (the rule group cannot be None).
3. On all the tabs, set the fields that you want AutoDefaults to override to Default by
selecting the options marked with the arrow symbol.
4. Click Apply to create the connection using AutoDefaults.
To quickly set all the fields in a dialog box to Default, load <Defaults>
in the connection dialog box.
Getting Started
How to use AutoDefaults effectively
Use default values when you create a connection, then use AutoDefaults to modify the
properties.
If you manually modify connection properties after using AutoDefaults, Tekla Structures will
not automatically update the connection properties, even if AutoDefaults is active.
AutoDefaults does not change connection properties that have been modified. It only modifies
connection properties in fields containing the default properties.
For example, you have manually set a base plate thickness of 20 mm in the Base plate dialog
box of a connection. AutoDefaults is active and sets plate thickness according to the main part
profile. If you modify the main part profile, Tekla Structures does not update the base plate
thickness. It remains at 20 mm.
Checking AutoDefaults properties

To check the properties AutoDefaults has applied to a connection:
1. Double-click the connection symbol to open the connection dialog box.
2. In the list box in the upper left corner of the dialog box, select <AutoDefaults>.
3. Click Load. Tekla Structures shows the applied properties in the fields. You can also see
all the combined properties used for that connection.
Checking AutoDefaults rules

You can check which rules AutoDefaults has used for a particular connection.
1. Select the connection symbol and right-click.
2. Select Inquire.
Tekla Structures shows the rule group and rule sets that the connection passed. You can also see
all the properties files used for that connection.
1.8 Using the joints.def file

This section explains how to use the joints.def text file to set the default properties for
different connection types. Not all connections use joints.def.
If you are new to using joints.def, we suggest you read each of the
topics in this section thoroughly before making any changes.
Topics About joints.def (p. 47)

Defining general defaults (p. 48)
Defining bolt diameter and number of rows (p. 50)
Defining other bolt and part properties (p. 51)
How Tekla Structures uses joints.def (p. 57)
Connections that use joints.def (p. 48)
Getting Started
About joints.def
Changing the joints.def file changes the default values for different connection types. You
can open the joints.def file in any standard text editor.
Tekla Structures only uses the values in joints.def for blank fields.
AutoDefaults and manual entries override joints.def.
If you use joints.def, you can still use some system default properties. To force Tekla
Structures to use the system default for a particular property, give it the value -2147483648 in
joints.def.
By default, Tekla Structures includes the joints.def file in the system folder.
Tekla Structures searches for joints.def in the standard search order.
How joints.def works

For each connection type, Tekla Structures follows these steps to assign bolt and part
properties.
1. Tekla Structures determines bolt diameter and number of bolts according to the following
criteria:
Connection type According to

Clip angle Secondary beam height
Shear plate Secondary beam height
End plate Secondary beam height
Gusset Length of angle profile
Diagonal Profile height
2. Tekla Structures uses bolt diameter to assign other bolt and part properties.
How to read joints.def

Lines beginning with // are comment lines. They are there to help you read the file, Tekla
Structures does not use the information in comment lines.
The first few lines contain some general settings:
Set the following line to the unit of measure appropriate to the version you are using (for
example, inches in the Imperial version).
To have Tekla Structures use the default values in joints.def, set the following line to 1.
Set it to 0 to have Tekla Structures use the system defaults.
Properties for each connection type appear in individual sections, as shown below. Each section
begins with a header row containing the column labels. Do not add columns to the file.
Getting Started
Entering values
When you edit joints.def:
• Enter absolute values or names
• Do not use feet and inch symbols
• Ensure that profiles exist in the profile catalog
• Ensure bolts exist in the bolt catalog.
Connections that use joints.def

Only the following connections use joints.def
Connections Connections
Two sided angle cleat (25) Boomerang bracing cross (60)
Beam with stiffener (129) Corner bolted gusset (57)
Column with shear plate (131) Boomerang tube diagonal (59)
Bolted moment connection (134) Corner tube gusset (56)
Clip angle (141) Boomerang wrapped diagonal (58)
Two sided end plate (142) Corner wrapped gusset (63)
Two sided clip angle (143) Bolted gusset (11)
End plate (144) Bracing cross (19)
Shear plate simple (146) Tube gusset (20)
Welded to top flange (147) Tube crossing (22)
Welded to top flange S (149) Gusset wrapped cross (62)
Moment connection (181) Wrapped cross (61)
Column with stiffeners W (182) Welded gusset (10)
Full depth (184)
Full depth S (185)
Column with stiffeners (186)
Column with stiffeners S (187)
Column with stiffeners (188)
Bent plate (190)
Shear plate tube column (189)
Defining general defaults

If Tekla Structures cannot find a property for a connection in the connection-specific sections
of joints.def, it looks for the default property in the General section.
Example In clip angles, Tekla Structures uses the default bolt diameter in the General section if the
secondary beam height is larger than the highest value in the Clip angle section of
joints.def.
The properties in the General section of joints.def are:
Getting Started
Properties Description
boltdia Bolt diameter.
pitch Distance from the center of one bolt to the center of
the next.
clipweld Weld size.
angle-cc-inc Tekla Structures adds bolt to bolt distance and web
thickness, then rounds the result up by this value.
Complies with US AISC standard.
lprofgapinc Tekla Structures rounds the angle profile gap up by
this value. Complies with US AISC standard.
lsize Size of the angle profile.
copedepth Determines notch size.
copelength Determines notch size.
boltedge Edge distance.
webplatelen Haunch plate height (h).
webplatewid Haunch plate width (b).
beamedge Distance from the upper edge of the angle profile to
the top of the secondary beam.
knifeclr No longer used.
clipedge Edge distance for bolts (clip angles only).
gap No longer used.
shearplatethk Shear plate thickness.
endplatethk End plate thickness.
shearweld Size of weld.
cliplsize Size of angle profile (clip angles only).
flangecutclear Flange cut clearance.
slotsize Size of slotted hole.
clipslots Which part gets slotted holes:
1 for beam
2 for angle profiles
3 for both
Refers to the Slots in list box options on the Bolts
tab. See individual connection help for details.
Getting Started
Properties Description
clipattach How the clip angle is attached to the secondary and
main parts:
1 is Both bolted
2 is Main bolted / Secondary welded
3 is Main not welded
4 is Main welded / Secondary bolted
5 is Both welded
6 is Main not bolted
7 is Secondary not welded
8 is Secondary not bolted
9 is Both bolted / welded
Refers to the attachment type list box options on the
Bolts tab. See individual connection help for details.
copedepthinc Tekla Structures rounds cope depth up using this
value.
copelengthinc Tekla Structures rounds cope length using this value.
Defining bolt diameter and number of rows

Before you start, read How joints.def works (p. 47). Use the rows beginning with
BOLTHEIGHT in each connection-specific section of joints.def to define the default bolt
diameter and default number of bolt rows for the following connection types:
• Clip angle, shear plate, and end plate connections (p. 50)
• Gusset connections (p. 50)
• Diagonal connections (p. 51)
Clip angle, shear plate, and end plate connections

Tekla Structures calculates the default bolt diameter and number of rows vertically according to
the height of the secondary beam. You can enter the following properties:
Property Description
name Use the name BOLTHEIGHT
part Use the part name ANGLECLIP
sec.beam.height Maximum height of secondary beam for a certain
number of bolts
diameter Bolt diameter. Must exist in the bolt catalog.
number_of_bolts Number of bolts vertically
Gusset connections
Tekla Structures calculates the default bolt diameter and number of bolt rows horizontally
according to the length of the angle profile. You can enter the following properties:
Getting Started
part Use the part name GUSSET
lproflength Length of angle profile
or
angleproflength
diameter Bolt diameter. Must exist in bolt catalog
number_of_bolts Number of bolts horizontally
Diagonal connections
Tekla Structures calculates the default bolt diameter and number of bolt rows horizontally
according to the profile height. You can enter the following properties:
part Use the part name DIAGONAL
conn.pl.height Profile height
or
profileheight
diameter Bolt diameter. Must exist in bolt catalog.
number_of_bolts Number of bolts horizontally
Defining other bolt and part properties

Before you start, read How joints.def works (p. 47). Once Tekla Structures has used
joints.def to calculate bolt diameter, it uses the result to assign other properties to bolts
and parts, according to connection type.
Example Enter the default properties for bolts and parts in clip angle connections in the rows beginning
ANGLECLBOLTPART in the CLIP ANGLE section of joints.def.
Properties lookup The table below lists the properties you assign for bolts and parts for each connection type.
table
Gusset and diagonal connections have additional properties. See Gusset connection
properties (p. 52) and Diagonal connection properties (p. 55).
Key to lookup
table
Connection type Full name
C Clip angle
S Shear plate
E End plate
G Gusset
D Diagonal
Getting Started
Connection Type
Property Description C S E G D
name Identifies the connection * * * * *
type.
Example GUSSETBOLTPART
for gusset connections.
bolt diameter Bolt diameter. Must exist in * * * * *
the bolt catalog.
See also Profile type-
dependent bolt dimensions
(p. 56)
shear plate Thickness of shear plate *
thickness
end plate Thickness of end plate *
thickness
gusset thickness Thickness of the gusset *
conn. plate Thickness of the connection *
thickness plate
angle profile Name of the angle profile to * * *
use:
or L profile
• Must exist in the profile
catalog
• Enter the exact name
• Example:
L100*100*10
number Number of bolts in each row: * * * * *
• vertically
• horizontally
pitch Distance between bolts from * * * * *
the center of each bolt. For
vertical and horizontal bolts
edge distance Distance from the center of a * * * *
bolt to the edge of the part.
For vertical and horizontal
bolts
vert.bolt Position of the first vertical * * *
firsthole row of bolts
Gusset connection properties

Enter these additional default properties in the row beginning GUSSETDEFDIM. Not all gusset
connections use all these properties:
Getting Started
Affects
plate
Option Description shape
name GUSSETDEFDIM
boltdia_def Bolt diameter for all bolt groups. Leave the Bolt
size field blank in the dialog box to have Tekla
Structures use the value in joints.def.
tol_prim See illustration.
tol_sec See illustration.
dist_diag_prim Clearance between the first secondary part
selected and the main part.
dist_diag_sec Perpendicular distance from last secondary part
selected to the nearest secondary.
angle_first_corner See illustration. Yes
angle_sec_corner See illustration. Yes
dist_between_diag Clearance between braces.
first_bolt_from_lin Bolt edge distance for the bolt groups on the
e Gusset tab.
corner_dx See illustration.
corner_dy See illustration.
movey On the Gusset tab:
movey
movez On the Gusset tab:
movez
dist1 The length of the edge of the gusset plate that is Yes
perpendicular to the lowest brace.
dist2 The length of the edges of the gusset plate Yes
perpendicular to the braces.
dist3 The length of the edge of the gusset plate Yes
perpendicular to the uppermost brace.
tol_lprof See illustration.
tol_stiffener Tolerance of stiffener.
chamfer_dx Dimensions of stiffener chamfer on the Gusset
tab:
chamfer_dy
chamfer_corner_dx chamfer_corner_dx
chamfer_corner_dy
chamfer-corner_dy
Getting Started
Affects
plate
Option Description shape
side_length
diafit_length Fit length in Bracing cross (19) connection.
Leave this field empty on the Parameters tab to
have Tekla Structures use the value in
joints.def.
The illustration below shows the properties on the Picture tab of the Boomerang wrapped
diagonal (58) connection dialog box.
tol_lprof
corner_dy
corner_dx
dist_diag_sec
tol_sec
angle_sec_corner
Getting Started
dist3
dist_between_diag
dist2
dist1
dist_diag_prim
tol_prim
Diagonal connection properties

Enter these additional default properties for bolts and parts in the rows beginning
DIAGDEFDIM. Not all diagonal connections use all these properties:
name DIAGDEFDIM
boltdia_def Bolt diameter for all bolt groups. Leave the Bolt
size field blank in the dialog box to have Tekla
Structures use the value in joints.def.
dist_gus_diag Gap between the gusset plate and the brace. If
tube profiles are closed with end plates, the gap
between the gusset plate and the end plate.
dist_in Depth of the cut in the brace. Enter a negative
value to prevent the connection plate from being
inside the tube brace.
dist_dv Distance from the edge of the brace to the edge of
the connection plate. This dimension changes the
width of the connection plate.
sec_cut_tol On the Brace conn tab:
slot_length_tol
sec_cut_tol
slot_length_tol
tube_cut_tol On the Brace conn tab:
tube_cut_tol
conn_cut_dx On the Brace conn tab:

conn_cut_dy
conn_cut_dy
conn_cut_dx
Getting Started
round_plate_tol On the Brace conn tab:
end_plate_thk
flanges_cut_angle On the Brace conn tab:

dist_flanges_cut flanges_cut_angle
dist_skew_cut
dist_flanges_cut
dist_skew_cut
end_plate_thk End plate field t in the Tube diag tab.
This illustration shows the properties that appear on the Picture tab of the Tube crossing (22)
connection:
dist_dv
dist_in
dist_gus_diag
Profile type-dependent bolt dimensions

For some connections, such as Clip angle (141) and Two sided clip angle (143), Tekla
Structures calculates the bolt size according to the profile size.
In this type of connections, Tekla Structures takes the bolt size from the PROFILE TYPE-
DEPENDENT BOLT DIMENSIONS section of joints.def file if you leave the corresponding
fields blank on the Bolts tab:
Getting Started
The options are:
Option Description
width Width of the profile
one bolt firsthole For single bolts, distance from the heel of the
profile angle to the first hole.
two bolts firsthole For two bolts, distance from the heel of the
profile angle to the first hole.
pitch Distance between bolts from the center of
each bolt. For vertical and horizontal bolts.
Example To find the bolt dimensions to be used with an L6X6X1/2 profile in a clip angle connection:
1. Tekla Structures searches the rows beginning PROFILEBOLTDIM for L6X6X1/2 in the
PROFILE TYPE-DEPENDENT BOLT DIMENSIONS section of joints.def.
2. If there is no match, Tekla Structures searches the rows beginning ANGLECLBOLTPART in
the CLIP ANGLE section of joints.def.
How Tekla Structures uses joints.def

This example explains how Tekla Structures calculates bolt diameter and other properties using
joints.def. We are using a Bolted gusset (11) connection. The height of the diagonal
profile is 10".
• Tekla Structures calculates bolt size and number of bolts according to profile height. It
searches the BOLTHEIGHT rows for a profile height of 10".
• The profile height is greater than 8.0 but less than 12.0, so Tekla Structures uses the row
with the profile height 8.0. This sets the bolt diameter to 0.75.
• Tekla Structures assigns the bolt and part properties according to the bolt diameter. It
searches the DIAGBOLTPART rows for a bolt diameter of 0.75.
Getting Started
Result
Property Value
Bolt diameter 0.75
Number of bolts horizontally 2
Edge distance horizontally 1.5
Edge distance vertically 1.5
Distance between bolts horizontally 2.5
Distance between bolts vertically system default
Tekla Structures does not use the connection plate thickness or angle profile properties in this
connection.
1.9 Using Excel in connection design

You can link system components and Excel spreadsheets, so when a component is applied or
modified, an associated Excel spreadsheet application can be run. The configuration
information is passed from the component to the spreadsheet, calculation run within the
spreadsheet and component properties passed back to the connection.
You can use Excel in connection design for all steel components that
have the Design tab in their properties dialog box.
Tekla Structures includes sample spreadsheet for connection design and a template spreadsheet
you should use to create your own spreadsheet applications to use with Tekla Structures
components.
Before you start:
• Create the connections and parts.
• Create the Excel spreadsheet for connection type, or use a predefined file. See more in
Setting up Excel files (p. 59).
To use the Excel spreadsheet for connection design:
1. Double-click the connection to open the connection properties dialog box.
2. Go to the Design (or Design type) tab and select Excel in the External design list box.
3. Click Modify.
4. The connection properties are transferred from Tekla Structures to a connection type
specific Excel spreadsheet, where the properties are calculated.
5. The calculated properties are saved to an output file.
6. The modified properties are transferred back to Tekla Structures and the connection is
modified according to the changes.
Topics Setting up Excel files (p. 59)

Sample implementation (p. 59)
Indicating component status (p. 62)
Getting Started
Setting up Excel files
The following list describes what kind of files are needed for performing connection design
with Excel:
• Visual Basic script file linking Tekla Structures with external software.
• Excel spreadsheet containing calculations.
• Component type specific spreadsheet, which contains predefined calculations.
• When you run the connection design, the connection properties and information of the
main and secondary parts are transferred to the Input and Component sheets of the
spreadsheet.
• Connection specific result file, which displays the modified connection properties is
stored to model folder.
• This file is created automatically from the Calculation sheet of the spreadsheet.
• The file is updated each time you modify the connection.
• Calculation results can be stored as Excel spreadsheet, HTML or PDF format,
depending on how calculation spreadsheet is configured.
File names and Excel.vb file (located in the ..\Tekla

locations Structures\<version>\environments\common\exceldesign folder) defines
the Excel spreadsheet file names and the locations. Excel searches for the spreadsheet in the
following order and with following name:
1. File named component_ + number or name + .xls, from the current model
folder: ..\<model>\exceldesign
For example, ..\test_model\exceldesign\component_144.xls
2. File name and path defined with advanced option
XS_EXTERNAL_EXCEL_DESIGN_PATH:
XS_EXTERNAL_EXCEL_DESIGN_PATH
(=%XS_DIR%\environments\common\exceldesign\) + "component_"
+ number + ".xls"
By default, the result file is stored in the model folder and named with component ID. For
example, component_9502_res.xls.
Sample implementation
Below is descibed the contents of an Excel spreadsheet which is used for End plate (144)
connection:
When user clicks Modify in the End plate (144) properties dialog box, Excel.vb file calls
Excel spreadsheet named component_144.xls.
Contents The sample spreadsheet includes the following sheets:

Inputs (user inputs on connection dialog).
• Tekla Structures transfers the component properties from the component properties dialog
box to this sheet.
Getting Started
Component
• Tekla Structures transfers the component geometry and information on the main and
secondary parts (for example, part profiles) into this sheet. The component attributes in the
spreadsheet are the same as in the corresponding .inp file. See more about .inp files in
Input files.
• This sheet includes calculations (the calculations can be as Visual Basic macros in the
sheet).
Getting Started
Calculation
• Summary of calculation is collected to the Calculation sheet. This page or full Excel
spreadsheet can be stored as a report of the calculation.
Getting Started
Outputs
• Excel adds the modified values to the Output sheet. These values are tranferred back to the
connection and connection in the model is modified accordingly.
Indicating component status

When you use Excel in connection design, you can have Tekla Structures use different colored
component symbols to indicate the status of a component in the model.
To do this, include the error attribute on the Output page of the Excel spreadsheet for the
component. The possible values are:
Getting Started
Value Color Status
1 Green Bolt edge distances are sufficient.
Passes the connection design check using the UK
and US design codes embedded in the system.
2 Yellow Bolt edge distances are insufficient according to
the value in Tools > Options > Options... >
Components.
3 Red Tekla Structures cannot calculate the component
properties. Possible reasons include:
• Incorrect connection direction
• Incorrect workplane
• Inappropriate connection selected
• The connection design check was carried
out using the embedded UK and US design
codes and the connection cannot support the
loading defined by the user.
Getting Started
Getting Started
2 Custom Components
Introduction Tekla Structures contains a set of tools for defining intelligent connections, parts, seams, and
details, called custom components. You can create your own components, similar to Tekla
Structures system components. Tekla Structures creates a dialog box for the custom
component, which you can easily customize, if required.
You can then use custom components in the same way as any Tekla Structures system
component.
You can also edit custom components to create parametric custom components that
automatically adjust to changes in the model.
Audience This chapter is aimed at people who know how to use Tekla Structures components.
Contents This chapter includes the following topics, which are the steps you follow to create custom
components:
• Defining custom components (p. 66)
• Editing custom components (p. 73)
Custom Components
• Defining variables (p. 78)
• Functions to use in formulas (p. 87)
• Defining custom component properties (p. 95)
• Managing and using custom components (p. 105)
• Custom components reference (p. 116)
2.1 Defining custom components

Introduction You can build custom components either by exploding and modifying an existing component,
or by creating the component objects individually.
You then define a custom component by selecting the objects to include in the custom
component, and specifying the information the user needs to input, for example, main part,
secondary parts, or points they need to pick. You can now apply the custom component in a
similar location in the model to where it was originally created.
To create a parametric custom component, you need to do some more

editing. For more information, see Editing custom components (p. 73).
Go to Detailing > Component > Define Custom Component to define the properties of a new
custom component.
To browse a list of custom components,
1. Press Ctrl + F to open the Component catalog.
2. Select Search results > Custom.
Topics Exploding components (p. 66)

Defining a custom component (p. 66)
Custom component types (p. 70)
Custom component basic properties (p. 72)
Exploding components
Explode Component is a very useful command to use when defining custom components. It
ungroups the objects in an existing component, you can then remove and modify parts and
other objects in the component.
To explode a component:
1. Click Detailing > Component > Explode component.
2. Select the component to explode.
3. Tekla Structures ungroups the objects in the component.
Defining a custom component

You can define and save custom components in the component library.
Before you can define a custom component, you need to create a sample component in the
model containing all the necessary component objects, such as parts, fittings, bolts, and so on.
Custom Components
To quickly create a custom component, explode a similar existing
component, then change it to suit your needs. See Exploding
components (p. 66).
Use the Custom Component Wizard on the Detailing menu to define the properties of a new
custom component. See the following example.
Follow the steps in the custom component wizard. Some steps are
different for different types of custom component.
Example In the following example we will create a custom component based on an existing end plate
component that we have exploded.
To explode a component, select the component, right-click and select

Explode Component from the pop-up menu.
1. Click Detailing > Component > Define Custom Component... to open the Custom
Component Wizard dialog box.
2. On the Type/Notes tab, set Type to Connection. Enter a Name for the custom component.
3. On the Position and Advanced tabs, set the Position type and other properties for the
custom component. For more information on other properties, see
Detailing > Component > Define Custom Component... (p. 117).
4. Click Next.
5. Select the objects to use in the custom component and click Next.
Custom Components
You can use area select to select the objects to include. Tekla Structures
ignores the main part, secondary parts, grids and component symbols
when you are selecting objects to include in the custom component.
6. Select the main part and click Next.
Custom Components
7. Select the secondary part(s). To select several secondary part(s), hold down the Shift key
while you select the parts. The maximum number of secondary parts in a custom
component is 30.
Pay attention to the order in which you select secondary parts. The
custom component will use the same selection order when you use it in a
model.
8. Click Finish.
Custom Components
9. Tekla Structures displays a component symbol for the new component.
You have now defined a simple custom component, which you can use in similar locations to
where it was originally created. This component is not parametric and Tekla Structures does not
adjust dimensions to suit any changes in the model. To create a parametric custom component,
see Editing custom components (p. 73).
See also Custom component basic properties (p. 72)

Custom component types (p. 70)
Custom component types

Custom component types are:
Custom Components
Type Description Example
Connectio Creates connection
n objects and
connects secondary
part(s) to a main
part.
Component symbol
is green.
Detail Creates detail

objects and
connects them to a
main part at a
picked location.
Component symbol
is green.
Seam Creates seam

objects and
connects parts
along a line picked
with two points.
Component symbol
is green.
Part Creates a group of

objects which may
contain connections
and details.
Gets no symbol,
has same position
properties as
beams.
Main part
Secondary part
Custom Components
Custom component basic properties
Tekla Structures automatically creates each custom component with a set of basic properties,
which we describe in this section. To view the properties of a custom component:
1. Press Ctrl + F to open the Component catalog.
2. In the Search result listbox, select Custom. A list of custom components appears in the
lower pane.
3. Double-click a custom component on the list to open its properties dialog box.
Basic properties Custom connections, seams, and details have the following basic properties:
of custom
connections,
seams, and
details Field Description More information
Up direction Rotates the component. Up direction (p. 13)
Position in relation to The creation point of the General tab (p. 15)
secondary part component relative to the main part.
Available for details by default.
To use this property in connections
and seams, select the Allow
multiple instances of connection
between same parts checkbox on
the Advanced tab when you create
the component.
Class The class of the parts that the About parts
custom component creates.
Connection code Identifies the connection. Tekla Mark elements
Structures can display this
connection code in connection
marks in drawings.
AutoDefaults rule The rule group used for setting the Using AutoDefaults (p.
group connection properties. 45)
AutoConnection rule The rule group Tekla Structures uses Using AutoConnection
group to select the connection. (p. 42)
Basic properties Custom parts have the following basic properties:

of custom parts

On plane Changes part location on work Position on the work
plane. plane
Rotation Rotates part in steps of 90 degrees. Rotation
Custom Components
At depth Changes part location perpendicular Position depth
to work plane.
Show third handle Sets the third handle of a nested Part handles
custom part to be visible in the
desired direction.
You can bind the third handle in the
desired direction and thus force the
part to follow the rotation of another
part. You have the following
options:
• Above: the handle is shown
above the first handle in custom
part local coordinate system.
• On the left: the handle is shown
on the left-hand side of the first
handle in custom part local
coordinate system.
• No: the third handle is not
shown.
See also Defining a custom component (p. 66)

Using a custom component (p. 111)
Detailing > Component > Define Custom Component... (p. 117)
Custom components in a new Tekla Structures version

When you move to a new version of Tekla Structures, always check that custom components
created in older versions work correctly in the new version.
When you open custom components made with an older version of Tekla Structures in the
Custom component editor, and the new version contains improvements requiring update, Tekla
Structures asks whether you want to update the component. If you do not update the
component, it works in the same manner as in the version where it was originally made, but you
do not gain the benefits of the improvements.
If you choose to update the component, you need to check and sometimes even recreate
dimensions depending on the improvements. When you delete a dimension and create a new
one (even with the same name), also the equations containing the dimension need to be edited,
because the dependency created by the equation is lost when a dimension is deleted. You can
recreate the dimensions and edit the equations easily in the Custom component editor.
2.2 Editing custom components

Introduction To make a simple custom component parametric, so that it adapts to changes in the model, you
must edit it in the Custom component editor. Here you can build dependencies between
component objects and model objects. For example, you could specify that the size of a
stiffener depends on the size of the beam. So, if you change the size of the beam, the size of the
stiffener also changes. You can also add distance variables, for example to specify the gap
between a plate and a beam.
Topics Custom component editor (p. 74)

Plane types (p. 125)
Custom Components
Construction plane (p. 126)
Custom component editor

Use the custom component editor to modify custom components and create intelligent,
parametric custom components.
First, create a custom component in the model.
Opening the To open the custom component editor:

editor
1. Click Detailing > Component > Edit Custom Component.
2. Select the custom component. The Custom component editor opens. It shows the
Custom component editor toolbar, the Custom component browser and four views of
the custom component.
Custom parts do not have a component symbol. To be able to select
custom parts, make sure the Select components switch is active.
Custom The toolbar contains the following icons and list boxes:
component
toolbar
Icon/ List box Description

Creates a distance.
Creates a reference distance.
Creates distances automatically.
Creates a construction plane.
Creates a construction line.
Plane types Displays plane types you can use when defining
distance variables.
For more information, see Plane types (p. 125).
Position types Define the position (or origin) of the custom
component, relative to the main part.
For more information, see Position type (p. 119).
Allows you to edit the type or the position of a custom
component or add notes after you have created the
component.
Shows all created variables.
Displays Custom component browser.
Custom Components
Icon/ List box Description
Saves the custom component with another name.
Saves and updates the existing component(s) in the

model.
Closes the editor.
For more information on these tools, see Custom components reference (p. 116).
Editing You can add and edit many custom component properties:
properties
Editing task More information

Create fields for material grade, Creating parameter variables
profile, bolt size, and other (p. 85)
properties that will be visible in
the custom component dialog box.
Define part dimensions, spacings, Creating distance variables (p.
gaps, etc. that will be visible in 79)
the custom component dialog box.
Bind component objects to model Automatic distances (p. 130)
objects so that component objects Creating distance variables (p.
adjust for new beam size or
79)
profile.
Create formulas to calculate Creating parameters that use
values, for example for formulae (p. 86)
calculating bolt edge distance
using bolt size.
Library Use the custom component editor to modify custom component. You can open a custom
component vs. component in the editor even if you have already used it in a model.
model
component When you have edited the custom component, you can choose to apply the changes to all
copies of the custom component, or to save the component with a new name.
• To apply your changes to the library and to all copies of the custom component in the
model, use the Copy component to library command.
• To save the edited custom component with a new name, use the Copy component to
library with new name command and enter a new name for the custom component.Tekla
Structures does not apply the changes to the other copies of the custom component in the
model.
Closing the editor To close the custom component editor:
1. Click the Close icon .

2. Tekla Structures asks if you want to save the custom component with its original name.
If you click Yes, Tekla Structures will overwrite the copies of the custom
component in the library and the model.
Custom Components
Creating When you modify a custom component, Tekla Structures automatically creates a backup file of
automatic backup the custom component. The backup files have the extension .inp_bak, and they are located
files
in the model folder. Tekla Structures displays a notification when the backup file is created.
See also Custom component browser (p. 76)
Custom component browser

The Custom component browser shows the contents of a custom component in a
hierarchical, tree-like structure. The Custom component browser works with Custom
component editor views. Click a part in the view and Tekla Structures highlights it in the
browser, or click a part in the browser to have Tekla Structures highlight it in the view.
The Custom component browser contains the following information about a custom
component:
Model objects, to which custom component is attached
The objects the custom component creates

You can create links between custom component variables and
component object properties
You can create links between custom component parameter variables and component object
properties. For example, variable "m" defines the material grade for all plates in your
component. It appears as "Material = m" in the Custom component browser (see above
illustration). "m" is also a field in the custom component dialog box. When a user enters a value
in the "m" field in the dialog box for plates, Tekla Structures saves the value to the part
properties in the model.
Custom Components
Popup menu You can also use the popup menu in the Custom component browser to copy names, values,
and references from main and secondary parts in the component. Then use them in the
Variables dialog box to define the properties of custom components.
For example, to report how many secondary parts to pick when applying a component, you can
use a variable called Number of secondaries. You can then use the variable in formulas,
and copy the name, value and reference to other custom components.
Copies just the value the object currently has

Copies the link to the property. Link is dynamic, so when the property
later changes the reference reflects the change
Using custom If you have created a custom part in to your model, you can access the object properties of the
part properties custom part when the custom part is used an input part. You can access the name, profile,
material and class of the input custom part, and use the properties of the input part in the
component objects. This is useful in cases where the material for a new part needs to be taken
from the inner or outer layer of an existing part.
See also Defining variables (p. 78)

Creating parameter variables (p. 85)
Creating parameters that use formulae (p. 86)
Custom Components
2.3 Defining variables
Variables are the properties of a custom component. Some of them appear in the custom
component dialog box, others are hidden and are only used in calculations.
There are two types of variable:
Variable type Description See also

Distance Distance between two planes or Creating distance
between a point and a plane. variables (p. 79)
Binds parts together or works as Creating reference
a variable reference distance. distances (p. 81)
Parameter All other properties, including Creating parameter
name, material grade, bolt size, variables (p. 85)
etc. Also used in calculations.
Creating parameters
that use formulae (p.
86)
Viewing variables To see all distance and parameter variables in a component, in the custom component editor,
click the Display variables icon

The Variables dialog box appears:
• The Component parameters category lists all distances and parameters that belong to the
current custom component.
• The Model parameters category lists all distances and parameters in the current model.
When you select a distance variable from a list, Tekla Structures highlights it in the model.
Custom Components
To delete the selected distance or parameter, click Delete.
To add a new parameter variable, click Add.
For more information, see Display variables (p. 120).
Topics Creating distance variables (p. 79)

Creating reference distances (p. 81)
Using magnetic construction planes (p. 84)
Creating parameter variables (p. 85)
Creating parameters that use formulae (p. 86)
Creating distance variables

Use distance variables to bind handles, fittings, cuts, and so on, to planes so that the custom
component can adapt to different situations, such as different main profile shapes and sizes.
You can create a distance variable from point to plane or from plane to plane. These distances
can be visible or hidden. Use visible distances when you want the user to enter a distance value
in the custom component dialog box. To simply bind objects to planes, use hidden distances.
You can bind the corners of polygon plates also in directions other than the plane of the plate.
You can, for example, bind the corner of a contour plate in the z direction.
Use the automatic distances command to automatically create distances

for the handles of picked components:
For more information, see Automatic distances (p. 130).
How In this example we will create a distance variable that binds the upper edge of the end plate to
the upper flange of the secondary part. Whenever you create this custom component in the
model, the end plate will follow the upper flange, regardless of the profile or size the secondary
part.
Before you start, ensure that the part representation is set to rendered. Part surfaces and
available planes can be selected only in rendered views.
To create the distance variable:
1. Select the object from which to measure the distance. This object will follow the plane to
which you bind it. In this example, select the plate’s topmost reference point (magenta or
yellow)
2. Click the Create distance icon or right-click the reference point and select Bind to
Plane from the pop-up menu.
3. Move the mouse cursor over a view to see the available planes.
Custom Components
Highlighted boundary plane
You can change plane types before selecting the plane
You can also use the Hide Part command if the plane is not accessible.
4. To create the distance, click when the plane you want to use is highlighted. Tekla
Structures draws a distance symbol in the views of the custom component editor. Tekla
Structures displays a distance symbol in the custom component editor views. You can bind
one object to a maximum of three planes.
Distance object
5. To end the command, right-click and select Interrupt.

6. Double-click the distance object. The Distance properties dialog box appears.
Custom Components
7. Enter a descriptive Name for the distance.
To test the distance variable, enter different values and click Modify to
see the changes in the model.
8. Click Cancel.
9. To hide or show the distance variable in the dialog box and to set the other properties, click
to open the Variables dialog box. For more information, see Display variables (p.
120).
Limitations You cannot pick points in secondary or main parts.

You cannot change an existing distance binding. You must delete the distance and then rebind
it.
To be able to select distances, make sure the Select distances switch is
active.
See also Create distance (p. 128)
Creating reference distances

Use reference distances to measure the distance between two points or a point and a plane. You
can then use the reference distance in calculations, for example, to determine the spacing of
rungs on a ladder.
A reference distance changes as you move the objects it refers to. Tekla Structures displays
reference distances in orange.
You cannot move objects by changing their reference distances.
To be able to select reference distances, make sure the Select distances
switch is active.
Custom Components
Example In this example we will define several variables: distances, reference distances, and parameters,
and use them in a custom component that creates a ladder with rungs spaced at set intervals, for
any length of ladder. Here is how the variables appear in the Variables dialog box:
1. Create a ladder frame with one rung 285 mm from the bottom of the frame.
2. To make the ladder a custom component, select Detailing > Define custom component...
and follow the steps in the Custom component wizard.
3. Right-click the ladder and select Edit custom component... from the popup menu.
4. In the Custom component editor, use the Array of objects (29) component to create the
rest of the rungs.
Use the Create distance tool to bind the bottom rung to the bottom of the ladder frame
(D1 and D2 in the in the Variables dialog box).
See Create distance (p. 128) for step-by-step instructions.
Custom Components
5. Use the Create reference distance tool to create a reference distance from a handle on the
bottom rung to the plane at the top of the ladder.
• Select a rung handle
• On the Custom component editor toolbar, click the Create reference distance icon
• Bind the handle to the horizontal plane at the top of the ladder frame.
This distance appears as D3 in the Variables dialog box.
6. Go to the Variables dialog box.
7. Add a parameter (P1) to define rung spacing. Give it the value 250.
8. Add another parameter (P2) to define the distance from the bottom of the ladder to the first
rung. Give it the value 285.
9. Give the distances D1 and D2 the formula =P2. This forces both distances to be the value
defined by P2. 285 in this case.
10. Add a new parameter (P3) to define the number of rungs. Give it the formula =(D3-P2)/P1.
11. We want the number of rungs to be an integer, so add a new parameter (P4) and give it the
formula =ceil (15.52).This rounds P3 up to the nearest integer.
12. Add a new parameter (P5) to calculate the distance between the rungs. Give it the formula
=(D3-P2)/P4.
This formula subtracts the distance from the bottom of the ladder to the bottom rung from
the reference distance (D3) and divides the result by the number of rungs (P4).
13. Go to the Custom component browser and link the following properties of the Array of
objects (29) component to parameters P4 and P5, as shown below:
Custom Components
When you use this custom component to create a ladder in a model, Tekla Structures
automatically calculates the correct spacing for the rungs.
See also Create reference distance (p. 129)

Defining custom components (p. 66)
Using magnetic construction planes

You can bind several objects at one time using magnetic construction planes. The objects
directly on a magnetic plane will move with the plane. So you only need to create a distance
variable for the plane and not for each object separately.
As you can see from the example below, it is much easier and faster to use magnetic user planes
than to bind handles with individual distance variables.
Example Different methods of binding chamfers to the inner face of a flange:
Custom Components
Option 1: Control the stiffeners by using 4 magnetic construction planes
- one in each direction. Then you only bind each magnetic plane with one
distance variable
Option 2: Bind each chamfer separately - a total of 32 bindings
For more information on magnetic construction planes, see Construction plane (p. 126).
By default, the handles of contour plates are not visible. To show them,
set the advanced option XS_DRAW_CHAMFERS_HANDLES to
HANDLES.
Creating parameter variables

You can use parameter variables to set basic properties for objects that custom component
creates, for example, name, material, profile, position number, etc.
Example In this example we create a parameter variable "Weldsize" that sets all welds in a custom
component to a given size:
1. On the Custom component editor toolbar, click to open the Variables dialog box.
2. Click the Add button.
3. Enter following information:
• Name = Weldsize
• Formula =
• Value = 0.0
• Variable type = parameter
• Value type = length
• Visibility = Show (this makes Weldsize visible in the dialog box)
• Label in dialog box = WeldSize
4. Click OK button to close the dialog box.
5. In the Custom component browser, click Component objects > Weld > General
properties and right-click Size above line and select Add equation. Type after the equal
sign "Weldsize". Repeat this step for all welds.
6. Click Save.
7. Click Close icon to exit the Custom component editor.
Your custom component dialog box should now contain the field WeldSize. When anyone
creates the component, all welds are of the size you enter in the WeldSize field.
Custom Components
Creating parameters that use formulae
This example shows how to create a hidden parameter variable that includes a formula to set
weld size to half the thickness of the secondary part flange. This variable will not be visible in
the custom component dialog box. When you create the component, Tekla Structures uses the
thickness of the secondary part flange to calculate the size of the weld(s).
1. In the Custom component browser, click Input objects > Secondary parts > Part >
Profile properties and right-click Flange thickness 1 and then select Copy reference.
Tekla Structures copies the reference to secondary part flange thickness to the Windows
Clipboard.
2. In the Custom component editor toolbar, click to open the Variables dialog box.
3. Click Add button.
4. Set Variable name to w.
5. Click the Formula field, type =, then right-click and select Paste. Tekla Structures pastes
the reference to flange thickness from the Clipboard. Now enter *0.5. Formula should now
read:
=fP(Flange thickness 1.1525)*0.5.
Custom Components
6. Set other values:
• Variable type = Parameter
• Value type =Length
• Visibility = Hide
7. In the Custom component browser, click Component Objects > Weld > General
properties and right-click Size above line and select Add equation. Type in after the
equal sign "w".
8. Click OK button to close the dialog box.
2.4 Functions to use in formulas

This section lists all the functions you can use in formulas in custom components. Formulas
always begin with the equals character (=). You can use the following functions in formulas:
• Reference function (p. 88)
• Mathematical functions (p. 89)
• Statistical functions (p. 90)
• Data type conversions (p. 91)
• String operations (p. 91)
• Trigonometric functions (p. 93)
• Framing condition functions (p. 93)
Arithmetic operators
You can use the following arithmetic operators:
Operator Description Notes

+ addition Use also to create strings of
parameters.
- subtraction
* multiplication Multiplication is faster than division,
so it is faster to use
=D1*0.5
rather than
=D1/2.
/ division
Logical statement
You can use if-then-else statements to test a condition and set the value according to the result:
=if (D1>200) then 20 else 10 endif

You can also use the operators && (the logical AND operator) and || (the logical OR operator)
inside the if statement.
• && - both conditions must be true
Custom Components
• || only one condition must be true
For example to use a value 6:
• =if (D1==200 && D2<40) then 6 else 0 endif
D1 must be 200 and D2 must be less than 40.
• =if (D1==200 || D2<40) then 6 else 0 endif
D1 must equal 200, or D2 must be less than 40.
Reference function
A reference function refers to the property of another object, such as the plate thickness of a
secondary part. Tekla Structures refers to the object on the system level, so if the object
property changes, so does the reference function value.
fP(propertyname, ObjectId)
To ensure the function includes the correct parameters, cut and paste it from the Custom
component browser:
1. Right-click the property in the Custom component browser and select Copy reference.
2. Right-click the Formula cell in the Variables dialog box and select Paste.
Note that template attribute and user-defined attribute names must be written inside double
quotation marks:
Name Description Example

fTpl("template Returns the value of fTpl("WEIGHT",6290)
attribute", object template attribute with returns the weight of
ID) given object ID.
object, whose ID is 6290.
For a list of available
template attributes, see
Template Attributes
Reference Guide.
fP("user-defined Returns the value of user- fP("comment", 741)
attribute", object defined attribute with
returns the user-defined
ID) given object ID.
attribute comment of
object, whose ID is 741.
Mathematical functions
The mathematical functions are:

fabs(parameter) Returns the absolute fabs(D1) returns 15
value of the specified
if D1 = -15
parameter.
exp(power) Returns e raised to the exp(D1) returns 7.39
specified power.
if D1=2
ln(parameter) Natural logarithm of the ln(P2) returns 2.71
specified parameter (base
if P2=15
number neper).
Custom Components
log(parameter) Returns the logarithm of log(D1) returns 2
the specified parameter
if D1=100
(base number 10).
sqrt(parameter) Returns the square root sqrt(D1) returns 4
of the specified
if D1=16
parameter.
mod(dividend, Modulo mod(D1, 5) returns 1
divider)
if D1=16
pow(base number, Returns base number pow(D1, D2) returns 9
power) raised to the specified
if D1=3 D2=2
power.
hypot(side1,side2) hypot(D1, D2) returns 5
if D1=3 D2=4
side1
hypotenuse
side2
n!() Factorial n!(4) returns 24
(=1*2*3*4)
round(parameter, Round off according to round(P1, 0.1) returns
accuracy) given accuracy. 10.600
if P1=10.567
fMarketSize(materi Returns the next fMarketSize("S235JR",
al, thickness, available market size for 10, 0)
extrastep) the material from the
See also Using market
marketsize.dat sizes.
file, based on the
thickness you specify.
Insert the material in the
parentheses.
For extrastep enter a
number to define the
increment to the next size
(default is 0).
Statistical functions
The statistical functions are:
Custom Components
Example (P1=1.4
Name Description P2=2.3)
ceil() Returns the smallest whole ceil(P1) returns 2
number greater than or equal to
the specified parameter.
floor() Returns the largest whole floor(P1) returns 1
number less than or equal to the
specified parameter.
min() Returns the smallest of specified min(P1, P2) returns 1.4
parameters.
max() Returns the largest of specified max(P1, P2) returns 2.3
parameters.
sum() Sum of specified parameters sum(P1, P2) returns 3.7
sqsum() Sum of squared parameters: sqsum(P1, P2) returns 7.25
(parameter1)2 + (parameter2)2
ave() Average of parameters ave(P1, P2) returns 1.85
sqave() Average of squared parameters. sqave(P1, P2) returns 3.625
Data type conversions

Conversion functions perform conversions between the three supported data types, integers,
doubles and strings.
Name Description
int() Conversion to integer. This is
useful especially for calculating
profile dimensions:
100.0132222000 -> 100
double() Converts data to a double
string() Converts data to string
Custom Components
Name Description
imp() Converts imperial units to imp (1,1,1,2) meaning 1 foot
millimeters 1 1/2 inches returns 342.90
mm
imp(1,1,2) meaning 1 1/2
inches returns 38.10 mm
imp(1,2) meaning 1/2 inches
returns 12.70 mm
imp(1) meaning 1 inch
returns 25.40 mm
vwu(value Converts the value to vwu(4.0, "in") returns 101.6
, unit) millimeters. The available units mm
are:
• "ft" ("feet", "foot")
• "in" ("inch", "inches")
• "m"
• "cm"
• "mm"
• "rad"
• "deg"
String operations
Include string parameters inside double quotation marks within the argument list of string
operations.
Example
Name Description (P1="PL100*10")
match(parameter1 Returns 1 if parameters match(P1, "PL100*10")
, parameter2) are equal and 0 if returns 1
different.
Accept all profiles
You can also use starting with PFC:
wildcards *, ?, and [ ] match(P4, "PFC*")
with the match function. Accept profiles starting
with PFC, and height
starts with 2,3,4 or 5:
match(P4,
"PFC[2345]*")
Accept profiles starting
with PFC, heights are
200,300,400 or 500 and
width starts with 7:
match(P4,
"PFC[2345]00?7")
length(parameter) Returns the number of length(P1) returns 8
characters in the
parameter.
Custom Components
Example
Name Description (P1="PL100*10")
find(parameter, Returns the order number find(P1, "*") returns 5
string) (starting at zero) of the
specified string and -1 if
the specified string is not
found from the parameter.
getat(parameter, Returns the n:th (starting getat(P1, 1) returns "L"
n) at zero) character from the
parameter.
setat(parameter, n, Sets the n:th (starting at setat(P1, 0, "B") returns
character) zero) character to the "BL100*10"
specified character in the
parameter.
mid(string, n, x) Returns x characters from mid(P1,2,3) returns
the given string starting "100"
from n:th (starting at zero)
character. If you leave out
the last argument (x),
returns the last part of the
string.
reverse(string) Reverses the given string. reverse(P1) returns
"01*001LP"
When you handle strings in formulas, you must use quotation marks. For example, to define
profile size PL100*10 with two variables P2=100 and P3=10 enter the formula as follows:
="PL"+P2+"*"+P3
Tekla Structures handles bolt spacings as strings. To define bolt spacing,

select variable type to distance list and enter the formula like this:
=P1+" "+P2
This results in 100 200, if P1=100 (length) and P2=200 (length).
Trigonometric functions
You can include trigonometric functions in the formulae. Be sure to include the unit using the
following prefixes. If you do not include a prefix, Tekla Structures uses radians as the default
unit:
• d is degree. For example sin (d180)
• r is radians (Default). For example sin (r3.14) or sin (3.14)
Name Description
sin() Sine
cos() Cosine
tan() Tangent
asin() Inverse function of sin(), return value in radians
acos() Inverse function of cos(), return value in radians
atan() Inverse function of tan(), return value in radians
Custom Components
Name Description
sinh() Hyperbolical sine
cosh() Hyperbolical cosine
tanh() Hyperbolical tangent
atan2(,) Returns the angle whose tangent is the quotient of
two specified numbers. Return value in radians
Framing condition functions

The following functions return the skew, slope, and cant angle of the secondary beam relative
to the main part (column or beam).

fAD("skew", ID) Returns the skewed angle fAD("skew", 12345)
of the secondary part, returns 45
whose ID is given.
where 12345 is the ID
of the secondary part,
which is in 45 degree
angle to main part.
fAD("slope", ID) Returns the sloped angle fAD("slope", 12345)

of the secondary part,
whose ID is given.
fAD("cant", ID) Returns the cant angle of fAD("cant", 12345)

rotated secondary part,
whose ID is given.
Beam to column Note that slope and skew are relative to a beam framing into a column.
Custom Components
Side view
Top view
Slope
Skew
Column
Beam
Beam to beam If you are working with two beams, "slope" is actually the skew of the beam framing into the
other beam, and the vertical slope of the beam relative to the main is actually the "skew" angle.
Side view
Top view
Skew
Slope
Beam
Custom Components
Limitations • These functions do not return positive and negative "slope" and "skew" values. So it is not
possible to determine up or down "slope" and left or right "skew" with these functions.
• Maximum skew angle to return is 45 degrees.
2.5 Defining custom component properties

This section explains how to add different properties for custom components.
Topics Adding an option to create parts (p. 95)

Defining bolt size and standard (p. 96)
Defining bolt group location (p. 97)
Replacing a sub-component (p. 99)
Changing the properties file (p. 101)
Defining meshes in custom components (p. 102)
Adding an option to create parts

To include an option to create or not create parts in a custom component properties dialog box:
1. In the Variables dialog box, add a new property
2. Set the Value type to Yes/No,
3. Set Visibility to Show
4. Enter a Label to display in the custom component dialog box:
5. In the custom component browser, link the property to a part:
Custom Components
6. Save the custom component and exit the custom component editor.
When you open the custom component properties dialog box, you now have the option to
create or not create the part:
Defining bolt size and standard

To add an option for selecting the bolt size in the custom component, you must add two
options:
• Bolt size
• Bolt standard
They work together and cannot be used separately.
To define the bolt size and standard options:
1. Click the Variables icon on the Custom Component editor toolbar to open the
Variables dialog box.
2. Click Add twice. Now you have two variables P1 and P2.
3. In the Value Type field, select Bolt size for P1 and Bolt standard for P2. Tekla Structures
automatically adds the extensions "_diameter" and "_screwdin" to the name of the
variables. Do not change these extensions.
4. Change P2_screwdin to P1_screwdin. The prefix must be the same, otherwise the variables
do not work.
5. Modify P1_diameter label to "Bolt size" and P1_screwdin label to"Bolt standard".
6. In the custom component browser, link the parameters to the bolt:
Custom Components
Defining bolt group location

To define the vertical distance from the secondary beam top flange to the first bolt, we add the
following option to the custom component dialog box.
This option requires a distance that binds the bolt group handle to the secondary beam top
flange and a parameter for inputting the value in the user interface.
1. Double-click bolts in the custom component editor view. The Bolt properties dialog box
appears. Remove any dimensions from the Offset fields, then click Modify. Bolts will
move to the same level with the first handle of the bolt group.
Custom Components
2. Select the bolts, then select the top handle. Right-click and select Bind to plane from the
popup menu.
3. Select the top flange of the secondary beam.
4. A new distance parameter D1 appears in the Variables dialog box.
5. Click Add to add a new parameter P1. In the Formula field, change the distance value. In
the Label in dialog box field, enter a suitable label, for example: "Vertical distance to
bolt".
6. In the Formula field of D1, type in the equation "=-P1".
Replacing a sub-component
Use the Name property in the Custom component browser to replace a sub-component inside
a custom component with another sub-component.
In this example we have created a custom component that contains a pair of cast-in embeds as
sub-components (castin1 and castin2):
Custom Components
Castin 1
Then we will replace castin1 with castin2.

To do this:
1. Select the custom component.
2. Right-click and select Edit custom component from the pop-up menu to open the custom
component editor.
3. In the Variables dialog box, add a new parameter.
• In the Formula field, enter the name of the sub-component, castin1.
• Set Value type to Component name.
• Enter a name for the parameter in the Label in dialog box field and set Visibility to
Show.
4. In the Custom component browser, add the equation P1_name for both sub-
components:
Custom Components
The field Cast-in plate will appear in the dialog box of our custom component.
To change the sub-component:

1. Click the ... button next to the name field. The Select component dialog box opens.
2. Select the component to use (in our case castin2) and click OK.
3. In the custom component dialog box, click Modify. Tekla Structures changes the
component in the model.

Custom Components
Castin 2
Changing the properties file

Use the Attribute file property in the Custom component browser to use different properties
files for sub-components in a custom component.
To add the properties file field to the custom component dialog box:
1. Select the custom component.
2. Right-click and select Edit custom component from the pop-up menu to open the custom
component editor.
3. In the Variables dialog box, add a new parameter.
• In the Formula field, enter the name of the properties file (in our example, prop1).
• Set Value type to Component attribute file. Tekla Structures automatically adds the
extension _attrfile to the parameter name. Do not change this extension, but make sure
that the prefix is the same as for the component name (in our example, P1).
• Enter a name for the parameter (in our example, Properties file) in the Label in
dialog box field and set Visibility to Show.
4. In the Custom component browser, add the equation P1_attrfile for Attribute file.

Custom Components
To use another properties file for a sub-component, in the component’s dialog box, click the ...
button next to the Properties file field, and then select the properties file from a list:
Defining meshes in custom components

You can include rectangular meshes and change the mesh in your custom components.
To define a rectangular mesh type in a custom component:

1. Create the mesh in the model or in the Custom component editor. See Reinforcement
mesh (p. 161) for more information.
2. In the Custom component editor, select the mesh, right-click, and select Properties... to
open the Reinforcement properties dialog box.
3. Click the Select button next to the Mesh: field to open the Select mesh dialog box:

Custom Components
4. Copy the name of the mesh you want to use.
5. Click the Variables icon on the Custom component editor toolbar to open the
6. Click Add.
7. In the Value Type field select the Text option.
8. Paste the mesh you copied into the Formula field.
9. In the Custom component browser, add "=P1" after Catalog name in Component >
Component objects > Reinforcement mesh > General properties.

Custom Components
10. Click the Close editor icon to close the Custom Component editor. Tekla
Structures prompts you to save your changes. Click Yes to save your changes. You have
now defined the mesh in the Custom Component editor.
If the mesh is defined in the custom component, other mesh properties,

for example, longitudinal diameters, override the properties defined in
the mesh catalog, so do not use Catalog name and other mesh properties
at the same time.
To change the mesh in the custom component:

1. Select the mesh in the 3d view.
2. Right-click and select Properties....
3. Copy and paste another mesh into the Parameter 1 field (in our example, the Mesh field).
4. Click Modify to save your changes.
Creating surface treatments in custom components

To create surface treatments in the Custom component editor:
1. Select Outline planes on the toolbar instead of Boundary planes (which is the default).
2. Click Detailing > Create Surface Treatment and select the command to create the surface
treatment.

Custom Components
3. Optional: To select the surface treatment, set on the Select surface treatments selection
switch . This switch is set off in the Custom component editor by default.
2.6 Managing and using custom components

This section describes the custom component dialog box and explains how to use and manage
custom components.
Topics Custom component dialog box (p. 105)

Customizing the dialog box (p. 107)
Performing actions on custom components (p. 113)
Using Excel with custom components (p. 114)
Using ASCII files with custom component (p. 114)
Custom component dialog box

Tekla Structures automatically creates a dialog box when you define a custom component. By
default the dialog box has a General tab for connections, details, and seams and a Position tab
for parts.
Tekla Structures automatically creates tabs containing the parameters and distances you set to
visible in the custom component editor. Tabs are named Parameter 1, Parameter 2, etc. Each
tab can contain up to 25 fields. If you have more than 25 visible fields, Tekla Structures creates
another tab.
A typical custom component dialog box looks like this:

Custom Components
This information relates only to details
For seams you can select whether to place a seam at the point you pick, or let Tekla Structures
automatically place the seam.

Custom Components
To place the seam at the point you pick, select the Place to picked
positions checkbox
To automatically place the seam, clear the Place to picked positions
checkbox, and select one of the positioning options
Tekla Structures creates an input file with the extension .inp for each dialog box in the model
folder. You can modify the input file. See Customizing the dialog box (p. 107).
If you modify the input file, then edit and save the custom component
dialog box using the custom component editor, you will lose the changes
you made to the input file.
Customizing the dialog box

To customize the dialog box that Tekla Structures creates for the custom component you need
to modify the input file which defines the dialog box. The input file has the same name as the
custom component and file extension inp. It is located in the model folder.
This topic is for advanced users. Take care when modifying an input file.
Errors may cause the dialog box to disappear.
The input file is a text file that you can edit using any text editor, for example Notepad.
You can customize the dialog box by:
• Changing the order of fields (p. 108)
• Changing the location of fields (p. 108)
• Renaming tabs (p. 109)
• Adding more tabs (p. 109)
• Adding pictures (p. 110)
• Preventing modifications (p. 110)
To use the modified custom component dialog box, save the input file,
then close and restart Tekla Structures.
Changing the order of fields

To change the order of fields, in the input file, change the last number in the parameter
definition, as shown below:

Custom Components
Change these numbers to change the order of fields (listed from to bottom
of dialog box)
Changing the location of fields

To change the location of fields, in the input file, change the last number in the parameter
definition. Enter three numbers to define the exact location of the field in the dialog box: the x
coordinate, y coordinate, and length of field. The example below shows these values for the
second field in the dialog box:
x = 374
y = 25
length = 160
Renaming tabs
To rename a tab, change the tab definition in the input file. You can rename any tab except the
General tab. In the example below, you would change the text Parameters 1 to the new tab
name (for example, Parts):

Custom Components
Adding more tabs
Each tab can contain 25 fields. If there are more than 25 visible fields, Tekla Structures creates
another tab. You can also add tabs by modifying the input file.
To add a second tab, edit the input file as shown below. Remember to adjust the location of the
fields, if necessary.
Remember to adjust the field location
The fourth tab is reserved for the General properties, so you cannot add
your own parameter to it.
Adding pictures
Add images to make your custom component easier to use. First create the image and save it as
a bitmap file (file extension bmp) in the ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\nt\bitmaps folder. To add the image to the custom
component dialog box, edit the input file as shown below:

Custom Components
y = 100
x = 50
height = 75
width = 100
The first pixel in the top left corner of a bitmap must be the same color
(gray) as the background of the dialog box.
Preventing modifications
Once the dialog box is ready, you can make the input file read-only to prevent accidental
modifications. If the input file is not read-only, and someone else updates the custom
component in the custom component editor, all your modifications to the input file will be lost.
To make the input file read-only:
1. In Windows Explorer, browse to find the input file.
2. Right-click the file and select Properties... .
3. Select the Read-only checkbox.
When an input file is read-only, and you try to update the custom component, Tekla Structures
displays a warning message saying that the *.inp file is read-only and changes to it will not
be saved. You have the following options:
• Click Cancel to return to the custom component editor.
• Click Continue to skip updating the *.inp file, but make all the other updates.

Custom Components
Using a custom component
To use a custom component in a model:
1. Use the keystrokes Ctrl + F to open the Component catalog dialog box.
2. In the Search results list box, select Custom. Tekla Structures lists all custom
components in the bottom pane.
3. Double-click a custom component in the list to open it’s properties dialog box.
4. Enter the properties you want to use and click Apply.
5. Tekla Structures prompts you to pick the parts or points and parts needed to create the
component.
Managing custom components

Use the Component catalog to manage custom components. To open the Component
catalog, use:
• keystrokes Ctrl + F or
• the Find a component icon on a components toolbar

Custom Components
To find all custom components, select Custom in the Search result list
box
All custom components have the Number -1
To view the properties of a custom component, double-click its name
Exporting and importing

You can export custom components to a file, and then import the file into another model.
Exporting To export custom components to a file:

1. Select the custom components in the component catalog.
2. Right-click and select Export.... The Export components dialog box opens.
3. Enter a name for the file in the Selection field. By default, the file extension is .uel and
the file is located in the current model folder.
Importing To import custom components from a file:

1. Right-click the list of custom components in the component catalog and select Import....
The Import components dialog box opens.
2. Browse to find the exported file (*.uel), click the file name and then click OK.
If the custom component contains sketched cross sections, you need to

export and import both the sketches and the component.
To automatically import all *.uel files from a folder when creating a new model, use the
advanced option XS_UEL_IMPORT_FOLDER.
After importing custom components, you can check from the Log file how many
components were succesfully imported. To open the log file, click Tools > Display log file >
Session History...
See also Performing actions on custom components (p. 113)
Protecting custom components with passwords

You can protect custom components with passwords. Password protection allows you to share
components while protecting your work.
To specify a password for a custom component:
Usage 1. Select the custom component you wish to protect and right-click.
2. To open the Custom component editor, select Edit Custom Component on the pop-up
menu.
3. In the Custom component editor, click the Display variables icon to display the
4. In the Variables dialog box, add a new parameter by clicking the Add button.
5. In the Name column, enter Password.
6. In the Formula column, enter the desired password.
Result

Custom Components
After you have added this parameter, every time you try to edit this custom component Tekla
Structures asks for the password. Tekla Structures informs you about an incorrect password. If
you enter an incorrect password, you cannot use the custom component editor to modify the
component.
Example
Performing actions on custom components

Information regarding custom components is stored in the ComponentCatalog.txt file,
located in the model folder. If the properties of the file are set to read-only, the following
actions are not possible:
• adding to favorites
• adding to search results
• changing picture
• deleting the custom component
• editing keywords
• importing the custom component
• removing from search results
In these cases Tekla Structures displays a warning dialog box and the action is cancelled.
To change the properties of the file:
1. In Windows Explorer, browse to find the file.
2. Right-click the file and select Properties....
3. Clear the Read-only checkbox.
Using Excel with custom components

You can link Excel spreadsheets to custom components, for example, to check connections.
For custom components, you need to add the property Use external design to the custom
component dialog box.
1. Select the component, then right-click and select Edit custom component.
2. In the custom component editor, click to open the Variables dialog box.
3. Click Add and enter the following information:
4. Save the component and close the custom component editor. The custom component
dialog box now contains the Use external design property.
Spreadsheet The template spreadsheets are located in folder ..\Tekla

location Structures\<version>\environments\common\exceldesign.

Custom Components
By default, Tekla Structures searches for the spreadsheet in the following order:
• From the model folder: ..\<model>\exceldesign\.
• From folder defined with advanced option XS_EXTERNAL_EXCEL_DESIGN_PATH
Spreadsheet The name of the file must be component_*component name*.xls. For example
name component_custom1.xls for a custom component named custom1.
For more information on the required Excel files, file locations and how to perform the
connection check with Excel, see Using Excel in connection design (p. 58).
Using ASCII files with custom component

You can use ASCII format files to get the default values from cold rolled files for custom
components, for example.
The format for reading files is following:
• fVF(filename, key value of row, column number)
• Key value for row is a unique text value (for example, HEA300).
• Column value is an index (integer) starting from 1.
• Function returns value as text.
• User will define the correct type for parameter in editor.
Example For example, in the custom component editor, add function fVF("Overlap.dat", "MET-
202Z25", 4) in the Variables dialog box.
The function gets the default value for bolt diameter 16.0 for profile MET-202Z25, from the
Overlap.dat file.
Key value of row
Column number
File search order Tekla Structures searches for the files as system files in the following order:
• model
• ..\TeklaStructuresModels\<model>\CustomComponentDialogFiles\
• project (set with advanced option XS_PROJECT)
• firm (set with advanced option XS_FIRM)
• system (set with advanced option XS_SYSTEM)

Custom Components
Tips on working with custom components
These tips will help you to efficiently create, save, and share parametric and non-parametric
custom components:
General Use library profiles when possible. So you do not have to copy user-defined profiles when
you copy the component to other locations.
Use short, logical names. Use the description field to describe the component and explain
what it does.
Store custom components together. It makes them easy to find and export. Consider creating
a component model. Use this model to create and test custom components.
Provide essential information. If you distribute your component to other users, remember to
list the profiles it works with.
Remember to copy user-defined profile cross sections with your custom component.
Creating non- Use the simplest part you can. For example, if all you need is a rectangular shape, use a
parametric rectangular plate, not a contour plate. Rectangular plates only have 2 handles, so you only need
components
to create a few bindings or magnetic planes to manipulate them. Contour plates require more
because they have 4 chamfers and handles, when you set the advanced option
XS_DRAW_CHAMFERS_HANDLES to CHAMFERS or HANDLES.
Rectangular plate
Contour plate
Only model parts as accurately as you need. If the only part information required is a part
mark on the GA drawing and a quantity on the materials list, create a simple bar or plate. If,
later, you need to include it in a detailed view, simply re-model the part more accurately.
Creating Plan to use magnetic planes to bind objects together. This makes intelligent components
intelligent simpler, and easier to use, because it reduces the number of dimensions and parameters the user
(parametric)
components must enter. Model as many parts on the same plane as you can, and then use offsets to position
them accurately.

Custom Components
Not using magnetic planes:
Pick all 10 handles to bind the parts together
Using 3 magnetic planes:
Pick 3 points to bind the parts together (pick 1 point on each magnetic
plane)
Model embeds as custom parts and include them in components.

Create simple components for specific situations. It is faster and easier to model simple
components. They are also much easier to use. Avoid creating a ’super’ component to use in
every possible situation.
2.7 Custom components reference

This section consists of the reference pages for the custom component commands.
The following table lists the commands used to define, create, and manage custom components.
Command Icon Description

Detailing > Component Starts the custom component wizard
> Define Custom which guides you through defining a
Component... (p. 117) custom component.
Display variables (p. Displays a list of distance and
120) parameter variables.
Browser (p. 124) Displays the custom component

browser that shows the contents of a
custom component in a hierarchical,
tree-like structure.
Plane types (p. 125) Defines which planes can be selected.
Construction plane (p. The command to create your own plane.
126)

Custom Components
Custom component Allows you to edit the type or the
settings (p. 127) position of a custom component or add
notes after you have created the
component
Create distance (p. 128) The command to create distance
variables.
Create reference The command to create variable

distance (p. 129) reference distancies.
Automatic distances (p. Automatically generates distance

130) variables for custom component
objects.
Detailing > Component > Define Custom Component...

Synopsis This command defines a new custom component and saves it to a library for later use.
Preconditions All the necessary objects (parts, cuts, fittings, bolts, etc.) must exist in the model, because you
will need to select different objects, points etc. to define the custom component. See also
Exploding components (p. 66).
Description This command defines a simple custom component, which you can use in similar locations to
where it was originally created. This component is not parametric and Tekla Structures does not
adjust dimensions to suit any changes in the model. To create a parametric custom component,
see Editing custom components (p. 73).

Type Affects how the user inserts the custom Component types (p. 10)
component into the model. Also defines
if the custom component connects to
existing parts.
Name Unique name for the custom
component. If the name already exists,
the Next button is grayed out.
Description Short description of the custom
component. This will be shown in the
component browser.
Component To include this in drawings, include Mark elements
identifier Code in the connection mark.
Up direction The default up direction. Used only in
Position type Position (or origin) of the connection, Position type (p. 119)
relative to the main part.

Custom Components
Detail type Determines on which side of the main Only affects asymmetric
part the detail is located. The options details (for example a
are: one-side stiffener).
Intermediate detail - Tekla Structures
creates all details on the same side of
the main part.
End detail - Tekla Structures creates all
details on the side of the main part
closest to the detail.
Definition point The position you pick to create the Only available for details
position in detail, relative to the main part. and connections.
relation to
primary part For connections, this determines where
the connection is created, relative to the
secondary part.
Allow multiple When checked, allows you to create Only available for
instances of many connections to the same main connections.
connection part, in different locations.
between same This is always possible
parts for details.
Exact positions When you select this checkbox, Tekla Only available for seams.
Structures positions the seam based on
the positions you pick in the model.
If you clear this checkbox, Tekla
Structures uses automatic seam
recognition to position the seam. This is
useful especially with warped seams.
Use the center of When you select this checkbox, Tekla Only available for parts.
the bounding box Structures positions the custom part
in positioning based on the center of its bounding box
(the box which surronds the actual part
profile).
Usage 1. Click Detailing > Component > Define Custom Component... to start the Custom
component wizard.
2. Select a Type and enter the other properties, then click Next.
3. Select the objects that the custom component will create.
4. Click Next.
5. The next step differs depending on the Type you select in step 2:
• For connections, select the main part, click Next, then select the secondary part(s).
• For details, select the main part, and click Next.
To position the detail by the main part, select Main part, and go to step 6.
To position the detail by a reference point, select Reference point, and then pick a
point.
• For seams, select the main part, click Next, then select the secondary part, click Next,
then pick two points to indicate the seam location.
• For parts, pick one or two points.
6. Click Finish.
See also Defining a custom component (p. 66)

Editing custom components (p. 73)

Custom Components
Position type
Synopsis Defines the position (or origin) of the custom component, relative to the main part. This
command is available in the custom component wizard. Position type affects which type of
main parts you can use the custom component with.
Preconditions
Description Determines the location of the objects the custom component creates, relative to main part. The
options are:
• Middle
Where the center lines of the
main and secondary parts
intersect.
• Box plane
Where the main part box and
the center line of the
secondary part intersect.
• Collision plane
Where the main part and the
center line of the secondary
part intersect.

Custom Components
• End end plane
Where the center line of the
secondary part hits the end of
the main part.
• Gusset plane
Where the center lines of the
main part and the first
secondary part intersect. The
x direction is perpendicular
to the center line of the main
part.
Display variables
Synopsis Shows all variables and lets you to add new parameter variables. You can also use it to manage
distance and parameter variables.
Tekla Structures uses variables with the following features:
• Custom Components (p. 65)
• Sketched cross sections
Preconditions To use this command, you must:
Feature Preconditions
Custom components • define a custom component, see Defining a
custom component (p. 66)
• open the Custom component editor, see Custom
component editor (p. 74)
Sketched cross • open the Cross section sketch editor, see
sections Sketched cross sections
Description Variables are the properties of a custom component/sketch/parametric model.

Use the Add button to add parameter variables.
To add new distance variables, use the commands
• Create distance (p. 128) or Automatic distances (p. 130) for custom components.
• Sketch free distance, Sketch horizontal distance, or Sketch vertical distance for
sketched cross sections.
Use the Delete button to delete selected parameters and distances.
You define the following properties for a variable:

Custom Components
Variable name A unique name for variable. Use Custom component
this name to refer to the variable browser (p. 76)
in the custom component or in
Sketch Browser
the sketch browser.
Formula Can contain a value or a Creating parameters
formula. Copy values using the that use formulae (p.
popup menu in the browser. See 86)
Custom component browser
Functions to use in
(p. 76). formulas (p. 87)
Formulae begin with =
Variable value Shows the current value from
the formula field.
Variable type Distance or parameter. Defining variables
(p. 78)
Adding dimensions
to a sketched cross
section
Value type Defines the type of information Display variables (p.
to input. 120)
Visibility Shows or hides the variable. Custom component
dialog box (p. 105)
Label The field name.
Maximum length is 30
characters.
Usage Usage depends on the feature:
Feature Usage
Custom components • Creating distance variables (p. 79)
• Creating reference distances (p. 81)
• Creating parameter variables (p. 85)
Sketched cross • Variables
sections
Value types The options are:
Value type Description

Number A whole (integer) number. Used for quantity and multiplier.
Length A decimal (floating point) number. User for lengths and distances.
Length numbers have unit (mm, inch etc.) and are rounded to two places
of decimals.
Tekla Structures enables millimeter to inch conversion for the Length
and Distance list types.
Text A text (ascii) string.
Factor A decimal value without a unit. You can set the number of decimals for
the value type in Tools > Options > Options... > Units and decimals.
Angle A special decimal number type for storing angles, stored to 1 place of
decimals, in radians.

Custom Components
Material A special data type linked to the material catalog. On input you can
select material from the standard material dialog.
Profile A special data type linked to the profile catalog. On input you can select
profile from the standard profile dialog.
Bolt size Special data types linked to the bolt catalog. Bolt size works with Bolt
standard. They have fixed naming: Px_diameter and
Bolt standard
Px_screwdin. Do not change the fixed name.
To automatically show values for these in the component’s dialog box, x
must be the same for both, for example, P1_diameter and
P1_screwdin.
Bolt type For defining the bolt type (site/workshop) in the custom component
dialog box. Linked to the Bolt type property of bolts in the Custom
component browser.
Stud size Special data types linked to the bolt catalog. Stud size works with Stud
standard. They have fixed naming: Px_size and Px_standard. Do
Stud standard
not change the fixed name.
To automatically show values for these in the component’s dialog box, x
must be the same for both, for example, P9_size and
P9_standard.
Distance list For fields with several length values, such as bolt spacings.

Custom Components
Weld type A special data type for selecting weld type.
Weld types
Chamfer type A special data type for defining the shape of a chamfer.
Welding site A special data type for defining the welding place: workshop or building
site.
Rebar grade Special data types linked to reinforcement catalog. Rebar grade, Rebar
size, and Rebar bending radius work together. They have fixed
Rebar size
naming format: Px_grade, Px_size, and Px_radius where the x
Rebar bending is a number. Do not change the fixed name.
radius
To automatically show values for these in the component's dialog box, x
must be the same for all, for example, P1_grade, P1_size, and
Px_radius.
Reinforcement For defining meshes in custom components. Linked to the Catalog

mesh name property of reinforcement meshes in the Custom component
browser.
Component For replacing a subcomponent inside a custom component with another
name subcomponent. Linked to the Name property of objects in the Custom
component browser.

Custom Components
Component For setting the properties of a subcomponent inside a custom
attribute file component. Works with Component name using the format Px_name
and Px_attrfile, where the x is a number. Do not change the fixed
name.
To automatically show values for these in the component's dialog box, x
must be the same for both, for example, P2_name and
P2_attrfile.
Yes/No For defining whether or not Tekla Structures creates an object in a

custom component. Linked to the Creation property of objects in the
Custom component browser.
Browser
Synopsis This command shows the browser for the following features.
• Custom component: Custom component browser
• Sketched cross section: Display sketch browser
Preconditions To open the browser:
Feature Preconditions
Custom components • Define a custom component, see Defining a
custom component (p. 66)
• Open the Custom component editor, see
Custom component editor (p. 74)
Sketched cross Open the Cross section sketch editor, see Opening
sections the cross section sketch editor
Description The browser shows the objects, their properties, and hierarchy included in the:
• Custom component
• Sketched cross section
Usage Usage depends on the feature:

Custom Components
Feature Usage
Custom components Custom component browser (p. 76)
Sketched cross Sketch Browser
sections
Plane types
Synopsis This command changes the plane type.
Preconditions Open the Custom component editor. See Custom component editor (p. 74).
Description You need planes to define distance variables. For example, you can bind the reference point of
a plate to the top plane of a beam.
You can change the plane type when the Create distance command is active. See Create
distance (p. 128).
The table below shows an example of each plane type:
Plane type Example Definition

Boundary planes The edges of a box
surrounding a profile.
Center planes The center planes of a

profile

Custom Components
Plane type Example Definition
Outline planes The outer and inner
surfaces of a profile.
Cut planes If parts contain line, part,

or polygon cuts, this
option selects the cut
surfaces. Fittings cannot
be selected.
Component Depends on which

planes Position type the custom
component originally
had.
Grid planes Shows grid planes.

This plane type is only
available in models and
sketches.
Boundary and component planes work for most profile types, so try to
use them whenever you can.
Usage To see which planes are available in each group:

1. Select a plane type from the Custom component toolbar.
2. Move the mouse cursor over a component view. Tekla Structures highlights the available
planes.
See also Creating distance variables (p. 79)
Construction plane
Synopsis This command creates a construction plane. If the plane is magnetic, the objects directly on it
move with the plane.

Custom Components
Preconditions
Description You may occasionally need to define your own planes. For example, when you create special
model parameters for floor height, building width, etc.
Magnetic planes are also useful. You can use them to bind and move groups of objects. Rather
than binding lots of handles and chamfers to faces, simply create a user plane that goes through
all the handles and chamfers. Then make this plane magnetic and bind the plane to the
appropriate face. When you move the plane, the attached handles and chamfers move with it.
The custom component editor contains many default planes, for more information see Plane
types (p. 125).
Usage To add a construction plane:

1. Click the Create construction plane icon.
2. Pick four points.
3. Click the middle mouse button. Tekla Structures draws the plane.
4. Double-click the plane in the model. The Construction plane properties dialog box
appears.
5. Type a name for the plane.
6. Select Magnetic, if you want Tekla Structures to bind touching objects to the plane. When
you move a magnetic plane, objects directly on that plane automatically move with it.
Tekla Structures only binds objects to the plane whose reference points
are directly on the plane. By default the magnetic distance is 0.05 mm.
To change this use the variable XS_MAGNETIC_PLANE_OFFSET.
7. Click Modify.
See also Plane types (p. 125)
Custom component settings
Synopsis With this command you can go back and change the settings which you have used for defining
a custom component.
Preconditions To use this command in the Custom component editor, you must:
• Define a custom component, see Defining a custom component (p. 66).
• Open the Custom component editor, see Custom component editor (p. 74).
Description You can do the following changes after you have created a custom component:
• Add notes
• Change the position
• Allow multiple instances
Usage To add notes:

1. In the Customer component editor, click the Custom component settings icon.

Custom Components
2. On the Type/Notes tab, insert the notes you want to add to the Description field.
To change the position type:
2. On the Position tab, change the Position type. Tekla Structures repositions the planes.
The objects retain their relative position to the component planes, and they must be moved
back into position manually.
In many cases you need to use a component inside another component, or make a complex
connection out of simple connections. To apply multiple connections to the same main part,
select the Allow multiple instances of connection between same parts checkbox. By default
this checkbox is not selected.
To allow multiple instances:
2. On the Advanced tab, select the Allow multiple instances of connection between same
parts checkbox.
Create distance
Synopsis Creates a distance variable. You can create a distance variable from any of the following
objects to a plane:
• construction plane
• reference points of parts (only custom component objects)
• reference points of bolt groups
• chamfers
• part cut handles
• line cuts
• fittings
• define a custom component, see Defining a custom component (p. 66)
• open the Custom component editor, see Custom component editor (p. 74)
To use this command in a model, click Modeling > Add Distance > Fixed.
Description Distances are dependencies that bind two parts together. You can also use distances to define
part dimensions, bolt edge distances, gaps, etc. For example:

Custom Components
Distances
These distances bind plate’s reference points to the top and bottom plane
of a beam
You define the following properties for distance variables:
Field Description
Name Name of the distance variable.
Shown in the custom component
dialog box.
Value Numeric value of distance.
Usage See Creating distance variables (p. 79).

To see all distances included in the custom component, open the Variables dialog box. For
more information, see Defining variables (p. 78).
See also Automatic distances (p. 130)

Plane types (p. 125)
Create reference distance
Synopsis Creates a variable reference distance between objects.
• define a custom component, see Defining a custom component (p. 66)
• open the Custom component editor, see Custom component editor (p. 74)
To use this command in a model, click Modeling > Add Distance > Reference.
Description Use reference distances in calculations, for example, for determining the spacing of rungs in a
ladder.

Custom Components
Usage See Creating reference distances (p. 81).
To see all distances included in the custom component, open the Variables dialog box. For
more information, see Defining variables (p. 78).
See also Plane types (p. 125)

Creating distance variables (p. 79)
Automatic distances (p. 130)
Automatic distances
Synopsis Creates distance variables for picked objects.

The distance variables are created between the picked objects and the main and the secondary
parts of a connection or a detail.
The command does not work with custom parts since they do not have a
main part.
Preconditions Open the Custom component editor (p. 74).
Description This command attaches picked objects, or their reference points or handles, to existing planes,
if the objects, or their reference points or handles, are located exactly on the plane. Tekla
Structures creates distance variables from a maximum of three direction to existing planes.
Tekla Structures selects planes in the following order:
• Construction plane (p. 126)
• Custom Components (p. 65)
• Plane types (p. 125)
Usage 1. Click the Automatic distances icon.

Custom Components
2. Pick any type of an object that has handles.
3. Click the middle mouse button to complete the command.
4. To check the created distances, open the Display variables (p. 120) dialog box.
For reinforcement you may have to remove some distances. If the last
handle is bound to too many planes and the concrete cross-section
enlarges, the other end of the reinforcement might not react to changes.

Custom Components
Custom Components
3 Reinforcement
Introduction Once you have created a model of concrete parts, you will need to reinforce the parts.
This chapter explains how to create reinforcement in Tekla Structures. It also includes a general
description of reinforcement properties and an overview of reinforcement commands.
Audience This chapter is aimed at concrete detailers and designers.
Assumed Before you start to create reinforcement, you need to have concrete parts in your model, as
background explained in Concrete Detailing.
Running the structural analysis as explained in Analysis and Design gives you the required
area of reinforcement. Read Loads for instructions on how to create loads.
See also Numbering reinforcements
3.1 Getting started with reinforcement

In Tekla Structures, you can use different methods to create reinforcement. You can create:
• Single reinforcing bars
• Reinforcing bar groups
• Reinforcement meshes
• Reinforcement components.
Concepts We recommend that you use reinforcement components to create reinforcement whenever
possible. They are adaptive, attached to a concrete part, and updated automatically if the
dimensions of the reinforced part change, for example. Then create additional reinforcing bars
using other tools.
Reinforcing bar groups consist of several identical, or very similar, bars. Tekla Structures
always treats these bars as a group, modifies them in the same way, deletes them all at the same
time, etc.
Reinforcement meshes include bars in two perpendicular directions, i.e. main bars and
crossing bars. Tekla Structures treats mesh bars as one unit but distinguishes the main and
crossing bars.

Reinforcement
Reinforcement Every reinforcement object has properties which define it (for example, grade, diameter or size,
properties minimum bending radius). Use the reinforcement properties dialog boxes to view or modify the
properties of reinforcement. Click Detailing > Properties > Reinforcement to open
reinforcement properties dialog boxes, or double-click an existing reinforcement object in the
model.
Filtering by You can use reinforcement properties in filters. For example, you can select, modify, or hide
properties reinforcing bars based on their properties.For more information, see Filtering objects.
In reports and You can include reinforcement properties and user-defined attributes in drawing and report
drawings templates.
See also Basic reinforcement properties (p. 134)

Getting Started (p. 9) with Detailing
3.2 Basic reinforcement properties

This section explains properties that are common to most types of reinforcement in Tekla
Structures.
Name You can enter names for reinforcing bars. Tekla Structures uses names in reports and drawing
tables.
Grade The strength of the steel used in reinforcing bars. Can also indicate other factors, such as the
weldability or surface deformations of the bar.
Size Depending on the environment, the nominal diameter of the bar, or a mark that defines the
diameter.
Bending radius Complies with the design code you are using. Main bars, stirrups, ties, and hooks usually have
their own minimum internal bending radii, which are proportional to the diameter of the
reinforcing bar. The actual bending radius is normally chosen to suit the size of the mandrels on
the bar-bending machine.
Bending types Tekla Structures reinforcing bar bending types are recognized using internal bending type
definitions. Internal bending types are hard coded to the software. However, these internal
bending types are mapped to area specific reinforcing bar bending type codes in the
rebar_schedule_config.inp file in the ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\<environment>\system\ folder. This
file can be localized to match local requirements.
For more information on internal bending types, see Reinforcing bar bending types (p. 167).
Reinforcement Grade–size–radius combinations are predefined in the reinforcement catalog. You can select
catalog which catalog to use, and add, modify, and delete the information it contains. See The
reinforcing bar catalog.
Select... To define the grade, size, and bending radius of a reinforcing bar, click Select... next to the
Grade, Size, and Bending radius fields in the Reinforcing bar properties dialog box. The
Select reinforcing bar dialog box appears, showing the available bar sizes for the chosen
grade. You can also define whether the bar is a main bar or a stirrup or tie:

Reinforcement
You can also enter the grade, size, and bending radius of individual
reinforcing bars using the appropriate fields in the Reinforcing bar
Class Use Class to group reinforcement. To display reinforcing bars of different classes in different
colors, click View > Representation > Object Representation... and select Color by class
from the Color list box. For more information, see Color settings for parts.
Bar groups Reinforcing bar groups mainly have the same properties as single reinforcing bars. They can
also have the following extra properties:
• Number of bars
• Spacing (see Spacing reinforcing bars (p. 138))
• Tapering (see Tapered bar group (p. 157))
See also Hooks (p. 135)

Concrete cover (p. 137)
Spacing reinforcing bars (p. 138)
Omitting reinforcing bars (p. 138)
User-defined attributes of reinforcement (p. 139)
Meshes (p. 139)
Numbering reinforcements
Hooks
To add hooks to the ends of reinforcing bars for anchoring purposes, use the Hooks section of
the Reinforcing Bar Properties dialog box, or the Hooks tab in the Reinforcement Mesh
Properties dialog box:

Reinforcement
The options for the hook at the beginning and end of the bar are:
Option Description
No hook
Standard 90-degree hook
Custom hook
The reinforcement catalog contains predefined dimensions for all standard hooks (minimum
bending radius, minimum hook length). See The reinforcing bar catalog.
Custom hook To manually define the angle, radius, and length of a hook, select the Custom hook option and
enter values to the following fields in the Reinforcing Bar Properties dialog box:
Field Description
Angle Enter a value between –
180 and +180 degrees.
Radius Internal bending radius of
the hook.
Use the same radius for
the hook and for the
reinforcing bar. If the
hook and the reinforcing
Angle
bar have different
radiuses, Tekla Structures
does not recognize the Radius
shape of the reinforcing
bar.
Length
Length Length of the straight part
of the hook.
If the length is set to zero,
no hooks are created.

Reinforcement
Concrete cover
Reinforcing bars need a concrete cover, to protect them against harmful elements, such as the
weather and fire. When you create single bars, Tekla Structures uses the thickness of concrete
cover to determine the position of the bar. You pick points to define the shape and plane of the
bar.
Cover thickness Use the Cover thickness fields in the reinforcement properties dialog boxes to define concrete
cover.
Example To create a beam stirrup, pick the corner points on the cross-sectional end plane of the beam to
define the bar shape and plane. The cover thickness on the plane is the distance from beam’s
bottom, top, and side surfaces to the stirrup. The cover thickness from the plane is the distance
from the end surface of the beam to the stirrup, and perpendicular to the bar plane.
Concrete cover Description

Concrete cover on the plane
For example, the distances from a beam’s bottom,
top, and side surfaces to a stirrup.
To specify different concrete covers on the
different legs of a reinforcing bar, enter a thickness
value for each leg in the On plane field, in the
order you pick points to create the bar. If you enter
less values than there are bar legs, Tekla Structures
uses the last value for remaining legs.
Concrete cover from the plane
For example, the distance from a beam’s end
surface to the closest stirrup, perpendicular to the
stirrup plane.
Leg length At the start and end point of a reinforcing bar, you can also define the concrete cover in terms
of cover thickness or leg length.
Option Description
Cover thickness Defines the distance from the bar end to
the concrete surface.
Leg length Defines the length of the ultimate leg of
the bar.
To define the length of an ultimate leg of a bar, use the Leg length
option and the Snap to nearest points switch. Then pick anywhere on a
part edge or line to indicate the direction for the bar leg.
Reinforcement When you use reinforcement components, Tekla Structures places the reinforcement using the
components dimensions of the part and the values in the Cover thickness field, or the graphic fields shown
below:

Reinforcement
Spacing reinforcing bars
Bar groups There are several ways to distribute bars in a reinforcing bar group.
To create a bar group, open the Reinforcing Bar Properties dialog box. On the Group tab,
select an option from the Creation method list box. The options are:
Option Description
By exact spacing Creates fixed, equal spaces between the bars. The
value with flexible first space adjusts to even out bar distribution.
first space Enter the spacing value in the Exact spacing value
field. If the first space is less than 10% of the exact
spacing value, Tekla Structures removes one bar.
By exact spacing Same as the first option, but the last space adjusts
value with flexible to even out bar distribution.
last space
By exact spacing Same as the first option, but the middle space
value with flexible adjusts to even out bar distribution. If there are an
middle space odd number of bars (two middle spaces), the other
middle space adjusts to even out bar distribution.
By exact spacing Same as the first option, but both the first and last
value with flexible spaces adjust to even out bar distribution.
first and last space
By exact spacings Distributes the bars using the information you
specify in the Exact spacing values field, so you
can enter every spacing value manually. Use the
multiplication character to repeat spacings, e.g.
5*200, to create five spaces of 200.
Equal distribution by Tekla Structures determines the spacing value
number of based on the fixed number of bars. Enter the
reinforcing bars number in the Number of reinforcing bars field.
Equal distribution by Tekla Structures aims the spacing value as closely
target spacing value as possible at the value in the Target spacing
value field and determines the number of bars
compatibly.
See also Omitting reinforcing bars (p. 138)
Omitting reinforcing bars

You may occasionally need to omit specific reinforcing bars. For example, when several
reinforced areas intersect, causing reinforcing bars to overlap, or when you want to start bar
distribution at a specific distance from the end of a part.
To indicate which bars to omit, select an option from the Reinforcing bar(s) not to be created
to the group list box:
• None (all reinforcing bars included)

Reinforcement
• First
• Last
• First and last
See also Spacing reinforcing bars (p. 138)
User-defined attributes of reinforcement

Create user-defined attributes to add information about reinforcing bars, bar groups, or
reinforcement meshes. Attributes can consist of numbers, text, or lists.
To create user-defined attributes, click the User-defined attributes button in the reinforcement
properties dialog box. Use the User field 1...4 fields to define the attributes you need.
You can also change the name of these fields, and add new ones, by editing the
objects.inp file. For more information, see Adding properties.
Meshes
A reinforcement mesh consists of reinforcing bars in two directions. You can define the
following properties.
Diameter 2
Spacing 2
Overhang
Spacing 1
Diameter 1
Length
Overhang
Width
Create mesh Create mesh using the Detailing > Create Reinforcement > Reinforcement Mesh command
or a component.
Mesh shape Reinforcement meshes can be:

Reinforcement
• Rectangular
• Polygonal
• Bent
Distribution You can create meshes with unevenly-spaced bars. You can also define a different bar size or
pattern of bars multiple different bar sizes for the longitudinal bars and the crossing bars.
Multiple bar sizes enable pattern creation. For example, if you enter bar diameters 20 2*6 in
the longitudinal direction, Tekla Structures creates a pattern with one size 20 bar and two size 6
bars. This pattern can be repeated in the mesh along the longitudinal direction.
For more information, see Customizing reinforcement meshes (p. 151).
Mesh size The way you define the size of the mesh depends on the shape of the mesh and how it was
created:
• Evenly-spaced rectangular meshes - manually define the size
• Polygonal and bent meshes - Tekla Structures automatically calculates the width and
length
• Unevenly-spaced meshes - Tekla Structures calculates the size of the mesh using the
values in the Distance(s), Left overhang, and Right overhang fields.
See also Reinforcement mesh (p. 161)
3.3 Working with reinforcement

This section explains how to create, place, attach, and modify reinforcement.
Topics Placing reinforcement (p. 140)

Attaching reinforcement to parts (p. 141)
Modifying reinforcement (p. 141)
Customizing reinforcement meshes (p. 151)
Defining custom reinforcement components (p. 153)
Placing reinforcement
To place a reinforcing bar group, pick two sets of points:
1. The first set of points defines the plane of the first bar and the shape of a single bar in the
group. Click the middle mouse button to end picking.
2. Pick a second set of points to indicate the distribution direction and length of the bars.
To place reinforcement components, select the part to reinforce.
See also Using reinforcement handles (p. 142).

Reinforcement
Attaching reinforcement to parts
Attach reinforcement to a part or cast unit when you want the reinforcing bars to follow the part
or cast unit if it is moved, copied, deleted, etc.
Tekla Structures automatically attaches a reinforcement to the part you pick before you place
the reinforcement. You can also manually attach reinforcement to a part or cast unit.
You must attach reinforcement to a part or cast unit to have Tekla

Structures merge automatic reinforcing bar marks. See Merged
reinforcement marks.
Attaching To manually attach reinforcement to a part or cast unit:

manually
1. Select the reinforcement to attach.
2. Right-click and select Attach to Part from the pop-up menu.
3. Select the part to attach the reinforcement to.
Detaching To detach reinforcement from a part:

1. Select the reinforcement to detach.
2. Right-click and select Detach from Part from the pop-up menu.
Modifying reinforcement
To modify a single reinforcing bar, bar group, or reinforcement mesh, double-click the
reinforcement to open the properties dialog box.
To modify the properties of a reinforcement component, double-click the blue modeling tool
symbol (M).
To update the reinforcing bar, bar group, reinforcement mesh, or component you selected, click
Modify.
Topics Changing reinforcement shape (p. 141)

Using reinforcement handles (p. 142)
Using adaptivity (p. 143)
Ungrouping a reinforcement (p. 145)
Grouping reinforcements (p. 147)
Adding points to a reinforcement (p. 148)
Removing points from a reinforcement (p. 149)
Splitting reinforcing bar groups (p. 150)
Splitting reinforcing bars in a group (p. 150)
Combining two reinforcing bars or reinforcing bar groups into one (p. 150)
Exploding reinforcement (p. 150)
Changing reinforcement shape

To change the shape of the reinforcement, you can:
• Add bar corners
• Remove bar corners
• Move bar and mesh corners
• Add points to reinforcing bars, bar groups, and bent meshes

Reinforcement
• Remove points from reinforcing bars, bar groups, and bent meshes
• Change the direction of the longitudinal mesh bars
• Change the distribution length of bar groups
Using reinforcement handles

Tekla Structures uses handles to indicate:
• The ends and corners of a reinforcing bar
• The distribution length of a bar group
• The corners and main bar direction of a mesh
When you select a reinforcement, the handles turn magenta.
Examples Here are some ways to use handles to modify reinforcement:
Handles to change group distribution length
Handles to move bar corners

Reinforcement
Handles to move mesh corners
Handles to change main bar direction
To use handles to modify reinforcement:

1. Select the reinforcement to display its handles.
2. Click the handle you want to move. Tekla Structures highlights the handle.
3. Move the handle(s) like any other object. If Drag and drop is active, just drag the handle
to a new position.
For more information, see Moving an object, Moving an object using drag-and-drop and
Polygon cuts.
Using adaptivity
Reinforcements follow the shape of the part also when their handles are located on the face or
edge of the part.
The following types of adaptivity are available:
• Fixed adaptivity: handles retain their absolute distances to the nearest part faces.
• Relative adaptivity: handles retain their relative distances to the nearest part faces in
relation to the part’s overall size.
To modify the general adaptivity settings, go to Tools > Options > Options... > General.
You can modify the adaptivity settings for each part separately. These modifications override
the general settings.
Example • Reinforcing bars in their original positions:

Reinforcement
• Fixed adaptivity:
• Relative adaptivity:

Reinforcement
Ungrouping a reinforcement
You can ungroup reinforcing bar groups and reinforcement meshes. Only reinforcements where
each reinforcing bar is in one plane can be ungrouped.
To ungroup a reinforcement:
1. Click Detailing > Create Reinforcement > Ungroup.
2. Select one of the reinforcing bars in a reinforcing bar group or in a reinforcement mesh.
The reinforcing bar group is replaced with single reinforcing bars. The single bars get
the same properties and offsets as the group.
If you ungroup a reinforcement mesh, the offsets for single bars are zero.
Limitations You cannot ungroup circular or curved reinforcing bar groups.

Reinforcement
Example
Before ungrouping:
After ungrouping:
See also Grouping reinforcements (p. 147)

Reinforcing bar (p. 155)
Reinforcing bar group (p. 156)
Reinforcement mesh (p. 161)

Reinforcement
Grouping reinforcements
You can group single reinforcing bars and reinforcing bar groups. Only reinforcements where
each reinforcing bar is in one plane can be grouped. All groups are created with exact spacings.
Single reinforcing bars need to have the same bending shape.
To group single reinforcing bars or reinforcing bar groups:
1. Click Detailing > Create Reinforcement > Group.
2. Select all the reinforcing bars or reinforcing bar groups that you want to group.
3. Click the middle mouse button.
4. Select one reinforcing bar or reinforcing bar group to copy the properties from.
The new group gets the same properties as the selected reinforcing bar.
The reinforcing bar or reinforcing bar group that you copy the properties
from is also added to the group. This means, for example, that you
cannot copy properties from a separate reinforcing bar group which you
do not want to include in your new reinforcing bar group.
Limitations You cannot create circular or curved reinforcing bar groups by grouping.
Example
Before grouping:

Reinforcement
After grouping:
See also Ungrouping a reinforcement (p. 145)

Reinforcing bar (p. 155)
Adding points to a reinforcement

You can modify the shape of a single reinforcing bar, reinforcing bar group, or a bent mesh by
adding points to the reinforcement.
To add points to a reinforcement:
1. Select a single reinforcing bar, a reinforcing bar group, or a bent mesh.
2. Click Detailing > Modify Polygon Shape.
3. Pick the first existing polygon point (1).
4. Pick new points (2, 3).
5. Pick the second existing polygon point (4).
The new points are added to the reinforcement, and the shape of the reinforcement is
modified.

Reinforcement
Limitations You cannot modify the shape of polygonal or rectangular meshes, or the shape of tapered
reinforcing bar groups by adding points.
See also Removing points from a reinforcement (p. 149)

Modifying the shape of a polygon
Removing points from a reinforcement

You can modify the shape of a single reinforcing bar, reinforcing bar group, or a bent mesh by
removing points from the reinforcement.
To remove points from a reinforcement:
1. Select a single reinforcing bar, a reinforcing bar group, or a bent mesh.
3. Pick the first existing polygon point (1).
4. Pick the second existing polygon point (2).
5. Pick a point to be removed (3 or 4).
The point to be removed needs to be in between the two previously picked (1) and (2)
points.
The points are removed from the reinforcement, and the shape of the reinforcement is
modified.
Limitations You cannot modify the shape of polygonal or rectangular meshes, or the shape of tapered
reinforcing bar groups by removing points.
See also Adding points to a reinforcement (p. 148)


Reinforcement
Splitting reinforcing bar groups
You can split normal and tapered reinforcing bar groups into two groups.
1. Click Edit > Split.
2. Select the reinforcing bar group.
3. Pick two points to indicate where to split the group.
You cannot split reinforcing bar groups diagonally.
See also Splitting reinforcing bars in a group (p. 150)

Splitting reinforcing bars in a group

You can split reinforcing bars in normal and tapered reinforcing bar groups using a split line.
2. Select the reinforcing bar group.
3. Pick two points to indicate where to split the bars.
Once split, each new reinforcing bar group retains the properties of the
original group. For example, if the bars in the original group had hooks
at both ends, bars in the new groups also have hooks at both ends.
Modify the properties of the new groups if needed.
See also Splitting reinforcing bar groups (p. 150)

Combining two reinforcing bars or reinforcing bar groups into one

You can combine two single reinforcing bars or reinforcing bar groups into one. Reinforcing
bars can be combined if their end points are connected, or the bars are parallel and close to each
other. However, in certain cases it is possible to combine reinforcements that are not connected
nor parallel. The combined reinforcement gets the same properties as the first selected bar.
To combine two single reinforcing bars or two reinforcing bar groups into one:
1. Click Edit > Combine.
2. Select the first single bar or bar group to be combined.
3. Select the second single bar or bar group to be combined.
Limitations You cannot combine Tapered N reinforcing bar groups.
See also Splitting reinforcing bar groups (p. 150)

Splitting reinforcing bars in a group (p. 150)
Exploding reinforcement
Before you can modify or remove single bars in a reinforcement component, you need to use
the Explode Component command to ungroup the bars that the reinforcement contains.
To ungroup reinforcing bars:
1. Click Detailing > Component > Explode Component.
2. Select the blue modeling tool symbol (M) on the reinforcement. Tekla Structures ungroups
the reinforcing bars.

Reinforcement
Reinforcement geometry validity
Reinforcement creation or modification can result in invalid reinforcement geometry. For
example, too big bending radius can cause invalid reinforcement geometry.
The invalid geometry is visualized in the model. Tekla Structures displays a warning message,
and draws a thin line between the reinforcement handles to show the invalid geometry. You can
correct the reinforcement geometry by selecting the line and modifying the reinforcement
properties.
You can check the reinforcement geometry validity by running the command Tools >
Diagnose & Repair Model > Dianose Model. The report lists the reinforcements with invalid
geometry.
If a model contains reinforcements with invalid geometry, the reinforcements are not shown in
the drawings. The reinforcements become visible when the geometry is corrected.
Limitations Reinforcement geometry validity check does not work with circular or curved reinforcing bar
groups.
Conceptual reinforcements
Conceptual reinforcements can be created only with Steel Detailing, Reinforced Concrete
Detailing and Engineering configurations.
Engineers or detailers can model conceptual reinforcements that show the geometry of the
reinforcements. Conceptual reinforcements look similar to detailed reinforcements but do not
include the option to perform numbering. When you create a conceptual reinforcement, Tekla
Structures displays a warning message noting that you cannot number the reinforcement.
You can use the Inquire command to check whether the reinforcement is conceptual or
detailed.
Conceptual reinforcements can be converted to detailed reinforcements. You can convert
individual conceptual reinforcements to detailed reinforcements in Full, Precast Concrete
Detailing and Reinforced Concrete Detailing configurations.
Detailed reinforcements can be converted to conceptual reinforcements in Steel Detailing and
Engineering configurations.
Modifying part properties does not automatically convert a detailed reinforcement to a
conceptual one, or vice versa. For example, if you use the Engineering configuration and
modify the model, detailed reinforcements do not convert back to conceptual reinforcements.
See also Converting conceptual reinforcements to detailed reinforcements (p. 151)
Converting conceptual reinforcements to detailed reinforcements

Individual conceptual reinforcements that have been created with Steel Detailing or
Engineering configuration can be converted to detailed reinforcements in Full, Precast
Concrete Detailing, and Reinforced Concrete Detailing configurations.
To convert conceptual reinforcements to detailed reinforcements:
1. Select the reinforcement.
2. Right-click and select Convert to detailed reinforcement.
If you want to convert detailed reinforcements to conceptual reinforcements in Engineering or
Steel Detailing configuration, right-click and select Convert to conceptual reinforcement.
See also Conceptual reinforcements (p. 151)
Customizing reinforcement meshes

You can customize reinforcement meshes using the Select Mesh dialog box.

Reinforcement
1. In the Reinforcement Mesh Properties dialog box, click the Select button next to the
Mesh field to open the Select Mesh dialog box.
2. In the Select Mesh dialog box, select a standard mesh from the mesh catalog and use it
as a basis for the customized mesh.
3. Modify the mesh properties.
4. Enter a name for the mesh in the Selected mesh field. The default name is
CUSTOM_MESH.
5. Click OK to close the Select Mesh dialog box and to save the properties.
6. To save customized mesh properties for later use, enter a name in the Save as field in
the Reinforcement Mesh Properties dialog box and click the Save as button.
To later use saved mesh properties in the Reinforcement Mesh

Properties dialog box, select the name of the mesh properties in the
Load list box and click the Load button.
Custom mesh You can define the following properties for the customized reinforcement meshes:
properties
Longitudinal distance
Cross distance
Longitudinal left overhang
Longitudinal right overhang
Cross left overhang
Cross right overhang
Length
Width

Reinforcement
Spacing method Defines how the mesh bars are distributed. The options are:
• Same distance for all: Use to create meshes with
evenly-spaced bars.
Tekla Structures distributes as many bars as possible for
the length of Length or Width, using the Distance(s)
and Left overhang values.
The Right overhang is calculated automatically, and it
cannot be zero.
• Multiple varying distances: Use to create meshes with
unevenly-spaced bars.
Tekla Structures calculates the Width and Length based
on the Distance(s), the Left overhang and the Right
overhang values.
If you do not change any of the values, the spacing
method changes back to Same distance for all.
Distance(s) Spacing values of longitudinal or crossing bars.
If you select the Multiple varying distances spacing method,
enter all spacing values, separated by spaces. You can use
multiplication to repeat spacing values. For example:
2*150 200 3*400 200 2*150
Left overhang Extensions of longitudinal bars over the outermost crossing
bars.
Right overhang
Extensions of crossing bars over the outermost longitudinal
bars.
Diameter Diameter or size of longitudinal or crossing bars.
You can define multiple diameters for the bars in both
directions. Enter all the diameter values, separated by spaces.
You can use multiplication to repeat diameter values. For
example, 12 2*6 in longitudinal direction and 6 20 2*12
in crossing direction.
Width Length of crossing bars.
Length Length of longitudinal bars.
Grade The steel grade of the bars in the mesh.

Meshes (p. 139)
Defining custom reinforcement components

You can create customized reinforcement details and save them in the component catalog for
later use.
Preconditions Create a concrete part and reinforce it in the way you want the reinforcement to appear in the
custom component. You can create the reinforcement either by exploding and modifying an
existing reinforcement component, or by creating the reinforcing bars individually.
Usage 1. Click Detailing > Component > Define Custom Component....

Reinforcement
2. On the Type/Notes tab, select Detail in the Type list box, and enter a name for the
custom reinforcement.
3. Click Next.
4. Select the reinforcing bars to use in the custom reinforcement and click Next.
5. Select the main part and click Next.
6. In DETAIL POSITION, select Main part to position the reinforcement by the main part.
7. Click Finish.
Result
You have now defined a simple custom reinforcement component, which you can use in
locations similar to the one where it was originally created. This component is not parametric
and Tekla Structures does not adjust dimensions to suit any changes in the model. To create a
parametric custom component, see Editing custom components (p. 73).
See also Using a custom component (p. 111)

Detailing > Component > Define Custom Component... (p. 117)
Exploding components (p. 66)
3.4 Single bars, bar groups, and meshes

Tekla Structures includes the following tools to create single reinforcing bars, bar groups, and
reinforcement meshes.

Reinforcing bar (p. 155) Creates a single reinforcing bar.
Reinforcing bar group Creates a reinforcing bar group.

(p. 156)
Curved reinforcing bar Creates a curved reinforcing bar group.

group (p. 158)
Circular reinforcing bar Creates a circular reinforcing bar group.

group (p. 160)
Reinforcement mesh (p. Creates a reinforcement mesh.

161)
Reinforcement strand Creates prestressed strands.

pattern (p. 163)
Reinforcement splice (p. Joins reinforcing bars or reinforcing bar

166) groups together with reinforcement
splices.
Reinforcement mesh Creates an array of overlapped
array in area (89) reinforcement meshes.
Lifting anchor (80) Creates two lifting anchors or anchor

groups for a concrete part.

Reinforcement
Reinforcing bar
Synopsis This command creates a reinforcing bar.
Preconditions Create the part to reinforce.

Calculate the required area of reinforcement.
Description Tekla Structures creates the reinforcing bar using the properties in the Reinforcing bar
properties dialog box. The filename extension of a saved bar properties file is rbr.

Series and The mark series of the bar. Numbering
Start no reinforcements
Name The user-definable name of the Basic reinforcement
bar. properties (p. 134)
Size The diameter of the bar or a
mark defining it.
Grade The steel grade of the bar.
Bending The internal radius of the bends
radius in the bar.
You can enter a separate value
for each bar bend. Separate the
values with spaces.
Class Used to group reinforcement.
Shape The shape of the hook. Hooks (p. 135)
Angle The angle of the custom hook.
Radius The internal bending radius of
the standard or custom hook.
Length The length of the straight part of
Cover The distances from the part Concrete cover (p.
thickness on surfaces to the bar on the same 137)
plane plane as the bar.
Cover The distance from the part
thickness from surface to the bar, or bar end,
plane perpendicular to the bar plane.
Start The concrete cover thickness or
leg length at the first end of the
bar.
End The concrete cover thickness or
leg length at the second end of
the bar.
User-defined User-defined reinforcement User-defined
attributes... properties. attributes of
reinforcement (p.
139)
Usage 1. Double-click the Create reinforcing bar icon.

2. Enter or modify the bar properties.
3. Click Apply or OK to save the properties.
4. Select the part to reinforce. Tekla Structures attaches the bar to the part.

Reinforcement
5. Pick the starting point of the bar.
6. Pick the other bar reference points.
7. Click the middle mouse button to finish picking.
See also Reinforcing bar group (p. 156)

Working with reinforcement (p. 140)
Reinforcing bar group
Synopsis This command creates a reinforcing bar group.

Description A reinforcing bar group includes several identical, or very similar, reinforcing bars. You first
define the shape of a single bar, then the direction in which Tekla Structures distributes the
bars.
Tekla Structures creates the reinforcing bar group using the properties in the Reinforcing bar
properties dialog box. The filename extension of a saved bar group properties file is rbg.

mark defining it.
Bending The internal radius of the bar
radius bends.
You can enter a separate value
for each bar bend. Separate the
values with spaces.
Shape The shape of the hook. Hooks (p. 135)
Angle The angle of the custom hook.
Radius The internal bending radius of
Length The length of the straight part of

Reinforcement
Cover The distances from the part Concrete cover (p.
thickness on surfaces to the bar on the same 137)
plane plane as the bar.
Start The concrete cover thickness or
leg length at the first end of the
bar.
End The concrete cover thickness or
leg length at the second end of
the bar.
reinforcement (p.
139)
Creation How to create the bar group. Spacing reinforcing
method etc. bars (p. 138)
Additional Omitting reinforcing
actions bars (p. 138)
Tapered bar group
(p. 157)
Usage 1. Double-click the Create reinforcing bar group icon.

2. Enter or modify the bar group properties.
4. Select the part to reinforce. Tekla Structures attaches the bar group to the part.
5. Pick the bar starting point.
6. Pick the other bar reference points.
8. Pick the starting point of the bar group.
9. Pick the end point of the bar group.
Tapered bar To create a tapered bar group:

group
1. Double-click the Create reinforcing bar group icon.
3. On the Group tab, select an option from the Bar group type list box:
Option Description
Normal Not tapered.
Tapered One bar dimension changes linearly in

the group.
Tapered ridge One bar dimension changes linearly.
The dimension is longest in the middle
of the group.
Tapered curved One bar dimension changes along a
curve. The dimension is longest in the
middle of the group.

Reinforcement
Option Description
Tapered N One bar dimension changes linearly
between N ridges. Enter the number of
ridges in the Number of cross
sections field.
Spiral The reinforcing bars rise in a polygonal
or circular shape along the longitudinal
axis of the part.
1. Click Apply or OK.

3. Pick points to define the shape of the bar at the first cross section. Click the middle mouse
button to finish picking.
4. For the second and subsequent cross sections, pick points to define the shape of the bar.
Click the middle mouse button to finish picking.
If you select the Normal option, you only need to define bar shape and bar distribution length.
If you change the type of a tapered bar group, Tekla Structures adjusts
the number of handles. You can then drag handles to modify the group.
Spiral bar group To create a spiral bar group:

1. Double-click the Create reinforcing bar group icon.
3. On the Group tab, select Spiral from the Bar group type list box:
6. Pick points to define the shape of the bar at the first cross section. Click the middle mouse
button to finish picking.
7. For the second and subsequent cross sections, pick points to define the shape of the bar.
Click the middle mouse button to finish picking.

Working with reinforcement (p. 140)
Curved reinforcing bar group (p. 158)
Circular reinforcing bar group (p. 160)
Curved reinforcing bar group
Synopsis Creates a group of curved reinforcing bars.

Reinforcement
Description Tekla Structures creates the curved reinforcing bar group using the properties in the
Reinforcing bar properties dialog box. See Reinforcing bar group (p. 156) for more
information on the common properties in this dialog box.
Usage To create a curved bar group:

1. Double-click the Create curved reinforcing bar group icon.
2. Enter or modify the reinforcing bar group properties.
5. Pick three points on an arc to define the curve:
6. Pick two points to indicate the distribution direction of the bars:
See also Working with reinforcement (p. 140)

Circular reinforcing bar group (p. 160)

Reinforcement
Circular reinforcing bar group
Synopsis Creates a group of circular reinforcing bars.

Description Tekla Structures creates the circular reinforcing bar group using the properties in the
Reinforcing bar properties dialog box. See Reinforcing bar group (p. 156) for more
information on the common properties in this dialog box.
Usage To create a circular bar group:

1. Double-click the Create circular reinforcing bar group icon.
2. Enter or modify the reinforcing bar group properties.
5. Pick three points to define the circlular bars
6. Pick two points to indicate the distribution direction of the bars.

Reinforcement
Curved reinforcing bar group (p. 158)
Reinforcement mesh
Synopsis This command creates a reinforcement mesh.

Description You can create the following types of reinforcement meshes:

• Rectangular
• Polygonal
• Bent
Tekla Structures creates the reinforcement mesh using the properties in the Reinforcement
Mesh Properties dialog box. The filename extension of a saved mesh properties file is rbm.

Prefix and The mark series of the mesh. Numbering
mesh. properties (p. 134)
Mesh Select a mesh from the mesh Meshes (p. 139)
catalog. Customizing
You can also use a customized reinforcement
mesh. meshes (p. 151)
Grade The steel grade of the bars in the Basic reinforcement
mesh. properties (p. 134)
Mesh type The shape of the mesh. Select Meshes (p. 139)
Polygon, Rectangle, or Bent.
Width
For rectangular meshes, enter
Length
the width and length of the
Bending mesh.
radius
For bent meshes, enter the
bending radius.
Cross bar Defines whether the crossing
location bars are located above or below
the longitudinal bars.
Cut by father Defines whether the polygon or Meshes (p. 139)
part cuts part cuts in the part cut also the
mesh.

Reinforcement
Cover The distance from the part Concrete cover (p.
thickness on surface to the main bars on the 137)
plane same plane as the bars.
Cover Thickness of concrete cover or
thickness start leg length from the mesh starting
point.
Cover Thickness of concrete cover or
thickness end leg length at the end point of the
bar. Used for bent meshes.
reinforcement (p.
139)
Hooks tab The shape, angle, radius, and Hooks (p. 135)
length of hooks at the start and
end of the crossing mesh bars.
The properties of standard meshes are defined in the

mesh_database.inp file, located in the ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\<environment>\
profil folder.
Usage Rectangular
To create a rectangular mesh:
1. Set the work plane parallel to the plane where you want to create the mesh.
2. Double-click the Create reinforcement mesh icon.
3. In the Mesh type list box, select Rectangle.
4. Enter or modify the mesh dimensions and the other properties.
6. Select the part to reinforce. Tekla Structures attaches the mesh to the part.
7. Pick the starting point of the mesh.
8. Pick a point to indicate the direction of the longitudinal bars. Tekla Structures creates the
mesh parallel to the work plane, to the left of the points you picked.
Polygonal
To create a polygonal mesh:
1. Double-click the Create reinforcement mesh icon.
2. In the Mesh type list box, select Polygon.
3. Enter or modify the mesh properties.
6. Pick the starting point of the mesh.
7. Pick the corner points of the mesh.
9. Pick two points to indicate the direction of the longitudinal bars.
Bent
To create a bent mesh:

Reinforcement
1. Double-click the Create reinforcement mesh icon to open the Reinforcement Mesh
Properties dialog box.
2. In the Mesh type list box, select Bent.
3. Enter the bending radius.
4. Enter or modify the other mesh properties.
6. Click the Create reinforcement mesh icon.
8. Pick points to indicate the bending shape of the crossing bars.
9. Click the middle mouse button to finish picking points.
10. Pick two points to indicate the length and direction of the longitudinal bars.
Reinforcement strand pattern
Synopsis This command creates prestressed strands for concrete parts.
Preconditions
Description Tekla Structures creates straight or deflected strands based on the strand profile you indicate
using the properties in the Reinforcing bar properties dialog box.

mark defining it.
Bending The internal radius of the bar
radius bends.
Pull per strand The pull per strand (kN).
Number of Defines the number of cross
cross sections sections of the strand pattern.
reinforcement (p.
139)

Reinforcement
Debonded Enter the strand number in this Debonding strands
strands field. The strand number is the (p. 165)
picking order number of the
strand.
From start Enter the length of the
debonding. If you select the
Middle to start
Symmetry checkbox, values in
Middle to end fields From start and From
From end Middle to start are copied to
From end and Middle to end
fields.
Symmetry Defines if the end and start
lengths are symmetrical.
Usage To create prestressed strands for a concrete part:

1. Double-click the Create reinforcement strand pattern icon.
2. Enter or modify the strand properties.
3. In the Number of cross sections field, enter a number based on the strand profile. For
example:
Number of
Strand profile patterns
1
4. Define the lenghts of the debonding zones.

6. Click the Create reinforcement strand pattern icon.
7. Pick the part you are creating strands for.
8. Pick points to position the strands (for example, at the end of a part):
The points you pick define the first cross section. Click the middle mouse button to finish
picking.

Reinforcement
9. If you chose to create a single cross section, pick two points to define the length of the
strands. Click the middle mouse button to finish picking.
10. If you chose to create two or more cross sections, for each cross section, pick points to
indicate the strand positions. Pick the strand positions in the same order as for the first
cross section. After each cross section, click the middle mouse button to finish picking.
Debonding To debond strands:

strands
1. Double-click the Create reinforcement strand pattern icon.
2. On the Debonding tab, enter the debonding properties.
3. Click Add button to create a new row in the table.
4. Enter the strand numbers in the Debonded strands field. The strand number is the picking
order number of the strand:
• To set the same values for all the strands, enter all the strand numbers, separated by a
space (e.g. 1 2 3 4).
• To set separate values for each strand, click Add to add a new row, then enter the
strand number in the Debonded strands field.
5. Define the debonded lengths:
• To set symmetrical lengths, select the End lengths = start lengths checkbox and only
enter values in the From start or Middle to start fields. Debonding lengths:
6. Click Modify and Apply.

Tekla Structures displays the debonded section of the strand in red in rendered views, or as
a broken line in wire frame views.
Debonded strands appear as broken lines in drawings.


Reinforcement
Reinforcement splice
This command joins reinforcing bars or reinforcing bar groups together with reinforcement
splices.
Preconditions Create the reinforcing bars or bar groups to join. There can be a gap between them.
Description Tekla Structures creates the reinforcement splice using the current properties in the
Reinforcement Splice Properties dialog box. The filename extension of a saved splice
properties file is rsp.

Joint type The type of the splice. The options are: Lap left creates the lap to
the direction of the first
• Lap right
reinforcing bar or bar
• Lap left group selected, Lap right
• Lap both to the direction of the
second.
• Muff joint
Lap both centers the lap
• Welded joint
between the bars or bar
groups.
Lap length The length of the lap joint.
Offset The offset of the splice center point
from the point where the bars originally
met.
Bar positions Defines whether the lapping bars are on
top of each other or parallel to each
other.
Usage 1. Click Detailing > Properties > Reinforcement > Reinforcement Splice....
2. Enter or modify the splice properties.
4. Click Detailing > Create Reinforcement > Reinforcement Splice.
5. Select the first reinforcing bar or bar group.
6. Select the second reinforcing bar or bar group.
Tekla Structures indicates reinforcement splices in the model using blue splice symbols:
If needed, you can move the splice along reinforcing bars.

To move the splice:
1. Select the splice symbol.
2. Right-click and select Move.
3. Pick an origin and a destination point for the splice.

Reinforcement
4 Reinforcing bar bending
types
Tekla Structures recognizes different reinforcing bar bending shapes and assigns bending type
identifiers to them. The table below lists these reinforcing bar bending types.
If Tekla Structures does not recognize the shape of a reinforcing bar, it assigns the UNKNOWN
bending type to it.
The bending type identifiers in the table below are internal, hard-coded types of Tekla
Structures. The leg dimensions (D1, D2, etc.) and bending angles (A1, A2, etc.) of reinforcing
bars are internal dimensions and angles. You can map internal types, for example, to country-
or project-specific types, and internal dimensions and angles to specific template attributes.
You do this in the rebar_schedule_config.inp file. See Reinforcement in templates
(p. 188).
Reinforcing bar bending dimensions are calculated so that the leg dimensions (D1, D2, etc.)
follow the outer edge, or the edge extension, of the reinforcing bar. The total length is
calculated according to the center line of the reinforcing bar.
The magenta points in the images represent the points you pick in the model when you create
reinforcing bars.
Type Image
1
2_1
Requires standard bending radius.

2_2
Non-standard bending radius.

Reinforcing bar bending types
Type Image
3_1
3_2
4_2
4_3
4_4
5_1
5_2

Type Image
5_3
6_1
6_2
Requires 180 degree hook.

10

Type Image
11
D1 = Radius from center of circle to the center line of reinforcing

bar.
12
13
Can also be modeled using hooks at both ends (i.e. model D1 and
D5 using 90 degree hooks).
14
Requires 90 degree hooks at both ends.

14_2

Type Image
14_3
14_4

14_5
Recognized when the start point and end point are in the same
location and no hooks are used.
If XS_REBAR_RECOGNITION_HOOKS_CONSIDERATION is set to
FALSE, reinforcing bars with hooks (types 14 and 48) are recognized
as 14_5.
15
Requires hooks at both ends.

Type Image
16_1
16_2
17
18
19
20_1

Type Image
20_2
21
22
23
24
25
26

Type Image
27

28

29

29_2
29_3
29_4

Type Image
29_5
30

31

32

32_2
33

Type Image
34
35

36

36_2
Can also be modeled using hooks at both ends.

36_3
Can also be modeled using hooks at both ends.

Type Image
37

38
Requires 180 degree hook at one end and 90 degree hook at the
other end.
38_2
39
40

41

42

Type Image
43
43_2
44

44_2

45

Type Image
45_2
Requires 180 hooks at both ends.

46

47

48

48_2

Type Image
48_3
49
D1 = Reinforcing bar center line diameter.

49_2
50

51

Type Image
52

53

54

55
56
57
58

Type Image
59
60
61

61_2
Recognized if
XS_REBAR_RECOGNITION_HOOKS_CONSIDERATION is set to
FALSE.
61_3

62
Requires hook.

Type Image
63
Requires hook.
64

64_2
Recognized if
FALSE.
65

Type Image
65_2
Recognized if
FALSE.
66
67
67_2
68

Type Image
69_1
69_2
70_1
70_2
71
72

Type Image
73_1
73_2
73_3
74
75_1

Type Image
75_2
76
77
78
79_1

Type Image
79_2
80
UNKNOWN For example:
4.1 Reinforcement in templates

Audience This topic is aimed at Tekla Structures users who need to localize reinforcing bar bending types
or to create templates for reinforcing bar bending schedules.
Reinforcement You can show dimensions, bending angles, and bending types of reinforcing bars in drawings
templates and reports by including reinforcement-specific attributes, such as DIM_A, ANG_S, SHAPE, and
SHAPE_INTERNAL, in template fields. For more information on creating templates, see the
Template Editor (TplEd) online help.
Mapping Use the rebar_schedule_config.inp file in the ..\Tekla

dimensions Structures\<version>\environments\<environment>\system folder to
map:
• Tekla Structures internal reinforcing bar dimensions and angles with specific template
attributes
• Tekla Structures internal reinforcing bar bending types with specific bending types
These mappings are environment-specific by default. You can modify them to suit your
company or project needs.
You can use equations, functions, and if statements to calculate the dimensions and angles you
need to show.

Use any standard text editor (for example, Notepad) to edit the
rebar_schedule_config.inp file.
Examples The following example of the rebar_schedule_config.inp file maps the internal
bending type 5_1 to the bending type identifier E, and the leg dimensions and bending angles to
specific template attributes:
rebar_schedule_config.inp (Example 1)
BEND_TYPE_5_1[1]="E"
BEND_TYPE_5_1[2]="DIM_A=D1"
BEND_TYPE_5_1[3]="DIM_B=D5"
BEND_TYPE_5_1[4]="DIM_C=D2"
BEND_TYPE_5_1[5]="DIM_TD=TD"
BEND_TYPE_5_1[6]="ANG_U=A1"
BEND_TYPE_5_1[7]="ANG_V=A2"
With this mapping, the internal bending type 6_2 becomes XY, and the template attributes
DIM_B and DIM_C will show the horizontal and vertical dimensions of the second leg D2, and
DIM_E and DIM_F the horizontal and vertical dimensions of the fourth leg D4:
BEND_TYPE_6_2[1]="XY"
BEND_TYPE_6_2[2]="DIM_A=D1"
BEND_TYPE_6_2[3]="DIM_B=D2*COS(A2*PI/
180)"
BEND_TYPE_6_2[4]="DIM_C=D2*SIN(A2*PI/
180)"
BEND_TYPE_6_2[5]="DIM_D=D3"
BEND_TYPE_6_2[6]="DIM_E=D4*COS(A1*PI/
180)"
BEND_TYPE_6_2[7]="DIM_F=D4*SIN(A1*PI/
180)"
BEND_TYPE_6_2[8]="DIM_G=D5"
BEND_TYPE_6_2[9]="DIM_TD=TD"
The following example maps the internal bending type 4 to the bending type identifier A if the
dimensions D1 and D3 are the same. Otherwise it maps 4 to B:
BEND_TYPE_4[1]=if (D1==D3) then ("A")
else ("B") endif
BEND_TYPE_4[2]="DIM_A=D1"
BEND_TYPE_4[3]="DIM_B=D2"
BEND_TYPE_4[4]="DIM_C=D3"
BEND_TYPE_4[5]="DIM_TD=TD"
If Tekla Structures does not recognize a reinforcing bar bending shape, it uses the internal
bending type UNKNOWN for it. In the rebar_schedule_config.inp file you can also
define how unknown bending types appear in drawings and reports. For example, you may just
want to use the bending type identifier ???, and list all leg dimensions and bending angles:

BEND_TYPE_UNKNOWN[1]="???"
BEND_TYPE_UNKNOWN[2]="DIM_A=D1"
BEND_TYPE_UNKNOWN[3]="DIM_B=D2"
BEND_TYPE_UNKNOWN[4]="DIM_C=D3"
BEND_TYPE_UNKNOWN[5]="DIM_D=D4"
BEND_TYPE_UNKNOWN[6]="DIM_E=D5"
BEND_TYPE_UNKNOWN[7]="DIM_F=D6"
BEND_TYPE_UNKNOWN[8]="ANG_S=A1"
BEND_TYPE_UNKNOWN[9]="ANG_T=A2"
BEND_TYPE_UNKNOWN[10]="ANG_U=A3"
BEND_TYPE_UNKNOWN[11]="ANG_V=A4"
BEND_TYPE_UNKNOWN[12]="DIM_TD=TD"
See also DIM_A ... DIM_G, DIM_H1, DIM_H2, DIM_I, DIM_J, DIM_K1, DIM_K2, DIM_O,
DIM_R, DIM_R_ALL, DIM_TD, DIM_X, DIM_Y
ANG_S, ANG_T, ANG_U, ANG_V
SHAPE
SHAPE_INTERNAL
Reinforcing bar bending types (p. 167)

5 User-defined reinforcing
bar bending shapes
You can define your own custom reinforcing bar bending shapes with the Rebar shape
manager tool, and thus increase the amount of recognised reinforcing bar shapes. Custom
bending shapes are useful when Tekla Structures does not recognize a reinforcing bar bending
shape and assigns it UNKNOWN bending type.
The custom bending shapes can be used in bending schedules and pull-out pictures in the same
way as the predefined, Tekla Structures internal bending shapes.
You can also import and export the custom bending shapes.
When you define your custom shapes, an XML file called RebarShapeRules.xml is
created in the currect model folder.
By default, Tekla Structures installation package already contains an XML file called
RebarShapeRules.xml. The file is located in ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\<environment>\system folder, and it
contains the most typical reinforcing bar shapes of your environment. These catalog shapes can
be appended with your custom shapes.
Defining your own custom bending shapes is meant for advanced users.
See also Defining your own reinforcing bar bending shapes (p. 191)
5.1 Defining your own reinforcing bar bending

shapes
To define your own reinforcing bar bending shape:
1. Set the advanced option XS_USE_USER_DEFINED_REBARSHAPERULES to TRUE to
enable the user-defined bending shape recognition.
2. Select reinforcing bars in the model.
3. Go to Tools > Macros..., and select RebarShapeManager.

User-defined reinforcing bar bending shapes
4. Click Run.
Rebar shape manager opens, and lists the selected reinforcing bars in the Model
rebars list. The Model rebars list shows the ID number and the bending shape code of
the reinforcing bars.
The Catalog shapes list shows the shapes that exist in the RebarShapeRules.xml
file.
Alternatively, you can first open Rebar shape manager and then select
reinforcing bars in the model.
Click Get selected to add the reinforcing bars to the Model rebars list.
5. Select one unknown shape from the Model rebars list.

6. Define the needed bending shape information.
• Use the Shape code box to enter a shape code for an unknown shape.
• Bending shape rules lists the rules for the bending shape. You can add or a delete a
rule by clicking the Add and Delete buttons. If you modify the Bending shape
rules, the Reset button restores the original rules.
• Select the Require hooks check box if you want to define different shape codes for
two bars that otherwise have exactly the same geometry, but the other bar has hooks
and the other one does not have hooks. By default, the hooks are not required and
the check box is not selected.
• Use Bending schedule fields to define the content for a bending schedule. Right-
click a field to select the shape properties, or to enter a formula.
• If you have already defined the shape code for the selected reinforcing bar but have
modified the shape code, bending shape rules or the bending schedule field
definitions, click Update to update the existing shape code definition.
The names of the Bending schedule fields (A, B, and so on) are used in
templates and reports. To make sure that also old reports work corrcetly,
we recommend that you use the same DIM_XX fields as used in the
rebar_schedule_config.inp file.
7. When you have finished defining the new shape, click Add to add the bending shape
definition to the RebarShapeRules.xml file.
To enable the Add button you need to change the bending shape rule,
enter a shape code or require the hooks.
8. Click Save to save the RebarShapeRules.xml file.

By default, the file is located in the current model folder.
Next time you create, for example, a bending schedule, Tekla Structures uses the
updated bending shape information and recognizes the added bending shape and assigns
a correct bending shape code to it.
Modeling When the reinforcing bar shape is being defined, the start or end of the modeling direction is
direction always sorted based on the bending angles and/or leg lengths. This means that the shape code
will be the same regardless of the modeling direction.
Bending radius is not taken into consideration in the sorting, and therefore it cannot be trusted
that radius 1 is always less than radius 2 or vice versa.

See also User-defined reinforcing bar bending shapes (p. 191)
Defining rules for reinforcing bar bending shapes manually (p. 193)
XS_USE_USER_DEFINED_REBARSHAPERULES
5.2 Defining rules for reinforcing bar bending shapes

manually
In some cases, the reinforcing bar bending shape rules defined by Rebar shape manager are
not sufficient to distinguish certain bending shapes. In such situations, you can add new
bending shape rules manually.
To define a reinforcing bar bending shape rule manually:
1. Click the Add button next to the Bending shape rules list.
The New bending rule dialog box opens.
2. Select the options from the lists to define the new rule.
The content of the lists depends on the shape and the bendings of the reinforcing bar.
3. Click OK to add the new rule to the Bending shape rules list.
The OK button is enabled only when the rule is valid.
Defining additional rules for bending shapes is meant for advanced

users.
Reinforcing bar bending shape rule settings

Use the New bending rule dialog box to manually define rules for reinforcing bar bending
shapes.
All the rule options are available in the New bending rule dialog box,
even though only certain selections are valid, depending on the type of
the conditions used.
The left and right condition of a rule need to be of the same type.
Option Description
Angle Bending angle between the legs.
Bending angle is always between 0 and +180
degrees. The angle cannot be negative.
Twist angle Angle around the reinforcing bar center axis
before the bar is bent.
For flat bars the twist angle is either 0 or
+180 degrees. For other bars the twist angle
is between -180 and +180 degrees.

Option Description
Radius Bending radius of the bending.
Radius * means that the same radius is
used in all bendings.
Rule Radius * = Radius 1 means that
all the bendings have equal radius.
Straight length Straight length between the start and the end
of adjacent bendings.
The field is available when there is no
straight part, for example, Straight
length 2 = 0.
Leg length Length of the leg.
Leg distance from leg Distance from the furthermost outer corner
of a leg perpendicular to another leg.
Leg Leg direction as a vector value.
Standard radius Standard minimum bending radius.
The bending radius depends on the size and
the grade of the bar.
Bar diameter Diameter of the reinforcing bar.
Constant angle Constant value of the angle.
Enter the value in the right-most box.
Constant radius Constant value of the radius.
Enter the value in the right-most box.
Angles
Twist angle
Radiuses

Straight length
Leg length
Legs

Defining your own reinforcing bar bending shapes (p. 191)
Defining rules for reinforcing bar bending shapes manually (p. 193)

Index
a bending shapes
defining................................................................191
reinforcing bars....................................................191
acos.............................................................................. 93 bending types
adaptivity defining................................................................191
reinforcement ...................................................... 143 reinforcing bars....................................................191
add bent mesh
anchor rod ............................................................. 25 adding points .......................................................148
base plate.............................................................. 25 removing points ...................................................149
beam to column connection .................................. 26 bind to plane .................................................................79
adding points binding using magnetic planes .....................................84
bent mesh ........................................................... 148 bolt assemblies
reinforcement ...................................................... 148 defining in connections..........................................41
reinforcing bar ..................................................... 148 bolts
reinforcing bar group ........................................... 148 bolt group orientation.............................................36
anchor rods bolt group pattern ..................................................37
add ........................................................................ 25 bolt position ...........................................................37
anchoring hooks ......................................................... 135 bolt spacing ...........................................................36
asin............................................................................... 93 defining........................................................... 33, 35
assemblies deleting..................................................................40
defining.................................................................. 33 edge distance ........................................................37
atan .............................................................................. 93 increasing bolt length ............................................35
atan2 ............................................................................ 93 number of ..............................................................36
attaching overview of properties on the bolts tab..................33
reinforcement to parts ......................................... 141 Boundary plane ..........................................................125
AutoConnection box plane ....................................................................119
using...................................................................... 42 browser.......................................................................124
automatic distances.................................................... 130
automatic properties..................................................... 14
ave................................................................................ 90
c
b cast-in-place ............................. 145, 147, 148, 149, 150
cast-in-situ ................................ 145, 147, 148, 149, 150
ceil ................................................................................90
base plate CIP............................................ 145, 147, 148, 149, 150
add ........................................................................ 25 collision plane .............................................................119
beam profiles columns
selecting ................................................................ 30 connect to beam....................................................26
beams combining
connect to column ................................................. 26 reinforcing bar groups .........................................150
bending radius............................................................ 134 reinforcing bars....................................................150
component catalog .......................................................17
component design
checking ................................................................16

components
concepts................................................................ 10 d
conceptual............................................................. 27
copying.................................................................. 22 default properties..........................................................14
creating view ......................................................... 27 default values
detailed.................................................................. 27 setting with the joints.def file .................................46
dialog box.............................................................. 11 defining
publish in catalog .................................................. 22 bending shapes ...................................................191
symbols ................................................................. 19 bending types ......................................................191
thumbnails............................................................. 21 Design tab ....................................................................16
types...................................................................... 10 Design type tab.............................................................16
using excel ............................................................ 58 detailed components ............................................. 27, 28
viewing .................................................................. 27 detailed reinforcement ................................................151
conceptual components .........................................27, 28 distance ........................................................................79
conceptual reinforcement ........................................... 151 reference distance.................................................81
concrete cover............................................................ 137 distance variable.........................................................128
connect double...........................................................................91
beam to column..................................................... 26
connection library, see component catalog .................. 17
Connection plane ....................................................... 125 e
connections
beam to column..................................................... 26
defining bolt assemblies........................................ 41 edge distance
construction planes ...................................................... 84 bolts.......................................................................37
copying end end plane.............................................................119
components........................................................... 22 Excel.............................................................................59
cos................................................................................ 93 excel
cosh.............................................................................. 93 example.................................................................59
creating using for components ............................................58
distance............................................................... 128 using with custom components ...........................114
custom component Excel.vb ........................................................................59
settings................................................................ 127 exp................................................................................89
custom component browser ....................................... 124 exploding
custom component settings........................................ 127 reinforcement ......................................................150
custom component wizard............................................ 66 exploding components..................................................66
custom components
browser ................................................................. 76
defining..........................................................66, 117
f
editor ..................................................................... 74
exporting and importing....................................... 112 fabs...............................................................................89
interface .............................................................. 105 fAD() .............................................................................93
password............................................................. 113 find................................................................................91
properties .............................................................. 72 floor...............................................................................90
protecting ............................................................ 113 formulae........................................................................86
tips on working with............................................. 115 fP()................................................................................88
types...................................................................... 70 functions for equations .................................................87
updating ................................................................ 73
using.................................................................... 111
custom connections...................................................... 66 g
custom details .............................................................. 66
custom reinforcement meshes ................................... 151
general tab....................................................................15
customizing
reinforcement ..............................................151, 153

geometry
reinforcement.......................................................151 m
getat..............................................................................91
grouping magnetic planes............................................................84
mesh....................................................................147 match ............................................................................91
reinforcement.......................................................147 materials
reinforcing bar group ...........................................147 defining ..................................................................32
gusset plane ...............................................................119 max ...............................................................................90
mesh ...........................................................................161
h bent......................................................................161
grouping...............................................................147
polygonal .............................................................161
handles ungrouping...........................................................145
of reinforcement...................................................142 min ................................................................................90
holes mod ...............................................................................89
creating..................................................................35 model browser ............................................................124
hypot .............................................................................89 modeling tips
working with custom components........................115
i modifying
reinforcement.......................................................141
moving
reinforcement splice.............................................166
In...................................................................................89
indicating component status with Excel design ............62
int..................................................................................91 n
j n! ...................................................................................89
joints.def
about......................................................................47
o
bolt and part properties..........................................51
bolt properties in clip angle connections................50 omitting reinforcing bars..............................................138
bolt properties in diagonal connections .................51 Outline plane...............................................................125
bolt properties in end plate connections ................50
bolt properties in gusset connections ....................50
bolt properties in shear plate connections .............50 p
connections that use joints.def ..............................48
defining bolt diameter and number of rows ...........50 parameters....................................................................85
defining global defaults..........................................48 part position number .....................................................31
entering values ......................................................48 parts
example of how Tekla Structures uses..................57 defining ..................................................................29
how it works...........................................................47 dialog box tabs.......................................................29
interpreting.............................................................47 dimensioning..........................................................30
part position number ..............................................31
l setting default prefix and start number ..................31
passwords
custom component ..............................................113
length ............................................................................91 plane types..................................................................125
log .................................................................................89 plates
defining ..................................................................29
dimensioning..........................................................30

pow............................................................................... 89 reinforcing bar group ..................................................156
prestressed strands adding points .......................................................148
debonding ........................................................... 163 circular.................................................................160
properties combining ............................................................150
automatic............................................................... 14 curved..................................................................158
default ................................................................... 14 grouping ..............................................................147
system default ....................................................... 14 removing points ...................................................149
publish in catalog.......................................................... 22 ungrouping ..........................................................145
reinforcing bar groups
r splitting ................................................................150
reinforcing bars
adding points .......................................................148
rebar ........................................................................... 155 bending types ......................................................167
bending types...................................................... 167 combining ............................................................150
rebar group................................................................. 156 removing points ...................................................149
rebar mesh ................................................................. 161 removing points
reference distances .................................................... 129 bent mesh............................................................149
reference function......................................................... 88 reinforcement ......................................................149
reinforcement reinforcing bar .....................................................149
adaptivity ............................................................. 143 reinforcing bar group ...........................................149
adding points....................................................... 148 reports
basic properties................................................... 134 on reinforcement .................................................188
bending radius..................................................... 134 round ............................................................................89
bending types...................................................... 134 rules
conceptual........................................................... 151 reinforcing bar bending shape.............................193
customizing ......................................................... 153
defining as custom components.......................... 153
detailed................................................................ 151
s
exploding............................................................. 150
geometry ............................................................. 151 seam.............................................................................70
grouping .............................................................. 147 setat..............................................................................91
hooks................................................................... 135 setting up Excel files.....................................................59
in templates......................................................... 188 sin .................................................................................93
invalid geometry .................................................. 151 sinh ...............................................................................93
modifying............................................................. 141 sketch browser ...........................................................124
omitting bars........................................................ 138 slotted holes
prestressed strands............................................. 163 defining..................................................................39
removing points................................................... 149 spacing reinforcing bars .............................................138
spacing................................................................ 138 spiral reinforcing bar groups .......................................156
splice ................................................................... 166 splice ..........................................................................166
strands ................................................................ 163 splitting
ungrouping .......................................................... 145 reinforcing bar groups .........................................150
user-defined attributes ........................................ 139 reinforcing bars in a group...................................150
reinforcement mesh.................................................... 161 sqave ............................................................................90
customizing ......................................................... 151 sqrt................................................................................89
reinforcement splice sqsum ...........................................................................90
moving................................................................. 166 strand pattern
reinforcing bar ............................................................ 155 reinforcement ......................................................163
bending shapes................................................... 191 string.............................................................................91
bending types...................................................... 191 sum...............................................................................90
reinforcing bar bending shape surface treatment
rules .................................................................... 193 in custom components ........................................105

system default properties..............................................14 updating
custom components...............................................73
t user-defined reinforcement attributes .........................139

using ASCII files with custom component...................114
using Excel with custom components .........................114
tan.................................................................................93
tanh...............................................................................93
tapered reinforcing bar groups....................................156
v
thumbnail images..........................................................21
variables............................................................... 78, 120
u viewing
components ...........................................................27
ungrouping
mesh....................................................................145
w
reinforcement.......................................................145
reinforcing bar group ...........................................145 welds
up direction ...................................................................13 defining ........................................................... 33, 41

Tekla Structures
Drawing Guide

December 2010

reserved.
conventions
Font Usage
for the first time.

things.
useful.
time.

Contents
1 Introduction to drawings ........................................................................ 17

1.1 Main features in drawings..................................................................................................................... 17
1.2 Screen layout........................................................................................................................................ 18
1.3 Drawing contents .................................................................................................................................. 19
Drawing layout and views ................................................................................................................ 19
Drawing objects................................................................................................................................ 20
1.4 Basic principles of drawings ................................................................................................................. 21
Integrated drawings.......................................................................................................................... 22
How drawings are updated .............................................................................................................. 22
Drawing associativity........................................................................................................................ 23
Associativity symbol .................................................................................................................. 23
Three levels of modifying drawings.................................................................................................. 24
2 Creating drawings ................................................................................... 27

2.1 Drawing types ....................................................................................................................................... 27
General arrangement drawings........................................................................................................ 27
Example: Foundation plan ......................................................................................................... 28
Example: Slab plan ................................................................................................................... 28
Example: Framing plan ............................................................................................................. 29
Example: Deck plan .................................................................................................................. 30
Example: Erection elevation drawing ........................................................................................ 31
Example: 3D isometric drawing ................................................................................................. 32
Example: Anchor bolt plan ........................................................................................................ 33
Single-part drawings ........................................................................................................................ 34
Example: Anchor bolt ................................................................................................................ 34
Example: Embed ....................................................................................................................... 35
Example: Plate .......................................................................................................................... 36
Assembly drawings .......................................................................................................................... 40
Example: Beam ......................................................................................................................... 40
Example: Stairs ......................................................................................................................... 40
Example: Rail ............................................................................................................................ 41
Example: Nested assembly ....................................................................................................... 42
Cast unit drawings............................................................................................................................ 44
Example: Beam ......................................................................................................................... 44
Example: Column ...................................................................................................................... 45
Example: Stairs ......................................................................................................................... 46
Multidrawings ................................................................................................................................... 47
2.2 Before creating drawings ...................................................................................................................... 48
2.3 Master Drawing Catalog ....................................................................................................................... 49
Master drawing types ....................................................................................................................... 50
Cloning templates ...................................................................................................................... 50
Saved settings ........................................................................................................................... 50
Rule sets ................................................................................................................................... 51
Wizards ..................................................................................................................................... 52
Searching for master drawings ........................................................................................................ 52
2.4 Cloning drawings .................................................................................................................................. 53
Creating drawings using cloning templates...................................................................................... 54
Using cloning templates from other models .............................................................................. 54
Cloning from the Drawing List .......................................................................................................... 55
Example: Cloning a general arrangement drawing ................................................................... 55
View-specific dimension cloning ...................................................................................................... 57
Cloning using drawing templates in template library........................................................................ 58
Cloned objects ................................................................................................................................. 58
Checking and modifying cloned drawings........................................................................................ 59
Refreshing drawing associativity...................................................................................................... 60
2.5 Creating drawings using saved settings ............................................................................................... 60
Creating general arrangement drawings.......................................................................................... 60
Creating single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings.................................................................... 61
2.6 Creating drawings using rule sets or wizards ....................................................................................... 62
2.7 Creating anchor bolt plans.................................................................................................................... 63
Objects included in the anchor bolt plan .......................................................................................... 64
Defining the included parts using drawing filters.............................................................................. 64
Including assemblies in anchor bolt plans........................................................................................ 65
2.8 Creating drawings using menu, toolbar or pop-up commands ............................................................. 65
Creating general arrangement drawings.......................................................................................... 66
Creating single-part, assembly, or cast unit drawings...................................................................... 66
Creating multidrawings..................................................................................................................... 67
Creating empty multidrawings and linking or copying views ..................................................... 67
Creating multidrawings of selected drawings ............................................................................ 68
Creating multidrawings of selected parts ................................................................................... 68
2.9 Creating multiple drawing sheets of the same part............................................................................... 69
Creating multiple drawing sheets using wizards .............................................................................. 69
Creating multiple drawing sheets using drawing properties............................................................. 69
3 Finding and opening drawings .............................................................. 71
3.1 Opening the Drawing List...................................................................................................................... 72
3.2 What is displayed in the Drawing List ................................................................................................... 72
3.3 Drawing status flags.............................................................................................................................. 73
How to read the drawing status information ..................................................................................... 74
3.4 Modifying Drawing List contents ........................................................................................................... 75
3.5 Searching drawings and saving the search results............................................................................... 76
3.6 Selecting drawings in the Drawing List ................................................................................................. 76
3.7 Checking whether parts have drawings ................................................................................................ 76
3.8 Opening drawings from the model ........................................................................................................ 77
3.9 Opening a new drawing when a drawing is already open..................................................................... 77
4 Editing drawings ..................................................................................... 79

4.1 Renaming drawings .............................................................................................................................. 79
4.2 Giving titles to drawings ........................................................................................................................ 80
4.3 Drawing views....................................................................................................................................... 80
Adding views in drawings ................................................................................................................. 81
Creating a detail view ................................................................................................................ 81
Creating a section view .............................................................................................................. 83
Creating a curved section view .................................................................................................. 84
Creating additional views of parts .............................................................................................. 85
Creating a view of an entire model view .................................................................................... 86
Creating a view of a selected area in a model view ................................................................... 87
Creating a view of a selected area in a drawing view ................................................................ 87
Creating a view for a reinforcement mesh ................................................................................. 88
Adding single-part views in assembly drawings ........................................................................ 89
Copying drawing views from another drawing.................................................................................. 89
Moving views to another drawing ..................................................................................................... 90
Linking views from another drawing ................................................................................................. 92
Changing drawing views .................................................................................................................. 92
Resizing drawing views ............................................................................................................. 92
Resizing the drawing view boundary ......................................................................................... 93
Moving drawing views ................................................................................................................ 94
Aligning views ............................................................................................................................ 95
Rotating drawing views .............................................................................................................. 96
Arranging drawing views ............................................................................................................ 96
Modifying drawing view properties ............................................................................................. 96
Modifying section properties ...................................................................................................... 97
Modifying detail properties ......................................................................................................... 98
4.4 Dimensions ........................................................................................................................................... 98
Adding dimensions........................................................................................................................... 99
Adding manual dimensions ....................................................................................................... 99
Adding manual dimensions using User Coordinate System .................................................... 103
Adding tags to dimensions ...................................................................................................... 104
Adding dual dimensions manually ........................................................................................... 107
Recreating dimensions for all parts ......................................................................................... 108
Adding predefined reinforcement dimensions ......................................................................... 109
Adding dimension (distribution) lines to reinforcing bars ......................................................... 110
Dimensioning spiral stirrup reinforcement groups ................................................................... 111
Dimensioning center of gravity ................................................................................................ 113
Semi-automatic dimensioning of general arrangement drawings .................................................. 115
Adding semi-automatic dimensions ......................................................................................... 115
Example: Combining dimensions ............................................................................................ 116
Editing dimensions ......................................................................................................................... 119
Moving the end of the dimension line ...................................................................................... 120
Combining dimension lines ..................................................................................................... 120
Linking perpendicular dimension lines ..................................................................................... 121
Adding dimension points ......................................................................................................... 122
Adding closing dimensions ...................................................................................................... 122
Setting new dimension start point ........................................................................................... 123
Placing dimension texts outside dimensions ........................................................................... 124
Showing plate side marks ....................................................................................................... 125
Adding dimension points in anchor bolt plans ......................................................................... 126
Modifying dimension properties ............................................................................................... 126
Checking dimension point validity .................................................................................................. 127
4.5 Associative annotation objects ........................................................................................................... 127
Adding part marks .......................................................................................................................... 128
Adding level marks......................................................................................................................... 128
Adding associative notes ............................................................................................................... 129
Modifying associative annotation object properties........................................................................ 130
Updating marks .............................................................................................................................. 130
Change symbols ............................................................................................................................ 131
Removing change symbols ..................................................................................................... 131
Showing change symbols in printed drawings ......................................................................... 132
Merging marks ............................................................................................................................... 132
Merging reinforcement marks .................................................................................................. 133
Moving the mark leader line base point ......................................................................................... 133
4.6 Independent annotation objects.......................................................................................................... 133
Adding text ..................................................................................................................................... 133
Using superscript in text .......................................................................................................... 134
Adding links to text files.................................................................................................................. 135
Adding links to other drawings ....................................................................................................... 135
Adding hyperlinks ........................................................................................................................... 136
Adding links to DWG and DXF files................................................................................................ 137
Adding revision marks .................................................................................................................... 137
Modifying the properties of independent annotation objects .......................................................... 138
4.7 Building objects................................................................................................................................... 138
Modifying building objects .............................................................................................................. 139
Shortening parts view by view........................................................................................................ 140
Hiding building object outlines using cover-up tools....................................................................... 141
Showing a single reinforcing bar in a group ................................................................................... 141
Adjusting the location of a single reinforcing bar ..................................................................... 142
Showing layer information on reinforcing bars ............................................................................... 142
4.8 Edge chamfers in drawings................................................................................................................. 143
Displaying edge chamfers in a drawing.......................................................................................... 143
Defining default line color and type for edge chamfers .................................................................. 144
Changing edge chamfer line color and type manually ................................................................... 145
Creating edge chamfer marks ........................................................................................................ 145
Example: Edge chamfers ............................................................................................................... 146
4.9 Welds in drawings............................................................................................................................... 147
Weld concepts................................................................................................................................ 147
Example: Model welds in drawings ................................................................................................ 148
Adding weld marks ......................................................................................................................... 151
Example: Weld mark added in a drawing....................................................................................... 152
Merging weld marks ....................................................................................................................... 153
4.10 Symbols in drawings ........................................................................................................................... 154
Symbol Files browser ..................................................................................................................... 155
Viewing and modifying the symbol file contents ...................................................................... 155
Creating a new symbol file ....................................................................................................... 156
Changing the symbol file in use ............................................................................................... 156
Adding symbols in drawings........................................................................................................... 156
Modifying symbol properties........................................................................................................... 157
4.11 Additional drawing objects .................................................................................................................. 157
Creating a shape ............................................................................................................................ 157
4.12 Changing drawing objects................................................................................................................... 158
Dragging, reshaping and resizing drawing objects......................................................................... 158
Arranging drawing objects.............................................................................................................. 160
Hiding and showing objects in drawings and drawing views.......................................................... 160
Listing hidden parts in drawings .............................................................................................. 163
Trimming ........................................................................................................................................ 163
Splitting........................................................................................................................................... 165
Dividing........................................................................................................................................... 166
Modifying the shape of leader lines................................................................................................ 166
4.13 Using drawing tools ............................................................................................................................ 167
Aligning drawing objects ................................................................................................................ 167
Creating fillets ................................................................................................................................ 168
Creating chamfers.......................................................................................................................... 169
Copying with offsets ....................................................................................................................... 170
Managing moment connection symbols......................................................................................... 171
Creating moment connection symbols .................................................................................... 171
Updating moment connection symbols .................................................................................... 172
Deleting moment connection symbols ..................................................................................... 172
Managing cut lines ......................................................................................................................... 173
Creating cut lines ..................................................................................................................... 173
Updating cut lines .................................................................................................................... 173
Deleting cut lines ..................................................................................................................... 174
4.14 Grids in drawings ................................................................................................................................ 174
Modifying grid and grid line properties ........................................................................................... 174
Moving grid labels .......................................................................................................................... 175
Hiding grids or grid lines................................................................................................................. 175
4.15 Colors in drawings .............................................................................................................................. 175
Changing drawing color ................................................................................................................. 176
Specifying and using special color ................................................................................................. 178
Pen numbers in Color Table .......................................................................................................... 179
Changing the pen numbers for colors ..................................................................................... 179
4.16 User coordinate system (UCS) ........................................................................................................... 180
Setting a new UCS......................................................................................................................... 181
Toggling between two user coordinate systems ............................................................................ 181
Resetting UCS ............................................................................................................................... 181
4.17 Saving drawings ................................................................................................................................. 181
4.18 Closing drawings ................................................................................................................................ 182
5 Working with drawings ......................................................................... 183

5.1 Updating drawings when the model changes ..................................................................................... 183
5.2 Locking and unlocking drawings......................................................................................................... 184
5.3 Freezing drawings .............................................................................................................................. 184
Freezing and unfreezing general arrangement drawings............................................................... 185
Freezing and unfreezing single part, cast unit and assembly drawings......................................... 185
How freezing affects drawings ....................................................................................................... 185
5.4 Issuing drawings ................................................................................................................................. 186
5.5 Deleting drawings ............................................................................................................................... 186
5.6 Revising drawings............................................................................................................................... 186
Creating revisions........................................................................................................................... 187
Changing revisions......................................................................................................................... 187
Deleting revisions ........................................................................................................................... 188
5.7 Printing drawings................................................................................................................................. 188
Printing single drawings ................................................................................................................. 188
Example: Printing on A4 in landscape ..................................................................................... 189
Example: Printing on A3 in portrait .......................................................................................... 189
Printing multiple drawings with different sizes in one go ................................................................ 190
Printing to file.................................................................................................................................. 190
Customizing print file names .................................................................................................... 191
Switches for customizing print file names ................................................................................ 191
Creating PDF files .......................................................................................................................... 192
Printing settings.............................................................................................................................. 193
Printing to multiple sheets .............................................................................................................. 194
Drawing frames and foldmarks....................................................................................................... 195
Adding frames and foldmarks in printouts ............................................................................... 196
Using a DWG/DXF file as a frame ........................................................................................... 196
Setting up printer instances............................................................................................................ 197
Adding a printer instance ......................................................................................................... 197
Adding a print-to-file instance .................................................................................................. 197
Adding an Adobe postscript printer instance ........................................................................... 198
Paper size ................................................................................................................................ 199
Print area h*b ........................................................................................................................... 199
Colors and line weights in printing ........................................................................................... 199
Printing tips..................................................................................................................................... 200
5.8 Preview images of drawings ............................................................................................................... 200
Creating preview images................................................................................................................ 200
Adding preview images for master drawings.................................................................................. 201
Viewing preview images of drawing templates............................................................................... 201
6 Modifying automatic drawing settings................................................ 203

6.1 Updating project information ............................................................................................................... 204
6.2 Drawing properties.............................................................................................................................. 206
Modifying drawing properties on drawing level .............................................................................. 206
Modifying and saving drawing properties before creating drawings ........................................ 206
Modifying drawing properties of an existing drawing ............................................................... 207
Modifying drawing properties of several drawings ................................................................... 207
Modifying drawing properties on view level.................................................................................... 207
Modifying and saving properties on object level............................................................................. 208
Loading saved drawing object properties in an existing drawing ............................................. 208
Creating object level settings ......................................................................................................... 209
Applying object level settings on drawing level ........................................................................ 209
Example: Applying object level settings on drawing level ....................................................... 210
Applying object level settings on view level ............................................................................. 212
How Tekla Structures applies drawing properties.......................................................................... 212
6.3 Drawing layout .................................................................................................................................... 213
Table layouts.................................................................................................................................. 214
Tables ............................................................................................................................................ 215
Creating a new layout .................................................................................................................... 215
Defining fixed sizes ................................................................................................................. 216
Defining calculated sizes ......................................................................................................... 216
Creating and adding a new table layout......................................................................................... 216
Setting margins and spaces for drawing views .............................................................................. 217
Adding tables in table layout .......................................................................................................... 217
If you replace a table in a table layout............................................................................................ 218
Setting the properties of tables in a table layout ............................................................................ 218
Key plans ....................................................................................................................................... 219
Adding a key plan in a table layout .......................................................................................... 220
Setting up a drawing view to be used as a key plan ............................................................... 220
Adding a DXG/DXF file in a table layout ........................................................................................ 220
Modifying tables in Template Editor ............................................................................................... 221
Selecting a new layout ................................................................................................................... 221
6.4 Drawing size and drawing view scale ................................................................................................. 222
Using exact drawing view scale and automatic drawing size......................................................... 222
Using exact drawing size and automatic drawing view scale......................................................... 223
Autoscaling and autosizing drawings ............................................................................................. 224
6.5 Automatic drawing views .................................................................................................................... 225
Selecting the views to create ......................................................................................................... 225
Selecting the view projection type.................................................................................................. 226
Setting the location of end views and section views ...................................................................... 228
Including single-part drawings in assembly drawings .................................................................... 230
Part orientation in drawing views ................................................................................................... 231
Coordinate system .................................................................................................................. 231
Changing the coordinate system ............................................................................................. 233
Rotating parts .......................................................................................................................... 233
Setting viewing direction for columns in assembly drawings ................................................... 235
Setting viewing direction for beams and bracings in assembly drawings ................................ 235
Showing neighbor parts in views.................................................................................................... 236
Shortening and lengthening parts .................................................................................................. 236
Shortening a part in the model ................................................................................................ 237
Lengthening a part in the model .............................................................................................. 237
Shortening parts in drawing views ........................................................................................... 237
Lengthening shortened parts in drawing views ....................................................................... 239
Unfolding polybeams...................................................................................................................... 239
Undeforming deformed parts.......................................................................................................... 240
Showing part openings and recesses ............................................................................................ 241
Additional ways for showing symbols in openings and recesses ............................................ 242
Combining section views................................................................................................................ 243
Setting section view depth.............................................................................................................. 244
Setting section and end view direction ........................................................................................... 244
Showing section and end view direction marks ....................................................................... 245
Adding view labels for main and section views .............................................................................. 246
Modifying view label marks ...................................................................................................... 246
Displaying main view names automatically ............................................................................. 247
Modifying section marks................................................................................................................. 247
Setting the section mark cutting line............................................................................................... 248
6.6 Placement settings.............................................................................................................................. 249
Protected areas .............................................................................................................................. 249
Protecting areas in drawings .......................................................................................................... 251
Defining placement settings for annotation objects........................................................................ 251
Defining placement settings for dimensions................................................................................... 252
Defining free or fixed placement of views....................................................................................... 253
6.7 Automatic dimensions......................................................................................................................... 253
Adding automatic dimensions ........................................................................................................ 253
Adding automatic dual dimensions................................................................................................. 254
Setting dimension appearance....................................................................................................... 255
Setting dimension text, line and arrow appearance ................................................................. 255
Selecting the dimension type ................................................................................................... 255
Changing the appearance of absolute dimensions .................................................................. 256
Selecting the dimension format, precision and units ............................................................... 256
Grouping large dimension values ............................................................................................ 257
Setting the dimension extension line length ............................................................................ 257
Creating exaggerated dimensions ........................................................................................... 259
Showing plate side marks automatically .................................................................................. 260
Changing the prefix in radial dimensions ................................................................................. 261
Example: Sloped dimension texts ............................................................................................ 261
Dimensioning general arrangement drawings................................................................................ 262
Object groups in dimensioning ................................................................................................ 262
Dimensioning object groups on different dimension lines ........................................................ 262
Example: Grid and overall dimensions .................................................................................... 263
Example: Using maximum leader line length options .............................................................. 264
Example: Dimensioning parts partly outside the view ............................................................. 265
Example: Limiting the number of outside dimensions ............................................................. 266
Example: Part dimension positioning ....................................................................................... 267
Example: Dimensions in anchor bolt plans .............................................................................. 275
Dimensioning single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings.......................................................... 278
Creating minimum and maximum position dimensions for bolts ............................................. 279
Grouping identical objects to the same dimension line ........................................................... 279
Modifying dimensions for unfolded parts ................................................................................. 280
Creating elevation dimensions ................................................................................................ 281
Dimensioning plates ................................................................................................................ 282
Dimensioning profiles .............................................................................................................. 284
Check dimensions ................................................................................................................... 285
Creating check dimensions ..................................................................................................... 285
Example: Part dimensioning .................................................................................................... 287
Example: Bolt dimensioning .................................................................................................... 290
Example: Position dimensioning ............................................................................................. 290
Example: Closing dimension ................................................................................................... 295
Example: Combining dimensions ............................................................................................ 296
Example: Combining bolt group dimensions ........................................................................... 299
Example: Forward offset ......................................................................................................... 300
Example: Recognizable distance ........................................................................................... 300
Example: Preferred dimension side ........................................................................................ 301
Example: Reinforcement dimension ........................................................................................ 302
6.8 Automatic marks ................................................................................................................................. 302
Adding automatic marks................................................................................................................. 303
Adding symbols in marks ........................................................................................................ 304
Adding templates in marks ...................................................................................................... 304
Adding user-defined attributes and template attributes in marks ............................................ 307
Defining contents of bolt mark Size element using advanced options .................................... 308
Adding pull-out pictures in reinforcement marks ..................................................................... 310
Setting mark appearance ............................................................................................................... 311
Setting the visibility of marks ................................................................................................... 311
Setting the appearance of mark text, frames and leader line ................................................. 312
Showing mark frames and leader lines for hidden parts ......................................................... 314
Mark location ........................................................................................................................... 315
Unit settings for mark elements ............................................................................................... 318
Merging marks automatically ......................................................................................................... 319
Merged part marks .................................................................................................................. 319
Merged reinforcement marks ................................................................................................... 321
6.9 Grids in drawings ................................................................................................................................ 323
Defining grid settings...................................................................................................................... 324
6.10 Parts and neighbor parts .................................................................................................................... 325
Setting part and neighbor part contents and appearance .............................................................. 325
Part orientation............................................................................................................................... 326
Using part mark as an orientation mark in general arrangement drawings ............................. 326
Displaying compass direction ................................................................................................. 327
Displaying orientation marks (north marks) ............................................................................. 328
Displaying connecting side marks ........................................................................................... 329
Example: Part representations ....................................................................................................... 330
6.11 Bolts .................................................................................................................................................... 332
Setting bolt contents and appearance............................................................................................ 332
Creating user-defined bolt symbols................................................................................................ 333
Example: Bolts ............................................................................................................................... 333
6.12 Surface treatments.............................................................................................................................. 335
Setting surface treatment visibility, contents and appearance ....................................................... 335
6.13 Reinforcement and meshes ................................................................................................................ 336
Setting reinforcement and mesh contents and appearance........................................................... 336
Example: Hiding reinforcing bar lines............................................................................................. 336
Example: Reinforcement representation options ........................................................................... 337
6.14 Hatch patterns..................................................................................................................................... 338
Adding hatch patterns on parts and shapes................................................................................... 338
Adding hatch patterns on surface treatment .................................................................................. 340
Example: Insulation hatch patterns ................................................................................................ 341
6.15 Reference models............................................................................................................................... 342
Setting the visibility and appearance of reference models ............................................................. 342
Setting the visibility and line type of hidden lines using advanced options ................................... 342
6.16 User-defined attributes in drawings..................................................................................................... 344
Adding user-defined attributes ....................................................................................................... 344
6.17 Defining a firm folder for images and symbols .................................................................................... 345
6.18 Defining customized line types............................................................................................................ 345
6.19 Settings affecting the recreation of drawings ...................................................................................... 347
Preventing automatic drawing updates and recreation .................................................................. 348
6.20 Managing Master Drawing Catalog..................................................................................................... 348
Adding master drawings in Master Drawing Catalog ..................................................................... 348
Adding saved settings .............................................................................................................. 348
Adding a rule set ...................................................................................................................... 349
Adding a cloning template ....................................................................................................... 350
Removing master drawings from the Master Drawing Catalog ...................................................... 350
Modifying master drawing properties ............................................................................................. 351
Modifying properties of saved settings .................................................................................... 351
Modifying rule set properties .................................................................................................... 351
Modifying properties and contents of wizard files .................................................................... 352
Wizard file contents ................................................................................................................. 352
Modifying cloning template properties ..................................................................................... 353
Managing folders............................................................................................................................ 354
Adding, renaming, and moving folders ................................................................................... 354
Copying master drawings to another folder ............................................................................. 354
Removing master drawings from a folder ................................................................................ 355
7 Drawing settings.................................................................................... 357

7.1 View properties in drawings................................................................................................................ 357
7.2 Section view properties....................................................................................................................... 360
7.3 Dimension and dimensioning properties............................................................................................. 361
General dimension properties ........................................................................................................ 361
Dimension format, precision and unit properties............................................................................ 363
Dimension appearance properties ................................................................................................. 364
Advanced dimension properties..................................................................................................... 365
Dimension mark and dimension tag properties.............................................................................. 365
General dimensioning properties ................................................................................................... 366
Position dimensioning properties ................................................................................................... 368
Part dimensioning properties ......................................................................................................... 370
Bolt dimensioning properties.......................................................................................................... 371
Dimension grouping properties ...................................................................................................... 372
Sub-assembly dimensioning properties ......................................................................................... 373
Reinforcement dimensioning properties......................................................................................... 373
Grid and overall dimensioning properties (GA drawings)............................................................... 374
Part dimensioning properties (GA drawings) ................................................................................. 374
7.4 Mark properties................................................................................................................................... 376
Mark appearance properties .......................................................................................................... 376
Leader line types............................................................................................................................ 378
Positioning properties of view label, section and detail marks ....................................................... 378
Reinforcement mark merging properties........................................................................................ 379
Weld mark properties ..................................................................................................................... 380
Level mark properties..................................................................................................................... 381
7.5 Mark elements .................................................................................................................................... 382
Common elements in marks .......................................................................................................... 382
Part mark elements ........................................................................................................................ 383
Bolt mark elements ........................................................................................................................ 384
Reinforcement mark elements ....................................................................................................... 385
Reinforcement mesh mark elements ............................................................................................. 386
Elements in merged reinforcement marks ..................................................................................... 386
Connection mark elements ............................................................................................................ 387
Surface treatment mark elements .................................................................................................. 388
Section and detail mark elements .................................................................................................. 388
View, section view and detail view label mark elements................................................................ 389
7.6 Part and neighbor part properties ....................................................................................................... 389
Part and neighbor part content properties...................................................................................... 389
Part and neighbor part fill properties .............................................................................................. 391
Part and shape hatch pattern properties........................................................................................ 391
7.7 Bolt properties..................................................................................................................................... 393
Bolt content properties ................................................................................................................... 393
7.8 Surface treatment visibility and content properties ............................................................................. 394
Surface treatment hatch pattern properties.................................................................................... 395
7.9 Reinforcement and mesh visibility and content properties.................................................................. 396
7.10 Reinforcement settings for drawings................................................................................................... 398
7.11 Placement properties for annotation objects....................................................................................... 403
7.12 Building object appearance properties................................................................................................ 403
7.13 Model weld visibility options................................................................................................................ 404
7.14 Properties of additional drawing objects ............................................................................................. 405
7.15 DWG/DXF scaling options .................................................................................................................. 406
7.16 Grid properties .................................................................................................................................... 407
7.17 Orientation settings ............................................................................................................................. 407
1 Introduction to drawings
This section provides an overview of Tekla Structures drawing functionalities, and introduces
the main features. It also explains the various levels of editing drawings.
This section also explains the basic idea of integrating drawings to the model, and what it
means when we say that the drawings are associative and always up-to-date.
Furthermore, this section briefly introduces how the drawings may look like through some
examples of the contents.
Contents Main features in drawings (p. 17)

Screen layout (p. 18)
Drawing contents (p. 19)
Basic principles of drawings (p. 21)
1.1 Main features in drawings

Tekla Structures includes the following features for drawings:
• All information comes directly from the model, which minimizes the work you have to do.
In many cases all you need to do is to check the predefined settings or do some minor
editing.
• Up-to-date drawings. The drawings are actually part of the model. If you revise the model,
Tekla Structures also updates the drawings, so they are always up to date.
• Master Drawing Catalog, which is a fast, efficient and controlled way of creating
drawings in one centralized location using master drawings.
• Automatic workshop single-part and assembly drawings, and cast unit drawings of
selected parts with predefined settings for layout, views, dimensions, marks, and building
objects.
• Automatic general arrangement drawings and anchor bolt plans of selected views.
• Drawing cloning capabilities.
• Revision control for drawings.
• Interactive editing tools that you can use for adding dimensions, various shapes, texts,
additional annotations, symbols, and links in the drawings.
Introduction to drawings
• Standard and customized drawing layouts. Tekla Structures contains many ready-to-use
standard drawing layouts. You can also create your own.
• Export capabilities.
See also Master Drawing Catalog (p. 49)

Basic principles of drawings (p. 21)
Drawing types (p. 27)
Exporting drawings to DWG/DXF
Introduction to drawings (p. 17)
1.2 Screen layout

When you open a drawing, Tekla Structures activates the drawing mode. The menus and icons
for the modeling mode are replaced by those of the drawing mode. The model views remain on
the screen behind the drawing. The following illustration identifies the various areas of the
drawing window:
Menus contain all commands available in the drawing mode.
Basic tools for working with drawings.
Commands for creating dimensions and objects.
Select switches determine the selectable objects.
Snap settings control which points you can snap to and pick.
See also Introduction to drawings (p. 17)

Filtering in drawings
Interface overview
Snap switches
Selection switches
1.3 Drawing contents

The drawing is made up of three main types of elements: drawing layout, drawing views, and
drawing objects. In the following we will introduce these elements. You can select what to
include in the drawing before you create it, and also add objects in an existing drawing.

Drawing layout and views (p. 19)
Drawing objects (p. 20)
Drawing layout and views

A Tekla Structures drawing consists of two types of basic elements:
• The layout defines the drawing size and the included tables, such as revision tables, title
blocks, material lists, bills of material, general notes, key plans and DWG files. Tekla
Structures has a range of predefined layouts, and you can also create layouts of your own.
• Drawing views are views to the whole model, to a part of the model or to individual parts
in the model. Views can show building objects from different directions (top, front, back,
bottom). Drawing views act as containers for the building objects or areas in the model that
you have selected to be included in the drawing.
Below is an example of the drawing layout and views.
Top view to a part
Front view to a part
Material list
Drawing title block
See also Drawing contents (p. 19)
Drawing objects
Drawing views may contain several types of objects. Some of them come from the model and
represent something that will exist in the real building or will be closely related to it. Others are
objects that represent information that is only relevant in the drawing, or that add extra
information to the information in the model. Drawings may include the following object types:
• Building objects: parts, bolts, welds, chamfers, reinforcing bars, or surface treatment
• Associative annotation objects: dimensions, marks, associative notes
• Independent annotation objects that are not linked to the model: text, text files, symbols,
link, hyperlinks, DWG/DXF files, and reference models
• Additional drawing objects: shapes (clouds, lines, rectangles, etc.)
Clouds and rectangles
Dimensions
Marks, associative notes
Building objects
See also Drawing contents (p. 19)
1.4 Basic principles of drawings

There are a couple of basic principles in Tekla Structures that you need to understand before
you start creating or modifying drawings:
• The model is the single source of information for drawings. The drawing is just another
view to the model, usually a 2D view. This ensures that the information in drawings and
reports is always up-to-date.
• Tekla Structures integrates the drawings with the model.
• Drawing objects are associated with model objects, and updated when the model changes.
• Changing some of the properties requires the recreation of the drawings.
• You can modify drawing properties on three levels; drawing, view and object level,
depending on the desired result.

Integrated drawings (p. 22)
Drawing associativity (p. 23)
How drawings are updated (p. 22)
Three levels of modifying drawings (p. 24)
Settings affecting the recreation of drawings (p. 347)
Integrated drawings
Tekla Structures integrates the drawings with the model. A drawing is a window to the model
presenting 3D structures in 2D. The building objects shown in the drawing are model objects
you create in the model. You can change their representation in the drawing but you cannot
change the geometry or the location of the building object, or delete building objects; all
changes to building objects are made in the model. That is why the drawings are always up-to-
date. For example, dimensions and marks in drawings are always correct. However, you can
filter out parts and bolts in drawings using the filtering tools, or make them invisible by hiding
them.
You can create drawings at any stage of the project. If the model changes, Tekla Structures
notifies in the Drawing List that you need to update the related drawings. You cannot open a
drawing that is not up-to-date.
See also Basic principles of drawings (p. 21)
How drawings are updated

When a model changes, the related drawings need to be updated. Tekla Structures takes care of
updating and notifies you if updating is needed.
When you start using a newer version of Tekla Structures, updating

drawings created with the older version may cause problems. We
recommend that you complete any drawings you have started using the
older version, or recreate the drawings using your new version of Tekla
Structures.
Updating is necessary, when:

• The geometry of a model object changes.
• Some other model object properties, for example, material and class change.
• Model objects are added or deleted.
• The number of identical model objects changes.
Tekla Structures automatically updates drawings each time you number the model. If you have
not numbered the model, you are prompted to do so when you create a drawing. Furthermore, if
you have changed the model and go to the Drawing List to open drawings, Tekla Structures has
marked the outdated drawings, and you need to update them before you can open them.
General arrangement drawings are always updated when you open them if the model has
changed. You do not need to number general arrangement drawings.

Updating drawings when the model changes (p. 183)
Numbering the model
Drawing associativity
Tekla Structures drawings are associative. The objects in the drawing are linked to model
objects, which means that most objects in the drawing are automatically updated when the
model changes. For example, if a model object is resized, dimension points move with the
corresponding object in the drawing, and the dimensions are recalculated. Still you do not lose
any manual changes that you have made in the drawing. This applies to all drawing types.
Tekla Structures updates the following drawing objects to reflect the changes in the model:
• Parts
• Marks
• Dimensions
• Welds
• Views
• Section marks
• Detail marks
• Associative notes
• Lines and other shapes
• Tables
Tekla Structures retains the following manual changes made to drawings:
• Base points of objects; for example, if you drag an object to a new location
• Object properties; for example, color, font, and line type

Associativity symbol (p. 23)
Associativity symbol
In drawings, the associativity symbol indicates which drawing objects are associative and
automatically updated. Associativity symbols are shown only when you select a drawing
object, for example, a dimension.
Objects that do not have valid association get a ghost associativity symbol and a question mark.
These symbols are shown constantly, even though the dimension is not selected. This makes it
easier to find objects that need attention.
The associativity symbols are not shown in printed drawings.
To hide associativity symbols in drawing views, click Tools > Options >
Associative Symbol (Shift + A).
See also Drawing associativity (p. 23)
Three levels of modifying drawings

In Tekla Structures, you can modify drawings on three levels, depending on how permanent
and extensive modifications are needed.
• On the highest level, you can change the drawing properties on the drawing level. This
way you can change the properties of all building objects, marks, dimensions, and views in
the drawing. For example, you can define that all parts are displayed in blue color in a
drawing. When you save the drawing property settings in drawing property files, you can
use the same settings later for other drawings of the same type. You can modify the
drawing properties of the selected drawing type in the model before you create the
drawing. You can also change the drawing properties in an existing drawing that you have
opened. Settings propagate to all views and objects in that drawing, except new views that
you create after the drawing is created.
• The second level is to modify the properties on the view level. The modifications apply
only to the view that you have selected in an open drawing. Settings propagate to all
objects in that one view.
• The third and lowest level is to modify the properties on the object level, where you
change the properties of the selected objects in an open drawing. Settings are for that one
object only; however, you can select and modify many objects at a time. The properties
modified on the object level are no longer affected by property changes on view or
drawing level.
• By saving the object property settings and combining them with drawing or view filters
and drawing object types into detailed object level settings, you can also apply the object
properties on the drawing and view level. When doing so, the object level settings override
the property settings made in the drawing property dialog boxes on the view and drawing
level. Object level settings applied on the drawing level are inherited to the view level
settings if there are no object level settings defined on the view level. If you apply object
level settings on the view level, they override the drawing level settings.
• The recommended way of working is to work from the top down, from drawing level to
object level. Once you change properties on the view level you should not go to the
drawing level properties and modify drawing properties there, otherwise you
modifications on the view level will be lost. The modifications made on the drawing level
also remain when the drawing is recreated due to a model change, for example.
Modifying drawing properties on drawing level (p. 206)
Modifying drawing properties on view level (p. 207)
Modifying and saving properties on object level (p. 208)
Creating object level settings (p. 209)
Applying object level settings on drawing level (p. 209)
Applying object level settings on view level (p. 212)
2 Creating drawings
This section explains how to create different types of drawings, in different ways.
Once you complete a model, you can start creating drawings to issue.
Contents Drawing types (p. 27)

Before creating drawings (p. 48)
Master Drawing Catalog (p. 49)
Creating drawings using menu, toolbar or pop-up commands (p. 65)
Creating multiple drawing sheets of the same part (p. 69)
Cloning drawings (p. 53)
2.1 Drawing types

You can create many types of drawings in Tekla Structures according to your needs. This
section introduces the available types.
See also General arrangement drawings (p. 27)

Single-part drawings (p. 34)
Assembly drawings (p. 40)
Cast unit drawings (p. 44)
Multidrawings (p. 47)
Creating drawings (p. 27)
General arrangement drawings

Create general arrangement (GA) drawings when you need
• Several views in one drawing, including the entire model or a part of it
• Plan drawings (foundation, floor, deck layout, and anchor bolt plans)
• Erection elevation drawings
• Information from model views, including 3D views
Creating drawings
General arrangement drawings show the model from the most suitable direction. For example,
in plan drawings, you are looking from the top of a building or floor down towards the ground.
In elevation drawings you are looking from one of the sides of the building, like along a grid
line. GA drawings often contain enlarged views of complex areas or details, and other
additional information that helps in the approval process and during the installation phase.
See also Drawing types (p. 27)

Example: Foundation plan (p. 28)
Example: Slab plan (p. 28)
Example: Framing plan (p. 29)
Example: Deck plan (p. 30)
Example: Erection elevation drawing (p. 31)
Example: 3D isometric drawing (p. 32)
Example: Anchor bolt plan (p. 33)
Example: Foundation plan

See below for an example of a foundation plan.
Example: Slab plan

See below for an example of a slab plan.
Creating drawings
Example: Framing plan

See below for an example of a basement level framing plan.
Creating drawings
Example: Deck plan

See below for an example of a deck plan.
Creating drawings
Example: Erection elevation drawing

See below for an example of an elevation erection elevation drawing.
Creating drawings
Example: 3D isometric drawing

See below for an example of an isometric drawing.
Creating drawings
Example: Anchor bolt plan

See below for an example of an anchor bolt plan.
Creating drawings
Single-part drawings
Single-part drawings are workshop drawings that show the fabrication information for one part
(usually without welds).
Single-part drawings usually use small sheet sizes, for example, A4 or imperial standard size
8.5" x 11.5".

Example: Anchor bolt (p. 34)
Example: Embed (p. 35)
Example: Plate (p. 36)
Example: Anchor bolt

See below for an example of a single-part drawing presenting an anchor bolt.
Creating drawings
See also Single-part drawings (p. 34)
Example: Embed
See below for an example of a single-part drawing presenting an embed.
Creating drawings
Example: Plate
See below for examples of single-part drawings presenting plates.
Creating drawings
Creating drawings
Creating drawings
Creating drawings
Assembly drawings
Assembly drawings are typically workshop drawings showing fabrication information for one
assembly. In most cases, an assembly consists of a main part and secondary parts. The
secondary parts are either welded or bolted to a main part.
Assembly drawings usually use larger sheet sizes than single-part drawings, for example, A3 or
imperial standard size 11" x 17".

Example: Beam (p. 40)
Example: Stairs (p. 40)
Example: Rail (p. 41)
Example: Nested assembly (p. 42)
Example: Beam
See below for an example of an assembly drawing presenting a beam assembly.
See also Assembly drawings (p. 40)
Example: Stairs
See below for an assembly drawing presenting stairs.
Creating drawings
Example: Rail
See below for an example of a rail assembly drawing.
Creating drawings
Example: Nested assembly

You can also create assembly drawings of nested assemblies, see below.
Creating drawings
Assembly drawing of a nested assembly representing a whole truss
Assembly drawing of a sub-assembly, a part of the same truss
Creating drawings
Assembly drawing of a nested assembly
Assembly drawing of one of the sub-assemblies in the nested assembly
Cast unit drawings

Cast unit drawings are dimensional, formwork, or reinforcement drawings used in concrete
design and construction. They show cast-in embeds, edge chamfers, and hard and soft
insulation.
You can only create cast unit drawings of concrete parts and cast-in embeds (steel parts or
assemblies added to a cast unit). Cast unit drawings also show the bolts and welds in steel parts.
Edge chamfers can also be shown. The volume and weight information of the cast unit remains
accurate even if there are cuts inside the cast unit.
Cast units have the cast unit type part property - they are set either Cast in place or Precast. It
is important to use the correct cast unit type, because some functionalities, for example
numbering, are based on the cast unit type. In the Reinforced Concrete Detailing configuration,
you can create cast unit drawings of cast-in-place cast units only.
Cast unit drawings that show cast-in-place concrete structures usually use large sheet sizes, for
example, A1 or imperial standard size 24" x 36". Drawings that show precast structures usually
use smaller sheet sizes, for example, A3 or imperial standard size 11" x 17".

Example: Beam (p. 44)
Example: Column (p. 45)
Example: Stairs (p. 46)
Example: Beam
See below for an example of a combined form and reinforcing bar drawing of an inverted tee
beam.
Creating drawings
See also Cast unit drawings (p. 44)
Example: Column
See below for an example of a combined form and reinforcing bar drawing of an exterior
column with no corbels or plats for beams.
Creating drawings
Example: Stairs
See below for an example of a combined form and reinforcing bar drawing of stairs with
landings.
Creating drawings
Multidrawings
Multidrawings are workshop drawings that gather several single-part or assembly drawings on
one sheet.
Create multidrawings when you want to:
• Have more than one assembly on a sheet
• Collect multiple single-part drawings on a large sheet
Multidrawings usually demand large sheet sizes such as A1 or imperial standard size 24" x 36".
Below is an example of a multidrawing with several assemblies included.
Creating drawings
Creating multidrawings (p. 67)
2.2 Before creating drawings

The list below contains some things that you may need to do before you create or clone
drawings in Tekla Structures:
• The model needs to be numbered. If the model changes, the numbering needs to be
updated. This applies to assembly, single-part, cast unit and multidrawings only; general
arrangement drawings do not need to be numbered. Numbering ensures that Tekla
Structures connects the right objects to the right drawings. If you try to create drawings
without numbering the model, Tekla Structures prompts you to do so. You can also number
general arrangement drawings, because then parts and marks will have numbers instead of
question marks.
• Check that the piece is detailed correctly.
• You may want to create test drawings of different types of parts to see how well the
predefined drawing properties, layouts, rule sets (wizards) or cloning templates suit your
needs.
• You may want to modify drawing properties, layouts, or rule sets and save the modified
settings for future usage. If you are going to use a drawing as a cloning template, check
that it contains all the necessary elements for this purpose.
See also Creating drawings (p. 27)

Drawing properties (p. 206)
Creating drawings
2.3 Master Drawing Catalog
The Master Drawing Catalog is a fast, efficient and controlled way of creating drawings using
master drawings. In the Master Drawing Catalog, all drawing creation commands are available
in one centralized location.
A master drawing is a Tekla Structures drawing or a set of drawing properties that is used for
creating new drawings that look the same as the master drawing. There are several types of
master drawings: cloning templates, saved settings and rule sets. You can also use the existing
AutoDrawings wizard files as master drawings.
The example below shows the search view of the Master Drawing Catalog as a thumbnail list.
The Master Drawing Catalog has an icon toolbar containing commands for creating drawings,
activating the search view or the folder view, displaying the master drawings in a detail or
thumbnail list, displaying a description for each master drawing, selecting the models from
which you want to use cloning templates, creating rule sets, and for displaying the Drawing
List.

Master drawing types (p. 50)
Searching for master drawings (p. 52)
Managing Master Drawing Catalog (p. 348)
Creating drawings
Master drawing types
The master drawing type you should use depends on the type of the drawing that you want to
create:
• You can create single-part drawings, assembly drawings or cast unit drawings using saved
settings, rule sets, or cloning templates.
• You can create general arrangement drawings using saved settings.
• You can create multidrawings using wizards (old file-based rule sets)
See also Saved settings (p. 50)

Rule sets (p. 51)
Wizards (p. 52)
Cloning templates (p. 50)
Cloning templates
Cloning templates are Tekla Structures drawings that are used as templates for creating new
drawings. You can select a drawing from the Drawing List and add it to the Master Drawing
Catalog to be used as a template. You can also use cloning templates from other models.
See also Master drawing types (p. 50)

Creating drawings using cloning templates (p. 54)
Adding a cloning template (p. 350)
Saved settings
The saved settings in Master Drawing Catalog are drawing property files that have been
created and saved in the drawing properties dialog boxes for different drawing types. There are
many predefined drawing property files, and you can also create your own in the drawing
properties dialog boxes.
Each drawing type has its own property files. Default saved settings are located in the
environment (..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\<environment>\system). When you
save your own settings, they are saved under the current model directory.
Creating drawings
Creating drawings using saved settings (p. 60)
Rule sets
Rule sets are sets of rules on how to create drawings for different object types. A rule set is a
combination of object groups (model selection filters) and master drawing settings (cloning
template, saved settings) that define which objects to include in the drawing, and which
drawing settings to use. You can use the existing AutoDrawings wizard files or create your own
rule sets.
The order of sets is important, as Tekla Structures by default creates only one drawing for each
object. For example, a rule set creates an assembly drawing for an object that fulfills the
selection filter criteria in one set. Tekla Structures will not create another assembly drawing for
that object, even if it matches the criteria of the selection filter in later sets in the same rule set
file.
Creating drawings
Creating drawings using rule sets or wizards (p. 62)
Adding a rule set (p. 349)
Wizards
A wizard file is a file-based wizard consisting of several sets of drawing requests containing
drawing, attribute and part settings to apply to selected objects, as well as a selection filter. The
order of sets is important, as Tekla Structures by default creates only one drawing for each
object. You can edit the files in the Master Drawing Catalog. However, creating new wizard
files is not possible in the Master Drawing Catalog.
In the Master Drawing Catalog, the only way to create multidrawings is

to use the wizard files.

Wizard file contents (p. 352)
Searching for master drawings

In the Master Drawing Catalog search view, you can search for master drawings on the basis
of the text that has been entered in the name, description and keyword boxes in the Master
Drawing Properties dialog box and save your search results. In the folder view, you can copy
master drawings from a search results folder to another folder to make it easier for you to locate
the master drawings you need.
Creating drawings
Make sure to always add all important information for each master
drawing in the Master Drawing Properties dialog box. This makes it a
lot easier to find the master drawings you are looking for.
To search for master drawings and save the search results:

1. Enter the search criteria in the box next to the Search button.
Tekla Structures remembers search strings. When you start typing a string, it suggests
previous strings starting with the same characters.
2. Click Search. The results are listed.
3. To save the search results, click Store, type a name for the search, and click OK.
The search results are added in the category list in the search view.
The search results are also displayed as a folder in the folder view. There you can
rename the saved search results, and copy the found drawings to the folders of your
choice.

Modifying master drawing properties (p. 351)
2.4 Cloning drawings

You should consider cloning drawings when:
• There are several similar parts, assemblies, or cast units in the model.
• You want to ease editing work when there are several similar parts that have different
position numbers. You may have separate drawings of these similar parts.
• The drawings need a lot of manual editing
If cloning does not produce a satisfactory result, you need to modify the cloned drawing
manually. For example, you can create a drawing for one truss, modify the drawing, and then
clone it for similar trusses. Sometimes you need to modify the cloned drawings where the
trusses differ.
The cloned drawing may contain more or less parts than the original drawing. Part properties,
marks, associative notes and related text objects are cloned from a similar part in the original
drawing.
You can clone drawings using the cloning templates in the Master Drawing Catalog, using a
drawing in the Drawing List, and using the cloning templates in the template library.
See also Creating drawings using cloning templates (p. 54)

Cloning from the Drawing List (p. 55)
View-specific dimension cloning (p. 57)
Cloning using drawing templates in template library (p. 58)
Cloned objects (p. 58)
Checking and modifying cloned drawings (p. 59)
Refreshing drawing associativity (p. 60)
Creating drawings
Creating drawings using cloning templates
In the Master Drawing Catalog, you can create single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings
using cloning templates that have been added in the Master Drawing Catalog. You can add
new ones from the Drawing List.
To create drawings using a cloning template:
1. In the model, click Drawings & Reports > Create Drawings.
2. Double-click the cloning template that you want to use.
3. Go to the Drawing creation tab and specify how dimensions and marks are cloned.
You can select to ignore the dimensions and marks, clone them, or recreate them.
The Marks option controls revision marks and all marks for model objects.
Selecting Create in the Dimensions and Other marks box is useful if

cloning the dimensions or other marks does not produce satisfactory
results. Using this option does not create any new views.
4. On the same tab, select which object types you want to clone.
5. If you want to create a drawing only for certain parts, select the parts from the model.
You can also use an appropriate selection filter and select the whole model. Activate
only the Select parts selection switch when you select objects, otherwise the selection
may take a long time.
6. Click Create drawings (Alt + C) or Create drawings for all parts (Alt + A).
7. Number the model if prompted to do so.
Tekla Structures creates the drawings and adds them in the Drawing List. In the
Drawing List, cloned drawings are marked with text Cloned in the Changes column.
Check the cloned drawing and modify it, if necessary.
Limitations • You cannot clone general arrangement drawings through the Master Drawing Catalog.
You can clone general arrangement drawings only by using the Clone command in the
Drawing List dialog box.
• You cannot clone multidrawings.
• The drawing properties of cloning templates cannot be modified through the Master
Drawing Catalog.
See also Cloning drawings (p. 53)

Checking and modifying cloned drawings (p. 59)
XS_INTELLIGENT_CLONING_ADD_DIMENSIONS
Using cloning templates from other models

You can show cloning templates in other models in the Master Drawing Catalog and create
drawings using them.
To use cloning templates from other models:
1. In the Master Drawing Catalog, click to open the Models Containing Master
Drawings dialog box.
2. To use cloning templates in other models, click Add model and browse to the desired
model.
Creating drawings
3. Click OK.
Limitations You can use only cloning template type of master drawings from other models, not other types
of master drawings.
Cloning from the Drawing List

In addition to cloning drawings using cloning templates, you can clone single-part, cast unit,
assembly and general arrangement drawings from the Drawing List.
• When you clone drawings of assemblies or cast units, they must

have the same type of main part as the assembly or cast unit from
which the original drawing was created. For example, the upper
chords of the original and the cloned truss could be main parts.
• Section and detail views are not cloned in general arrangement
drawings, and only one view is cloned.
Before cloning, finalize, save, and close the drawing you want to use as a cloning template.
To clone a drawing from the Drawing List:
1. In the model, select what to include in the drawing:
• If you are cloning a single-part drawings, cast unit drawing or assembly drawing,
select parts, assemblies or cast units.
• If you are cloning a general arrangement drawing, select a model view.
2. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing List.
3. In the Drawing List, select the drawing that you want to use as a cloning template.
4. Click Clone.
5. In the Clone Drawing dialog box, select the drawing object types you want to clone into
the new drawing, and the actions for each object type.
• For Dimensions and Other marks (all marks for model objects), select whether you
want to Clone them, recreate them automatically when you clone a drawing (Create)
or Ignore them in cloning.
Selecting Create in the Dimensions and Other marks box is useful if cloning the
dimensions or other marks does not produce satisfactory results. Using this option
does not create any new views.
• For other objects, select to Clone or Ignore them.
6. Click Clone selected.
Tekla Structures clones the drawing. In the Drawing List, cloned drawings are marked with text
Cloned in the Changes column.

Example: Cloning a general arrangement drawing (p. 55)
Example: Cloning a general arrangement drawing

In this example, we first created a general arrangement drawing of the first floor of a building,
then edited the drawing and the cloned the general arrangement drawing of the second floor.
The first floor and second floor have some differences:
Creating drawings
We edited the general arrangement drawing of the first floor slightly.
We selected the model view that represents the second floor and then cloned the drawing using
the general arrangement drawing of the first floor as a template.
Creating drawings
In the cloned drawing:
• The drawing view plane has been moved to match the model view PLAN 2nd Floor plane.
• If there are parts in matching places, the marks have been cloned to the new location and
the content has been updated.
• Dimensions are cloned.
• All model object marks and notes are cloned.
See also Cloning from the Drawing List (p. 55)
View-specific dimension cloning

The dimension cloning options in the Clone Drawing dialog box affect all views, whereas with
Dimension creation method in this view in the View Properties dialog box you can set the
dimension creation method for the selected view only. With this feature you can create
automatic dimensions in the front view and clone the dimensions in section and end view, for
example.
To clone dimensions in the selected view:
1. Double-click the drawing view frame to open the View Properties dialog box.
2. Select Dimension creation method in this view > Clone on the Attributes 2 tab.
3. Click Modify.
4. Save and close the drawing.
5. Open the Drawing List, select the drawing and click Clone.
6. In the Clone Drawing dialog box, select the objects to be cloned and the dimension
cloning option (Ignore, Clone, Create).
• If you select Dimension > Ignore, the dimensions will be cloned only for those
views that have Dimension creation method in this view set to Clone.
• If you select Dimension > Clone, the dimensions will be cloned for all views.
Creating drawings
• If you select Dimension > Create, the dimensions will be created for all views
except for those that have Dimension creation method in this view set to Do not
create.
7. Click Clone selected.
Cloning using drawing templates in template library

You can create drawings using drawing templates located in the template library. The template
library is a model folder that contains the drawings to be used as drawing templates. You can
select a drawing in the current model folder or in another model folder.
To clone using a drawing template:
1. Create a drawing you want to use as a drawing template.
2. Save the model.
3. In the model, select the objects to be included in the new drawing.
4. To open the Clone Drawing dialog box, click Clone in the drawing list dialog box.
5. Use the Objects and actions in cloning options to define the drawing objects to be cloned
and the actions for each cloned object.
6. Select the current model or click Other model.
You can use Browse to browse to another model folder containing the drawing templates
that you want.
7. Click Select template.
8. In the Drawing Templates dialog box, select a drawing template indicated by an icon on
the left.
9. Leave the list open and clone the drawing by clicking Clone selected.
Tekla Structures clones the drawing. In the Drawing List, cloned drawings are marked with text
Cloned in the Changes column.
You can specify that a certain model folder is always used as a template
library using the advanced option XS_DRAWING_TEMPLATES_LIBRARY.
See also XS_DRAWING_TEMPLATES_LIBRARY

Cloned objects
The following objects can be cloned:
• Dimensions
• Marks for welds added in the drawing
• Marks for welds added in the model
• Level marks
• Revision marks
• Annotation objects
• Texts
Creating drawings
• Symbols
• Graphical drawing objects (shapes)
• Text files
• DWG/DXF files
• Hyperlinks
• When you clone an assembly drawing that includes single-part drawings, Tekla Structures
includes the single-part drawings in the cloned assembly drawing by default.
Checking and modifying cloned drawings

Always check the cloned drawing to make sure that the drawing contents meet your needs.
Object Check and modify

Marks • In general, mark contents are correct in cloned drawings, but
sometimes you may need to modify the location of the marks.
• Tekla Structures clones only marks that can be mapped to the
original drawing. No marks are created for new parts that you
have added in a cloned drawing. To create missing marks in a
cloned drawing that has more parts, set the advanced option
XS_CREATE_MISSING_MARKS_IN_INTELLIGENT_CLONIN
G to TRUE through Tools > Options > Advanced Options>
Marking: General.
Views • Ensure that the view sizes and view orientation are correct,
and that the views are placed correctly in the cloned drawing.
The size of the views is updated according to the parts
included in the views.
Dimensions • Depending on the settings in your environment, Tekla
Structures may automatically mark the dimensions for which
it cannot find a reference point on a part with a red dimension
point invalidity symbol. Drawings will open more slowly if
Tekla Structures has to has to check the dimensions every
time you open a drawing. You can prevent the checking of the
dimensions for all drawing types or for just for certain
drawing types. To do this, use the advanced option
XS_DO_NOT_CHECK_DIMENSION_POINTS.
• If the cloned drawing contains less parts than the original
drawing, the dimensions to the missing parts are
automatically removed.
• If the cloned drawing contains more parts than the original
drawing, Tekla Structures dimensions the additional parts
using automatic dimensioning, if you have set the advanced
option XS_INTELLIGENT_CLONING_ADD_DIMENSIONS to
TRUE. Because Tekla Structures uses automatic dimensioning
for creating dimensions for new parts, you may have to check
and correct the created dimensions.
• Add missing dimensions and remove incorrect ones, and
remove the dimension point invalidity symbols. In order to do
this, you may have to adjust the drawing view size so that the
dimension points are inside the view.
See also XS_DO_NOT_CHECK_DIMENSION_POINTS
Creating drawings
XS_CREATE_MISSING_MARKS_IN_INTELLIGENT_CLONING
XS_INTELLIGENT_CLONING_ADD_DIMENSIONS
Refreshing drawing associativity

Often improvements in cloning and associativity require that the associative rules have to be
recreated. This can be done by using the Refresh Associativity command. When you use this
command, you do not need to recreate the drawing.
This command is very useful if you, for example, have a cloning template you have created
using an older Tekla Structures version and want to utilize the better associativity of a newer
Tekla Structures version.
Refresh Associativity is available in the Customize dialog box, and you may want to add it in
one of the toolbars or in the User menu.
To add the command in the User menu and refresh the associativity:
1. Click Tools > Customize....
2. Enter a part of the command name in the Filter box, for example, refr.
The command is displayed in the list of commands.
3. Open the Menu tab.
4. Double-click the Refresh Associativity command to add it in the User menu.
5. If you have not added the User menu on the menu bar before, restart Tekla Structures to
activate the menu. The menu name is always User.
6. Open a cloning template the associativity of which you want to refresh.
7. Click User > Refresh Associativity.
8. Save the cloning template.
See also Drawing associativity (p. 23)

2.5 Creating drawings using saved settings

In Master Drawing Catalog, you can create single-part drawings, assembly drawings, cast unit
drawings and general arrangement drawings using saved settings (drawing property files).
See also Creating single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings (p. 61)
Creating general arrangement drawings (p. 60)
Adding saved settings (p. 348)
Creating general arrangement drawings

To create general arrangement drawings using saved settings:
2. Select the set of saved settings (drawing property file) from the list.
3. Optional: Modify the drawing properties and, if necessary, apply object-level settings.
To do this, double-click the saved setting and click Edit drawing properties. Remember
to save your changes in the property file.
4. Click Create drawings (Alt + C).
Creating drawings
5. In the Create General Arrangement Drawing dialog box, select the views that you
want the drawing to be produced from and select the desired option from the Options
list.
You also have a chance to modify the drawing properties at this point by clicking the
Drawing properties button.
By selecting Empty, you can create an empty drawing and add drawing
views in it afterwards.
6. Click Create to create the drawing(s).
Tekla Structures creates the drawings and adds them in the Drawing List. Click in the
Master Drawing Catalog toolbar to open the Drawing List.

Creating single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings

To create single-part, assembly or cast unit drawings using saved settings type of master
drawings:
2. Select the desired set of saved settings (drawing property file) on the list.
For cast unit drawings, select a file that contains the desired Cast unit creation
method:
• By cast unit position: A drawing will be created from each cast unit. If there are
identical cast units, one of them will serve as the base cast unit for the drawing. This
is the most common method for creating cast unit drawings.
• By cast unit ID: Each part in the model includes a unique ID number. You can
create drawings by using cast unit ID numbers. The ID number determines the
marking of the drawing. You can create several drawings from identicat cast units.
3. Optional: Modify the drawing properties and, if necessary, apply object-level settings.
To do this, double-click the saved setting and click Edit drawing

properties. Remember to save your changes in the property file.
4. If you are creating a drawing only for selected objects, select the objects.
You can also use an appropriate selection filter and select the whole model. Activate
only the Select parts selection switch when you select objects, otherwise the selection
may take a long time.
5. Click Create drawings (Alt + C) or Create drawings for all parts (Alt + A).
6. Number the model if you are prompted to do so.
Tekla Structures creates the drawings and adds them in the Drawing List. Click the button in
the Master Drawing Catalog toolbar to open the Drawing List.
Creating drawings
If you already have a drawing with the same type and mark, Tekla
Structures will not create a new one.

XS_DRAW_CAST_UNIT_INTERNAL_LINES
XS_DRAW_CAST_PHASE_INTERNAL_LINES
2.6 Creating drawings using rule sets or wizards

In the Master Drawing Catalog, you can create single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings
using rule sets, and multidrawings using wizards. You can use the file-based wizards, use the
existing rule sets or create your own.
To create drawings using a rule set or wizard:
2. Select a rule set or a wizard file from the list.
3. Optional: Double-click the rule set or wizard to modify rule set properties or wizard file
contents.
4. Optional: Edit the drawing properties of the master drawing connected to the rule set.
a Double-click the rule set, select the master drawing from the list and click
Properties > Edit drawing properties.
b Apply object level settings, if necessary.
c Save your changes.
5. Select the whole model or desired parts.
6. Do one of the following:
• If you selected parts, click. Create drawings (Alt + C).
• If you selected the whole model, click Create drawings for all parts (Alt + A).
7. Number the model if prompted to do so.
Tekla Structures creates the drawings and adds them in the Drawing List. Click the button in
the Master Drawing Catalog toolbar to open the Drawing List.
Limitations • In the Master Drawing Catalog, you can create multidrawings only by using the wizards.
You cannot create rule sets for multidrawings.
• You cannot create general arrangement drawings in the Master Drawing Catalog using
rule sets or wizards.
See also Rule sets (p. 51)

Wizards (p. 52)
Creating drawings
2.7 Creating anchor bolt plans
Anchor bolt plans are general arrangement drawings showing the anchor bolt layout. You can
create anchor bolt plans in Master Drawing Catalog or using menu, pop-up menu and toolbar
commands. Here we will create an anchor bolt plan using the Master Drawing Catalog.
Define the drawing as an anchor bolt plan when you are creating the
drawing. You cannot convert a general arrangement drawing to an
anchor bolt plan afterwards.
Before creating the anchor bolt plan, create a model view that is in the xy-plane.
To create an anchor bolt plan:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Create Drawings.
2. Double-click a saved setting that has been created for anchor bolt plans, for example,
anchor_bolt_plan.
3. Open the General Arrangement Drawing Properties dialog box by clicking Edit drawing
properties.
4. Click View.
5. Click the Anchor bolt plan tab and ensure that the option Show as anchor bolt plan is set
to Yes.
6. Modify the enlarged part view scale, if necessary.
7. If needed, set the option Create detail views to Yes to create separate detail views.
If you select No, Tekla Structures dimensions the anchor bolts in the enlarged view. Tekla
Structures groups similar detail views so that similar details are drawn only once.
8. Set the Detail view scale.
9. Click Save to save the changes in the saved settings file (property file).
10. Click OK to close the Master Drawing Catalog Properties dialog box.
11. Select Create drawings.
12. In the Create General Arrangement Drawing dialog box, click Create.
13. Select one view in the xy-plane.
If you select some other type of view or several views, Tekla Structures displays a warning
message and the anchor bolt plan is not created.
14. Click Create.
Tekla Structures creates the anchor bolt plan.
Tekla Structures creates the bolt dimensions in an anchor bolt plan in the directions of the
bolt group coordinate system. If the angle between the bolt group and the view coordinate
systems is not orthogonal, Tekla Structures adds angle dimensions to the detail view. Use
the advanced option
XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_USE_VIEW_COORDSYS_FOR_BOLT_DIMENSIONS to
create the dimensions in the x and y directions of the main view.
When details are compared, the following aspects are taken into account:
• bolt dimensions
• column profile
• column orientation (coordinate system)
• plate profile
Creating drawings
In the final drawing, check that the Ghost Outline is selected and
Drawing Color Mode is set to Color in Tools > Options. In color
drawings with white background, hidden objects are shown as ghost
outlines, if this setting is selected. In gray scale and black and white
drawings, hidden objects are not shown even if Ghost Outline is
selected.
See also XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_USE_VIEW_COORDSYS_FOR_BOLT_DIMENSIONS

Saved settings (p. 50)
Objects included in the anchor bolt plan (p. 64)
Defining the included parts using drawing filters (p. 64)
Including assemblies in anchor bolt plans (p. 65)
Example: Dimensions in anchor bolt plans (p. 275)
Objects included in the anchor bolt plan

Tekla Structures selects the objects that are included in the anchor bolt plan based on the
following default rules:
• The part is a column or an almost vertical beam.
• The part is the main part of an assembly.
• A base plate is included in the assembly, and it is located lower than the main part. If there
is more than one part in the column assembly that fulfills the rules, the lowest part of them
is considered to be the base plate.
• Bolts are attached to the base plate.
• The assembly is cut by the view plane.
• The boundary box of the base plate in the xy-direction intersects the boundary box of the
column.
See also Creating anchor bolt plans (p. 63)
Defining the included parts using drawing filters

You can use general arrangement drawing filters and advanced options to define the parts to be
included in the anchor bolt plan.
To define the included parts using general arrangement drawing filters:
1. Create the necessary general arrangement drawing filters in the Filter Properties
subdialog box of the general arrangement drawing properties dialog box.
2. Click Tools > Options > Advanced Options > Drawing Properties.
3. Enter the following values for the following advanced options:
• XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_COLUMN_FILTER: <the name of the drawing
filter for columns>
• XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_BOLT_FILTER: <the name of the drawing filter
for bolts>
• XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_BASEPLATE_FILTER: <the name of the drawing
filter for base plates>
• XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_ADDITIONAL_PARTS_FILTER: <the name of the
drawing filter for additional parts>
If you do not use these advanced options, the default rules are used to determine columns,
baseplates, and anchor bolts to be included in the anchor bolt plan.
Creating drawings
Using these advanced options only affect the creation of new anchor bolt
plan drawings, and do not affect already created ones.
See also XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_BASEPLATE_FILTER

XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_BOLT_FILTER
XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_COLUMN_FILTER
XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_ADDITIONAL_PARTS_FILTER
Creating drawing filters
Creating anchor bolt plans (p. 63)
Including assemblies in anchor bolt plans

You can specify how far an assembly can be from the view plane to be included in the anchor
bolt plan.
To specify the distance:
1. Click Tools > Options > Advanced Options > Drawing Properties.
2. Set a value for the advanced option XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_DRAWING_TOLERANCE.
Define the distance in millimeters. The default value is 200 mm.
See also XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_DRAWING_TOLERANCE

2.8 Creating drawings using menu, toolbar or pop-up

commands
In addition to creating drawings in Master Drawing Catalog, you can create all drawing types
using menu, toolbar or pop-up menu commands.
To automatically open any drawing after the drawing has been created,
hold down Ctrl + Shift while you create the drawing.

Creating single-part, assembly, or cast unit drawings (p. 66)
Creating multidrawings (p. 67)
Creating drawings
Creating general arrangement drawings
To create general arrangement drawings using menu, toolbar, or pop-up menu commands:
1. Create the model views you need.
If you want to switch between 3D view and plane view in the created view, press Ctrl+P.
2. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > General Arrangement Drawing...
and select the appropriate predefined drawing properties (saved settings) from the list,
and then click Load.
3. Optional: Modify drawing properties and, if needed, apply object-level settings.
5. Click Drawings & Reports > Create General Arrangement Drawing, or the
corresponding toolbar command.
Alternatively, you can select the model views from the model, right-click and select
Create General Arrangement Drawing from the pop-up menu.
6. If you have not selected the views yet, select them from the displayed list.
You can use the Shift and Ctrl buttons for selecting several views.
7. In the Options list, select if you want to create one drawing for each selected view or
add all selected views in one drawing.
By selecting Empty, you can create an empty drawing and add drawing
views in it afterwards.
8. If you want to open the created drawing, select Open drawing.

9. Click Create.
Tekla Structures creates the drawings and adds them in the Drawing List.
See also Creating drawings using menu, toolbar or pop-up commands (p. 65)
General arrangement drawings (p. 27)
Creating a view
Creating single-part, assembly, or cast unit drawings

To create single-part, assembly, or cast unit drawings using menu, toolbar or pop-up menu
commands:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings, and select a drawing type.
2. Use the drawing properties dialog box to select the appropriate predefined drawing
properties (saved settings), and then click Load.
Ensure that for cast unit drawings, you use a property file that contains the desired Cast
unit creation method:
• By cast unit position: A drawing will be created from each cast unit. If there are
identical cast units, one of them will serve as the base cast unit for the drawing. This
is the most common method for creating cast unit drawings.
• By cast unit ID: Each part in the model includes a unique ID number. You can
create drawings by using cast unit ID numbers. The ID number determines the
marking of the drawing. You can create several drawings from identicat cast units.
3. Optional: Modify the drawing properties and, if needed, apply object-level settings.
Creating drawings
5. Select the objects, or use an appropriate selection filter to select the objects you want to
create drawings from and select the entire model.
Activate only Select parts on the Select switches toolbar when

selecting parts. Otherwise selection could take a long time in large
models.

• Click the desired drawing command on the Drawings & Reports menu.
• Click the corresponding toolbar command.
• If you selected individual objects, right-click and select the appropriate drawing
creation command from the pop-up menu.
If you press down Ctrl + Shift while you select the command from the pop-up menu,
Tekla Structures opens the created drawing.
7. Number the model if you are prompted to do so.
Tekla Structures creates the drawings. The created drawings are listed in the Drawing List.
See also Creating drawings using menu, toolbar or pop-up commands (p. 65)
XS_DRAW_CAST_UNIT_INTERNAL_LINES
XS_DRAW_CAST_PHASE_INTERNAL_LINES
Creating multidrawings
You can create multidrawings of selected parts and of selected drawings. You can also create
empty multidrawings and link views in them from other drawings,
If you create multidrawings from existing drawings, you can choose to include their individual
drawing layouts. If you want to have separate lists, tables, and call-offs for each part or
assembly, you should include the individual drawing layouts. You can also include lists and
tables for all parts or assemblies in the multidrawing.
Before you start, you can set XS_MULTIDRAWING_REMOVE_VIEW_LABEL_GAP to TRUE
through Tools > Options > Advanced Options > Drawing Properties to remove extra space
between drawing view labels and drawing views.
See also XS_MULTIDRAWING_REMOVE_VIEW_LABEL_GAP

Creating empty multidrawings and linking or copying views (p. 67)
Creating multidrawings of selected drawings (p. 68)
Creating multidrawings of selected parts (p. 68)
Creating empty multidrawings and linking or copying views

You can create empty multidrawings in which you can link or copy views in other drawings
with or without layout.
Creating drawings
To create an empty multidrawing and link views:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Create Multidrawing > Empty Drawing.
2. Open the empty multidrawing from the Drawing List.
3. From the Drawing List, select the drawings that you want to link to the multidrawing.
4. Click Views > Add Views from Other Drawing and select one of the copying or linking
commands.
The views are placed in the multidrawing.
5. Arrange the views if they are on top of each other.
See also Creating multidrawings (p. 67)
Creating multidrawings of selected drawings

You can create multidrawings of the drawings you select. You can also keep the layout of the
selected drawing in the new multidrawing.
To create a multidrawing of selected drawings:
To Do this
Create multidrawings of the 1. Select the drawings from the Drawing List.
selected drawings 2. Click Drawings & Reports > Create Multidrawing >
Selected Drawings.
Create multidrawings of the 1. Select the drawings from the Drawing List.
selected drawings, keeping the 2. Click Drawings & Reports > Create Multidrawing >
layout of each selected drawing Selected Drawings with Layout.
Creating multidrawings of selected parts

Create single-part and assembly drawings of the parts that you select and place the drawings in
a multidrawing. You can also keep the layout of the selected single-part or assembly drawings.
To create a multidrawing of selected parts:
To Do this
Create single-part drawings of the 1. Select the parts. Use appropriate selection filters.
selected parts and place the 2. Click Drawings & Reports > Create
drawings in a multidrawing Multidrawing > New Single-Part Drawings of
Selected Parts.
Create single-part drawings of the 1. Select the parts. Use appropriate selection filters.
selected part, keep the layout of 2. Click Drawings & Reports > Create
each drawing, and place the Multidrawing > New Single-Part Drawings of
drawings in a multidrawing Selected Parts with Layout.
Create assembly drawings of the 1. Select the parts. Use appropriate selection filters.
selected parts and place the 2. Click Drawings & Reports > Create
drawings in a multidrawing Multidrawing > New Assembly Drawings of
Selected Parts.
Create assembly drawings of the 1. Select the parts. Use appropriate selection filters.
selected parts, keep the layout of 2. Click Drawings & Reports > Create
each drawing, and place the Multidrawing > New Assembly Drawings of
drawings in a multidrawing. Selected Parts with Layout.
Creating drawings
2.9 Creating multiple drawing sheets of the same part
You can create several drawings from the same part as multiple drawing sheets. The number of
sheets is not limited, and each drawing can have its own properties. This is useful when you
need extra sheets for details and section views, and especially when you want to have several
drawings of an assembly with different presentation options: one with a large 3D image of the
assembly, one with additional section views, and one where only certain parts or sub-
assemblies of the assembly are marked and dimensioned.
You can create multiple drawing sheets of the same part in the Master Drawing Catalog using
rule sets or wizards, or using the drawing properties dialog box.

Creating multiple drawing sheets using wizards (p. 69)
Creating multiple drawing sheets using drawing properties (p. 69)
Creating multiple drawing sheets using wizards

Before you start, ensure that you have created drawing property files (saved settings) for
creating multiple sheets for the same part, each file containing the desired settings for a specific
purpose and individual sheet numbers.
To create several drawing sheets of the same part using drawing wizards in the Master
Drawing Catalog:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Create Drawings to open the Create Drawings - Master
Drawing Catalog dialog box.
2. Double-click the desired wizard file in the list to open the Master Drawing Properties
dialog box.
3. Click Edit drawing properties to open the wizard file.
4. In the file, give the names of the drawing properties files that you want to use to create
the multiple drawing sheets.
Give the file names in parenthesis on the set_drawing_attributes row as shown
below:
set_drawing_type(cast_unit)
set_drawing_attributes(sheet1, sheet2, sheet3)
set_filter(column_filter)
create_drawings()
5. Save the wizard file with a new name.
6. In the model, select the parts you want to create the drawings from.
7. Click the newly created wizard file in the Master Drawing Catalog and click Create
Drawings. Tekla Structures creates the drawings.
See also Creating multiple drawing sheets of the same part (p. 69)
Wizards (p. 52)
Creating multiple drawing sheets using drawing properties

To create multiple drawing sheets through the drawing properties dialog box:
1. Open the drawing properties dialog box.
2. Adjust the drawing properties and change the name so that it refers to the type of drawing
you want to create, for example, FRAME 3D.
Do not touch the Sheet number.
Creating drawings
3. Click Apply to keep the changes and leave the dialog box open.
4. Create a drawing of the object by selecting the appropriate command from the Drawings &
Reports menu.
5. In the drawing properties dialog box, adjust the drawing properties again and change the
name to match the type of the new drawing, for example, FRAME FRONT.
6. Change the sheet number in the Sheet number box to get another drawing of the same
assembly with a different sheet number.
7. Click Apply and create a new drawing of the same object.
8. Continue making all the sheets you need in the same way as above.
Example An example how the Drawing List shows the multiple drawings:
See also Creating multiple drawing sheets of the same part (p. 69)
Creating drawings
3 Finding and opening
drawings
All drawings in a Tekla Structures model are displayed in the Drawing List dialog box. You can
search, sort, select, and display drawings according to different criteria, and open the drawings
displayed in the list. You can also use the Drawing List to locate the drawing parts in the
model, and to find out if a part is included in any of the drawings.
See also Opening the Drawing List (p. 72)

What is displayed in the Drawing List (p. 72)
Drawing status flags (p. 73)
Modifying Drawing List contents (p. 75)
Searching drawings and saving the search results (p. 76)
Finding and opening drawings
Selecting drawings in the Drawing List (p. 76)
Checking whether parts have drawings (p. 76)
Opening drawings from the model (p. 77)
Opening a new drawing when a drawing is already open (p. 77)
Working with drawings (p. 183)
3.1 Opening the Drawing List

To open the Drawing List dialog box, do one of the following:
• Click the Open Drawing List icon

• In the model, select Drawings & Reports > Drawing List...
• In an open drawing, select Drawing File > Open....
• Shortcut for opening the Drawing List in the model: Ctrl + L

• Shortcut for opening the Drawing List when a drawing is open: Ctrl
+O
See also Working with drawings (p. 183)

Finding and opening drawings (p. 71)
3.2 What is displayed in the Drawing List

The Drawing List contains the following columns.
Column Description
Issue, Lock, Freeze, Master, These columns contain flags that are graphical symbols
and Up to date indicating the drawing status.
Changes Textual information about the changes in the drawing.
Created The creation date of the drawing.
Modified The latest modification date of the drawing.
Revision The revision number or revision mark of the drawing.
By default, Tekla Structures shows revision numbers. To
show revision marks instead, set the variable
XS_SHOW_REVISION_MARK_ON_DRAWING_LIST to TRUE.
Size The paper size the drawing uses.
Column Description
Type The drawing types are identified by the following letters:
• W for single-part drawings.
• A for assembly drawings.
• C for cast unit drawings.
• G for general arrangement drawings.
• M for multidrawings.
U (unknown) means that an error has occurred, and you
need to delete the drawing.
Mark In a single-part drawing mark is the part position, and in an
assembly drawing the assembly position from which the
drawing was created. You cannot change drawing marks.
Mark contains the sheet number as well, if it is not zero (0).
You can choose to have Tekla Structures base the mark of
cast unit drawings on the position number or the ID of the
cast unit.
Name The name given for the drawing in the drawing properties
dialog box.
Title 1, Title 2, and Title 3 Extra drawing titles added in the drawing properties dialog
box.
User-defined attributes You can show up to 20 user-defined attributes in the
Drawing List. These user-defined attributes must be added
in the User-defined Attributes subdialog box in drawing
properties. To include a user-defined attribute in drawing
lists, the user-defined attribute must have the option
special_flag set to yes in the objects.inp file.

User-defined attributes in drawings (p. 344)
Checking multi-user databases
Location of hidden files
XS_SHOW_REVISION_MARK_ON_DRAWING_LIST
3.3 Drawing status flags

Tekla Structures uses certain symbols called flags, to indicate the status of the drawings. The
columns Issue, Lock, Freeze, Master and Up to date contain the flags, and the potential
additional information is displayed in the Changes column. If a drawing does not have any
flag symbol, it is up to date.
How to read the drawing status information (p. 74)
How to read the drawing status information

The table below explains the meaning of the status flags and information about the status of a
drawing in the Drawing List.
Column Information in
where the Changes
Flag shown column Description
Up to date Parts modified The parts in the drawing have changed, for
example, parts have been added or deleted,
or part properties have changed.
Quantity The actual drawing is up to date, but the
increased or number of identical parts has changed.
Quantity
decreased
Up to date All parts deleted All the parts related to the drawing have
been deleted.
Lock The drawing is locked and you cannot open
it for editing.
Freeze The drawing is frozen. Changes made to
the model objects, which have drawing
objects associated with them, are no longer
available in the drawing.
Master The drawing has been added as a master
drawing in the Master Drawing Catalog.
Up to date Linked drawing You have a linked drawing in this drawing
changed and the linked drawing has been modified.
Up to date Copied view A copied drawing has been modified.
changed
Drawing updated A frozen drawing has been updated.
Column Information in
where the Changes
Flag shown column Description
Up to date Cloned The drawing is a cloned drawing.
The flag disappears when you save and
close the drawing.
Issue The drawing has been issued. For example,
you might re-issue drawings that have been
sent to site.
Issue Issued drawing The issued drawing has been edited or
changed otherwise changed.
See also Finding and opening drawings (p. 71)
3.4 Modifying Drawing List contents

In addition to using search, you can select which drawings you want to see in the list and in
which order.
To filter the Drawing List contents, do any of the following:
To Do this
Display a predefined set of drawings Select a set of drawings from the select
drawing set list.
Saved search results are also displayed
in this list.
List all drawings Click Show all.
Invert the contents of the current list Click Invert.
This feature allows you to list the
opposite of the current content.
For example, if you had selected to
display Locked drawings, clicking
Invert shows all drawings except the
locked ones.
List selected drawings only Select the drawings and click Selected.
List up-to-date drawings only Click Up to date.
List drawings that need to be updated 1. Click Up to date.
2. Click Invert.
Lists only drawings associated with the 1. Select objects in the model.
objects you have selected in the model. 2. Click By parts.
This is an easy way to identify the
drawings associated with a specific
part, assembly or cast unit.
Sort the list according to Column name Click the column name.

3.5 Searching drawings and saving the search
results
You can search for drawings in the Drawing List.
To search for drawings and save the results:
1. In the Drawing List, enter the search criteria in Enter search criteria.
2. Optional: You can limit the search so that it addresses only information in a certain
column by selecting a column from the Search in list.
3. Optional: You can also limit the search to the currently visible drawings by selecting
Search within the currently visible drawings.
4. Click Search.
5. Click Store to save the search results.
6. Enter a name for the search results in the Store Search Result dialog box and click OK.
The search results are saved in the DrawingListSearches file, which is created in
the model folder. You can move the saved search results to your environment, company
or project folder. After you have saved the search results, they will be visible in the
predefined drawing sets list in the Drawing List dialog box.

3.6 Selecting drawings in the Drawing List

The Drawing List allows you to select one or several drawings at a time. Selecting several
drawings is useful, for example, if you want to lock or freeze several drawings at a time.
To select drawings in the Drawing List:
To Do this
Select one drawing Click the drawing in the list.
Select several consecutive Click the first drawing, then hold down the
drawings Shift key and click the last drawing.
Select several non-consecutive Click the first drawing, then hold down the Ctrl
drawings key and click the other drawings you want to
select.
Select all drawings in the list Press Ctrl+A.

3.7 Checking whether parts have drawings

You can use the Drawing List to identify parts in the model that have associated drawings.
Before you start, ensure that you have only the Select parts select
switch active on the Selection toolbar. Otherwise selecting objects can
take a long time in large models.
1. Open a model view where all parts are clearly visible.

2. In the Drawing List, press Ctrl + A to select all drawings.
3. To highlight the parts that have drawings, click Select objects.
4. After completing the previous step you can highlight the parts that do not have
drawings by holding down the Ctrl key and selecting the entire model (hold down the
left mouse button and drag all the way from left to right).

3.8 Opening drawings from the model

You can open drawings from the Drawing List. You can only have one drawing open at a time.
To open a drawing:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing List... or the icon on the toolbar.
2. Double-click the drawing to open it.
Shortcut for opening the Drawing List: Ctrl + L.

3.9 Opening a new drawing when a drawing is

already open
You can also open another drawing when you already have a drawing open. If you have made
some changes in the open drawing, Tekla Structures asks you if you want to save the changes
before opening another drawing.
Do one of the following:
To Do this
Open a drawing using the Drawing
List. 1. Click Drawing File > Open... or the icon
on the toolbar.
2. Double-click the drawing in the list.
Open the next drawing in the Press Ctrl + Page Down.
Drawing List.
Open the previous drawing in the Press Ctrl + Page Up.
Drawing List.
Shortcut for opening the Drawing List when a drawing is open: Ctrl + O.

Opening drawings from the model (p. 77)
4 Editing drawings
This section explains how to edit the drawings that you have created.
After you have created a drawing, you can modify properties of the layout and the views,
building objects, and associative annotation objects already included in the drawing. You can
also add more views, associative and independent annotation objects, and additional drawing
objects. You can also change drawing colors.
Contents Renaming drawings (p. 79)

Giving titles to drawings (p. 80)
Drawing views (p. 80)
Building objects (p. 138)
Associative annotation objects (p. 127)
Dimensions (p. 98)
Independent annotation objects (p. 133)
Welds in drawings (p. 147)
Symbols in drawings (p. 154)
Additional drawing objects (p. 157)
Changing drawing objects (p. 158)
Using drawing tools (p. 167)
Grids in drawings (p. 174)
Colors in drawings (p. 175)
User coordinate system (UCS) (p. 180)
4.1 Renaming drawings

Tekla Structures names the drawings according to the name given in the drawing properties.
The drawing name is displayed in the Drawing List and in drawing templates.
To rename a drawing:
1. In the Drawing List, right-click the drawing and select Properties.
Editing drawings
2. Switch all the check boxes off in the dialog box by clicking the on/off switch at
the bottom of the dialog box.
3. Select the check box next to the Name box.
4. Enter the new name in the Name box.
5. Click Modify.
See also Editing drawings (p. 79)

4.2 Giving titles to drawings

You can define titles for your drawing.Tekla Structures shows the title in the Drawing List and
drawing and report templates. You can define up to three additional titles to use in drawing
templates.
To give a title to a drawing:
1. In the Drawing List, right-click the drawing and select Properties.
Select the check boxes next to the Title boxes you want to use.
3. Enter the titles.
4. Click Modify.

4.3 Drawing views

Drawing views include the selected parts of the Tekla Structures model and objects that you
may manually add in the open drawing. The drawing view is another way of looking at the
model. Drawings may include several views.
You can have different types of views in Tekla Structures drawings:
• Main views: front, top, back and bottom views
• Section views
• End views
• Single-part views
• 3D views
• Detail views
• Key plan views
• Views along grid lines
• Elevation views
• Plan views
In addition to the views Tekla Structures creates automatically in a drawing based on the
drawing properties, you can also add new ones in the open drawing.This section explains how
to add views, change the size and location of the views in drawings, and how to copy and link
between drawings.
Editing drawings
Adding views in drawings (p. 81)
Copying drawing views from another drawing (p. 89)
Linking views from another drawing (p. 92)
Moving views to another drawing (p. 90)
Changing drawing views (p. 92)
Automatic drawing views (p. 225)
View properties in drawings (p. 357)
Section view properties (p. 360)
Key plans (p. 219)
Adding views in drawings

Once you have created drawings, you can still add views to them manually. You can create
drawing views of:
• Entire model
• Selected areas in a model
• Views in the same drawing
• Single parts in an assembly
• Objects in 3D
• Sections in a drawing
• Details in a drawing
• Reinforcement meshes
See also Creating a section view (p. 83)

Creating a detail view (p. 81)
Creating a curved section view (p. 84)
Creating additional views of parts (p. 85)
Creating a view of an entire model view (p. 86)
Creating a view of a selected area in a model view (p. 87)
Creating a view of a selected area in a drawing view (p. 87)
Adding single-part views in assembly drawings (p. 89)
Creating a view for a reinforcement mesh (p. 88)
Creating a detail view

You can create a detail view from a selected area in an existing drawing view in another scaled-
up view. The direction of the detail view is the same as that of the original view.
1. Open a drawing.
2. Click Annotating > Properties > Detail Mark.
3. Enter a name for the detail, and modify the detail mark, detail boundary and detail view
label properties in the Detail Symbol Properties dialog box.
The shape of the detail boundary you select affects the way you select the area for your
detail.
4. Click OK or Apply.
5. Click View > Create Drawing View > Detail View.
6. Depending on the selected detail boundary shape, do one of the following:
Editing drawings
• If the shape is Circle, pick the center point of the circle and then pick a point on the
circle.
• If the shape is Rectangle, pick corner points for the rectangle.
7. Pick a position for the detail mark.
8. Pick a position for the detail view.
Tekla Structures creates the detail view using the view properties of the original view (the view
where you select the detail) and the properties in the Detail Symbol Properties dialog box.
You can change the properties after creating the view.
Detail boundary is set to Circle
Detail mark
Detail view
Detail view label
See also Adding views in drawings (p. 81)

Modifying detail properties (p. 98)
Modifying drawing view properties (p. 96)
Defining start number or letter for detail view label and mark (p. 83)
XS_DETAIL_MARK_REFERENCE_SYMBOL
Editing drawings
Defining start number or letter for detail view label and mark
Before creating the detail view label and detail mark define a start number or letter in the
drawing properties.
To define the start number or letter:
1. Double-click an open drawing.
2. Click the check box toggle selection button at the bottom of the dialog box, and select
only the check box next to the Detail view button.
3. Click Detail View.
4. Enter the start number or letter.
5. Click Modify.
See also Creating a detail view (p. 81)
Creating a section view

You can create a section views of the parts in a drawing view.
1. Open a drawing. The drawing must contain at least one view.
2. Click Annotating > Properties > Section Mark.
3. Modify the cutting line, section mark, and section view label properties.
5. Hold down Shift and click View > Create Drawing View > Section View.
6. Modify the view properties as required.
8. Pick two points to define the position and the direction of the section.
It is easier to pick the points if you activate orthogonal snapping by

clicking Tools > Ortho or pressing O.
9. Pick two points to indicate the cut box.

10. Select a position for the section view.
A view symbol follows the cursor allowing you to see where you are about to place the
section view.
Tekla Structures creates the section view using the current properties in the View
Properties and Section Symbol Properties dialog boxes and adds a section mark in the
original view. You can change the properties after creating the view.
Change the view scale of the section views, if necessary: Double-click

the view frame, unselect all other selection and select only the Scale
option, and adjust the scale.
Editing drawings
Tekla Structures shows the cut box while you select it
A view symbol follows the mouse pointer while you are placing the
section view
Section mark
Section view and section view label

Modifying section properties (p. 97)
Adding view labels for main and section views (p. 246)
Creating a curved section view

You can create a curved section view of an existing drawing view. This tool is useful when you
want to visualize an unfolded face of a building or to manage cladding.
1. Open a drawing.
2. Click Annotating > Properties > Section Mark.
3. Modify the cutting line, section mark, and section view label properties.
5. Hold down Shift and click View > Create Drawing View > Curved Section View.
Editing drawings
8. Pick three points on the cut plane.
9. Pick two points to indicate the cut box.
10. Pick a point to indicate the location of the curved section view.
A symbol follows the cursor allowing you to see where you are about to place the curved
section view.
Tekla Structures creates the curved section view using the current properties in the View
Properties and Section Symbol Properties dialog boxes and adds a section mark in the
original view. You can change the properties after creating the view.

Creating additional views of parts

You can create additional views of a part within a single-part, cast unit or assembly drawing.
You can select the part plane (front, top, back, bottom) to use or create a 3 D view.
1. Open a drawing.
2. Click View > Create Drawing View > Of Parts in Drawing and select one of the
commands Front, Top, Back, Bottom, 3D.
Tekla Structures creates the view using the current properties in the View Properties
dialog box.
Tekla Structures will not create views on planes that already have a view in the drawing.
3. Double-click the view frame to open the View Properties dialog box and modify the
properties as required.
For 3D views, you may want to modify the view angle.
4. Click Modify.
Example In the example below, the drawing originally contained only the front view. A 3D view and a
top view were added. The angle of the 3D view was modified in the View Properties dialog
box.
Editing drawings
Creating a view of an entire model view

You can create a drawing view of an entire model view and add it in the drawing.
To create a view of the entire model view:
1. Open a drawing.
2. Open a model view list by clicking Views > Model Views > Model View List....
3. Hold down Shift and click View > Create Drawing View > Of Entire Model View.
4. Modify the view properties, for example the view scale, and click OK or Apply
5. Open a model view from the model view list.
6. Click the open model view.
Tekla Structures creates the drawing view using the current properties in the View Properties
dialog box. It calculates the boundaries of the view to fit the entire model view into the drawing
view, and places the view in the lower left corner of the drawing.
Editing drawings
Change the view scale in the view properties if the view is too big.

Creating a view of a selected area in a model view

You can create a drawing view of a selected area in the model and add it in the drawing.
To create a drawing view of a selected area in the model and add it in your drawing:
1. Open a drawing.
2. Open a model view list by clicking Views > Model Views > Model View List....
3. Hold down Shift and click View > Create Drawing View > Of Selected Area in Model.
4. Modify the view properties as required and click OK or Apply.
5. Open a model view from the model view list.
6. Pick two corners in the model to define the x and y dimensions of the drawing view. The
x and y directions use the coordinate system of the model view. The view depth of the
drawing view is the same as the depth of the model view.
Tekla Structures creates the drawing view using the current properties in the View Properties
dialog box. Tekla Structures places the view in the lower left corner of the drawing.

Creating a view of a selected area in a drawing view

You can create a new drawing view of an area in an existing drawing view.
Editing drawings
To create a new drawing view of an area in the existing drawing view:
1. Open a drawing.
2. Hold down Shift and click View > Create Drawing View > Of Selected Area in
Drawing View.
3. Modify the view label color.
Other view properties are inherited from the original drawing view.
5. Select the area in the drawing view of which you want to make a new view.
6. Select a position for the new view.
A symbol representing the view that you are about to place follows the mouse pointer, so
it is easier for you to see where to place the view.
Tekla Structures creates the drawing view using the view properties of the original view.

Creating a view for a reinforcement mesh

You can create drawing views each containing one reinforcement mesh by using the macro
RebarMeshViewCreator. You can create mesh views in general arrangement and cast unit
drawings.
The mesh view contains the overall mesh length and width dimensions, and dimension lines for
wire spacing in horizontal and vertical directions. Also the wire sizes are displayed.
To create a reinforcement mesh view:
1. Open the drawing.
2. Select the meshes.
If you want to create views for all meshes in the drawing, you do not need to select them.
3. Click Tools > Options to go to the Macros dialog box.
4. Start the macro by selecting RebarMeshViewCreator and clicking Run.
5. You have the following choices in creating mesh views:
• If you want to create a mesh view for each separate mesh in the current drawing,
select Create mesh view for all meshes in the drawing.
• If you want to create a view for the selected meshes only, select Create view for
selected meshes. Here you must select the meshes before running the macro.
• If you have already created the mesh views and just want to add dimension lines and
diameters in the views, select Create annotations for selected meshes. Here you
must select the meshes before running the macro.
6. Click Create.
Editing drawings
Tekla Structures creates the views based on the property files RebarMeshDim,
RebarMeshMark, and RebarMeshView for the dimensions, marks, and views
respectively.
Example Below is an example of a mesh view.
Adding single-part views in assembly drawings

In addition to automatically including single-part views in assembly drawings, you can also add
single-part drawing views in a final assembly drawing.
1. Open the assembly drawing.
2. In the drawing view, select the parts of which you want to create a single-part view.
3. Right-click and select Create single-part views.
Tekla Structures adds the single-part views to the assembly drawing using the current
properties in the Assembly Drawing Properties dialog box (Assembly Drawing Properties >
Layout > Other > Single-part attributes).
See also XS_NO_END_VIEWS_TO_INCLUDED_SINGLE_DRAWINGS

Including single-part drawings in assembly drawings (p. 230)
Copying drawing views from another drawing

You can copy drawing views from other drawings.
To copy a drawing view from another drawing:
1. Open a drawing.
2. Open the Drawing List by pressing Ctrl + O.
3. Select the drawing containing the view you want to copy. You can select several
drawings.
4. Click View > Add Views from Other Drawing and select Copy or Copy with Layout:
• Copy copies the views from the selected drawings as such to the open drawing.
Tekla Structures does not copy the drawing layout.
Editing drawings
• Copy with Layout copies the views and layout from the selected drawings as such
to the open drawing.
Copied drawing views do not update when the original views change.

Moving views to another drawing

You can move section and detail views to another drawing through the drawing list. When you
move views to another drawing, the source drawing and the target drawing will contain
references to each other.
General arrangement drawings are often quite full of information. You

may want to create empty general arrangement drawings and move
detail or section views from the original general arrangement drawings
to an empty drawing.
To move a drawing view to another drawing:

1. In an open drawing, select the frame of the drawing view you want to move.
2. Right-click and select Move to drawing from the pop-up menu.
3. Select the target drawing from the Drawing List.
4. Click Move in the Move view to drawing dialog box.
5. Close and save the source drawing.
Tekla Structures moves the selected view to the target drawing and creates references
between the source and target drawings.
6. Open the target drawing from the Drawing List.
The Drawing List indicates that the drawing has been updated.
7. Arrange the drawing views, if necessary.
8. Save the target drawing.
Example In this example, we have two drawings on the Drawing List: BEAM1 and BEAM2.
We move section view C-C from drawing BEAM1 to BEAM2. Below is the original section view
in the source drawing BEAM1.
Editing drawings
We move this view to drawing BEAM2 according to the instructions above. Below is the moved
section view in the target drawing BEAM2. The view label name contains the name of the
source drawing BEAM1.
In the source drawing BEAM1, the section mark of the moved section view contains a reference
to the target drawing BEAM2.
See also Defining free or fixed placement of views (p. 253)

Arranging drawing views (p. 96)
XS_SECTION_VIEW_REFERENCE
Editing drawings
XS_SECTION_SYMBOL_REFERENCE
XS_DETAIL_VIEW_REFERENCE
XS_DETAIL_SYMBOL_REFERENCE
Linking views from another drawing

You can link drawing views from other drawings.
To link drawing views:
1. Open a drawing.
2. Open the Drawing List by pressing Ctrl + O.
3. Select the drawing containing the view you want to link. You can select several
drawings.
4. Click View > Add Views from Other Drawing and select Link or Link with Layout:
• Link displays the views of the selected drawings in the open drawing. Tekla
Structures does not copy the drawing layout.
• Link with Layout displays the views and the layout of the selected drawings in the
open drawing.
Linked drawing views update when the original views change.
Changing drawing views

Once you have added the necessary views in your drawing, you may want to modify the view
contents, appearance, size, location and rotation.
See also Drawing views (p. 80)

Resizing drawing views (p. 92)
Resizing the drawing view boundary (p. 93)
Moving drawing views (p. 94)
Aligning views (p. 95)
Rotating drawing views (p. 96)
Arranging drawing views (p. 96)
Modifying detail properties (p. 98)
Resizing drawing views

You can resize the views using the view frame handles.
1. Click the view frame.
2. Click a view frame handle.
3. Drag the handle to the desired location.
Editing drawings
View frame
View frame handle
Click View > Fit Drawing Views to resize drawing views so that there is
no unnecessary space in the views. You can resize the Selected views,
or All views.
See also Changing drawing views (p. 92)
Resizing the drawing view boundary

The view boundary is the dashed frame around the contents of a drawing view. You can resize
the view boundary, for example, to show just a specific part of the view contents.
The view boundaries are not visible in the views that you create in the final drawing.
To resize the view boundary:
2. Click one of the handles on the view boundary.
3. Drag the handles along the x or y axis of the view.
4. Make the view smaller by clicking the view frame and dragging the view frame handles.
Editing drawings
View boundary handle
View boundary
View frame
View frame handle
The result after resizing the view boundary and the view frame
Limitations You cannot use the drag technique to modify drawing view depth. You must modify the depth+
and depth- properties in the View Properties dialog box.
Moving drawing views

You can move drawing views by dragging and dropping.
Editing drawings
2. Drag the view to a new location.
The view follows the cursor while you drag the view, so you know what the end result
will be.
When you drag a view, its placing setting may change to fixed
depending on what is set for the advanced option
XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_VIEWS_TO_FIXED.

XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_VIEWS_TO_FIXED
Aligning views
You can align views vertically or horizontally.
To align views vertically:
1. Select a drawing view in an open drawing, then right-click to display the pop-up menu.
2. Select Align vertically from the pop-up menu.
3. Pick a point in the selected view.
4. Pick a point in the view with which you want to align the selected view.
Tekla Structures moves the views so that the picked points line up vertically.
Editing drawings
Rotating drawing views
You can rotate the views in drawings.
1. Click the frame of the view you want to rotate.
2. Click View > Rotate Drawing View....
3. Enter the angle in degrees, for example, 90 or -90, in the displayed dialog box and
click Rotate.
Arranging drawing views

You can fit the drawing views so that they include all the connected objects, and rearrange the
drawing views using the current properties in the Layout Properties properties dialog box.
To fit and arrange drawing views:
• Click View > Arrange Drawing Views.
• Arrange Drawing Views only affects views where the Place is set
to Free in the view properties. Fixed views are not moved.
• If you have set XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_VIEWS_TO_FIXED to TRUE
(default) and drag a view in a drawing, the view becomes fixed, and
the Arrange Drawing Views command does not work
• Arrange Drawing Views may change the drawing size if you have
used automatic scaling of drawing views.

XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_VIEWS_TO_FIXED
Modifying drawing view properties

You can modify view properties in the final drawing view by view or in selected views.
To modify view properties:
• If you want to modify the properties in several views, hold down Ctrl and click the
view frames of the views you want to modify and click View > Drawing View
Properties.
• To modify the properties of one view, double-click the view frame.
2. Switch all the check boxes off in the dialog box by clicking the on/off switch
at the bottom of the dialog box.

3. Select the check boxes next to the properties you want to modify.
For example, change the view Scale.
5. Click Modify in each of the subdialog boxes where you change the properties.
6. Optional: If there are some object level settings that you want to apply, click the Edit
settings button and load the object settings that you want to use. Click Modify.
See also View properties in drawings (p. 357)

Editing drawings
Modifying section properties
You can modify the section mark, section view label and section view cutting line properties in
an open drawing.
To modify section properties:
1. Double-click the section mark.

3. Select only the check boxes next to the properties you want to modify.
4. On the Cutting line tab, set the section mark line length and offset (distance between the
mark and the section).
5. On the Section mark tab, click the ... button next to A1 - A5 to open the Mark Contents
dialog box and select the elements to be included in the section mark.
6. Optional: Select an element from the list, click Add frame and select the frame Type and
Color. You can set these individually for each element.
7. Optional: Select an element from the list and select the text Color, Font and Height. You
can set these individually for each element.
8. On the Position tab, set the side to show the text, the text position, the horizontal and
vertical offset, and the text rotation. Text positioning depends on whether you use a
symbol or not.
9. Click Modify.
10. In the Symbol area, define the section mark symbols. You can select from a list of
predefined arrow symbols or use your own custom symbol. The symbol properties can
be given separately for both the left and the right section mark symbols. Also set the
color, size and position of section mark symbols.
11. On the View label tab, click the ... button next to A1 - A5 to open the Mark Contents
dialog box, and select the elements to be included in the section view label.
12. Modify the element appearance and mark position as described above.
13. Click Modify.
14. Select the view label Symbol to be used in the label. You can also set the color, size, and
the line length of the section view label line and symbol.
15. Click Modify.
See also View, section view and detail view label mark elements (p. 389)
Section and detail mark elements (p. 388)
Positioning properties of view label, section and detail marks (p. 378)
Modifying section marks (p. 247)
Editing drawings
Modifying detail properties
You can modify the properties of detail marks, detail view labels and detail mark boundaries in
an open drawing.
To modify detail properties:
1. Double-click a detail mark to display the Detail Symbol Properties dialog box.

3. Select only the check boxes next to the properties you want to modify.
4. On the View label tab, modify the name of the detail.
5. Click the ... button next to A1 - A5 to open the Mark Contents dialog box, and select the
elements to be included in the detail view label mark.
6. Optional: Select an element from the list, click Add frame and select the frame Type and
Color. You can set these individually for each element.
7. Optional: Select an element from the list and select the text Color, Font and Height. You
can set these individually for each element.
8. On the Position tab, set the text position, horizontal and vertical offset, and the text
alignment. Text positioning depends on whether you use a symbol or not.
9. Click Modify.
10. Select the view label Symbol to be used in the label. You can also set the color, size, and
the line length of the view label line and symbol.
11. Select the Vertical (Above or Below) and Horizontal (Center by view frame or Center
by view restriction box) position of the view label.
12. Go to the Detail boundary tab and define the shape of the boundary and the color and
type of the bounding line.
Use the advanced option XS_DETAIL_BOUNDARY_RADIUS for setting a fixed size for
the detail boundary.
13. On to the Detail mark tab, click the ... button next to A1 - A5 to open the Mark Contents
dialog box and select the elements to be included in the detail view label mark.
14. Modify the element appearance and mark position as in steps 3, 4 and 5 above.
15. Click Modify.
16. Select the detail mark Symbol to be used in the mark. You can also change the color and
size of the symbol.
17. Click modify in the Detail Symbol Properties dialog box.
See also XS_DETAIL_BOUNDARY_RADIUS

View, section view and detail view label mark elements (p. 389)
4.4 Dimensions
In addition to the automatically created dimensions defined in the drawing properties of the
created drawings, Tekla Structures contains several tools for modifying the automatically
created dimensions and for adding new dimensions in the final drawing.
See also Adding dimensions (p. 99)

Semi-automatic dimensioning of general arrangement drawings (p. 115)
Editing dimensions (p. 119)
Checking dimension point validity (p. 127)
Automatic dimensions (p. 253)
Editing drawings
Dimension and dimensioning properties (p. 361)
Adding dimensions
In addition to the automatically created dimensions, you can add dimensions in the final
drawing.
See also Adding manual dimensions (p. 99)

Adding tags to dimensions (p. 104)
Adding dual dimensions manually (p. 107)
Adding dimension (distribution) lines to reinforcing bars (p. 110)
Adding predefined reinforcement dimensions (p. 109)
Recreating dimensions for all parts (p. 108)
Example: Manual dimensions (p. 100)
Adding manual dimensions using User Coordinate System (p. 103)
Creating exaggerated dimensions (p. 259)
Dimensioning center of gravity (p. 113)
Dimension mark and dimension tag properties (p. 365)
Dimensions (p. 98)
Adding manual dimensions

To add dimensions:
1. Hold down Shift, click Dimensioning and select one of the dimensioning commands
depending on the type of dimension you want to create.
For more information on each command, see the corresponding menu tooltip.
2. Modify the dimension and dimension mark properties, and add dimension tag marks as
required.
The available dimension mark and dimension tag mark elements are the same as those
for the part, bolt, reinforcement and surface treatment marks.
4. Create the dimension by following the instructions on the status bar.
It is very important to use correct snap switches to get the dimensions

correct. Change the switch by rigth-clicking and selecting the switch that
suits the best for your purpose. You can also select the snap switch from
the toolbar.
In dimension types where you click the middle mouse button to place the
dimension line, the placement setting affects the result. If you have set
Placing to fixed, the position you click will be the location of the
dimension line. If you have set Placing to free, the middle mouse button
click defines which side of the object the dimension line is located on,
and Tekla Structures places the dimension line.
See also Placement settings (p. 249)

Modifying dimension properties (p. 126)
Editing drawings
Adding dimensions (p. 99)
Changing the prefix in radial dimensions (p. 261)
Mark elements (p. 382)
Example: Manual dimensions

Here are some examples of manual dimensions.
Command Example
Add Parallel Dimension
Shows the edge points

picked for defining the direction
for the parallel dimension line.
Shows the dimension

points picked.
Same part as before, now

dimensioned with Add
Perpendicular Dimension
Shows the edge points

picked for defining the direction
for the perpendicular dimension
line.
Shows the dimension

points picked.

Editing drawings
Command Example
Add Curved Dimension > With
Orthogonal Reference Lines
The dimension text on the line is
a distance value.
If the ends of a curved beam or

polybeam have been cut or
fitted, the points at the ends of
the beam do not necessarily lie
on the true curve of the beam.
This is because curved beams
are created with straight
segments. The points are
indicated with
To avoid creating incorrect
curved dimensions, pick the
three points defining the arc
using three of the points
indicated with
Use end point snap.

Editing drawings
Command Example
Radial Reference Lines
Curved set to Distance.
a distance value.

Radial Reference Lines
Curved set to Angle.
an angle value.
Add Angular Dimension

Angle set to Degrees at angle
vertex

Angle set to Degrees on side

Editing drawings
Command Example
Angle set to Triangle.
Triangle base length set to 100
Add Radial Dimension
See also Dimensions (p. 98)

Adding manual dimensions using User Coordinate System

You can pick UCS (user coordinate system) points to define the current coordinate system in
the drawing view. If you do this, the dimensioning commands Add Horizontal Dimension,
Add Vertical Dimension and Add Orthogonal Dimension follow the defined coordinate
system.
To create dimensions in the horizontal direction using UCS:
1. Open a drawing.
2. Right-click the desired view, select Tools > User Coordinate System (UCS) > Set by
Two Points.
3. Pick the UCS origin and the UCS X direction.
4. Click Dimensioning > Add Horizontal Dimension.

5. Pick the start and end point for the dimension.

Editing drawings
6. Point to the location where you want to add the dimension line and click the middle
mouse button.
When you use the Add Orthogonal Dimension command, it

automatically finds out whether the dimension line is in the X or Y
direction depending on which one is the closest.
See also User coordinate system (UCS) (p. 180)

Adding tags to dimensions

You can add dimension tags to dimensions in an open drawing. You can add dimension tags to
single and combined dimensions.
To add dimension tags to a dimension:
1. Double-click the dimension.
2. Go to the Tags tab and select the locations where you want to add dimension tags.
You can add dimension tags above and below the dimension line to the left and right end
of the line, to the dimension line ends, and in the middle of the dimension line below the
line.

Editing drawings
3. Click the ... buttons to go to the Tag Mark Properties dialog box.
You can also enter text directly in the A - G boxes.
4. Select the tag rotation. Each tag has an independent rotation setting, so you can rotate
some tags and leave others unrotated.
• Parallel to dimension line does not rotate the tag. This is the default value.
• Perpendicular to dimension line rotates the tag.
5. Include the elements that you want in the dimension tag.
The available elements are the same as those of the part, bolt, reinforcement and surface
treatment marks.
6. Select the element frame type and color and the text color, font, and height.
7. Click OK.
8. If you want to show the part count in the tag, set Include part count in the tag to Yes.
9. Use Exclude parts according to filter and select a predefined filter to remove some of
the automatically created tag content.
In addition to the user-selectable elements, some of the dimension tag content is
automatically created based on the dimension end point locations. If you want to exclude
unnecessary tag content for parts that are located in the same location as the
dimensioning point, create suitable drawing view filter.
10. Click Modify.
Limitations • Rotation is not available for the middle dimension tags.

• The dimension tags are automatically updated according to model changes, when you
update the drawing. If you want to disable the automatic update, you can freeze the
drawing or set the advanced option XS_INTELLIGENT_DRAWING_ALLOWED to FALSE.
This advanced option affects all drawings.
Example Below is an example of dimension tags.
Below is an example of an unrotated and rotated dimension tags.

Editing drawings
See also Part mark elements (p. 383)
Bolt mark elements (p. 384)
Reinforcement mark elements (p. 385)
Surface treatment mark elements (p. 388)
Using superscript in text (p. 134)
Dimensions (p. 98)
XS_INTELLIGENT_DRAWING_ALLOWED
Creating view filters in drawings
Example: Removing dimension tag content (p. 106)
Example: Removing dimension tag content

In this example, you will remove from a dimension tag some content that is added in the tag
automatically based on the dimension end point locations. First you will create a drawing view
filter that you will use for removing the content.
The example below shows a tag that automatically contains the text "CORBEL". You will
remove this text.
To create the filter and remove the desired content:

1. Open a drawing.

Editing drawings
2. Double-click the view frame to open the View Properties dialog box.
3. Double-click Filter... to open the View Filter Properties dialog box.
4. Click Add row and create a filter according to the example below.
5. Enter concrete as the name of the filter in the box next to the Save as button and
click the button to save the filter.
6. Click Cancel to close the dialog box.
7. In the drawing, double-click the dimension that contains the content that you want to
remove.
The Dimension Properties dialog box is displayed.
8. Go to the Tags page.
9. In Exclude parts according to filter, select the concrete filter.
10. Click Modify.
Tekla Structures removes the text "CORBEL" from the dimension tag. The material type
of corbel is concrete, and the concrete filter removes all concrete parts from the tag.
See also Adding tags to dimensions (p. 104)

Adding dual dimensions manually

You can add dual dimensions manually in an existing drawing.

Editing drawings
To add dual dimensions manually:
1. Go to Tools > Options > Options... > Drawing dimensions > Dimensions in tags, set
the unit, formats and precision, and activate the dual dimensions for the drawing types
you want.
2. Click OK.
3. Double-click a dimension in your drawing.
4. Go to the Tags tab, and enter the text DIMENSION in the middle dimension tag.
5. Click Modify.
6. Optional: If you do not want to show dual dimensions in all dimensions, you can
manually delete the text DIMENSION from the tag.
Example Below is an example of dual dimensions that use the unit mm and format ###.

Recreating dimensions for all parts

You can recreate the same dimensions that were originally created for the parts in the drawing.
To recreate dimensions for all parts:
2. Click Dimensioning > Recreate Dimensions for All Parts.
Tekla Structures re-dimensions all views except linked, 3D and key plan views, and
removes all manually created dimensions.
Tekla Structures dimensions parts only in views where Dimension creation method in
this view is set to Automatically in the view properties dialog box.

Editing drawings
Adding predefined reinforcement dimensions

You can add dimensions to reinforcing bar groups in an open cast unit drawing.
Each reinforcing bar group with identical spacing has a mark and dimension line. You can
define the contents of the marks yourself or use predefined dimension settings files. You can
add dimension tags on dimension lines.
To add reinforcement dimensions using predefined dimension settings files, do one of the
following:
To Do this
Create dimensions 1. Right-click the reinforcing bar group and select Add Mark >
including dimension Dimension Mark from the pop-up menu.
marks 2. Double-click the created dimension to display the Dimension
3. Load the standard file dimension_mark.
4. Modify properties as required. For example, you can adjust
contents of the dimension mark.
5. If you want to save the settings in the standard file
dimension_mark, click Save.
6. Click Modify.
Create dimensions 1. Right-click the reinforcing bar group and select Add Mark >
including dimension Tagged Dimension Mark from the pop-up menu.
marks and dimension 2. Double-click the created dimension to display the Dimension
tags Properties dialog box.
3. Load the standard file tagged_dimension_mark and go
to the Tags tab.
4. Click the ... button next to <<Mark>> to adjust the contents
of the dimension tag.
5. In the Dimension Right Upper Corner Tag Mark Properties
dialog box, select the elements to include.
6. Modify other tag mark properties, for example, the rotation
and the appearance of the tag mark.
7. Click OK
8. Modify other tag properties as required. For example, you can
include part count in the tag, and filter out tag content using
Exlude parts according to filter.
9. If you want to save the settings in the standard file
tagged_dimension_mark, click Save.
10. Click Modify.
Example Below is an example of a reinforcement dimension with dimension mark.

Editing drawings
Below is an example of a reinforcement dimension with additional dimension tag.

Adding dimension (distribution) lines to reinforcing bars

You can add dimension lines, or distribution lines, to reinforcing bar groups. They show the
distribution of the reinforcing bars in the group.
To create a dimension line:
1. Open a cast unit drawing.
2. Right-click a reinforcing bar group and select Create dimension line from the pop-up
menu. Tekla Structures creates the dimension line.
3. Optional: Double-click the dimension line to display the Dimension Properties dialog
box.
Modify the properties as required. Click Modify to apply the changes.
4. Optional: You can drag a reinforcement dimension line out of the reinforcement bar
group.

Editing drawings
When you do this, Tekla Structures draws a dashed line from the reinforcing bar to the
dimension line. If the new location is in the reinforcement area, the reinforcing bar mark
follows the intersection of the reinforcement bar and reinforcement dimension line.
Example Below is an example of the dimension line.
Below is an example of the dimension line when it has been dragged outside the reinforcing bar
group.

Dimensioning spiral stirrup reinforcement groups

You can add dimensions to a spiral stirrup reinforcement group using the Create
StirrupDimPlugin application.
Creating the dimensions successfully with this application requires that you model the
reinforcing bar group using the creation method By exact spacings and reinforcing bar group
type Spiral in the Reinforcing Bar Properties dialog box.
Before you can use this feature, add the Create StirrupDimPlugin command to a toolbar or to
the User menu through Tools > Customize.

Editing drawings
To add dimensions to a spiral stirrup reinforcement group, modify the dimension properties and
add a text to the stirrup group:
1. Select the reinforcement.
2. Click the command Create StirrupDimPlugin that you added on a toolbar.
3. Click the location where you want to place the dimension.
The application creates the dimensions. Clicking the upper side of the reinforcement
creates dimensions above the cast unit, and clicking the bottom side of the reinforcement
creates dimensions below the cast unit.
4. To change the Center-to-center distance letter, double-click the dimension to open the
Stirrup dimensioning plug-in dialog box.
5. Change the letter and click Modify.

6. Optional: You can modify the dimension properties of the created stirrup dimension in
the following way:
a Open the Dimension Properties dialog box.
b Load the StirrupDim properties.
c Modify and save the properties as StirrupDim.
d Double-click the stirrup dimension.
e Click Modify.
7. Optional: You can add a text to the stirrup:
a Open the Text Properties dialog box.
b Load the StirrupDim properties.
c Change the settings as required.
d Save the properties with the name StirrupDim.
e Click OK and add the text.
Example

Editing drawings
See also Creating a user-defined menu
Managing toolbars
Dimensioning center of gravity

You can indicate the location of the center of gravity (COG) in single-part, assembly, and cast
unit drawings by creating COG dimensions and a COG symbol at the center of gravity. You can
also create COG dimensions in section views. COG dimensions will be automatically updated
if the single part, assembly, or cast-unit changes. The COG dimensions can also be cloned.
To create COG dimensions:
1. Double-click the Create COG Dimensioning toolbar command .

2. Modify the creation, dimensioning and symbol options as required:
• You can create dimensions or symbol, or both.

• You can create horizontal or vertical dimensions, or both.
• You can specify which dimension property file to use.
• You can change the symbol file and the used symbol, and specify the symbol
property file to use.
3. Click OK.
4. Pick the first point to specify the origin of the dimensions. The origin is the point from
which you want to measure the location of the center of gravity. This point must be
located within the view frame.

Editing drawings
5. Pick the second point to place the dimensions. This point may fall outside the view
frame.
The example below shows the created dimensions.
6. When the dimension is selected, handles are shown at the dimension origin and the
dimension location. You can drag these handles to adjust the origin or the location, or
move them using the standard editing commands.

Editing drawings
Limitations • If you copy or link a drawing containing COG dimensions to another drawing, such as a
multidrawing, the COG dimensions will not be copied.
• You cannot create COG dimensions in general arrangement drawings or multidrawings.
See also Creating a user-defined menu

Managing toolbars
Semi-automatic dimensioning of general arrangement drawings

The semi-automatic dimensioning of general arrangement drawings is a special dimensioning
type you use only for general arrangement drawings. It contains several dimensioning options:
• Which points and parts Tekla Structures dimensions
• How Tekla Structures combines dimensions
• Whether to use the reference line or the center line of the part as a dimension point
See also Adding semi-automatic dimensions (p. 115)

Example: Combining dimensions (p. 116)
Adding semi-automatic dimensions

To add semi-automatic dimension in a general arrangement drawing:
1. Open a general arrangement drawing.
2. Click Dimensioning > GA Dimensioning Settings to display the Semi-automating GA
dimensioning dialog box.
3. In Dimension, select which points to use for dimensioning: Intersection points or
Intersection and reference points.
Intersection points creates dimensions only for points where two parts intersect.
Intersection and reference points creates dimensions for points where two parts
intersect, and to the reference points of the selected parts.
4. In Parts, select whether to dimension Main parts or All selected parts.
5. In Combine, select how to combine the dimensions: All, By grid lines, By grid
squares, by Main parts, or By selected parts.
6. In Use, select whether to use Reference lines or Center lines as dimension point.
If you select Reference lines, Tekla Structures generates the dimensions on the basis of
the Position settings the of the object in the model, and the points you pick in the model
when placing the object. If you select Center lines, Tekla Structures dimensions the
center line of the profiles regardless of the position setting in the object's properties
dialog box.

Editing drawings
7. Click Apply.
8. Select the objects you want to dimension.
9. Click Dimensioning > Add GA Drawing Dimensions, and select Along Grid Lines,
Along Part X Axis, Along Part Y Axis, or Along Part X and Y Axis.
See also Semi-automatic dimensioning of general arrangement drawings (p. 115)
Example: Combining dimensions

Below are examples of what general arrangement drawings dimensions look like with different
combining settings

Editing drawings
Setting Example
Combine is set to All.Tekla Structures
combines all dimensions for the
selected parts on one dimension line.
Combine is set to By grid lines. Tekla

Structures combines points to be
dimensioned depending on how close
they are to the grid lines. In this
example, intersection points of the
upper beams are dimensioned close to
the upper grid line and the lower beams
close to the lower grid line.

Editing drawings
Setting Example
Combine is set to By grid squares.
Tekla Structures combines points to be
dimensioned depending on how close
they are to the box formed by the grid
lines.

Editing drawings
Setting Example
Combine is set to By main parts. Tekla
Structures combines dimensions so that
all intersections of one main part are
shown with a single dimension line.
Combine is set to By selected

parts.Tekla Structures combines all
intersections of the selected parts with
separate dimension lines.
See also Adding semi-automatic dimensions (p. 115)
Editing dimensions
Tekla Structures allows you to manually combine dimensions lines, add dimension points on
dimension lines, remove dimension points, link and unlink dimension lines, pick a new start
point for running dimensions, and place dimension texts outside dimensions.
See also Combining dimension lines (p. 120)

Linking perpendicular dimension lines (p. 121)
Adding dimension points (p. 122)

Editing drawings
Adding closing dimensions (p. 122)
Setting new dimension start point (p. 123)
Placing dimension texts outside dimensions (p. 124)
Showing plate side marks (p. 125)
Adding dimension points in anchor bolt plans (p. 126)
Adding automatic dimensions (p. 253)
Adding manual dimensions (p. 99)
Moving the end of the dimension line

You can move the end of the dimension line orthogonal to itself outside the part. The dimension
tags are moved together with the end of the line. This is useful when the tags would otherwise
cover part geometry or other objects, such as dimensions or marks.
To move the end of the dimension line:
1. In an open drawing, click the dimension.
The dimension line handle becomes visible.
2. Select the handle and drag the end of the line to the desired position.
It is easier to select the handle when your hold down Alt and then click the handle.
If the dimension contains dimension tags, the tags are visible while you drag.
Limitations You can move the end of the dimension line in all straight dimensions, except elevation
dimensions.
See also Editing dimensions (p. 119)
Combining dimension lines

You can manually combine a group of two or more parallel dimension lines into one line.
To combine parallel dimension lines:
1. Hold down Ctrl and click the dimension lines you want to combine.
2. Click Dimensioning > Edit Dimensions > Combine Dimension Lines.

Editing drawings
You can also select Combine Dimension Lines from the pop-up menu.
Linking perpendicular dimension lines

You can connect two perpendicular dimension lines. Connecting dimension lines makes your
drawings clearer and easier to read. For example, you might want to link dimension lines of
embedded objects in a cast unit, floor beams in a floor plan, or anchor bolts in an anchor bolt
plan.
To connect two dimension lines:
1. Hold down Ctrl and select two perpendicular dimension lines to connect.
2. Click Dimensioning > Edit Dimensions > Link Dimension Lines.
3. Optional: If you want to unlink the dimension lines you linked, select the linked
dimension line and click Dimensioning > Edit Dimensions > Unlink Dimension Lines.
Example Below is an example of linked dimension lines.

Editing drawings
The commands Link Dimension Lines and Unlink Dimension Lines
are also available in the pop-up menu for dimensions.
Adding dimension points

To add dimension points on a dimension line:
1. Select the dimension line.
You can only add points to one dimension line at a time.
2. Click Dimensioning > Edit Dimensions > Add Dimension Point.
3. Click a position on the part where you want to add the dimension point.
You can add several points.
4. Optional: You can remove a point by clicking Dimensioning > Edit Dimensions >
Remove Dimension Point and clicking the point you want to remove.
You can remove several points in a row.
The Add Dimension Point and Remove Dimension Point commands

are also available in the pop-up menu for dimensions.

Adding closing dimensions (p. 122)
Adding closing dimensions

In a drawing containing a reinforcing bar group, you can manually add closing dimensions to
the edge of the part using the Add Dimension Point command.
To add closing dimensions:
1. Open a cast unit drawing.
2. Select the reinforcing bar group dimension line.
3. Click Dimensioning > Add Dimension Point.
4. Select the points where you want to add the closing dimensions.

Editing drawings
Tekla Structures creates the closing dimensions.
See also XS_REBAR_DIMENSION_MARK_MANUAL_CLOSE_TO_GEOMETRY

Adding dimension points (p. 122)
Setting new dimension start point

You can select a new start point for running dimensions (dimensions that start from a common
start point).
To select a new start point:
1. Select an existing dimension in the drawing.
2. Click Dimensioning > Edit Dimensions > Set Dimension Start Point.
3. Select the new start point. Tekla Structures automatically updates the dimensions.
Example You can use this command to swap the running dimensions start point to the opposite end of the
member. This is useful when running dimensions start from the opposite end of a member.

Editing drawings
When you use the US absolute dimension type, Tekla Structures draws a new RD symbol
(Running Dimension) at the new zero point and updates the dimensions according to the new
start point.
Placing dimension texts outside dimensions

If you have selected to place texts of short dimensions outside the dimensions by setting Short
dimensions to Outside on the General tab of the Dimension Properties, you can select on
which side of the extension line the dimension text is placed.
To select the dimension text to place outside dimensions:
1. Click Dimensioning > Edit Dimensions > Flip Outside Dimension.
2. Click the dimension text you want to place outside the dimensions.

Editing drawings
You can place the dimension text outside the dimensions if there is
enough space for the dimension text.
Limitations You can flip only start or end dimensions in a dimension set.
Showing plate side marks

You can show plate side marks on dimension leader lines. The plate side marks indicate
whether the dimension point is to the face or center of the part, for example, a plate, web, or
flange.
To create plate side marks:
1. Select Dimensioning > Dimension Properties.
2. In the Dimension Properties dialog box, go to the Marks tab, set Type in Plate side
marks to Specified to manually control the symbol and insert plate side mark symbols
in the drawing.
3. Modify the other properties of the plate side marks as required:
• You can select the left and right plate side mark.
• You can set the mark size.
• You can adjust the mark color.
• You can set the offset of the mark from the dimension line.
4. Click Modify.

Editing drawings
See also Showing plate side marks automatically (p. 260)
XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_LEFT
XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_CENTER
XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_RIGHT
Editing dimensions (p. 119)
Adding dimension points in anchor bolt plans

You can add dimension points to dimensions inside the enlarged views in an open anchor bolt
plan.
To add dimension points to the dimensions inside the enlarged views:
1. Select the enlarged view frame.
2. Select the dimension to modify.
3. Right-click and select Add dimension point.
You cannot create new dimension lines that have dimension points inside
both the enlarged views and the plan view.
See also Creating anchor bolt plans (p. 63)

Modifying dimension properties

You can modify the properties of the dimensions in an open drawing.
To modify dimensions:
1. Double-click a dimension.

3. Select only the check boxes next to the properties that you want to modify.
4. On the General tab, modify the dimension type, format, and placing settings.
5. On the Appearance tab, modify the text, line and arrow settings.
6. On the Marks tab, modify the dimension mark contents and exaggeration settings.
Here you can also select whether you want to show plate side marks.
7. On the Tags tab, add dimension tags as required, and set the dimension tag rotation.
Here you can also select to include part count to dimension tags and select a filter that
removes the desired default content from the tag.
8. Click Modify.
See also General dimension properties (p. 361)

Advanced dimension properties (p. 365)
Dimension mark and dimension tag properties (p. 365)
Defining placement settings for dimensions (p. 252)

Editing drawings
Checking dimension point validity
By default, Tekla Structures always checks dimensions when you open a drawing. This
command re-checks the dimensions and marks the invalid ones with a dimension point
invalidity symbol.
To check the validity of the dimensions:
2. Click Dimensioning > Review Dimensions > Check Dimension Point Validity.
• To check all dimensions, select All.
• To check single dimensions, select Single and select the dimensions you want to
check.
4. You can delete the invalidity symbols without deleting the dimension line by clicking
Dimensioning > Review Dimensions > Remove Dimension Point Invalidity Symbol
and selecting Single or All.

XS_DIMENSION_POINT_CIRCLE_INNER_RADIUS
XS_DIMENSION_POINT_CIRCLE_OUTER_RADIUS
4.5 Associative annotation objects

Marks, dimensions, and associative notes are all associative annotation objects. An
associative annotation object updates according to the changes made in a model object in the
model.
In addition to the annotation objects Tekla Structures creates in a drawing based on the drawing
properties when the drawing is created, you can also add new ones in the final drawing.
See also Drawing objects (p. 20)

Dimensions (p. 98)
Adding part marks (p. 128)
Adding weld marks (p. 151)
Adding level marks (p. 128)
Adding associative notes (p. 129)
Modifying associative annotation object properties (p. 130)
Updating marks (p. 130)
Change symbols (p. 131)
Merging marks (p. 132)

Editing drawings
Moving the mark leader line base point (p. 133)
Using superscript in text (p. 134)
Adding part marks

In an open drawing, you can add part marks for all parts, bolts, reinforcing bars, surface
treatments and connections or for selected ones only. For each view, Tekla Structures creates
the marks according to the mark properties in the view mark properties dialog box.
To add part marks, do one of the following:
To Do this
Add part marks for all parts Click Annotating > Add Part Marks > For All Parts.
If you have deleted marks manually from the drawing,
this command will not create the marks, and you will
have to create them manually part by part.
Add part marks for selected 1. Select the parts.
parts 2. Click Annotating > Add Part Marks > For
Selected Parts
3. If the part mark does not contain any elements in
the drawing view properties, the Part Mark
Properties dialog box is displayed, and you can
select the elements to be included in the part mark.
Add elements and click Modify.
You can also right-click the parts and select the appropriate mark
creation command from the pop-up menu.
See also Associative annotation objects (p. 127)

Setting mark appearance (p. 311)
Drawing settings (p. 357)
Adding level marks

A level mark is an associative annotation object that represents the elevation of a point. In
addition to the automatic elevation dimensions that you can define in the drawing properties
before creating the drawing, and the elevation information in the grid labels added in the
model, you can also add level marks in your drawing to ensure that the dimensions are correct.
To add level marks:
2. Hold down Shift and click Annotating > Add Level Mark to open the Level Mark
3. Enter or modify the content and the appearance of the level mark.
5. Pick a start point for the leader line and a position for the mark.

Editing drawings
Elevation dimension in the grid label
Elevation dimension created with Add Level Mark in the drawing
Shortening value added in the user-defined properties of a part also

affects level marks.
See also Creating elevation dimensions (p. 281)

Level mark properties (p. 381)
Mark appearance properties (p. 376)
Adding associative notes

An associative note is an extra mark that can include any additional information. You can add
associative notes to parts, bolts, reinforcing bars, surface treatments, and edge chamfers. You
can add multiple notes to one object, and place the notes anywhere.
To add an associative note:
2. Hold down Shift and click Annotating > Associative Note and select With Leader
Line, Without Leader Line, or Along Line.
3. Enter or modify the content and the appearance of the note.
Associative notes may contain the same elements as part, bolt, reinforcing bar, and
surface treatment marks. Notes connected to edge chamfers may contain name, length,
DX and DY.
Associative note appearance properties are the same as the ones for part marks.
Additionally, you can adjust the leader line arrow height and length.
To place the note exactly in the position you pick and keep it there, click
the Place... button and select fixed in the Placing list.

5. Select the object.
See below for some examples of leader lines. The one on the left is With Leader Line, the one
in the middle Without Leader Line and the one on the right Along Line.

Editing drawings
For edge chamfers and other hard-to-see items, it is easier to use the pop-
up menu command Add Associative Note, as you do not have to select
the object again after selecting the command from the pop-up.
See also Mark elements (p. 382)

Modifying associative annotation object properties

You can modify the properties of the associative annotation objects in an open drawing. By
associative annotation objects we mean associative notes and marks for parts, bolts,
reinforcement, surface treatments, welds, levels, and connections.
To modify the properties of associative annotation objects:
1. Double-click a mark.

4. To exactly place the mark in the position you pick and keep it there, click the Place...
button and select fixed in the Placing list.
5. Leave the dialog box open, select all the marks that you want to change, and click
Modify to apply the changes in all the selected marks.
To modify the properties of the weld marks of welds that you added in
the model, you need to modify the weld in the model. When you perform
numbering, the weld marks are updated in the drawings.

Mark properties (p. 376)
Defining placement settings for annotation objects (p. 251)
Updating marks
You can update part marks and weld marks in an open drawing. Normally part marks and weld
marks are up to date when you open the drawing. Updating is needed in frozen drawings.
To update marks, do one of the following:

Editing drawings
To Do this
Update all part marks Click Annotating > Update Marks > All Part
Marks.
Update selected part marks 1. Select the part marks you want to update.
2. Click Annotating > Update Marks > Selected
Part Marks.
Update all weld marks Click Annotating > Update Marks > All Weld
Marks.
Tekla Structures updates the marks according to your selection.

Freezing and unfreezing general arrangement drawings (p. 185)
Change symbols
Tekla Structures highlights the marks and dimension marks that have changed due to changes
in the model, and dimension points that have been moved. Tekla Structures also highlights the
changed angle dimensions, level marks, and associative notes.
Tekla Structures highlights the changes in the following way:
• A change symbol (by default, a cloud) is drawn around the old point, the new point and the
dimension values, or around the changed mark or note.
• An arrow is drawn from the old dimension point to the new one.
See also XS_HIGHLIGHT_ASSOCIATIVE_DIMENSION_CHANGES

XS_HIGHLIGHT_MARK_CONTENT_CHANGES
XS_ASSOCIATIVE_CHANGE_HIGHLIGHT_SYMBOL
XS_ASSOCIATIVE_CHANGE_HIGHLIGHT_SIZE
Removing change symbols

After you have checked all the change symbols that Tekla Structures has created, you can
remove all of them or just the selected ones.
To remove change symbols, do one of the following:

Editing drawings
To Do this
Remove all dimension change symbols Click Dimensioning > Review
Dimensions > Remove Dimension
Change Symbol > All.
Remove the selected dimension change 1. Select the change symbols you want
symbols to remove.
2. Click Dimensioning > Review
Dimensions > Remove Dimension
Change Symbol > Single.
Remove all mark change symbols Click Annotating > Review Marks >
Remove Mark Change Symbol > All.
Remove the selected mark change 1. Select the change symbols you want
symbols to remove.
2. Click Annotating > Review Marks >
Remove Mark Change Symbol >
Single.
Remove all associative note change Click Annotating > Review Marks >
symbols Remove Associative Note Change
Symbol > All.
Remove the selected associative note 1. Select the change symbols you want
change symbols to remove.
2. Click Annotating > Review Marks >
Remove Associative Note Change
Symbol > Single.
See also Change symbols (p. 131)
Showing change symbols in printed drawings

The color you select for the change symbols determines if the symbols are shown in the printed
drawings.
To define the color:
1. Click Tools > Options > Advanced Options... and go to the Drawing Properties page.
2. For the advanced option XS_DRAWING_CHANGE_HIGHLIGHT_COLOR, enter RED, DARK
RED, ORANGE, DARK YELLOW, GREEN, DARK GREEN, BLUE, DARK BLUE,
BLACK, GREY, DARK GREY, CYAN, DARK CYAN or MAGENTA.
If you enter the default color190, the symbols are shown on the screen but not in the
printed drawings. For all other color options, the symbols are shown both on the screen
and in the printout.
See also XS_DRAWING_CHANGE_HIGHLIGHT_COLOR

Change symbols (p. 131)
Merging marks
You can merge marks to reduce the number of marks in the drawing and to make the drawing
clearer. A merged mark has a single leader line. You can merge marks automatically and also
manually in the final drawing.
In a final drawing, you can merge reinforcement marks and weld marks.
See also Merging reinforcement marks (p. 133)

Merging weld marks (p. 153)
Merging marks automatically (p. 319)

Editing drawings
Merging reinforcement marks
To manually merge marks in a drawing:
1. Click Annotating > Properties > Merged Reinforcement Mark....
2. Modify mark properties as required.
3. Select the marks to merge in the drawing.
4. Right-click and select Merge marks from the pop-up menu.
5. Optional: You can split the merged marks by selecting the marks to split, right-clicking
and selecting Split marks.
See also Merging marks automatically (p. 319)

Moving the mark leader line base point

You can change the place of the leader line base point.
To change the place of the leader line base point:
1. Click the leader line near its end.
2. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the base point to a new location.
Limitations You can drag the base point with the following limitations:
• If the base point is originally on a line, you can drag it along that line.
• If the base point is originally inside a part, you can drag the base point inside that part.

Leader line types (p. 378)
4.6 Independent annotation objects

Independent annotation objects are not linked or connected to the Tekla Structures model in
any way. Texts, text files, DWG/DXF files, symbols, revision marks, links and hyperlinks are
all independent annotation objects.

Adding text (p. 133)
Adding links to text files (p. 135)
Adding links to other drawings (p. 135)
Adding hyperlinks (p. 136)
Adding links to DWG and DXF files (p. 137)
Adding revision marks (p. 137)
Modifying the properties of independent annotation objects (p. 138)
Adding text
You can add text in the drawings.
To add text:

Editing drawings
1. Hold down Shift and click Annotating > Add Text and then Text; Text with Leader
Line; Text along Line; Along Line, Arrow at End Point; or Along Line, Arrow at Start
Point.
2. Enter the text in the Text box.
Press Enter to make a line break.
3. Modify the text color, height, font, angle and alignment as required.
Text is aligned to left by default. Line spacing is automatically adjusted by the font size
you select.
4. Select a frame type, leader line and color.
5. Select the leader line arrow type and size.
6. To exactly place the text in the position you pick, and keep it there, click the Place...
button and select fixed in the Placing list.
8. Add the text.
See below for examples of the different text options. From left: Text; Text with Leader Line;
Text along Line; Along Line, Arrow at End Point; and Along Line, Arrow at Start Point.
See also Independent annotation objects (p. 133)
Using superscript in text

You can use superscript in texts in all your text objects, dimension marks, other marks and
associative notes.
Before you can use superscript, set the advanced option
XS_SUPERSCRIPT_USED_IN_DRAWING_TEXTS to TRUE.
To use superscript text:
1. Open the properties dialog box of the text object, mark or associative note.
• For text objects, enter the desired text in the Text box.
• For marks and associative notes, open the Mark Content - text dialog box by
double-clicking Text in the Available elements list and enter the desired text in the
Text box.
3. Enter circumflexes (^) around the characters that you want to have in superscript.
4. Click Modify or OK and Modify as required.
Example This example shows how the superscript is entered in the Text box and what it looks like in the
text.

Editing drawings
See also Adding text (p. 133)
Dimensions (p. 98)
XS_SUPERSCRIPT_USED_IN_DRAWING_TEXTS
Adding links to text files

You can insert a text file inside a frame in a drawing. Tekla Structures adds the text file using
the properties in the Text File Properties dialog box.Tekla Structures creates a link to the text
file. If you change the text in the file, it will change in all drawings containing a link to the text
file.
To add a link to a text file:
1. Open the drawing where you want to add the text file.
2. Click Annotating > Add Text > From Text File.
3. Set the text color, height, and font.
4. Set the frame line type and color.
5. Select if you want to scale the text.
If you select No scaling, you only need to pick the upper left corner of the frame. Tekla
Structures inserts the object in its original size. If you select Scale to fit, you need to
pick two points to define the frame. Tekla Structures adjusts the object size to fit the
frame.
6. Browse for the file.
8. Pick one or two points in the drawing to indicate the corners of the text file frame.
• To edit a text file, double-click the text inside the frame. Tekla
Structures opens the original text file.
• To modify the text file properties, double-click the frame around the
text.
Adding links to other drawings

You can insert a link to a drawing in a frame in a drawing. Tekla Structures adds the link to the
drawing using the properties in the Drawing Link Properties dialog box.
To add a link to another drawing:
2. Click Annotating > Add Link > To Other Drawing....
3. Modify the text color, height, font and effect.
4. Modify the frame line type and color.
5. Select if you want to scale the link. If you select No scaling, Tekla Structures inserts the
link in its original size.
If you select Scale to fit, Tekla Structures adjusts the object size to fit the frame.

Editing drawings
6. In the Drawing list, select the drawing to link to.
The drawings in the list are the drawings in the current model.
7. If you want to display text for the link instead of the drawing name, enter the text in the
Text box.
8. Pick two points to define the frame and add the link.
You can open the linked drawing by double-clicking the link.
Example In the example below, Scale to fit has been selected, and the link contains the name of the
drawing.
Adding hyperlinks
You can add links to Internet addresses (URLs) within a frame in a drawing.
To add a hyperlink:
1. Open a drawing where you want to add a hyperlink.
2. Click Annotating > Add Link > Hyperlink...
3. Modify the text color, height, font and effect.
4. Modify the frame line type and color.
5. Select if you want to scale the link.
If you select No scaling, you only need pick the upper left corner of the frame when you
insert the link. Tekla Structures inserts the link in its original size. If you select Scale to
fit, you need to pick two points to define the frame. Tekla Structures adjusts the link size
to fit the frame.
6. In the File or URL text box, enter an Internet address or filename and path.
If you need to locate the file, click Browse.... Tekla Structures inserts an active
hyperlink to the location you specify.
7. If you want to display text for the hyperlink instead of the hyperlink, enter the text in the
Text box.

Editing drawings
9. Pick one or two points in the drawing to indicate the corners of the hyperlink frame.
Example In the example below, Scale to fit has been selected. The Internet address for the hyperlink is
shown.
Double-click the hyperlink text in the drawing to jump to the Internet

address.
Adding links to DWG and DXF files

You can insert a DWG or DXF file inside a frame in a drawing. Tekla Structures adds the DWG
or DXF file using the properties in the DWG/DXF Properties dialog box. Tekla Structures
creates a link to the selected DWG or DXF file. When you modify the file, Tekla Structures
also modifies all the links in the drawing.
To add a link to a DWG or DXF file:
1. Open the drawing where you want to insert a link to a DWG/DXF file.
2. Click View > Add DWG / DXF File....
3. Select the scaling options.
4. Select the link frame line type and color.
5. In Name, browse for the DWG or DXF file you want to use.
6. Pick one or two points in the drawing to place the frame.
Tekla Structures adds the DWG or DXF drawing inside a frame in the drawing.

DWG/DXF scaling options (p. 406)
Adding revision marks

Revision marks are symbols that you can add in the drawing indicating a change in the Tekla
Structures model or drawing, containing information about the change.Tekla Structures creates
the revision mark using the properties in the Revision Mark Properties dialog box. If you
create revisions through the Drawing List, Tekla Structures will not create any marks inside the
drawing. Using revision marks you can indicate the places that have changed in your drawing.
To add revision marks:
2. Click Annotating > Add Revision Mark and select Arrow on Left..., Arrow on Right...,
Along Line, Arrow on Left... or Along Line, Arrow on Right....
3. Enter the mark, date, and information on the changes. Tekla Structures shows these in
the revision table of the drawing.

Editing drawings
4. To place the revision mark exactly in the position you pick and keep it there, click the
Place... button and select fixed in the Placing list.
5. Go to the Appearance tab and set the text color, height, font and angle, the frame color,
leader line and type, and the leader line arrow type and size.
7. Pick a point or points to place the mark.
Tekla Structures creates the revisions and revision marks. You can also see the new
revisions on the Drawing List.
See below for some examples of the revision marks.

Revising drawings (p. 186)
Modifying the properties of independent annotation objects

You can modify the properties of texts, symbols, links, hyperlinks, links to DWG and DXF
files, and revision marks in an open drawing.
To modify the properties of the independent annotation objects:
1. Double-click the object.

4. Modify the properties.
5. Click Modify.
4.7 Building objects

Building objects are 2D representations of the the 3D parts that you have created in the model.
After making the drawing, you can change the appearance and representation of the building
objects in an open drawing.

Editing drawings
If you want to change the model weld properties, go back to the model,
and make the changes there. In the drawing, you can only change the
properties of a manually added weld mark.

Modifying building objects (p. 139)
Shortening parts view by view (p. 140)
Hiding building object outlines using cover-up tools (p. 141)
Edge chamfers in drawings (p. 143)
Showing a single reinforcing bar in a group (p. 141)
Building object appearance properties (p. 403)
Showing layer information on reinforcing bars (p. 142)
Drawing objects (p. 20)
Modifying building objects

You can modify the drawing properties of the building objects (parts, bolts, reinforcement,
surface treatment) in an open drawing.
To modify the properties of a building object:
1. Double-click a part, reinforcement, surface treatment, or bolt.

3. Select the check boxes of only those properties that you want to modify.
4. On the Contents tab, select the part representation, whether to show hidden lines, center
lines and reference lines, and which additional markings to show.
5. On the Appearance tab, select the color and type of the lines.
6. On the Fill tab, set the part and section fill options.
7. Click Modify.
It is easier to adjust the center line color, if you hide the hidden lines on
the Contents tab first.
Limitations The color of the center lines can be changed only on the drawing and view level, not on the
object level. For center lines, you can adjust only the color in the properties dialog box, not the
type. You can adjust the line type of part center lines with the advanced option
XS_CENTER_LINE_TYPE.
See also Part and neighbor part properties (p. 389)

Bolt properties (p. 393)
Surface treatment visibility and content properties (p. 394)
Reinforcement and mesh visibility and content properties (p. 396)
XS_DRAWING_PART_REFERENCE_LINE_TYPE
XS_CENTER_LINE_TYPE

Editing drawings
XS_DRAWING_POINT_SCALE
Example: Part representations (p. 330)
Adding hatch patterns on parts and shapes (p. 338)
Shortening parts view by view

You can shorten parts in the selected view in an open drawing.
To shorten parts view by view:
1. Double-click the view frame.
2. In the View Properties dialog box, go to the Attributes2 tab.
3. In Cut parts, select Yes.
4. In Cut skew parts, select if you want to cut skewed parts.
5. In Minimum cut part length, set the minimum length of the shortened part.
6. In Space between cut parts, enter the distance between the cut parts.
7. Click Modify.
To use a view shortening symbol instead of the empty area, set the
advanced options
XS_DRAW_VERTICAL_VIEW_SHORTENING_SYMBOLS_TO_PARTS and
XS_DRAW_HORIZONTAL_VIEW_SHORTENING_SYMBOLS_TO_PARTS to
TRUE. You can control the appearance of the view shortening symbol
with the advanced options XS_SHORTENING_SYMBOL_COLOR,
XS_SHORTENING_SYMBOL_LINE_TYPE, and
XS_SHORTENING_SYMBOL_WITH_ZIGZAG.
Example Below is an example of how the view shortening symbol is displayed.
See also Building objects (p. 138)


Editing drawings
XS_DRAW_VERTICAL_VIEW_SHORTENING_SYMBOLS_TO_PARTS
XS_DRAW_HORIZONTAL_VIEW_SHORTENING_SYMBOLS_TO_PARTS
XS_SHORTENING_SYMBOL_WITH_ZIGZAG
XS_SHORTENING_SYMBOL_LINE_TYPE
XS_SHORTENING_SYMBOL_COLOR
Shortening and lengthening parts (p. 236)
Shortening parts in drawing views (p. 237)
Hiding building object outlines using cover-up tools

Use cover-up line and cover-up area tools for quickly hiding building object outlines in
drawings:
1. Click Shapes > Draw Cover-up Area or Draw Cover-up Line .

2. Draw a non-transparent rectangular area or line over the model object outline that you
want to hide. You can drag the cover-up objects to another location, and resize the
objects by dragging the handles.
See also Additional drawing objects (p. 157)
Showing a single reinforcing bar in a group

To have Tekla Structures show only a single reinforcing bar from a group or mesh:
1. Select the reinforcing bar group or mesh.
2. Click Edit > Adjust Reinforcing Bars.
3. Click the bar you want to remain visible.
4. Optional: To change the number of visible bars again, double-click the bar and change
the Visibility of reinforcing bars setting.
Example

Editing drawings
When you use the Adjust Reinforcing Bars command to select the
visible reinforcing bar, also the customized setting becomes available
for the Visibility of reinforcing bars option in the Drawing
Reinforcement Properties dialog box. You can use this setting only
after you have used the Adjust Reinforcing Bars command and not, for
example, when you create the drawing.
See also Reinforcement and mesh visibility and content properties (p. 396)
Building objects (p. 138)
Adjusting the location of a single reinforcing bar (p. 142)
Adjusting the location of a single reinforcing bar
To adjust a location of a single visible bar in a reinforcing bar group:

1. Right-click the reinforcing bar.
2. Select Adjust location from the pop-up menu.
3. Click the location where you want to place the bar.
If you have the whole reinforcing bar group visible, Tekla Structures
deletes all bars except one from the group when you select the command.
Showing layer information on reinforcing bars

You can show reinforcing bar layer information in a drawing.
Before you can show layer information in a drawing, you must run the RebarClassificator
macro in the model. The RebarClassificator classifies the meshes and reinforcing bars in
the selected walls or slabs by their position. All reinforcing bars and meshes get an attribute
indicating the layer where they are placed inside the concrete element.
To show reinforcing bar layer information:
2. Click Tools > Macros.
3. Select RebarLayerMarker from the list and click Run.
The Rebar Layer Marker dialog box is displayed.
4. On the Marking style tab, select the marking style you want to use (symbol style or level
prefix style).
5. On the Marking settings tab, select the marker line type.
6. On the Marking settings tab, do one of the following depending on the selected marking
style:
• For symbol style markers, select the symbol you want to use, and the symbol height.
• For level prefix style markers, select the level prefix.
7. Click All objects to show layer markers on all reinforcing bars, or select the individual
reinforcing bars and click Selected objects to show the markers on the selected bars
only.

Editing drawings
Symbol style layer marker. The number, for example number 1 in T1, indicates
the layer number. The letter, for example T in T1, indicates whether the
reinforcing bar is on the top, bottom, near side or far side layer.
Level prefix style layer marker. The number of triangles indicates the layer
number from the face. Triangle orientation indicates whether the reinforcing bar
is on the top, bottom, near side or far side layer. For example for top bars, the
triangle head points downwards, and for bottom bars upwards.
4.8 Edge chamfers in drawings

You can show edge chamfers in drawings, and control the way they are shown by modifying
the part properties and the edge chamfer properties. You can also add chamfer marks as
associative notes.

Displaying edge chamfers in a drawing (p. 143)
Defining default line color and type for edge chamfers (p. 144)
Changing edge chamfer line color and type manually (p. 145)
Creating edge chamfer marks (p. 145)
Example: Edge chamfers (p. 146)
Displaying edge chamfers in a drawing

You can select whether you show edge chamfers in your drawing and the way they are shown.
To select whether the edge chamfers are shown and how:
1. Open a drawing containing edge chamfers.
2. Depending on the level where you want to make the changes, do one of the following:
• Double-click the drawing and click Part...
• Double-click a view frame and click Part...
• Double-click the part containing edge chamfers

Editing drawings

4. Select the check boxes next to only the properties that you want to modify.
5. In the part properties dialog box, select Edge chamfers on in Additional marks.
6. Select Outline or Exact in Part representation list depending on the desired result.
Exact Outline
7. Click Modify.
8. Optional: In the drawing, double-click an edge chamfer and modify the line color and
type.
If you know that you are going to use the same part representation
settings for several drawings, save your settings in a properties file for
later use.
See also Part and neighbor part content properties (p. 389)
Defining default line color and type for edge chamfers

You can define a default color and line type for edge chamfers.
1. Click Tools > Options > Options... and select Drawing objects.
2. Define the default line color.
3. Define the default line type.
4. Click OK to save and close the dialog box.

Editing drawings
You can override the default settings manually in a drawing by changing
the edge chamfer line color and type in the Edge Chamfer Properties
dialog box.
See also Edge chamfers in drawings (p. 143)
Changing edge chamfer line color and type manually

You can manually modify the line type and color of the edge chamfers in drawings. This
overrides the default color and type defined in the Options dialog box.
1. In the drawing, double-click an edge chamfer to display the Edge Chamfer Properties
dialog box.
2. Select the desired color and line type.
Background color is often used for edge chamfer lines for the reason that you
may not want to print edge chamfers, or see them in small scale drawings, but you want
to be able select them, for example, to add chamfer marks.
Example The following examples show how the edge chamfers are displayed with different part
representation settings:
Part representation Exact.
Part representation Outline, edge

chamfer not selected.
Part representation Outline, edge

chamfer selected.
See also Defining default line color and type for edge chamfers (p. 144)
Creating edge chamfer marks

You can add associative notes to edge chamfers and use them as part marks.
To add a chamfer mark:
1. Modify the part properties and edge chamfer properties so that edge chamfers are visible
and you can easily select them.
2. Hold down Shift and click Annotating > Add Associative Note and select the type of
note you want to create.
3. In the Associative Note Properties dialog box, modify the note properties as required.

Editing drawings
4. Select Edge chamfer from the Content list.
5. Add the elements that you want to have in the edge chamfer mark.
6. Click the edge chamfer.
If you use a leader line, you need to pick a position for the note.

Adding associative notes (p. 129)
Example: Edge chamfers

See below for typical examples of the ways showing edge chamfers.
In this example, Part representation is Exact and Edge chamfers are on. Background color is
used in edge chamfer lines, because you usually do not want to show edge chamfers in
printouts, but may want to see and select them in the drawing, for example, to add associative
notes.
In this second example, Part representation is Outline and Edge chamfers are on.
Background color is used in edge chamfer lines, because you may want to see and select
chamfers in the drawing, for example, to add associative notes.This representation is often used
when the scale is small and you do not need to see the small chamfers clearly. The edge
chamfer presented in the bottom right corner of the image shows what the edge chamfer looks
like when it is selected.

Editing drawings
Displaying edge chamfers in a drawing (p. 143)
4.9 Welds in drawings

Tekla Structures shows the properties of a weld you have added in a model in a weld mark in a
drawing. You can also add welds in final drawings.
To modify the properties of the weld marks of welds that you added in
the model, you need to modify the weld in the model. When you perform
numbering, the weld marks are updated in the drawings.
See also Weld concepts (p. 147)

Example: Model welds in drawings (p. 148)
Merging weld marks (p. 153)
Weld concepts
The model welds and welds added in a drawing are displayed as weld marks in the drawings.
The weld symbols in the weld marks indicate the weld properties defined for the weld in the
model and in a drawing.
The following images describe the basic placement principles of welds.

Editing drawings
Above line
Below line
Arrow side for weld
Other side for weld
The weld mark contains a reference line and an arrow. The arrow connects the reference line to
the arrow side of a connection.
When parts are welded together, you can place welds on:
• The arrow sides only
• The other sides only
• Both the arrow and other sides
The welds on the arrow and other sides of a part can have different weld properties.
See also Welds in drawings (p. 147)

Model weld visibility options (p. 404)
Weld mark properties (p. 380)
Welds
Weld properties
XS_AISC_WELD_MARK
Example: Model welds in drawings

Example 1 In this example, the first image below is the Weld Properties dialog box in the model. The
weld properties are indicated by numbers in the dialog box. The second image shows how the
properties are displayed in a weld mark in a drawing. The same numbers are used in the weld
mark to indicate the position and appearance of the corresponding property information in the
weld. Under the images the meaning of different numbers is explained.

Editing drawings
Editing drawings
Weld prefix
Weld size
Weld type
Weld angle
Weld contour symbol
Weld finishing symbol
Effective throat
Root opening
Reference text. Model welds show the weld number as well.
Edge/Around, here a weld around symbol
Workshop/Site, here a site weld symbol
Example 2 The example below shows a staggered, intermittent weld. The option Stitch weld is set to Yes,
and the length is set to 50 and the pitch to 100.
Length of weld segment

Editing drawings
Pitch (center-to-center spacing) of weld segments
Staggered, intermittent weld
The example below shows a non-staggered, intermittent weld. The option Stitch weld is set to
No, and the length is set to 50 and the pitch to 100. The pitch is shown in the weld mark, if the
pitch value is greater than 0.0.
Example 3
See also Welds

Weld properties
Welds in drawings (p. 147)
Adding weld marks

A weld mark is an associative annotation object that contains a set of weld properties. You can
define automatic weld marks when you create the drawing, and also add additional weld marks
in the drawing. Tekla Structures creates manual weld marks using the properties in the Weld
Mark Properties dialog box.
To add weld marks:
1. Hold down Shift and click Annotating > Add Weld Mark to open the Weld Mark
2. Enter or modify the content and the appearance of the weld mark.
To exactly place the weld mark in the position you pick and keep it there, click the
Place... button and select fixed in the Placing list.
4. Pick a position for the weld mark.


Editing drawings
Example: Weld mark added in a drawing
In this example, the first image below is the Weld Mark Properties dialog box in a drawing.
The weld mark properties are indicated by numbers in the dialog box. The second image shows
how the weld mark properties are displayed in a weld mark in a drawing. The same numbers
are used in the weld mark to indicate the position and appearance of the corresponding property
information in the weld. Under the images the meaning of different numbers is explained.

Editing drawings
Weld prefix
Weld size
Weld type
Weld angle
Weld contour symbol
Weld finishing symbol
Effective throat
Root opening
Reference text. A weld mark added in a drawing does not have a weld number.
Edge/Around, here a weld around symbol
Workshop/Site, here a site weld symbol
See also Weld mark properties (p. 380)

Merging weld marks

You can force Tekla Structures to use the same mark and symbol for identical welds in a
drawing.
To merge weld marks:
1. Open a drawing.

Editing drawings
2. Hold down Ctrl and select the weld marks to merge.
3. Right-click and select Merge from the pop-up menu.
Tekla Structures combines the marks.
4. Optional: You can split merged weld marks by right-clicking the mark and selecting
Split from the pop-up menu.
Description Example
Original drawing
Merged weld marks.
See also Merging marks automatically (p. 319)

4.10 Symbols in drawings

You can use symbols in drawings in various places, for example, in marks, object
representation, arrows etc. We recommended you get familiar with the Symbol Editor, so that
you can create new symbols and modify the existing ones. The Symbol Editor help is available
in PDF format on the Tekla Structures installation DVD and on the Extranet in Tekla
Structures > Self learning > Manuals & instructions.

Editing drawings
Tekla Structures searches the symbol files from folders listed in DXK_SYMBOLPATH (defined in
the environment initialization file <your_environment>.ini and in the Tekla Structures
initialization file teklastructures.ini). Alternatively, you can add your own
DXK_SYMBOLPATH in your user.ini and define your own symbol folder paths there. Note,
that also the path settings in the <your_environment>.ini file need to be added there.
The last read .ini file settings are used. At startup of Tekla Structures, the reading order of
the .ini files containing DXK_SYMBOLPATH is:
• teklastructures.ini
• <your_environment>.ini
• user.ini
All symbol files that are found are available to be used in Tekla Structures. If there are symbol
files with the same name, the one that is read last is used.
You can add symbols inside all kinds of drawing marks as elements and also in the drawings as
separate objects. With the Symbol Files browser you can easily change the symbol file in use.
Symbols can be represented in three different ways: symbols without leader lines, symbols with
leader lines and symbols along lines. Tekla Structures adds the symbol using the properties in
the Symbol properties dialog box.
See also Symbol Files browser (p. 155)

Adding symbols in drawings (p. 156)
Adding symbols in marks (p. 304)
Modifying symbol properties (p. 157)
DXK_SYMBOLPATH
Defining a firm folder for images and symbols (p. 345)
Symbol Files browser

The Symbol Files browser allows you to change the symbol file in use. It also provides access
to Symbol Editor, where you can create new symbol files, and create and modify symbols.
We strongly recommend that you do not modify the original symbol files
delivered with your Tekla Structures application. If you need to modify
any symbols, copy the original symbol file and work on the copy,
keeping the original symbol file intact.
See also Adding symbols in marks (p. 304)

Viewing and modifying the symbol file contents (p. 155)
Creating a new symbol file (p. 156)
Changing the symbol file in use (p. 156)
Viewing and modifying the symbol file contents

You can view and modify the contents of a symbol file.
To view or modify the contents of a symbol file:
1. Open the Mark content - symbol dialog box by selecting Symbol from the available
mark elements list in the mark properties dialog box or the Symbol properties dialog
box by selecting Annotating > Properties > Symbol.
2. Click Select... next to the File box.
3. Select a file from the Symbol Files list and click Edit. This opens the Symbol Editor.
4. If you modify the file in the Symbol Editor, save the file by clicking File and Save or
Save As.
5. Click OK.

Editing drawings
In Symbol Editor, you can copy symbols between symbol files (*.sym).
Press Ctrl + C and select the symbol you would like to copy, then open
the symbol file you want to copy to (or a new symbol file), select the
location for the symbol and press Ctrl + V.
Creating a new symbol file

You can create new symbol files to be used in marks and drawings.
To create a new symbol file:
mark elements list in the mark properties dialog box or the Symbol properties dialog
3. In the Symbol Files dialog box, click Create new....
4. Create the symbol in the Symbol Editor.
5. Click File > Save and save the symbol file in the folder that you use for keeping the
symbols.
6. Click Refresh in the Symbol Files browser.
Changing the symbol file in use

You can change the currently used symbol file.
To change the symbol file in use:
mark elements list in the mark properties dialog box, or the Symbol properties dialog
3. Select a new file from the Symbol Files list and click OK or double-click the file.
See also Symbols in drawings (p. 154)

Symbol Files browser (p. 155)
Adding symbols in drawings

Tekla Structures adds symbols using the properties defined in the Symbol Properties dialog
box.
To add a symbol in a drawing:
1. In the drawing, hold down Shift and select Annotating > Add Symbol and one of the
three symbol commands Symbol, Symbol along Line or Symbol with Leader Line to
display the Symbol Properties dialog box.
2. Modify the symbol properties.
3. Click OK.
4. Pick one to three points in the drawing to place the symbol. The symbol command you
selected affects the number of points to pick.

Editing drawings
Modifying symbol properties
You can modify the properties of symbols in an open drawing.
To modify the symbol properties:
1. Double-click a symbol.

4. If necessary, change the symbol file in use and select the symbol to use.
5. Go to the Appearance tab and set the symbol color, height and angle, and the frame
type, leader line and color.
6. Click Modify.

4.11 Additional drawing objects

Additional drawing objects are drawing objects you draw in a drawing in order to add
information to the information existing in the Tekla Structures model.
In Tekla Structures drawings, the additional drawing objects can be clouds, lines, circles,
rectangles, arcs, polylines, and polygons.

Creating a shape (p. 157)
Hiding building object outlines using cover-up tools (p. 141)
Properties of additional drawing objects (p. 405)
Creating a shape
You can create lines, rectangles, circles, arcs, polygons, polylines, and clouds in an open
drawing.
To create a shape:
1. Hold down Shift, click Shapes and select one of the commands.
2. Modify the properties as required.
Remember to set the Bulge factor for all lines for clouds. It is also
useful when you are creating curved polylines.
4. Create the shape by following the instructions on the status bar.


Editing drawings
Defining customized line types (p. 345)
4.12 Changing drawing objects

You can move, copy, reshape, resize, trim, split and divide drawing objects added in the
drawing. For objects that have leader lines, you can modify the shape of the leader line. What
you can do to an object depends on the object type.

Dragging, reshaping and resizing drawing objects (p. 158)
Arranging drawing objects (p. 160)
Hiding and showing objects in drawings and drawing views (p. 160)
Trimming (p. 163)
Splitting (p. 165)
Dividing (p. 166)
Modifying the shape of leader lines (p. 166)
Copying and moving objects
Dragging, reshaping and resizing drawing objects

Many drawing objects, such as lines, arcs, circles, polylines, polygons, rectangles, clouds, text
file frames, link frames, DWG/DXF file frames, and dimension lines have handles. You use
these handles to reshape, and resize objects. You can also drag the objects.
Before you start, click a drawing object or and object frame to activate it and show the handles.
Do any of the following:

Editing drawings
To Do this
Drag the object Point the object or object frame, hold down the left mouse button
and drag the object to a new location.
The object follows the cursor while you drag the object, and you
can all the time see what the end result will be.
With circles, you can also use the middle handle for dragging.
Resize the object 1. Click one of the objects or object frame handles.
2. Drag the handle to resize the object or object frame.
To enlarge the rectangle in all directions, drag from a corner
handle.
Reshape the object 1. Click the middle handle of a line or a handle on the cloud,
polyline or polygon.
2. Drag the handle to reshape the object.
If you drag an annotation object, its placing setting may be set to fixed
depending what its set for the advanced options
XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_DIMENSIONS_TO_FIXED,
XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_MARKS_TO_FIXED,
XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_NOTES_TO_FIXED, and
XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_TEXTS_TO_FIXED.
See also Changing drawing objects (p. 158)

Placement settings (p. 249)
XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_DIMENSIONS_TO_FIXED
XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_MARKS_TO_FIXED
XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_NOTES_TO_FIXED
XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_TEXTS_TO_FIXED

Editing drawings
Arranging drawing objects
You can use the Arrange Drawing Objects (Freeplace) command to position drawing objects.
Tekla Structures positions the objects using the protection properties set for the drawing and the
placing properties of each object type.
To arrange drawing objects:
1. Double-click the open drawing, click Protection..., check the drawing protection
properties and modify them as required.
2. Click Modify.
3. Double-click drawing objects, and then click Place... to check and modify the placing
settings.
If the object is set to Fixed, the Arrange Drawing Objects command has no effect.
4. Click Modify.
5. In the drawing, select the drawing objects you want to arrange.
• Click View > Arrange Drawing Objects (Freeplace) > Near Current Locations.
Tekla Structures positions the selected drawing objects so that they do not overlap
other objects. Objects located in a free location are not moved, and overlapping
objects are moved as close to the current location as possible.
• Click View > Arrange Drawing Objects (Freeplace) > Ignore Current Locations.
Tekla Structures positions the selected drawing objects so that they do not overlap
with other objects without checking the current location of the objects.

Hiding and showing objects in drawings and drawing views

You can hide selected drawing objects in drawings and drawing views. When you hide a part,
Tekla Structures will hide all its related objects.
If an object is hidden in drawing views it will not be printed.
To hide drawing objects:

1. Check that the ghost outline selection is the one that you need in Tools > Options >
Ghost Outline. In colored drawings, hidden objects are shown as ghost outlines, if this
setting is selected. In grayscale and black and white drawings, hidden objects are not
shown even if Ghost Outline is selected.
2. Select the desired color mode by pressing B.
3. Select the objects you want to hide.
4. Click View > Hide/Show Object and one of the following options:
• Hide from Drawing View. Tekla Structures hides the selected object in the view you
select it.
• Hide from Drawing. Tekla Structures hides the selected object in all views.
Example Below are some examples of the results with different combinations of selections.

Editing drawings
Setting Example
Color mode is set to Color. No objects are
hidden. Part marks are shown.
Color mode is set to Color. Ghost Outline is

not selected. Parts are hidden and related part
marks are not shown.

Editing drawings
Setting Example
Color mode is set to Color. Ghost Outline is
selected. Hidden parts are shown as ghost
outlines and related part marks are not shown.
Color mode is set to Black and White. Ghost

Outline is selected, but it has no effect on black
and white drawings. Parts are hidden and related
part marks are not shown.

Editing drawings
Listing hidden parts in drawings
You can select whether to list the hidden parts in drawings, for example, in the material list.
1. Open a drawing containing hidden parts.
2. Double-click the drawing to open the drawing properties dialog box.
3. Click Layout....
4. On the Drawing size tab, select whether you want to list the hidden parts in List hidden
objects in templates. No removes all information about the hidden parts, also from the
total weight.
5. Click Modify.
In the example below, the hidden reinforcing bars are listed.
In the example below, the hidden reinforcing bars are not listed.
Limitations Listing hidden objects does not work in all templates. It works in templates containing PART
rows, but not in hierarchical templates. For example, if the template is of type ASSEMBLY -
PART, and the Assembly is included in the drawing, all of its parts will also be included.
See also Hiding and showing objects in drawings and drawing views (p. 160)
Trimming
You can shorten or extend a line relative to the boundary you select in an open drawing. The
boundary can be a line, part, arc, or rectangle, for example.
To trim a line:
1. Click Edit > Trim.
2. Select the object to be used as a boundary.
3. Click the middle mouse button.

Editing drawings
To Do this
Extend the line Click the end of the line to extend it to the boundary line.
Original lines:
The extended line:
Shorten the line from Click the line at the end from which you want to shorten it.
the left end
Original line:

Editing drawings
To Do this
Shorten the line from Line clicked at the left end:
the right end
Line clicked at the right end:

Splitting
You can cut an object into two pieces at a point you select in an open drawing. You can split
lines, polylines, circles, and arcs.
To split a line:
1. Select the line.

3. Pick a point on the line to indicate the location for splitting.
4. Tekla Structures splits the line into two.


Editing drawings
Dividing
You can divide an object into a number of segments that you specify in an open drawing. You
can divide lines and arcs.
To divide a single line into four lines of equal length:
1. Select the line.
2. Click Edit > Divide.

3. In the displayed Segments dialog box, enter the number of segments, for example 4,
and click OK.
Tekla Structures divides the line into four lines.

Modifying the shape of leader lines

You can modify the shape of the leader line for any independent and associative annotation
objects that have leader lines.
To modify the leader line shape:
1. Select the leader line you want to modify
2. Drag from the middle point of the line.
3. Drag further from the created handle points and new middle points.
See also Modifying part mark leader line with advanced options (p. 312)
Moving the mark leader line base point (p. 133)
Placing the base point of the reinforcement mark leader line automatically (p. 313)

Editing drawings
4.13 Using drawing tools
You can use drawings tools to edit and finalize drawings.
With the drawing tools you can:
• Align drawing objects
• Create fillets
• Create straight and round chamfers
• Copy with offsets
• Create, delete and update moment connection symbols
• Create, delete and update cut lines
To start using the drawing tools:
1. Click Tools > Macros...
2. In the Macros dialog box, select Drawing tools and click Run.
If your environment does not contain this macro, you can start it by
double-clicking the file Drawingtools.exe in the folder
..\Program
Files\TeklaStructures\<version>\nt\bin\applicati
ons\tekla\Drawings.
Contents Aligning drawing objects (p. 167)

Creating fillets (p. 168)
Creating chamfers (p. 169)
Copying with offsets (p. 170)
Managing moment connection symbols (p. 171)
Managing cut lines (p. 173)
Aligning drawing objects

You can align objects to the bottom, to the vertical center, to the left, to the horizontal center, to
the right, and to the top. You can also position objects horizontally or vertically at equal
distances from each other.
3. Select the objects that you want to align.
4. Select the aligning command from the toolbar.
5. If you selected one of the two commands that position objects at equal distance, type the
distance in the displayed dialog box.
To create a row of objects, align them first to the top and then position
them horizontally at equal distances from each other. You do not need to
reselect the objects between the two commands.
Example Below is an example where marks have been aligned to left.

Editing drawings
Creating fillets
With the Create Fillet command you can connect two intersecting lines by extending the two
selected lines to their intersection point. If no intersection point is found or if it is outside the
drawing, nothing will be done.
To create a fillet:
3. Select two intersecting lines.
4. Click the Create Fillet in the Drawing tools toolbar.

Editing drawings
Creating chamfers
You can create chamfers between two lines using the distance that you specify. You can create
both straight and round chamfers.
To create a chamfer:
3. Select two intersecting lines.
a To create a straight chamfer, click Create Straight Chamfer in the Drawing

tools toolbar.
Enter the distance that you want to have between the two lines (the length of the
chamfer line) in the displayed dialog box.
b To create a round chamfer, click Create Round Chamfer in the Drawing

tools toolbar.
Enter the desired radius in the displayed dialog box.
Example Example of a straight chamfer:
Example of a round chamfer:

Editing drawings
Copying with offsets
You can copy lines and circles with offsets. You can copy lines to a new location in the
direction you point using the offset that you specify. You can also create new circles centered in
the same location as the original circle and adjust the radius by the offset that you specify.
To copy with offset:
3. Select the object that you want to copy.
4. Click Copy with Offset in the Drawing tools toolbar.

5. Enter the offset in the dialog box that is displayed.
6. Click the view in the direction where you want to copy the object. If you are copying a
line, Tekla Structures makes a new copy of the line in the specified location. If you are
copying a circle, Tekla Structures creates a new circle that is centered in the same
location as the original circle, and adjusts the radius by the offset that you specified.
Example Example of a copied line:

Editing drawings
Example of a copied circle:
Managing moment connection symbols

Moment connections show the beams that are connected to columns with rigid connections.
With drawing tools you can manage moment connection symbols: create, update and delete
them.
Contents Creating moment connection symbols (p. 171)

Updating moment connection symbols (p. 172)
Deleting moment connection symbols (p. 172)
User-defined attributes
Creating moment connection symbols

You can create moment connection symbols to show the beams that are connected to columns
with rigid connections. The symbols are created according to part end releases. You can create
moment connection symbols automatically for all parts in the view, or for selected parts.
To create moment connection symbols:
3. Click Create moment connection symbols in the Drawing tools toolbar.

4. In the Create moment connection symbols dialog box, select the color for the symbols
from the color list.
5. In the Create moment connection symbols dialog box, enter a scale for the symbols in
the box next to the color list.
a To create moment connection symbols for all parts in the view, select the view.
b To create moment connection symbols for selected parts, select the parts.
7. Click Create.
The moment connection symbols are created according to part and connection release
properties:
• If a connection exists, start and end release information is read from the Start releases and
End releases tabs in the part analysis properties dialog box.

Editing drawings
• If a connection does not exist, release information is read from the End conditions tab in
the user-defined attributes dialog box of the part.
Limitations • Moment connection symbols are created to reference lines. This means that offsets are not
taken into use.
Example
Updating moment connection symbols

To update moment connection symbols:

a To update the moment connection symbols of all parts in the view, select the
view.
b To update the moment connection symbols of selected parts, select the parts.
5. Click Create.
When you do this, Tekla Structures removes all previously created symbols, and creates new
ones that are up-to-date.
Deleting moment connection symbols

To delete moment connection symbols:

a To delete the moment connection symbols of all parts in the view, select the view.
b To delete the moment connection symbols of selected parts, select the parts.
5. Click Delete.

Editing drawings
Managing cut lines
Cut lines are lines that are displayed using a zigzag or a dash-and-dot to show that the line is
partially outside the view border. With drawing tools you can manage cut lines: create, update
and delete them.
Contents Creating cut lines (p. 173)

Updating cut lines (p. 173)
Deleting cut lines (p. 174)
Creating cut lines

You can create cut lines to show the lines that are partially outside the view border. You can
create cut lines automatically for all parts in the view, or for selected parts.
To create cut lines:
3. Click Create cut lines in the Drawing tools toolbar.

4. In the Create cut lines dialog box, select the type (zigzag or dash-and-dot) for the line
from the list of types.
5. In the Create cut lines dialog box, select the color for the line from the color list.
6. In the Create cut lines dialog box, enter a scale for the line in the box next to the list of
types.
a To create cut lines for all parts in the view, select the view.
b To create cut lines for selected parts, select the parts.
8. Click Create.
Limitations • Cut lines cannot be created for polybeams.

• View extension for neighbor parts setting is not taken into account.
Example
Updating cut lines

To update cut lines:

a To update the cut lines of all parts in the view, select the view.
b To update the cut lines of selected parts, select the parts.
5. Click Create.
When you do this, Tekla Structures removes all previously created cut lines, and creates new
ones that are up-to-date.

Editing drawings
Deleting cut lines
To delete cut lines:

a To delete the cut lines of all parts in the view, select the view.
b To delete the cut lines of selected parts, select the parts.
5. Click Delete.
4.14 Grids in drawings

You can show grids and grid line labels in single-part, cast unit, assembly, and general
arrangement drawings.
You can manually modify the grid properties in an open drawing.
Adding or removing grid lines in the model may cause unwanted

changes in general arrangement drawings in some cases. You should
avoid modifying grids after the general arrangement drawings are
created, or set
XS_INTELLIGENCE_DO_NOT_ASSOCIATE_VIEWS_TO_GRIDS to TRUE.
See also Modifying grid and grid line properties (p. 174)
Hiding grids or grid lines (p. 175)
Moving grid labels (p. 175)
Grid properties (p. 407)
XS_INTELLIGENCE_DO_NOT_ASSOCIATE_VIEWS_TO_GRIDS
Modifying grid and grid line properties

You can modify grid properties on the drawing and view levels, and modify individual grids or
grid lines in an open drawing.
Ensure that you have the correct selection switch selected. To modify
grids, use the selection switch and to modify grid lines, use
To modify grid properties:

1. Double-click the grid or the grid line. Tekla Structures opens the Grid Properties or
Grid Line Properties dialog box.
2. Visible shows the grid lines in the drawing. If you want to see the labels only, select
Only grid labels visible.
3. Modify the label text placing, grid line and text settings as required.
4. Click Modify.

Editing drawings
See also Grids in drawings (p. 174)
XS_DRAWING_GRID_LABEL_FRAME_FIXED_WIDTH
XS_DRAWING_GRID_LABEL_FRAME_LINE_WIDTH_FACTOR
Moving grid labels

You can move single grid labels. This is useful, for example, if the label is covering an
important area in a drawing.
To move a grid label:
1. Ensure that you have the grid line selection switch selected .
2. Click a grid label.
3. Hold down Shift and drag the label by the label handle to a new position.
Hiding grids or grid lines

You can hide grids and grid lines.
Ensure that you have the correct selection switch selected. To hide grids,
use the selection switch and to hide grid lines, use .
To hide a grid or a grid line:

1. Click a grid or a grid line.
2. Right-click the grid or the grid line and select Hide > Hide from drawing view from
the pop-up menu.
4.15 Colors in drawings

You have three basic color modes for line colors in drawings. The color modes are Black and
White, Gray Scale, and Color. By default, drawings are black and white.
In addition to the three basic color modes, you can have a black background and colored lines
in drawings.
Colors and gray The table below shows the colors available in Tekla Structures, and how the different colors are
shades shown in black and white drawings and in gray scale drawings. The corresponding pen
numbers are also listed.
Name Pen Tekla Structures Black and Gray scale Lightness

color white
Invisible 9 Invisible
Black 7 0%

Editing drawings
Name Pen Tekla Structures Black and Gray scale Lightness
color white
Red 1 0%
Green 3 0%
Blue 5 0%
Cyan 4 0%
Yellow 2 0%
Magenta 6 0%
Brown 15 30%
Dark green 110 50%
Dark blue 141 70%
Blue-green 111 90%
Orange 31 100% white
Gray 8 60%
Special - -
See also Changing drawing color (p. 176)

Specifying and using special color (p. 178)
Pen numbers in Color Table (p. 179)
Colors and line weights in printing (p. 199)
Changing drawing color

You can change the color of the drawings.
To change the drawing color:
1. Open a drawing.
2. Click Tools > Options > Drawing Color Mode, and select Black and White, Gray
Scale or Color.
You can toggle between the modes by pressing B on the keyboard.
You can change the background color to black using the advanced
option XS_BLACK_DRAWING_BACKGROUND. If the background is black,
use Color as color mode.
Example Below is an example of a color drawing.

Editing drawings
In grayscale mode, the colors from 1 to 7 (black, red, green, blue, cyan, yellow, magenta) are
shown in black, and the colors from 8 to 14 (brown, dark green, dark blue, blue-green, orange,
gray) are shown in different shades of gray. Below is an example of a gray scale drawing.
Below is an example of a black-and-white drawing.

Editing drawings
See also XS_BLACK_DRAWING_BACKGROUND
Specifying and using special color

You can define a special color that is not converted to black when printed. This color will be
printed as color or grayscale, depending on the selected printer settings. The special color is
defined using RGB (Red Green Blue) values in a scale of 0 to 255.
You can specify a special color for a building object before creating a drawing, and use it in the
final drawing for shape or a building object.
To define and use a special color in a final drawing:
1. Click Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > Hatching.
2. Define the color using the following advanced options:
• XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_R
• XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_G
• XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_B
The default value is black (0, 0, 0).
The smaller the values are, the darker the shade.
4. Open a drawing.
5. Double-click a drawing object to open the properties dialog box. For example, click a
building object or a rectangle.
6. Select a fill type.
7. Select the Special fill color.
8. Click Modify.

Editing drawings
See also XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_R
XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_G
XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_B
Pen numbers in Color Table

Pen number refers to the line weights used in the printed drawing. By default, pen 0 has a line
weight of 0.1 mm. The final line thickness in a printed drawing is the default pen thickness
multiplied by the pen number.
• You can change the default pen thickness using the advanced option
XS_BASE_LINE_WIDTH.
• The line thicknesses displayed on the screen are taken from the first printer on the Printer
instances list in the Printer Catalog.
• In color drawings, Tekla Structures shows the lines with different line thicknesses only
with the setting Use Printer Linewidths (Tools > Options).
• In black and white drawings, Tekla Structures shows the black lines on the screen using
thickness defined for the color with the pen number.
See also XS_BASE_LINE_WIDTH

Changing the pen numbers for colors (p. 179)
Changing the pen numbers for colors

You can change the pen numbers for the colors to show and print lines with different
thicknesses.
To change the pen numbers:
1. Open a drawing.
2. Click Drawing File > Print Drawings > Add/Edit > Printer Catalog....
3. Select the printer instance.
To be able to see the changes on the screen, you need to make the changes to the first
printer instance on the list. Otherwise, you will see the different line weights only in the
printed drawing.
4. Click Color Table.
5. Enter or change a pen number.
6. Click OK in the Color Table.
7. Click Update in the Printer Catalog.
8. Save the changes when prompted to do so.
9. Close the Printer Catalog.
10. Close the drawing and open it again to see the changes if you changed the pen numbers
for the first printer instance.
11. In a color drawing, click Tools > Options and select Use Printer Linewidths, otherwise
you cannot see the changes on the screen.
See also Changing drawing color (p. 176)


Editing drawings
4.16 User coordinate system (UCS)
The UCS is a local user coordinate system you can use in a drawing view. It is easier to
position drawing objects in view drawing, when you place objects relative to a user-defined
point of origin, or base point in the drawing view.
Tekla Structures shows the UCS symbol in the current drawing view, when you create, copy,
move, or modify graphical objects.
You can define a different point of origin for the UCS for each drawing view, and change the
UCS point of origin as often as you like.
The following example shows several views, each with their own UCS.
To position an object using the global coordinate system, you need to

calculate the coordinates of the object from the point of origin of the
drawing.
See also Adding manual dimensions using User Coordinate System (p. 103)
Setting a new UCS (p. 181)
Toggling between two user coordinate systems (p. 181)
Resetting UCS (p. 181)

Editing drawings
Setting a new UCS
You can set a new UCS using one point or two points.
To set a new UCS:
1. Open a drawing.
2. Click Tools > User Coordinate System (UCS) and select one of the following
commands:
• Select Set Origin to set the new UCS using one point.
• Select Set by Two Points to set the new UCS using two points.
Tekla Structures displays the UCS symbol with a crosshair marking the center point.
3. Click the view where you want to place the origin.
4. If you are using two points, pick a point to define the direction of the x axis.

Adding manual dimensions using User Coordinate System (p. 103)
Toggling between two user coordinate systems

You can toggle between two user coordinate systems that have the same point of origin: the
UCS following the axes of the drawing view and the oriented UCS you have created.
To toggle between the coordinate systems, do one of the following:
• Press Ctrl + T.
• Click Tools > User Coordinate System (UCS) > Toggle Orientation.
Resetting UCS
You can reset the UCS to its original position in the current view and in all views.
Do one of the following:
To Do this
Reset the UCS in the current Click Tools > User Coordinate System (UCS) >
view Reset Current (Ctrl + 1).
Reset the UCS in all drawing Click Tools > User Coordinate System (UCS) >
views Reset All (Ctrl + 0).
4.17 Saving drawings

Tekla Structures automatically saves drawings at set intervals. You can also save your drawing
when ever you want to.
To save a drawing:
• In the open drawing, click Drawing File > Save.

Editing drawings
Closing drawings (p. 182)
Autosave
4.18 Closing drawings

You can only have one drawing open at a time. Tekla Structures always has to close an open
drawing before you can open another one.
To close a drawing:
1. Click the Close button in the upper-right corner of the drawing window.
2. If you have made changes in the drawing, Tekla Structures asks you if you want to save
your changes.

Editing drawings
5 Working with drawings
This section explains how to work with and manage the drawings you have created.
Contents Finding and opening drawings (p. 71)

Locking and unlocking drawings (p. 184)
Issuing drawings (p. 186)
Deleting drawings (p. 186)
Revising drawings (p. 186)
Printing drawings (p. 188)
Preview images of drawings (p. 200)
5.1 Updating drawings when the model changes

You need to update drawings of parts that have changed after the drawing was saved the last
time. The drawings needing updates are indicated by flags in the Drawing List. General
arrangement drawings do not need to be updated. Renumbering model objects after creating
drawings may also generate flags.
Do the following after changing the model:
1. Check the numbering settings by clicking Drawings & Reports > Numbering >
Numbering Settings.... Select Compare to old for both the new and modified parts.
2. Number all model objects that have same numbering series settings by clicking
Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Number Series of Selected Objects, or number
only new or modified model objects by clicking Drawings & Reports > Numbering >
Number Modified Objects.
3. Check the drawing list for status flags.
4. To find the parts that have been affected, select each drawing marked with the flag
in the Drawing List and click the Select objects button.
Tekla Structures highlights the affected parts in the model. Do the following:

Working with drawings
a Check the numbering history log for renumbered parts by clicking Tools >
Display Log File > Numbering History....
Part or Assembly at the beginning of a line in the numbering history log
indicates that Tekla Structures has renumbered parts or assemblies, as in the
following example:
b To find the renumbered parts in the model, select the relevant entries from the
numbering history log. Tekla Structures highlights the corresponding parts in the
model.
5. Select the affected drawings from the Drawing List and click Update.
6. Optional: If you have new parts in the model, create drawings for them.

Numbering the model
5.2 Locking and unlocking drawings

You can indicate that a drawing is not available for editing by locking it. When a drawing is
locked, it cannot be accidentally modified. Locking prevents the drawings from being opened,
updated, cloned, deleted, or modified, even if the model changes. Tekla Structures flags locked
drawings for update if the model changes.
To lock and unlock drawings:
1. In the Drawing List, select the drawing(s) you want to lock.
2. Click Lock > On.
3. To unlock the drawings, select the drawings and click Lock > Off.

5.3 Freezing drawings

You can select whether to allow Tekla Structures to update all associative objects on top of the
drawing views. The geometry of the model is always updated, but freezing is used to stop the
drawing intelligence (associativity) of drawing objects on top of the model views, and prevents
them from being updated. For example, parts are updated, but dimensions, associative notes,
text, marks, views, additional drawing objects are not.

See also Freezing and unfreezing general arrangement drawings (p. 185)
Freezing and unfreezing single part, cast unit and assembly drawings (p. 185)
How freezing affects drawings (p. 185)
Updating marks (p. 130)
Freezing and unfreezing general arrangement drawings

To freeze a drawing if something has not gone the way you want:
1. If you have the drawing open, close it without saving it.
2. In the Drawing List, select the drawing you want to freeze.
3. Click Freeze > On.
4. When freezing is no longer necessary, select the frozen drawings and click Freeze > Off.
See also Freezing drawings (p. 184)
Freezing and unfreezing single part, cast unit and assembly drawings
To freeze and unfreeze single part, cast unit and assembly drawings:
1. Save the model.
2. Open a drawing.
3. If the drawing does not look the way you want, close it without saving it.
4. Reopen the model. Do not save it.
5. In the Drawing List, select the drawing you want to freeze.
6. Click Freeze > On.
8. When freezing is no longer necessary, select the frozen drawings and click Freeze > Off.
How freezing affects drawings

Freezing affects drawings in the following way:
• The associativity does not disappear from a frozen drawing. When you unfreeze the
drawing, the associativity works again.
• Freezing does not have any effect on the cloning result. If you edit the drawing, it does not
matter whether you freeze the drawing before or after editing it.
• If a drawing is frozen, the associative drawing objects are not updated when the drawing is
updated. This means that the dimensions and views are not updated, and the marks do not
follow the parts if the parts have been moved.
• If a drawing is frozen, and the part changes in the model, the geometry of the part is
updated in the frozen drawing when the drawing is updated.
• Unfreezing the drawing before cloning does not have any effect on the cloning result. This
means, for example, that it does not matter whether you keep the drawing frozen all the
time or temporarily unfreeze it before cloning.
• If you unfreeze a drawing before update, the drawing is updated normally.

5.4 Issuing drawings
When a drawing is released for fabrication, it should be marked as issued in the Drawing List.
Issued drawings are not updated when the model changes. This information can be used to
filter the Drawing List and in templates.
To issue drawings:
1. In the Drawing List, select the drawings to be issued.
2. Select Issue > On.
Tekla Structures marks the issued drawings with a flag
When an issued drawing has been edited or otherwise changed, the color of the flag
changes and the text Issued drawing changed is displayed.
To show the issue date in a report, add the template field DATE_ISSUE in
the appropriate report template.

DATE_ISSUE
5.5 Deleting drawings

You can delete drawings in the Drawing List.
1. In the Drawing List, select the drawings you want to delete.
2. Click Delete.
3. When Tekla Structures asks you to confirm the deletion, select Yes.
If you press down Shift, Tekla Structures will not ask you to confirm the
deletion.

5.6 Revising drawings

When you revise drawings, you can attach information to them about the changes you have
made. Tekla Structures displays this information alongside the revision number or mark. The
revision date also appears in the revision table within drawings. The revision number or mark is
also shown in the Drawing List by default. Revision information can also be used in reports.
You can revise drawings through the Drawing List or when the drawing is open. When you
revise the drawings using Add Revision Mark in an open drawing, Tekla Structures creates
marks in the drawing indicating the places where the changes have been made.

The report drawing_issue_rev.xsr shows the most recent revision dates of drawings.
To show the revision mark instead of the revision number in the

Drawing List, set the advanced option
XS_SHOW_REVISION_MARK_ON_DRAWING_LIST to TRUE.
See also XS_SHOW_REVISION_MARK_ON_DRAWING_LIST

Creating revisions (p. 187)
Changing revisions (p. 187)
Deleting revisions (p. 188)
Creating revisions
You can create revisions to follow the changes in the drawing.
To create a revision:
1. In the Drawing List, select the drawing(s) to revise.
2. Click Revision....
The Revision Handling dialog box is displayed.
3. Enter a mark.
Marks can be numerical or alphabetical such as 1, 2, 3… or A, B, C…
4. Optional: Enter a date for the revision, and add a maximum of three lines of Text about
the changes.
5. Click Create.
The revision number or mark is now displayed in the Drawing List. When you open the
drawing, you can see the revision information in the revision table if there is one in the
drawing.
Each drawing has its own unique revision number, but several drawings
can share the same revision mark, date, and information. To attach the
same revision information to several drawings simultaneously, select
multiple drawings from the drawing list.
See also Revising drawings (p. 186)
Changing revisions
You can change revision information afterwards.
To change a revision:
1. Select a revised drawing from the Drawing List.
3. In the Revision Handling dialog box, select the revision number from the list next to the
Mark field.
4. Change the revision information.
5. Click Modify.
6. Close the Revision Handling dialog box.

Deleting revisions
You can delete unnecessary revisions.
To delete a revision:
1. Select a revised drawing from the Drawing List.
3. In the Revision Handling dialog box, select the revision number from the list next to the
Mark field.
4. Click Delete.
When you delete a revision, Tekla Structures automatically adjusts the remaining
revision numbers for that drawing. The revision marks do not change.
5.7 Printing drawings

Tekla Structures prints drawings to selected printers, to print files, and to PDF. Printing can be
started from the Drawing List or from an open drawing.
We do not cover setting up printers in the Microsoft Windows environment. It is assumed that
print devices already have been set up and tested in your environment. For further information
about on setting up printers, contact your system administrator.
See also XS_PLOT_VIEW_FRAMES

Printing single drawings (p. 188)
Printing multiple drawings with different sizes in one go (p. 190)
Printing to file (p. 190)
Creating PDF files (p. 192)
Printing settings (p. 193)
Printing to multiple sheets (p. 194)
Drawing frames and foldmarks (p. 195)
Setting up printer instances (p. 197)
Printing tips (p. 200)
Printing single drawings

There are many ways you can start printing single drawings: you can use menu commands,
icons, and pop-up menu commands.
Before you print the drawing, check that the printer instance settings are correct and the layout
contains the correct drawing size settings.
To print single drawings using menu commands in an open drawing:
1. In the drawing, click Drawing File > Print Drawings....
2. In the Print Drawings dialog box, select the printer instance you want to use.
3. Optional: Modify the printing settings and add frames and foldmarks in the printout.
4. Click Print.

Shortcut for opening the Print Drawings dialog box: Shift + P.
See also Drawing frames and foldmarks (p. 195)

Example: Printing on A4 in landscape (p. 189)
Example: Printing on A3 in portrait (p. 189)
Example: Printing on A4 in landscape

This example describes how you can print on A4 paper in landscape style in black and white.
In this example, it is assumed that the print area h*b is defined h being
along the longer side of the paper and b being along the shorter side of
the paper. When using some other printer driver you might have to
change h*b values if you find out that the printer driver uses h along the
short side of the paper.
To print on A4 in landscape in black and white when a drawing is open:

1. In drawing properties dialog box, click Layout.
2. Set Size definition mode to Specified size and set Drawing size to 287 * 200.
You can also use Autosize. Then you need to make sure that you have defined
appropriate Fixed sizes or Calculated sizes.
4. Select Drawing File > Print Drawings....
5. In the Print Drawings dialog box, click the printer instance you want to use.
6. Click Add/Edit and check that the printer settings are correct:
• Paper size: A4 210 x 297 mm
• Print area h*b: 287 x 200
• Color: Black/white
7. Click Update.
8. Click OK.
9. Set Scaling to Scale and enter 1.
In this case also Scaling setting Auto would produce a similar printout because drawing
size and h*b are the same.
10. Set Orientation to Landscape (or Auto).
11. Set Print area to Entire Drawing.
12. Click Print.
See also Printing drawings (p. 188)
Example: Printing on A3 in portrait

This example describes how you can print on A3 paper in portrait style in black and white.
You can print from the Drawing List or when a drawing is open.
To print on A3 in portrait in black and white when a drawing is open:

1. In drawing properties dialog box, click Layout.
2. Set Size definition mode to Specified size and set Drawing size to 287 * 410.
You can also use Autosize. Then you need to make sure that you have defined
appropriate Fixed sizes or Calculated sizes.
4. Select Drawing File > Print Drawings....
5. In the Print Drawings dialog box, click the printer instance you want to use.
6. Click Add/Edit and check that the printer settings are correct:
• Paper size: A3 297 x 420 mm.
• Print area h*b: 410 x 287
• Color: Black/white
7. Click Update.
8. Click OK.
9. Set Scaling to Scale and enter 1.
10. Set Orientation to Portrait (or Auto).
11. Set Print area to Entire Drawing.
12. Click Print.
Printing multiple drawings with different sizes in one go

You can print multiple drawings from the Drawing List. You can print drawings of different
sizes at the same time.
To print multiple drawings:
1. In the Drawing List, select the drawings you want to print.
2. Click the Print drawings icon .

3. In the Print Drawings dialog box, indicate the printers you want to use.
To select several printers, hold down Ctrl and select the printers.
If you select drawings of several sizes and several printers, Tekla Structures sends each
drawing to the printer that is using the smallest paper size on which the drawing will fit.
For example, if you have two printers selected, one A4 and one A3, Tekla Structures will
send A4 drawings to the A4 printer and A3 to the A3 printer.
4. If you selected several printers, set Scale to 1.
5. If necessary, modify other printing settings and add frames and foldmarks in the
printout.
6. Click Print.

Printing single drawings (p. 188)
Printing to file
Before you start, make sure you have a printer instance set up to print to file.
To print to a file:
1. In the Drawing List, select all the drawings that you want to print.
2. Click the Print drawings icon.
3. Click a printer instance that is set up to print to file.
4. Select the Print to file check box.

Specify the folder. You can use the folder specified during printer instance setup or click
Browse... to locate the destination folder in the Browse For Folder dialog box.
If you do not enter a folder, Tekla Structures creates the files in the current model folder
or in the folder defined by the advanced option XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_DIRECTORY.
5. Optional: Modify other printing settings and add frames and foldmarks in the printout.
6. Click Print.
Tekla Structures prints the selected drawings to files in the specified folder using the drawing
names.
See also Printing settings (p. 193)

Adding a print-to-file instance (p. 197)
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_DIRECTORY
Customizing print file names

By default, Tekla Structures uses the drawing names as print file names. You can customize
these file names using an advanced option indicating the drawing type, and entering switches
defining the format of the print file name as a value.
To customize the filenames:
1. Go to Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > Printing.
2. Enter switches for the advanced options XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_A,
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_W, XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_G,
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_M, and XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_C
You can also combine several switches. The switches are not case sensitive.
3. Click OK.
Example The example below results in the filename E_P1_PLATE_Revision=2.dxf:
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_A=E_%NAME.%_%TITLE%%REV?_Revisi
on=%%REV%.dxf
See also Switches for customizing print file names (p. 191)
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_A
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_C
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_W
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_M
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_G
Switches for customizing print file names

Use the following switches when you want to customize the print file name format.
Example of the
Switch result Description
%NAME% P_1 Part, assembly, or cast unit position,
using the filename format
%DRAWING_NAME%
prefix_number.
%NAME.-% P-1 Part, assembly, or cast unit position,
using the filename format prefix-
%DRAWING_NAME.-%
number.

Example of the
Switch result Description
%NAME.% P1 Part, assembly, or cast unit position,
using the filename format
%DRAWING_NAME.%
prefixnumber.
%REV% 2 Drawing revision number, if
Include revision mark to filename
%REVISION%
is checked in the Print Drawings
%DRAWING_REVISION% dialog box.
%REV_MARK% B Drawing revision mark, if Include
revision mark to filename is
%REVISION_MARK%
checked in the Print Drawings
%DRAWING_REVISION_MAR dialog box.
K%
%TITLE% PLATE Drawing name from the drawing
%DRAWING_TITLE%
%UDA:<drawing user- Painted Value of a drawing user-defined

defined attribute>% attribute that can be found in
Template Editor.
%REV? - <text>% 2 - Rev Adds conditional prefixes. In this
example, if REV exists, Tekla
Structures adds the text between ?
and % to the filename.
%TPL:<template Base plate You can use here template
attribute>% attributes, for example, drawing title
template attributes TITLE1,
TITLE2, and TITLE3. The actual
values for these attributes are
entered in the drawing properties
dialog box.
See also Customizing print file names (p. 191)

XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_A
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_C
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_W
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_M
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_G
Creating PDF files

You can use any standard PDF printer to create PDF files in Tekla Structures, such as
pdfFactory, Win2PDF or Adobe Acrobat.
Before you start creating PDF files using Adobe Acrobat, ensure that you have Adobe Acrobat
and Adobe Distiller installed and configured with the Adobe Postscript Printer Driver set up
to print to file. Consult your Adobe documentation for more information.
Also ensure that you have an Adobe postscript printer instance in the Tekla Structures printer
catalog.
To create PDF files:
1. In the Drawing List, select the drawings of which you want to make PDF files.
2. Click the Print drawings icon .

3. In the Print Drawings dialog box, select the PDF printer instances you want to use.

If you select several printer instances, Tekla Structures sends each drawing to the printer
instance that is using the smallest paper size on which the drawing will fit. For example,
if you have two printer instances selected, one A4 and one A3, Tekla Structures will
send A4 drawings to the A4 printer and A3 to the A3 printer.
4. Optional: Modify the printing settings and add frames and foldmarks in the PDF.
5. Click Print.
Tekla Structures creates the PDF files and saves them in the folder that you specified
when you defined the printer instance. The file will have the name shown in the
Drawing List with the extension ps.
Limitations Do not use the Print to file option when you create PDF files.
See also Printing settings (p. 193)

Adding an Adobe postscript printer instance (p. 198)
Printing settings
The Print Drawings dialog box contains options for setting up printing.
Setting Description
Print to file Prints the drawing to a file.
Include revision mark to file Adds the latest revision of the printed drawing to the
name filename.
Uses revision number by default. However, if you set
the advanced option
XS_SHOW_REVISION_MARK_ON_DRAWING_LIST to
TRUE, the revision mark is used.
Scaling Auto fits the drawing to the set print area h*b size.
This is useful when printing preview drawings on A4.
With this option you can include everything in the
printout, but the scale may be affected as drawing size
is fitted into the print area h*b.
Scale scales the drawing manually. When you want to
print in the exact scale, use this option. Using this
option may affect the location of the drawing in the
printout.
Examples: 1.0 = 100%, 0.9 = 90%
Print on multiple sheets Prints the drawing on multiple small sheets.
Number of copies Defines the number of copies.
Orientation Auto orientates the drawing to suit the paper.
Landscape prints the drawing horizontally - as it is
displayed on the screen.
Portrait prints the drawing vertically.
Print area Entire drawing prints the entire drawing.
Visible area prints the area visible in the current
drawing window.
Frames Opens a dialog box where you can select to print
frames and foldmarks.

See also Printing single drawings (p. 188)
Printing multiple drawings with different sizes in one go (p. 190)
Print area h*b (p. 199)
XS_SHOW_REVISION_MARK_ON_DRAWING_LIST
XS_PLOT_VIEW_FRAMES
Printing to multiple sheets

Before printing to multiple sheets, make sure that the layout of the drawing supports printing
on several smaller sheets. Remember that Tekla Structures automatically adds a 5 mm margin
to the printouts.
Also ensure that you have set up the printer instance correctly for printing to multiple sheets.
To print on several smaller sheets:
1. In the drawing, click Drawing File > Print Drawings....
2. In the Print Drawings dialog box, select the printer you want to use.
3. Select the Print on multiple sheets option.
4. Set Scaling:
• Auto: this prints everything in the print area defined in Print area h*b setting for the
printer instance. Tekla Structures rounds the amount of sheets to the nearest number
and scales the drawing down.
• Scale = 1: Preserves the scale. The number of sheets is rounded up. The location of
the drawing contents on the paper may vary.
Tekla Structures calculates the required amount of sheets needed to print the drawing.
5. Optional: Modify other printing settings and add frames and foldmarks in the printout.
If you set Orientation to Auto, Tekla Structures selects an orientation that results in the
smallest number of printed sheets.
Tekla Structures prints the drawing to multiple sheets so that it prints the lower right corner the
first, and the upper left corner the last (see the numbered sheets in the example below).
If you want to have drawing frames and/or the title blocks for each smaller size sheet, you need
to use proper table layout as shown in the example below.

Use the advanced option XS_PRINT_MULTISHEET_BORDER to set
borders that are left out from the smaller sheets.
See also XS_PRINT_MULTISHEET_BORDER

Drawing frames and foldmarks

You can have a frame around drawing contents, or two drawing frames inside each other. You
can add default Tekla Structures frames around the drawing contents, or use DWG/DXF files in
the table layouts as drawing frames.
You can create foldmarks as guides for folding printed drawings. They are small lines between
and perpendicular to the drawing frames.

Frames
Foldmark

Adding frames and foldmarks in printouts (p. 196)
Using a DWG/DXF file as a frame (p. 196)
XS_PLOT_VIEW_FRAMES
Adding frames and foldmarks in printouts

To add frames and foldmarks:
1. In the Print Drawings dialog box, click Frames....
2. In the Drawing Frame Properties dialog box, select the check box(es) of the frame(s)
you want to print.
3. In Margins, enter in millimeters the distance between each frame and the left, right,
bottom, and top edge of the paper.
4. Select a color for each frame.
5. To print the foldmarks, select the Foldmarks check box.
6. Enter in millimeters the horizontal and vertical distances of the first foldmarks from the
lower right corner of the outer frame, and between the other foldmark.
7. Select a color for the foldmarks.
8. Click OK.

Table layouts (p. 214)
Using a DWG/DXF file as a frame

DWG/DXF files can be used as drawing frames. You can do this by adding the DWG/DXF file
in the table layout of the drawing.
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > Drawing Layout....
2. Select a layout and click Table layout....
3. Select a table layout and click Tables....
4. Double-click DWG/DXF in the Available tables list.
5. Select the file and click OK.
6. Click Update.
7. Set the Scale.

8. Select Transparent.
9. Click OK.

Setting up printer instances

Tekla Structures uses Microsoft Windows printer drivers to write the printed data directly to a
printer, print file or PDF file. There are two stages in setting up printers in Tekla Structures:
First, you need to add a printer instance in the Printer Catalog. By default, several printer
instances are already defined. Next, you need connect the printer instances to printer drivers
and adjust the printer instance settings. You can also connect one printer driver to several
instances, for example, to print in different sizes.
See also Adding a printer instance (p. 197)

Adding a print-to-file instance (p. 197)
Adding an Adobe postscript printer instance (p. 198)
Paper size (p. 199)
Adding a printer instance

To add a printer instance in Tekla Structures Printer Catalog:
1. In the model, click File > Print > Printer Catalog....
2. In the Printer Catalog dialog box, click an existing printer instance that has similar
settings to the one you want to add.
3. Enter a name for the new printer instance in the box under the Printer instances list.
4. Click Add.
5. Click Browse... to access the Select Printer dialog box, which shows a list of Microsoft
Windows printer drivers currently configured in your system.
6. Click a printer driver and then OK.
7. Select the paper size.
8. Enter the print area in Print area h*b (height and width).
9. If necessary, use Offset for print origin to move the drawing print origin.
10. Select Black/white or Color. If you select Color, Tekla Structures prints lines with the
colors defined in the drawing properties.
11. Click Color table to map pen size to the on-screen line color. The background color is
not printed.
12. Click Update.
13. Click OK.
14. Confirm that you want to save changes to the model folder.

Paper size (p. 199)
Adding a print-to-file instance

To add a print-to-file instance in the Printer Catalog:
1. In Printer Catalog, click Add.

2. Enter a printer instance name for the printer driver, followed immediately (no spaces) by
@path\folder\. The folder must already exist. For example, 11X17@d:\small\
You can also leave the folder out. If you do this, Tekla Structures prints the file in the
current model folder or in the folder specified for the advanced option
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_DIRECTORY.
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_DIRECTORY overrides the folder defined in

the Printer Catalog.
3. Click Add.
4. Click Browse... to access the Select Printer dialog box and click a printer driver that is
configured to print to file and then click OK.
5. In Paper size, select By print area.
6. Enter the print area in Print area h*b.
7. Enter a file extension, for example, plt for a print file.
8. Select Color or Black/white as the color.
9. Click Color table... to map pen size to the on-screen line color.
10. Click Update.
11. Click OK.
12. Confirm that you want to save changes to the model folder.
One way to send different drawing sizes to different folders is to set up a

Microsoft Windows printer to print to file for each paper size you will
use. Enter a different destination folder for each paper size in the Printer
instances in Tekla Structures.
See also Setting up printer instances (p. 197)

Adding a printer instance (p. 197)
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_DIRECTORY
Adding an Adobe postscript printer instance

To add a Adobe postscript printer instance to the Printer Catalog:
1. In Printer Catalog, click Add.
2. Enter a new printer instance name followed immediately (no spaces) by @ and the
folder where Adobe Distiller should look for files. For example,
A4_PDF@c:\plots\pdf\in\ .
3. Click Add.
4. Click Browse... to access the Select Printer dialog box. Click the Adobe postscript
printer driver and then OK.
5. Set Paper size to By print area.
6. Enter the print area in Print area h*b.
7. Enter the file extension ps.
8. Select Black/white as the color.
9. Click Color table to map pen size to the on-screen line color.
10. Click Update.
11. Click OK.
12. Confirm that you want to save the changes to the model folder.

See also Print area h*b (p. 199)
Adding a printer instance (p. 197)
Paper size
Use the Paper size setting in Printer Catalog to select the paper size used in printing.
Setting Description
Named paper size Tekla Structures lists a named paper sizes for most sizes
A3 and smaller. Selecting one of the listed sizes is
recommended for A3 printers and smaller.
By print area The printer selects the paper size based on the print area.
This option is recommended for A2 printers and larger. If
you use a named paper size with a larger printer than A3,
drawings larger than the print area are cropped to the size
of the print area.
None Sends no size information to the printer. This option
provides legacy support for Xsteel 5.0 and is not
recommended for use in other circumstances.
To print to different paper sizes, define several printers, each using a

different paper size, but all connected to the same physical printer. For
more information about setting up print devices in Microsoft Windows,
see your operating system documentation.
Print area h*b

When defining the print area, keep in mind the following facts:
• Tekla Structures uses the print area values to position the printout on the paper. Ensure that
the values for h and b relate to the paper size required.
• Usually for roll feed printers, h defines the roll width direction and d defines the roll feed
direction. Usually for tray feed printers, h defines the tray feed direction, and d defines the
tray width direction.
• Minimum value is a paper size less the hard clip margins of the printer. See your printer
documentation for the hard clip margins of your printer.
• Tekla Structures overrides the paper size defined in Windows printer setup if the
information is entered in the printer instances.
Colors and line weights in printing

Use the Color table in Printer Catalog to map different screen colors to different line weights.
The pen numbers refer to the line weights used in the printed drawing.
The line weight displayed on the screen is taken from the first printer on the printer list.
The pen numbers in the Color Table also affect the line weights displayed on the screen in
black-and-white drawings.
See also XS_BASE_LINE_WIDTH


Printing tips
Here are some tips that help you print drawings the way you want.
• If you are printing a drawing to a smaller paper, the line weights are scaled accordingly.
This means that no lines are drawn too thickly and the drawings are more readable.
• You can force a drawing to use a different size paper: Open the drawing and go to Drawing
Properties > Layout. In Size definition mode, select Specified size. Insert the required
sheet size into Drawing size.
• If a drawing does not fit to the paper or is printed to a wrong location, use the following
variables to move the drawing print origin: XS_PLOT_ORIGIN_MOVE_X and
XS_PLOT_ORIGIN_MOVE_Y.
• You can disable the print date information to prevent the loss of information when working
with multi-user models. This is useful in cases where a user modifies drawings while
another user prints the same drawings. Use the XS_DISABLE_DRAWING_PLOT_DATE to
disable the print date.

XS_PLOT_ORIGIN_MOVE_X
XS_PLOT_ORIGIN_MOVE_Y
XS_DISABLE_DRAWING_PLOT_DATE
5.8 Preview images of drawings

You can create preview images of the drawings. These screenshots are saved by default in the
\drawings folder under the model folder as .png files.
The preview images can be added and displayed for master drawings in the Master Drawing
Catalog. They can also be viewed through the Clone Drawings dialog box.
See also Creating preview images (p. 200)

Adding preview images for master drawings (p. 201)
Viewing preview images of drawing templates (p. 201)
Creating preview images

Before you can create a preview image of a drawing, you must first create the drawing.
To create a preview image:
2. Delete all unnecessary objects from the drawing.
3. Click Tools > Create Preview Image.
The image is saved in the \drawings folder under the model folder in .png format
with the same name as the drawing.
See also Preview images of drawings (p. 200)

Adding preview images for master drawings
Before you can add a preview image, you must create it.
To add a preview image for a drawing in the Master Drawing Catalog:
1. Open the Master Drawing Catalog by clicking Drawings & Reports > Create
Drawings.
2. Locate the desired master drawing and double-click it to open the Master Drawing
3. Add the image you created:
• For the master drawings of the type saved settings, cloning templates, and wizard
files, click Change image and browse for the preview image. Click OK to save the
image as a preview image.
• For rule sets, click Next until you get to the page where you can add the preview
image. Click Browse and browse for the preview image. Click Save to save the
image as a preview image.
Now you can display the preview image by selecting the master drawing on the catalog
list, right-clicking and selecting Preview.
See also Creating preview images (p. 200)

Preview images of drawings (p. 200)
Viewing preview images of drawing templates

You can create preview images of the drawing templates that you have in your template library
(model folder). You can later browse through the preview images easily through the Clone
Drawings dialog box, and quickly find the drawing template you are looking for.
To view preview images that you have created for drawing templates:
1. Open the Drawing List.
2. Open the Clone Drawing dialog box by clicking Clone in the Drawing List.
3. Select Other model and browse for the template library.
4. Click the Select template button to open the list of drawings that the selected model
has. On the list, there is a small icon in the Preview column if the drawing has a preview
image.
5. Double-click the drawing to open the preview image.
See also Cloning using drawing templates in template library (p. 58)

6 Modifying automatic
drawing settings
This section explains how to define automatic drawing settings. Automatic drawing object
settings include all drawing type main dialog drawing properties and subdialog properties
settings. In addition, many of the drawing settings are defined through environment variables
or by using additional settings files.
This section also explains the principle of applying drawing settings on different levels:
drawing level, view level, and object level, and how to apply the object level settings on higher
levels.
After you have created a drawing using the automatic settings, you can open the drawing and
modify the settings and edit the contents of each drawing, if necessary.
Contents Updating project information (p. 204)

Filtering in drawings
Drawing layout (p. 213)
Drawing size and drawing view scale (p. 222)
Automatic marks (p. 302)
Grids in drawings (p. 323)
Parts and neighbor parts (p. 325)
Bolts (p. 332)
Surface treatments (p. 335)
Reinforcement and meshes (p. 336)
Hatch patterns (p. 338)
Reference models (p. 342)
Defining a firm folder for images and symbols (p. 345)
Defining customized line types (p. 345)

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Drawing settings (p. 357)
6.1 Updating project information

You will use project information, such as the project number and name, many times during a
project. Update the project information at the beginning of the project to make reports and
drawings display the correct information automatically.
To update project information:
1. Click File > Project Properties....
The Project Properties dialog box is displayed. It contains some sample entries, which
you can overwrite.
2. Enter or update the project information. All the information is optional.
3. In the Description box, enter a description that helps you identify the model when you
next need to open it.
The description appears in the Open dialog box.
4. Optional: To define user-defined attributes, click User-defined attributes....
• Enter fabricator information
• Define project standards, such as finish, material and field connection (Project
standards tab)
• Define what information appears in drawings (Drawing switches tabs)
• Define your own fields to include in drawings and reports (Parameters tab)
• Preview title block and bill of material styles.
5. Click OK.
6. Click OK to save your changes.
Now you will get updated project properties in drawings and reports.
7. To save the project properties as the default properties for this project, click Tools >
Defaults > Save Defaults.
The names in the image below refer to template fields, which you can
use when designing your own reports and templates.

PROJECT.NUMBER
PROJECT.NAME
PROJECT.BUILDER
PROJECT.OBJECT
PROJECT.ADDRESS
PROJECT.DESIGNER
PROJECT.DATE_START
PROJECT.DATE_END
PROJECT.INFO1
PROJECT.INFO2

6.2 Drawing properties
Drawing properties tell Tekla Structures how the drawing should look and what it should
include. You can modify the properties of a drawing before and after you create it. You can
modify drawing properties on three levels.
Tekla Structures allows you to save the drawing properties in drawing property files for future
use.
See also Three levels of modifying drawings (p. 24)

How Tekla Structures applies drawing properties (p. 212)
Modifying drawing properties on drawing level

The drawing level is the highest level of setting the drawing properties. By setting properties on
the drawing level, you can change the drawing properties of all objects and elements in a
drawing, and also save your changes for future use for a drawing of the same type.
Whenever possible, modify drawings by changing the drawing

properties on the drawing level. These modifications also remain when
the drawing is recreated due to a model change, for example.
You can modify properties on the drawing level before you create a drawing, and in an existing
drawing. You can also use the Drawing List to modify the properties of multiple drawings.
See also Modifying and saving drawing properties before creating drawings (p. 206)
Modifying drawing properties of an existing drawing (p. 207)
Modifying drawing properties of several drawings (p. 207)
Modifying and saving drawing properties before creating drawings

Tekla Structures creates drawings using the properties defined for each type of drawing. Ensure
that the drawing properties are set and the necessary drawing property files are created before
creating drawings using the menu, toolbar or pop-up menu commands, and before creating
drawings using saved settings or rule sets in the Master Drawing Catalog.
To modify and save drawing properties:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings and select the drawing type.
2. Load a drawing property file that contains the settings that are closest to the ones you
need by selecting a drawing property file from the list and clicking Load.
3. Go through the various settings in the drawing properties dialog box, and make the
necessary changes.
4. Click OK in each of the subdialog boxes where you changed the properties.
settings button and load the object settings that you want to use.
Close the dialog by clicking OK.
6. If you want to save the changes in another property file, enter the name of the property
file and click Save as.

Otherwise, click OK to save the settings in the currently open settings.
Now you can create a drawing using the modified drawing property file. In the Master
Drawing Catalog, the drawing property files are called saved settings. Saved settings are also
used in rule sets.
See also Modifying drawing properties on drawing level (p. 206)
Modifying drawing properties of an existing drawing

To change the drawing properties of an existing drawing:
2. Double-click the drawing area or select Edit > Drawing Properties (Alt + Enter).
3. Click the buttons to open the subdialog boxes.
Select the check boxes next to the options that you want to change.
5. Make the necessary changes.
Close the dialog box by clicking OK.
8. Optional: If you want to save the changes in another property file, enter the name of the
property file and click Save as.
9. Click Modify.
The changes that you made in the drawing properties are displayed in the drawing.
Modifying drawing properties of several drawings

You can change the drawing properties of several drawings at the same time.
To do this:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing List.
2. Select the drawings that you want to modify.
3. Right-click and select Properties from the pop-up menu.
6. Modify the drawing properties.
8. Click Modify in the drawing properties dialog box.
Tekla Structures changes the drawing properties in all of the drawings you selected from the
Drawing List.
Modifying drawing properties on view level

You can modify the drawing properties on the view level. This means that the changes you
make apply only to the view that you have selected in the drawing.
To modify drawing properties on the view level:

2. Double-click a drawing view frame to open the drawing view properties dialog box.
5. Make the necessary changes.
Click OK to close the dialog box.
8. Click Modify.
The changes that you made in the drawing view properties are displayed in the view.
See also Drawing properties (p. 206)

Modifying and saving properties on object level

You can modify the drawing properties on the object level. This means that you change the
individual properties of the objects in the drawings (parts, dimensions, marks, bolts, and
welds), and save the object property files for later use.
Remember that the drawing object property files are drawing-type-

specific. For example, if you want to save object properties for objects in
single-part drawings, do this through the Single-part Properties dialog
box.
To modify and save object properties in a drawing:

2. Click the button for the object you want to change.
For example, click Part.
3. Change the desired settings in the property dialog box.
For example, go to the Appearance tab and change the part color.
4. In the box next to the Save as button, enter the name for the property file and click Save
as.
5. Click Cancel to close the object properties dialog box.
Now you have a new object property file. You can apply the settings in this file in an open
drawing. You can also use the object property files with the drawing or view filters to apply the
object level settings on the drawing or view level through the drawing properties dialog box.
See also Drawing settings (p. 357)

Loading saved drawing object properties in an existing drawing

You can change the object properties in an existing drawing by loading saved object properties.
To load saved object properties:

2. Double-click the drawing object you want to change to open the object properties dialog
box. For example, double-click a part.
3. Select the desired object property file from the list next to the Load button and click
Load.
4. Click Modify.
Tekla Structures changes the drawing object according to the settings in the loaded object
property file.
See also Modifying and saving properties on object level (p. 208)
Creating object level settings

You can control detailed object level settings directly on the drawing and view level. This way
setting up special representation for objects in drawings or views is very easy. For example,
you may want to define that all columns in a drawing or drawing view are shown in a specific
color.You also have the option of turning the detailed object level settings on or off for the
drawings or views you choose.
To create object level settings:
1. In the drawing properties dialog box of a drawing or a view, click Filter... and create the
necessary drawing or view filter that selects the objects you want a special
representation for.
For example, create a filter that selects columns.
2. In the drawing properties dialog box of a drawing or a view, modify and save the
drawing object properties.
For example, click Part... and define that you want to have blue parts.
3. In the drawing property dialog box of a drawing or a view, click Edit settings.
4. In the Object level settings for drawing/for view dialog box, click Add row and select
the filters to be used, the drawing object types and the drawing object properties to be
used.
By doing this, you are combining the filter, object type, and object property settings into
detailed object level settings.
You can add many rows in the object level settings as you want.
5. Give the object level settings a name and save them using Save as.
Now you have new drawing object level settings or view object level settings to be applied on
the drawing or view level.
Limitations You must create object level settings separately for the drawing level and view level.
See also Filtering in drawings

Example: Applying object level settings on drawing level (p. 210)
Applying object level settings on drawing level

You can control the drawing object settings (settings of parts, reinforcing bars, neighbor parts,
marks, bolts, welds, and dimensions) directly on the drawing level. Using this feature you can
easily set up special representations for objects in drawings.
Before you can apply object level settings, first create and save the necessary drawing filters
and object property files and create the object level settings.
To apply the saved model object settings on the drawing level before creating a drawing:

2. Load the desired drawing properties (saved settings) by selecting the property file from
the list and clicking Load.
3. Click Edit settings.
4. In the Object level settings for drawing dialog box, load the desired object level
settings and click OK.
5. Optional: Save the drawing properties including the activated object level settings in a
drawing property file with the same or another name using Save as.
You can use this file later on in future drawings you create.
7. Create the drawings.

Example: Applying object level settings on drawing level

In this example, we will set up different object level properties for various types of building
objects, such as beams, columns and braces. Before doing this, we have saved drawing object
properties for beams, columns and braces so that they are drawn with different colors.
We will first make a general arrangement drawing filter, save object level settings in a settings
file and apply the new object level settings on drawing level.
Parts can be classified using drawing filters. This example is using part names defined in the
model, similarly as modeling filters.
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > General Arrangement Drawing.
2. Click Filter... in the drawing properties dialog box.
3. Create filters by Part - Name for column, beam, and brace and save the settings using
Save as with different names, such as ts_column, ts_beam and ts_brace.
4. Click Cancel. Now you have created the required filters needed for selecting the desired
parts.
5. In the General Arrangement Drawing Properties dialog box, click Edit settings.

6. In the Object level settings for drawing dialog box, select the filters to be used, the
drawing object types and the drawing object property settings to be used:
a Click Add row and select ts_column as Model object (Drawing filter), Part as
Drawing object type and column as Settings used.
b Click Add row and select ts_beam as Model object (Drawing filter), Part as
Drawing object type and beam as Settings used.
c Click Add row and select ts_brace as Model object (Drawing filter), Part as
Drawing object type and brace as Settings used.
7. Save the object level settings as gatype1 using Save as.
The same object level settings can be used with other saved general arrangement
properties, you do not need to create new ones.
8. Click Cancel to exit the dialog box.
9. Create a general arrangement drawing.
10. Open the created general arrangement drawing and double-click the drawing to open the
drawing properties.
12. Load object level settings you created, in this example gatype1, and click Load.
13. Click OK.
14. Click Modify to apply the changes in the drawing.
15. Confirm the object level changes by clicking Yes in the on Object level settings
changed! confirmation message box.

Applying object level settings on view level

You can control the drawing object settings (settings of parts, reinforcing bars, neighbor parts,
marks, bolts, welds, and dimensions) in an existing drawing on the view level. Using this
feature you can easily set up special representation for objects in the views you select.
Before you can apply object level settings, first create and save the necessary view filters,
object property files and object level settings.
To apply the saved object settings on the view level in an existing drawing:
2. Double-click a drawing view frame.
4. In the Object level settings for view dialog box, load the desired object level settings.
5. Click OK.
6. Click Modify to apply object level settings in the selected views.

How Tekla Structures applies drawing properties

Tekla Structures generates drawings according to the properties defined for each drawing type.
The way Tekla Structures connects the properties to the drawing you create depends on the
method you select for creating the drawing:

• If you create the drawings in the Master Drawing Catalog using a rule set, Tekla
Structures uses the properties defined for the saved settings file or cloning template used in
the rule set.
• If you create the drawings in the Master Drawing Catalog using saved settings, Tekla
Structures uses the properties defined in the saved settings file you select.
• If you create the drawings in the Master Drawing Catalog using cloning templates, Tekla
Structures uses the properties that you have defined for the drawing used as a cloning
template.
• If you create drawings through Drawings & Reports menu commands, Tekla Structures
uses the current properties in the appropriate drawing properties dialog box. The current
properties in the drawing properties dialog box are also used when you create drawings
using toolbar command buttons or pop-up menu commands.
See also Drawing properties (p. 206)

6.3 Drawing layout

The layout defines which drawing tables to include and the set of rules for increasing the
drawing size when necessary. It connects a set of table layouts and drawing sizes. Tekla
Structures selects the smallest defined drawing size which will fit the drawing views and the
connected table layout. This tells Tekla Structures which elements to include in your drawings
automatically. Each layout has its own:
• Table layouts
• Fixed drawing sizes
• Calculated drawing sizes
Tekla Structures includes several predefined layouts, which are connected to drawing types.
Each drawing type; assembly, single-part, cast unit, general arrangement, and multidrawing,
has its own layout. You can also create your own layouts.
Using different layouts you can, for example, set assembly drawings to use A1 and A2 size
drawing sheets, and single-part drawings to use A3 and A4 sheets. Another example is that you
may want to include a material list in assembly drawings, but not in general arrangement
drawings.
See also Table layouts (p. 214)

Tables (p. 215)
Creating a new layout (p. 215)
Selecting a new layout (p. 221)
Setting margins and spaces for drawing views (p. 217)
Creating and adding a new table layout (p. 216)
Adding tables in table layout (p. 217)
If you replace a table in a table layout (p. 218)
Setting the properties of tables in a table layout (p. 218)
Key plans (p. 219)
Modifying tables in Template Editor (p. 221)

Table layouts
A table layout is a group of tables or templates included in a drawing of a certain type and size.
The layout defines:
• Which tables are included in the drawing
• Where the tables are located in the drawing
• How much space Tekla Structures leaves between the drawing frame and views and
between the drawing views
The example below illustrates the relationship between the table layout and drawing views.The
drawing views are shown in blue, and the elements of table layout in red.
Margins Key plan
Spaces Revision table
Top view Material list
Front view Drawing title block
Section views A-A and B-B Table layout consisting of several tables
Frame Foldmarks
Table layouts define the background of the drawing, not the number or location of the drawing
views to include. You can use the same table layout with different drawing sizes, or give each
drawing size its own table layout. For example, if the number of views changes in a drawing
and Tekla Structures chooses a new drawing size, Tekla Structures may also choose another
table layout.
Drawing frames and foldmarks are not included in the table layout. You
define them when you print drawings.

Tables
The term table refers to various elements of the drawing layout, such as:
• Tables (such as revision tables)
• Title blocks
• Lists (such as part and bolt lists)
• General notes
• Key plans
• DWG files
Tables contain information on model objects. If you change the model, Tekla Structures
updates the contents of the affected drawings and tables. You can create tables in Template
Editor. In Template Editor, the tables are referred to as templates.
See also Modifying tables in Template Editor (p. 221)

Creating a new layout

If none of the layouts meet your needs, you can create a new one from scratch or on the basis of
an existing layout.
To create a layout:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > Drawing Layout.
• To create a new layout from scratch, enter the name of the new layout in the box
under the list of layouts and click Add.
The new layout is empty.
• To create a new layout on the basis of an existing layout, select a layout from the list
and enter a new name for the new layout in the box under the list of layouts and
click Add.
The contents of the new layout are the same as those of the layout you selected from
the list.
3. Define and add table layouts and fixed and calculated sizes in the empty layout or
modify the table layouts and fixed and calculated sizes in the layout you created on the
basis of an existing layout.
4. Close the dialog box.
Now you can use the new layout in your drawings.
See also Defining fixed sizes (p. 216)

Defining calculated sizes (p. 216)

Defining fixed sizes
Fixed drawing sizes have a specific size (width and height), and table layout. You can use fixed
sizes in autosizing.
To define the fixed drawing sizes in a layout:
2. Select the layout and click Fixed sizes.
3. Select a fixed size from the list.
To create a new size, enter its name and click Add.
4. Enter the width and height.
5. Select the table layout.
6. Click Update.
7. Repeat steps 3–6 for each fixed size.
Use fixed sizes when you print drawings to small (A4 and A3) printing
devices.
Single-part and assembly drawings also typically use fixed drawing
sizes.
See also Creating a new layout (p. 215)

Defining calculated sizes

You can use calculated drawing sizes to define the rules Tekla Structures follows when it
automatically adjusts drawing size. You can also connect layouts to drawing sizes that meet
certain criteria.
To set the rules and connect layouts:
2. Select the layout and click Calculated sizes.
3. Use Increasing step to define the interval by which Tekla Structures increases the
drawing size when it needs to.
This can be set individually for drawing width and height. You can also define the
maximum size of the drawing. If the drawing exceeds the width or height limit you set
here, Tekla Structures uses an oversize sheet with no table layout.
4. You can connect a layout to drawings that meet one of the following size criteria:
• Size A4 for drawings exactly this size
• Size A3 for drawings exactly this size
• Height = A3 for drawings having the same height as an A3 sheet (=297 mm)
• Height > A3 for drawings with a larger height than A3.
For each size, Tekla Structures makes the table layouts available depending on the
layout you select.
See also Creating a new layout (p. 215)

Creating and adding a new table layout

To create a new table layout and add in a layout:

2. Select a layout from the list of layouts.
3. Click Table layouts to display the Table Layouts dialog box.
4. Enter the name of the new table layout in the box under the list of table layouts and click
Add.
5. Enter the margins between the drawing views and frame, and the spaces between two
drawing views in Margins and Spaces.
6. Click Tables to display the Tables dialog box.
7. Add tables in your table layout, define the location, scale and transparency settings for
each table.
8. After each table you add, click Update.
9. Click OK or Apply to save the table layout.

Setting margins and spaces for drawing views (p. 217)
Setting margins and spaces for drawing views

Table layouts define the margins between the drawing views and the frame, and the space
between two drawing views.
A margin is the width or height from the outermost drawing views to the drawing frame. A
space is the horizontal or vertical distance between two drawing views.
To set the margins and spaces:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > Drawing Layout....
2. Select a layout and click Table layout.
3. Select the table layout on the list.
4. Enter margins and spaces.
5. Click Update.
6. Repeat step 3–5 for each table layout.

Adding tables in table layout

To add tables (Template Editor templates) in a table layout:
1. Open the Tables dialog box by clicking Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings >
Drawing Layout > Table Layout > Tables.
2. On the Available tables list, double-click each table you want to include in the table
layout.
You can also use the arrow buttons to add and remove tables.
3. Set the table properties as required for each table you add.
4. Click Update.
See also Setting the properties of tables in a table layout (p. 218)
Modifying tables in Template Editor (p. 221)

If you replace a table in a table layout
When you delete a table from a table layout and replace it with a new one:
1. Define the location of the new table relative to the remaining tables. The new table does
not automatically inherit the location of the deleted table.
2. Check that the remaining tables do not use the deleted table as their reference.
If they do and you delete the table, you cannot see any tables at all in the layout.

Setting the properties of tables in a table layout

You can define the location of each individual table in a table layout by binding it to the
drawing frame or to another table.
In the illustration below, the lower right corner of the drawing title (table) is bound to the lower
right corner of the drawing frame (reference).
To set the properties of a table in a table layout:

1. Open the Tables dialog box by clicking Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings >
Drawing Layout > Table Layout > Tables.
2. Select a table from the Chosen tables list.
3. Choose one of the table corners as its reference point, and select the check box in that
corner.
4. In the Reference box, select the reference object, which can be another table included in
the table layout, or the drawing frame.
5. Choose the reference point of the reference object, and select the check box in the
appropriate corner.
6. In the Vector between corners fields, define the horizontal and vertical distance of the
table from the reference object. By default, Tekla Structures places tables side by side.
7. In Scale, set the size of the table relative to its original size. Each table can have its own
scale.
8. If you want the table to be transparent, select the Transparent check box. A transparent
table can overlap with another table, view or drawing object.
9. Click Update.
10. Repeat steps 2–9 for all the tables on the Chosen tables list.
11. Click OK or Apply to save the table layout.

You can also position a table in the midpoint of a frame or table
boundary by selecting two reference points, for example, the lower left
and right corners.
If you do not use the right combinations of reference points for tables
and binding objects, Tekla Structures may position drawing tables
outside the drawing.

Tables (p. 215)
Key plans
A key plan or a key plan view is a small “map” in a drawing that indicates the location of an
assembly, a cast unit, or a part in the model. The key plan contains the model grid and the
assembly, cast unit, or part shown in the included drawing view.
See also Adding a key plan in a table layout (p. 220)

Setting up a drawing view to be used as a key plan (p. 220)

Adding a key plan in a table layout
Before you start, create a drawing that you want to use as a key plan.
To add a key plan in a layout:
2. Select the layout you want to modify and click Table layout.
3. Select the table layout you want to modify and click Tables.
4. From the Available tables list, double-click Key plan. The Drawing List is displayed.
5. Select the drawing that you want to use as a key plan drawing and click OK.
6. From the Chosen tables list, select Key plan and set the key plan properties.
7. Click Update.
8. Click OK.
Now you can create a drawing using the layout containing the key plan.Check the drawing
properties before creating a drawing to ensure that you are using the correct layout.
Setting up a drawing view to be used as a key plan

Tekla Structures automatically includes the correct part in the key plan. Drawings that contain
only one view of the correct scale can be used as a key plan. Tekla Structures only uses the
view from the drawing, and the view position, drawing size, and templates are not relevant to a
key plan drawing.
Set the view properties for the key plan as follows:
1. Open the drawing and double-click the view boundary to open the View Properties
dialog box.
2. Set the desired drawing scale. Tekla Structures uses the scale of the key plan view in
every drawing using it. You cannot change the scale in the layout properties.
3. Set the drawing view boundaries so that all parts are visible. To do this, change the x
min, x max, y min, and y max, or select the view and drag the boundary using the
handles on the x and y axes of the view.
4. Set other view properties. All the changes you make in the properties affect the key plan.
For example, if you set part and bolt marks to be visible, they will also be visible in the
key plan.
5. Click Modify.
In drawings that will be used as key plans do not filter out anything
indicated with not. Tekla Structures clears the not check boxes in the
filter automatically when the key plan is inserted in another drawing.
See also Key plans (p. 219)
Adding a DXG/DXF file in a table layout

You can add DWG and DXF files in table layouts. For example, you might have some details in
a DWG or DXF file that you want to show in certain types of drawings and therefore add the
file in the layout.
To add a DWG or a DXF file in a table layout:
2. Select the layout you want to modify and click Table layout.
3. Select the table layout you want to modify and click Tables.
4. From the Available tables list, double-click DWG/DXF.
5. Select the DWG/DXF file that you want to add.

6. Click OK
7. From the Chosen tables list, click the selected DWG/DXF file and set the properties as
required.
For example, set the required scale and define the location for the DWG/DXF file in the
drawing. Test the layout before using it to ensure, that the settings are as you wish.
8. Click Update.
9. Click OK.
Now you can create a drawing using the layout containing the DWG/DXF file. Check the
drawing properties before creating a drawing to ensure that you are using the correct layout.
Adding links to DWG and DXF files (p. 137)
Modifying tables in Template Editor

If you need to modify the tables in the drawing, open them in Template Editor (TplEd). In the
Template Editor, tables are called templates.
To modify a table:
1. In a drawing, double-click the table you want to modify.
2. Tekla Structures shows the following message:
3. Click OK. Tekla Structures starts the Template Editor, and the selected table is displayed.
You can only open tables with templates created or saved in Template
Editor version 3.2. or later.
For more information about the Template Editor, see the TplEd help, which is also available in
PDF format on the Tekla Structures installation DVD.
See also Template Attributes Reference Guide

Tables (p. 215)
Selecting a new layout

You can define which layout to use in a drawing in drawing properties. The layout information
is stored in the drawing property files. We recommend that you create as many property files as
you need different layouts for the different drawing types.
To select a new layout and save the layout information in a drawing property file:

2. Load the drawing property file that you want to change by entering its name next to
Load and clicking Load.
3. Click Layout.
4. In the Layout box, select a new layout.
5. Click OK.
6. Click OK to save the changed properties and close the drawing properties dialog box.
Now you can create a drawing using the drawing property file that contains the changed layout
information.
See also Drawing layout (p. 213)
6.4 Drawing size and drawing view scale

Tekla Structures offers you several combinations of settings that you can use for defining the
drawing size and the drawing view scale. Which one you use, depends on your needs:
• If you always want to use a certain scale, then you would set the exact scale to be used and
let Tekla Structures automatically select the drawing size that suits the selected scale. This
is called autosizing. You can define different scales for main views and section views. All
main views in a drawing automatically use the same scale unless you fine-tune individual
views manually.
• If you always need to use a certain drawing size, for example, A3, A4 or A1, then you
would set the size and let Tekla Structures automatically select the drawing view scale that
suits the selected size. This is called autoscaling.
• If you are not bound to any specific drawing sizes or drawing view scales, you might want
to let Tekla Structures take care of both.
See also Modifying automatic drawing settings (p. 203)

Using exact drawing size and automatic drawing view scale (p. 223)
Using exact drawing view scale and automatic drawing size (p. 222)
Autoscaling and autosizing drawings (p. 224)
Using exact drawing view scale and automatic drawing size

You can let Tekla Structures find appropriate sizes and table layouts for drawings. This is very
useful if, for example, the number, size, or location of drawing views might change. Tekla
Structures automatically updates drawings to adapt to these changes by using different drawing
sizes and table layouts.
To define exact drawing view scale and let Tekla Structures automatically select the suitable
drawing size:
2. Click Layout.
3. Optional: On the Drawing size tab, change the layout in Layout, if necessary.
The different layouts contain different sets of table layouts and drawing sizes Tekla
Structures uses for finding the suitable drawing size.
4. Set Size definition mode to Autosize.

5. Select the set of drawing sizes for Tekla Structures to use. You have the options:
• Calculated sizes: Use this when you want to define the rules that Tekla Structures
follows when it tries to adjust the drawing size.
• Fixed sizes: Use this when you want Tekla Structures to use fixed drawing sizes A2,
A3, A4, etc.
• Calculated/fixed sizes: Use this when you want Tekla Structures to select the
smallest of the suitable sizes.
6. Go to the Scale tab and set Autoscale to No.
This way Tekla Structures uses the exact scale that you have set for the main views and
section views.
8. Click View or Section view, go to the Attributes tab and set the desired Scale.
When you create the drawing, Tekla Structures creates the views using the selected scale and
selects the smallest drawing size where the views fit in the drawing. Tekla Structures may also
need to change the table layout to adapt to the new drawing size. It will then use another
appropriate table layout within the same layout specified in drawing properties.
See also Drawing size and drawing view scale (p. 222)
Using exact drawing size and automatic drawing view scale

If you need to use a specific size in your drawings, for example, A3, A2, or A1, you can specify
the exact size, and let Tekla Structures automatically select the suitable drawing view scale.
The drawing size should always be smaller than the actual paper size to
accommodate printer margins.
To use exact size and automatically scale the view:

2. Click Layout and on the Drawing size tab, set Size definition mode to Specified size
and enter the drawing size.
3. Select the table layout.
4. On the Scale tab, set Autoscale to Yes.
5. Set the main view and section view scales. Enter the denominators of scales and separate
them with spaces. For example, enter "5 10 15 20" for the scales 1/5, 1/10, 1/15, and 1/
20.
6. Select the Scale change mode, which defines the relationship between the scales of
main and section views within a drawing. The options are:
• main = section: The scales of the main and section view are equal.
• main < section: Main view scales are smaller than section view scales.
• main <= section: Main view scales are smaller than or equal to section view scales.
8. Click View > Attributes (or Section View > Attributes) and enter the preferred scale.

Tekla Structures creates the drawing using the specified size. Tekla Structures first tries to use
the preferred scale for the drawing views, then the alternative scales, and selects the largest
possible scale.
Autoscaling and autosizing drawings

If you are not bound to any specific drawing sizes or drawing view scales, you can let Tekla
Structures take care of both.
To use both autoscaling and autosizing:
2. Click View/Section view > Attributes and set the preferred drawing view scale.
4. Click Layout > Scale and set Autoscale to Yes.
5. Set the alternative main view and section view scales.
6. Select the Scale change mode.
7. Enter the Preferred size.
8. On the Drawing size tab, set Size definition mode to Autosize.
9. Select the set of drawing sizes (Calculated sizes, Fixed sizes or Calculated/Fixed
sizes).
When you use both autoscaling and autosizing at the same time, Tekla Structures follows the
steps below:
• First Tekla Structures tries to find a drawing size where the drawing contents fit by first
trying to use the exact scale defined in View/Section view > Attributes and the smallest
drawing size defined in the current layout (Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings >
Drawing Layout > Calculated/Fixed sizes).
• Then Tekla Structures increases the drawing size until it reaches the Preferred size
defined in Layout > Scale.
• If the drawing fits with the original scale, Tekla Structures tries to increase the scale using
the alternative main and section view scales you defined in Layout >Scale.
• If the drawing does not fit to any of the defined scales, Tekla Structures starts to increase
the drawing size until the contents fit, using the fixed or calculated sizes or both. When
necessary, Tekla Structures changes to another appropriate table layout within the current
layout.
• When the views fit, Tekla Structures begin to increase the scale again so that the final
drawing uses the largest possible scale.

6.5 Automatic drawing views
Automatic drawing views are views that Tekla Structures creates when it creates a drawing.
Define the desired drawing view properties before you create drawings. All views of a view
type share the same properties.
Most of the drawing view properties are common to all view types and drawing types. There
are some exceptions, for example, section views have some additional properties.
You can edit drawing view properties on both the drawing level and view level. This section
describes the view settings that you can adjust already before creating a drawing. You can fine
tune some view-specific properties once you have created drawings.
See also Selecting the views to create (p. 225)

Selecting the view projection type (p. 226)
Setting the location of end views and section views (p. 228)
Including single-part drawings in assembly drawings (p. 230)
Part orientation in drawing views (p. 231)
Showing neighbor parts in views (p. 236)
Unfolding polybeams (p. 239)
Undeforming deformed parts (p. 240)
Showing part openings and recesses (p. 241)
Combining section views (p. 243)
Setting section view depth (p. 244)
Setting section and end view direction (p. 244)
Setting the section mark cutting line (p. 248)
Selecting the views to create

Before you create single-part, assembly or cast unit drawings, select the views that you want to
include automatically. You can also add views to existing drawings.
When you create general arrangement drawings, you select the created
views after initiating the creation command.
To select the views to be created:

2. Click View.
3. On the Views tab, select the main views and section views you want to create.

• If you select off, Tekla Structures does not create the view, but dimensions the parts
in the available views. If you set all four main views off, Tekla Structures will still
create a front view.
• If you select on, Tekla Structures always creates the view, even if it was not
necessary in order to show the dimensions. For section views, Tekla Structures
creates one additional section view showing the middle of the main part. For end
views, Tekla Structures creates end view from one end of the main part.
• If you select auto, Tekla Structures creates the view if it is necessary in order to
show the dimensions. For section views, Tekla Structures creates the necessary
number of views to show all the dimensions. For end views, Tekla Structures also
creates another end view from the other end of the main part, if there are dimensions
at that end.
4. On the Views tab, set 3D view to On to create a 3D view, and select one of the options in
3D view attributes.
There are ready-made properties for different types of drawings that you can use when
creating the corresponding drawing. The automatically created 3D views have the same
filtering type as the other drawing views.
The Current attributes option creates the 3D view based on the values you last entered
in the Rotation around (in 3D views) fields in the View properties dialog box.
5. Click OK.
See also Automatic drawing views (p. 225)

Selecting the view projection type

Projection type defines how Tekla Structures places the projections of a part in cast unit,
single-part, and assembly drawings. Projection type affects the order of the views in the
drawing.
To set the projection type:
2. Click Layout and go to the Other tab.
3. Select one of the following:
• First angle (also referred to as European projection).
• Third angle (also referred to as American projection).
4. Click OK.
First-angle projection:

Third-angle projection:


Setting the location of end views and section views

You can select to always place section views and end views next to the main view in a single-
part, assembly, or cast unit drawing, or in any empty location in the drawing.
To set the location of section views and end views:
3. Set Align end views with main view to Yes to place the views next to the main view.
4. Set Align section views with main view to Yes to place the views next to the main
view.
5. Click OK.
If you select No, Tekla Structures places the section and end views in
any available location.

Examples
End and section views in any location (No
selected).
End and section views beside the main view (Yes

selected).


Including single-part drawings in assembly drawings

You can include single-part drawings of the individual parts that make the assembly in
assembly drawings. You can use existing single-part drawings on the Drawing List or create
new drawing views.
To include single-part drawings:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > Assembly Drawing.
2. Click Layout... and go to the Other tab.
3. Set Include single-parts to Yes. This activates the Single-part attributes list.
4. From the Single-part attributes list, select the desired drawing properties to be used in
the single-part view. Current is the default.
5. Click OK.
The value of the advanced option
XS_USE_EXISTING_SINGLE_PART_DRAWINGS_IN_ASSEMBLY_DRAWINGS affects how Tekla
Structures creates the single-part views. If it is set to TRUE, Tekla Structures will use single-part
drawings in the Drawing List. If it is set to FALSE, or if there is no existing single part drawing
for a given part, a new view will be created according to the Include single parts setting. The
default value is FALSE.
See also XS_SINGLE_CENTERED_SCREW

XS_SINGLE_CLOSE_DIMENSIONS
XS_SINGLE_CLOSE_SHORT_DIMENSIONS
XS_SINGLE_COMBINE_DISTANCE
XS_SINGLE_COMBINE_MIN_DISTANCE
XS_SINGLE_COMBINE_WAY
XS_SINGLE_DIMENSION_TYPE
XS_SINGLE_DRAW_PART_AS
XS_SINGLE_EXCLUDE
XS_SINGLE_FORWARD_OFFSET
XS_SINGLE_NO_SHORTEN
XS_SINGLE_ORIENTATION_MARK
XS_SINGLE_PART_EXTREMA
XS_SINGLE_PART_SHAPE
XS_SINGLE_SCALE
XS_SINGLE_SCREW_INTERNAL
XS_SINGLE_SCREW_POSITIONS
XS_SINGLE_USE_WORKING_POINTS
XS_SINGLE_X_DIMENSION_TYPE
XS_USE_EXISTING_SINGLE_PART_DRAWINGS_IN_ASSEMBLY_DRAWINGS
XS_NO_END_VIEWS_TO_INCLUDED_SINGLE_DRAWINGS
Adding single-part views in assembly drawings (p. 89)

Part orientation in drawing views
In single-part, assembly, and cast unit drawings, you can adjust the orientation of the parts in
the drawing views by selecting an appropriate coordinate system and by rotating the parts. You
can also separately set the viewing direction of columns, beams and bracings in assembly
drawings. The project north setting also affects part orientation.
Contour plates are always oriented so that the longest side of the plate is
parallel to the x axis. You can affect this setting with the advanced
options XS_POLYGON_SQUARE_CORNER_PREFERENCE_FACTOR and
XS_POLYGON_PERPENDICULAR_EDGE_PREFERENCE_FACTOR.
See also XS_POLYGON_SQUARE_CORNER_PREFERENCE_FACTOR

XS_POLYGON_PERPENDICULAR_EDGE_PREFERENCE_FACTOR
Changing the coordinate system (p. 233)
Rotating parts (p. 233)
Setting viewing direction for columns in assembly drawings (p. 235)
Setting viewing direction for beams and bracings in assembly drawings (p. 235)
Orientation settings (p. 407)
Coordinate system
The coordinate system defines:
• The angle from which the part, assembly, or cast unit is viewed.
• How the part, assembly, or cast unit is rotated.
• The orientation of the dimensions in the drawing view.
Tekla Structures allows you to use the coordinate systems described in the following:
• local
Tekla Structures uses the local coordinate system of the main part. The x axis of the part is
parallel to the x axis of the drawing, and the starting point (the end point created first) of
the part is on the left. The starting point is marked with yellow, and the end point created
second is marked with pink.
• model
Tekla Structures uses the global coordinate system. The part has the same position in the
drawing as it has in the model. This is one option when you want to show columns
vertically.

You can use the model option to display sloping parts in position. Tekla
Structures cannot display horizontally skewed parts.
• oriented
Tekla Structures uses the local coordinate system of the main part, but the coordinate
system is oriented so that the x axis of the part points to the right even if the part was
created from right to left.
• horizontal brace
Tekla Structures automatically rotates the drawing views so that the front view is from the
top of the model. This is used for skewed braces. It automatically rotates the front view
around the x axis.
• vertical brace
Tekla Structures automatically rotates the drawing views so that the front view is in the
same plane as the brace in the model. This is used for skewed braces. It automatically
rotates the front view around the x axis.
• For concrete parts, the option Fixed rotates the front view so that it shows the casting
direction (the face that is top in form) of the concrete part, if it is defined in the model.
See also Casting direction

Changing the coordinate system (p. 233)

Changing the coordinate system

You change the coordinate system currently in use.
To change the coordinate system:
2. Click View and go to the Attributes tab.
3. In Coordinate system, select one of the available coordinate systems.
4. Click OK.
See also Casting direction

Coordinate system (p. 231)
Rotating parts
In addition to setting the coordinate system, you can also rotate the part, assembly, or cast unit
in the drawing view around its local axes.
To rotate a part:
3. In Rotate coordinate system, specify the angle:
• With the X axis, you can rotate in steps of 90 degrees (0, 90, 180, 270).
• With the Y axis, you can rotate in steps of 180 degrees (0, 180).
• With the Z axis, you can specify any angle.
4. Click OK.

See examples of rotating around the x axis below:
0 degrees
90 degrees
180 degrees
270 degrees
See an example of rotating the same part 180 degrees around the y axis below.

See an example of rotating the same part 30 degrees around the z axis below.

Setting viewing direction for columns in assembly drawings

In assembly drawings, you can define the front view direction separately for columns. The
default value for the front view direction for columns is As beam and bracing.
To define the direction of the front view for columns in assembly drawings:
1. Click Tools > Options > Options... > Orientation marks.
2. Use the Columns in assembly drawing options to set the front view direction:
• If you have set the coordinate system to local in the view properties, Tekla
Structures uses the coordinate system of the column when setting the direction of
the front view.
• If you have set the coordinate system to oriented, the column is in a horizontal
position, and the direction of the front view is the option you select (North, East,
South or West).
• If you have set the coordinate system to model, the column is in a vertical position,
and the direction of the front view is the option you select (North, East, South or
West).
3. Click OK.
See also Orientation settings (p. 407)

Setting viewing direction for beams and bracings in assembly draw-

ings
In assembly drawings, you can define the front view direction separately for beams and
bracings.
To define the viewing direction for beams and bracings:
1. Click Tools > Options > Options... > Orientation marks.
2. Use the Beams and bracings in assembly drawing options to set the front view
direction. The default value is North or east.
• If the beam or bracing is parallel to the x axis in the model, it is also parallel to the x
axis in the drawing.
• If you have set the coordinate system to model, and the beam or bracing is sloped, it
is also sloped in the drawing.
3. Click OK.
See also Orientation settings (p. 407)

Showing neighbor parts in views

Neighbor parts refer to (optionally shown) parts that are close to the part that is depicted in a
drawing. Depending on settings this may be parts somehow connected to the part in question,
or just parts that happen to be close by.You can select which neighbor parts to show in views
and also automatically extend the view boundary if necessary.
To control which neighboring parts to show and extend the view boundary automatically:
2. Click Neighbor part > Visibility.
3. Select the parts that you want to show using the following options:
• None does note show neighbor parts.
• Connected parts shows all parts connected to the model object.
• Connecting parts shows only the parts the model object is connected to.
• All components combines the Connected parts and the Connecting parts
options.
• By extreme show all parts within the boundaries of the main and secondary part.
• Main parts shows only neighbor parts that make the main part of an assembly or a
cast unit.
• Secondary parts shows only neighbor parts that are secondary parts of an
assembly or a cast unit.
• Both shows both main and secondary parts.
• Skew parts: Yes shows skew parts as neighbor parts in the drawing, No does not.
4. Click OK.
5. Click View (or Section view) > Attributes.
6. Enter a value by which to extend the view in the View extension for neighbor parts
box.
7. Click OK.

Shortening and lengthening parts

Use the shortening functionality in the model to make the part longer or shorter in the drawing
than in the model. This can be useful for adding length to concrete precast parts in the cast
condition while the model stays in the erected state. The most common use for this is to
account for prestressing elastic shortening, where the part actually shrinks a fraction of an inch
after casting and after the strands are cut.
You can shorten and lengthen parts also in drawing views.
See also Shortening a part in the model (p. 237)

Lengthening a part in the model (p. 237)
Lengthening shortened parts in drawing views (p. 239)

Shortening a part in the model
To shorten a part in the model:
1. Double-click a part to open the part properties dialog box.
2. Go to the Deforming tab.
3. In the Shortening field, define the degree of shortening.
4. Click Modify.
When drawings are created, Tekla Structures decreases the true length of the part by the value
defined in the Shortening field. Shortening is applied linearly along the length in drawings.
To show the dimensions of the shortened part correctly in the drawings,

set the setting Undeformed to Yes in the View Properties dialog box of
the drawing.
Limitations • The shortening functionality is available only in the Full and Precast Concrete Detailing
configurations.
See also Shortening and lengthening parts (p. 236)

Lengthening a part in the model

To have a concrete part lengthened in cast unit drawings, you must enter a negative value for
shortening in the part properties dialog box.
To lengthen a part in drawings:
3. In the Shortening field, enter a negative value.
For example, -20 would result in a part that is cast 20 units longer than the part in the
model.
4. Click Modify.
See also Shortening and lengthening parts (p. 236)
Shortening parts in drawing views

If parts are quite long and do not include any important details, you can shorten them in
drawing views.
To shorten parts:
2. Click View and go to the Shortening tab.
For section views, click Section view.
3. In Minimum cut part length and Space between cut parts, select how to cut the middle
regions of the parts in drawing views.
The Minimum cut part length defines the minimum cut length of the section of the
shortened part to show. The Space between cut parts defines the distance between cut
parts.
4. Set Cut skew parts to Yes to also cut skew parts in views.
5. Click OK.

• You can show view shortening symbols in drawings by setting the
advanced options
and
XS_DRAW_HORIZONTAL_VIEW_SHORTENING_SYMBOLS_TO_PART
S to TRUE through Tools > Options > Advanced Options... >
Drawing Properties.
• You can also control the appearance of the view shortening symbol
with the advanced options XS_SHORTENING_SYMBOL_COLOR,
XS_SHORTENING_SYMBOL_LINE_TYPE, and
XS_SHORTENING_SYMBOL_WITH_ZIGZAG.
Example Below is an example of a cut part.
Below is an example of using the advanced option

XS_DRAW_VERTICAL_VIEW_SHORTENING_SYMBOLS_TO_PARTS.

See also XS_DRAW_HORIZONTAL_VIEW_SHORTENING_SYMBOLS_TO_PARTS
Lengthening shortened parts in drawing views

After Tekla Structures has scaled drawing views and selected the drawing size, it may stretch
shortened views to fill up empty areas of the drawing.
To lengthen shortened parts:
3. Set Expand shortened parts to fit to Yes.
4. Click OK.
See also Shortening parts in drawing views (p. 237)

Unfolding polybeams
You can unfold polybeams and bent plates in single-part drawings. Tekla Structures unfolds the
polybeams according to unfolding parameters, which define the location of the neutral axis
when a profile is unfolded.

To unfold a polybeam:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > Single-Part Drawing....
3. Set Unfolded to Yes.
4. Click OK.
Tekla Structures unfolds the polybeam when you create the single-part drawing.
Limitations • You can unfold only beams that have been created with the Polybeam command. You
cannot unfold beams created with the Curved beam command, for example.
• You can unfold a polybeam only on one plane.
See also Unfolding parameters

Undeforming deformed parts

Deformed parts are parts that have been warped or cambered in the model. You can undeform
these parts and show the developed (undeformed) shape of deformed parts in drawings. You
may want to do this, for example, if you want a concrete part to have two states: as erected (in
the model view) and as cast (in the drawing view).
To create drawings that show the developed shape of parts and hide the part deformations:
3. To hide deforming angles and cambering, set Undeformed to Yes.
4. Click OK.
When you create the drawing, it shows the developed shape and dimensions of the part.
See below for an example of a undeformed part in a drawing.
See below for an example of a warped part in a drawing.

Shortenings are hidden if you set Undeformed to No.
See also Warping concrete parts

Cambering parts
Showing part openings and recesses

You can select if you want to show symbols for part openings and recesses (blind holes) in
drawings.
To show openings and recesses in parts in a drawing:
3. Set Show openings/recess symbol to Yes.
4. Click OK.
By default, Tekla Structures displays openings and recesses in the following way:
Type of opening Shown as Examples

Hole through a part Hole symbol
Recess in the front Recess symbol and

face of a part bounding lines shown as
unbroken lines
Recess in the back Recess symbol and

face of a part bounding lines shown as
dashed lines
Remember to switch
hidden lines on for parts.

Additional ways for showing symbols in openings and recesses (p. 242)
Additional ways for showing symbols in openings and recesses

Tekla Structures contains some advanced options that give you more variety for showing the
openings and recesses in your drawings:
To use other types of symbols in openings and recesses, and to show symbols in openings
located at part borders and in part corners:
1. Go to Tools > Options > Advanced Options > Drawing Properties.
2. Set the variable XS_USE_CROSS_FOR_OPENING_SYMBOL to FALSE to show the
openings and recesses as follows:
3. Set XS_USE_OPENING_SYMBOL_IN_BORDER_HOLES to TRUE to show opening/recess

symbols in openings located at part borders. This advanced option is by default set to
FALSE. The symbol used depends on the setting of the advanced option
XS_USE_CROSS_FOR_OPENING_SYMBOL.
4. Set XS_USE_OPENING_SYMBOL_IN_CORNER_HOLES to TRUE to show opening/recess

symbols in openings located in part corners. This advanced option is by default set to
FALSE. The symbol used depends on the setting of the advanced option
XS_USE_CROSS_FOR_OPENING_SYMBOL.

See also XS_USE_CROSS_FOR_OPENING_SYMBOL
XS_USE_OPENING_SYMBOL_IN_CORNER_HOLES
XS_USE_OPENING_SYMBOL_IN_BORDER_HOLES
Combining section views

To combine section views, you need to define a distance to use. If two sections are within this
distance, and if the combined view will show all dimensions clearly, Tekla Structures combines
the section views.
You can additionally control which section views get combined using the
advanced option XS_DRAWING_CUT_VIEW_COMPARISON_CRITERIA.
To define the distance:

2. Click Section view.
3. On the Attributes tab, set Distance for combining cuts.

Distance = 1’- 4" for combining
Section depth = 4"
Combined sections
See also Section view properties (p. 360)

XS_DRAWING_CUT_VIEW_COMPARISON_CRITERIA
Setting section view depth

You can set the depth separately for section views. The Section depth defines the positive and
negative depth of the section view when sections are not combined.
To set the view depth:
3. Set the section view depth in Section depth.
The Section depth defines the positive and negative depth of the section view when
sections are not combined.

Setting section and end view direction

You can define the direction of section views separately for left, middle, and right section
views.
To set the section view direction:
3. On the Attributes tab, set the direction (left or right) of the Left section, Middle
section and Right section.
The arrow in the section view symbol indicates the direction of the section view, as shown
below:
Left section, right direction

Middle section, right direction
Right section, left direction
See also Showing section and end view direction marks (p. 245)
Showing section and end view direction marks

You can display view direction marks in section views and end views.
To show view direction marks:
3. On the View Label tab, select the appropriate options in the Section views and End
views.
4. Define the height of the symbol and text label in Height.
5. Click OK.
The view direction is shown with a small symbol (optionally with a text label) around the end
or section view.
You can define the symbol in Tools > Options > Advanced Options... >
Drawing Properties by using the following advanced options:
• XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_BACK
• XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_BOTTOM
• XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_FRONT
• XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_TOP
The default symbol is xsteel@66.
See also XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_BACK

XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_BOTTOM
XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_FRONT
XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_TOP

Setting section and end view direction (p. 244)
Adding view labels for main and section views

All drawing views can have view labels, which may contain text and symbols. You can set the
contents of the main view labels and section view labels before you create the drawing, and
adjust them after you have created the drawing.
You can set detail view labels after you have created the drawing, before
or after creating the detail view.
To set the main view and section view label:

2. Click View (or Section view).
3. Go to the Label (or View label) tab.
4. Click the ... button next to A1 - A5 to open the Mark Contents dialog box and select the
elements to be included in the view label mark, and set the appearance, position and
alignment of the mark.
The illustration in the view properties dialog box is only one way to position the label
text. When you modify the positioning, the illustration in the dialog box does not
change.
5. Select the view label Symbol you want to use in the label.
You can simply use only a label or add a symbol in it. You can also set the color, size,
line length and the position of the view label.
6. Select the Vertical (Above or Below) and Horizontal (Center by view frame or Center
by view restriction box) position of the view label.
7. Click OK.
See below for an example of a section view label.

Modifying view label marks

To modify the view label mark contents and position:
2. Click View (or Section view).
3. Go to the Label (or View label) tab.
4. Click the ... button next to A1 - A5 to open the Mark Contents dialog box
5. On the Content tab, select the elements that you want to include in the view label mark.

6. Optional: Select an element from the list and click Add frame and select the frame Type
and Color.
You can set these individually for each element.
7. Optional: Select an element from the list and select the text Color, Font and Height.
8. Go to the Position tab and set the text position, horizontal and vertical offset, and the
text alignment.
Text positioning depends on whether you use a symbol or not.
9. Click OK.
10. Click OK also in the view label properties dialog box.
See also View, section view and detail view label mark elements (p. 389)
Displaying main view names automatically

You can set names for front, back, top and bottom views. Tekla Structures displays the view
names automatically if you include the element View name in the view label mark.
To set the view names:
2. Click View.
3. Go to the Label tab.
4. Enter the names for the labels in the Front view, Top view, Back view, and Bottom
view fields.
5. Click one of the ... buttons next to A1 - A5 to open the Mark Contents dialog box.
6. Include the view name in the mark by selecting View name from the list of elements.
7. Click OK.

Modifying section marks

Section marks are located at the ends of the section cut lines. You can adjust the appearance and
contents of the section marks.
To modify the section mark before you create drawings:
3. Go to the Section mark tab.
4. Click the ... button next to A1 - A5 to open the Mark Contents dialog box.
5. On the Content tab, select the elements that you want to include in the mark.
6. Optional: Select an element from the list and click Add frame and select the frame Type
and Color.
7. Optional: Select an element from the list and select the text Color, Font and Height.
8. Go to the Position tab and select the side to show the text, the text position, the
horizontal and vertical offset, and the text rotation options.

9. Click OK.
10. In the Symbol area, define the section mark symbols.
You can select from a list of predefined arrow symbols or use your own custom symbol.
The symbol properties can be defined separately for both the left and the right section
mark symbols. Also set the color, size and position of section mark symbols.
11. Click OK in the section view properties dialog box.
See below for examples how the section marks could look.
See also Mark appearance properties (p. 376)

XS_SECTION_SYMBOL_LEFT_ARROW_SYMBOL
XS_SECTION_SYMBOL_RIGHT_ARROW_SYMBOL
Setting the section mark cutting line

To set the section mark cutting line:
3. Go to the Cutting line tab.
4. Set the section mark line length and offset (distance between the mark and the section).
Line length
Offset
5. Click OK.
See also Section view properties (p. 360)


6.6 Placement settings
When you create a drawing, Tekla Structures uses predefined rules for positioning annotation
objects such as text, marks, dimensions, and welds. These annotation objects are placed in the
first suitable position considering the areas protected in the drawing, the placing settings
defined for the annotation objects, and other object-type-specific location settings defined in
the annotation object properties.
You can also define placement settings for the annotation objects that you add manually.
Protection settings are also considered in the final drawings.
When you create a drawing, Tekla Structures places the views in the drawing according the
settings in the drawing layout and view properties. In final drawings, you can select whether to
use fixed or free view placement of views.
See also Protected areas (p. 249)

Protecting areas in drawings (p. 251)
Defining free or fixed placement of views (p. 253)
Placement properties for annotation objects (p. 403)
Protected areas
You can define protected areas in drawings to prevent text, marks or dimensions from being
placed there. When Tekla Structures places text, marks, dimensions or other annotation objects
in a drawing, it first checks the protection settings.
The drawing property files contain predefined protection properties, which you may change.
You can also change the protection settings in a final drawing.
Below is an example of the protection properties dialog with some explanations of the
selections.

With a selection like this, text and marks may overlap with part corners
and edges, but not with part.
With a selection like this, dimensions may not overlap with other
dimensions (arrowheads, lines and values).
The columns define the areas to be protected, see descriptions below:
Column Description
Part corners
Part edges
Part
Text, mark or weld mark
Dimension arrowhead
Dimension line
Dimension value
Cutting line
Section mark
Weld arrow
Weld mark text
The rows in the New area define which objects, or object components, Tekla Structures cannot
place in the protected areas.

Row Description
Text, mark or weld mark
Dimension arrowhead
Dimension line
Dimension value
See also Protecting areas in drawings (p. 251)

Protecting areas in drawings

To protect areas in the drawings:
2. Click Protection. The protection properties dialog box is displayed.
This dialog box is similar for all drawing types.
3. Select check boxes to indicate the areas that you want to protect from text, marks, weld
marks, other annotation objects, dimension arrowheads, dimension lines or dimension
values.
For example, to prevent text, marks, dimension and other annotation objects from being
placed over the inside area of parts, select the third check box on the first row. The first
row defines the placement of annotation objects, and the icon above the third check box
indicates the inside area of parts. With this setting, Tekla Structures may place
annotation objects on the corners and edges of parts.
4. Click OK.
If you clear the first two columns of check boxes, Tekla Structures does
not protect part corners and edges. This increases drawing speed and
decreases the memory requirements. You can still protect these areas by
using the third column of check boxes for part protection.

Protected areas (p. 249)
Defining placement settings for annotation objects

You can define a place for the annotation objects before and after creating a drawing.
To define placement settings for annotation objects before you create a drawing:
2. In the drawing properties dialog box, click a button for the object type you want to
adjust, for example Part Mark.
3. On the appropriate tab, click the Place button to open the Placing dialog box.
4. Adjust the placement settings. The options available in the dialog box vary depending on
the annotation object type.

• In Minimal distance, enter the closest distance Tekla Structures should use to place
the drawing object.
• In Search margin, enter the minimal is the distance within which Tekla Structures
searches for a space to place the object.
• Select the Quarter to define the areas Tekla Structures searches for a space to place
the object.
5. Click OK.
6. Click OK.
To move marks away from each other, use Search margin, not Minimal
distance. Keep the minimal distance setting as small as possible to
reduce the possibility of marks overlapping.

Defining placement settings for dimensions

You can control the space between parallel dimension lines and the location of the dimension
in relation to the object it is dimensioning. You can also select whether to place short dimension
text inside or outside the dimension.
To adjust dimension placement:
1. Go to the General tab of the Dimensions dialog box.
2. In Dimension lines spacing, enter the desired space between two parallel dimension
lines.
3. Select whether to place short dimension text inside or outside of the dimensions from the
Short dimension list.
4. Click Place.
5. In Minimal distance, enter the closest distance Tekla Structures should use to place the
dimension.
6. If Tekla Structures cannot place the dimension at the minimal distance, it moves the
dimension by the value you enter in the Search margin box. Tekla Structures tries to
place the dimension using the Search margin value until it finds a place for the
dimension.
7. Click OK to close the dimension placing dialog box.
8. Click OK.
Remember that in addition to dimension placement settings, the

placement is also affected by Protection properties.Tekla Structures uses
the protection properties to prevent marks and dimensions from being
placed in protected areas.

Protecting areas in drawings (p. 251)
General dimension properties (p. 361)
Setting dimension appearance (p. 255)

Defining free or fixed placement of views
You can always maintain the views in the same location or let Tekla Structures find a suitable
place for the view during drawing updates using the Fixed or Free placement setting.
To define free or fixed placement of views:
1. Double-click a view frame in an open drawing.
2. Select one of the following options:
• Set Place to Fixed to always keep the view in the same location when you update
the drawing.
• Set Place to Free to let Tekla Structures find a suitable place for the view when you
update the drawing.
3. Click Modify.
Arrange Drawing Views only affects views where the Place is set to
Free. Fixed views are not moved.
6.7 Automatic dimensions

Dimensions are associative annotation objects that represent building object measurements.
Dimensions are more than lines or vectors; they are interactive callouts of geometry.
Automatic dimensions are dimensions that Tekla Structures creates in a drawing based on the
dimensioning properties.
There is a multitude of options for controlling automatic dimensions in Tekla Structures. Very
often modifying one dimension setting affects how other settings work. You may want to
experiment with these settings.
You can define automatic dimension settings before you create a drawing and you can also
modify the settings after you have created the drawing.
Adding automatic dimensions (p. 253)
Adding automatic dual dimensions (p. 254)
Dimensioning single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings (p. 278)
Dimensioning general arrangement drawings (p. 262)
Adding automatic dimensions

You can set up dimensions for drawings in the drawing properties dialog box. Tekla Structures
contains pre-defined dimension settings that are stored in drawing properties files. These
settings affect how Tekla Structures automatically creates appropriate dimensions. You can also
create new property files.
To adjust the automatic dimensioning settings:
2. Load the drawing properties that you want to change by selecting the drawing property
file from the list next to the Load button and clicking Load.

3. Do both of the following:
• Adjust the dimension appearance by clicking Dimensions.
• Select the dimensions to create and adjust the related settings by clicking
Dimensioning.
4. When you are ready, click OK in each of the subdialogs to save the changes and close the
subdialog.
5. Click OK to save the settings in the drawing property file.
See also Setting dimension appearance (p. 255)

Adding automatic dual dimensions

You can create dual dimension tags automatically in all types of drawings.
To create dual dimensions:
1. Click Tools > Options > Options... > Drawing dimensions.
2. Set the units, format and precision.
3. Select the drawing types where you want to have the dual dimensions.
4. Click OK.
When Tekla Structures creates the drawing, it adds in the lower dimension tag in the selected
unit and format, and puts the text DIMENSION in the middle dimension tag in the Dimension
Limitations Dual dimensions can only be shown in relative and US absolute dimensions, but not in absolute
dimensions.
Example Below is an example of dual dimensions using the units mm and format ###.
See also Automatic dimensions (p. 253)

Setting dimension appearance
Tekla Structures contains several settings that affect the appearance of the dimensions. For
example, you can control the dimension type, unit, precision, format, location, and size, and the
appearance of texts, lines and arrows in the dimension.
The settings that affect the dimension appearance are located in the Dimensions dialog box.
See also Setting dimension text, line and arrow appearance (p. 255)
Selecting the dimension type (p. 255)
Changing the appearance of absolute dimensions (p. 256)
Selecting the dimension format, precision and units (p. 256)
Grouping large dimension values (p. 257)
Setting the dimension extension line length (p. 257)
Example: Sloped dimension texts (p. 261)
Showing plate side marks automatically (p. 260)
Changing the prefix in radial dimensions (p. 261)
Dimension appearance properties (p. 364)
Setting dimension text, line and arrow appearance

You can set the dimension text, line and arrow to look in the way you want.
To set the appearance of dimension texts, lines and arrows:
1. Go to the Appearance tab of the Dimensions dialog box.
2. In the Text area, select the color, height, font, frame and place for the mark.
3. In the Line, Arrow area, select the dimension line color, arrow type, and arrow size.
4. Click OK.

Selecting the dimension type

You can select the dimension type for straight dimensions and angle dimensions. There are two
basic types of straight dimensions: relative and absolute. Relative dimensions show linear
distances or length, whereas absolute dimensions show the linear distance from an origin point
to the dimensioned edge, hole, etc. All other dimension types are combinations of the two basic
types. The angle option you select affects the appearance of the bevel angles, skew position,
and skewed bolt groups.
To select the dimension type to use:
2. Use the Straight box to set the dimension type for straight dimensions.
3. If you want to override the straight dimension setting for horizontal dimensions, select
an option from the In x direction box.
The options are the same as in the Straight box. If you use the blank option, Tekla
Structures also uses the Straight option settings for horizontal dimensions. The x
direction usually means dimensions parallel to the drawing x axis.
4. Use the Angle box to set the dimension type for angle dimensions.
5. In Triangle base length, set the base length of a triangle.
6. Click OK.

XS_ANGLE_DIMENSION_SYMBOL_SIZE_FACTOR
XS_NO_BOLT_ANGLE_DIMENSIONS
XS_NO_RELATIVE_SHAPE_DIMENSIONS
XS_SINGLE_NO_RELATIVE_SHAPE_DIMENSIONS
XS_USABSOLUTE_TO_RELATIVE_LIMIT
XS_NO_BOLT_ANGLE_DIMENSIONS
Changing the appearance of absolute dimensions

You can select whether to show zero at the zero point of the absolute dimensions, and also
change the orientation of the absolute dimensions.
To change the appearance of absolute dimensions:
1. Click Tools > Options > Options, and go to the Drawing dimensions page.
2. Set Show zero in absolute dimensions to No if you do not want to show zero at the
zero points in absolute dimensions.
Yes is the default value.
3. Set Draw absolute dimension values parallel to dimension line to Yes to show
dimensions parallel to dimension lines in absolute dimensions.
No is the default value.
4. Click OK.
Example In the following example, dimensions are parallel to the dimension line and zero is shown at
the zero point.

Selecting the dimension type (p. 255)
Selecting the dimension format, precision and units

You can select the desired format, precision and units for the dimensions.
To select the format, precision and units:
2. In the Format area, select the desired format for straight dimensions from the Straight
list and for angle dimensions from the Angle list.
Tekla Structures uses the information in brackets only when necessary. For example, the
dimension 500.00 is shown as 500 if you use the format ###.[#] and as 500.0 if you use
the format ###.#.
3. In the Precision area, select the desired precision for straight dimensions from the
Straight list and for angle dimensions from the Angle list.
4. Select the units to be used from the Units list.
5. Click OK.

If you want to change the decimal separator, use the advanced option
XS_DIMENSION_DECIMAL_SEPARATOR in Tools > Options >
Advanced Options > Dimensioning: General.
See also XS_DIMENSION_DECIMAL_SEPARATOR

Dimension format, precision and unit properties (p. 363)
Grouping large dimension values

You can select to group long dimension values to display them more clearly.
To group dimension values:
2. To group dimensions, set Use grouping to Yes.
If you select No, Tekla Structures does not use any grouping.
3. Click OK.
4. Go to Tools > Options > Advanced Options > Dimensioning: General and enter
values for the following advanced options:
• Use XS_DIMENSION_DIGIT_GROUPING_CHARACTER to specify the separator
character to be used in large dimension values. If you enter a comma (,), then
154321 is displayed as 154,321. If no character is specified, Tekla Structures uses a
space.
• Use XS_DIMENSION_DIGIT_GROUPING_COUNT to specify the number of digits
after which a separator character will be inserted in dimension values. If you enter
3, then 154321 is displayed as 154 321.
See also XS_DIMENSION_DIGIT_GROUPING_CHARACTER

XS_DIMENSION_DIGIT_GROUPING_COUNT
Setting the dimension extension line length

You can adjust the length of the dimension extension lines.
To adjust the extension line settings:
2. Select an option from the Short extension line list:

Options Description
No
Yes Use this option to create extension lines all of the same
length:
On grid lines only Use this option to use the short extension line
automatically if a dimension line falls on a grid line.
Elsewhere the extension line will be as usual.
3. Click OK.
4. Optional: To adjust the extension line lengths, go to Tools > Options > Advanced
Options > Dimensioning: General and use the following advanced options:
• Use XS_DIMENSION_EXTENSION_LINE_TOWARD_FACTOR to adjust the length of
the dimension extension lines that are facing towards the dimension points.
• Use XS_DIMENSION_EXTENSION_LINE_AWAY_FACTOR to adjust the length of the
dimension extension lines that are facing away from the dimension points.

Text height * 1.0 (default)
Text height * 1.5 (default)
See also XS_DIMENSION_EXTENSION_LINE_TOWARD_FACTOR

XS_DIMENSION_EXTENSION_LINE_AWAY_FACTOR
Creating exaggerated dimensions

You can exaggerate narrow dimensions to make them easier to read.
When you enable the exaggeration of the dimensions, a dimension that is narrower than the
defined limit is enlargened. If there are many exaggerated dimensions, Tekla Structures
arranges them automatically. Setting exaggeration consists of selecting the exaggeration limit
and the exaggeration scale, enabling the exaggeration and setting the direction, origin, width,
position and height for the exaggerated dimensions.
To set the exaggeration:
1. Go to Tools > Options > Options > Drawing dimensions.
2. Enter the exaggeration limit in the Exaggeration limit box.
3. Select Paper or Model as the exaggeration scaling method.
If you select Paper, the exaggeration limit is multiplied by the view scale. For example,
if the scale is 1:10 and the limit is 10 mm, then all the dimensions smaller than 100 mm
are exaggerated. If you select Model, and the scale is 1:10, all the dimensions smaller
than 10 mm are exaggerated regardless of the drawing scale.
4. Click OK.
5. Go to the Advanced tab of the Dimensions dialog box.
6. Enable the exaggeration by setting Exaggeration to Specified.
7. Set the values for Direction, Origin, Width, Position and Height.
8. Click OK.
Limitations Exaggeration works only if the dimension extension lines are long. Set Short extension line to
No on the General tab of the Dimension Properties dialog box.
Example See below for an example of exaggerated dimensions:

Showing plate side marks automatically

You can create plate side marks on dimension leader lines. The plate side marks indicate
whether the dimension point is to the face or center of the part, for example, a plate, web, or
flange.
To create plate side marks:
1. Go to the Advanced tab of the Dimensions dialog box.
2. In Plate side marks > Type, select Automatic.
3. Select the color, offset and the size of the mark.
4. Click OK.
Below is an example of plate side marks.

See also XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_LEFT
XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_CENTER
XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_RIGHT
Changing the prefix in radial dimensions

By default, the prefix of radial dimensions is R, for example, R 200.
To change the dimension prefix to Radius 200, for example:
1. Open the file dim_operation.ail located in ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\messages\.
2. Change the prefix R to Radius:
string dim_operation_dim_radius_prefix{ ... entry = ("enu", "R
");};
string dim_operation_dim_radius_prefix{ ... entry = ("enu",
"Radius ");};
Example: Sloped dimension texts

Tekla Structures aligns slightly sloped dimension text. If the dimension text is sloped more than
a certain degree, Tekla Structures flips the text.
Below is an example of a dimension text that is slightly sloped.
Below is an example of a flipped dimension text.
The default limit for aligning dimension text is 0.1 (5.74 degrees). When this limit is
exceeded, the dimension text gets flipped. To adjust this limit, use the advanced option
XS_TEXT_ORIENTATION_EPSILON.
See also XS_TEXT_ORIENTATION_EPSILON

Dimensioning general arrangement drawings
In the general arrangement drawing General - Dimensioning Properties dialog box, you can
create part, grid and overall dimensions, and control the way they are created. You can
experiment with different combinations of options to achieve different kinds of dimensioning
effects.
To select the dimensions to create and modify the dimensioning settings:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > General Arrangement Drawings.
2. Click Dimensioning.
3. Select the dimensions to create and modify the related settings.
4. On the Grids tab, adjust the grid dimension and overall dimension creation settings and
the positioning of the dimensions.
5. On the Parts tab, adjust part dimension creation settings and the positioning of the
dimensions.
6. Click OK.
You can adjust the general arrangement drawing properties further in the
final drawing using the semi-automatic GA Dimensioning Settings.
See also Object groups in dimensioning (p. 262)

Dimensioning object groups on different dimension lines (p. 262)
Example: Grid and overall dimensions (p. 263)
Example: Using maximum leader line length options (p. 264)
Example: Dimensioning parts partly outside the view (p. 265)
Example: Limiting the number of outside dimensions (p. 266)
Example: Part dimension positioning (p. 267)
Grid and overall dimensioning properties (GA drawings) (p. 374)
Semi-automatic dimensioning of general arrangement drawings (p. 115)
Part dimensioning properties (GA drawings) (p. 374)
Object groups in dimensioning

In dimensioning of general arrangement drawings, the term object group refers to objects that
have been grouped together for the purpose of dimensioning object groups on different
dimension lines.
You can use the object groups (selection filters) that you have created when modeling, or create
the necessary groups through the Parts tab in the General - Dimensioning Properties dialog
box. For example, you might want to create an object group for beams of a certain size.
See also Filtering objects

Dimensioning object groups on different dimension lines (p. 262)
Dimensioning object groups on different dimension lines

You can use object groups to specify different objects to be dimensioned on different
dimension lines.
To do this:
1. Go to the Parts tab of the General - Dimensioning Properties dialog box.

2. Add the desired object groups to dimensioning rules by clicking Add rule and selecting
the rule from the list box in the Object group column.
3. Optional: You can create object groups of your own by clicking Object group. For
example, add object group rules for beams of different size.
4. For each object group, select the Positioning option, the Horizontal position option,
and the Vertical position option, depending on the type of the objects in the group. For
example, for beam groups, set Horizontal position to Left side to position the beam
dimensions to the left side of the grid.
5. Optional: In the Tag column, enter the text tags that you want to display for the different
object groups in the drawing. For example, enter the size of the beam.
Example In this example, we created several beam groups, one for each beam size to be dimensioned,
then selected the position for the dimensions in different groups, and added tags to be displayed
for each group:
See also Object groups in dimensioning (p. 262)

Example: Grid and overall dimensions

Here are some examples of what the grid and overall dimensions look like with different
settings selected on the Grid tab.

Dimensioning setting Example
Grid line dimensions is set to
On, Overall dimension to On,
Horizontal to Left, and Vertical
to above.
Grid line dimensions is set to

On, Overall dimension to Off,
Horizontal to Left, and Vertical
to above.
See also Grid and overall dimensioning properties (GA drawings) (p. 374)
Example: Using maximum leader line length options

Here are some examples of how the dimensions are positioned when you have set values for the
Maximum leader line length options on the Parts tab.

A value has been set for
Outside dimensions.
A value has been set for

Inside dimensions.
See also Part dimensioning properties (GA drawings) (p. 374)

Example: Dimensioning parts partly outside the view

Here is an example of how the parts are dimensioned if you set the option Include parts not
entirely in the view to On on the Parts tab.

Example: Limiting the number of outside dimensions

Here is an example of what the part dimensions look like when you have set 3 as the value for
the option Maximum number of outside dimensions on the Parts tab. Tekla Structures has
created three dimensions outside the grid and the fourth inside the grid.

Example: Part dimension positioning

Here are some examples of how the part dimensions are positioned in general arrangement
drawings with different positioning settings selected on the Parts tab.
In the example below, Positioning is set to Inside grid, which places all dimensions next to or
near the grid.

In the example below, Positioning is set to Outside grid, which places all dimensions outside
the grid.

In the example below, Horizontal position is set to Left side, which places all dimensions to
horizontal parts to the left of the grid.

In the example below, Horizontal position is set to Right side, which places all dimensions to
horizontal parts to the right of the grid.

In the example below, Horizontal position is set to Distributed to both sides, which places all
dimensions to horizontal parts to the side of the grid nearest the part they are dimensioning.

In the example below, Vertical position is set to Above, which places all dimensions to vertical
parts above the grid.

In the example below, Vertical position is set to Below, which places all dimensions to vertical
parts under the grid.

In the example below, Vertical position is set to Distributed to both sides, which places all
dimensions to vertical parts to the side of the grid nearest the part they are dimensioning.

Example: Dimensions in anchor bolt plans

Below are examples of what the dimensions in anchor bolt plans look like in different
situations.
First an example of a typical situation, where all columns are located in grid line intersections:

If the column reference point is not located on the grid line, Tekla Structures dimensions the
reference point automatically relative to the grid lines. See the example below.
If the column is rotated relative to the drawing, the rotation is also automatically dimensioned.
See the example below.

If you set the advanced option
XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_USE_VIEW_COORDSYS_FOR_BOLT_DIMENSIONS to FALSE and
create the drawing, all dimensions are in the drawing coordinate system.
See also XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_USE_VIEW_COORDSYS_FOR_BOLT_DIMENSIONS


Dimensioning single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings
In the Dimensioning dialog box, you can control what gets dimensioned and how in a drawing.
You can experiment with different combinations of options to achieve different kinds of
dimensioning effects.
To select the dimensions to create and modify the dimensioning settings:
2. Click Dimensioning.
3. Select the dimensions to create and adjust the related settings.
The available tabs and settings depend on the drawing type:
• On the Part dimensions tab, select the part dimensions to create and adjust the
related settings.
• On the General tab, adjust settings related to minimizing the number of views,
dimension type, combining dimensions, closing dimensions, limit for dimensioning
asymmetry in secondary parts, forward offset, grid dimensions, dimension position,
and part marks on dimension line.
• On the Position dimensions tab select the position dimensions to create. They
indicate the position of parts in relation to the main part or to work points.
• On the Bolt dimensions tab, select the bolt dimensions to create, combine bolt
dimensions and select the side for the dimension.
• On the Dimension grouping tab, group dimensions and adjust the related settings.
• On the Sub-assembly tab, create dimensions for parts in sub-assemblies and adjust
the related settings.
• On the Reinforcement dimensions tab, create dimensions for reinforcing bar
groups in cast unit drawings, add dimension marks and adjust the related settings.
4. Click OK.
See also Creating minimum and maximum position dimensions for bolts (p. 279)
Grouping identical objects to the same dimension line (p. 279)
Modifying dimensions for unfolded parts (p. 280)
Creating elevation dimensions (p. 281)
Dimensioning plates (p. 282)
Dimensioning profiles (p. 284)
Creating check dimensions (p. 285)
Example: Part dimensioning (p. 287)
Example: Position dimensioning (p. 290)
Example: Closing dimension (p. 295)
Example: Forward offset (p. 300)
Example: Recognizable distance (p. 300)
Example: Combining bolt group dimensions (p. 299)
Example: Preferred dimension side (p. 301)
Example: Reinforcement dimension (p. 302)
Example: Bolt dimensioning (p. 290)
General dimensioning properties (p. 366)
Part dimensioning properties (p. 370)
Position dimensioning properties (p. 368)
Bolt dimensioning properties (p. 371)

Dimension grouping properties (p. 372)
Sub-assembly dimensioning properties (p. 373)
Reinforcement dimensioning properties (p. 373)
Creating minimum and maximum position dimensions for bolts

By default, Tekla Structures does not create minimum and maximum position dimensions for
bolts.
To create minimum and maximum position dimensions for bolts:
1. Go to Tools > Options > Advanced Options > Dimensioning: Bolts
2. Set XS_BOLT_POSITION_TO_MIN_AND_MAX_POINT to TRUE.
The examples below show a maximum bolt dimension of 40:
Setting Example
Before setting the advanced option.
After setting the advanced option to

TRUE.
XS_BOLT_POSITION_TO_MIN_AND_MAX_POINT
Grouping identical objects to the same dimension line

You can group identical parts, bolts, components and cuts or shapes to the same dimension line.
You also have the option to include automatic dimension tags to grouped dimensions.
To group identical objects to the same dimension line:
1. In the Dimensioning Properties dialog box, go to the Dimension Grouping tab.
2. In Activate dimension grouping, select the objects that you want to group.
3. Highlight a row (Parts, Bolts, Components or Cuts/Shapes in the Activate
dimension grouping list and select the elements by which you define the identical
conditions in grouping properties.
4. In Automatic tagging, select the appropriate options to include automatic dimension
tags.

5. If you want Tekla Structures to update dimension grouping automatically, set the option
Update grouping when model changes to Yes.
6. Click OK.
You can change the dimension tag contents in the final drawing and
include some other elements in the tag.
See also Dimension grouping properties (p. 372)

Modifying dimensions for unfolded parts

In single-part drawings, you can control the dimensions Tekla Structures adds for unfolded
parts that have been created using View > Attributes > Unfolded =Yes. Use the advanced
options in Tools > Options > Advanced Options > Dimensioning: Unfolding.
To control the dimensions:
To Do this
Create bending line dimensions for Set the advanced option
unfolded parts. XS_DRAW_BENDING_LINE_DIMENSIONS_IN_U
NFOLDING=TRUE.
Create angle and radius dimensions for Set the advanced option
unfolded parts. XS_DRAW_ANGLE_AND_RADIUS_INFO_IN_UNF
OLDING=TRUE.
Set a prefix text for an angle dimension. Set the advanced option
XS_ANGLE_TEXT_IN_UNFOLDING_BENDING_L
INE_DIMENSIONING=A=.
Set a prefix text for a radius dimension. Set the advanced option
XS_RADIUS_TEXT_IN_UNFOLDING_BENDING_
LINE_DIMENSIONING=R=.

To Do this
For angle text dimensions, show the Set the advanced option
interior angle instead of the exterior XS_DRAW_INSIDE_ANGLE_IN_UNFOLDING=TR
angle. UE.
Set the format for angle text. Set the advanced option
XS_UNFOLDING_ANGLE_DIM_FORMAT=1.
###= 0
###[.#]= 1
###.#=2
###[.##]= 3
###.##= 4
###[.###]=5
###.###= 6
### #/#= 7
###/##.###= 8
Set the accuracy of the angle text. Set the advanced option
XS_UNFOLDING_ANGLE_DIM_PRECISION=10.
0.00= 1
0.50= 2
0.33= 3
0.25= 4
1/8= 5
1/16= 6
1/32= 7
1/10= 8
1/100= 9
1/1000= 10
See also Selecting the dimension format, precision and units (p. 256)
Creating elevation dimensions

You can add elevation dimensions (level marks) in your drawings for the start and end points of
parts. Tekla Structures dimensions elevations relative to a reference point, which you can
change. For example, if the elevation is 5000 mm, and you set the reference point to 200, the
elevation changes to 4800 mm. You can also change the elevation dimension prefix, which in
the English version is EL by default.
To change the reference point and create elevation dimensions using another prefix:
1. Go to the Position dimensions tab, and set Elevation dimensions to On.
2. Click OK.
3. In the drawing properties dialog box, click View > Attributes.
• To use a specific value, select Specified from the Datum point for elevations list
and enter a value in the Datum level field.
• To measure reference points relative to the view plane, select View plane from the
Datum point for elevations list.

5. Click OK.
6. To change the prefix, open the dim_operation.ail file in any text editor. This file
is located in the Tekla Structures/<version>/messages/ folder. Replace
EL with a new prefix on the following line in the file:
string dim_operation_dim_elevation_prefix{entry = ("enu",
"EL");};
Shortening value added in the user-defined properties of a part affects

also elevation dimensions.
Example
Limitations Tekla Structures creates elevation dimensions for skew parts only if the parts are in the same
position in the drawing as they are in the model. This means that the coordinate system must be
set to model.
If you are using local, oriented, or brace coordinate systems, Tekla Structures does not draw
the elevation dimensions for skewed parts by default. If you want to create elevation
dimensions, set the variable XS_DRAW_SKEWED_ELEVATIONS to TRUE in Tools > Options >
Advanced Options > Dimensioning: Parts. See below for an example of an elevation
dimension for a skew part.
See also Part orientation in drawing views (p. 231)

XS_DRAW_SKEWED_ELEVATIONS
Adding level marks (p. 128)
Dimensioning plates
You can dimension plates to the edge that is nearest to the neighbor part, to the leading or
trailing edge of beams or columns, or using their original reference points in the model using
the advanced options in Tools > Options > Advanced Options... and go to the Dimensioning:
Parts.

To dimension plates:
To Do this
Dimension the plates to the edge Set the advanced option
that is nearest to the neighbor part. XS_PART_POSITION_TO_EDGE_NEAREST_TO_NEIGH
BOUR to TRUE.
Dimension the plates to the 1. Disable the advanced option
leading edge of the beams. XS_USE_PLATE_SIDE_POSITIONING by deleting
the value from the box.
2. Set the advanced option
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_EDGE_NEAREST_TO_N
EIGHBOUR to FALSE.
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_LEADING_EDGE to
TRUE.
leading edge of the columns. XS_USE_PLATE_SIDE_POSITIONING by deleting
EIGHBOUR to FALSE.
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_LEADING_EDGE_IN_C
OLUMNS_ALSO to TRUE.
trailing edge. XS_USE_PLATE_SIDE_POSITIONING by deleting
EIGHBOUR to FALSE.
3. Disable the advanced option
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_LEADING_EDGE by
deleting the value from the box.
4. Disable the advanced option
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_LEADING_EDGE_IN_C
OLUMNS_ALSO in the same way.
Dimension the plates using their 1. Set the advanced option
original reference points in the XS_PART_POSITION_TO_EDGE_NEAREST_TO_N
model. EIGHBOUR to FALSE.
If you have created one plate from 2. Set the advance option
left to right and another from right XS_USE_PLATE_SIDE_POSITIONING to TRUE.
to left, Tekla Structures
dimensions them differently in
drawings.
Below is an example of dimensioning all plates to the leading edge.

See also XS_USE_PLATE_SIDE_POSITIONING
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_EDGE_NEAREST_TO_NEIGHBOUR
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_LEADING_EDGE
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_LEADING_EDGE_IN_COLUMNS_ALSO
Dimensioning profiles
You can affect the way Tekla Structures dimensions different profiles in drawings. For
example, you can have Tekla Structures always dimension round bars to the middle of the
profile and large I profiles to the top.
To define dimension settings for profiles, you need to edit the dimension planes table
dim_planes_table.txt.
To define dimensioning settings for profiles:
1. Go to Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > Dimensioning: Parts.
2. Set the advanced option XS_PART_DIMENSION_PLANES_TABLE as follows:
XS_PART_DIMENSION_PLANES_TABLE=%XS_PROFDB%\dim_planes_table.txt
This variable defines the path to the part dimension planes table.
3. Open the dim_planes_table.txt file in any text editor, for example, Microsoft
Notepad. The file is located in ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\<environment>\profile.
4. Edit the file contents.
5. To use the new settings in drawings, restart Tekla Structures and recreate the drawings.
Changing the file does not automatically update existing drawings.
Example Here is an example of a dimension planes table:
dim_planes_table.txt
FLANGE WEB
ProfType,MaxSize, middle,right, left, middle, right, left
========================================================
1, 300.0, TRUE*, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, TRUE*, TRUE
7, -1.0, TRUE*, FALSE, FALSE, TRUE*, FALSE, FALSE
The line beginning with 1 means that Tekla Structures always dimensions I profiles (ProfType
= 1) smaller than 300 mm (MaxSize = 300) to the middle of the flange and to the right edge of
the web, no matter how the part was created.

The line beginning with 7 means that Tekla Structures always dimensions round tubes
(ProfType = 7) to the middle of the profile
The ProfType numbers run in the same order as the profiles in the Profile catalog:
• 1 = I profile
• 2 = L profile
• 3 = Z profile
• 4 = U profile
• 5 = plate
• 6 = round bar
• 7 = round tube
• 8 = square pipe
• 9 = C profile
• 10 = T profile
• 15 = ZZ profile
• 16 = CC profile
• 17 = CW profile
• 51 = polygon_plate etc.
The value -1.0 in the MaxSize indicates that there is no size limit for the profile.
The asterisk after TRUE indicates that it is the default value.
See also XS_I_PROFILE_CENTER

XS_DO_NOT_CREATE_PROFILE_DIMENSIONS_FOR_CONCRETE
XS_PART_DIMENSION_PLANES_TABLE
Check dimensions
Check dimensions are additional dimensions you can use for checking, usually in finer text
than other dimensions. They are not required for fabrication or erection, and they are mainly
used for checking detailing, not for assembling parts.
Tekla Structures uses work points to create check dimensions. Work points can be either the
points between which the part was originally created, or the intersection point of the reference
lines of the parts. The reference line location depends on the part position depth set in the part
properties dialog box. If it is middle, the reference line is the center line, if it is front, the line is
located in the part front edge, etc.
Knock-off dimension is a special type of check dimension that dimensions the distance from
work points to the end of the part.
See also Creating check dimensions (p. 285)
Creating check dimensions

You can create additional dimensions to check the accuracy of dimensions.
To create check dimensions, do any of the following:

Number in
To Do this the figure
Create check dimensions between Click Dimensioning > Part
outermost work points. dimensions and set Main part work
points to Yes.
Create check dimensions between Click Dimensioning > Bolt
outermost bolts. dimensions and set Extreme bolts
to Assembly or Main part.
Create check dimensions from Click Dimensioning > Bolt
outermost work point to first bolt. dimensions and set Extreme bolts
to Assembly or Main part and
Extreme bolts to work points to
Yes.
Create horizontal and vertical check Click Dimensioning Position
dimensions between the work points dimensions and set Main part
in a skewed brace. skew position to Yes.
Create check dimensions between Click Dimensioning > Position
the work points, such as the dimensions and set Position bolts
intersections of main and neighbor to or Position parts to Working
part reference lines. points or Both.
Create check dimensions to the bolt Click Dimensioning > Position
hole locations in the main part. dimensions and set Main part bolt
position to On.
Create knock-off dimensions. Click Dimensioning > Part
dimensions and set Knock-off
dimensions to On.

To change the appearance of the check dimensions and the type of the
knock-off dimension to use, click Dimension in the drawing properties
dialog box and go to the Advanced tab.
See also Check dimensions (p. 285)

Example: Part dimensioning

Here are some examples of what the part dimensions look like with different settings selected
on the Part dimensions tab.

Internal dimensions set
to None
Internal dimensions set

to All.
Overall dimensions
Main part shape (Shape

dimensions) set to On.

Bevel dimensions set to
On.
Bevel angle set to Angle

of cut.
Bevel angle set to Angle

of beam.
See also Part dimensioning properties (p. 370)


Example: Bolt dimensioning
Here are a couple of examples of what the bolt dimensions look like with different settings.

Main part bolt internal
dimensions is set to All on the
Bolt dimensions tab of the
Dimensioning Properties dialog
box.
All bolt and hole dimensions are

shown in the front view of the
main assembly. The elements
Gage of outstanding leg (GOL)
and Center-to-center distance
(C/C or Gage) have been added in
a bolt and hole mark in Bolt
mark... > Content.
See also XS_GAGE_OF_OUTSTANDING_LEG_STRING

XS_CENTER_TO_CENTER_DISTANCE_IN_ONE_PART_STRING
XS_CENTER_TO_CENTER_DISTANCE_IN_TWO_PARTS_STRING
Example: Position dimensioning

Here are some examples of what the position dimensions look like with different settings
selected on the Position dimensions tab.

Dimensioning
setting Example
Position parts to is set
to None.
Position parts to is set

to Main part.
Position bolts to is set

to Working points.

Dimensioning
setting Example
Secondary part is
dimensioned By bolts.
Secondary part is
dimensioned By parts.
Secondary part is
dimensioned By both.
Secondary part is
dimensioned By bolts.
Secondary part
dimension direction
is Neighbor part.
Position from is set to
Work points.
Running dimensions start from the intersection of the main

and secondary part (=work point)
Dimensions are aligned with the neighboring part

Dimensioning
setting Example
Main part bolt
position is set to Off.
(Main part bolt
internal dimensions
is set to Internal on the
Bolt dimensions tab.)
Main part bolt

position is set to On.
(Main part bolt
internal dimensions
is set to Internal on the
Bolt dimensions tab.)
Main part skew

position is set to Yes.
Skew position is set to

Angle.

Dimensioning
setting Example
Centered part is set to
Internal.
Centered part is set to

Position.
Center bolt is set to

Internal.
Center bolt is set to

Position.
See also Position dimensioning properties (p. 368)


Example: Closing dimension
Here are some examples of how Tekla Structures creates dimensions with different options
selected in the Close dimensions area on the General tab.
Closing option Example

Close dimensions is set to No.

Closing option Example
Close dimensions is set to All.
Short dimensions is set to No.
See also General dimensioning properties (p. 366)

Example: Combining dimensions

Here are some examples of how Tekla Structures combines dimensions with different options
selected on the General tab.

Combining option Example
Option No prevents dimensions
from being combined.
Option 1 combines part position

dimensions with part internal
dimensions, and bolt group internal
dimensions with bolt edge distances.
Bolt position dimensions are not
combined with bolt internal
dimensions.
Option 2 combines the part position

dimension with part internal
dimensions and bolt group internal
dimensions. Bolt internal
dimensions are combined with bolt
position dimensions. Edge distances
are shown separately.

Option 3 combines bolt internal
dimensions and position dimensions
in the same dimension line.
Option 4 combines bolt group

position dimensions with part
position dimensions. Part and bolt
internal dimensions are not
combined with this option, but bolt
internal dimensions are combined
with bolt edge distances.
Option 5 combines internal

dimensions and the position
dimension of bolt groups where
there are several bolt groups.
Option 4.5 uses a combination of option 5 for the main part and a combination of option 4
for the secondary parts.
Distance 5’-0

Distance 1’-0
Min distance 5’-0
Min distance 5"

Example: Combining bolt group dimensions

For dimensioning and marking purposes, Tekla Structures treats bolt groups located close
together as one group on the basis of the minimum number of dimensions to combine and
format selected on the Bolt dimensions tab. See an example below:
Bolt group 1
Bolt group 2

See also Bolt dimensioning properties (p. 371)
Example: Forward offset

Here are some examples of how Tekla Structures locates dimensions with different forward
offset values set on the General tab.
Forward offset setting Example

Forward offset greater than the 1’-8
dimension to the hole group.
Forward offset set to a smaller

value.

Example: Recognizable distance

Here is an example of how Tekla Structures uses the Recognizable distance setting. If you set
value for Recognizable distance on the General tab, and the asymmetry of the parts is smaller
than the distance you entered, Tekla Structures represents it using a dimension.
This setting is used, when the Internal dimension is set to Necessary. Recognizable distance
dimension is not necessarily needed, if the part can be assembled correctly without it.
A typical example is a rectangle that is almost as long as it is wide.

Example: Preferred dimension side

You can set the preferred dimension side for parts and bolts on the Part dimensions tab and
Bolt dimensions tab.The examples below show how the different settings for Preferred dim
side look like for part dimensions.
See also Part dimensioning properties (p. 370)


Example: Reinforcement dimension

Here are some examples of how Tekla Structures creates dimensions for reinforcing bar groups
with different options selected on the Reinforcement dimensions tab.
Settings Example
Dimensions for reinforcing bar
groups is set to On, no dimension
tags selected in Mark location.

groups is set to On, dimension
tags selected in Mark location.

groups is set to On, dimension
tags selected in Mark location,
Close dimensions to binding
geometry is set to Yes.
See also Reinforcement dimensioning properties (p. 373)

6.8 Automatic marks

Marks are associative annotation objects that are used for identifying an individual object. A
mark displays a set of properties that the user has selected. Automatic marks are marks that
Tekla Structures creates in a drawing based on the mark properties.
The options in the mark properties dialog box define how Tekla Structures shows marks in
drawings. Mark properties are generally the same for each of the available mark types.
Tekla Structures creates the following automatic marks:
• Part marks
• Bolt marks
• Neighbor part marks
• Connection marks
• Reinforcement marks
• Surface treatment marks
• Dimension marks
• View and section view label marks, and section marks
See also Adding automatic marks (p. 303)


Adding automatic marks

You can set up marks for building objects in the drawing properties dialog box. You can save
mark settings in a drawing property file for later use.
To adjust the automatic mark settings for building objects:
2. Load the drawing properties that you want to change by selecting the drawing property
file from the list next to the Load button and clicking Load.
3. Click the button of the mark type you want to modify, for example, Part mark.
4. For some marks, you need to select from the list the object that you are defining the
marks for. For example, for part marks, you can define part mark options independently
for main and secondary parts and for sub-assembly main and secondary parts.
5. Add elements in the mark by double-clicking the elements in the Available elements
list.
6. Use the Move up and Move down buttons to place the elements in the order you want.
7. Modify the appearance, placement and visibility settings on the Content and General
(or Appearance) tabs.
8. When you are ready, click OK in the subdialog to save the changes and close the
subdialog.
9. Click OK to save the settings in the drawing property file.
Example This is an example of a part mark.
Assembly position
Size
Mark frame
Profile
Element frame
Length
See also Automatic marks (p. 302)

Mark location (p. 315)
Adding templates in marks (p. 304)
Adding user-defined attributes and template attributes in marks (p. 307)
Defining contents of bolt mark Size element using advanced options (p. 308)
Adding pull-out pictures in reinforcement marks (p. 310)
Adding symbols in marks

All types of building object marks and view label marks allow you to add symbols in them. You
can select the symbol file to be used and the symbol to be added in the mark.
1. Depending on the properties dialog you are in, do one the following:
• In the building object mark properties dialog box, click Symbols in the Available
elements list.
• In the view or section view properties dialog box, go to the View label or Label tab,
and click the... button next to one of the Ax boxes you want to use
2. In the Mark content - Symbol dialog box, click the Select button next to the File box to
select the symbol file you want to use.
3. When you have selected the file, click the Select button next to the Number box to
select the symbol you want to use.
4. Click OK.
Tekla Structures adds the name of the symbol in the elements list.

Adding templates in marks

You can create custom graphical templates (.tpl) with Template Editor and add them as
elements in all types of building object marks and associative notes. In the mark templates, you
can include detailed information of an embed or assembly, such as the submaterial used. Or you
can use a template that changes the unit and the number of decimals in measurement values in
a mark. You can also add graphical objects using the Template Editor tools in your mark
templates. You can use templates in marks and associative notes in all drawing types.
Before you add a template in a mark, ensure that the template you use does not contain any
margins.
To add a template in the mark:
1. In the mark properties dialog box, double-click the Template element to add it in the
mark. This will remove all other elements from the mark.
2. Select a template from the list in the Mark content - template dialog box. If you have
not created a template yet, or want to edit the template, you can do it from here.
Remember that if you edit the template here, the change affects all drawings that have
marks containing the changed template.
3. Click OK.
4. Click OK to save the mark properties.

The mark templates are by default searched from the following folders in
the following order:
%XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY%\mark
ModelDir\mark
%XS_PROJECT%\mark
%XS_FIRM%\mark
%XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY_SYSTEM%\mark
%XS_SYSTEM%\mark
The mark folder name can be changed using the advanced option
XS_TEMPLATE_MARK_SUB_DIRECTORY
Example
Limitations Mark templates do not support image files like the other graphical drawing templates.
See also XS_TEMPLATE_MARK_SUB_DIRECTORY

Adding automatic marks (p. 303)
Example 1: Creating a mark template containing separate value fields and text elements
(p. 305)
Example 2: Creating a mark template containing a formula in the value field (p. 307)
Unit settings for mark elements (p. 318)
Example 1: Creating a mark template containing separate value fields and text
elements
You may want to use decimals instead of fractions in your marks in the US Imperial
environment. In this example, you will create a mark template and use separate value fields and
text elements in the template to change from fractions to decimals. You will also set the desired
number of decimals.
To create and use a part mark template containing separate value fields and text elements:
1. In an open drawing, select a part and click Annotating > Add Part Marks > For
Selected Parts.
2. Double-click Template in the Available elements list.
3. In the Mark content - template dialog box, click Create new....
This starts the Template Editor.

4. Click File > New and create a new graphical template.
5. Click Insert > Component > Row.
6. Select PART as the content type.
7. Click Insert > Text, enter L and place it inside the row you just added.
8. Click Insert > Value field and place the value field on the right side of the L text.
9. In the displayed Select Attribute [Part] dialog box, scroll down to PROFILE - Profile,
open the profile tree, select the HEIGHT - height property and click OK.
10. Double-click the value field. In the Value Field Properties dialog box, change the
settings as follows:
• Unit: inch
• Decimals: 1
• Length: 8
11. Click OK.
12. Click Insert > Text, enter X as text and place it on the right side of the value field.
13. Add the second value field for the width information in the same way as you added the
height field.
Select the WIDTH - Width profile property and modify the settings as above.
14. Click Insert > Text and add the second X between the value fields.
15. Add the third value field for the profile flange thickness by selecting
FLANGE_THICKNESS_1 - Flange thickness 1 profile property and modify the settings
as follows:
• Unit: inch
• Decimals: 2
• Length: 4
16. Click Edit > Properties... and minimize the height and the width of the row.
17. Click File > Save to save the template.
The template is by default saved as a .tpl file in the \mark folder under the model
folder. You can copy this template to other models as required.
18. In Tekla Structures, click Refresh list in the Mark content - template dialog box to see
the template you created.
19. Select the template and click OK.
20. Click Modify and OK in the Part Mark Properties dialog box.
Example The first example below uses fractions and the second one uses decimals.
See also Adding templates in marks (p. 304)

Example 2: Creating a mark template containing a formula in the value field
In the second example, you also want to use decimals instead of fractions in US Imperial
environment. Now you will use a formula in the value field to make the change.
To create a part mark template and define the content by using a formula in the value field:
1. In an open drawing, select a part and click Annotating > Add Part Marks > For
Selected Parts.
2. Double-click Template in the Available elements list.
3. In the Mark content - template dialog box, click Create new....
This starts the Template Editor.
4. Click File > New and create a new graphical template.
5. Click Insert > Component > Row.
6. Select PART as the content type.
7. Click Insert > Value field, and place the field.
8. In the displayed Select Attribute [Part] dialog box, click the Formula... button.
9. Add the following formula in the Formula box and click OK:
"L " + format(GetValue("HEIGHT"),"Length","inch",1) + " x "+
format(GetValue("WIDTH"),"Length","inch",1) + " x " +
format(GetValue("PROFILE.FLANGE_THICKNESS_1"),"Length","inch",2)
10. Double-click the value field to open the Value Field Properties dialog box.
11. Set the Data type to text, enter a name for the field, for example, PART_MARK, and
ensure that the length value you give in the Length field is high enough to fit all the
characters and numbers included, for example, 20.
12. Click OK.
13. Click Edit > Properties... and minimize the height and the width of the row.
14. Click File > Save to save the template.
The template is by default saved as a .tpl file in the \mark folder under the model
folder. You can copy this template to other models as required.
15. In Tekla Structures, click Refresh list in the Mark content - template dialog box to see
the template you created.
16. Select the template and click OK.
17. Click Modify and OK in the Part Mark Properties dialog box.
See also Example 1: Creating a mark template containing separate value fields and text elements
(p. 305)
Adding user-defined attributes and template attributes in marks

All types of building object marks allow you to add user-defined attributes and template
attributes. For example, you might want to add control numbers or specify the number of
characters in part numbers in assembly or part marks.
To add a user-defined attribute in a building object mark:
1. In the mark properties dialog box, double-click the User-defined attribute element to
add it to the mark.
2. Enter the user-defined attribute name in the Mark content - user defined attribute
dialog box exactly as it appears in the objects.inp file.
If you want to enter a template attribute, enter it in the correct format.
3. Click OK.

Template Attributes Reference Guide
Common elements in marks (p. 382)

ASSEMBLY_BOTTOM_LEVEL
ASSEMBLY_TOP_LEVEL
TOP_LEVEL
BOTTOM_LEVEL
Changing the dimension format in level attributes in marks

You can add level attributes (TOP_LEVEL, BOTTOM_LEVEL, ASSEMBLY_TOP_LEVEL or
ASSEMBLY_BOTTOM_LEVEL) in part mark and associative note elements as user-defined
attributes. The level attributes take the dimension format from the
MarkDimensionFormat.dim file. You can change the dimension format in the level
attributes in an open drawing.
Precondition is that you have in your drawing part marks or associative notes that contain a
level attribute the format of which you want to change.
To change the dimension format in level attributes:
1. In the open drawing, click Dimensioning > Dimension Properties.
2. Select MarkDimensionFormat from the Load list and click Load.
3. Change the unit, precision and format.
4. Click Save to save the changes in the MarkDimensionFormat file.
5. Right-click the drawing and select Update all marks.
See also TOP_LEVEL

BOTTOM_LEVEL
ASSEMBLY_TOP_LEVEL
Defining contents of bolt mark Size element using advanced options

You can use a couple of advanced options to define the contents of the bolt mark Size element
in different types of drawings in Tools > Options > Advanced Options > Marking: Bolts.
• Note that general arrangement drawings have separate advanced

options.
• Any changes made to the advanced options listed in the table below
will take place only in the new drawings you create and if you
modify the affected bolt marks.
To define the contents for a bolt mark size element:
To Do this
Define the contents of the size element in slotted Set a value for the advanced option
hole marks or longhole marks (general arrangement XS_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE.
drawings).
Set a value for the advanced option
XS_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA.
hole marks or longhole marks (general arrangement XS_SITE_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE.
drawings) for site bolts.
XS_SITE_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA.

To Do this
hole marks or longhole marks (general arrangement XS_SHOP_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE.
drawings) for workshop bolts.
XS_SHOP_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA.
Define the contents of the size element in hole Set a value for the advanced option
marks. XS_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE.
XS_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA.
marks for site bolts. XS_SITE_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
XS_SITE_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
marks for workshop bolts. XS_SHOP_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
XS_SHOP_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
Define the contents of the size element in bolt Set a value for the advanced option
marks. XS_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
XS_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
marks for site bolts. XS_SITE_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
XS_SITE_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
marks for workshop bolts. XS_SHOP_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
XS_SHOP_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
You can use any combination of text and the following options as the value for the above
advanced options. Enclose each option in % characters. To use special characters enter a
backslash (\) followed by an ASCII number. You can use the options in any order, and make
calculations.
• BOLT_NUMBER
• BOLT_DIAMETER
• BOLT_LENGTH
• HOLE_DIAMETER
• LONGHOLE_X
• LONGHOLE_Y
• LONGHOLE_MIN (the shorter of the slotted hole dimensions)
• LONGHOLE_MAX (the longer of the slotted hole dimensions)
• BOLT_STANDARD
• BOLT_MATERIAL
• BOLT_ASSEMBLY_TYPE
• BOLT_COUNTERSUNK
• NAME_SHORT

• NAME_FULL
Example Example of using the advanced options:

XS_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE=D%HOLE_DIAMETER%(%HOLE_DIAMETER+LONGH
OLE_X%x%HOLE_DIAMETER+LONGHOLE_Y%)
XS_SITE_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE=D%HOLE_DIAMETER%
See also Bolt mark elements (p. 384)

XS_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
XS_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
XS_SITE_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
XS_SITE_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
XS_SHOP_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
XS_SHOP_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
XS_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
XS_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
XS_SITE_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
XS_SITE_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
XS_SHOP_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
XS_SHOP_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
XS_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
XS_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
XS_SHOP_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
XS_SHOP_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
Adding pull-out pictures in reinforcement marks

To illustrate the shape and dimensions of a reinforcing bar in a drawing, you can add a pull-out
picture of the bar in the reinforcement mark.
To add pull-out picture in the mark:
1. In the Cast Unit - Reinforcement Mark Properties dialog box, double-click the Pull-
out picture element in the Available elements list to add it to the reinforcement mark.
2. In the Pull-out picture dialog box, select the scaling option in Scale by:
• Auto autoscales the pull-out picture.
• One factor and Two factors scale the pull-out picture according to the values that
you enter.
The scale of the pull-out is relative to the scale of the drawing view. For example, if
the drawing view scale is 1/10 and the pull-out scaling is 2, the actual scale of the
pull-out in the drawing view is 1/5.
3. In End marks, define the shape of bar ends in the pull-out picture.
4. In Dimensions, select whether you want to show bar dimensions in the pull-out picture.
5. In Exaggeration, select whether you want to show reinforcing bar hooks more clearly in
the pull-out picture.
6. In Bending angle, select whether you want to show bar bending angles in the pull-out
picture.
7. Click OK.

Example
To change the color, line type, or representation of a pull-out, open the

rebar_config.inp file in ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\<environment>\
system and edit the following lines: PulloutColor,
PulloutVisibleLinetype and PulloutRepresentation.
See also Reinforcement mark elements (p. 385)

Reinforcement settings for drawings (p. 398)
Setting mark appearance

You can set the mark appearance using the options on the Content and General tabs, and also
for reinforcement marks on the Appearance tab.
See also Setting the appearance of mark text, frames and leader line (p. 312)
Showing mark frames and leader lines for hidden parts (p. 314)
Setting a predefined location for beam, bracing and column marks (p. 315)
Setting the visibility of marks (p. 311)
Setting the visibility of marks

Using the visibility options in the mark properties you can indicate the views where the marks
are displayed.
To set the visibility of marks:
1. Go to the General (or Appearance) tab page of the mark properties dialog box.
2. Select where you want to display the marks using the Visibility of marks or Visibility in
view options. The available options depend on the mark type.
3. Click OK.
See also Setting mark appearance (p. 311)


Setting the appearance of mark text, frames and leader line

You c an add frames around single mark elements and around the mark itself. You can also
adjust the appearance of the mark text and leader line.
To adjust the appearance of mark text, leader line and frames:
1. On the Content tab, select an element from the Elements in mark list.
2. Click Add frame.
3. Select a Type and Color for the frame.
You can select a different frame type and color for each element you add.
4. Select the element text Color, Font and Height.
You can select a different color, font and font height for each element you add.
5. Go to the General (or the Appearance) tab and select the mark frame Type and Color.
6. Select the Type for the leader line and the Arrow to use.
All marks do not have leader lines, in which case the leader line type selection is not
available.
7. If you want to hide leader lines of hidden parts, set Use hidden lines for hidden parts
to Yes.
This option is not available for all marks.
8. Click OK.

Modifying part mark leader line with advanced options (p. 312)
Placing the base point of the reinforcement mark leader line automatically (p. 313)
Modifying part mark leader line with advanced options

You can modify part mark leader line settings further using a couple of advanced options in
Tools > Options > Advanced Options > Marking: Parts.
To modify part mark leader line settings using advanced options:
To Do this
Define whether a leader line is drawn Set
when the leader line is shorter than XS_DRAW_SHORT_LEADER_LINES_OF_PART_
defined with the advanced option MARKS to TRUE (default) to always draw leader
XS_DRAW_SHORT_LEADER_LINES_OF_ lines in part marks. When you set this option to
PART_MARKS_MINIMUM_LENGTH FALSE, the leader line is not drawn if it would
be shorter than the minimum you set for the
advanced option
XS_DRAW_SHORT_LEADER_LINES_OF_PART_
MARKS_MINIMUM_LENGTH.
Give a minimum length for the leader Set a value in millimeters for the advanced
line. If the length is less than this value, option
the leaderline is not drawn. XS_DRAW_SHORT_LEADER_LINES_OF_PART_
MARKS_MINIMUM_LENGTH .
Define the leader line start position for a Set a value for the advanced option
leader line with a rectangular frame. XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_POSITION_TYPE_F
OR_RECTANGULAR_FRAME.

To Do this
Define the leader line start position for a Set a value for the advanced option
leader line with no frame. XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_POSITION_TYPE_F
OR_NO_FRAME.
Define the length of the leader line Set a value for the advanced option
extension. XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_EXTENSION_LENGT
H.
See also XS_DRAW_SHORT_LEADER_LINES_OF_PART_MARKS

XS_DRAW_SHORT_LEADER_LINES_OF_PART_MARKS_MINIMUM_LENGTH
XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_EXTENSION_LENGTH
XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_POSITION_TYPE_FOR_NO_FRAME
XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_POSITION_TYPE_FOR_RECTANGULAR_FRAME
Placing the base point of the reinforcement mark leader line automatically
Tekla Structures places the base point of reinforcement mark leader lines so that it points to
only one reinforcing bar. You can adjust how Tekla Structures searches for the place for the
base point in Tools > Options > Advanced Options > Concrete Detailing.
To place the reinforcement mark leader line base point automatically:
To Do this
Select an optimal place for the base point. Set
XS_ENABLE_REBAR_MARK_LEADER_LINE_BA
SE_POINT_OPTIMIZATION to TRUE.
Define how far the other reinforcing bars Set a millimeter value for
must be from the base point in order for XS_REBAR_MARK_LEADER_LINE_BASE_POIN
Tekla Structures to place the base point. T_SEARCH_TOLERANCE.
Define the search step length while Set a millimeter value for
searching for an optimal place for the XS_REBAR_MARK_LEADER_LINE_BASE_POIN
base point along the reinforcing bar. T_SEARCH_STEP_LENGTH.
Example An example showing optimized base points.

XS_REBAR_MARK_LEADER_LINE_BASE_POINT_SEARCH_STEP_LENGTH
XS_REBAR_MARK_LEADER_LINE_BASE_POINT_SEARCH_TOLERANCE
XS_ENABLE_REBAR_MARK_LEADER_LINE_BASE_POINT_OPTIMIZATION
Showing mark frames and leader lines for hidden parts

If a part is behind another part in the drawing so that it is hidden, you can select to show the
mark frame and leader line of the hidden part with a dashed or a solid line.
To set the mark frame and leader line appearance for the part marks of hidden parts:
1. In the part mark properties dialog box, go to the General tab.
2. Use one of the following options:
Setting Example
Use hidden lines for hidden parts: Part mark frame and leader line are
Yes shown with a dashed line.
Use hidden lines for hidden parts: No Part mark frame and leader line are
shown with a solid line.

3. Click OK.
The advanced option

XS_OMIT_MARKS_OF_HIDDEN_PARTS_IN_GA_DRAWINGS affects the
displaying of marks of hidden objects in general arrangement drawings.

XS_OMIT_MARKS_OF_HIDDEN_PARTS_IN_GA_DRAWINGS
Mark location
The location of the mark is affected by:
• The placement settings in the mark properties
• The type of the selected leader line
• The predefined mark location and part orientation settings
• The modeling direction of parts
• Protection settings
See also Setting a predefined location for beam, bracing and column marks (p. 315)
Protected areas (p. 249)
Using part mark as an orientation mark in general arrangement drawings (p. 326)
Part mark and surface treatment mark leader line types and mark location (p. 316)
Reinforcement leader line types and mark location (p. 316)
Leader line types and mark location for reinforcing bar group marks (p. 317)
Setting a predefined location for beam, bracing and column marks

By default, part marks are placed at the end point of the part. You can changes this by adjusting
the predefined location settings for beams, bracings and column marks.
1. Click Tools > Options > Options > Orientation marks.
2. In Mark location: Preferred location for beams and bracings, select Left or Right to
place the mark to the left or right end of the part.
3. In Mark location: Mark always to center of column in GA drawings, select Yes to
place part marks in the center of columns in plan views, or No to place part marks on the
same flange in GA drawings and assembly drawings.
See also Mark location (p. 315)


Part mark and surface treatment mark leader line types and mark location
Part marks and surface treatment marks have several types of leader lines you can select. The
type of the leader line affects the location of the mark.
Leader line type Description

Always use a leader line.
Tries to find a space along the part for the mark. If

impossible, Tekla Structures uses a leader line.
The mark is always along the part. Lack of space might

cause the mark to overlap other elements.
The mark is always inside the part.
The mark is always inside the part and parallel to the part
axis.
Tries to find a space for the mark inside the part. If

impossible, Tekla Structures places the mark along the part
with a leader line.
Tries to find a space inside the part for the mark and align it
parallel to the part axis. If impossible, Tekla Structures
places the mark along the part with a leader line.
Places the part mark along and in the middle of a part face.

Reinforcement leader line types and mark location

Reinforcement marks have several types of leader lines you can select. The type of the leader
line affects the location of the mark.
Tekla Structures tries to place the mark close to the midpoint on straight bars, or to the midpoint
of the longest bar segment.
Reinforcement leader
line type Description
Always creates a leader line.
Tries to find a space along the reinforcing bar for the mark.
If impossible, creates a leader line.
The mark is always along the reinforcing bar. The mark may
overlap other elements if there is not enough space.

Reinforcement leader
line type Description
The mark is parallel to the reinforcing bar.
The mark is parallel to the reinforcing bar on line. If there is

not enough space for the mark, a leader line is created.

Leader line types and mark location for reinforcing bar group marks
In reinforcing bar groups Tekla Structures first tries to place the mark on the middle bar if it is
visible. If that is not possible, Tekla Structures tries the next visible bar.
Here is a list of leader line options available for identical reinforcement marks and reinforcing
bar group marks:
Option Image Example

One leader line to group
One leader line per row

Option Image Example
Parallel leader lines
Leader lines to one point

Unit settings for mark elements

Tekla Structures uses the contentattributes_global.lst attributes file for setting
the default unit settings for various mark elements. This file defines, for example, the unit used,
and the number of decimals.
The contentattributes_global.lst file also defines default values for attributes in
templates created in Template Editor.
Do not edit contentattributes_global.lst.
For user-defined attributes in mark elements, the default unit settings are taken from the
contentattributes_userdefined.lst file. You can use
contentattributes_userdefined.lst also when you want to configure settings of
your own.
Example This example shows how the part mark element length is defined by default in the
contentattributes_global.lst file in the US Imperial environment and in the
default environment, and what the resulting part marks look like.
US Imperial environment:

Default environment:
You can add in the mark a template that changes the unit and number of
decimals. This affects all drawings that have marks containing the
changed template.

Template attributes
Merging marks automatically

You can let Tekla Structures automatically merge marks.
You can automatically merge part marks, surface treatment marks and reinforcement marks.
See also Merging part marks (p. 321)

Merged reinforcement marks (p. 321)
Merging reinforcement marks (p. 322)
Merging marks (p. 132)
Merged part marks

A merged part mark means that only one part mark is used for similar parts in a drawing.
Merged part marks indicate the number of included parts, and contain the specified part mark
contents, and the near side and far side information. The marks are merged only in x direction
of the main part.
Tekla Structures merges marks for visible parts in drawings if:
• The secondary parts are welded or bolted to the same main part.
• The parts are on the same line.
• Distances between the parts are equal.
• The parts have the same part position.

• Distance between parts is not more than what is set for the advanced option
XS_PART_MERGE_MAX_DISTANCE.
• There are at least as many parts in the array as it has been set for the advanced option
XS_MIN_MERGE_PART_COUNT.
Limitations • Part marks can be merged only on view and drawing level. It is not possible to merge or
split part marks manually.
• Tekla Structures does not merge neighbor part marks.
Example In the example below, the part marks are merged.
In the example below, the leftmost part marks are not merged, because they are too far from
each other.
In the example below, the marks in the y direction are not merged.

See also Merging part marks (p. 321)
XS_PART_MERGE_MAX_DISTANCE
XS_MIN_MERGE_PART_COUNT
Merging part marks

You can merge part marks automatically to reduce the number of marks in the drawing.
To merge part marks automatically:
1. On the General tab of the mark properties dialog box, set the Merge marks to On.
2. Click OK.
This merges marks for identical secondary parts on both faces of main parts.
See also Merged part marks (p. 319)

XS_MULTIPLIER_SEPARATOR_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK
XS_NSFS_POSTFIX_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK
XS_NS_POSTFIX_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK
XS_FS_POSTFIX_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK
XS_PART_MERGE_MAX_DISTANCE
XS_MIN_MERGE_PART_COUNT
Merged reinforcement marks

Tekla Structures can automatically merge similar reinforcement marks of bars. Merged marks
may include several blocks, and additional information. Blocks combine similar single marks.

To have Tekla Structures automatically merge reinforcement marks in
drawings, the reinforcement must be attached to a concrete part or cast
unit in the model.
Tekla Structures automatically merges marks for visible reinforcing bars in drawings if:
• The bars belong to the same concrete part or cast unit
• The direction of the bars is the same
• The bar marks are identical
• The bars are close to each other
• A straight line can be drawn through all the bars
You can also define the distance within which to automatically merge marks for visible
reinforcing bars using advanced options.
See also Merging reinforcement marks (p. 322)

Attaching reinforcement to parts
XS_MAX_MERGE_DISTANCE_IN_HORIZONTAL
XS_MAX_MERGE_DISTANCE_IN_VERTICAL
Merging reinforcement marks

1. Go to the Merging tab of the Cast Unit - Reinforcement Marks dialog box.
2. Select an option from the Identical marks in same cast unit list to merge marks and
create leader lines.
3. If there are several possible merge directions, select the direction from Preferred
direction of merge.
4. Select the contents to be included in the merged reinforcement marks from the Available
elements list.
To ensure that merged reinforcement marks appear in the drawing,

always include Symbol separating blocks in mark as the last element
in the reinforcement mark. To omit the separating symbol, leave this
field blank, but still include the element in the mark.
5. Optional: Add a frame around the single elements in the mark. You can define the frame
individually for each element.
6. Adjust the font, font height and the color of the mark text. You can adjust these settings
7. Click OK.
Example In this example, we merge three A φ12 L2000 marks to a block, and six V φ8 L650 marks to
another block, and then merge them in the following way:

Single mark content
Symbol separating the blocks
Block prefix
Distance between groups
Block 1
Block 2
See also Reinforcement mark merging properties (p. 379)
6.9 Grids in drawings

You can show grids in all types of drawings. You change the appearance and visibility of the
labels, label frames, and grid lines.

Defining grid settings (p. 324)
Defining grid settings

You can modify drawing grid properties on the view and drawing level, and on the object level
in an existing drawing.
To modify the grid properties on the drawing level:
1. Click Grid... in the drawing properties dialog box.
2. Modify the grid properties.
3. Click OK.
The advanced options

XS_DRAWING_GRID_LABEL_FRAME_FIXED_WIDTH and
XS_DRAWING_GRID_LABEL_FRAME_LINE_WIDTH_FACTOR allow you
to adjust the grid labels further.

Adding or removing grid lines in the model may cause unwanted
changes in general arrangement drawings in some cases. You should
avoid modifying grids after the general arrangement drawings are
created, or set
XS_INTELLIGENCE_DO_NOT_ASSOCIATE_VIEWS_TO_GRIDS to TRUE.

XS_INTELLIGENCE_DO_NOT_ASSOCIATE_VIEWS_TO_GRIDS
6.10 Parts and neighbor parts

Parts and neighbor parts in drawings are building objects that will exist in the real building or
which will be closely related to it.
Parts and neighbor parts have drawing properties that affect the way that the part is shown in
the drawing.
See also Setting part and neighbor part contents and appearance (p. 325)
Part orientation (p. 326)
Part and neighbor part properties (p. 389)
Setting part and neighbor part contents and appearance

You can define what is shown in a part or neighbor part and how the part or neighbor part is
shown.
To set the part contents and appearance before creating a drawing:
2. Click Part... or Neighbor part....
3. On the Contents tab, select the part representation, select whether to show hidden lines,
center lines and reference lines, and which additional markings to show.
A reference line is a line between the points from which a part is created.
4. On the Appearance tab, select the color and type of the lines.
5. On the Fill tab, set the part and section fill options. Neighbor parts do not have a Fill tab.
6. Click OK.
7. Create the drawing.
Limitations The color of the center lines can be changed only on the drawing and view level, not on the
object level. For center lines, you can only adjust the color in the properties dialog box, not the
type. You can adjust the line type of part center lines with the advanced option
XS_CENTER_LINE_TYPE.
See also Parts and neighbor parts (p. 325)


XS_CENTER_LINE_TYPE
XS_DRAWING_PART_REFERENCE_LINE_TYPE
XS_DRAWING_POINT_SCALE
Part orientation
Part orientation marks indicate the erection direction of assemblies and cast units. You can
indicate the part orientation by using part marks, including compass direction in marks, and
using orientation marks and connecting side marks.

Using part mark as an orientation mark in general arrangement drawings (p. 326)
Displaying compass direction (p. 327)
Displaying connecting side marks (p. 329)
Using part mark as an orientation mark in general arrangement draw-

ings
In general arrangement drawings, part marks appear at the same end as in assembly drawings.
Parts with the same assembly position are always marked at the same end.
To use the part marks as orientation marks in general arrangement drawings:
1. In the assembly drawing properties, click View... > Attributes and set the Coordinate
system to oriented or model.
You must use oriented or model if you want the Viewing direction settings in Tools >
Options > Options… > Orientation marks to have effect.
2. In the model, click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Numbering Settings... and
clear the Beam orientation and Column orientation check boxes.
When you do this, similar assemblies get the same number regardless of the part
orientation.
3. Go to Tools > Options > Options… > Orientation marks and set the following options:
• Set the desired Viewing direction for beams, bracings and columns.
• Set Mark always to center of column in GA drawings to No.
• Set Preferred location for beams and bracings to Left or Right.
The preferred location determines the end where the mark is placed.
4. Check the leader line type through General Arrangement drawing properties > Part
marks > General.
Place the mark near the part end, not in the middle of the part using one of the following
settings:
5. Create assembly and single-part drawings.

6. Create general arrangement drawings.

When you update an assembly drawing so that the mark is placed at the
other end of the part, remember to update the marks in the corresponding
general arrangement drawing. Tekla Structures does not do this
automatically.
Cast units do not behave in the same way as the assembly drawings. The
Top in form face setting on the Parameters tab of the part’s User-
defined attributes dialog box tells the end where the part mark is
placed. The part mark is always placed at the start end of the part, except
with the setting Back.
Example The part mark is positioned at the stiffener side:
The marks are positioned at the same side irrespective of the orientation of thebeams:

Displaying compass direction

You can include face direction information in part marks. Face direction indicates the compass
direction (North, East, South, West) of the face where the mark appears.
To add face direction information for parts:
1. Check in which direction north is in the model by clicking Tools > Options > Options...
> Orientation marks > Project north.

2. In the model, click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Numbering Settings... and
select the Column orientation check box.
This forces Tekla Structures to show the face direction in the part mark for two similar
columns with different orientation.
3. In the assembly or cast unit drawing properties, click Part mark... and insert the Face
direction element in the part mark.
Now you can create the assembly or cast unit drawing(s).
Limitations Tekla Structures indicates the face direction only if it is the same for all assemblies or cast units
with the same assembly or cast unit position number.
See also Part orientation (p. 326)

Displaying orientation marks (north marks)

You can use orientation marks or north marks to indicate the erection direction of assemblies.
The default orientation mark is a triangle inside a circle.
To display orientation marks for main parts:
1. In the drawing properties, click Part... > Content and select the Orientation marks
check box.
2. Click OK.
3. Optional: If necessary, define which parts Tekla Structures considers to be columns,
braces or beams by setting the skew limits through Tools > Options > Options... >
Orientation marks > Skew limit.
4. Use the following advanced options to adjust orientation marks:
• XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_DIRECTION
• XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_MOVE_DIST_FOR_BEAMS
• XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_MOVE_DIST_FOR_COLUMNS
• XS_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL
• XS_HIDDEN_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL
• XS_NORTH_MARK_SCALE
• XS_GA_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL (general arrangement drawings)
• XS_GA_HIDDEN_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL (general arrangement drawings)
• XS_GA_NORTH_MARK_SCALE (general arrangement drawings)
For different parts, Tekla Structures draws orientation marks in the following way:
• To the top flange of beams, at the end which points closest to the north or to another
designated point of the compass (see part 1 and 2 in the illustration below)

• To the lower end of columns, on the flange which points closest to the north or to another
designated point of the compass (see part 4 in the illustration below)
• To the flange of bracing, at the end which points closest to the north or to another
designated point of the compass (see 3 A and B in the illustration below)
You can display orientation marks for single-part views included in

assembly drawings with the advanced option
XS_SINGLE_ORIENTATION_MARK.
See also XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_DIRECTION

XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_MOVE_DIST_FOR_BEAMS
XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_MOVE_DIST_FOR_COLUMNS
XS_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL
XS_HIDDEN_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL
XS_NORTH_MARK_SCALE
XS_GA_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL
XS_GA_HIDDEN_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL
XS_GA_NORTH_MARK_SCALE
XS_SINGLE_ORIENTATION_MARK
Displaying connecting side marks

You can use a symbol in assembly drawings to indicate the side of a part to which a connecting
part is attached.
To display connecting side marks:
1. In the assembly drawing properties, click Part... > Content.
2. Select the Connecting side marks check box.
3. Optional: You can change the symbol with the advanced option
XS_CONNECTING_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL.

See also XS_CONNECTING_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL
Example: Part representations

Here are some examples of what parts look like with different settings defined in the Part

Setting Example
Part representation is set to Outline.
Part representation is set to Exact.

The Edge chamfers check box is selected in
Additional marks.
Part representation is set to Symbol.
Part representation is set to Symbol with

partial profile.
Part representation is set to Bounding box.

Setting Example
Part representation is set to Base box.
The Hidden lines check box is not selected.
The Hidden lines check box is selected.

The Own hidden lines check box is
selected.
Hidden lines for other parts are shown
Hidden lines for the main part are

shown.
See also Setting part and neighbor part contents and appearance (p. 325)
Part and neighbor part content properties (p. 389)
6.11 Bolts
Bolts are connecting objects that fasten parts or assemblies or attach to them. There are several
ways to display bolts in drawings.
See also Setting bolt contents and appearance (p. 332)

Creating user-defined bolt symbols (p. 333)
Example: Bolts (p. 333)
Setting bolt contents and appearance

You can define what is shown in bolts and how the bolts are shown.
To set the bolt contents and appearance:
2. Click Bolts....
3. On the Content tab, select the bolt representation, bolt symbol content, and the visibility
of bolts in main parts, secondary parts and sub-assemblies.
4. On the Appearance tab, select the color of the bolts.
5. Click OK.

See also Bolts (p. 332)
Example: Bolts (p. 333)
Creating user-defined bolt symbols

You can create your own bolt symbols and use them in drawings.
You only need to create bolts if you need different bolt symbols than the
ones that Tekla Structures includes.
To create bolt symbols in the Symbol Editor:

1. Save the symbol file ud_bolts.sym in the symbol folder (usually the
folder..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\common\symbols\).
2. Open Microsoft Notepad, or any text editor.
3. Create a text file consisting of lines in three columns:
• The first column contains the bolt assembly standard.
• The second contains the bolt diameter.
• The third column contains the name of the symbol file and the symbol number,
separated with the @ character.
Example of file contents:
7990 24 ud_bolts@1
7990 25 ud_bolts@2
Tekla Structures uses the user-defined symbol for bolts in drawings that have the
standard and diameter you define in this text file.
4. Save the file with the name bolt_symbol_table.txt.
5. Set the name of the file as a value for the advanced option
XS_USER_DEFINED_BOLT_SYMBOL_TABLE in Tools > Options > Advanced
Options... > Marking: Bolts as follows:
set XS_USER_DEFINED_BOLT_SYMBOL_TABLE=bolt_symbol_table.txt
You can also write a full path to the bolt definition file. Without the path Tekla Structures
searches for the file in the model, firm, project, and system directories.
6. To use your own bolt symbol, select Bolt... > Content > Solid/Symbol > User-defined
symbol in the drawing properties dialog box.
Example: Bolts
There are several ways to display bolts in drawings. You can select the options from the Solid/
symbol list. Here are some examples of different selections.

Setting Example
Solid
Exact Solid
Symbol
Symbol 2
Symbol 3


6.12 Surface treatments
You can add various surface treatments to steel and concrete parts.
See also Setting surface treatment visibility, contents and appearance (p. 335)
Setting surface treatment visibility, contents and appearance

You can define what is shown in a surface treatment and how the surface treatment is shown.
To set the surface treatment visibility, contents and appearance options:
2. Click Surface treatment...

3. On the Contents tab, select the surface treatment representation, and whether to show
the surface treatment, hatch pattern on the treatment, and hidden lines.
4. On the Appearance tab, select the color and type of visible and hidden lines.
5. Click OK.
See also Surface treatments (p. 335)

Surface treatment hatch pattern properties (p. 395)
6.13 Reinforcement and meshes

There are numerous ways of showing reinforcing bars and meshes in drawings.
See also Setting reinforcement and mesh contents and appearance (p. 336)
Example: Hiding reinforcing bar lines (p. 336)
Example: Reinforcement representation options (p. 337)
Setting reinforcement and mesh contents and appearance

You can define what is shown in reinforcing bars and meshes and how they are shown in cast
unit and general arrangement drawings.
To set the reinforcement contents and appearance:
2. Click Reinforcement....
3. On the Bar content tab, set the bar representation, bar end symbols, and the visibility of
bars and lines.
4. On the Bar appearance tab, select the color and type of the visible lines and hidden
lines.
5. On the Mesh content tab, set the mesh representation, mesh symbols, and the visibility
of meshes, wires, bars and lines.
6. On the Mesh appearance tab, select the color and type of the visible lines and hidden
lines.
7. Click OK.
See also Reinforcement and meshes (p. 336)

Example: Hiding reinforcing bar lines

You can hide reinforcement bar lines behind other reinforcing bars and behind parts in cast unit
drawings.
Here are some examples of what reinforcing bars look like with different settings selected on
the Bar content tab of the Reinforcement Properties dialog box.

Setting Description
Hide lines behind parts is
selected. The lines are
hidden behind other parts.
Hide lines behind other

rebars is selected. The lines
are hidden behind other
reinforcement bar lines.
See also Setting reinforcement and mesh contents and appearance (p. 336)
Reinforcement and meshes (p. 336)
Example: Reinforcement representation options

Here are examples of how the reinforcement will look with the different representation options
selected on the Bar content tab of the Reinforcement properties dialog box.
Setting Example
single line
double line

Setting Example
double lines with filled ends
filled line
stick
outline

6.14 Hatch patterns

Use hatching on part faces, sections or additional drawing objects, such as circles and
polygons, to show different materials. You can also add hatch patterns on surface treatment.
See also Adding hatch patterns on parts and shapes (p. 338)
Adding hatch patterns on surface treatment (p. 340)
Example: Insulation hatch patterns (p. 341)
Part and shape hatch pattern properties (p. 391)
XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_ACI
Adding hatch patterns on parts and shapes

You can add hatch patterns on parts and shapes on the drawing, view and object level.
To add a hatch pattern before creating a drawing:
2. Click Part... > Fill.
3. Select the hatch pattern from the Type list.To preview the patterns, click the ... button
next to the Type list.

You can also select the hatch pattern by double-clicking it in the Hatch window. If you
select Automatic, Tekla Structures uses the hatch patterns defined in the hatch pattern
schema (pattern properties) file (.htc).
4. Define a color for the pattern in the Color box.
5. Define a background color for the hatch in the Background box. You can define the
background color only after selecting a hatch pattern first.
6. In Scale, select whether to use automatic or custom scaling and rotation for hatches.
If you select automatic scaling and rotation, Tekla Structures automatically scales the
hatch pattern to suit the profile size, and you do not need to edit each drawing manually.
If you select Custom scaling and rotation:
• Enter the scales in Scaling in direction x and Scaling in direction y, and select
whether to Keep the x and y ratio.
• Enter the angle of rotation in the Angle field. Angle 0.0 is for horizontal and 90.0
for vertical.
7. Click OK.
Limitations • Background color does not work in conjunction with hardware hatches.
• The background color does not have any effect if there is the automatic hatch available.
The background color can only be changed if the automatic hatch is not defined for the
material type.
Example In the example below, the following hatch pattern options have been selected for sections:
Scale: Custom
Scaling in x direction: 0.25
Scaling in y direction: 0.50
Keep ratio of x and y is selected.
Angle: 10.00

See also Parts and neighbor parts (p. 325)
Part and neighbor part fill properties (p. 391)
XS_HATCH_SCALE_LIMIT
XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_R
XS_HATCH_SEGMENT_BUFFER_SIZE
Adding hatch patterns on surface treatment

You can use hatches to show surface treatment types in drawings. You can add hatch patterns
on the drawing, view and object level.
The hatch pattern Tekla Structures adds on the surface treatment depends on the type of the
surface treatment that has been selected in the Surface Treatment Properties dialog box in the
model and the hatch properties defined in the surfacing.htc file.
To add a hatch pattern on a surface treatment:
To Do this
Add a hatch pattern to a surface 1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing
treatment before creating a drawing Settings and select the drawing type.
2. Click Surface treatment....
3. Select Show pattern.
4. Click OK.
Add a hatch pattern on drawing level to 1. Double-click the drawing.
a surface treatment in an open drawing 2. Click Surface treatment....
4. Click Modify.

To Do this
Add a hatch pattern to a surface 1. Double-click the frame of a drawing view.
treatment on the view level in an open 2. Click Surface treatment....
drawing 3. Select Show pattern.
4. Click Modify.
Add a hatch pattern on the object level 1. Double-click the surface treatment in a
to a surface treatment. drawing.
2. Click Surface treatment....
4. Click Modify.
See also Surface treatment hatch pattern properties (p. 395)

Example: Insulation hatch patterns

Automatic scaling and rotation for hatches can be applied, for example, to insulation. With
automatic scaling and rotation you can also modify the thickness of insulation.
You can use the following fill types to represent insulation:
Hatch name Pattern

HARD_INS1
SOFT_INS
SOFT_INS2
Previewing To preview the scaled and rotated patterns, click the Select... button.
patterns
See also Hatch patterns (p. 338)

6.15 Reference models
Reference models can be shown in general arrangement drawings. For example, you may want
to use 3D plant models or architectural drawings as reference models.
See also Reference models

Setting the visibility and appearance of reference models (p. 342)
Setting the visibility and line type of hidden lines using advanced options (p. 342)
Setting the visibility and appearance of reference models

To show or hide reference models in drawings, and change their appearance:
1. In the General Arrangement Drawing Properties dialog box, click Reference
objects....
2. The Content tab lists all the reference models included in the model.
3. In the Visibility column, select Visible from the list box to show the selected reference
model in the drawing.
4. Go to the Appearance tab and select the line color and type for all visible reference
models.
5. Click OK.
You can control the visibility and line type of hidden lines in reference
models in drawings using advanced options.
If a reference model is subdivided or modified by setting a user-defined

attribute, individual reference model object gets an ID that is stored in
the Tekla Structures database. These individual reference model objects
are displayed in the reference model list. You can change the appearance
or hide a reference model objects that has an ID.
See also Setting the visibility and line type of hidden lines using advanced options (p. 342)
Setting the visibility and line type of hidden lines using advanced options
You can control the visibility and line type of hidden lines of reference models in drawings
using advanced options.
To set the visibility and line type of hidden lines:
1. Click Tools > Options > Advanced Options...
2. Go to the Drawing Properties page.
3. Adjust the advanced options XS_SHOW_REFERENCE_MODEL_HIDDEN_LINES,
XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_LINES_HIDDEN_BY_ITSELF,
XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_LINES_HIDDEN_BY_OTHER_REFERENCE_MODELS,
XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_LINES_HIDDEN_BY_PARTS, and
XS_REFERENCE_MODELS_HIDE_PART_LINES.

Showing the hidden lines might slow down the system when you have large or several
reference models in the drawing, especially if the advanced options
XS_REFERENCE_MODELS_HIDE_PART_LINES or
XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_LINES_HIDDEN_BY_OTHER_REFERENCE_MODELS have been
set to TRUE.
If you set XS_SHOW_REFERENCE_MODEL_HIDDEN_LINES to TRUE, the other advanced
options have no effect.
4. On the same page, set the line type used to display the hidden lines using the advanced
option XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_HIDDEN_LINE_TYPE.
If you do not want to show hidden lines, set this advanced option to 0.
Example In the example below, the lines are not hidden.
In the example below the following settings have been used:

• XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_LINES_HIDDEN_BY_PARTS=TRUE: Some of the foreground
parts are hiding the reference model lines.
• XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_LINES_HIDDEN_BY_ITSELF=TRUE: The reference model is
internally hiding its own lines.
• XS_REFERENCE_MODELS_HIDE_PART_LINES=TRUE: The reference model is hiding
some of the part lines behind it.
• XS_SHOW_REFERENCE_MODEL_HIDDEN_LINES=FALSE: Allows the hidden lines to be
hidden according to the above advanced options. If it is set to TRUE, the above advanced
options have no effect.
• XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_HIDDEN_LINE_TYPE is set to 0: No hidden lines are shown.

See also XS_SHOW_REFERENCE_MODEL_HIDDEN_LINES
XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_HIDDEN_LINE_TYPE
XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_LINES_HIDDEN_BY_ITSELF
XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_LINES_HIDDEN_BY_OTHER_REFERENCE_MODELS
XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_LINES_HIDDEN_BY_PARTS
XS_REFERENCE_MODELS_HIDE_PART_LINES
6.16 User-defined attributes in drawings

User-defined attributes are text fields you can use to add information to a drawing. They are
also displayed in the Drawing List. You can use existing user-defined attributes in drawings, or
create your own. Furthermore, you can add user-defined attributes in marks.
See also Adding user-defined attributes (p. 344)

What is displayed in the Drawing List (p. 72)
Adding user-defined attributes

To add user-defined attributes in drawings:
2. Click User-defined attributes....
3. On the Workflow tab, enter project-specific information to be displayed in drawings and
in the Drawing List.

4. On the Parameters tab, enter a user-defined Comment for drawings, projects,
assemblies, parts, and so on.
Tekla Structures uses the comment that is included in the drawing template you select,
and a hierarchy, depending on where the comment has been entered.
5. Use the User field 1 to User field 8 on the Parameters tab to enter drawing-specific
information.
6. Click OK.
• You can add and modify user-defined attributes in objects.inp.

• You can control whether the modifications in user-defined attributes
affect all selected drawings in the Drawing List at the same time,
even if the drawings are of different types by using the advanced
option XS_DRAWING_UDAS_MODIFY_ALL_DRAWING_TYPES.
See also Adding properties

XS_DRAWING_UDAS_MODIFY_ALL_DRAWING_TYPES
Location of hidden files
6.17 Defining a firm folder for images and symbols

You can define a firm folder where Tekla Structures always searches for the images and
symbols. When you store the images and symbols in this folder, you do not have to move them
from folder to folder when you install a new version of Tekla Structures. Installing a new
version does not replace the files in the firm folder.
Define the firm folder in the user.ini file with the XS_FIRM variable. The XS_FIRM
variable makes the images and symbols available in all Tekla Structures versions.
To define the firm folder:
1. Modify the user.ini file to include the DXK_SYMBOLPATH environment variable that
points to the firm folder. Add the following line at the end of the user.ini file:
set DXK_SYMBOLPATH=%DXK_SYMBOLPATH%;%XS_FIRM%
You must add this line after the line where XS_FIRM is set. The line must always start
with "set DXK_SYMBOLPATH=%DXK_SYMBOLPATH%;". The DXK_SYMBOLPATH
environment variable can contain multiple paths separated by semicolons.
2. In the Template Editor, click Options > Preferences > File Locations and enter the
path to the firm folder also for Symbols, pictures.

DXK_SYMBOLPATH
6.18 Defining customized line types

You can define your own line types, and use them wherever line type settings are available. The
customized line types are handled the same way as other line types. The customized line types
are defined in the TeklaStuctures.lin file in ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\common\inp. By default, the most widely
used line types are available in the file.

To define your own line types in the TeklaStuctures.lin file:
1. Start every line with the letter A to indicate the beginning of the line type pattern.
You can use three different objects: dashes, dots and spaces to form a line.
2. Define the length of a dash (-) using positive numbers.
3. Define the length of a a space ( ) using negative numbers.
4. Define dots (.) using the number zero (0).
The patterns must begin with a dash. They typically end with a space, although the space
in the end is not required.
5. After you have defined the line type pattern, press Enter.
The TeklaStructures.lin.id file contains the names of the line types visible in the
user interface and the unique IDs assigned for each line type. The value of the ID must be
greater than 10, for example:
CENTER, 1000
BORDER, 1002
DASHDOT, 1003
You can use TeklaStructures.lin also for mapping the exported line types.
User-defined line types can not be mapped to other (user-defined) line

types in DWG export.
Default line types can be mapped to user-defined line types.
Example Line type definition for DASHDOT: A, 12.7, -6.35, 0, -6.35 means that the pattern
starts with a dash with the length of 12.7 units, followed by a space with the length of 6.35
units, then a dot, and then again a space with the length of 6.35 units. Then the first dash is
drawn again.
If you add new customized line types, you need to add corresponding
bitmaps to the ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\nt\bitmaps folder, and name them
dr_line_type_*.bmp, for example
dr_line_type_CENTER.bmp.
See also Defining line type mappings of your own


6.19 Settings affecting the recreation of drawings
Modification of the following drawing settings may lead to recreation of drawings.
In view properties:
• Front view
• Top view
• Back view
• Bottom view
• Section views
• End views
• 3D view
• View extension for neighbor parts
• Coordinate system
• Around X
• Around Y
• Around Z
• Undeformed
• Unfolded
• Show opening/recess symbol
In section view properties:
• Section depth
• Distance for combining cuts
• Left section
• Middle section
• Right section
In dimension properties:
• Straight
• In X direction
• Knock off dimension type
• Reference dimension color, text color, and height
In dimensioning properties:
• All dimensioning properties
In part properties:
• Part representation drop down list
In neighbor part properties:
• Neighbor parts
• Main/Secondary parts
• Skew parts
• Part representation drop down list
In surface treatment properties:
• Visibility
• Representation
• Show pattern

See also Preventing automatic drawing updates and recreation (p. 348)
Preventing automatic drawing updates and recreation

Here are some tips that help you to prevent automatic drawing updates and recreation:
• Freeze the drawings where you do not want to update all associative objects on top of the
drawing views. The building objects (parts, bolts, welds, etc.) are always updated in frozen
drawings.
• Lock the drawings that you do not want to update.
• If you update a drawing that has not been modified, the drawing is recreated. Drawings
are automatically recreated unless the drawing has been edited and then saved, or the
drawing has been issued using the Issue functionality in the Drawing List. Use the
advanced XS_RECREATE_UNMODIFIED_DRAWINGS to control the recreation of
unmodified drawings.
• To prevent Tekla Structures from automatically updating drawings if the model changes,
clear the value field of the advanced option XS_INTELLIGENT_DRAWING_ALLOWED.
See also XS_INTELLIGENT_DRAWING_ALLOWED

XS_RECREATE_UNMODIFIED_DRAWINGS
6.20 Managing Master Drawing Catalog

Keeping the Master Drawing Catalog up to date and well organized is essential if you want to
create drawings fast and efficiently. Having good master drawings saves you time and effort.
Add only the necessary master drawings, remove obsolete ones, organize the master drawings
in folders, add proper preview images, and keep the properties and descriptions up to date.
See also Adding master drawings in Master Drawing Catalog (p. 348)
Removing master drawings from the Master Drawing Catalog (p. 350)
Modifying master drawing properties (p. 351)
Managing folders (p. 354)
Adding master drawings in Master Drawing Catalog

Depending on your environment, the Master Drawing Catalog usually contains some master
drawings when you start using it, at least the predefined saved settings (drawing property files)
are displayed there. You can also add new saved settings, rule sets and cloning templates.
See also Adding saved settings (p. 348)

Adding saved settings

All predefined drawing property files are shown as saved settings in the Master Drawing
Catalog. When you save a new drawing property file, Tekla Structures shows it in the Master
Drawing Catalog.

1. Modify the drawing properties in the Single-part Drawing Properties, Cast Unit
Drawing Properties, Assembly Drawing Properties or General Arrangement
Drawing Properties dialog box.
2. Give a name to the property file in the box next to the Save as button and click Save as.
The new property file is automatically added to the Master Drawing Catalog. If it is not
displayed in the list, press F5 to refresh the view.
3. Modify master drawing properties: give the master drawing a name, add a preview
image, and enter a description and keywords.
Adding a rule set
To add a rule set in the Master Drawing Catalog:
1. Click the Add rule set toolbar command button .

2. In the Define Rules for Creating Drawings dialog box, select the drawing types you
want to create with the rule set.
You can select several drawing types with the same rule set. For example, you can use
the same rule set to create single-part drawings and assembly drawings.
3. Click Next.
4. In the next dialog box, click Add group and select the object groups for which you want
to create drawings, and a master drawing for each group. Only those master drawing
types are listed that can be used for the drawing types that you selected in the previous
dialog box.
You can use the buttons in the dialog box to do the following:
• Use Move up and Move down to move rule upwards and downwards in the list. If a
rule that is higher in the list creates a drawing of an object, another rule lower in the
list that would create a drawing of the same object will not do it again.

• Use Properties to view or modify the properties of a master drawing that you have
selected in the list.
• Use Preview to display a preview image of the selected master drawing.
5. Click Next. If you have selected several drawing types, repeat the previous steps for all
drawing types that you have selected.
6. Modify master drawing properties of the rule set: give a name to the rule set, add a
preview image, and enter a description and keywords.
7. Click Finish. The rule set is added in the Master Drawing Catalog.
Rule sets (p. 51)
Adding a cloning template

You can add drawings in the Master Drawing Catalog from the Drawing List.
Before you add a cloning template in the Master Drawing Catalog, create a drawing with the
desired properties and contents and save it.
To add a new cloning template:
1. Open the Drawing List by clicking Drawings & Reports > Drawing List.
2. Select the drawing, right-click and select Add to Master Drawing Catalog (Ctrl + M).
3. Modify the master drawing properties of the cloning template. On the General tab, enter
a name for the cloning template, and a short description and keywords.
Tekla Structures adds a preliminary preview image for the cloning template. Change it,
if necessary.
4. Go to the Drawing creation tab and specify how dimensions and marks are created, and
select the objects to be cloned from the master drawing.
5. Click OK.
The new cloning template is added in the Master Drawing Catalog. The icon is
displayed in the Master column of the Drawing List next to the drawing you added.
Limitations You cannot add general arrangement drawings or multidrawings to the Master Drawing
Catalog from the Drawing List. You can clone general arrangement drawings using the Clone
command in the Drawing List dialog box.
Removing master drawings from the Master Drawing Catalog

To remove master drawings from the Master Drawing Catalog:
1. In the Master Drawing Catalog, select the master drawings you want to remove.
2. Right-click and select Remove from Catalog.
3. Confirm the removal.
Tekla Structures removes the master drawing(s) from the catalog. Any created drawings
that are based on removed master drawings remain in the Drawing List. The catalog
properties that you have entered for the master drawing are not deleted. They are still
available for the master drawing if you decide to add the master drawing back to the
catalog.

Limitations In the folder view, you cannot remove master drawings from the Master Drawing Catalog
through the folders that you have created yourself. Use the Saved searches folders to display
the desired master drawings and then remove the extra ones.
See also Managing Master Drawing Catalog (p. 348)
Modifying master drawing properties

Each master drawing in the Master Drawing Catalog has its own properties. You can search
for master drawings on the basis of the master drawing name, description and keywords.
Make sure to always add all important information for each master
drawing in the Master Drawing Properties dialog box. This makes it a
lot easier to find the master drawings you are looking for.
See also Modifying rule set properties (p. 351)

Modifying properties of saved settings (p. 351)
Modifying properties and contents of wizard files (p. 352)
Modifying cloning template properties (p. 353)
Modifying properties of saved settings
To modify the master drawing properties of saved settings:

1. In the Master Drawing Catalog, double-click a master drawing of the desired type.
2. Modify the name of the drawing in the Name box.
3. Enter or modify the description of the master drawing. You can search master drawings
on the basis of data that you enter here.
4. Enter or modify keywords for the master drawing. Use spaces between words. You can
search master drawings on the basis of data that you enter here.
5. To add or change the preview image, click Change image and select the image. You can
use.bmp,.jpg,.jpeg, or.png images. We recommend that you use.png images.
6. Optional: To modify the drawing properties of the master drawing, click Edit drawing
properties to display the drawing properties dialog box.
Edit the properties and save them. Ensure that you have the correct drawing property file
name at the top.
7. Click OK.
See also Modifying master drawing properties (p. 351)

Modifying rule set properties

To modify the master drawing properties of rule sets:
2. In the Edit Rules dialog box, modify the drawing type selections if necessary.
3. Click Next.
4. Add or remove object groups and select the appropriate master drawing type.

5. Click Next and do the same for all selected drawing types.
7. Enter or modify the description of the master drawing.
You can search for master drawings based on the data you enter here.
8. Enter of modify keywords of the master drawing.
Use spaces between words. You can search master drawings on the basis of data you
enter here.
9. To add or change the preview image, click Change image and select the image.
You can use .bmp, .jpg, .jpeg, or .png images. We recommend that you use .png
images.
10. Click Save to save your changes.

Rule sets (p. 51)
Modifying properties and contents of wizard files

You can modify wizard files using a text editor through the Master Drawing Properties dialog
box. In previous versions of Tekla Structures, you could only edit and use wizard files through
the AutoDrawings dialog box.
To modify the master drawing properties of wizard files and the wizard file contents:
1. In the Master Drawing Catalog, double-click a wizard file.
Use spaces between words. You can search for master drawings based on the data you
enter here.
images.
6. To edit the contents of the wizard file, click Edit drawing properties.
The wizard file is opened in a text editor. Modify the contents of the file, and save and
close it.
7. Click OK.

Wizards (p. 52)
Wizard file contents

Wizard files consist of the following entries. Notice the use of parentheses.
set_drawing_type(assembly)
This line defines the type of drawing the wizard creates. The drawing type appears in
parentheses. The options are:
Option Creates
single single-part drawings
assembly assembly drawings
multi_single single-part multidrawings
multi_single_with_layout single-part multidrawings with layout

Option Creates
multi_assembly assembly multidrawings
multi_assembly_with_layout assembly multidrawings with layout
cast_unit cast unit drawings
set_drawing_attributes(column)
This line tells Tekla Structures which drawing properties to use when creating the drawings.
The name of the saved drawing properties appears in parentheses.
set_template_drawing
This line tells Tekla Structures to use the defined drawing as a template when creating a new
drawing. This line is used instead of the line set_drawing_attributes. The path and the
name of the drawing template are given in parenthesis like in the following example:
set_template_drawing("C:\TSModels\AngleModel":"[A.2]")
set_filter(column_filter)
This line tells Tekla Structures which selection filter to use to select the parts from which to
create drawings. The filter name appears in parentheses.
create_drawings()
Tekla Structures starts creating the drawings. This line should always appear immediately after
the lines set_drawing_type, set_drawing_attributes and set_filter.
See also Wizards (p. 52)

Modifying properties and contents of wizard files (p. 352)
Modifying cloning template properties

To modify the master drawing properties of cloning templates:
Use spaces between words. You can search for master drawings based on the data you
enter here.
images.
6. Go to the Drawing creation tab.
a For the Dimensions, Marks, and Marks for welds in model, define whether you
want to Clone them, recreate them automatically when you clone a drawing
(Create) or Ignore them in cloning.
b Select the objects to be cloned from the master drawing: Drawing welds, Level
marks, DWG/DXF, Text files, Texts, Symbols, Graphics, and Hyperlinks).
7. Click OK.


Managing folders
In the folder view of the Master Drawing Catalog you can manage the folders in the following
ways:
• Add new, rename, and delete folders
• Copy master drawings to another folder
• Delete master drawings from folders
• Change the folder location in the tree
Deleting master drawings from a folder or copying them to another

folder in the folder view does not affect the catalog contents in any way.
The folder view is just another way to help you to keep you master
drawings well organized.
See also Adding, renaming, and moving folders (p. 354)

Copying master drawings to another folder (p. 354)
Removing master drawings from a folder (p. 355)
Adding, renaming, and moving folders

To add, rename and move folders Master Drawing Catalog:
1. In the Master Drawing Catalog, click the folder view icon to go to the folder view.
2. Right-click the tree area in the upper part of the folder view, select Create new folder
and enter a name for the new folder.
Here we use the name PROJECT2008.
3. To create a subfolder, select a folder, in this case PROJECT2008, right-click and select
Create new subfolder.
4. Enter a name for the folder.
Here we use the name Site12. Create another subfolder Site10 in the same way.
5. To rename a folder, select the folder, right-click, select Rename and enter a new name.
Here we rename Site10 to Site11.
6. To move a folder upwards, select the folder, right-click and select Move up. In this case,
we move Site11 one step up.
Shortcut for renaming a folder: F2
See also Managing folders (p. 354)
Copying master drawings to another folder

To copy drawings to another folders:

2. Open the folder containing the master drawings that you want to copy to another folder
and select the drawings.
3. Right-click and select Add to and then select the desired folder.
The master drawings are copied. They are not removed from the original folder.
Use the following keys and key combinations for selecting drawings:
• Select all displayed drawings: Ctrl + A
• Select consecutive drawings: Click the first drawing, hold down
Shift and select the last drawing.
• Select several drawings: Click the first drawing, hold down Ctrl and
select the rest of the drawings.
Removing master drawings from a folder

You may want to remove master drawings from a folder in the folder view, for example, when
you have added the master drawings in another folder and do not need them in the original
folder anymore.
To remove drawings from a folder:
2. In the upper part of the folder view, click the folder from which you want to remove
drawings.
The master drawings in the folder are shown in the lower part of the view.
3. Select the master drawings to be deleted, right-click and select Remove from folder.
The master drawings are removed from the folder. The master drawings are not removed from
the catalog, just from the folder.

7 Drawing settings
This section provides more information about the various drawing settings you can modify in
Tekla Structures.
Contents View properties in drawings (p. 357)

DWG/DXF scaling options (p. 406)
7.1 View properties in drawings

Use the View Properties dialog box to view and modify the drawing view properties. In the
open drawing, this dialog box also allows you to access the properties of the marks, building
objects, and view filters.
The table below describes all drawing level and view level settings.

Drawing settings
Option Description
Front view, Top Define the views to be created.
view, Back view,
Bottom view,
Section views, End
views, 3D view
3D view attributes Defines the 3D view properties.
Scale Sets the view scale.
Coordinate system Sets the coordinate system of the drawing view.
Reflected view Displays load bearing structures, such as columns and beams on a
lower floor.
Yes displays structures with a continuous line, and No displays
them with a dashed line.
Rotation around (in Modify the view angle of 3D views. Enter the values for the angles
3D views) in y and x directions. Rotation in a drawing view is around the local
axis. Value 0.0 for both equals the front view.
Rotate coordinate Rotates the view around the x, y, or z axis of the parts using the
system Around X, entered values.
Around Y and
Around Z
Size Define as distances:
The x and y fields define the view size along the x and y axes of the
view. The depth fields define the depth of the view relative to, and
perpendicular to the view plane.
Fit by parts:
Tekla Structures fits the view contents in the drawing view frame
without leaving any unnecessary space.
View extension for Sets the distance from the drawing view to display neighboring
neighbor parts parts.
Use detailed object Allows you to create and apply object level settings on the view
level settings level.
Filters and Neighbor Opens a dialog box where you can create and modify view filters.
part filters
Place Set the placing for the drawing view to Fixed or Free.
Unfolded Yes shows and dimensions the bend lines in the drawing.
Undeformed Yes undeforms deformed parts and shows the developed
(undeformed) shape of the deformed parts in drawings.
Shortening If parts are very long and do not include any details, you can
shorten them.
Cut part activates shortening. This option is available only on view
level in an open drawing.
Minimum cut part length defines the minimum length of the
shortened part to show.
Space between cut parts defines the distance between cut parts.
Cut skew parts: Yes cuts skew parts.
Show openings/ Yes shows symbols in openings and recesses.
recess symbol

Drawing settings
Option Description
Datum point for Specified uses the entered value.
elevations
View plane measures reference points relative to the view plane.
Dimension creation Clones the dimensions separately for the selected view only. Using
method in this view this option affects the creation of the dimensions during cloning and
redimensioning of existing drawings.
View name Defines view names for front, top, back and bottom views.
Text Defines the view label text.
Symbol Defines a symbol to be used in the view label, and the color, size,
and line length of the symbol.
Label position Defines the vertical and horizontal position of the view label.
View direction Shows or hides the view direction marks and defines the mark
marks height.
Anchor bolt plan Show as anchor bolt plan: Yes shows the anchor bolt plan.
(GA drawings)
Enlarged part view scale defines the scale used in the enlarged
part views.
Create detail views: Yes creates separate detail views. If you select
No, Tekla Structures dimensions the anchor bolts in the enlarged
view. Tekla Structures groups similar detail views so that similar
details are drawn only once.
Detail view scale defines the scale used in the detail views.
Creating additional views of parts (p. 85)
Showing neighbor parts in views (p. 236)
Defining free or fixed placement of views (p. 253)
Unfolding polybeams (p. 239)
Creating elevation dimensions (p. 281)
View-specific dimension cloning (p. 57)
Showing section and end view direction marks (p. 245)

Drawing settings
7.2 Section view properties

Tekla Structures creates section views using the current properties in the Section View
Properties dialog box. You can modify all these settings before you create the drawing, and
some of them after creating the drawing.
Option Description
Attributes
Scale The section view drawing scale.
Section depth Defines the positive and negative distances
of the section view when views are not
combined.
Distance for combining parts Defines the distance range for combining cut
views.
View extension for neighbor parts Defines the boundaries of the drawing view.
Left section Define the view Direction of the section.
Middle section
Right section
Minimum cut part length Defines the minimum cut length of the
shortened part.
Space between cut parts Defines the distance between cut parts in the
drawing view.
Cut skew parts Defines whether to shorten skewed parts.
View label
Text Defines the text on the section view label.
The ... buttons next to the text boxes open
the Mark Contents dialog box.
Symbol Section view label symbol.
Color Color of the section view label symbol.
Size Size of the section view label symbol.
Line length Length of the section view label line.
Label position: Vertical Vertical location of the section view label.
Label position: Horizontal Horizontal location of the section view label.
View direction marks: Section views Visibility of the section view direction mark.
View direction marks: Section views Visibility of the section view direction mark.
View direction marks: End views Visibility of the end view direction mark.
Cutting line
Line Length and offset of the cutting line.
Color Color of the cutting line.
Section mark

Drawing settings
Option Description
Text Defines the text on the section mark. Click
the ... buttons next to the text fields to open
the Mark Contents dialog box.
Color Color of the section mark symbol.
Symbol Left and right section mark symbol.
Size Size of the section mark symbol.
x/y Offset of the section mark symbol.

7.3 Dimension and dimensioning properties

This section provides more information about the properties related to dimensions and
dimensioning.
See also General dimension properties (p. 361)

General dimensioning properties (p. 366)
Dimension grouping properties (p. 372)
Sub-assembly dimensioning properties (p. 373)
Reinforcement dimensioning properties (p. 373)
Grid and overall dimensioning properties (GA drawings) (p. 374)
Dimensions (p. 98)
General dimension properties

Use the General tab in the Dimension Properties dialog box to view and modify the format,
type, unit, precision, extension line, grouping and placing settings of the dimensions.
The drawing level Dimension Properties dialog box and object level Dimension Properties
dialog box contents differ. The table below contains all options for both dialog boxes.

Drawing settings
Option Description
Dimension types: Sets the dimension type for straight dimensions.
Straight
Relative: Point to point dimensions.
Absolute: Dimensions from a common starting point.
Relative and absolute: Combination of point to point and

common start point.
US absolute: Dimensions from a common starting point, which

include a running dimension mark (RD).
US absolute 2: Similar to US absolute, but it changes short

dimensions to relative.
Absolute plus short relatives: Similar to Absolute, but it
changes short dimensions to relative. Also called internal
absolute. This option may show both dimensions, but it does not
show relative dimensions when dimensions are long. This option
shows the absolute dimensions inside the dimension lines.
Absolute plus all relatives above the absolutes: Similar to
Relative and absolute, but it places the relative dimensions
above the absolute.
Dimension types: In x As above, but overrides the straight setting for horizontal
direction dimensions. If you use the blank option, Tekla Structures uses the
Straight option settings. The x direction usually means
dimensions parallel to the drawing x axis.
Angle Defines the appearance of angle dimensions.
Shows the angle dimensions in degrees on side.
Shows the angle dimensions in degrees at angle vertex.
Shows the angle dimensions using a triangle.

You can also set the Triangle base length to control the base
dimension shown for bevel dimensions.
Shows the angle dimensions using a triangle with degrees.
Triangle base length The base length of a triangle.

Curved Defines whether to use angle units or length for curved
dimensions.
This setting can only be adjusted in drawing mode.
Short extension line Defines whether Tekla Structures should create extension lines all
of the same length or use the short extension line automatically if
the dimension line falls on a grid line.
Units Defines the units used in dimensioning.
Precision Defines dimension precision: rounding, imperial units.
Format Defines the number of decimals and their appearance.
Use grouping Defines the appearance of large dimension values.

Drawing settings
Option Description
Combine equal Combines equal dimensions. The choices are None, 3*60 or
dimensions 3*60=180.
The accuracy of combining equal dimensions is 0.1.
Minimum number to Defines the minimum number of dimensions to combine.
combine
Dimension line Defines the space between parallel dimension lines.
spacing
Short dimensions Defines the text location of short dimensions: between or outside
the dimension lines.
Place Search margin is the farthest distance Tekla Structures uses
when searching for an empty space for the dimension.
Minimal distance is the closest distance Tekla Structures uses to
search for an empty space for a dimension.
Direction is the side on which Tekla Structures places dimensions
(relative to the object being dimensioned). This option is
available only for manual dimensions.
Placing is the method used to place dimension. This option is
available only for manual dimensions. The choices are:
• Free lets Tekla Structures to decide the location and direction
of the dimension based on the Direction settings.
• Fixed allows you to place the dimension at any point.

XS_DIMENSION_DECIMAL_SEPARATOR
XS_ANGLE_DIMENSION_SYMBOL_SIZE_FACTOR
Dimension format, precision and unit properties

Use the General tab of the Dimensions dialog box to view and modify properties related to
dimension format.
The integer values are provided for situations like when you need to use the value in an
advanced option.
Integer
Option value Notes
Format
### 0
###[.#] 1
###.# 2
###[.##] 3
###.## 4
###[.###] 5
###.### 6
### #/# 7

Drawing settings
Integer
Option value Notes
###/##.### 8 This option is available only for

straight dimensions.
Precision
0.00 1 For defining precision with
rounding. For example, with
0.50 2
precision 0.33 the actual dimension
0.33 3 50.40 is shown as 50.33.
0.25 4
1/8 5 For imperial units
1/16 6
1/32 7
1/10 8 For defining precision without
rounding
1/100 9
1/1000 10
Units
automatic Uses the units defined in the model
mm millimeters
cm centimeters
m meters
foot - inch feet and inches
Inches are converted into integer
feet, and the remaining inches are
shown in inches.
cm / m centimeters and meters
Dimensions under 100 cm are
shown in centimeters, and
dimensions above 100 cm are
shown in meters. Millimeters are
shown as superscript.
inch inches
Dimension appearance properties

Use the Appearance tab in the Dimension Properties dialog box to view and modify the
settings affecting the dimension appearance.
Option Description
Line, Arrow
Color The color of the dimension line. This controls the line weight in
printed drawings.
Arrow shape Controls the type of mark used with the dimension line.

Drawing settings
Option Description
US Absolute Controls the type of mark used with the dimension line in US
dimensions Absolute dimensions.
Level dimensions Controls the type of mark used with the dimension line in level
dimensions.
Sets the height and the length of the arrowhead.
Text
Color Controls the color of the mark text. The color controls the line
weight.
Height Controls the height of the text used in the dimension marks in the
drawing.
Font Controls which font is used in the dimension mark.
Frame Defines a frame for the dimension mark.
Place Defines how the dimension mark is placed relative to the
dimension line.
Advanced dimension properties

Use the Advanced tab in the Dimension Properties dialog box to view and modify the check
dimension, knock-off dimension, plate side mark and dimension exaggeration settings.
Option Description
Plate side marks: Type, Color, Offset and Creates plate side marks automatically to
Size plate dimensions. Sets the color and size of
the mark, and the offset from the dimension
line along the leader line.
Check dimensions: Line color, Text color Defines the appearance of the check
and Text height dimensions.
Knock-off dimension type Defines the type of dimension to use in
knock-off dimensions.
Exaggeration Specified exaggerates narrow dimensions.
Select the Direction: Left/ Down, Right/Up
or Both.
Set the Origin, Width, Position and Height.
See also Creating exaggerated dimensions (p. 259)

Creating check dimensions (p. 285)
Dimension mark and dimension tag properties

Use the Marks and Tags tabs in the Dimension Properties dialog box to view and modify the
contents of dimension marks and tags in an open drawing.

Drawing settings
Option Description
Marks tab
Prefix Displays the selected text before the numeric value
of the dimension.
The prefix value cannot be plain numbers, and the
prefix value cannot end with a number.
Visibility of numeric value Defines whether the numeric value of the dimension
is visible or hidden.
If you hide the numeric value of the dimension, the
prefix and postfix text will still be shown.
Postfix Displays the selected text after the numeric value of
the dimension.
The postfix value cannot be plain numbers, and the
postfix value cannot start with a number when the
numeric value of the dimension is visible.
... buttons Define dimension mark contents.
Plate side marks Specified creates plate side marks to plate
dimension using the specified color, size and offset.
Offset means the distance of the mark from the
dimension line.
Exaggeration Specified exaggerates narrow dimensions.
Select the Direction: Left/ Down, Right/Up or Both.
Set the Origin, Width, Position and Height.
Tags tab
Tags area Adds user-defined tags to dimension lines.
... buttons Define dimension tag contents and appearance.
Rotation > Parallel to dimension line does not
rotate the tag. This is the default value.
Rotation > Perpendicular to dimension line
rotates the tag.
Include part count in the tag Yes includes part count in the tag.
Exclude parts according to filter Select a drawing view filter that removes desired
content from the tag.

Showing plate side marks (p. 125)
Example: Removing dimension tag content (p. 106)
General dimensioning properties

Use the General tab in the Dimensioning Properties dialog box to view and modify the
general settings of the dimensions.

Drawing settings
Option Description
Dimensioning type Standard is used for almost all dimensioning.
Truss meets the specific requirements needed to dimension truss
drawings. It dimensions the position and length of the diagonals.
The dimensioning is done only if the diagonals are secondary
parts that are welded to upper and lower chords, which are main
parts and not welded to any parts. If the truss welding is done
some other way, standard dimensioning is used.
Number of views: Yes minimizes the number of views that Tekla Structures creates.
Minimize (or Minimize
Also check the settings in the drawing View properties dialog
number of views)
box.
Combine dimensions Combines several single dimensions into one dimension line.
In Options, select the combination level. The larger the number,
the more Tekla Structures combines the dimensions.
Option 4.5 uses a combination of option 5 for main part and
option 4 for secondary parts.
If the distance between two details is less than the defined
Minimum distance, Tekla Structures combines the dimensions.
The Distance means the distance within which Tekla Structures
combines internal dimensions.
Close dimensions Completes dimension lines to include the entire part.
No does not close dimensions
In X only closes dimensions in the x direction and leaves others
open
All closes all dimensions
This setting is not relevant to profile shape dimensions.
Close dimensions: Yes closes short dimension(s).
Short dimensions
With No, the open dimension is the middle one rather than the
short end dimension.
When you leave short dimensions open, Tekla Structures leaves
out the longer dimension line in dimension lines that contain two
dimensions. If dimension lines contain three dimensions, Tekla
Structures leaves out the middle one. This option does not affect
dimension lines with more than three dimensions.
Forward offset Defines the distance Tekla Structures uses to search for the base
point of a dimension. If Tekla Structures does not find a base point
(corner) within the Forward offset search distance, it uses an
edge point.
The Centered bolt setting affects on how the dimension is
displayed.
Recognizable Defines the limit for dimensioning asymmetry in secondary parts.
distance In some cases it is important to look at the asymmetrical
relationship of parts, so that an asymmetric secondary part is
correctly connected to a main part. You can use Recognizable
distance to have asymmetry reflected in dimensioning. If the
asymmetry is smaller than the distance you enter here, Tekla
Structures represents it using a dimension.

Drawing settings
Option Description
Part mark to None creates no part mark on the dimension line.
dimension line
Assembly overall dimensions creates a part mark on the
assembly overall dimension line.
Extreme bolts creates a part mark on the dimension line between
the outermost bolts.
Main dimension Defines the side on which Tekla Structures places the Assembly
position overall, Main part work point, and Knock-off dimensions.
Auto treats the main dimensions in the same way as other
dimensions.
Above places the main dimensions above the part (or to the left
for vertical parts).
Below places the main dimensions below the part.
Above places the skew position dimensions of the main part
below the part and Below places them above.
Grid dimensions Creates grid dimensions.The values are: None, Individual spans,
Overall or Individual spans and overall.
Grid dimension Sets the grid dimension position. The values are: Main view -
position above, Main view - below, Top view - above, Top view -
bottom, Bottom view - above, Bottom view - below, Back view
- above, Back view - below, All views - above, or All views -
below.
See also Dimensioning single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings (p. 278)
Example: Closing dimension (p. 295)
Example: Forward offset (p. 300)
Example: Recognizable distance (p. 300)
XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_IN_ASSEMBLY
XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_STRICT_POSITION
XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_IN_SINGLE
Position dimensioning properties

Use the Position dimensions tab in the Dimensioning Properties dialog box to view and
modify the settings for the position dimensions in single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings.
Note that the contents of the dialog box vary depending on the drawing type, and all the options
listed below are not available for all drawing types.

Drawing settings
Option Description
Position bolts/parts to Controls from where Tekla Structures creates the part/bolt position
dimensions.
None creates no position dimensions.
Main part creates the dimensions from the main part reference line.
Working points creates the dimensions between the work points,
such as the intersections of main and neighbor part reference lines.
Embedded objects Creates position dimensions for locating embedded objects in cast
unit drawings. The embedded objects are custom components
attached to the cast unit.
As secondary objects dimensions embedded objects in cast unit
drawings the same way as secondary parts.
By reference points dimensions embedded objects to their
reference point, which is the origin of the custom component.
Secondary part Creates dimensions to bolt holes or edges of the secondary part.
None creates no position dimensions for secondary parts.
By bolts dimensions bolt hole locations in the secondary parts.
By parts dimensions edges of secondary parts.
By both dimensions bolt hole locations and edges of the secondary
part.
Secondary part Aligns dimensions with the main or neighboring part. Only for
dimension direction skewed clip angles or shear plates.
Position from Sets the starting point for running dimensions. Only for skewed
clip angles or shear plates bolted to a neighboring part.
Reversed direction for Yes changes the direction of running dimensions. With this option,
running dimensions you can set the zero point to the end of a member rather than to the
start.
Main part bolt position On creates dimensions to the bolt hole locations in the main part.
Main part skew Yes creates horizontal and vertical check dimensions representing
position the skew position of a brace. Created between the work points of
the main part.
Skew check dimensions are located in the front view. Their
location depends on the Main dimension side setting selected on
the General tab. When the main dimensions are above the part, the
skew dimensions are below, and vice versa.
Skew position Defines how Tekla Structures dimensions skewed secondary part
positions.
None creates no dimensions for skewed secondary part positions.
Angle creates an angle dimension for the secondary part.
Dimensions creates dimensions for the skewed position of the
secondary part.
Both creates both the angle and the dimensions.
Centered part Controls the dimensions of centrally-placed parts. These settings
have an effect only if position dimensions are created.
Internal dimensions the centered parts overall size.
Position dimensions the part to the main part center lines.
None creates no centered part dimensions.

Drawing settings
Option Description
Centered bolt Controls the dimensions of centrally-placed bolt groups.
Internal dimensions the centered bolts spread.
Position dimensions the bolts to the main part center-lines.
Centered bolt overrides the Secondary part bolt internal option
for centered bolts. This only applies to bolts located centrally on
the part.
Elevation dimension On creates elevation dimensions.
Combine equal Combines equal dimensions. The choices are None, 3*60 or
dimensions 3*60=180.
The accuracy of combining equal dimensions is 0.1.
combine
See also XS_PART_POSITION_TO_EDGE_NEAREST_TO_NEIGHBOUR

XS_WORKING_POINTS_VALID_ALSO_OUTSIDE_PART
Part dimensioning properties

Use the options on the Part dimensioning tab of the Dimensioning Properties dialog box to
view and modify part dimensioning settings for single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings.
Option Description
Internal Creates internal dimensions for secondary parts connected to the main
part.
None creates dimensions for secondary parts.
Necessary creates only the dimensions that are necessary for assembling
the parts.
All creates all dimensions for the secondary parts.
Main part Once creates one overall dimension for the main part.
overall
All creates overall dimensions for main parts in all views.
dimensions
None creates no overall dimensions for the main part.
The Assembly part overall dimension settings have some effect on
these options.
Assembly part Length only creates overall dimensions for an entire assembly or cast
overall unit in the x direction only.
dimensions
All creates overall dimensions for an assembly or cast unit in all
directions.
Off creates no overall dimensions for an assembly or a cast unit.
Main part work On creates a check dimension between the outermost work points.
points
Main part On creates dimensions to show the shape of a main part.
shape (Shape
By default, Tekla Structures automatically draws shape dimensions on
dimensions)
both ends of a beam, even if the ends are symmetrical.

Drawing settings
Option Description
Main part On creates radius dimensions for curved chamfers and round holes in the
radius main part.
dimensions
This option is available only if you have set Main part shape dimensions
to On.
Bevel On creates linear dimensions of a bevel.
dimensions
Bevel angle Creates an angle dimension and defines which side of the bevel to
dimension. The choices are None, Angle of cut and Angle of beam.
Knock off On creates check dimensions from the edge of the main part to the work
dimensions point.
Preferred dim Sets the preferred view (front or side) for part dimensions.
side
From the On creates dimensions indicating the distance from the closest floor level
nearest floor to the bottom and/or top of the parts.
level to part
From grid to On creates dimensions showing the offset of a part from the grid to the
part center line part center line.
From grid to On creates dimensions showing the offset of a part from the grid to the
part ends near or far end of the part.
Example: Part dimensioning (p. 287)
XS_SINGLE_PART_SHAPE
XS_EQUAL_SHAPE_DIMENSIONS_TO_BOTH_ENDS_LIMIT
XS_CREATE_ROUND_HOLE_DIMENSIONS
Bolt dimensioning properties

Use the options on the Bolt dimensions tab of the Dimensioning Properties dialog box to
select which bolt dimensions to create and how in single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings.
The options include locating the bolts on the main and secondary parts, and in relation to the
work points.
Option Description
Main part bolt Creates internal dimensions for bolt groups in the main part.
internal dimensions
None creates none of the internal bolt dimensions.
Internal creates bolt group internal dimensions (distances between
bolts).
All creates edge distance and bolt group internal dimensions. Edge
distance is the dimension from the outermost bolt to the part edge.
Main part bolt Indicates whether the dimensions are parallel to the part or the
internal dimensions: bolt group.
Skewed bolt group
The choices are No dimensions, In part direction, and In bolt
group direction.

Drawing settings
Option Description
Secondary part bolt Creates internal dimensions for bolt groups in the secondary part.
internal dimensions
The choices are None, Necessary, Internal, and All.
Secondary part bolt Aligns the bolt dimensions with the secondary part or bolt group.
internal dimensions:
The choices are In part direction, No dimensions, and In bolt
Skewed bolt group
group direction
Distance between Creates check dimension between the outermost bolts.
extreme bolts:
The choices are None, Main part, and Assembly.
Extreme bolts
Distance between Creates check dimensions from the outermost bolts to the work
extreme bolts: points.
Extreme bolts to
work points Yes creates the check dimensions.
Preferred dim side Sets the preferred view (front or side) for bolt dimensions.
Combine bolt Sets the format of the combined bolt group internal dimensions.
dimensions
You can combine bolt group internal dimensions and display them
in the format 3*60 or 3*60=180, or have single dimensions.
combine
Example: Combining bolt group dimensions (p. 299)
XS_COMBINED_BOLT_DIM_CHARACTER
Dimension grouping properties

Use the Dimension grouping tab in Dimensioning Properties dialog box to view and modify
settings for dimension grouping in single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings. Note that the
contents of the dialog box vary depending on the drawing type, and all the options listed below
are not available for all drawing types.
Option Description
Activate dimension Selects the objects for grouping.
grouping
Parts Groups according to parts.
Bolts Groups according to bolts.
Components Groups according to components.
Cuts/Shapes Groups according to cuts or shapes.
Automatic tagging Defines how to display information in a dimension line.
Display tags Displays tags.
Include part count in Includes part count in the tag.
the tag
Do not display Does not display part marks for grouped items.
marks for the
grouped items

Drawing settings
Option Description
Available elements Elements available to define identical conditions.
Add Adds items to Selected elements list.
Remove Removes items from Selected elements list.
Move up Moves the element higher in the list.
Move down Moves the element lower in the list.
Update grouping Yes updates dimension grouping automatically when the model
when model changes.
changes
Sub-assembly dimensioning properties

Use the options on the Sub-assembly tab of the Assembly - Dimensioning Properties dialog
box to view and modify which dimensions to create and how for sub-assemblies.
Option Description
Dimension parts inside sub- Defines whether to dimension parts inside sub-
assemblies assemblies.
Yes creates internal dimensions for parts inside
sub-assemblies.
No does not create internal dimensions for parts
inside sub-assemblies.
Measure sub-assembly position Defines the position from which the sub-assembly
from is measured.
None does not measure the sub-assembly position.
Bolt measures the position of the sub-assembly
from the bolts. If bolts are not included in the sub-
assembly, or if it is not possible to measure the
position from bolts, Tekla Structures measures the
sub-assembly position from the reference point.
Extreme points measures the position of the sub-
assembly from the bounding box of the sub-
assembly.
Reference point measures the position of the sub-
assembly from the reference point.
Reinforcement dimensioning properties

Use the Reinforcement dimensions tab in the Dimensioning Properties dialog box to view
and modify the setting affecting the creation of reinforcement dimensions and how they are
displayed.

Drawing settings
Option Description
Dimensions for On creates dimensions for reinforcing bar groups. This also
reinforcing bar groups activates the other selections on this tab.
Mark location Sets the mark type and location.
Selecting the first choice in the list creates dimension

marks.
Selecting one of the other options in the list box

creates tagged dimension marks. The location of the tag is
indicated by the small rectangle in the option.
Edit mark contents Opens the Dimension mark content dialog box where you can
select what you want to include in the dimension mark.
Close dimension to Yes automatically adds closing dimensions to the edge of the
binding geometry part.
Grid and overall dimensioning properties (GA drawings)

Use the Grid tab in the General - Dimensioning Properties dialog box to view and modify
settings for grid and overall dimensions in general arrangement drawings.
Option Description
Grid line dimensions On creates grid dimension lines.
Overall dimensions On creates the overall dimensions.
Dimension positioning: Positions the vertical grid and overall dimension lines to the
Horizontal Left or Right side of the drawing or on Both sides.
Dimension positioning: Positions the horizontal grid and overall dimension lines Above
Vertical or Below the drawing or Both.
See also Dimensioning general arrangement drawings (p. 262)
Part dimensioning properties (GA drawings)

Use the Parts tab in the General - Dimensioning Properties dialog box to view and modify
settings for part dimensions in general arrangement drawings.

Drawing settings
Option Description
Maximum leader line Controls how close the dimension lines are positioned to the
length: Outside parts they are dimensioning. Defines that the outside dimension
dimensions lines take the maximum leader line length from the grid line.
Maximum leader line Controls how close the dimension lines are positioned to the
length: Inside parts they are dimensioning. Defines that the inside dimension
dimensions lines take the maximum leader line length from the part
reference point.
Include parts not On dimensions the parts partly outside the view. Off will not
entirely in view dimension these parts.
Maximum number of Specifies the maximum number of dimension lines allowed
outside dimensions outside the grid. When you dimension different objects on
different dimension lines, using this setting helps you to create
cleaner drawings.
Once the desired maximum is reached, Tekla Structures creates
the dimensions inside the grid.
Object group Specifies different object groups to be dimensioned on different
dimensioning rules dimension lines.
Object group The object group to be dimensioned.
Positioning No dimensions does not create dimensions for the parts.
Inside grid creates dimensions next to or near the parts being
dimensioned. All part dimensions are placed inside the grid
when the parts are inside the grid. The dimension will still be
outside, even if you have selected Inside grid because of where
the parts are in the end bay and the end being dimensioned to is
next to the outside.
Outside grid creates dimensions to parts and positions them
outside the grid.
Either creates dimensions to parts and positions them either
inside or outside the grid depending on the part position and the
setting of the option Maximum number of outside
dimensions.
You must use the Either option if you define the Maximum
number of outside dimensions, so that Tekla Structures can
position dimensions inside the grid when the maximum number
of dimensions is reached outside the grid.
Horizontal position Left side positions all dimensions to horizontal parts to the left
of the grid.
Right side positions all dimensions to horizontal parts to the
right of the grid.
Distributed to both sides positions all dimensions to
horizontal parts to the grid nearest the part they are
dimensioning.
Vertical position Above positions all dimensions to vertical parts above the grid.
Below positions all dimensions to vertical parts below the grid.
Distributed to both sides positions all dimensions to vertical
parts to the grid nearest the part they are dimensioning.
See also Creating a selection filter


Drawing settings
Example: Limiting the number of outside dimensions (p. 266)
Example: Dimensioning parts partly outside the view (p. 265)
Example: Using maximum leader line length options (p. 264)
7.4 Mark properties

This section provides more information about the properties related to mark appearance and
contents.
See also Mark appearance properties (p. 376)

Reinforcement mark merging properties (p. 379)
Level mark properties (p. 381)
Mark appearance properties

Use the General and Contents tabs in the Mark Properties dialog box of different types of
marks to view and modify the settings affecting the mark appearance. For reinforcement marks,
the corresponding settings are located on the Contents and Appearance tabs on the drawing
property level. For views, the corresponding settings are located on the Contents tab in the
Mark Contents dialog box.
Note that all the listed settings are not available for all marks.
Option Description
Contents tab:
Frame around elements: Type and Color Defines the element frame type and color
Add frame allows you to add frames around
elements.
Font: Color, Height and Font Defines the font type, color, and height used
in element texts individually for each
element. Clicking Select gives more font
choices.
General or Appearance tab:
Visible In one view creates marks in one view only.
In all views creates marks in all views.

Drawing settings
Option Description
In main parts These options are for bolt marks.
In secondary parts Visible displays bolt marks.
In sub-assembly main parts Not visible does not display bolt marks.
In sub-assembly secondary parts
Visibility in view For some marks, this option can be set on the
drawing level, and for others only on the
view level.
distributed distributes the marks in the view.
Tekla Structures only creates marks that are
not visible in the other views.
always always creates marks in the view,
irrespective the settings in other views.
preferred acts as distributed, but the
preferred view has a higher priority.
none creates no marks.
Parts out of view plane This option is available only in view level
properties.
Visible displays marks outside of the view in
the drawing.
Not visible displays no marks outside the
view.
Bolt size limit This option is for bolt marks.
Filters standard-sized bolt marks out of
drawings. Tekla Structures does not display
bolt marks of the size you enter here.
There are several variables that affect the
Bolt size limit, see the See also list below.
Merge marks This option is for part marks and surface
treatment marks.
On merges marks.
Frame around mark: Type and Color Define the frame to be used around marks,
and the color of the frame.
Leader line: Type, Arrow and Use hidden Define the leader line type and line arrow
lines for hidden parts. type, and select to hide leader lines for
hidden parts.
Place Search margin is the distance within which
Tekla Structures searches for a space to place
a mark.
Minimal Distance is the minimum distance
of the mark from the part.
Quarter defines the areas Tekla Structures
searches for a space to place the mark.
See also Adding automatic marks (p. 303)

Modifying view label marks (p. 246)
XS_OMITTED_DIAMETER_TYPE

Drawing settings
XS_OMITTED_BOLT_TYPE
XS_OMITTED_BOLT_ASSEMBLY_TYPE
Leader line types

You can use leader lines with text, symbols, associative notes and marks to make it clearer to
which item it is related to.
Option Description
Texts
Symbols
Level marks
Revision marks
Part marks
Associative note
See also Adding associative notes (p. 129)

Adding part marks (p. 128)
Adding symbols in drawings (p. 156)
Adding text (p. 133)
Positioning properties of view label, section and detail marks

Use the Position tab of the Mark Contents dialog box in view properties to set the positioning
options for view labels marks, section marks and detail marks.

Drawing settings
Option Description
Show on For section marks.
Defines if the section marks are shown at
both ends of the cut line or at the left or right
end.
Text position Defines the position of the mark text in
relation to the line or in relation to the
symbol or symbol center line.
Horizontal offset sets the horizontal offset
of the mark text from the line.
Vertical offset sets the vertical offset of the
mark text from the line.
Text rotation For section marks.
Defines the rotation of the mark text.
Alignment: For view label marks.
Defines if the view label mark is aligned to
the center, right, or left.
See also Modifying view label marks (p. 246)

Reinforcement mark merging properties

Use the Merging tab in the Cast Unit - Reinforcement Mark Properties dialog box to view
and modify the settings affecting the merging of the reinforcement marks in cast unit drawings.
Option Image Description

Identical marks in One leader line per row merges the marks and
same cast unit creates one leader line for a row of reinforcing
bars.
Parallel leader lines merges the marks and
creates parallel leader lines.
Leader lines to one point merges the marks and
draws all leader lines to one point.
No merge does not merge marks. Tekla
Structures creates an individual leader line for
each mark.
If you select No merge, you still need to define
the mark content for the marks that Tekla
Structures automatically merges on the Merging
tab.
Preferred merge Merge vertically merges the marks in the
direction vertical direction of the drawing.
Merge horizontally merges the marks in the

horizontal direction of the drawing.
See also Elements in merged reinforcement marks (p. 386)


Drawing settings
Weld mark properties
Use the Weld Mark Properties dialog box to view or modify the properties of a weld manually
added in a drawing.
Option Description
Prefix a= design throat thickness, s= penetration throat thickness, or z=
leg length
Size The size of the weld.
Type The type of the weld.
Angle The angle of weld preparation, bevels, or groove.
Tekla Structures displays the angle between the weld type symbol
and the fill type contour symbol.
Contour The fill type contour of a weld can be:
• None
• Flush
• Convex
• Concave
Finish Tekla Structures displays the finish symbol above the weld type
symbol in drawings. The options are:
• G (Grind)
• M (Machine)
• C (Chip)
• (Flush finished weld)

• (Smooth blended weld face)
Length The length of a regular weld depends on the length of the
connection between the welded parts. You can set the exact length
of a polygon weld by, for example, defining the start and end points
of the weld.
Pitch The center-to-center spacing of welds for non-continuous welds.
Pitch is shown in the weld mark if the value is greater than 0.0.
To create a non-continuous weld, define the center-to-center
spacing and the pitch of the welds. Tekla Structures calculates the
distance between the welds as the pitch minus the length of the
weld.
By default, Tekla Structures uses the – character to separate weld
length and pitch, e.g. 50–100. To change the separator to @, for
example, set the advanced option
XS_WELD_LENGTH_CC_SEPARATOR_CHAR to @.
Effective throat The weld size used in weld strength calculation.
Root opening The space between the welded parts.
Reference text Additional information to appear in the weld symbol. For example,
information about the weld specification or process.
Edge/Around Indicates whether only one edge or the entire perimeter of a face
should be welded.
A circle in the weld symbol in drawings indicates the Around
option has been used.

Drawing settings
Option Description
Workshop/Site Indicates where the weld should be made.
Stitch weld Set this option to Yes to create a staggered, intermittent weld.
Stitch welds are s are staggered on both sides of the welded part.
Tekla Structures shows the weld type symbols as staggered in weld
symbols.
If you set this option to No, a non- staggered intermittent weld is
created. To show the pitch in a weld mark, set Pitch to a value
greater than 0.0.
Placing Search margin is the farthest distance Tekla Structures uses when
searching for an empty space for the weld mark.
Minimal distance is the closest distance Tekla Structures uses to
search for an empty space for a weld mark.
Direction is the side on which Tekla Structures places weld marks
(relative to the related object).
Placing is the method used to place welds marks:
• Free lets Tekla Structures decide the location and direction of
the dimension based on the Direction settings.
• Fixed allows you to place the weld at any point.
See also Adding weld marks (p. 151)
Level mark properties

Use the options on the Level Mark Properties dialog box to view and modify the level mark
contents.
Option Description
Prefix Displays text before the mark.
Prefix for positive level + displays a + character in front of the value.
Visibility of numeric value Defines if the numeric values are visible or
hidden.
Postfix Displays text after the mark.
Precision Defines the precision of the level mark
dimension.
Format Defines the format of the level mark
dimension.
Use grouping Defines whether to use different grouping
options to represent the level mark
dimensions.
Units Defines the units used in level mark
dimensions. The available values are
automatic, mm, cm, m, foot - inch and
inch.

Drawing settings
7.5 Mark elements
The elements and options selected on the mark properties Content tab define the contents of
the marks in drawings.
See also Common elements in marks (p. 382)

Part mark elements (p. 383)
Reinforcement mesh mark elements (p. 386)
Elements in merged reinforcement marks (p. 386)
Connection mark elements (p. 387)
Surface treatment mark elements (p. 388)
View, section view and detail view label mark elements (p. 389)
Common elements in marks

Here is a list of elements that are available for most of the marks.
Element Description
User-defined Available for building object marks.
attributes
Adds a user-defined attribute to the mark. You can also use
template fields for user-defined attributes.
In marks, you cannot use template attributes such as
MODEL_TOTAL that refer to the whole model. Marks only check
the information from the object in the drawing and not from the
whole model.
Text Opens a dialog box where you can enter text in the mark. The
maximum number of characters is 255.
Symbol Opens a dialog box where you can change the symbol file in use
and select a symbol from the Tekla Structures symbol file to add
to the mark.
<> Adds spaces between mark elements.
<--’ Adds a line feed between the elements to create multi-row marks.
The default space between the lines depends on the text height
and can be changed with the advanced option
XS_MARK_ELEMENT_SPACE_FACTOR.

Drawing settings
Element Description
<-- Adds a backspace between the desired elements to remove the
default space between them. The default space between the
elements depends on the text height and can be changed with the
advanced option XS_MARK_ELEMENT_SPACE_FACTOR.
Template Available for building object marks.
Adds in the mark a custom graphical template created with
Template Editor. Opens a dialog box where you can select the
template.

XS_MARK_ELEMENT_SPACE_FACTOR
Part mark elements

The following is a list of the elements specific to part marks and neighbor part marks. Some of
the available elements are not listed here, because they are common to many types of marks,
and listed separately.
You can define part mark options independently for main and secondary parts and for sub-
assembly main and secondary parts.
Element Description
Assembly position Adds the prefix and position number of the assembly.
Part position Adds the prefix and position number of the part.
Profile Adds the profile name of part, assembly, or cast unit main part.
Material Adds the material of part, assembly, or cast unit main part.
Name Adds the name of part, assembly, or cast unit main part.
Class Adds the class of part, assembly, or cast unit main part.
Finish Adds the finish of part, assembly, or cast unit main part.
Size Adds the size of the part or the assembly or cast unit main part.
Length Adds the length of the part or assembly, or of the cast unit main
part.
Camber Adds the camber of the part or the assembly or cast unit main part
(if this user-defined part attribute is set).
Fittings (NS/FS) Displays the near side/far side marks in the part mark. (only
available in front views).

Drawing settings
Element Description
Face direction Displays main compass direction (North, East, South, West) of the
face, where the mark is added. The direction can only be shown if
• the face is vertical
• the direction is the same for all assemblies with the same
assembly position number
In other cases, the element produces no text to mark.
Furthermore, face direction is not shown for columns in general
arrangement drawings, if you have set Mark always to center of
column in GA drawings to Yes in Tools > Options > Options...
> Orientation marks.
Gage of outstanding Adds the hole gage.
leg
You can control the format of this option with the advance option
XS_GAGE_OF_OUTSTANDING_LEG_STRING.
Center-to-center Adds center-to-center distance in the mark.
distance
You can control the format of this option with the advanced
options
and
XS_CENTER_TO_CENTER_DISTANCE_IN_ONE_PART_STRING.

XS_GAGE_OF_OUTSTANDING_LEG_STRING
ASSEMBLY_TOP_LEVEL
TOP_LEVEL
BOTTOM_LEVEL
Bolt mark elements

Here is a list of the elements specific to part marks and neighbor part marks. Some of the
available elements are not listed here, because they are common to many types of marks, and
listed separately.
You can define bolt mark options independently for site and shop bolts.
Element Description
Bolt length Adds the length of the bolt.
Bolt diameter Adds the bolt diameter.
Hole diameter Adds the hole diameter.
Material Adds the bolt material grade.
Standard Adds the bolt standard.
Short name Adds the bolt’s short name. This can be the commercial name of a
specific bolt, for example.

Drawing settings
Element Description
Full name Adds the complete name of the bolt. This name is visible in the
dialog box list.
Assembly type Adds the bolt’s assembly type.
Number of bolts Adds the quantity of bolts.
Slot length (x, y) Adds the slot’s length in the x or y direction.
Slot height Adds the slot’s height.
Size Adds the hole size.
Countersunk Adds countersink in the countersunk bolt marks.
Gage of outstanding Adds hole gage.
leg
You can control the format of this element with the advanced
option XS_GAGE_OF_OUTSTANDING_LEG_STRING.
Center-to-center Adds center-to-center distance.
distance
You can control the format of this element with the advanced
options
and
XS_CENTER_TO_CENTER_DISTANCE_IN_TWO_PARTS_STRING.

Defining contents of bolt mark Size element using advanced options (p. 308)
XS_GAGE_OF_OUTSTANDING_LEG_STRING
Reinforcement mark elements

Here is a list of the elements you can include in all reinforcement marks. Some of the available
elements are not listed here, because they are common to many types of marks, and listed
separately.
You can define mark options separately for single reinforcing bars, bar groups, and
reinforcement meshes.
Element Description
Name Adds the name of the bar or mesh.
Grade Adds the material grade of the bar or mesh.
Diameter Adds the nominal diameter of the bar.
Class Adds the class of the bar or mesh.
Length Adds the total length of the bar.
Number Adds the quantity of the bars.
Position Adds the reinforcement position number.
Shape Adds the shape of the bar or mesh.
Weight Adds the weight of the bar or mesh.

Drawing settings
Element Description
cc Adds the center-to-center spacing of the bars. The options are:
• cc adds the spacing value if spacing does not vary
• cc min adds the smallest spacing value of the bar group if
spacing varies
• cc max adds the largest spacing value of the bar group if
spacing varies
• cc exact lists all spacing values of the bar group
• cc target lists all reinforcing bar target spacing values
Pull-out picture Adds a pull-out picture of a bar to the mark.

Elements in merged reinforcement marks (p. 386)
Reinforcement mesh mark elements

The following elements are specific to the reinforcement mesh marks. Some of the available
separately.
Element Description
Size Adds the nominal diameters of the mesh bars, dimensions of the
mesh, and the spacings of the bars in the longitudinal and
crossing directions.
Mesh length Adds the length of the reinforcement mesh.
Mesh width Adds the width of the reinforcement mesh.
cc Use the same center-to-center options as for single bars. You
can define this element individually for the longitudinal and
crossing bars in the mesh.
Diameter longitudinal Adds the diameter or size of the longitudinal bars.
Diameter cross Adds the diameter or size of the crossing bars.

Elements in merged reinforcement marks

Merged marks can contain the following elements:

Drawing settings
Element Description
Block prefix Adds text or a value to the beginning of each repeated
block. Opens a dialog box where you can enter the
prefix.
You can use the following variables as block
prefixes:
%NUMBER% includes the number of marks merged to
the mark.
%NUMBER_IN_PLANE% includes the number of marks
merged in the plane of the drawing to the mark.
%NUMBER_OUT_OF_PLANE% includes the number of
marks merged in the depth direction of the drawing to
the mark.
Single mark content Adds the content of the single reinforcement mark
selected on the Content tab to the mark.
Distance between groups Adds the center-to-center distances between
reinforcing bars or bar groups included in a merged
mark.
Symbol separating blocks in Adds a symbol between the blocks in the merged
mark mark. Opens a dialog box where you can enter the
symbol.
The elements that appear before this element on the
mark content list generate a block.

Connection mark elements

This section describes the elements specific to connection marks. Some of the available
separately.
Element Description
Code Adds the connection code. This is a user-defined code you give
for the connection in the connection dialog box. The code can be
either a text string or a number.
Name Adds the connection name, for example, Tube_splice.
DSTV code Adds the DSTV code.
Connection number Adds the number of the connection.
Running number Adds the connection running number. All connections are
automatically numbered with a running number, for example, 85.

Drawing settings
Element Description
Group Adds the connection group.
Connection error Adds the connection error. The numbers correspond to the
connection symbol colors:
• 1 = green
• 2 = yellow
• 3 = red symbol

Surface treatment mark elements

Here is a list of elements specific to surface treatment marks. Some of the available elements
are not listed here, because they are common to many types of marks, and listed separately.
Element Description
Name Adds the name defined in the Name box in the Surface
treatment properties dialog box.
Material Adds the surface treatment material.
Class Adds the class of the surface treatment.
Code Adds the code of the surface treatment.
Surface treatment name Adds the name selected from the Surface treatment name
list in the Surface treatment properties dialog box.

Section and detail mark elements

Here is a list of elements specific to section and detail marks:
Element Description
Section name/Detail Adds the name of the section or the detail (A, B, C, and so on).
name
Source drawing name Adds the name of the drawing where the view is.
Source drawing name Adds the name of the drawing where the view is. This is shown
when moved only if the view is not in the same drawing as the section/detail
mark.


Drawing settings
View, section view and detail view label mark elements

Here is a list of the elements specific to view, section view and detail view label marks:
Element Description
View name/Section Adds the name of the view, section or the detail.
name/Detail name
Scale Adds the scale of the view.
Drawing name Adds the name of the current drawing.
Source drawing name Adds the name of the drawing where the view has originally been
created.
Source drawing name Adds the name of the drawing where the view has originally been
when moved created. This is shown only when the view has been moved from
its original drawing.

7.6 Part and neighbor part properties

This section provides more information about the properties related to part appearance and
contents.
See also Part and neighbor part content properties (p. 389)
Setting part and neighbor part contents and appearance (p. 325)
Part and neighbor part content properties

Use the options on the Contents tab of the Part Properties or Neighbor Part Properties
dialog box to view and modify the part or neighbor part properties.
All part properties dialog boxes do not contain all of the settings listed below.

Drawing settings
Option Description
Part representation Outline shows parts as solid objects.
Exact shows parts as solid objects. This choice also
draws the chamfers in the profile cross sections.
Symbol draws parts as lines.
Symbol with partial profile shows a partial profile of the
part. The length of the partial profile is fixed to 1000
mm.
Workshop form draws round tube profiles as wrap-
around templates.
Bounding box draws parts as boxes surrounding the
actual profiles.
Base box shows parts as boxes and uses the h and b
values from the profile catalog as box dimensions.
Symbol offset Defines the distance of the end points of reference lines
and center lines from the end points of the object.
Inner contours Shows the inner contours of a tube.
Hidden lines If the Hidden lines check box is selected, Tekla
Structures shows hidden lines in secondary and neighbor
parts.
If the Own hidden lines check box is selected, Tekla
Structures shows hidden lines in main parts.
Center line Select the Main part > Beam, Plate or Polygon check
box to show center lines in main parts.
Select the Secondary part > Beam, Plate or Polygon
check box to show center lines in secondary parts.
Reference lines Select the Main part > Beam, Plate or Polygon check
box to show reference lines in main parts.
Select the Secondary part > Beam, Plate or Polygon
check box to show reference lines in secondary parts.
Additional marks Select the following check boxes to show additional
marks in drawings:
• Orientation marks
• Connecting side marks
• Pop-marks
• Edge chamfers
See also Pop-marks

Displaying connecting side marks (p. 329)
Displaying orientation marks (north marks) (p. 328)

Drawing settings
Part and neighbor part fill properties
Use the options on the Fill tab of the Part Properties or Neighbor Part Properties dialog box
to view and modify the part or neighbor part fill properties. The properties can be set separately
for part faces and sections.
Setting Description
Type Defines the fill type. Clicking the button next
to the list opens a preview of the hatch
patterns.
Automatic selects the fill type automatically
from the hatch pattern schema files.
None uses no fill.
Color Defines the color for the fill.
You can select a predefined color or use
Special color that is not converted to black
in printouts.
Background Defines the background color for the fill.
Background color selection is disabled for
hardware hatches.
Background color can be set for automatic
hatches, but is has effect only if automatic
hatch is not defined for the material in the
hatch pattern schema file.
Scale Automatic scales and rotates the fill
automatically.
Custom allows you to select scaling and
rotation manually.
Scaling in direction x and Scaling in
direction y define the scales in x and y
direction.
Keep ratio of x and y retains the relative
proportions in the hatch pattern.
Angle rotates the fill. Angle 0.0 is for
horizontal and 90.0 for vertical.
See also Part and neighbor part properties (p. 389)

Specifying and using special color (p. 178)
Adding hatch patterns on parts and shapes (p. 338)
Part and shape hatch pattern properties

The hatch patterns for material types and names are defined in a hatch schema file (in a .htc
file). Different drawing types (general arrangement, assembly, single-part, and cast unit
drawings) have their own schema files. These hatch patterns are used when you set Type to
Automatic on the Fill page of the part or shape properties dialog box. The default schema files
are located in the ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\common\system folder.
The name of the schema file Tekla Structures uses for each drawing type is defined on the
Hatching page of the Advance Options dialog box:

Drawing settings
• set XS_DRAWING_GA_HATCH_SCHEMA=general.htc
• set XS_DRAWING_ASSEMBLY_HATCH_SCHEMA=assembly.htc
• set XS_DRAWING_SINGLE_PART_HATCH_SCHEMA=single.htc
• set XS_DRAWING_CAST_UNIT_HATCH_SCHEMA=cast_unit.htc
The syntax of the schema file is:
Material type, Material name, Hatch name, Scale, Color, Automatic
scaling and rotation
An example of the .htc file:
Option Description
Material type STEEL, CONCRETE, TIMBER, MISCELLANEOUS (case
sensitive)
Material name The material name defined for the part in the properties dialog
box in the model.

Drawing settings
Option Description
Hatch name To check the hatch pattern names and related hatch patterns
open the Part Properties dialog box, select a hatch pattern
from the Type list and click the ... button next to the list. Then
click a pattern to see its name in the Type list. Hatch names are
case sensitive.
Scale Scale is a numeric value that Tekla Structures uses to scale
hatches.
Color 0=black (default)
1=white
2=red
3=green
4=blue
5=cyan
6=yellow
7=magenta
120=Special (use this color for gray shade)
The hatch color defines the line width for the printer. If you do
not define a color for a hatch in the schema file, Tekla
Structures uses the default color black (0). To use the special
color that is printed as color or grayscale, depending on the
selected printer settings, set the color number in the .htc file
to 120.
Automatic scaling and Automatic scaling and rotation defines whether you want to
rotation use automatic scaling and rotation.
1=true
0=false (default)
No hatching If you do not want to use any hatch pattern for a material, leave
the hatch name field blank in the schema file.
See also Adding hatch patterns on parts and shapes (p. 338)
7.7 Bolt properties

This section provides more information about the properties related to bolt appearance and
contents.
See also Bolt content properties (p. 393)

Bolts (p. 332)
Bolt content properties

Use the options on the Contents tab of the Bolt Properties dialog box to view and modify the
bolt content properties.
All bolt properties dialog boxes do not contain all of the settings listed below.

Drawing settings
Option Description
Solid/symbol The options are Solid, Exact Solid, Symbol,
Symbol 2, Symbol 3, DIN symbol, and
User-defined symbol.
DIN symbol corresponds to German
standards (DIN).
User-defined symbol is a symbol that has
been created in Symbol Editor.
Symbol content Indicates whether to include the Hole and
Axis symbols in the drawing.
Visibility Visible shows bolt group holes in main parts
or secondary parts. Not visible hides them.
In assembly drawings you can also define
whether to show or hide bolt group holes in
sub-assemblies.
See also XS_DRAW_BOLT_OWN_HIDDEN_LINES

XS_DRAW_BOLT_HIDDEN_LINES
Bolts (p. 332)
7.8 Surface treatment visibility and content proper-

ties
Use the options on the Contents tab of the Surface Treatment Properties dialog box to view
and modify the surface treatment properties.
Option Description
Visibility Visible shows the surface treatment.
Not visible does not show the surface treatment.
Representation Defines the appearance of the surface treatment.
The available options are Outline, Exact,
Workshop form, Symbol, Bounding box, and
Base box.
Show pattern Defines whether the hatch pattern is shown.
Hidden lines Defines whether hidden lines in secondary and
neighboring parts are shown.
Own hidden lines Defines whether hidden lines in main parts are
shown.
See also Surface treatments (p. 335)

Adding hatch patterns on surface treatment (p. 340)

Drawing settings
Surface treatment hatch pattern properties
The properties of the hatch patterns to use for each surface treatment type are defined in the
surfacing.htc file, located in ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\common\system.
When you edit a schema file, you must restart Tekla Structures to apply
the changes.
The syntax of surfacing.htc file is:

Surfacing Type, Surfacing Code, Hatch name, Scale, [Color], [Automatic
Scaling and Rotation]
Example:
1,MF,ANSI31,0.71,SMF,ANSI32,0.71,WT,ANSI33,0.71,HT,ANSI34,0.71,LSB,AR-
SAND,0.72,SM1,CROSS,1.02,SM2,CHECKERED,1.03,TS3,FBBRICKC,1.04,FP,ANSI3
1,1.04,UP,ANSI32,1.0
Option Description
Surface treatment type • 1 = concrete finish
• 2 = special mix
• 3 = tile surface
• 4 = steel finish
Surface treatment code This is the abbreviation used in drawings and
reports, for example, MF for Magnesium Float.
The product_finishes.dat file, which is
also located in ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\
common\system, contains a full list of surface
treatment codes.
Hatch name You can check the hatch pattern names and related
hatch patterns for example by opening Part
Properties dialog box, selecting a hatch pattern
from the Type list and clicking the ... button next to
the list.
Scale Scale is a numeric value that Tekla Structures uses
to scale hatches.

Drawing settings
Option Description
Color (optional) 0=black (default)
1=white
2=red
3=green
4=blue
5=cyan
6=yellow
7=magenta
120=Special (use this color for gray shade)
The hatch color defines the line width for the
printer. If you do not define a color for a hatch in
the surfacing.htc file, Tekla Structures uses
the color defined on the Appearance tab of the
surface treatment properties dialog box in the
drawing. The Visible lines color and type is used
for the front of the surface treatment, and the
Hidden lines for the back.
Automatic Scaling and 1=true
Rotation (optional)
0=false (default)
See also Adding hatch patterns on surface treatment (p. 340)
7.9 Reinforcement and mesh visibility and content

properties
Use the options on the Bar content and Mesh content tabs of the Reinforcement Properties
dialog box to view and modify the reinforcement and mesh visibility and content properties.
Option Description
Visibility of all reinforcing bars Visible shows the bars or meshes.
Visibility of all meshes Not visible does not show the bars or meshes
Representation single line draws a single line with radiused bends.
double line draws an outline of the bar with
radiused bends.
double lines with filled ends draws an outline of
the bar with radiused bends and filled bar ends.
filled line draws a solid bar with radiused bends.
stick draws a single line without radiused bends.
outline shows the shape of the mesh using an
outline rectangle or polygon, and a diagonal line.
Applies only to reinforcement meshes.

Drawing settings
Option Description
Visibility of reinforcing bars in all shows all bars in a group or mesh.
group
first bar shows only the first bar in the group or
Visibility of longitudinal wires mesh.
Visibility of crossing bars last bar shows only the last bar in the group or
mesh.
first and last bar shows the first and last bar in the
group or mesh.
bar in the middle of group shows one bar in the
middle of the group or mesh.
two bars in the middle of group shows two bars in
the middle of the group or mesh.
customized indicates that you have specified the
location of the only visible reinforcing bar. Applies
only to bar groups and meshes.
Hide lines behind parts Hides the lines behind the part. This is useful, for
example, with lifting anchors where the reinforcing
bar is partly outside the part.
Hide lines behind other rebars Hides the lines behind other reinforcement bar
lines.
Symbol at straight end
Applies only to reinforcing bars.

Symbol at hooked end
Applies only to reinforcing bars.

Mesh symbol Defines the mesh symbol to be used. The mesh
symbol appears in the middle of the diagonal line.
Symbol 1
Symbol 2
Symbol 3
Mesh symbol size Defines the size of the mesh symbol.

Drawing settings
In addition to the properties in the Reinforcement properties dialog
box, you can use some advanced options to modify the appearance of the
reinforcement:
• To increase the size of the bend and end symbols (in drawing units)
use the advanced options
XS_REBAR_BEND_MARK_SYMBOL_MIN_SIZE and
XS_REBAR_END_SYMBOL_MIN_SIZE in Tools > Options >
Advanced Options... > Concrete Detailing.
• Use the advanced option XS_REBAR_REVERSE_END_SYMBOLS in
Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > Concrete Detailing to
change the end symbols to a different direction.

XS_REBAR_BEND_MARK_SYMBOL_MIN_SIZE
XS_REBAR_END_SYMBOL_MIN_SIZE
XS_REBAR_REVERSE_END_SYMBOLS
7.10 Reinforcement settings for drawings

Tekla Structures uses the settings in the rebar_config.inp file in the ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\<environment>\system folder to
define the following reinforcement-related issues in drawings:
• Selected area-specific reinforcing bar bending schedule
• Rounding of bar dimensions
• Available symbols for meshes, strands, and unbonding
• Appearance of reinforcement pull-outs
The entries in the rebar_config.inp file are:
Entry Description
MergeOneFormat No longer used. Define these properties in the drawing
MergeTwoOrMoreFormat
properties.
s
MergeAndFormat
LeaderLinetype
DimensionMarkSpacing ="/"
Separator
Affects the separator in reinforcement marks.
ExactDimensionMarkSp =" + "
acingSeparator
Separator between different exact spacing values in
reinforcement marks.
ExactDimensionMarkPc ="*"
sSeparator
Separator between the number of bars and their exact spacing
value in reinforcement mark.
GroupBarMark No longer in use.

Drawing settings
Entry Description
MarkingDimAttributes No longer in use.
ScheduleCountry Defines which bending schedule is used. Affects bending
shapes in templates and reports. The available schedules are
FIN, SWE, UK, US.
When you number the model, the bending shape for the bar is
given according to this information. For example, in the
Default environment, the bending shapes are letters A, B, C,
and so on.
ScheduleDimensionRou Options:
ndingDirection
• "UP": rounds bar dimensions up
ScheduleTotalLengthR
oundingDirection
• "DOWN": rounds bar dimensions down
• "NEAREST": rounds bar dimensions either up or down
ScheduleDimensionRou Sets the rounding accuracy for bar dimensions. Default is
ndingAccuracy 1 mm.
Tekla Structures rounds individual bar dimensions up or down
according to the option you select for
ScheduleDimensionRoundingDirection.
ScheduleTotalLengthR Sets the rounding accuracy for the total bar length. Default is
oundingAccuracy 10 mm.
Tekla Structures rounds individual bar dimensions up or down
according to the option you select for
ScheduleTotalLengthRoundingDirection.
MeshSymbolFile Points to the mesh symbol file that contains the available mesh
symbols. Affects the available reinforcement mesh symbols in
drawings.
By default, points to the mesh.sym file in the ...\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\common\
symbols folder.
StrandSymbolFile Points to the strand symbol file that contains the available
strand symbols. Affects drawings.
By default, points to the strand.sym file in the
...\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\common\
symbols folder.
UnbondingSymbolFile Points to the unbonding symbol file that contains the available
unbonding symbols.
RebarMeshSize Template for rebar mesh size.

Drawing settings
Entry Description
PullOutDimensionForm Defines the format for displaying the dimensions.
at
The format follows the dimension properties format.
Options:
• 0 = ###
• 1 = ###[.#]
• 2 = ###.#
• 3 = ###[.##]
• 4 = ###.##
• 5 = ###[.###]
• 6 = ###.###
• 7 = ### #/#
• 8 = ###/##.###
PullOutDimensionPrec Sets the level of precision.
ision
Options: 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 16, and so on.
PullOutDimensionUnit Defines the units to use.
Options:
• 0 = auto
• 1 = mm
• 2 = cm
• 3=m
• 4 = inch
• 5 = foot and inch
PullOutColor Sets the color for the pull-outs in reinforcement marks.
Options:
• 1 = black
• 2 = red
• 3 = bright green
• 4 = blue
• 5 = cyan
• 6 = yellow
• 7 = magenta
• 8 = brown
• 9 = green
• 10 = dark blue
• 11 = forest green
• 12 = orange
• 13 = gray

Drawing settings
Entry Description
PullOutVisibleLineTy Sets the line type for reinforcing bar shape in pull-outs.
pe
Options:
1=
2=
3=
4=
5=
6=
7=
PullOutRepresentatio Sets the representation type.
n
Options:
• 0 = single
• 1 = double
• 2 = filled
• 3 = stick
PullOutAngleColor Sets the color for the angle in pull-outs.
Options:
• 1 = black
• 2 = red
• 3 = green
• 4 = blue
• 5 = cyan
• 6 = yellow
• 7 = magenta
• 8 = brown
• 9 = green
• 10 = dark blue
• 11 = forest green
• 12 = orange
• 13 = gray

Drawing settings
Entry Description
PullOutAngleLineType Sets the line type for angle lines in pull-outs.
Options:
• 1=
• 2=
• 3=
• 4=
• 5=
• 6=
• 7=
PullOutShowDuplicate Defines whether duplicate dimensions are showed multiple
Dims times for one bar.
Options:
• 0 = duplicate dimensions are not shown (default)
• 1 = equal and parallel dimensions are shown, but similar
hook dimensions are not shown
• 2 = equal and parallel dimensions are not shown, but both
hook dimensions are shown
• 3 = all dimensions are shown
• 4 = hook dimensions are not shown
• 5 = hook dimensions, or equal and parallel dimensions
are not shown
PulloutShowUSHookDim Defines if the US/NA style of dimension will be shown for
s hooks over 90 degrees.
Options:
• 0 = shows European hook dimension (= leg length,
default)
• 1 = shows US hook dimension (= straight length) for
hooks >90 degrees
See the image below for the difference between the US/NA
(A) and European (B) hook dimension.
See also Reinforcing bar bending types

Selecting the dimension format, precision and units (p. 256)

Drawing settings
7.11 Placement properties for annotation objects

Use the settings in the Placing dialog boxes for annotation objects and dimensions to control
how the annotation objects are placed in a drawing.
Option Description
Search margin Defines the distance within which Tekla Structures
searches for a space to place a dimension, mark, weld
mark or another annotation object.
Minimal distance Defines the minimum distance of the mark, weld mark,
dimension or another annotation object from the part.
Quarter For marks and manually added annotation objects.
Defines the areas Tekla Structures searches for a space
to place the mark or annotation object.
Weld placement depends on the welding direction.
Welds can only be placed in certain sectors, so the
Quarter options are not available. This option is
available for manually added welds in the final drawing.
Placing free allows Tekla Structures to search for the first
suitable location for the mark, dimension, weld or
another annotation object. fixed allows you to place the
mark, dimension, weld or another annotation object in
any location.
When you use the option fixed, the annotation object
stays where it is even though you update the drawing,
whereas with free, Tekla Structures tries to find the
optimal place for the annotation object.
Direction Available only for manual dimensions.
Defines the side on which Tekla Structures places
dimensions (relative to the object being dimensioned).
This setting affects the Placing - free setting.
7.12 Building object appearance properties

Use the Appearance tab in the dialog boxes of building objects (parts, neighbor parts, bolts,
welds, surface treatments, reinforcement, meshes) to view and modify the settings affecting the
color and the type of the lines, and the text and line properties of the welds.
All building object property dialog boxes do not contain all of the settings listed below.

Drawing settings
Option Description
Visible lines Sets the Color and Type of the visible lines.
Hidden lines, Center line Sets the Color and Type of the hidden lines.
Sets the Color of the center lines.
Reference lines Sets the Color and Type of the reference
lines.
Text: Color Sets the Color of the text.
Text: Height Sets the Height of the text.
Text: Font Sets the Font of the text. Click Select to
show more options.
Line: Type Sets the Type of the line.
Line: Color Sets the Color of the line.
See also XS_CENTER_LINE_TYPE

7.13 Model weld visibility options

You can select which welds are visible in drawings. In assembly drawings, you can define the
visibility of welds in sub-assemblies.
Use options in the Welding Properties dialog box to set the visibility and contents of welds.
Option Description
Weld number Yes shows the weld number.
Tekla Structures assigns a number to each weld as the weld
is created. You can select whether to show or hide the weld
number.
Welds or Welds in sub- Not visible displays no welds in the drawing.
assemblies
Site weld visible displays only site welds in the drawing.
Workshop weld visible displays only workshop welds in
the drawing.
Both visible displays both site welds and workshop welds
in the drawing.
Weld size limit Enter a weld size to filter welds of that size out of the
drawing. This is useful when you only want to show non-
typical welds in a drawing.
To set whether the weld size is an exact or minimum value,
use the advanced option XS_WELD_FILTER_TYPE.
To filter out a standard weld type, use the advanced option
XS_OMITTED_WELD_TYPE.

XS_WELD_FILTER_TYPE

Drawing settings
XS_OMITTED_WELD_TYPE
7.14 Properties of additional drawing objects

Use the properties dialog boxes of different additional drawing objects (lines, rectangles,
polylines, polygons, arcs, circles) to view and modify the appearance of the objects. The
settings you have in the dialog box vary depending on the object type. Some objects do not
have all the settings listed below.
Setting Description
Line: Type
Line: Color Defines the color of the object lines.

Line: Bulge or Bulge for all lines. Values 0 - 1.The bulge factor defines the
curvature of the curved segments of objects
using the calculation:
Arc height = Line length * Bulge factor
Changing the bulge factor of a polyline or
polygon modifies all the segments of that
object.
Line: Radius Defines the radius of arcs and circles.
Arrow: Position
Arrow: Type
Arrow: Height
Arrow: Length

Drawing settings
Setting Description
Fill: Type Defines the fill type to be used in the object.
Clicking Select to shows the available hatch
types.
Fill: Color Defines the color of the fill.
Fill: Background Defines the background color for the fill.
Scaling in direction x Defines the fill scales in the x and y
direction.
Scaling in direction y
Keep ratio of x and y
Angle Rotates the fill. Angle 0.0 is for horizontal
and 90.0 for vertical.
Offset Moves the fill pattern inside the object to in
the x and y direction by the specified value.
See also Creating a shape (p. 157)

7.15 DWG/DXF scaling options

Use one of these options to select the scaling of the DWG/DXF files.
Option Description
Scaling type X: Pick the left upper corner of the frame to insert the file. You
can only set the drawing scale in the x direction.
XY: Pick the left upper corner of the frame to insert the file.
You can set the drawing scale in both the x and y direction.
Scale to fit: Pick the left upper and bottom right corners of the
frame to size and create the frame. Tekla Structures scales the
file to fit the frame.
Best fit: Pick the left upper and bottom right corners of the
frame to size and create the frame. Tekla Structures scales the
file to fit, maintaining its original aspect ratio.
Scale in X Scales the file in the x direction. Enter a coefficient to indicate
the scale, for example, 1.0 for 100%, 1.5 for 150%, etc. The
scaling type must be set to X or XY.
Scale in Y Scales the file in the y direction. Enter a coefficient to indicate
the scale, for example, 1.0 for 100%, 1.5 for 150%, etc. The
scaling type must be set to XY.
See also Adding links to DWG and DXF files (p. 137)

Drawing settings
7.16 Grid properties
Use the Grid Properties dialog box to view and modify the grid settings in drawings. The
advanced options XS_DRAWING_GRID_LABEL_FRAME_FIXED_WIDTH and
XS_DRAWING_GRID_LABEL_FRAME_LINE_WIDTH_FACTOR allow you to adjust the grid labels
further.
Option Description
Grids Visible shows the grids.
Not visible does not show the grids.
Visible in all views shows the grids in all drawing
views. This option is not available for general
arrangement drawings.
Only grid labels visible shows only the grid label
and a short section of the grid line. The length of
the displayed grid line depends on the value entered
in the Text placing box. On the drawing level Grid
Properties dialog boxes, this option is only
available for general arrangement drawings. On the
view and object level this option is available for all
types of drawings.
Text placing Sets the side to show the grid labels and the length
of the grid line extension (the distance between the
end of the grid line and the text).
Text: Color, Height, Font and Frame Defines the grid label text color, height, font and
frame.

Defining grid settings (p. 324)
7.17 Orientation settings

Use the Orientation marks page in the Options dialog box to define some orientation and
location settings.

Drawing settings
Setting Description
Project north Defines which direction is north in the
model. Enter the value in degrees counter-
clockwise from the global x axis.
Part viewing direction Defines which direction parts are viewed

from in drawings.
Beam skew limit Tekla Structures uses limit angles to
Column skew limit
determine whether a part is a beam or a
column when creating orientation marks.
Tekla Structures treats parts outside these
limits as braces.
Parts skewed more than 80° are columns.

Parts skewed less than 10° are beams.
Preferred location for mark Defines the location of part marks in
drawings, to the left or right end of the part.
Mark always to center of column This setting only affects columns.
Yes places part marks in the center of
columns in plan views. To indicate part
orientation, include compass direction (Face
direction) in the part mark instead.
No places part marks on the same flange in
general arrangement and assembly drawings.
See also Displaying compass direction (p. 327)


Drawing settings
Index
# part marks ...........................................................128

predefined reinforcement dimensions .................109
reinforcement marks............................................128
2D...........................................................................21, 22 revision marks .....................................................137
3D................................................................................. 22 semi-automatic dimensions.................................115
drawing views......................................... 80, 85, 357 single-part views in assembly drawings ................89
isometric drawings ................................................ 32 surface treatment marks......................................128
rotation of views .................................................. 357 symbols ...............................................................156
3D views....................................................................... 32 symbols in marks.................................................304
texts.....................................................................133
weld marks ..........................................................151
a additional drawing objects .....................20, 79, 157, 405
advanced dimension properties..................................365
aligning
A1 ............................................................................... 213 drawing objects ...................................................167
A2 .......................................................................199, 213 drawing views............................................... 95, 228
A3 .............................................................. 199, 213, 216 aligning dimension texts .............................................261
printing ................................................................ 189 alternative scales........................................................223
A4 .............................................................. 199, 213, 216 anchor bolt plans ........................................... 27, 33, 357
printing ................................................................ 189 creating..................................................................63
absolute dimensions...........................................255, 361 dimensions ..........................................................275
appearance ......................................................... 256 included objects.....................................................64
orientation ........................................................... 256 including assemblies .............................................65
zero at start point ................................................ 256 including objects....................................................64
adding anchor bolts ..................................................................34
associative notes................................................. 129 angle...........................................................................405
automatic dimensions ......................................... 253 angle dimensions......................................... 63, 255, 361
bolt marks............................................................ 128 annotation objects 58, 79, 127, 133, 138, 151, 249, 251
closing dimensions.............................................. 122 associative.............................................................20
connection marks ................................................ 128 independent...........................................................20
dimension lines ................................................... 110 modifying .............................................................130
dimension points ................................................. 122 appearance
dimension points in a nchor bolt plans ................ 126 of bolts.................................................................332
dimension tags .................................................... 104 of building objects................................................403
dimensions ............................................................ 99 of dimension texts ...............................................255
drawing views........................................................ 81 of dimensions ......................................................255
dual dimensions .................................................. 107 of frames .............................................................312
foldmarks............................................................. 196 of leader lines ......................................................312
frames ................................................................. 196 of mark text..........................................................312
hyperlinks ............................................................ 136 of marks...................................................... 311, 376
level marks .......................................................... 128 of meshes............................................................336
links to DWG/DXF files........................................ 137 of neighbor parts .................................................325
links to other drawings ........................................ 135 of parts ................................................................325
links to text files................................................... 135 of reference models.............................................342
manual dimensions ............................................... 99

of reinforcement...................................................336 bar class......................................................................385
of surface treatment.............................................335 bar diameter................................................................385
arcs .................................................................... 157, 405 bar length ....................................................................385
dividing ................................................................166 bar marks ....................................................................386
arranging bar name.....................................................................385
drawing objects....................................................160 bar quantity .................................................................385
drawing views ........................................................96 bar shape ....................................................................385
arrows .........................................................................131 bar weight ...................................................................385
in additional drawing objects ...............................405 base points......................................................... 133, 313
in dimensions.......................................................255 beams
assemblies in cast unit drawings ..............................................44
in anchor bolt plans ...............................................65 view direction in drawings....................................235
assembly drawings .......................................................40 block prefix..................................................................386
column view direction ..........................................235 bolt diameter ...............................................................384
creating........................................................... 61, 66 bolt length ...................................................................384
dimensioning .......................................................370 bolt marks
example .................................................................40 elements ..................................................... 308, 384
freezing................................................................185 modifying .............................................................130
including single-part drawings .............................230 bolt plans.......................................................................63
nested assemblies.................................................42 bolt standard ...............................................................384
rails ........................................................................41 bolt’s full name ............................................................384
single-part views....................................................89 bolt’s short name.........................................................384
stairs ......................................................................40 bolts
view direction of beams and bracings .................235 appearance..........................................................332
assembly position .......................................................383 bolt symbols.........................................................333
assembly type.............................................................384 combining dimensions .........................................299
associative annotation objects........................... 127, 151 contents ...............................................................332
associative notes .................................................129 dimensioning............................................... 290, 371
level marks ..........................................................128 examples .............................................................333
modifying .............................................................130 in drawings...........................................................332
part marks............................................................128 properties.................................................... 393, 403
updating...............................................................130 bottom drawing views .......................................... 85, 357
associative notes ..........................................................20 bottom views ...............................................................225
adding..................................................................129 boundaries
in edge chamfers .................................................145 in drawings.............................................................93
associativity ..................................................................23 bracings
refreshing...............................................................60 view direction in drawings....................................235
associativity symbol building objects ...............................20, 22, 79, 138, 357
ghost associativity symbol .....................................23 modifying .............................................................139
switching on/off......................................................23 properties.............................................................403
automatic bulge ...........................................................................405
dimensions ................................................. 253, 254 by print area ................................................................199
marks.......................................................... 302, 303
autoscale ....................................................................223
autoscaling......................................................... 222, 224 c
autosizing........................................................... 222, 224
calculated drawing sizes .............................................213
b calculated sizes...........................................................216
camber ........................................................................383
cast unit definition method
back drawing views.............................................. 85, 357 By cast unit ID................................................. 61, 66
back views ..................................................................225 By cast unit position........................................ 61, 66

cast unit drawing dimension lines....................................................120
freezing ............................................................... 185 dimensions .................................116, 296, 299, 366
cast unit drawings......................................................... 44 section views .......................................................243
creating ...........................................................61, 66 compass direction.......................................................327
dimensioning ....................................................... 370 connecting
precast beams....................................................... 44 dimension lines....................................................121
precast column...................................................... 45 side marks ...........................................................329
precast stairs......................................................... 46 connection marks
cc........................................................................385, 386 modifying .............................................................130
center lines ................................................................. 115 connections
line type............................................................... 139 DSTV code ..........................................................387
center of gravity error.....................................................................387
dimensioning ....................................................... 113 group ...................................................................387
center-to-center distance........................... 290, 383, 384 marks...................................................................387
chamfer marks name ...................................................................387
adding ................................................................. 145 number ................................................................387
chamfers running number ...................................................387
in drawings ........................ 143, 144, 145, 146, 169 contents
change symbols ......................................................... 131 of bolts.................................................................332
colors................................................................... 132 of drawing parts...................................................325
removing ............................................................. 131 of drawings ............................................................19
showing in printed drawings................................ 132 of marks...............................................................382
changing of surface treatment ............................................335
drawing revisions ................................................ 187 coordinate systems
check dimensions...............................................285, 365 changing..............................................................233
checking fixed.....................................................................233
dimension point validity ....................................... 127 horizontal brace.......................................... 231, 233
circles .................................................................157, 405 local ............................................................ 231, 233
class ........................................................................... 383 model.......................................................... 231, 233
cloning oriented ...................................................... 231, 233
checking cloned drawings ..................................... 59 user coordinate system (UCS) ............................103
cloned objects ....................................................... 58 vertical brace .............................................. 231, 233
cloning templates ............................................50, 54 copying
dimensions ............................................................ 57 drawing objects ...................................................170
drawings..........................................................53, 55 drawing views........................................................89
cloning templates ...............................................350, 353 drawings ..............................................................354
closing with offset ............................................................170
drawings.............................................................. 182 countersunk ................................................................384
closing dimensions ..................................................... 295 cover-up areas............................................................141
adding ................................................................. 122 cover-up lines .............................................................141
clouds .................................................................131, 157 creating
COG, see center of gravity......................................... 113 anchor bolt plans ...................................................63
colors cut lines ...............................................................173
changing pen number ......................................... 179 drawings ......27, 49, 54, 58, 60, 61, 62, 65, 66, 69
color table............................................................ 199 drawings using menu commands..........................66
in drawings .................................160, 175, 176, 178 drawings using pop-up-menu commands..............66
in printing............................................................. 199 drawings using toolbar commands........................66
pen numbers ....................................................... 179 empty drawings .....................................................60
special colors ...................................................... 178 empty general arrangemet drawings.....................66
columns fillet ......................................................................168
in assembly drawings.......................................... 235 general arrangement drawings..............................60
in cast unit drawings.............................................. 45 moment connection symbols...............................171
combining revisions ..............................................................187

round chamfer in drawing ....................................169 dimension point validity........................................127
straight chamfer in drawing .................................169 removing ..............................................................122
curved section views.....................................................84 dimension tags.............................................99, 126, 365
customizing automatic tagging ................................................279
line types .............................................................345 content .................................................................104
print file names ....................................................191 filtering content ....................................................106
cut lines in dimensions.......................................................104
creating................................................................173 including part count..............................................109
deleting ................................................................174 removing default content .....................................104
managing.............................................................173 removing tag content ...........................................109
updating...............................................................173 rotating.................................................................104
cutting lines dimensions.......................................................20, 58, 98
in section marks...................................................248 absolute ...................................................... 256, 361
adding ....................................................................99
d adding dimension tags.........................................104

adjusting appearance ..........................................255
anchor bolt plans .................................................275
deck plans.....................................................................30 angle ....................................................................361
deformed parts angle dimensions.................................................256
undeforming.........................................................240 appearance................................................. 126, 364
deleting automatic .................................................... 253, 254
cut lines ...............................................................174 automatic tagging ................................................279
drawing revisions.................................................188 bolt dimensioning.................................................290
drawings ..............................................................186 bolts .....................................................................371
moment connection symbols ...............................172 center of gravity ...................................................113
depth check dimensions ................................................285
of the section view ...............................................244 cloning ...................................................................57
detail boundary .............................................................98 closing......................................................... 295, 366
detail marks ..................................................................81 combining .................................. 116, 296, 299, 366
detail name ..........................................................388 contents .................................................................99
elements ..............................................................388 coordinate system................................................103
modifying ...............................................................98 creating ................................................................278
source drawing name ..........................................388 creation method ...................................................357
detail symbols ...............................................................98 dimension format .................................................363
detail views .......................................................... 80, 246 dimension lines ...................................109, 110, 120
creating..................................................................81 dimension marks........................................... 99, 109
marks.....................................................................98 dimension point validity........................................127
moving to another drawing ....................................90 dimension points......................................... 122, 126
name....................................................................389 dimension tags.............................................. 99, 109
start letter or number .............................................83 dual dimensions...................................................107
view label mark elements ....................................389 editing ..................................................................119
view labels ...................................................... 81, 98 elements ................................................................99
detailed object level settings........................24, 209, 357 elevations.............................................................281
dim_operation.ail ........................................................281 enlarging ..............................................................259
dim_planes_table.txt...................................................284 exaggerating ........................................................259
dimension lines ...........................................................110 examples 100, 263, 264, 265, 266, 267, 275, 287,
combining ............................................................120 290, 295, 296, 299, 300, 301, 302
linking ..................................................................121 extension lines ............................................ 257, 361
unlinking ..............................................................121 flipping outside dimensions..................................124
dimension marks.........................................................126 formats.................................................................361
dimension points forward offset .............................................. 300, 366
adding......................................................... 122, 126 general arrangement drawings ................... 262, 374
grid dimensions....................................................263

grouping .....................................257, 279, 361, 372 of section views ...................................................244
in general arrangement drawings........................ 115 distance between groups............................................386
in reinforcement .................................................. 109 distances
integer values...................................................... 256 recognizable ........................................................300
level..................................................................... 361 dividing
limiting outside dimensions ................................. 266 arcs......................................................................166
marks ................................................. 126, 278, 365 lines .....................................................................166
maximum leader line length ................................ 264 dragging
minimizing views ................................................. 366 drawing objects ...................................................158
modifying............................................................. 126 drawing filters .............................................. 64, 209, 210
object groups....................................................... 262 drawing levels
object groups in dimensioning............................. 262 drawing level .............................................. 206, 209
overall dimensions .............................................. 263 object level ......................................... 208, 209, 212
part dimensions.................................. 267, 287, 374 view level.................................................... 207, 212
parts partly outside the view................................ 265 Drawing List..................................................................71
placing................................................ 249, 252, 361 cloning drawings....................................................55
plate side marks ..........................................125, 260 contents.......................................................... 72, 75
plates................................................................... 282 filtering...................................................................75
position dimensions.....................................279, 290 opening..................................................................72
position properties............................................... 368 sorting....................................................................75
positioning ...................................................267, 374 status flags ............................................................73
precision.............................................................. 361 what is displayed ...................................................72
preferred dim side ............................................... 301 drawing objects.................................................. 127, 158
prefix of radial dimensions .................................. 261 additional drawing objects .....................................20
profiles................................................................. 284 aligning ................................................................167
properties ........................................... 361, 365, 370 annotation objects .................................................20
recognizable distance ......................................... 366 arranging .............................................................160
recreating ............................................................ 108 associativity ...........................................................23
reinforcement ..................................... 110, 302, 373 building objects......................................................20
relative................................................................. 361 dragging ..............................................................158
selecting format................................................... 256 loading object properties .....................................208
selecting precision............................................... 256 modifying properties ............................................208
selecting units ..................................................... 256 moving.................................................................158
semi-automatic.................................................... 115 object level settings ............................ 209, 210, 212
setting line and arrow type .................................. 255 reshaping.............................................................158
setting start point................................................. 123 resizing ................................................................158
setting text appearance....................................... 255 drawing properties ............................................. 203, 212
settings................................................................ 278 applying object level settings on drawing level....209
sloped.................................................................. 261 drawing property files ..........................................348
spiral stirrup reinforcement groups...................... 111 in an existing drawing..........................................207
straight ................................................................ 361 modifying before creating drawings.....................206
straight dimensions ............................................. 256 modifying properties of several drawings ............207
sub-assemblies ................................................... 373 drawing property files .................................................351
tags .............................................................302, 365 drawing property levels
tags, see dimension tags .................................... 126 drawing level .......................................................210
type .............................................................255, 366 drawing sheets ...........................................................213
types.................................................................... 361 drawing size................................................................224
unfolded parts ..................................................... 280 calculated sizes ...................................................216
units..................................................................... 361 fixed sizes............................................................216
updating format ................................................... 308 drawing tools ..............................................................167
US absolute......................................................... 361 drawing view filters .....................................................104
direction drawing view labels
direction marks.................................................... 245 section views .........................................................97

drawing views ...............................................................80 top views................................................................85
3D ........................................................................357 unfolding polybeams............................................239
3D views ................................................................85 view label marks ..................................................246
adding....................................................................81 view label symbols...............................................357
adding view labels ...............................................246 viewing direction ..................................................235
aligning ..................................................................95 drawings........................................................................58
applying object level settings...............................212 adding texts .........................................................133
arranging ........................................................ 90, 96 adjusting dimension appearance .........................255
automatic .............................................................225 anchor bolt plans ............................................ 33, 63
back .....................................................................357 assembly drawing ..................................................40
back views .............................................................85 autoscaling...........................................................224
bottom..................................................................357 autosizing.............................................................224
bottom views..........................................................85 basic principles ......................................................21
boundaries.............................................................93 before creating.......................................................48
coordinate system ...............................................357 cast unit drawings ..................................................44
copying ..................................................................89 changing color .....................................................176
creating......................... 81, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 225 checking cloned drawings......................................59
deformed parts ....................................................240 checking if parts have drawings.............................76
detail views ............................................................81 cloning ......................................................53, 54, 55
direction ...................................................... 244, 245 closing..................................................................182
direction marks ....................................................357 colors .......................................................... 160, 175
displaying view names.........................................247 contents .................................................................19
end.......................................................................357 creating ........27, 49, 54, 58, 60, 61, 62, 65, 66, 69
extrema..................................................................93 creating general arrangement drawings ................66
fitting ......................................................................92 deleting ................................................................186
front .....................................................................357 dimensions...........................................................253
front views .............................................................85 drawing filters.......................................................210
key plans .............................................................220 Drawing List ...........................................................72
linking ....................................................................92 drawing objects......................................................20
main view names.................................................247 drawing size................................................ 222, 223
modifying ........................................................ 92, 96 drawing templates......................................... 58, 201
moving ...................................................................94 drawing view scale...................................... 222, 223
moving to another drawing ....................................90 editing ....................................................................79
neighbor part visibility ..........................................236 filters ....................................................................210
of entire model view...............................................86 foldmarks .............................................................195
of reinforcement meshes .......................................88 frames......................................................... 195, 196
of selected area in drawing....................................87 freezing ................................................................184
of selected area in model ......................................87 general arrangement drawings ..............................27
openings and recesses........................................242 grid lines ..............................................................174
part orientation.....................................................231 grids ............................................................ 174, 323
projection type .....................................................226 hiding and showing objects..................................160
properties.............................................................225 hyperlinks.............................................................136
resizing ..................................................................92 issuing..................................................................186
rotating...................................................................96 layouts ......................................... 19, 213, 215, 221
scale ........................................................... 223, 357 links to other drawings .........................................135
section .................................................................357 locking..................................................................184
section views ..........................................83, 84, 243 main features .........................................................17
settings ................................................................357 managing .............................................................183
shortening parts...................................................237 margins ................................................................217
showing openings and recesses .........................241 master drawings ..................................................348
single-part views....................................................89 modifying properties ...........................206, 207, 208
size ......................................................................223 multidrawings.........................................................47
top........................................................................357 multiple drawing sheets of the same part ..............69

object properties.................................................. 210
opening ................................................................. 77 e
preview images ................................................... 200
printing .............................. 188, 190, 191, 192, 194 edge chamfers................................................... 129, 330
properties ........................................... 206, 207, 212 adding chamfer marks.........................................145
protection ....................................................249, 251 in drawings .................................143, 144, 145, 146
recreating ............................................................ 347 editing
reference models ................................................ 342 dimensions ..........................................................119
removing ............................................................. 350 drawings ................................................................79
renaming ............................................................... 79 elements
revisions .............................................................. 186 in bolt marks ............................................... 308, 384
rotating parts ....................................................... 233 in connection marks ............................................387
rule sets................................................................. 62 in detail view label marks.....................................389
saved settings .................................................60, 61 in dimension marks ...............................................99
saving.................................................................. 181 in dimension tags ..................................................99
screen layout......................................................... 18 in marks...............................................................382
searching............................................................... 76 in merged reinforcement marks...........................386
selecting ................................................................ 76 in part marks........................................................383
settings.......................................203, 209, 212, 357 in reinforcement marks........................................385
single-part drawings .............................................. 34 in reinforcement mesh marks ..............................386
spaces between views ........................................ 217 in section view label marks..................................389
status flags ............................................................ 73 in surface treatment marks..................................388
status information.................................................. 74 in view label marks ..............................................389
table layouts ....................................... 216, 217, 218 elevation views .............................................................80
tables................................................................... 215 elevations
text files ............................................................... 135 datum point..........................................................357
three levels of modifying ....................................... 24 dimensioning .......................................................281
titles....................................................................... 80 embeds.........................................................................35
types...................................................................... 27 end views........................................................... 225, 357
unlocking ............................................................. 184 aligning with main view........................................228
updating ............................................... 22, 183, 348 view direction marks............................................245
user-defined attributes ........................................ 344 enlarged views
views .............................................................19, 225 adding dimension points......................................126
weld marks ..................................................147, 151 enlarging
wizards .................................................................. 62 dimensions ..........................................................259
drivers erection elevation drawings ..........................................31
printer drivers ...................................................... 197 erection elevation drawings, see general arrangement
dual dimensions drawings ................................................................27
adding automatically ........................................... 254 exaggerating dimensions............................................259
adding manually .................................................. 107 examples
DWG and DXF files applying drawing settings ....................................210
adding in a drawing table layout.......................... 220 bolts in drawings..................................................333
in drawings .......................................................... 137 cloning drawings....................................................55
scaling options .................................................... 406 dimensions in drawings ....100, 116, 122, 263, 264,
DWG/DXF files .......................................................20, 58 265, 266, 267, 275, 287, 290, 295, 296, 299,
300, 301, 302
edge chamfers in drawings .................................146
hatch patterns......................................................341
part representation in drawings ...........................330
welds in drawings ....................................... 148, 152
extension lines
of dimensions ......................................................257

f g
face direction .............................................327, 383, 407 GA drawings, see general arrangement drawings 27, 115
features gage of outstanding leg..............................290, 383, 384
in drawings ............................................................17 general arrangement drawings .....................................27
file names 3D views ................................................................32
in printing .............................................................191 anchor bolt plans ...................................................33
fill, see hatch patterns.................................................338 combining dimensions .........................................116
fillet creating ..................................................................60
creating................................................................168 creating using menu, toolbar or pop-up menu com-
fills...............................................................................338 mands.............................................................66
filtering deck plans..............................................................30
dimension tag content .........................................106 dimensions.................................................. 262, 374
drawing filters ......................................................210 erection elevation drawings ...................................31
Drawing List contents ............................................75 foundation plans ....................................................28
using drawing filters in anchor bolt plans...............64 framing plans .........................................................29
finding freezing ................................................................185
drawings ................................................................71 isometric drawings .................................................32
parts with drawings................................................76 plans .........................................................29, 30, 32
finish ...........................................................................383 semi-automatic dimensions .................................115
fitting drawing views......................................................92 slab plans...............................................................28
fittings (NS/FS) ...........................................................383 ghost outlines..............................................................160
fixed ..................................................................... 99, 151 graphical drawing objects .............................................58
fixed drawing sizes .....................................................213 grid dimensions.................................................. 263, 374
fixed sizes ...................................................................216 grid labels....................................................................175
flags grid lines
in drawings ............................................................73 hiding ...................................................................175
flipping outside dimensions.........................................124 in drawings...........................................................174
folders grids
in Master Drawing Catalog ......................... 354, 355 hiding ...................................................................175
folding printed drawings..............................................195 in drawings..........................................174, 323, 324
foldmarks ........................................................... 195, 196 moving grid labels................................................175
format properties.............................................................407
dimensions ..........................................................308 grouped dimensions
forward offset ..................................................... 300, 366 tagging .................................................................279
foundation plans ...........................................................63 grouping
frames................................................................ 195, 196 dimensions.................................................. 279, 372
around marks.......................................................312 identical objects ...................................................279
framing plans ................................................................29 large dimension values ........................................257
free................................................................................99
freezing
and associativity ..................................................185 h
and cloning ..........................................................185
assembly drawings ..............................................185 handle points in leader lines .......................................166
cast unit drawings................................................185 handles
drawings ..............................................................184 in drawing objects ................................................158
effect on drawings ...............................................185 hatch patterns .............................................................338
general arrangement drawings............................185 examples .............................................................341
single part drawings.............................................185 insulation..............................................................341
front drawing views ......................................85, 235, 357 neighbor parts............................................. 338, 391
front views...................................................................225 on surface treatment............................................340

parts ............................................................338, 391 adding..................................................................220
schema files ................................................338, 391 adjusting drawing views ......................................220
shapes................................................................. 338 knock-off dimensions......................................... 285, 365
surface treatment ................................................ 395
hidden lines ................................................................ 139
reference models ................................................ 342 l
hidden parts
listing ................................................................... 163 labels
showing frames and leader lines......................... 314 drawing view labels .............................................246
hiding grid labels ............................................................175
drawing objects ................................................... 160 landscape ...................................................................189
grid lines.............................................................. 175 layers
grids .................................................................... 175 reinforcing bars....................................................142
parts in drawings ................................................. 163 layouts ................................................................. 19, 213
reinforcing bar lines............................................. 336 adding key plans .................................................220
highlighting creating................................................................215
in drawings .......................................................... 131 selecting ..............................................................221
parts with drawings ............................................... 76 table layouts ........................................................214
hole diameter.............................................................. 384 leader lines .................................................................316
hole size ..................................................................... 384 base point location ..............................................133
hyperlinks ...............................................................20, 58 for reinforcing bar group marks ...........................317
adding ................................................................. 136 handle points .......................................................166
modifying............................................................. 138 maximum leader line length.................................264
modifying .............................................................166
i part marks ...........................................................312
types........................................................... 316, 378
length..........................................................................383
identical objects lengthening parts ........................................................237
grouping dimensions ........................................... 279 lenthening
images shortened parts ...................................................239
in templates......................................................... 345 level dimensions .........................................................361
preview images ................................................... 200 level marks ...................................................................58
independent annotation objects ................................. 133 adding..................................................................128
DWG and DXF files............................................. 137 properties ............................................................381
hyperlinks ............................................................ 136 levels
links ..................................................................... 135 drawing level .........................................................24
modifying............................................................. 138 object level ............................................................24
revision marks ..................................................... 137 three levels of modifying drawings ........................24
text ...................................................................... 135 view level...............................................................24
texts..................................................................... 133 limiting outside dimensions.........................................266
insulation line weights.................................................................199
hatch patterns ..................................................... 341 lines ................................................................... 157, 405
integrated drawings ...................................................... 22 customized line types ..........................................345
internal bolt dimensions.............................................. 290 dividing ................................................................166
issuing extending.............................................................163
drawings.............................................................. 186 in dimensions ......................................................255
shortening............................................................163
k trimming...............................................................163
linking
dimension lines....................................................121
key plan views .............................................................. 80 drawing views........................................................92
key plans .................................................................... 219 links ..............................................................................20

modifying .............................................................138 positioning............................................................378
to DWG and DXF files .........................................138 properties.................................................... 303, 376
to other drawings .................................................135 reinforcement marks .................. 321, 379, 385, 386
listing hidden parts......................................................163 revision marks......................................................137
location section marks.......................................................388
of beam marks.....................................................315 section view label marks......................................389
of bracing marks ..................................................315 settings ................................................................302
of column marks ..................................................315 showing frames and leader lines .........................314
of end views.........................................................228 surface treatment marks ......................................388
of marks...................................................... 315, 326 text appearance ...................................................312
of section views ...................................................228 updating ...............................................................130
locking user-defined attributes .........................................307
drawings ..............................................................184 using templates........................................... 305, 307
view label marks ..................................................389
m visibility ................................................................311
weld marks................................. 148, 151, 380, 404
Master Drawing Catalog ..............................49, 348, 351
main views ...................................................80, 225, 246 adding master drawings.............................. 348, 349
managing cloning templates........................................ 350, 353
cut lines ...............................................................173 copying drawings .................................................354
drawings ..............................................................183 managing folders .................................................354
master drawings ..................................................348 master drawing properties ...................................351
moment connection symbols ...............................171 preview images........................................... 200, 201
manual dimensions.............................................. 99, 100 removing drawings...................................... 350, 355
margins .......................................................................217 rule set properties ................................................351
MarkDimensionFormat ...............................................308 searching ...............................................................52
marks ................................................................... 20, 357 wizard files ...........................................................352
adding..................................................................303 master drawings..........................................................348
adding symbols....................................................304 adding ......................................................... 348, 349
adding templates ........................................ 304, 307 cloning templates.......................................... 50, 350
appearance................................................. 311, 376 properties.............................................................351
automatic .................................................... 302, 303 removing ..............................................................350
bolt marks ................................................... 308, 384 rule sets ........................................................ 51, 349
colors ...................................................................311 saved settings........................................................50
connection marks ................................................387 searching ...............................................................52
contents ...............................................................382 types ......................................................................50
detail marks .........................................................388 wizards...................................................................52
detail view label marks ........................................389 material .............................................................. 383, 384
direction marks ....................................................245 material grade .............................................................385
element unit settings............................................318 maximum leader line length ............................... 264, 374
elements .............................................312, 382, 383 maximum number of outside dimensions ...................266
frames......................................................... 311, 312 maximum position dimensions....................................279
in dimensions.......................................................365 merging
in view labels .......................................................246 marks ..................................................132, 319, 321
leader line types ..................................................316 part marks............................................................319
level marks ................................................. 128, 381 reinforcement marks ..........132, 133, 321, 322, 379
location ...............................................315, 316, 326 weld marks.................................................. 132, 153
merged reinforcement marks...............................386 mesh
merging...............................................132, 319, 321 creating a drawing view .........................................88
part marks............................................................128 in drawings...........................................................336
placing .................................................................249 properties.............................................................396
plate side marks ..................................................260 setting contents and appearance in drawings .....336
mesh class ..................................................................385

mesh diameter............................................................ 386 neighbor parts.............................................................325
mesh length................................................................ 386 content properties................................................389
mesh name................................................................. 385 fill .........................................................................391
mesh shape................................................................ 385 hatch patterns......................................................391
mesh size ................................................................... 386 in drawing views ..................................................236
mesh weight ............................................................... 385 in drawings ..........................................................325
mesh width ................................................................. 386 view extension.....................................................357
meshes nested assemblies
properties ............................................................ 403 drawings ................................................................42
minimizing views ........................................................ 366 north marks.................................................................328
minimum position dimensions .................................... 279 notes
model objects ............................................................... 22 associative notes.................................................129
modifying number of bars ...........................................................385
annotation object properties................................ 130 number of bolts...........................................................384
building objects ................................................... 139 numbering.....................................................................48
detail properties..................................................... 98
dimension properties........................................... 126
drawing grids....................................................... 324 o
Drawing List contents............................................ 75
drawing view properties ........................................ 96 object groups ..............................................................349
drawings................................................................ 24 in dimensioning .......................................... 262, 374
grid line properties............................................... 174 object level settings .................... 24, 209, 210, 212, 357
grid properties ..................................................... 174 object property files ....................................................212
independent annotation objects .......................... 138 objects
leader line shape................................................. 166 additional drawing objects ...................................157
section properties.................................................. 97 associative annotation objects ............................127
symbol properties................................................ 157 building objects....................................................138
wizard files .......................................................... 352 cloned objects .......................................................58
moment connection symbols drawing objects .................................... 20, 158, 208
creating ............................................................... 171 independent annotation objects ..........................133
deleting................................................................ 172 offset...........................................................................405
managing ............................................................ 171 forward offset.............................................. 300, 366
updating .............................................................. 172 opening
moving Drawing List...........................................................72
drawing views........................................................ 94 drawings ......................................................... 71, 77
drawing views to another drawing......................... 90 openings and recesses
end of dimension line .......................................... 120 showing ...............................................................241
objects in drawings.............................................. 158 showing in views .................................................357
multidrawings ............................................................... 47 showing symbols .................................................242
creating ................................................................. 67 orientation
creating empty multidrawings................................ 67 of marks...............................................................407
creating of selected parts ...................................... 68 of parts ............................................... 231, 326, 407
of selected drawings multidrawings ...................... 68 orientation marks ............................................... 326, 328
multiple drawing sheets of the same part..................... 69 orientation symbols.....................................................328
overall dimensions......................................................263
n
p
name .......................................................................... 383
named size ................................................................. 199 paper size ...................................................................199
names part marks
drawings................................................................ 79 adding..................................................................128

compass direction................................................327 plate side marks................................................. 260, 365
elements ..............................................................383 showing................................................................125
leader lines ................................................. 133, 312 plates ............................................................................36
merging................................................................319 dimensioning........................................................282
modifying .............................................................130 plot files, see print files................................................191
showing frames and leader lines .........................314 plotting, see printing...................................188, 190, 191
updating...............................................................130 polygons............................................................. 157, 405
using templates .......................................... 305, 307 polylines ............................................................. 157, 405
part position ................................................................383 portrait.........................................................................189
parts position dimensions ....................................................290
additional markings in drawings ..........................139 maximum .............................................................279
color.....................................................................139 minimum ..............................................................279
compass direction................................................327 positioning properties
connecting side marks.........................................329 section marks.......................................................378
content properties................................................389 view label marks ..................................................378
developed parts in drawings................................240 precision for dimensions .............................................256
dimensions .........................................267, 287, 374 preferred dim side .......................................................301
fill .........................................................................391 preferred scale ............................................................223
fill options.............................................................139 preventing
fills .......................................................................338 automatic drawing updates..................................348
hatch patterns............................................. 338, 391 preview images .................................................. 200, 201
in drawings ..........................................................325 creating ................................................................200
lengthening ..........................................................236 in Master Drawing Catalog ......................... 200, 201
lengthening in model ...........................................237 viewing.................................................................201
lengthening shortened parts ................................239 print area.....................................................................199
line types .............................................................139 print files......................................................................191
neighbor parts......................................................389 printer catalog .................................................... 197, 198
orientation...........................................231, 326, 328 printer drivers ..............................................................197
properties............................................330, 389, 403 printer instances
representation......................................................330 Abode postscript printer instances.......................198
representation in drawings ..................................139 adding ......................................................... 197, 198
settings ................................................................330 print-to-file instances............................................197
shortening............................................................236 setting up .............................................................197
shortening in drawings.........................................237 printers ........................................................................197
shortening view by view.......................................140 printing ........................................................................191
patterns adding printer instances.............................. 197, 198
hatch patterns......................................................338 colors ...................................................................199
PDF files drawings ..............................................................188
creating................................................................192 hints and tips........................................................200
pen numbers...................................................... 179, 199 in landscape.........................................................189
changing ..............................................................179 in portrait..............................................................189
pictures line weights ..........................................................199
pull-out pictures ...................................................310 multiple drawings .................................................190
placement settings.....................................249, 251, 252 on A3 ...................................................................189
placing on A4 ...................................................................189
annotation objects ..............................249, 251, 403 paper size ............................................................199
dimensions .........................................249, 251, 252 pen numbers........................................................199
fixed .............................................................. 99, 151 print area..............................................................199
free ........................................................................99 printer instances ..................................................197
marks.......................................................... 249, 251 settings ................................................................193
views....................................................................253 single drawings ....................................................188
welds .......................................................... 249, 251 to file ...................................................190, 191, 197
plan drawings......................................................... 29, 30 to multiple sheets.................................................194

to paper printer.................................................... 197 dimension marks .................................................109
to PDF .........................................................192, 198 dimension tags ....................................................109
profile.......................................................................... 383 dimensions ................................................. 302, 373
profiles hiding lines in drawings .......................................336
dimensions .......................................................... 284 in drawings ..........................................................336
project setup properties ................................................... 396, 403
updating project information................................ 204 reinforcing bar layer information..........................142
projection type ............................................................ 226 representation options.........................................337
properties setting contents and appearance in drawings .....336
associative annotation objects ............................ 130 reinforcement marks
bolts..................................................................... 393 adding pull-out pictures .......................................310
drawing properties......................206, 207, 208, 212 elements..................................................... 385, 386
grids .................................................................... 407 leader line base points ........................................313
marks .................................................................. 376 leader line types ..................................................316
meshes................................................................ 396 location ................................................................316
parts .................................................................... 389 merging .............................................. 133, 321, 322
project properties ................................................ 204 merging properties of marks................................379
reinforcement ...................................................... 396 modifying .............................................................130
surface treatment ................................................ 394 splitting ................................................................133
symbol properties................................................ 157 reinforcement mesh....................................................336
protected areas ..................................................249, 251 creating a drawing view.........................................88
pull-out picture............................................................ 385 properties ............................................................396
pull-out pictures setting appearance and contents in drawings .....336
in reinforcement marks........................................ 310 reinforcement position ................................................385
reinforcement settings for drawings............................398
r reinforcing bar group marks

leader line types ..................................................317
location ................................................................317
radial dimensions reinforcing bars
changing the prefix.............................................. 261 dimension lines....................................................110
rails............................................................................... 41 hiding lines in drawings .......................................336
rebar_config.inp.......................................................... 398 in drawings ......................................... 141, 142, 336
RebarClassificator ...................................................... 142 layer information..................................................142
RebarLayeringMarker................................................. 142 properties ............................................................396
re-checking dimension points..................................... 127 relative dimensions............................................ 255, 361
recognizable distances............................................... 300 removing
recreating change symbols ..................................................131
dimensions .......................................................... 108 dimension points .................................................122
drawings.............................................................. 347 dimension tag content .........................................106
rectangles...........................................................157, 405 drawings ..............................................................355
reference dimensions, see check dimensions............ 285 renaming
reference lines....................................................115, 139 drawings ................................................................79
reference models.......................................................... 20 representation
hidden lines ......................................................... 342 of parts in drawings .............................................330
in drawings .......................................................... 342 representation options
reflected views............................................................ 357 for reinforcement .................................................337
refreshing resetting
associativity........................................................... 60 user coordinate system .......................................181
reinforcement reshaping
adding dimensions .............................................. 109 drawing objects ...................................................158
closed dimensions............................................... 302 resizing
dimension lines ................................................... 109 drawing objects ...................................................158
drawing view boundaries.......................................93

drawing views ........................................................92 cutting line..............................................................83
revising drawings, see revisions .................................186 depth....................................................................244
revision marks..............................................58, 137, 138 direction ...............................................................244
arrows..................................................................137 label mark elements.............................................389
placing .................................................................137 modifying ...............................................................97
revisions......................................................................186 moving to another drawing ....................................90
changing ..............................................................187 name....................................................................389
creating................................................................187 properties.............................................................360
deleting ................................................................188 section marks.......................................................247
rotating view direction marks ............................................245
drawing views ........................................................96 selecting
parts in drawing views .........................................233 drawings ................................................................76
rule sets .................................................. 50, 51, 62, 352 semi-automatic dimensions ........................................115
in Master Drawing Catalog ..................................349 settings
modifying .............................................................351 additional drawing objects ...................................405
rules bolt content properties .........................................393
dimensioning rules...............................................262 bolt dimensioning properties................................371
bolt mark elements ..............................................384
s bolt properties ......................................................393

building object appearance properties.................403
common elements in marks.................................382
saved settings..................................................50, 60, 61 connection mark elements...................................387
in Master Drawing Catalog ..................................348 dimension appearance properties .......................364
modifying .............................................................351 dimension format properties ................................363
saving dimension grouping properties ............................372
drawings ..............................................................181 dimension mark properties ..................................365
scale ...........................................................................223 dimension properties ..........................361, 365, 366
scales dimension tag properties .....................................365
in tables ...............................................................218 drawing view properties .......................................357
of drawing views ......................................... 222, 223 drawings ..............................................................357
schema files....................................................... 338, 391 DWG/DXF scaling options ...................................406
screen layout grid and overall dimensioning properties .............374
in drawings ............................................................18 grid properties......................................................407
screenshots leader line types...................................................378
preview images....................................................200 level mark properties ...........................................381
searching mark appearance properties................................376
drawings ................................................................76 mark contents ......................................................382
master drawings ....................................................52 mark properties....................................................376
section marks....................................................... 83, 247 marks ...................................................................302
elements ..............................................................388 merged reinforcement marks...............................386
modifying ...............................................................97 orientation settings...............................................407
positioning properties ..........................................378 part and neighbor part content properties............389
section name .......................................................388 part and neighbor part fill properties ....................391
setting the cutting line..........................................248 part and neighbour part properties ......................389
source drawing name ..........................................388 part and shape hatch pattern properties..............391
section view labels........................................................83 part dimensioning properties ...................... 370, 374
modifying ...............................................................97 part mark elements ..............................................383
section views ...................................... 80, 225, 246, 357 placement properties ...........................................403
aligning with main view........................................228 position dimensioning properties .........................368
combining ............................................................243 positioning properties...........................................378
creating........................................................... 83, 84 print settings ........................................................193
cut box ...................................................................83 reinforcement and mesh visibility and content
properties......................................................396

reinforcement dimensioning properties ............... 373 slab plans .....................................................................28
reinforcement mark elements.............................. 385 sloped dimensions......................................................261
reinforcement mark merging properties .............. 379 slot height ...................................................................384
reinforcement mesh mark elements.................... 386 slot length ...................................................................384
reinforcement settings for drawings .................... 398 sorting
saved settings .................................................60, 61 Drawing List...........................................................75
section and detail mark elements........................ 388 spaces in drawing views.............................................217
section view properties........................................ 360 special color................................................................391
settings affecting the recreation of drawings....... 347 special colors..............................................................178
sub-assembly dimensioning properties............... 373 specified size ..............................................................223
surface treatment hatch pattern properties ......... 395 spiral stirrup reinforcement groups
surface treatment mark elements........................ 388 dimensioning .......................................................111
surface treatment visibility and content properties.... splitting
394 arcs......................................................................165
view, section view and detail view label marks ... 389 circles ..................................................................165
weld mark properties........................................... 380 lines .....................................................................165
weld visibility options........................................... 404 polylines ..............................................................165
shapes..................................................................20, 157 stairs .............................................................................40
arcs ..................................................................... 157 in cast unit drawings..............................................46
circles .................................................................. 157 start point
clouds.................................................................. 157 for dimensions .....................................................123
creating ............................................................... 157 status flags ...................................................................73
fills ....................................................................... 338 in Drawing List.......................................................74
hatch patterns ..................................................... 338 straight dimensions............................................ 255, 361
lines..................................................................... 157 sub-assemblies
polygons.............................................................. 157 dimensioning .......................................................373
polylines .............................................................. 157 superscript
rectangles............................................................ 157 adding in texts, dimensions and marks ...............134
short dimensions ........................................................ 252 surface treatment
shortening................................................................... 357 class ....................................................................388
parts in drawing views......................................... 237 code.....................................................................388
view by view ........................................................ 140 hatch patterns............................................. 340, 395
shortening and lengthening parts ............................... 236 in drawings ..........................................................335
shortening parts in drawings ...................................... 237 marks...................................................................388
showing material................................................................388
drawing objects ................................................... 160 name ...................................................................388
plate side marks .................................................. 125 properties ................................................... 394, 403
reference models in drawings ............................. 342 surface treatment marks
reinforcing bars in drawings ................................ 141 modifying .............................................................130
single mark content .................................................... 386 surfacing.htc ...............................................................395
single part drawings switches
freezing ............................................................... 185 for print file names...............................................191
single-part drawing views ............................................. 89 switching on/off
single-part drawings ..................................................... 34 associativity symbol...............................................23
anchor bolts........................................................... 34 Symbol Editor .............................................................154
creating ...........................................................61, 66 symbol separating blocks in mark ..............................386
dimensioning ....................................................... 370 symbols ......................................................... 20, 58, 382
embeds ................................................................. 35 adding in drawings ..............................................156
example................................................................. 36 associativity ...........................................................23
plates..................................................................... 36 bolt symbols ........................................................333
single-part views........................................................... 80 change symbols ..................................................131
size ............................................................................. 383 changing symbol file............................................156
skew limits .................................................................. 328 defining a firm folder............................................345

in drawings ..........................................................154 transparency
in marks ...............................................................304 of tables ...............................................................218
modifying .................................................... 138, 157 trimming
modifying symbol files .........................................155 lines in drawings ..................................................163
selecting files .......................................................155 types
symbol files.........................................154, 155, 156 dimension types...................................................255
viewing symbol files.............................................155 dimensions...........................................................361
SymEd, see Symbol Editor .........................................154 drawing types.........................................................27
of leader lines ......................................................378
t of master drawings ................................................50
table layouts................................................................213
u
adding a DWG/DXF file .......................................220
adding tables .......................................................217 UCS, see user coordinate system ..............................180
creating................................................................216 UDAs, see user-defined attributes ..............................382
replacing tables ...................................................218 undeformed.................................................................357
setting table scale................................................218 undeformed parts........................................................240
setting table transparency ...................................218 unfolded ......................................................................357
setting the location of tables ................................218 unfolding ............................................................ 239, 280
tables ................................................................. 213, 215 unfreezing drawings........................................... 184, 185
adding in table layout...........................................217 units
modifying .............................................................221 in mark elements .................................................318
replacing ..............................................................218 of dimensions.......................................................256
table layouts ............................................... 214, 218 unlinking
tags.............................................................................279 dimension lines ....................................................121
in dimensions.......................................................302 unlocking
tags, see dimension tags ............ 99, 104, 106, 109, 126 drawings ..............................................................184
template attributes updating
adding in marks ...................................................307 cut lines................................................................173
Template Editor ................................................. 305, 307 drawings ...............................................22, 183, 348
templates ....................................................................382 moment connection symbols ...............................172
cloning templates...................................................54 part marks............................................................130
in marks ..............................................304, 305, 307 weld marks...........................................................130
modifying tables...................................................221 user coordinate system...............................................180
table layouts ........................................................214 creating dimensions.............................................103
tables ...................................................................215 resetting ...............................................................181
template library ......................................................58 setting ..................................................................181
text toggling between two systems.............................181
in marks ...............................................................312 user-defined attributes ................................................382
modifying .............................................................138 adding in marks ...................................................307
text files.................................................................. 20, 58 in drawings...........................................................344
adding in drawings...............................................135 using superscript.........................................................134
texts ...............................................................20, 58, 382
tips
in drawings ..........................................................133
v
printing drawings .................................................200
titles validity
in drawings ............................................................80 of dimension points..............................................127
toggling between user coordinate systems.................181 value fields
top drawing views ................................................ 85, 357 in templates ................................................ 305, 307
top views.....................................................................225 view filters .......................................................... 209, 357

view label marks of surface treatment ............................................335
positioning properties .......................................... 378 of weld marks ......................................................404
view labels
mark elements..................................................... 389
marks .................................................................. 246 w
name ................................................................... 389
view names ................................................................ 247 weld marks ........................................................ 148, 380
viewing direction adding..................................................................151
beams and bracings............................................ 235 examples .............................................................152
columns in drawings............................................ 235 merging ...............................................................153
views moddifying model weld properties.......................147
aligning..........................................................95, 228 modifying .............................................................130
arranging drawing views ....................................... 96 updating...............................................................130
assembly drawings.............................................. 230 visibility ................................................................404
cloning dimensions................................................ 57 weld numbers
drawing name...................................................... 389 showing ...............................................................404
drawing views...................................................... 225 weld symbols ..............................................................147
fitting drawing views .............................................. 92 welds ..........................................................................151
fixed..................................................................... 253 concepts ..............................................................147
frames ................................................................... 94 examples .............................................................148
free ...................................................................... 253 in drawings ..........................................................147
in drawings ................................ 19, 80, 81, 92, 225 mark properties ...................................................380
key plan view....................................................... 219 modifying .............................................................147
label mark elements ............................................ 389 modifying in drawings..........................................130
linking drawing views ............................................ 92 placing .................................................................249
moving drawing views ........................................... 94 properties ............................................................403
name ................................................................... 389 weld marks ..........................................................152
resizing drawing views .......................................... 92 welds in drawings ................................................148
rotating drawing views........................................... 96 wizard files..................................................................352
scale.................................................................... 389 wizards ............................................................ 50, 52, 62
source drawing name.......................................... 389 work point ...................................................................285
views along grid lines ................................................... 80 workshop drawings
visibility assembly drawings................................................40
of marks .............................................................. 311 single-part drawings ..............................................34
of reference models ............................................ 342

Tekla Structures
Modeling Guide

August 2012

warranties for the Software and this Manual, disclaims other warranties, limits recoverable damages, defines permitted
uses of the Software, and determines whether you are an authorized user of the Software. All information set forth in this
manual is provided with the warranty set forth in the License Agreement. Please refer to the License Agreement for
important obligations and applicable limitations and restrictions on your rights. Tekla does not guarantee that the text is
free of technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Tekla reserves the right to make changes and additions to this
manual due to changes in the software or otherwise.
In addition, this Software Manual is protected by copyright law and by international treaties. Unauthorized reproduction,
display, modification, or distribution of this Manual, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,
and will be prosecuted to the full extent permitted by law.
Tekla, Tekla Structures, Tekla NIS, Tekla DMS, Tekla Municipality GIS, and Tekla Civil are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Tekla Corporation in the European Union, the United States, and/or other countries. Other product and
company names mentioned in this Manual are or may be trademarks of their respective owners. By referring to a third-
party product or brand, Tekla does not intend to suggest an affiliation with or endorsement by such third party and
disclaims any such affiliation or endorsement, except where otherwise expressly stated.
DWGdirect, DGNdirect and OpenDWG Toolkit/Viewkit libraries © 1998-2005 Open Design Alliance. All rights reserved.
FlexNet Copyright © 2010 Flexera Software, Inc. and/or InstallShield Co. Inc. All Rights Reserved. This product contains
proprietary and confidential technology, information and creative works owned by Flexera Software, Inc. and/or
InstallShield Co. Inc. and their respective licensors, if any. Any use, copying, publication, distribution, display, modification,
or transmission of such technology in whole or in part in any form or by any means without the prior express written
permission of Flexera Software, Inc. and/or InstallShield Co. Inc. is strictly prohibited. Except where expressly provided by
Flexera Software, Inc. and/or InstallShield Co. Inc. in writing, possession of this technology shall not be construed to confer
any license or rights under any Flexera Software, Inc. and/or InstallShield Co. Inc. intellectual property rights, whether by
estoppel, implication, or otherwise.
The software is protected by U.S. Patent Nos. 7,302,368, 7,617,076, 7,765,240, 7,809,533, 8,022,953, 8,041,744 and 8,046,
210. Also elements of the software described in this Manual may be the subject of pending patent applications in the
European Union and/or other countries including U.S. patent applications 2005285881, 20110102463 and 20120022848.
conventions
Font Usage
Bold Any text that you see in the user interface appears in bold. This
font is used, for example, for window and dialog box titles, box
and button names, and list items.
Italic bold New terms are in italic bold when they appear in the current
context for the first time.
Monospace Extracts of program code, HTML, or other material that you
would normally edit in a text editor, appear in monospaced
font.
This font is also used for file names and folder paths, and for
any text that you should type yourself.
A tip might introduce a shortcut, or suggest alternative ways of

doing things.
A note draws attention to details that you might easily overlook. It

can also point you to other information in this guide that you might
find useful.
You should always read very important notes and warnings, like
this one. They will help you avoid making serious mistakes, or
wasting your time.
This symbol indicates advanced or highly technical information

that is usually of interest only to advanced or technically-oriented
readers.
3
Contents
Conventions used in this guide ..............................................................................................................3
1 Creating 3D models...................................................................................... 17
1.1 What is a 3D model ............................................................................................................ 17
1.2 Creating a new model......................................................................................................... 18
1.3 Opening a model ................................................................................................................. 19
1.4 Saving a model .................................................................................................................... 19
Saving a model with a different name or location............................................................................ 20
1.5 Model templates ................................................................................................................. 20
Creating a model template ....................................................................................................................... 21
Modifying a model template .................................................................................................................... 22
2 Setting up the workspace ........................................................................... 23

2.1 Screen layout....................................................................................................................... 23
Changing the background color .............................................................................................................. 25
Background color examples...................................................................................................................... 25
2.2 Work area ............................................................................................................................ 27
Defining the work area .............................................................................................................................. 27
Hiding the work area .................................................................................................................................. 28
2.3 Work plane .......................................................................................................................... 28
Shifting the work plane ............................................................................................................................. 29
Restoring the default work plane ........................................................................................................... 29
Changing the color of the work plane grid .......................................................................................... 30
2.4 Coordinate system............................................................................................................... 30
2.5 Grids ..................................................................................................................................... 30
Creating a grid.............................................................................................................................................. 31
Grid coordinates ................................................................................................................................... 32
Grid labels .............................................................................................................................................. 32
Modifying a grid........................................................................................................................................... 32
Deleting a grid .............................................................................................................................................. 33
Changing the grid color ............................................................................................................................. 33
Grid lines ........................................................................................................................................................ 33
Creating a single grid line ................................................................................................................. 34
Modifying a single grid line .............................................................................................................. 34
Deleting a single grid line .................................................................................................................. 35
2.6 Views .................................................................................................................................... 35
Should I model in a 3D or plane view?.................................................................................................. 36
Creating a view ............................................................................................................................................ 36
About naming views ............................................................................................................................ 37
View planes ............................................................................................................................................ 37
4
Moving a view plane ........................................................................................................................... 38
Creating grid views .............................................................................................................................. 39
Creating a surface view ...................................................................................................................... 39
Opening a view............................................................................................................................................. 41
Modifying a view ......................................................................................................................................... 42
Deleting a view............................................................................................................................................. 42
Switching between open views ............................................................................................................... 42
Switching between 3D and plane view................................................................................................. 42
Refreshing views .......................................................................................................................................... 43
Arranging views ........................................................................................................................................... 43
2.7 Construction objects........................................................................................................... 43
Creating a construction plane ................................................................................................................. 44
Creating a construction line..................................................................................................................... 44
Creating a construction circle.................................................................................................................. 45
2.8 Points.................................................................................................................................... 45
Creating points along the extension line of two points................................................................... 46
Creating points parallel to two points................................................................................................... 46
Creating points on a line ........................................................................................................................... 47
Creating points on a plane........................................................................................................................ 48
Creating projected points on a line........................................................................................................ 48
Creating points along an arc using center and arc points .............................................................. 49
Creating points along an arc using three arc points......................................................................... 49
Creating points tangent to a circle ........................................................................................................ 50
Creating points at the intersection of two lines ................................................................................ 50
Creating points at the intersection of a plane and a line................................................................ 51
Creating points at the intersection of a part and a line .................................................................. 51
Creating points at the intersection of a circle and a line................................................................ 51
Creating points at the intersection of two part axes........................................................................ 52
Creating points at any position ............................................................................................................... 52
Importing points .......................................................................................................................................... 53
3 Defining project information ...................................................................... 55
4 Importing reference models ........................................................................ 59

4.1 Inserting a reference model............................................................................................... 59
4.2 Modifying reference model properties ............................................................................. 61
4.3 Hiding a reference model................................................................................................... 61
4.4 Highlighting a reference model......................................................................................... 61
4.5 Updating reference models ................................................................................................ 62
4.6 Detecting changes in a reference model .......................................................................... 62
4.7 Viewing reference model layers......................................................................................... 63
4.8 Examining the contents of a reference model ................................................................ 64
4.9 Reference model objects .................................................................................................... 65
Splitting a reference model into reference model objects .............................................................. 66
4.10 Supported DGN objects ...................................................................................................... 66
5 Creating and modifying structures............................................................. 69

5.1 About parts.......................................................................................................................... 69
Part handles .................................................................................................................................................. 69
Part labels ...................................................................................................................................................... 70
5
Showing part labels in a view .......................................................................................................... 71
5.2 Creating and modifying parts ........................................................................................... 71
Modifying the position of a part............................................................................................................. 72
Modifying the shape of a part ................................................................................................................. 73
Modifying the length of a part ................................................................................................................ 74
Changing the profile of a part ................................................................................................................. 74
Fixed profiles ......................................................................................................................................... 75
Parametric profiles ............................................................................................................................... 75
User-defined profiles ........................................................................................................................... 76
Changing the material of a part.............................................................................................................. 76
Changing the color of a part .................................................................................................................... 76
5.3 Steel parts............................................................................................................................ 77
Creating a steel column............................................................................................................................. 77
Creating a steel beam................................................................................................................................. 78
Creating a steel polybeam......................................................................................................................... 78
Creating a curved beam............................................................................................................................. 78
Creating a contour plate ........................................................................................................................... 79
Creating a round contour plate ....................................................................................................... 79
Creating an orthogonal beam .................................................................................................................. 80
Creating a twin profile............................................................................................................................... 81
5.4 Assemblies............................................................................................................................ 81
Creating an assembly ................................................................................................................................. 81
Creating a sub-assembly .................................................................................................................... 82
Using bolts to create assemblies ..................................................................................................... 82
Bolting sub-assemblies to an existing assembly ........................................................................ 82
Using welds to create assemblies .................................................................................................... 83
Welding sub-assemblies to an existing assembly ...................................................................... 83
Adding objects to assemblies ................................................................................................................... 83
Assembly hierarchy .............................................................................................................................. 84
Adding parts to an assembly ............................................................................................................ 85
Creating a nested assembly .............................................................................................................. 85
Joining assemblies ............................................................................................................................... 86
Changing the assembly main part ................................................................................................... 86
Changing the main assembly ............................................................................................................ 86
Removing objects from an assembly...................................................................................................... 86
Highlighting objects in an assembly ...................................................................................................... 86
Exploding an assembly............................................................................................................................... 87
Assembly examples ..................................................................................................................................... 87
5.5 Concrete parts..................................................................................................................... 88
Creating a pad footing ............................................................................................................................... 89
Creating a strip footing.............................................................................................................................. 89
Creating a concrete column ..................................................................................................................... 89
Creating a concrete beam ......................................................................................................................... 90
Creating a concrete polybeam ................................................................................................................. 90
Creating a concrete slab............................................................................................................................ 91
Creating a round slab .......................................................................................................................... 91
Creating a concrete panel......................................................................................................................... 92
5.6 Cast units............................................................................................................................. 93
Creating a cast unit .................................................................................................................................... 93
Adding objects to cast units..................................................................................................................... 93
Adding concrete objects to a cast unit .......................................................................................... 94
Adding non-concrete objects to a cast unit ................................................................................ 94
Changing the cast unit main part ................................................................................................... 94
Removing objects from a cast unit......................................................................................................... 94
6
Highlighting objects in a cast unit ......................................................................................................... 94
Exploding a cast unit.................................................................................................................................. 95
Defining the cast unit type ....................................................................................................................... 95
Casting direction.......................................................................................................................................... 95
Defining the casting direction of a part ........................................................................................ 96
Showing the top-in-form face ......................................................................................................... 97
6 Detailing structures ..................................................................................... 99

6.1 Bolts ..................................................................................................................................... 99
Creating a bolt group .............................................................................................................................. 100
Bolt group shape ............................................................................................................................... 100
Bolt group position ........................................................................................................................... 101
Bolt offsets .......................................................................................................................................... 102
Creating a single bolt .............................................................................................................................. 102
Changing or adding bolted parts ......................................................................................................... 102
6.2 Holes................................................................................................................................... 103
Creating round holes ............................................................................................................................... 103
Creating slotted holes ............................................................................................................................. 103
Creating oversized holes......................................................................................................................... 104
6.3 Welds.................................................................................................................................. 105
Creating a weld between parts............................................................................................................. 105
Weld position ..................................................................................................................................... 106
Weld size prefixes ............................................................................................................................. 107
Creating a polygon weld......................................................................................................................... 107
Creating a weld to a part ....................................................................................................................... 108
Weld preparation ...................................................................................................................................... 108
Manually preparing a part for welding ....................................................................................... 109
6.4 Surface treatment ............................................................................................................ 109
Modifying surface treatment properties............................................................................................ 110
Adding surface treatment to parts ...................................................................................................... 111
Adding surface treatment to a selected area ........................................................................... 111
Adding surface treatment to a part face ................................................................................... 111
Adding surface treatment to all faces of a part ....................................................................... 111
Adding surface treatment to cut faces ....................................................................................... 111
Surface treatment on chamfered parts ...................................................................................... 112
Surface treatment on parts with openings and recesses ...................................................... 112
Creating new surface treatment options........................................................................................... 113
Tiled surface treatment........................................................................................................................... 114
Creating new tile patterns .............................................................................................................. 114
Example pattern definition ............................................................................................................ 115
Tile pattern definitions .................................................................................................................... 117
Tile pattern elements ....................................................................................................................... 118
6.5 Fine-tuning part shape..................................................................................................... 118
Chamfers ..................................................................................................................................................... 119
Chamfering part corners ................................................................................................................. 119
Corner chamfer types and dimensions ........................................................................................ 120
Polybeam chamfers .......................................................................................................................... 120
Chamfering part edges .................................................................................................................... 121
Fittings......................................................................................................................................................... 122
Creating a fitting ............................................................................................................................... 122
Cuts............................................................................................................................................................... 123
Line cuts ............................................................................................................................................... 123
Polygon cuts ....................................................................................................................................... 124
7
Part cuts ............................................................................................................................................... 124
Cutting parts with a line ................................................................................................................. 125
Cutting parts with a polygon ......................................................................................................... 125
Cutting parts with another part ................................................................................................... 126
Modifying the shape of a polygon....................................................................................................... 126
Warping concrete parts .......................................................................................................................... 127
Warping a concrete beam using deformation angles ............................................................. 127
Warping a concrete slab by moving chamfers ......................................................................... 127
Warping a Floor Bay (66) slab ....................................................................................................... 128
Cambering parts........................................................................................................................................ 129
Cambering a part .............................................................................................................................. 129
6.6 Combining parts ................................................................................................................ 129
Combining two parts into one .............................................................................................................. 130
Attaching a part to another part ......................................................................................................... 130
Detaching an attached part................................................................................................................... 131
Exploding attached parts........................................................................................................................ 132
6.7 Splitting parts ................................................................................................................... 132
Splitting a straight or curved part ....................................................................................................... 132
Splitting a plate or slab .......................................................................................................................... 133
7 Examining the model ................................................................................ 135

7.1 Viewing the model ............................................................................................................ 135
Zooming the model .................................................................................................................................. 135
Modifying the zoom settings ......................................................................................................... 136
Zooming with keyboard shortcuts ................................................................................................ 136
Rotating the model .................................................................................................................................. 136
Moving the model .................................................................................................................................... 137
Flying through the model....................................................................................................................... 138
Creating a clip plane................................................................................................................................ 138
Creating a screenshot.............................................................................................................................. 139
Creating a screenshot in Windows Vista .................................................................................... 140
Saving a screenshot in bitmap format ........................................................................................ 140
Printing a screenshot ....................................................................................................................... 140
Keyboard shortcuts for viewing the model ....................................................................................... 140
7.2 Showing and hiding objects............................................................................................. 141
Defining which objects are displayed ................................................................................................. 142
Representation options ........................................................................................................................... 142
Hiding selected parts............................................................................................................................... 144
Hiding unselected parts .......................................................................................................................... 144
Showing parts with exact lines ............................................................................................................ 145
Showing parts with high accuracy ...................................................................................................... 146
Showing and hiding assemblies ........................................................................................................... 146
Showing and hiding components......................................................................................................... 147
Keyboard shortcuts for part representation options ...................................................................... 147
Keyboard shortcuts for component representation options......................................................... 148
Object groups............................................................................................................................................. 148
Creating an object group ................................................................................................................ 148
Copying an object group to another model .............................................................................. 149
Deleting an object group ................................................................................................................ 149
Object representation settings.............................................................................................................. 149
Creating object representation settings ..................................................................................... 150
Defining your own colors to model object groups .................................................................. 151
Copying object representation settings to another model ................................................... 152
8
Deleting object representation settings ..................................................................................... 153
7.3 Visualizing project status ................................................................................................. 153
Creating a visualization .......................................................................................................................... 153
Copying visualization settings to another model............................................................................ 154
Deleting visualization settings.............................................................................................................. 154
Example: Visualizing the erection schedule of a project .............................................................. 154
Example: Defining an erection schedule .................................................................................... 155
Example: Creating object groups .................................................................................................. 155
Example: Creating object representation settings .................................................................. 156
Example: Creating visualization settings ................................................................................... 156
Example: Visualizing the erection schedule .............................................................................. 157
8 Checking the model .................................................................................. 161

8.1 Inquiring the model .......................................................................................................... 161
Inquiring object properties..................................................................................................................... 161
Object property report templates ................................................................................................. 161
Using the Custom Inquiry tool.............................................................................................................. 162
Modifying the contents of Custom Inquiry tool ...................................................................... 162
Adding attributes to Custom Inquiry tool .................................................................................. 163
8.2 Measuring objects............................................................................................................. 163
Measuring distances ................................................................................................................................ 164
Measuring angles...................................................................................................................................... 164
Measuring arcs .......................................................................................................................................... 164
Measuring bolt spacing........................................................................................................................... 165
8.3 Detecting clashes .............................................................................................................. 166
Clash Check Manager.............................................................................................................................. 166
Finding clashes using Clash Check Manager ............................................................................ 167
Symbols used in clash checking .................................................................................................... 168
Managing the list of clashes .......................................................................................................... 169
Changing the status of clashes ..................................................................................................... 169
Changing the priority of clashes ................................................................................................... 170
Grouping clashes ............................................................................................................................... 170
Ungrouping clashes .......................................................................................................................... 171
Viewing the details of a clash ....................................................................................................... 171
Adding comments to a clash ......................................................................................................... 171
Modifying a clash comment .......................................................................................................... 172
Removing a clash comment ........................................................................................................... 172
Viewing the history of a clash ....................................................................................................... 172
Searching for clashes ....................................................................................................................... 173
Printing a list of clashes .................................................................................................................. 173
Previewing a list of clashes before printing .............................................................................. 173
Setting the paper size, margins and page orientation ........................................................... 174
Opening and saving clash check sessions .................................................................................. 174
Defining a clash check clearance area for bolts.............................................................................. 175
Reverting to the old clash checking functionality .......................................................................... 176
8.4 Diagnosing and repairing the model ............................................................................... 176
Diagnose and repair model results ...................................................................................................... 177
8.5 Comparing parts or assemblies ........................................................................................ 177
8.6 Finding distant objects ..................................................................................................... 177
8.7 Keyboard shortcuts for checking the model .................................................................. 178
9
9 Numbering the model ............................................................................... 179
9.1 What is numbering and how to plan it .......................................................................... 179
9.2 What affects numbering .................................................................................................. 180
Identical parts............................................................................................................................................ 180
Identical reinforcements......................................................................................................................... 181
User-defined attributes in numbering................................................................................................ 181
9.3 Numbering tips.................................................................................................................. 181
9.4 Checking the numbering .................................................................................................. 182
9.5 Defining numbering series ............................................................................................... 184
Planning your numbering series ........................................................................................................... 185
Assigning a numbering series to a part.............................................................................................. 185
Assigning a numbering series to an assembly.................................................................................. 186
Family numbers ......................................................................................................................................... 186
Assigning family numbers .............................................................................................................. 186
Changing the family number of an object ................................................................................. 187
Overlapping numbering series............................................................................................................... 187
9.6 Numbering objects............................................................................................................ 187
Numbering assemblies and cast units ................................................................................................ 188
Assembly position numbers ............................................................................................................ 188
Numbering reinforcements.................................................................................................................... 189
Saving preliminary numbers.................................................................................................................. 189
Control numbers ....................................................................................................................................... 189
Assigning control numbers to parts ............................................................................................. 189
Control number order ...................................................................................................................... 190
Displaying control numbers in the model .................................................................................. 191
Removing control numbers ............................................................................................................ 192
Locking and unlocking control numbers .................................................................................... 192
Example: Using control numbers to indicate the erection order ....................................... 193
Changing numbers ................................................................................................................................... 195
Clearing numbers...................................................................................................................................... 195
Creating a standard-part model........................................................................................................... 196
9.7 Viewing the numbering history ....................................................................................... 197
9.8 Repairing numbering errors ............................................................................................. 197
9.9 Numbering examples ........................................................................................................ 198
Example: Numbering identical beams ................................................................................................ 198
Example: Using family numbers ........................................................................................................... 198
Example: Numbering selected part types .......................................................................................... 199
Example: Numbering parts in selected phases................................................................................. 200
Example: Numbering settings during a project ............................................................................... 201
10 Advanced modeling ................................................................................... 203

10.1 Organizing the model ....................................................................................................... 203
Creating logical areas.............................................................................................................................. 205
Creating object type categories............................................................................................................ 205
Modifying logical areas and object type categories....................................................................... 205
Modifying the object pane..................................................................................................................... 206
Classifying objects in object type categories.................................................................................... 207
Importing an object type category ...................................................................................................... 207
Exporting an object type category....................................................................................................... 208
Viewing logical areas and object type categories........................................................................... 208
Deleting logical areas and object type categories .......................................................................... 209
10
10.2 Phases................................................................................................................................. 209
Dividing the model into phases ............................................................................................................ 209
Custom phase properties ........................................................................................................................ 210
10.3 Sequences .......................................................................................................................... 210
Creating a sequence................................................................................................................................. 210
Adding parts to a sequence ................................................................................................................... 211
Checking the sequence of a part.......................................................................................................... 211
Modifying the sequence number of a part........................................................................................ 212
Deleting a sequence................................................................................................................................. 212
10.4 Lotting................................................................................................................................ 212
Creating a lot ............................................................................................................................................. 213
Adding parts to a lot................................................................................................................................ 213
Removing parts from a lot ..................................................................................................................... 213
Deleting a lot ............................................................................................................................................. 214
10.5 The Profile Catalog ........................................................................................................... 214
Adding a rule.............................................................................................................................................. 215
Editing a rule.............................................................................................................................................. 216
Changing the material of a profile type............................................................................................. 216
Modifying the Profile Catalog............................................................................................................... 217
Adding a new fixed profile..................................................................................................................... 218
Deleting a profile ...................................................................................................................................... 218
Adding a user attribute to a profile .................................................................................................... 219
Example: Adding a user attribute to a profile and using it in a rule ................................ 219
User-defined cross sections................................................................................................................... 221
Defining a cross section using polygon ...................................................................................... 222
Defining a cross section using a plate ........................................................................................ 223
Profile cross-section from plate (10) ........................................................................................... 223
Defining a cross section using a DWG file ................................................................................. 224
DWG Profile to Library (6) .............................................................................................................. 225
Modifying a cross section ............................................................................................................... 225
Fixed user-defined profiles .................................................................................................................... 226
Creating a fixed user-defined profile with a single cross section ...................................... 226
Creating a fixed user-defined profile with multiple cross sections ................................... 227
Parametric user-defined profiles ........................................................................................................ 228
Creating a profile with variable cross sections ....................................................................... 229
Modifying a profile with variable cross sections ..................................................................... 230
Exporting and importing profiles ......................................................................................................... 231
Exporting a profile catalog ............................................................................................................. 231
Exporting a part of the Profile Catalog ...................................................................................... 231
Example of profile export file ........................................................................................................ 232
Importing a profile catalog ............................................................................................................ 233
Units used in export and import ................................................................................................... 234
System parametric profiles .................................................................................................................... 236
Converting a parametric profile to a standard fixed profile ................................................. 236
Defining names of parametric profiles ....................................................................................... 236
Using standardized values for parametric profile dimensions ............................................. 238
System parametric profiles available in Tekla Structures ..................................................... 238
10.6 The Material Catalog........................................................................................................ 268
Modifying the Material Catalog........................................................................................................... 269
Adding a new material grade................................................................................................................ 269
Deleting a material grade....................................................................................................................... 270
Adding a user attribute to a material grade..................................................................................... 270
Exporting a material catalog................................................................................................................. 271
Exporting a part of the Material Catalog .......................................................................................... 271
11
Importing a material catalog ................................................................................................................ 272
Creating user-defined material symbols............................................................................................ 273
10.7 The Bolt Catalog and the Bolt Assembly Catalog.......................................................... 273
How the Bolt Catalog and the Bolt Assembly Catalog work together ..................................... 275
Adding bolts to the Bolt Catalog ......................................................................................................... 276
Adding bolt assemblies to the Bolt Assembly Catalog .................................................................. 276
Merging bolt catalogs when you upgrade to a new Tekla Structures version........................ 277
Creating studs............................................................................................................................................ 278
Exporting a bolt catalog ......................................................................................................................... 278
Importing a bolt catalog......................................................................................................................... 279
Importing a part of the Bolt Catalog .................................................................................................. 280
10.8 The Reinforcing Bar Catalog............................................................................................ 280
10.9 The Reinforcing Bar Shape Catalog ................................................................................ 280
10.10 The Component Catalog ................................................................................................... 281
10.11 Sketched cross sections.................................................................................................... 281
Opening the cross section sketch editor............................................................................................ 281
Sketch Browser .................................................................................................................................. 282
Variables .............................................................................................................................................. 283
Sketching the outline of a cross section............................................................................................ 284
Sketching a polyline ......................................................................................................................... 284
Sketching an arc ................................................................................................................................ 285
Sketching a circle .............................................................................................................................. 285
Refining the shape of a sketched cross section............................................................................... 286
Adding a parallel constraint ........................................................................................................... 286
Adding a perpendicular constraint ............................................................................................... 287
Adding a coincident constraint ..................................................................................................... 287
Adding a fixed constraint ............................................................................................................... 288
Adding a horizontal constraint ..................................................................................................... 288
Adding a vertical constraint ........................................................................................................... 289
Deleting a constraint ....................................................................................................................... 289
Adding dimensions to a sketched cross section .............................................................................. 289
Adding a radial dimension to a sketch ....................................................................................... 290
Adding an angle dimension to a sketch ..................................................................................... 291
Adding a dimension between two points in a sketch ............................................................. 291
Adding a horizontal dimension to a sketch ............................................................................... 292
Adding a vertical dimension to a sketch .................................................................................... 292
Deleting a dimension from a sketch ............................................................................................ 293
Defining positioning planes for a sketched cross section............................................................. 293
Part positioning planes .................................................................................................................... 293
Connection positioning planes ...................................................................................................... 294
Showing and hiding positioning planes ..................................................................................... 295
Moving positioning planes ............................................................................................................. 295
Moving positioning plane handles ............................................................................................... 296
Reverting to default positioning planes ..................................................................................... 297
Checking a sketched cross section ...................................................................................................... 297
Saving a sketched cross section ........................................................................................................... 298
Modifying a sketched cross section .................................................................................................... 298
Modifying chamfers in a sketch ................................................................................................... 299
Setting the sketch thickness .......................................................................................................... 299
Cross section extrusion types ........................................................................................................ 300
Using sketched cross sections in a model ......................................................................................... 301
Creating an image of a sketched cross section ........................................................................ 301
Importing and exporting sketched cross sections........................................................................... 302
Importing sketched cross sections ............................................................................................... 302
12
Exporting sketched cross sections ................................................................................................ 303
Example: Creating a symmetric C-shaped cross section............................................................... 303
Example: Sketching a C-shaped cross section .......................................................................... 304
Example: Adding dimensions to the cross section .................................................................. 305
Example: Setting the cross section thickness ........................................................................... 306
Example: Modifying the chamfers of the cross section ......................................................... 307
Example: Using the cross section in a model ............................................................................ 308
10.12 Polybeam length calculation............................................................................................ 309
Advanced options and parameter settings affecting polybeam length calculation.............. 310
10.13 Bolt length calculation..................................................................................................... 311
11 Modeling settings...................................................................................... 315

11.1 General settings ................................................................................................................ 315
Grid properties........................................................................................................................................... 315
Grid line properties................................................................................................................................... 316
Point properties......................................................................................................................................... 316
Rotation settings ...................................................................................................................................... 316
Screenshot settings.................................................................................................................................. 317
11.2 View and representation settings.................................................................................... 318
View properties.......................................................................................................................................... 318
Default part, component, custom component, assembly and
cast unit view properties ................................................................................................................ 319
Grid view properties................................................................................................................................. 319
Display settings ......................................................................................................................................... 320
Color settings for parts ........................................................................................................................... 321
Color settings for object groups........................................................................................................... 322
Transparency settings for object groups............................................................................................ 322
11.3 Part properties................................................................................................................... 323
Steel column properties.......................................................................................................................... 323
Steel beam properties.............................................................................................................................. 324
Contour plate properties......................................................................................................................... 325
Orthogonal beam properties.................................................................................................................. 326
Twin profile properties ............................................................................................................................ 326
Pad footing properties............................................................................................................................. 327
Strip footing properties........................................................................................................................... 328
Concrete column properties .................................................................................................................. 329
Concrete beam properties ...................................................................................................................... 330
Concrete slab properties......................................................................................................................... 331
Concrete panel properties ...................................................................................................................... 331
User-defined attributes........................................................................................................................... 332
11.4 Part position settings ....................................................................................................... 333
Position on the work plane .................................................................................................................... 333
Rotation....................................................................................................................................................... 334
Position depth............................................................................................................................................ 335
Vertical position ........................................................................................................................................ 336
Horizontal position................................................................................................................................... 338
End offsets .................................................................................................................................................. 339
11.5 Detail properties................................................................................................................ 340
Bolt properties ........................................................................................................................................... 340
Weld properties ......................................................................................................................................... 342
List of weld types...................................................................................................................................... 344
Corner chamfer properties ..................................................................................................................... 345
Edge chamfer properties......................................................................................................................... 346
13
Bolt Assembly Catalog properties ........................................................................................................ 347
Bolt Catalog properties ........................................................................................................................... 348
11.6 Numbering settings........................................................................................................... 349
General numbering settings .................................................................................................................. 349
Weld numbering settings ....................................................................................................................... 350
Control number settings......................................................................................................................... 350
12 Modeling tips............................................................................................. 353

12.1 General modeling tips....................................................................................................... 353
Right-hand rule......................................................................................................................................... 353
Activating an overlapping view ............................................................................................................ 354
Hiding cut lines in a view....................................................................................................................... 354
Cutting efficiently .................................................................................................................................... 354
Parametric modeling................................................................................................................................ 355
Creating a radial grid............................................................................................................................... 355
Finding RGB values for colors ............................................................................................................... 356
Showing part reference lines in model views................................................................................... 357
Defining the autosave interval for all models .................................................................................. 357
Using an autosaved model .................................................................................................................... 357
12.2 Tips for creating and positioning parts .......................................................................... 358
Defining default part properties........................................................................................................... 358
Creating curved parts .............................................................................................................................. 359
Creating horizontal parts ....................................................................................................................... 360
Creating beams close to each other.................................................................................................... 360
Alternative way of creating a round plate or slab .......................................................................... 360
Positioning columns, pad footings, and orthogonal beams ......................................................... 360
Positioning objects in a radial or circular pattern .......................................................................... 361
Optional ways of placing objects in a model.................................................................................... 361
Displaying objects connected to a part.............................................................................................. 362
Modeling identical areas ........................................................................................................................ 363
14
15
16
1 Creating 3D models
This section explains how to open, create, and save models in Tekla Structures.
Contents • What is a 3D model (17)

• Creating a new model (18)
• Opening a model (19)
• Saving a model (19)
• Model templates (20)
1.1 What is a 3D model

Using Tekla Structures, you can create a real-life model of any structure. The 3D model contains all
the information that is needed to manufacture and construct the structure, including:
• Geometry and dimensions
• Profiles and cross sections
• Connection types
• Materials
The 3D model is the single source of information for drawings and other outputs, such as reports
and NC data files. This ensures that the information in drawings and reports is always up to date, as
they react to modifications in the model.
Creating 3D models 17 What is a 3D model

See also Creating and modifying structures (69)
1.2 Creating a new model

You need to create a model for each Tekla Structures project. This model contains all the
information about the project. Each model is stored in its own folder in the
TeklaStructuresModels folder.
To create a new model:
1. Click File > New... or .

You can only have one model open at a time. If you already have a model open, Tekla Structures
prompts you to save that model.
2. Define where to save the new model.
• To select a folder, click Browse.
• To save the model in a recently used model folder, use the Save in list box.
• To define the location manually, type the path in the Save in field, followed by the \
character. Do not enter the model name in this field.
3. Type a unique name in the Model name field.
Do not use special characters (/ \ ; : | ).
4. If you want to use a predefined model template, select the template in the Model template list
box.
Creating 3D models 18 Creating a new model

5. In the Model type list box, define whether the model may be used by one person or shared by
many.
• Single-user: model will be used by one person.
• Multi-user: model is stored on a server and may be used by several people. Also enter the
name of the server in the Server field.
6. Click OK.
Tekla Structures creates the model and opens the default model view.
See also Model templates (20)

Multi-user mode
1.3 Opening a model

To open a Tekla Structures model:
1. Click File > Open... or .

You can only have one model open at a time. If you already have a model open, Tekla Structures
prompts you to save that model.
2. In the Open dialog box, select the model.
• To open a recently used model, use the Model name list box.
• To open a recently used model folder, use the Look in list box.
• To search for models in another folder, click Browse...
3. Click OK to open the model.
If no views are visible after you have opened a model, Tekla Structures prompts you to select
one.
You can sort models by clicking the column titles.

When the models are sorted alphabetically by their names, you can
use the keyboard to select models. For example, when you type N,
Tekla Structures selects the first model starting with an N.
See also Creating a new model (18)
1.4 Saving a model

You should save your model regularly to avoid losing any work. Tekla Structures also automatically
saves your work at regular intervals.
To save a model, do one of the following:
• Click .
• Click File > Save.
Creating 3D models 19 Opening a model

The Autosave tool automatically saves your model and drawings at
set intervals. To set the autosave interval, click Tools > Options >
Options... > General.
If you set the interval to less than 2, autosave is disabled.
See also Saving a model with a different name or location (20)

Saving in multi-user mode
Autosave
Saving a model with a different name or location

To save a copy of a model under a different name or in a different location:
1. Click File > Save As...
2. In the Save as dialog box, browse to the folder where you want to save the model.
3. In the Model name field, type a new name.
4. Click OK.
Tekla Structures creates a new copy with a different name, but the original version of the model
remains intact.
When you save the model with a different name, all the GUID
object identifiers of the saved model will change and be different
than in the original model.
See also Saving a model (19)
1.5 Model templates
This section is for advanced users.
You can save your model as a model template and use the desired model settings when creating
new models.
Use the File > Save as Model Template... command to create the model template. You can select
which catalogs, model subfolders, drawing templates and report templates from the model are
included in the model template.
Only the items in the model folder can be included in the model
template.
Creating 3D models 20 Model templates

By default, the model template folder is saved in your environment folder. For example, if your
environments are stored in C:\ProgramData, the model template folder for the default
environment is in C:\ProgramData\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\default\model_templates. You can define a
different location using the advanced option XS_MODEL_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY. For example,
you can set this advanced option to point to the same location as XS_FIRM.
When you create a new model, you can select the model template you have created from the Model
template list in the New dialog box.
You can create only single-user models with model templates. If you wish to create a multi-user
model using a model template, create the model in single-user mode and then switch to multi-user
mode.
See also Creating a model template (21)

Modifying a model template (22)
Switching between single-user and multi-user modes
Creating a model template

When you create a model template, always start by creating a new empty model. This is because old
models that have been used in live projects cannot be completely cleaned. They may contain excess
information that increases the size of the model even if you delete all objects and drawings from
the model.
You can copy the needed attribute files into the new model folder, for example, from an earlier
project.
To create a model template:
1. Create a new model and give it a unique name.
For example, Steel framework.
2. Add the desired part attributes, drawing attributes, profiles, materials, custom components,
sketches, and so on, in the model.
3. Click File > Save as Model Template.
4. Enter a name for the model template and include the desired catalogs, drawing templates,
report templates, and model subfolders.
If there are no catalogs and templates in the model folder, the options are not available.
Catalogs are typically located in the Environment folder. They are included in the model
folder only when they have been modified.
Option in Save as Model Template File(s)/folder(s) included into model template folder when
dialog box the option is selected
Profiles profdb.bin, profitab.inp
Materials matdb.bin
Components and sketches componentcatalog.txt,

ComponentCatalogTreeView.txt, Xslib.db1,
thumbnail_bitmap.arc, *.dat files, and
CustomComponentDialogFiles folder
Bolts and bolt assemblies screwdb.db, assdb.db

Option in Save as Model Template File(s)/folder(s) included into model template folder when
dialog box the option is selected
Reinforcement rebar_database.inp, RebarShapeRules.xml,
rebardatabase_config.inp,
rebardatabase_schedule_config.inp
Meshes mesh_database.inp
Drawing templates *.tpl files
Report templates *.rpt files
Model subfolders Lists all subfolders found in the model folder. The selected
folders are included into the model template folder.
The attributes folder containing part and drawings properties
is included by default.
5. If you want to open the destination folder after creating the model template, select the check
box.
6. Click OK.
You can now create a new model by selecting the model template from the model template list
in the New dialog box.
Modifying a model template

To modify an existing model template, do one of the following:
• Copy the new or updated files directly to the model template folder.
• Create a new model using the existing model template and save the model as a new model
template after you have made the needed changes.

2 Setting up the workspace
This section explains how to set up the workspace so that you can start modeling. It also presents
some basic Tekla Structures vocabulary and concepts that are needed when working with 3D
models.
Contents • Screen layout (23)

• Work area (27)
• Work plane (28)
• Coordinate system (30)
• Grids (30)
• Views (35)
• Construction objects (43)
• Points (45)
• Importing reference models (59)
2.1 Screen layout

When you start Tekla Structures, a new window appears on the screen. Initially, most of the menu
options and all the icons are gray indicating that they are inactive. When you open or create a
model, the icons and available menu options will become active.
The following illustration identifies the various areas of the Tekla Structures modeling interface:
Setting up the workspace 23 Screen layout

Pull-down menus contain all the commands
Toolbars can be either docked or floating
Selection switches determine the selectable objects
Snap settings control which points you can snap to and pick
Status bar displays instructions, and the status of some settings

See also Changing the background color (25)
Changing the background color

You can define the background color of model views using RGB values. You can control the color of
each corner of the background separately.
To change the background color in rendered views:
1. Click Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > Model View.
2. Modify the background color using the following advanced options:
• XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR1
To use a single-colored background, set the same value for all four corners of the background.
To use the default background color, leave the advanced option fields empty.
3. Close and reopen the view for the change to take effect.
See also Finding RGB values for colors (356)

Background color examples (25)
Background color examples

Below are some examples of possible background colors that you can define. The first RGB value
refers to the advanced option XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR1, the second value to the advanced
option XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR2, and so on.
RGB values Result

1.0 1.0 1.0
1.0 1.0 1.0
1.0 1.0 1.0
1.0 1.0 1.0

RGB values Result
0.0 0.4 0.2
0.0 0.4 0.2
0.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 0.0 0.0
0.3 0.0 0.6

0.3 0.0 0.6
1.0 1.0 1.0
1.0 1.0 1.0

RGB values Result
0.0 0.2 0.7
0.0 0.8 0.7
0.0 0.2 0.7
0.0 0.8 0.7
See also Changing the background color (25)

Finding RGB values for colors (356)
2.2 Work area

Tekla Structures indicates the work area of a view using green, dashed lines.
You can define the work area to suit particular situations, for example, to concentrate on a
particular area of the model. Defining the work area makes it faster and easier to work with the
model. Objects outside the work area still exist, but they are not visible.
See also Defining the work area (27)

Hiding the work area (28)
Defining the work area

You can shrink and expand the work area by picking the corner points of the new work area, or size
the work area to include selected parts, or all model objects. You can define the work area in a
selected view, or in all visible views.
To define the work area:
Setting up the workspace 27 Work area

1. Select a command from View > Fit Work Area.
2. Define the work area by following the instructions on the status bar.
See also Work area (27)
Hiding the work area

If you want, you can hide the green work area box. This can be useful, for example, when creating
screenshots for presentations.
2. Set the XS_HIDE_WORKAREA advanced option to TRUE.
4. Click View > Redraw All. Tekla Structures hides the work area.
5. To make the work area visible again, set the advanced option to FALSE.
Alternatively, hold down Ctrl and Shift when clicking View >
Redraw All to hide the green work area box. To make the box visible
again, click View > Redraw All again.
See also Work area (27)
2.3 Work plane

The red coordinate arrow symbol indicates the work plane, which is the local coordinate system of
the model. The work plane also has its own grid, which can be used for positioning parts. Tekla
Structures displays the work plane grid in dark red color.
To display the work plane grid, select Work plane from the second list box on the Snapping toolbar.
The red arrow symbol shows the xy plane. The z direction follows the right-hand rule.
Most of the commands that are dependent on the coordinate system use work plane coordinates.
For example creating points, part positioning, and copying always comply with the work plane
coordinate system. The current work plane is model-specific, so it is the same in all views.
Setting up the workspace 28 Work plane

To set the work plane to any part plane, go to View > Set Work Plane
> Using the Workplane Tool.
See also Shifting the work plane (29)

Restoring the default work plane (29)
Changing the color of the work plane grid (30)
Right-hand rule (353)
Shifting the work plane

You can shift the work plane to any position by picking points, parallel to one of the global basic
planes, or on a part or view plane. When modeling sloped parts, shifting the work plane helps you to
place parts accurately. For example, to model horizontal bracing and purlins in a sloped roof, you
need to shift the work plane to the slope of the roof.
To shift the work plane:
1. Click View > Set Work Plane and select one of the commands.
2. Shift the work plane by following the instructions on the status bar.
3. If you want to display the work plane grid, select Work plane in the second list box on the
Snapping toolbar.
See also Work plane (28)
Restoring the default work plane

Remember to change back to the default work plane when you have finished modeling sloped
structures.
To restore the default work plane:
1. Click View > Set Work Plane > Parallel to XY(Z) Plane...
2. Set Plane to XY.
3. Set Depth coordinate to 0.
4. Click Change.
Setting up the workspace 29 Work plane

Changing the color of the work plane grid

To change the color of the work plane grid:
2. Modify the advanced option XS_GRID_COLOR_FOR_WORK_PLANE.
Define the color using RGB values on a scale of 0 to 1. For example, to change the color to red,
set the value to 1.0 0.0 0.0.
3. Click OK.

2.4 Coordinate system

The symbol with three axes (x, y, and z) represents the local coordinate system and indicates the
direction of the model. It is located in the lower right corner of the model view. The coordinate
symbol follows the work plane.
The green cube symbol represents the global coordinate system and lies at the global point of origin.
2.5 Grids
Grids are used as an aid in locating objects in a Tekla Structures model. A grid represents a three-
dimensional complex of horizontal and vertical planes. The grid is shown on the view plane using
dash-and-dot lines.
Setting up the workspace 30 Coordinate system

Grid origin is the point where the zero points of each coordinate
axis intersect
Grid line extensions define how far the grid lines extend in each
direction
Grid labels are the names of the grid lines shown in views
You can make grids and grid lines act magnetically so that the objects on the grid lines follow if you
move the grid line.
You can have more than one grid in a model. So that you can easily place objects in your model, we
strongly advise that you create a modular grid. You can create a large-scale grid for the entire
structure, and smaller grids for some detailed sections. You can also create single grid lines and
attach them to an existing grid.
See also Creating a grid (31)

Modifying a grid (32)
Deleting a grid (33)
Changing the grid color (33)
Grid lines (33)
Creating a grid
When you create a new model, Tekla Structures automatically creates a grid and a view according
to the saved standard properties. You can also create grids manually.
To manually create a grid:
1. Click Modeling > Create Grid...
3. If you want to bind objects to the grid lines, select the Magnetic grid plane check box.
4. When prompted, you can pick a point to indicate the origin of the grid.
The coordinates of the picked point appear in the Grid dialog box as X0, Y0, and Z0.
Setting up the workspace 31 Grids

If you do not pick a point, Tekla Structures positions the origin according to the values you
entered for X0, Y0, and Z0.
5. Click Create.
See also Grids (30)

Grid coordinates (32)
Grid labels (32)
Grid properties (315)
Grid coordinates
The x and y coordinates of a grid are relative. This means that the entries for x and y are always
relative to the previous entry. The z coordinates are absolute, which means that entries for z are
absolute distances from the work plane origin.
There are two ways to enter the x or y coordinates of grid lines:
• Define the coordinates individually. For example, 0 4000 4000.
• Define several grid lines with equal spacing. For example, 0 2*4000.
Both methods create three lines with the spacing of 4000.
Use a zero at the start to represent a grid on the 0,0 coordinate and
spaces as separators for coordinates. You can have a maximum of
1024 characters in the coordinates field.
See also Creating a grid (31)

Coordinate system (30)
Grid labels
Labels are the names of the grid lines shown in views. The names in the X field are associated with
the grid lines parallel to the y axis and vice versa. The Z field is for the names of levels parallel to the
work plane. If you wish, you can leave the label fields empty.
When working with very large grids, always having the grid labels
visible might slow down Tekla Structures. To hide the grid labels
when you zoom in, use the advanced option
XS_ADJUST_GRID_LABELS.
See also Grids (30)

Creating a grid (31)
Modifying a grid
To modify a grid:
1. Ensure that the Select grid selection switch is selected.

2. Double-click a grid line. The Grid dialog box appears.

If you have attached additional grid lines to the grid and you want
to preserve them, clear the check boxes next to the coordinate
fields in the Grid dialog box.
If the coordinate check boxes are selected, Tekla Structures deletes
all single grid lines attached to the grid.
4. Click Modify to save the changes.
See also Grids (30)

Grid properties (315)
Deleting a grid
To delete a grid:
1. Ensure that the Select grid selection switch is selected.

2. Select a grid line.
3. Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu.
When you delete a grid, ensure that you do not have any other
objects selected. If you have also other objects selected, Tekla
Structures only deletes the objects, not the grid.
See also Grids (30)
Changing the grid color

To change the color of the grid in rendered views:
2. Modify the advanced option XS_GRID_COLOR.
Define the color using RGB values on a scale of 0 to 1. For example, to change the color to red,
set the value to 1.0 0.0 0.0.
3. Click OK.
See also Grids (30)

Grid lines
You can attach single grid lines to an existing grid.
Single grid lines have handles. When you select a grid line, the handles appear in magenta. You can
use handles to move the grid lines.

If you want to move the grid lines using the handles to make a
skewed grid, you can do this only on the local XY plane of the grid.
See also Grids (30)

Creating a single grid line (34)
Modifying a single grid line (34)
Deleting a single grid line (35)
Creating a single grid line

To create a single grid line:
1. Click Modeling > Add Grid Line.
2. Select an existing grid to attach the grid line to.
3. Pick the starting point of the grid line.
4. Pick the end point of the grid line.
See also Grid lines (33)

Grid line properties (316)
Modifying a single grid line

To modify a single grid line:
1. Ensure that the Select grid line selection switch is active.

2. Double-click a grid line. The Grid Line Properties dialog box appears.
3. Modify the grid line properties.


Deleting a single grid line
To delete a single grid line:
1. Ensure that the Select grid line selection switch is selected.

2. Select the grid line you want to delete.
When you delete a grid line, ensure that you do not have any other
objects selected. If you also have other objects selected, Tekla
Structures only deletes the objects, not the grid line.
2.6 Views
A view is a representation of a model from a specific location. Each view is displayed in its own
window inside the Tekla Structures window.
There are several ways to create views in Tekla Structures. For example, you can create views:
• of the entire structure
• of selected parts and components
• of selected cast units and assemblies
• along the grid lines
Setting up the workspace 35 Views

When you need to see a specific part clearly, create a 3D view of the
part. This places the part in the center of the view.
See also Creating a view (36)

Opening a view (41)
Modifying a view (42)
Deleting a view (42)
Switching between open views (42)
Switching between 3D and plane view (42)
Refreshing views (43)
Arranging views (43)
Should I model in a 3D or plane view?

3D, plane, and elevation views provide different types of information, which is useful for different
tasks.
One common technique is to open several views:
• A 3D view to see a real-life version of the model
• A plane view, where you can add and connect parts
• An elevation view to check the level
Selecting a part in a view highlights the part in all open views.
If you are working with two screens, maximize your work area by
putting the elevation and 3D views on one screen and the plane
view on the other.
See also Views (35)

Creating a view
To create a new view:
1. Select a view command from the View menu.
2. Create the view by following the instructions on the status bar.
3. If needed, you can save the view.
a Double-click the view to open the View Properties dialog box.
b Type a unique name in the Name field.

Temporary views have a default name in parentheses. Do not use
parentheses when naming a view, or the view will not be saved for
later use.
c Click Modify.
See also Views (35)

View and representation settings (318)
Default part, component, custom component, assembly and cast unit view properties (319)
About naming views (37)
View planes (37)
Creating grid views (39)
Creating a surface view (39)
About naming views

Tekla Structures numbers views in order of creation, so you do not have to give each view a specific
name.
You should give each view a unique name if you need to open it in later sessions. When you exit the
model, Tekla Structures only saves the named views. Temporary views, which have a default name in
parentheses, disappear when you close them.
In multi-user mode, it is very important to give views unique names.

If several users have different views with the same name, the view
settings of one user may randomly override the settings of another
user.
View planes
Each view has a view plane on which the grids are visible and points are represented as yellow
crosses. Points that are located outside the view plane are red.
Basic views Basic views are those parallel to the global basic planes (xy, xz, and zy). In basic views, two axes
always define the view plane and the axes appear in the plane name. The third axis is perpendicular
to the view plane. It does not appear in the plane name. In the basic plane view, the model is shown
from the direction of the third axis.
The view plane options for basic views are:

Plane: XY
Plane: XZ
Plane: ZY
For basic views, you also define the distance the view plane is from the global origin in the direction
of the third axis. The view plane coordinate equals this distance.
Other views For view types other than basic views, you either define the view plane and coordinate by picking
points, or the points are defined automatically, depending on the creation method.
See also Moving a view plane (38)

Creating a view (36)
Moving a view plane

You can change the view plane by moving it like any other object. When you move a view plane,
Tekla Structures only uses the vector that is perpendicular to the view plane.
To move the view plane:
1. Click the view.

2. Right-click and select Move Special > Linear... from the pop-up menu.
3. Pick the starting point of the translation vector, or enter its coordinates.
4. Pick the end point of the translation vector, or enter its coordinates.
5. Click Move.
If the Move - Linear dialog box is open but the command is not
active anymore, click the Pick button to re-activate the command.
See also View planes (37)
Creating grid views

Grid views are views along the grid lines. You can define how many views Tekla Structures will
create, how it will name the views, and which view properties it will use.
Before you start, create a view that contains a grid.
To create grid views:
1. Select the grid.
2. Click View > Create View of Model > Along Grid Lines...
4. Click Create. The Views dialog box appears.
5. Click the arrow buttons to show or hide the grid views.
The grid views will not be visible until you move them to the visible views in the Views dialog
box.

Grid view properties (319)
Creating a surface view

With the surface view creation tools you can pick the surface of any part. Tekla Structures
automatically creates a new aligned temporary view looking directly at the surface, fits the work
area of the model to the selected part, and aligns the work plane to that surface or a user-selected
edge of the surface.
Using the surface view creation tools makes it easier to model in bolt groups, stiffener plates, and
hole penetrations on complex geometry. While you model in the newly created temporary view, you
can see your modeling work being done in the original 3D view. You can easily create views along
the surface of concrete panels, slabs, columns, or beams, and place embeds, formwork, or wall
penetrations.
The commands are available in the Macros dialog box (Tools > Macros), and you can also add them
on a toolbar (Tools > Customize).
To create a surface view using the toolbar:

1. Click one of the view creation commands:

• To create a surface view from the part surface, click CreateSurfaceView and select the
surface of the part.
• If creating the surface view from only selecting the surface does not align or orientate the
view along the edge, click CreateSurfaceView_wEdge and select the surface, and then pick
the edge in which you want to align the view to (this means the edge that will form the X
axis of the view).
Ensure that you have Snap to geometry lines /points on. This allows you to pick along an
edge to define the direction.
Tekla Structures creates a new temporary view. The view plane is at the selected surface
and the work plane is changed along typically the longest edge of that face unless you
chose the CreateSurfaceView_wEdge command.
2. Once the view is created, press Esc or right-click and select Interrupt to interrupt.
3. Use the WorkPlaneGlobal command to return the work plane in the model back to the origin,
aligned with the global X,Y, and Z planes of the model.
Example Below is an example of a view that has been created with the CreateSurfaceView command.
Below is an example of using the CreateSurfaceView_wEdge command. The first image shows the
snap to lines arrow. The head of the arrow represents the positive direction the x axis will be set to
on the work plane. The view will be rotated to this direction to form the flat horizontal edge of the
view. The origin of the view and work plane will be at the start of the arrow snap line. Once you
have hovered over the edge and in the correct direction, click your mouse and the new view will be
created and aligned to that edge.

Opening a view
To view and open an existing view:
1. Click View > View List....
The Views dialog box appears. Tekla Structures lists all invisible named views on the left, and all
visible views on the right.
2. Select a view and use the arrows between the lists, or double-click a view to open it.
You can have up to nine views on the screen at the same time. If
you try to open more than nine views, Tekla Structures displays a
warning. If the view does not appear, check how many views you
have open.

To open multiple views, use the Shift and Ctrl keys when you select
views from the list.
See also Views (35)
Modifying a view
To modify an existing view:
1. Double-click the view to open the View Properties dialog box.
2. Modify the view properties.
3. Click Modify.
See also Views (35)

Deleting a view
To delete a named view:
1. Click View > View List....
The Views dialog box appears. Tekla Structures lists all invisible named views on the left, and all
visible views on the right.
2. Select the view you want to delete.
3. Click Delete.
To delete multiple views, use Shift or Ctrl when you select views
from the list.
See also Views (35)
Switching between open views

To switch between open views, do one of the following:
• Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Tab.
• On the Window menu, select a view from the list.
See also Views (35)

Switching between 3D and plane view

To switch between the 3D and the plane view, do one of the following:
• Press Ctrl+P.
• Click View > Switch to 3D / Plane.
• In the View Properties dialog box, select an option from the Angle list box, and then click
Modify.

See also Views (35)
Switching between open views (42)
Refreshing views
To refresh the screen display, do any of the following:
To Do this
Redraw the contents of the active Right-click the view and select Redraw View from the
view pop-up menu.
Redraw the contents of all the views Click View > Redraw All.
See also Views (35)
Arranging views
You can arrange views manually by dragging and dropping each view within the Tekla Structures
window, or have Tekla Structures automatically arrange views.
To arrange the views, do any of the following:
To Do this
Arrange all open views in a Click Windows > Cascade.
stack
Arrange all open views Click Windows > Tile Horizontally.
horizontally
Arrange all open views Click Windows > Tile Vertically.
vertically
Close all the views Click View > Close All.
You cannot use the Cascade, Tile Horizontally, and Tile Vertically
commands for views that you can move outside the Tekla
Structures window.
For more information on how to move part and component basic
views and zoom windows across the entire Windows desktop, see
XS_MDIVIEWPARENT, XS_MDIZOOMPARENT, and
XS_MDIBASICVIEWPARENT.
See also Views (35)
2.7 Construction objects

Construction planes, lines, and circles help you place other objects. For example, you can easily pick
the points at intersections of construction lines and circles. The snap priority of construction objects
is the same as with the other lines.
Construction objects remain in the model when you update or redraw views and windows. They do
not appear in drawings.
Setting up the workspace 43 Construction objects

You can also create magnetic construction lines or planes to bind and move groups of objects. For
example, rather than binding lots of handles and chamfers to faces, simply create a construction
plane that goes through all the handles and chamfers. Then make this plane magnetic and bind the
plane to the appropriate face. When you move the plane, the attached handles and chamfers move
with it.
See also Creating a construction plane (44)

Creating a construction line (44)
Creating a construction circle (45)
Creating a construction plane

To create a construction plane:
1. Click Modeling > Add Construction Plane.
2. Pick four points.
3. Click the middle mouse button. Tekla Structures draws the plane.
4. Double-click the plane in the model. The Construction Plane Properties dialog box appears.
5. Type a name for the plane.
6. If you want to make the construction plane magnetic, select the Magnetic check box.
7. Click Modify.
See also Construction objects (43)
Creating a construction line

To create a construction line:
1. Click Modeling > Add Construction Line.
2. Pick the start point of the construction line.
3. Pick the end point of the construction line.
4. If needed, you can make the construction line magnetic.
a Double-click the line in the model.
b Select the Magnetic check box.
c Click Modify.
Setting up the workspace 44 Construction objects

Creating a construction circle
To create a construction circle:
1. Select a command from Modeling > Add Construction Circle.
2. Create the construction circle by following the instructions on the status bar.
2.8 Points
You can create points to make it easier to place objects at positions where no lines or objects
intersect.
There are many ways to create points in Tekla Structures. Which method is the most convenient at
each time depends on what you have already created in the model and which locations you can
easily pick.
When you create points, Tekla Structures always places them according to the work plane
coordinate system. Points located on the view plane are yellow and points outside the view plane
are red.
See also Creating points along the extension line of two points (46)
Creating points parallel to two points (46)
Creating points on a line (47)
Creating points on a plane (48)
Creating projected points on a line (48)
Creating points along an arc using center and arc points (49)
Creating points along an arc using three arc points (49)
Creating points tangent to a circle (50)
Creating points at the intersection of two lines (50)
Setting up the workspace 45 Points

Creating points at the intersection of a plane and a line (51)
Creating points at the intersection of a part and a line (51)
Creating points at the intersection of two part axes (52)
Creating points at any position (52)
Creating points at the intersection of a circle and a line (51)
Importing points (53)
Point properties (316)
Creating points along the extension line of two points

To create points along the extension line of two points:
1. Click Modeling > Add Points > Along Extension of Two Points.
The Point Input dialog box opens.
2. Define the distances at which the points are created.
Separate multiple values with spaces.
3. Click OK.
4. Pick the start point of the line (1).
5. Pick the end point of the line (2).
For example, if you enter 500 100 100 to the Point Input dialog box, the first point is created at
500 mm distance from the end point of the line, and the second and the third point are each
created at 100 mm distance.
Enter a negative value to the Point Input dialog box to create a point
between the start point and the end point.
See also Points (45)
Creating points parallel to two points

You can create two offset points that are parallel to a line between two points you have picked.
To create points parallel to two points:
1. Click Modeling > Add Points > Parallel to Two Points.
The Point Input dialog box appears.
2. Define the distances at which the points are created.
Separate multiple values with spaces.

3. Click OK.
The picking order of the start point and the end point defines the offset direction of the new
points.
When you look from the start point to the end point, Tekla Structures creates the new points to
the left of the existing points. When you pick points, Tekla Structures uses arrows to indicate
the offset direction.
For example, if you enter 500 to the Point Input dialog box, the new points are created parallel at
500 mm distance from the original points.
Enter a negative value to the Point Input dialog box to create a point
between the start point and the end point.
Creating points on a line

You can create points at equal intervals along a line that is defined by two points.
To create points on a line:
1. Click Modeling > Add Points > On Line.
The Divided Line Points dialog box appears.
2. Define the number of points to be created.
3. Click OK.

Creating points on a plane

You can create several equally spaced points in the desired area in the model. The points are created
in relation to the picked origin position.
A point array consists of several points in a rectangular xy(z) pattern relative to the current work
plane. The x, y, and z coordinates of the points define the array pattern. The x and y coordinates are
relative distances between the points on the work plane. The z coordinates are absolute distances
perpendicular to the work plane.
To create points on a plane:
1. Click Modeling > Add Points > On Plane....
The Point Array dialog box appears.
2. Define the array point coordinates.
Use positive or negative values to define the direction of the array.
Use a zero at the beginning of the row to represent a point in the array origin. Separate multiple
values with spaces.
3. Pick the origin of the array in the view.
Alternatively, you can define the origin in the Point Array dialog box.
4. Click OK.
Creating projected points on a line

You can project a point onto a selected line or its extension.
To create projected points on a line:
1. Click Modeling > Add Points > Projected Points on Line.
2. Pick the first point on the line (1).
3. Pick the second point on the line (2).
4. Pick the point to be projected (3).

Creating points along an arc using center and arc points

You can create points along an arc.
To create points along an arc using center and arc points:
1. Click Modeling > Add Points > Along Arc > Using Center and Arc Points.
The Arc Points dialog box appears.
2. Select either Angles or Distances and enter the angles or distances between the points along the
arc.
Give the angle values in degrees.
Separate multiple angle and distance values with spaces.
3. Click OK.
4. Pick the center point.
5. Pick the start point of the arc.
Tekla Structures creates the arc points counterclockwise from the start point.
Creating points along an arc using three arc points

You can create points as an extension of an arc.
To create points along an arc using three arc points:
1. Click Modeling > Add Points > Along Arc > Using Three Arc Points.
The Arc Points dialog box appears.
2. Select either Angles or Distances and enter the angles or distances between the points along the
arc.
Give the angle values in degrees.
Separate multiple angle and distance values with spaces.

3. Click OK.
4. Pick three points along the arc (1-3).
Creating points tangent to a circle

To create points tangent to a circle:
1. Click Modeling > Add Points > Tangent to Circle.
2. Pick the center point of the circle (1).
3. Pick a point on the circle to define the radius (2).
4. Pick the end point of the tangent (3).
5. Pick a side to indicate the side on which Tekla Structures creates the tangent point (4).
Tangent point
Creating points at the intersection of two lines

To create points at the intersection of two lines:
1. Click Modeling > Add Points > At Intersection > Of Two Lines.
2. Pick the start point of the first line (1).
3. Pick the end point of the first line (2).
4. Pick the start point of the second line (3).
5. Pick the end point of the second line (4).

Creating points at the intersection of a plane and a line

To create points at the intersection of a plane and a line:
1. Click Modeling > Add Points > At Intersection > Of Plane and Line.
2. Pick three points to define the plane.
3. Pick the first point of the line.
4. Pick the second point of the line.
Creating points at the intersection of a part and a line

You can create points where a line intersects with the surface of a part.
To create points at the intersection of a part and a line:
1. Click Modeling > Add Points > At Intersection > Of Part and Line.
2. Select the part.
3. Pick the first point of the line.
4. Pick the second point of the line.
Creating points at the intersection of a circle and a line

To create points at the intersection of a circle and a line:
1. Click Modeling > Add Points > At Intersection > Of Circle and Line.
2. Pick the center point of the circle (1).
3. Pick a point on the circle to define the radius (2).
4. Pick the first point on the line (3).
5. Pick the second point on the line (4).

New points
Creating points at the intersection of two part axes

You can create points where the axes of two parts intersect, and project the points onto the view
plane.
To create points at the intersection of a two part axes:
1. Click Modeling > Add Points > At Intersection > Of Two Part Axes.
2. Select the first part (1).
3. Select the second part (2).
Tekla Structures projects the point onto the view plane of where the parts you select are
located.
Creating points at any position
Snap switches determine the positions you can pick.
You can also use temporary reference points and numeric snapping to create a point, for example, to
a certain distance from an existing corner or a point.
To create points at any position:
1. Click Modeling > Add Points > At Any Position.
2. Pick the intersection of two part edges (1), or the corner of a part (2).

Importing points
You can import points to specific locations in an open Tekla Structures model using the point
creation import macro. You need to specify the point coordinates in a text file. In some cases this
file is generated by another software package.
To import points from a file:
1. Create a point import file.
a Create a text file that consists of single lines for each point.
Use commas or tabs as delimiters for the three point coordinates on a line. For
example:
100,500,1000
300,700,1500
b Save the file.
2. Press Ctrl + F to open the Component Catalog.
3. Type point in the Search field and click Search.
4. Double-click Point Creation Import (8).
5. Type the ASCII file name.
Include the full path and the file extension. If you do not specify the path, Tekla Structures looks
for the file in the current model folder.
6. Define the origin of the imported points by entering the coordinates.
7. Click Create.
During the import process, Tekla Structures ignores all lines in the
import file which do not consist of valid values delimited by tabs or
commas.


3 Defining project information
You will need project information, such as the project number and name, many times during a
project. Update the project information at the beginning of the project to make reports and
drawings display the correct information automatically.
To define project information:
1. Click File > Project Properties....
The Project Properties dialog box is displayed. It contains some sample entries, which you can
overwrite.
2. Enter or update the project information. All information is optional.
3. In the Description box, enter a description that helps you identify the model when you next need
to open it.
The description appears in the Open dialog box when you open a model.
4. To define user-defined attributes, click User-defined attributes...:
• Enter fabricator information.
• Define project standards, such as finish, material and field connection.
• Define what information appears in drawings.
• Define your own fields to include in drawings and reports.
• Preview title block and bill of material styles.
5. Click OK.
Now you will get updated project properties in drawings and reports.
7. To save the project properties as the default properties for this project, click Tools > Defaults >
Save Defaults.
The fields in the image below refer to template attributes, which you can use when designing your
own reports and templates. To display in your reports and templates the information that you enter
in this dialog box, add in the reports and templates the corresponding template attributes listed
under the image.
Defining project information 55

PROJECT.NUMBER
PROJECT.NAME
PROJECT.BUILDER
PROJECT.OBJECT
PROJECT.ADDRESS
PROJECT.DESIGNER
PROJECT.DATE_START
PROJECT.DATE_END
PROJECT.INFO1

PROJECT.INFO2

4 Importing reference models
A reference model is a file that helps you to build a Tekla Structures model. A reference model is
created in Tekla Structures or another software or modeling tool and imported to Tekla Structures.
For example, an architectural model, a plant design model, or a heating, ventilating and air-
conditioning (HVAC) model can be used as a reference model. Reference models can also be simple
2D drawings that are imported and then used as a layout to directly build the model on.
The following file types are supported:
• AutoCAD (*.dxf)
• AutoCAD (*.dwg)
• MicroStation (*.dgn, *.prp)
• Cadmatic models (*.3dd)
• IFC files (*.IFC)
• IGES files (*.igs, *.iges)
• STEP files (*.stp, *.STEP)
• Tekla WebViewer XML files (*.xml)
You can snap to reference model geometry. Tekla Structures loads the reference model from the file
each time you open your model. It does not save the reference model when you save the current
model. The filename extension of a saved reference model properties file is *.rop.
See also Inserting a reference model (59)

Modifying reference model properties (61)
Selecting a reference model
Hiding a reference model (61)
Highlighting a reference model (61)
Updating reference models (62)
Detecting changes in a reference model (62)
Viewing reference model layers (63)
Examining the contents of a reference model (64)
Reference model objects (65)
Supported DGN objects (66)
4.1 Inserting a reference model

To insert a reference model in a Tekla Structures model:
Importing reference models 59 Inserting a reference model

1. Open a Tekla Structures model.
2. Check the work plane position, as it determines the rotation of the reference model in the Tekla
Structures model.
3. Click File > Insert Reference Model...
4. Click the Browse... button to browse for the reference model file.
5. Set the scale of the reference model if it is different from the one in the Tekla Structures model
(for example, if it uses different measurement units).
Set the scale for a DWG or a DXF file already in AutoCAD. When you
define the measurement unit for a DWG or a DXF file and save the
file in AutoCAD, the unit is recognized in Tekla Structures and the
reference model is scaled correctly.
6. Click Apply.
7. Pick a point to place the reference model in the Tekla Structures model.
The point you pick defines the reference model origin. The origin is displayed as a handle.
If the inserted reference model lies outside the work area and thus
is not fully or at all visible in the model view, Tekla Structures
displays the Objects outside the work area warning message. Click
Expand to extend the work area to see the reference model in the
model view.
To view the reference model in the model view later:
1. Double-click the view to open the View Properties dialog box,
and then click Display....
2. Ensure that the Reference objects check box is selected, and
then click Modify.
3. Right-click the view and select Fit Work Area to Entire Model
Importing reference models 60 Inserting a reference model

If you do not define a reference model file to be used, the file does
not exist, or you forget to click Apply, Tekla Structures displays a
default symbol for the reference model:
The symbol can also indicate that the reference model cannot be
viewed because there are no visible objects in the file, or the file is
corrupted or is not supported by Tekla Structures.
See also Importing reference models (59)
4.2 Modifying reference model properties

To modify the properties of a reference model:
1. Click File > Reference Model List...
2. Double-click the reference model to open the Reference Model Properties dialog box.
3. Click User-defined attributes.
4. Modify the properties and then click Modify.
You can define user-defined attributes in the objects.inp file.

For more information on user-defined attributes, see Adding
properties.
4.3 Hiding a reference model

To hide a reference model:
2. Select Hidden from the Visibility list box.
4.4 Highlighting a reference model

To check which reference models are included in the model, you can highlight them.
Importing reference models 61 Modifying reference model properties

To highlight a reference model:
2. Select a reference model from the list.
The reference model is highlighted in the Tekla Structures model.
4.5 Updating reference models

You can update the reference models in your Tekla Structures model in case there have been
changes in the original reference models after you have brought them into Tekla Structures.
To update a reference model:
1. Double-click a reference model.
2. In the Reference Model Properties dialog box, browse for the modified file by clicking the
Browse... button next to the File name field.
3. In the Import dialog box, select the updated file and click OK.
4. Click Modify.
You can also update all the reference models in one go.
To update all reference models:
1. Click File > Reference Model List... to open the Reference Models
dialog box.
2. Click Reload All.
Tekla Structures goes through all the reference models and
regenerates the reference models that have a newer modified
date than the one already in the cache.
However, this is not the recommended way to update reference
models since it is time-consuming and affects the system
performance.
4.6 Detecting changes in a reference model

Reference models are often updated, but the changes are rarely documented. You can see the
changes between an old and a new reference model in Tekla Structures by using the commands in
the Reference Model Properties dialog box.
You can detect changes in reference models that are of the following file formats:
• IFC (.ifc)
• Cadmatic (.3dd)
• WebViewer (.xml)
• 3D DWG (.dwg)
To view changes in a reference model:
1. Double-click the reference model.
Importing reference models 62 Updating reference models

2. In the Reference Model Properties dialog box, browse for the name of the old file by clicking the
Browse... button next to the Old file name field.
3. Select an option in the Show list box in the Change detection area.
For example, select Inserted to see the added objects.
4. Click Display. Tekla Structures highlights the inserted reference model objects.
4.7 Viewing reference model layers

You can view different layers of a reference model. This is useful if you want to for example examine
only certain parts of the model.
To view reference model layers:
1. Double-click the reference model.
Importing reference models 63 Viewing reference model layers

2. In the Reference Model Properties dialog box, click Select layers...
3. Select the layers you want to view. Depending on your reference model, you could for example
select a layer that contains only windows.
4. Click OK.
5. Click Modify in the Reference Model Properties dialog box. Tekla Structures highlights the layer
with windows.
4.8 Examining the contents of a reference model

You can examine the contents of a reference model. This is useful to do for example after you have
impoted a reference model into Tekla Structures.
To examine the contents of a reference model:
1. Click Tools > Inquire > Object.
2. Select the reference model, whose contents you want to examine.
The contents of the reference model are listed in the Inquire Object dialog box.
Importing reference models 64 Examining the contents of a reference model

4.9 Reference model objects
You can split reference models into separate reference model objects. Reference model objects can
have separate user-defined attributes that can be used for reports and the view and selection filters.
The reference model objects are read-only.
Limitations The use of this functionality depends on the file format and file structure. You can use it for
example for IFC and for DWG files that include any of the following objects:
• block table
• polyface mesh
• polygon mesh
• proxy object (for example, ADT)
• ACIS objects (3DSolid, Body, Region)
Importing reference models 65 Reference model objects

You cannot use this functionality for DGN, STEP, or IGES files.

Selecting a reference model object
Splitting a reference model into reference model objects (66)
Splitting a reference model into reference model objects

You can quickly split reference models into reference model objects. After you have split the
reference model into reference model objects, you can use the ID number and attributes of the
reference model objects for example in filtering and reports.
To split a reference model into reference model objects:
1. Select the reference model and double-click it to display the Reference Model Properties dialog
box.
2. Click Subdivide.
The advanced option

XS_USE_EXACT_EXTREMA_FOR_REFERENCE_MODELS is not
compatible with this feature.
When you have split the reference model into reference model
objects, the ID numbers of all the reference model objects are
visible in the model database, even if you remove the reference
model object and update the reference model.
See also Reference model objects (65)

Filtering reference model object properties
4.10 Supported DGN objects

Tekla Structures can display the following DGN objects in reference models:
• Line Elements (Type 3)
• Line String (Type 4)
• Shape (Type 6)
• Text Nodes (Type 7)
• Curve (Type 11)
• Complex Chains (Type 12)
• Complex Shapes (Type 14)
• Elliptic Elements (Type 15)
• Arc Elements (Type 16)
Importing reference models 66 Supported DGN objects

• Text Elements (Type 17)
• Surfaces (Type 18)
• Solids (Type 19)
• Point String Elements (Type 22)
• Cone Elements (Type 23)
• B-spline Surfaces (Type 24)
• B-spline Curves (Type 27)
• Shared Cells (Type 34, 35)
• Mesh Elements (Type 105), subtype "Indexed Face Loops"
The following DGN objects are not supported:

• Dimension Elements (Type 33)
• Multiline Elements (Type 36)
• Mesh Elements (Type 105), other subtypes than "Indexed Face
Loops"
SmartSolid elements are supported as WireFrame only.

5 Creating and modifying structures
This section explains how to create and modify parts using different materials and profiles. It also
includes a general description of part properties and step-by-step instructions for all the part
commands.
Contents • About parts (69)

• Creating and modifying parts (71)
• Steel parts (77)
• Assemblies (81)
• Concrete parts (88)
• Cast units (93)
5.1 About parts

In Tekla Structures, the term part refers to the basic building objects that can be modeled and
detailed further. These are the building blocks of the physical model.
Every part has properties that define it, such as material, profile, and location. You can use part
properties in view and selection filters. For example, you can select, modify, and hide parts based on
their properties. You can also include part properties and user-defined attributes in drawing and
report templates.
See also Part properties (323)

User-defined attributes (332)
Part handles
Tekla Structures indicates the direction of a part with handles. When you select a part, Tekla
Structures highlights the handles. The handle of the first end point is yellow, the rest are magenta.
Creating and modifying structures 69 About parts

See also Showing part reference lines in model views (357)
Part labels
You can display selected part properties, user-defined attributes, and template attributes in a model
view by using part labels.
Part labels are textual descriptions that are displayed next to the part they represent. You can define
what information to display in the labels, such as the name, profile, and position number of the part.
Creating and modifying structures 70 About parts

Example
See also Showing part labels in a view (71)
Showing part labels in a view

To show part labels in a view:
2. Click Display...
3. In the Display dialog box, go to the Advanced tab.
4. Select the Part label check box.
5. Define which part properties to display in part labels.
a Select a property in the Properties list.
b Click Add to add the property to the Part label list.
6. If needed, define which user-defined attribute or template attribute to display in part labels.
a Select User-defined attribute in the Properties list.
b Click Add. The Part label dialog box appears.
c Enter the attribute name and click OK.
7. Click Modify.
See also Part labels (70)

XS_VIEW_PART_LABEL_COLOR
5.2 Creating and modifying parts

Parts are created the same way as any other objects in Tekla Structures. You initiate a part
command, and then you pick points to place the part in the model. For additional guidance, see the
corresponding tooltips and follow the instructions on the status bar.
To modify the part properties, double-click the part or use the Mini Toolbar.
Creating and modifying structures 71 Creating and modifying parts

You can also modify a part by right-clicking the selected part and
selecting Modify from the pop-up menu.
See also Modifying the position of a part (72)

Modifying the shape of a part (73)
Modifying the length of a part (74)
Changing the profile of a part (74)
Changing the material of a part (76)
Changing the color of a part (76)
Tips for creating and positioning parts (358)
Mini Toolbar
Status bar
Modifying the position of a part

To modify the position of a part, do one of the following:
To Do this
Modify part position in the 1. Double-click a part to open the part properties dialog box.
part properties dialog box 2. On the Position tab, modify the desired position settings.
For example, you can define the part to be positioned 200
units above its handles.
3. Click Modify.
Modify part position using
1. Click in the Mini Toolbar.
the Mini Toolbar
2. Modify the settings. The object moves in the model
accordingly.
• To change the overall position of the part, use the round
selection dial. Click a sector in the dial to select a
position.
• To change the rotation angle, click and drag the green
rotation angle knob.
• To change the Angle, Plane offset, or Depth offset, enter a
value in the corresponding box.

The rotation angle knob snaps to every 45 degrees. Hold down Shift
to override this.
See also Part position settings (333)

Mini Toolbar
Tips for creating and positioning parts (358)
Modifying the shape of a part

You can modify the shape of a part by dragging the part edges and surfaces, and by changing the
part dimensions. You can modify beams, columns, pad footings, simple panels, simple strip footings,
slabs, and contour plates.
To modify the shape of a part:
1. Select the part.
2. Right-click and select Modify from the pop-up menu.
Tekla Structures displays the handles that you can use to modify the part. The relevant
dimensions are shown when you move the mouse slowly over the part edges.
3. If you want to display a grid that shows the dragging direction, hold the mouse on top of a
handle.
4. Select one of the handles.
Handle
Point handle
Point handles are located where part handles would be.
Midpoint handle
Use midpoint handles to create new point handles.
Line handle
Dimension end point

You can drag either the round handle or the arrow handle.
You can also change dimensions by selecting a dimension end point and entering a
dimension value in the dialog box that opens when you start typing.

5. Drag the handle to the desired location.
Hold down the Ctrl key to disable snapping, and to select and drag multiple points and edges.
6. If you want to delete a handle, select it and press the Delete key.
You can add a new point at a polybeam end, show and hide
diagonal dimensions and midpoint handles, and set a handle to
move in 2D or 3D direction. To do any of these, right-click a point
handle and select the appropriate command on the handle toolbar
.
See also Creating and modifying parts (71)
Modifying the length of a part

To modify the length of a part:
1. Select the part.
Tekla Structures highlights the handles of the part.
2. Click one of the handles to select it.
3. Move the handle like any other object in Tekla Structures.
Do not use cuts or fittings to change the length of a part, for the
following reasons:
• Cuts may cause shop errors, because cuts do not always affect
part length when you export information to NC files.
• Fittings may cause problems with connections and details.
See also Part handles (69)

Moving an object
Changing the profile of a part

When you create or modify a part, you can select the profile from a list that contains all the profiles
available in the profile catalog.
To change the profile of a part:
2. Open the Select Profile dialog box.
• For steel parts, click the Select... button next to the Profile field.
• For concrete parts, click Select... button next to the Shape field.
By default, only the profile types that are relevant to the material of the part are shown.

3. If needed, define what profile information you want to see.
• To display all the profiles of the profile catalog in the list, select the Show all profiles check
box.
• To see all the properties of profiles, select the Show details check box.
4. Select a profile from the list.
5. If the profile is parametric, define its dimensions on the General tab.
Click the Value box and replace the existing value with a new one.
6. Click OK to close the Select Profile dialog box.

7. Click Modify.
Alternatively, if you know the name of the profile, you can enter it
directly in the appropriate field in the part properties dialog box.
See also The Profile Catalog (214)

Changing the material of a profile type (216)
Fixed profiles
When you first start Tekla Structures, the Profile Catalog contains standard, environment-specific
profiles.
The properties of these profiles conform to industry standards, so you should not edit them. You can
add profiles to the Profile Catalog.
Fixed profiles have the symbol in the Profile Catalog.
See also Changing the profile of a part (74)

The profile catalog
Parametric profiles
You can use parametric profiles to model profiles that are standard in a specific environment, but do
not exist in the Tekla Structures profile catalog. Parametric profiles are partly user-definable: they
have a predefined shape, but you determine their cross section dimension by giving one or more
parameters.
Parametric profiles have the symbol in the Profile Catalog.

The Profile Catalog (214)

User-defined profiles
You can create your own profiles and save them in the profile catalog. For example, you could create
a pitched user-defined profile, with different cross sections at the beginning and end of the profile.

The profile catalog
Sketched cross sections (281)
Adding a standard (fixed) user-defined profile
Changing the material of a part

When you create or modify a part, you can select the material and grade from a list that contains all
the materials available in the material catalog.
To change the material of a part:
2. Click Select... next to the Material field.
The Select Material dialog box appears.
3. If needed, define what material information you want to see.
• To include aliases for material grades in the list, select the Show aliases check box.
• To see all the properties of materials, select the Show details check box.
4. Select a material from the list.
5. Click OK to close the Select Material dialog box.
6. Click Modify.
Alternatively, if you know the name of the material, you can enter it
directly in the Material field in the part properties dialog box.
See also The material catalog
Changing the color of a part

You can change the color of individual model objects by modifying their class in the part properties
dialog box. Alternatively, you can use the object representation settings to specify colors for entire
object groups.
To change the color of a part:
2. In the Class box, enter a new value.
The possible values range between 0 and 14.
3. Click Modify.
You can also use the Mini Toolbar for changing the color.
See also Color settings for parts (321)

Color settings for object groups (322)
Object representation settings (149)
5.3 Steel parts

This section explains how to create steel parts.
See also Creating a steel column (77)

Creating a steel beam (78)
Creating a steel polybeam (78)
Creating a curved beam (78)
Creating a contour plate (79)
Creating an orthogonal beam (80)
Creating a twin profile (81)
Creating a steel column

To create a steel column:
1. Click the Create column icon.
2. Pick the position of the column.
Tekla Structures creates the column at the level that you defined in the Column Properties dialog
box.
If you want to change the part properties:
a Select the part and double-click it to open the properties dialog box.
b Modify the properties.
c Click Modify.
Use the Orthogonal Beam Properties dialog box to correct the

position of a column, if the upper and lower levels were switched
when the column was copied and mirrored. Remember to change
the part name to COLUMN.
Creating and modifying structures 77 Steel parts

See also Steel column properties (323)
Positioning columns, pad footings, and orthogonal beams (360)
Creating a steel beam

To create a steel beam:
1. Click the Create beam icon.
2. Pick the start point.
3. Pick the end point.
c Click Modify.
See also Steel beam properties (324)
Creating a steel polybeam

A polybeam can contain straight and curved segments. You can also create bent plates with this
command.
To create a steel polybeam:
1. Click the Create polybeam icon.
2. Pick the points you want the beam to go through.
3. Double-click the end point, or click the middle mouse button to finish picking.
c Click Modify.
4. If you want to create curved segments, chamfer the corners of the polybeam.
See also Polybeam chamfers (120)

Steel beam properties (324)
Polybeam length calculation (309)
Creating a curved beam

To create a curved steel beam:

1. Click the Create curved beam icon.
2. Pick the start point (1).
3. Pick a point on the arc (2).
4. Pick the end point (3).
c Click Modify.
See also Steel beam properties (324)

Creating curved parts (359)
Creating a contour plate

When you create a contour plate, the profile you use defines the thickness of the plate and the
picked points define the shape. The corners of the contour plate can be chamfered.
To create a contour plate:
1. Click the Create contour plate icon.
3. Pick the corner points of the contour plate.
4. Pick the start point again, or click the middle mouse button to finish picking.
c Click Modify.
See also Creating a round contour plate (79)

Contour plate properties (325)
Creating a round contour plate

To create a round contour plate:
1. Create a square contour plate with four equal sides.
2. Select the plate.
3. Select the handles of the plate.

To select all the handles at once, hold down the Alt key and drag
the mouse from left to right, covering all the handles.
4. Press Alt + Enter to display the Chamfer Properties dialog box.
5. Select the round chamfer symbol from the list box.

6. Enter the chamfer radius in the x box.
The radius must be equal to half of the side of the square.
7. Click Modify.
See also Alternative way of creating a round plate or slab (360)

Creating a contour plate (79)
Chamfers (119)
Creating an orthogonal beam

To create a steel beam that is orthogonal to the work plane:
1. Click Modeling > Create Steel Part > Orthogonal Beam.
2. Pick the position of the beam.
c Click Modify.
See also Orthogonal beam properties (326)

Creating a twin profile
A twin profile consists of two identical beams. You define the positions of both beams by selecting
the twin profile type and setting the clearance between the beams in two directions.
To create a twin steel profile:
1. Click Modeling > Create Steel Part > Twin Profile.
c Click Modify.
See also Twin profile properties (326)
5.4 Assemblies
Tekla Structures creates basic assemblies of steel parts when you use a workshop weld or bolt to
join parts together. Assemblies and their main parts are automatically defined when you:
• Create single workshop welds or bolts.
• Apply automatic connections which create workshop welds or bolts.
You can also create nested assemblies by adding sub-assemblies to existing assemblies, or by
joining assemblies together.
The main part in a steel assembly has other parts welded or bolted to it. By default, the main part is
not welded or bolted to any other parts. You can change the main part in an assembly.
See also Creating an assembly (81)

Adding objects to assemblies (83)
Removing objects from an assembly (86)
Highlighting objects in an assembly (86)
Exploding an assembly (87)
Assembly examples (87)
Selecting assemblies and cast units
Creating an assembly
To create an assembly:
1. Ensure that the Select assemblies selection switch is active.
2. Select the parts and/or assemblies that you want to join together.
3. Right-click and select Make into Assembly from the pop-up menu.
Creating and modifying structures 81 Assemblies

See also Assemblies (81)
Creating a sub-assembly (82)
Using bolts to create assemblies (82)
Using welds to create assemblies (83)
Creating a sub-assembly
To create a sub-assembly of parts that are already in an assembly:
1. Ensure that the Select objects in assemblies selection switch is active.
2. Select the parts you want to include in the sub-assembly.
3. Right-click and select Make into Sub-Assembly from the pop-up menu.
See also Creating an assembly (81)
Using bolts to create assemblies

You can use bolts to create and connect assemblies. You can create nested assemblies by connecting
sub-assemblies to an existing assembly, or you can just connect more parts to assemblies using
bolts.
To control how Tekla Structures creates assemblies, use the Connect part/assembly and Bolt type list
boxes in the Bolt Properties dialog box. The order in which you select parts when creating the
connection determines the main and secondary parts of the assembly or the assembly hierarchy.
Connect part/assembly Bolt type Result

As sub-assembly Workshop or Site Nested assembly with the assembly you are
bolting as a sub-assembly.
The first part you pick determines the assembly
to which you are bolting.
As secondary part Workshop Basic assembly with the part you are bolting
as a secondary part.
The first part you pick usually becomes the
main part in the assembly.
As secondary part Site No assembly created.

Bolting sub-assemblies to an existing assembly (82)
Bolting sub-assemblies to an existing assembly

To bolt sub-assemblies to an existing assembly:
1. Double-click the Create bolts icon to open the Bolt Properties dialog box.
2. In the Connect part/assembly list box, select As sub-assembly.
4. Select a part in the assembly to bolt to.
5. Select a part in the sub-assembly to be bolted.
6. Pick the bolt group origin.
7. Pick a point to indicate the bolt group x direction.
See also Using bolts to create assemblies (82)

Using welds to create assemblies
Tekla Structures forms assemblies based on where the weld should be made. You can create
workshop welds and site welds.
The order in which you select parts when creating the connection determines the main and
secondary parts of the assembly or the assembly hierarchy. The first part you select becomes the
main part of the assembly. Tekla Structures dimensions secondary parts relative to the main part in
assembly drawings. The largest main part in the weld becomes the main part of the assembly.
When you connect assemblies, the first part you select determines the assembly to which you weld
sub-assemblies.
To control how Tekla Structures creates assemblies, use the Connect part/assembly and Workshop/Site
list boxes in the Weld Properties dialog box.
Connect part/assembly Workshop/Site Result

As sub-assembly Workshop or Site Nested assembly with the assembly you are
welding as a sub-assembly.
The first part you pick determines the assembly
to which you are welding.
As secondary part Workshop Basic assembly with the part you are welding
as a secondary part.
The first part you pick usually becomes the
main part in the assembly.
As secondary part Site No assembly created.

Welding sub-assemblies to an existing assembly (83)
Welding sub-assemblies to an existing assembly

To weld sub-assemblies to an existing assembly:
1. Double-click the Create weld between parts icon to open the Weld Properties dialog box.
2. In the Connect part/assembly list box, select As sub-assembly.
4. Select a part in the assembly to weld to.
5. Select a part in the sub-assembly to be welded.
6. To check that the weld marks look correct, create a drawing.
See also Using welds to create assemblies (83)
Adding objects to assemblies

You can add objects to assemblies in the following ways:
To Do this
Create a basic assembly Do one of the following:
• Add parts to an existing assembly as secondary parts.
• Bolt or weld parts to an existing assembly as secondary
parts.

To Do this
Create a nested assembly Do one of the following:
• Add parts to an existing assembly as secondary parts.
• Bolt or weld assemblies to an existing assembly as sub-
assemblies.
• Add assemblies to an existing assembly as sub-assemblies.
• Join existing assemblies together without adding any loose
parts.
Sub-assemblies in a nested assembly retain their own assembly

information and main part. You can also define properties
separately for the sub-assemblies and the nested assembly by using
the part properties dialog box.

Assembly hierarchy (84)
Adding parts to an assembly (85)
Creating a nested assembly (85)
Joining assemblies (86)
Changing the assembly main part (86)
Changing the main assembly (86)
Assembly hierarchy
You can work on any level of a nested assembly, from single parts and bolts, through the basic and
sub-assemblies, up to the highest level of the nested assembly.
To work with nested assemblies, you need to know how to use the Shift key and mouse scrolling to
select objects on different levels in the assembly hierarchy.

The assembly hierarchy in nested assemblies affects drawings and reports. You can create separate
drawings and reports of the sub-assemblies and the nested assembly, and still produce dimensions,
marks, fabrication information, etc. for all assembly levels.
See also Adding objects to assemblies (83)

Selecting nested assemblies and components
Adding parts to an assembly

To add secondary parts to a basic assembly or to any level of a nested assembly:
2. Select the part you want to add.
3. Right-click and select Assembly > Add to Assembly from the pop-up menu.
4. Select the assembly to add to.
Creating a nested assembly

To create a nested assembly:
2. Select the assemblies you want to add to another assembly. They will become sub-assemblies in
the nested assembly.
3. Right-click and select Assembly > Add as sub-assembly from the pop-up menu.
4. Select the assembly to add to.

Joining assemblies
To join existing assemblies without adding any loose parts:
2. Select the assemblies you want to join.
3. Right-click and select Assembly > Make into Assembly from the pop-up menu.
The assembly with the largest volume becomes the main assembly.
See also Changing the main assembly (86)

Adding objects to assemblies (83)
Changing the assembly main part

To change the main part in an assembly:
1. Check what is currently the main part of the assembly.
a Ensure that the Select assemblies selection switch is active.
b Click Tools > Inquire > Assembly Objects.
c Select the assembly.
Tekla Structures highlights the main part in orange color and the secondary part(s) in
yellow color.

3. Click Modeling > Assembly > Set as New Main Object of Assembly.
4. Select the new main part.
Tekla Structures changes the main part.

Highlighting objects in an assembly (86)
Changing the main assembly

When you join two or more assemblies together, the assembly with the largest volume becomes the
main assembly. You can change the main assembly at any time.
To change the main assembly in a nested assembly:
1. Select the new main assembly.
2. Right-click and select Assembly > Set as New Main Sub-Assembly from the pop-up menu.
Removing objects from an assembly

To remove objects from an assembly:
1. Select the part or sub-assembly you want to remove.
2. Right-click and select Assembly > Remove from Assembly from the pop-up menu.
Highlighting objects in an assembly

Use the Inquire tool to check which objects belong to a particular assembly.
To highlight objects in an assembly:
1. Click Tools > Inquire > Assembly Objects.

2. Select a part that belongs to an assembly.
Tekla Structures highlights the other parts that belong to the same assembly. The following
colors are used:
Object type Highlight color

Concrete - main part magenta
Concrete - secondary part cyan
Reinforcement blue
Steel part - main part orange
Steel part - secondary part yellow
Exploding an assembly
When you explode a nested assembly, Tekla Structures breaks the assembly hierarchy level by level,
always starting from the highest level. You need to use the Explode command several times to break
a nested assembly back to single parts.
You can also explode sub-assemblies to single parts without breaking the entire assembly hierarchy.
To explode an assembly:
1. Select the assembly or sub-assembly you want to explode.
• To explode the entire assembly, right-click and select Assembly > Explode from the pop-up
menu.
• To only explode the sub-assembly, right-click and select Assembly > Explode Sub-Assembly
Assembly examples
Column corbel A column corbel is fabricated in one workshop, and then attached to the column in another
workshop. Model the corbel as a sub-assembly of the column. Then create an assembly drawing for
each workshop: one assembly drawing showing how the corbel is welded together, another
assembly drawing showing how the corbel and the other part are welded to the column.

Drawing 2, Workshop 2
Complex truss Model the halves of a complex truss as assemblies. Create assembly drawings for the workshop to
fabricate the truss halves. Then create another assembly drawing showing how the halves should be
joined on site.
Built-up profile In a frame of built-up columns and beams, each built-up profile can be a sub-assembly. You can
create an assembly drawing showing the entire frame, and separate drawings showing how the
columns and beams are constructed.

Assembly drawings
5.5 Concrete parts

This section explains how to create concrete parts.
See also Creating a pad footing (89)

Creating a strip footing (89)
Creating a concrete column (89)
Creating a concrete beam (90)
Creating and modifying structures 88 Concrete parts

Creating a concrete polybeam (90)
Creating a concrete slab (91)
Creating a concrete panel (92)
Creating a pad footing

To create a pad footing:
1. Click the Create pad footing icon.
2. Pick the pad footing position.
c Click Modify.
See also Pad footing properties (327)
Creating a strip footing

To create a strip footing:
1. Click the Create strip footing icon.
2. Pick the points you want the footing to go through.
c Click Modify.
4. If you want to create curved segments, chamfer the corners of the footing.
See also Strip footing properties (328)
Creating a concrete column

To create a concrete column:
1. Click the Create concrete column icon.

Tekla Structures creates the column at the level that you defined in the Concrete Column
c Click Modify.
See also Concrete column properties (329)
Creating a concrete beam

To create a concrete beam:
1. Click the Create concrete beam icon.
c Click Modify.
See also Concrete beam properties (330)
Creating a concrete polybeam

A polybeam can contain straight and curved segments. You can also create concrete bent plates
with this command.

To create a concrete polybeam:
1. Click the Create concrete polybeam icon.
c Click Modify.
4. If you want to create curved segments, chamfer the corners of the polybeam.
See also Polybeam chamfers (120)

Concrete beam properties (330)
Polybeam length calculation (309)
Creating a concrete slab

When you create a concrete slab, the profile you use defines the thickness of the slab and the picked
points define the shape. The corners of the slab can be chamfered.
To create a concrete slab:
1. Click the Create concrete slab icon.
3. Pick the corner points of the slab.
c Click Modify.
See also Creating a round slab (91)

Concrete slab properties (331)
Creating a round slab

To create a round slab:
1. Create a square slab with four equal sides.

2. Select the slab.
3. Select the handles of the slab.
To select all the handles at once, hold down the Alt key and drag
the mouse from left to right, covering all the handles.
4. Press Alt + Enter to display the Chamfer Properties dialog box.
5. Select the round chamfer symbol from the list box.

6. Enter the chamfer radius in the x box.
The radius must be equal to half of the side of the square.
7. Click Modify.
See also Alternative way of creating a round plate or slab (360)

Creating a concrete slab (91)
Chamfers (119)
Creating a concrete panel

To create a concrete panel:
1. Click the Create concrete panel icon.
2. Pick the points you want the panel to go through.
c Click Modify.
4. If you want to create curved segments, chamfer the corners of the panel.
See also Concrete panel properties (331)

Chamfers (119)
5.6 Cast units

The concrete structures in Tekla Structures are modeled as single parts. By default, each part is
considered a separate cast unit. For construction purposes you may need to merge several concrete
parts into one cast unit. For example, a single cast unit could consist of a column with corbels.
You need to specify which parts form the cast unit. Cast units can include reinforcement, as well as
concrete parts.
The main part in a concrete cast unit is the one with the largest volume of concrete. You can change
the main part in a cast unit.
Cast units have the cast unit type part property - they are set either Cast in place or Precast:
Cast unit type Description

Precast Cast units that are built at another location and
transported to their final location for placement in the
full structure.
Cast in place Cast units that are constructed fully in their final
location.
It is important to use the correct cast unit type, because some

functionalities, for example numbering, are based on the cast unit
type.
See also Creating a cast unit (93)

Adding objects to cast units (93)
Removing objects from a cast unit (94)
Highlighting objects in a cast unit (94)
Exploding a cast unit (95)
Defining the cast unit type (95)
Casting direction (95)
Creating a cast unit

To create a cast unit:
1. Click Modeling > Cast Unit > Create.
2. Select the objects you want to include in the cast unit.
3. Click the middle mouse button to create the cast unit.
See also Cast units (93)
Adding objects to cast units

This section explains how to add objects to a cast unit.
Creating and modifying structures 93 Cast units

Adding concrete objects to a cast unit (94)
Adding non-concrete objects to a cast unit (94)
Changing the cast unit main part (94)
Adding concrete objects to a cast unit

To add concrete objects to a cast unit:
1. Click Modeling > Cast Unit > Add to.
2. Select the objects you want to add.
3. Select an object in the cast unit.
See also Adding objects to cast units (93)
Adding non-concrete objects to a cast unit

Use the Add as Sub-Assembly command when adding non-concrete objects to a cast unit. This
applies to anything that is not concrete, such as steel parts and insulation.
To add a non-concrete part to a cast unit:
1. Ensure that the Select components selection switch is active.
2. Click Modeling > Assembly > Add as Sub-Assembly.
3. Select the non-concrete part you want to add.
4. Select the cast unit to which you want to add the part.
Changing the cast unit main part

To change the main part in a cast unit:
1. Check what is currently the main part of the cast unit.
c Select the cast unit.
Tekla Structures highlights the main and secondary parts in different colors.

4. Right-click and select Set as New Main Part of Assembly from the pop-up menu.

Highlighting objects in a cast unit (94)
Removing objects from a cast unit

To remove objects from a cast unit:
1. Click Modeling > Cast Unit > Remove From.
2. Select the objects you want to remove.
Highlighting objects in a cast unit

Use the Inquire tool to check which objects belong to a particular cast unit.
To highlight objects in a cast unit:

2. Select a part that belongs to a cast unit.
Tekla Structures highlights the other parts that belong to the same cast unit. The following
colors are used:

Reinforcement blue
Exploding a cast unit

To explode a cast unit:
1. Click Modeling > Cast Unit > Explode.
2. Select an object in the cast unit you want to explode.
Defining the cast unit type

Tekla Structures checks the cast unit type of the main part each time you create or modify a cast
unit. Tekla Structures does not mix precast and cast-in-place parts within a cast unit.
To define whether a concrete part is precast or cast in place:
1. Double-click a concrete part to open the concrete part properties dialog box.
2. Go to the Cast unit tab.
3. In the Cast unit type list box, select Precast or Cast in place.
Casting direction
To indicate the casting direction of a concrete part, you can define which part face you want to
have on top of the casting form. The top-in-form face is displayed in the front view of a drawing.
The casting direction affects the numbering of concrete parts. If you define the casting direction for
parts that differ only by their modeling direction, they get different position numbers. This is
because the modeling direction affects the top-in-form face of the parts. By default, the casting
direction of the parts is undefined, which means the modeling direction does not affect numbering.
In drawings, use the Fixed coordinate system to show the top-in-

form face in the front view.

Example In the following example, each cast unit gets a different position number, because the top-in-form
setting and the orientation of the panels is different. The red arrow indicates the modeling direction.
In the following example, the cast units get the same position number, because their top-in-form
setting has not been defined. The red arrow indicates the modeling direction.

Defining the casting direction of a part (96)
Numbering the model (179)
Defining the casting direction of a part

To define the casting direction of a concrete part:
1. Set the representation of parts to Rendered by doing one of the following:
• Click View > Representation > Parts > Rendered.
• Press Ctrl + 4.
2. Select a concrete part.
3. Right-click and select Cast Unit > Set Top in Form Face.
4. Select the part face that will face upwards in the form.

See also Casting direction (95)
Showing the top-in-form face

To display the top-in-form face of a concrete part:
1. Click Modeling > Cast Unit > Show Top in Form Face.
2. Click the concrete part whose top-in-form face you want to show.
Tekla Structures highlights the top-in-form face in red:
To hide the top-in-form face again, right-click the view and select
Update Window from the pop-up menu.
See also Casting direction (95)

6 Detailing structures
This section explains how to create details using Tekla Structures. It also gives you some techniques
for fine-tuning part shapes.
Contents • Bolts (99)

• Holes (103)
• Welds (105)
• Surface treatment (109)
• Fine-tuning part shape (118)
• Combining parts (129)
• Splitting parts (132)
6.1 Bolts
To create bolts, you can either create a single bolt group or apply a component that automatically
creates bolt groups.
For more information on using components to automatically create bolt groups, see Defining bolts
and welds in the Detailing Guide.
You can create different part marks for holes and bolts in drawings.
Tekla Structures uses the same command for creating bolts and holes. Therefore you cannot use bolt
elements (such as screws, washers, and nuts) while creating holes.
See also Creating a bolt group (100)
Detailing structures 99 Bolts

Creating a single bolt (102)
Changing or adding bolted parts (102)
The bolt and bolt assembly catalogs
Creating a bolt group

To create a bolt group:
1. Click Detailing > Bolts > Create Bolts.
2. Select the main part, to which the secondary parts will be bolted.
3. Select the secondary parts.
4. Click the middle mouse button to finish selecting parts.
5. Pick a point, which is the bolt group origin.
6. Pick a second point to indicate the bolt group x direction.
If you want to change the bolt properties:
a Select the bolt and double-click it to open the properties dialog box.
c Click Modify.
You can also create a new bolt group by modifying an existing one.
In most cases it is easier to create bolt groups by applying a
component that includes bolt groups.
To create new bolts by modifying an existing bolt group:
1. Apply a component.
2. Explode the component.
3. Modify the bolt group.
See also Bolts (99)

Bolt properties (340)
Bolt group shape (100)
Bolt group position (101)
Bolt offsets (102)
Bolt group shape

You have the following options for bolt group shape:
• Array for rectangular
• Circle for circular
• xy list for any shape
Tekla Structures uses the values of the Bolt dist X and Bolt dist Y fields to determine how many bolts
the bolt group contains, as shown in the table below:
Shape Bolt dist X Bolt dist Y

Array Spacing between bolts, in the x Spacing between bolts, in the y
direction of the bolt group. direction of the bolt group.
Circle Number of bolts. Diameter of the bolt group.

Shape Bolt dist X Bolt dist Y
xy list x coordinate of each bolt, from the y coordinate of each bolt, from the
bolt group point of origin. bolt group point of origin.
Examples
Bolt group shape Dimensions Picture

Array Bolt dist X: 150
Bolt dist Y: 100
Circle Number of bolts: 6

Diameter: 100
xy list Bolt dist X: 75 175

250
Bolt dist Y: 75 -50 0
Bolt group position

Tekla Structures determines the location of the bolt group using the following values:
• Bolt group x axis
• Work plane
Dimensions are relative to the bolt group origin, which is the first point you pick when creating a
bolt group. Tekla Structures sets the x direction of a bolt group using the second point picked.
It is important that the points you pick to create the bolt group are close enough to the parts you
want to connect.

Bolt offsets
You can use offsets to change the position of the bolt group. Offsets move the bolt group by moving
the x axis of the bolt group.
The starting point values Dx, Dy and Dz move the first end of the bolt group, relative to the bolt
group x axis. The end point values move the second end of the bolt group.
• A positive Dx value moves the starting point towards the end point.
• Dy moves the end point perpendicular to the bolt group x axis on the current work plane.
• Dz moves the end point perpendicular to the current work plane.
Example An example bolt group with the Dx starting point set to 75:
Creating a single bolt

To create a single bolt:
2. Under Bolt group, select Array from the Shape list box.
3. In the Bolt dist X and Bolt dist Y fields, type 0.
4. Click Apply to save the changes.
5. Create the bolt the same way you would create a bolt group. Follow the instructions on the
status bar.
See also Bolts (99)

Bolt properties (340)
Creating a bolt group (100)
Changing or adding bolted parts

To change the parts a bolt group connects to:
1. Click Detailing > Bolts > Edit Bolted Parts.
2. When prompted, reselect the main and secondary parts.
Tekla Structures automatically updates bolt length to suit these changes.
See also Bolts (99)

6.2 Holes
Tekla Structures uses the same command for creating bolts and holes. Before creating holes, you
need to change some of the properties in the Bolt Properties dialog box.
If you want to create only holes without any bolts, clear all the Include in bolt assembly check boxes:
You can create the following types of holes:

• Round
• Oversized
• Slotted
• Tapped
See also Creating round holes (103)

Creating oversized holes (104)
Creating slotted holes (103)
Creating round holes

Tekla Structures calculates the diameter of a round hole as the sum of Bolt size and Tolerance.
To create round holes:
2. If needed, modify the hole properties.
3. If you do not want to create any bolts, clear all the Include in bolt assembly check boxes.
5. Create the holes the same way you would create a bolt group. Follow the instructions on the
status bar.
See also Holes (103)

Creating slotted holes

To create slotted holes:
2. To indicate which parts should be slotted, select the desired Parts with slotted holes check boxes.
Tekla Structures counts the pieces of steel from the head of the bolt down. For example, if you
select the second check box from the head of the bolt, Tekla Structures slots the second piece of
steel from the head of the bolt.
4. In the Hole type list box, select Slotted.
Detailing structures 103 Holes

5. Enter the allowance for the slotted hole in the x and y directions of the hole group using the
Slotted hole X or Slotted hole Y fields.
Tolerance
Slotted hole X or Y
Bolt size
6. If you want to rotate alternate holes by 90 degrees, select Even or Odd in the Rotate slots list
box.
Crossing slotted holes to odd or even parts
Parallel slotted holes

status bar.

Creating oversized holes

To create oversized holes:
2. Select the desired Parts with slotted holes check boxes to indicate which plies of the connection
get oversized holes.
4. In the Hole type list box, select Oversized.
5. In the Oversize field, enter the allowance for the oversized hole.
You can also use a negative value to create smaller (tapped) holes.
Detailing structures 104 Holes

status bar.

6.3 Welds
You can either create a weld manually, or use a component that automatically creates welds.
The following types of welds can be created manually:
• Weld between parts
Tekla Structures welds two parts together using the weld position defined in the Weld Properties
dialog box. The length of the weld depends on the length of the connection between the welded
parts.
• Polygon weld
You define the exact position of the weld by picking the points you want the weld to traverse.
• Single-part weld
Tekla Structures creates a weld to a single part, without connecting any other parts.
To display the weld object in the model in both Fast and Exact
mode, remember to give the weld Size and Type in weld properties.
By default Tekla Structures places the welds above line according to
the ISO standard. You can change this to below line to comply with
the AISC standard with the advanced option XS_AISC_WELD_MARK.
See also Creating a weld between parts (105)

Creating a polygon weld (107)
Creating a weld to a part (108)
Weld preparation (108)
Weld properties (342)
XS_AISC_WELD_MARK
Creating a weld between parts

To weld parts together:
1. Click Detailing > Weld > Create Weld between Parts.
2. Select the part to weld to.
If you are creating a workshop weld, this is the main part of the assembly.
3. Select the part to be welded.
If you are creating a workshop weld, this is the secondary part of the assembly.
Detailing structures 105 Welds

Main part
Secondary part
If you want to change the weld properties:

a Select the weld and double-click it to open the properties dialog box.
c Click Modify.
See also Welds (105)

Weld position (106)
Weld size prefixes (107)
Weld position
You define the position of a weld relative to the work plane. The type and position of the parts to be
welded affect the position of the weld.
The options for weld position are:
• x
• y
• z
These can all be in a positive or negative direction. Tekla Structures creates the weld on the face or
side of the part that faces in the selected direction (x, y, or z).
Example The following image shows welds in different positions. If there are no faces that touch in the
specified direction, Tekla Structures places the weld relative to the center point of the secondary
part.

Weld size prefixes

The weld size prefix is shown in drawings, but only if the Size checkbox is also selected.
The following table describes the standard ISO 2553 prefixes:
Prefix Description
a Design throat thickness
s Penetration throat thickness
z Leg length
Creating a polygon weld

To weld parts together using a polygon:
1. Click Detailing > Weld > Create Polygon Weld.
2. Select the part to weld to.
If you are creating a workshop weld, this is the main part of the assembly.
3. Select the part to be welded.
If you are creating a workshop weld, this is the secondary part of the assembly.

4. Pick the starting and end point, or alternatively, pick the points you want the weld to go
through.
5. Click the middle mouse button to create the weld.

Creating a weld to a part

To create a weld to a part, without connecting any other parts:
1. Click Detailing > Weld > Create Weld to Part.
2. Select the part that you want to weld.
3. Pick the starting and end point, or alternatively, pick the points you want the weld to go
through.
4. Click the middle mouse button to create the weld.
Example Use the Create Weld to Part command to weld seams in tubular sections:
To model tubular sections with visible seams, use the SPD profile.
Weld preparation
When parts are prepared for welding, their edges can be beveled to produce a groove for the weld.
You can define the angle of bevels and grooves.
You can either prepare a part for welding manually, or apply a component that does it
automatically.

To prevent automatic weld preparation, set the variable
XS_DISABLE_WELD_PREP_SOLID to TRUE in your environment
initialization file.

Manually preparing a part for welding (109)
Welded connections
Manually preparing a part for welding

Before you start, create a cutting part and position it through the part you want to cut.
To manually prepare a part to be welded:
1. Click Detailing > Weld > Prepare Part for Welding.
2. Select the part that you want to cut.
3. Select the cutting part.
The part to be cut
The cutting part
Cuts are displayed using dash-and-dot lines
See also Weld preparation (108)
6.4 Surface treatment

Use the surface treatment tools to add surface treatment to parts. Surface treatment for concrete
parts include flat finishes, surface mixes, and tiles. Surface treatment for steel parts include fire-
proofing and unpainted areas, for example. Surface treatments are visible only in rendered views.
When you redefine the properties of a part (e.g. you change the size of a part), Tekla Structures
automatically modifies the surface treatment to fit the part.
Detailing structures 109 Surface treatment

When you create overlapping surface treatments, the smaller surface treatment overrides the larger
one. The overlapping area is recognized in reports: only the topmost (visible) surface treatment is
calculated.
See also Modifying surface treatment properties (110)

Adding surface treatment to parts (111)
Creating new surface treatment options (113)
Tiled surface treatment (114)
Modifying surface treatment properties

To define the properties of a surface treatment:
1. Click Detailing > Properties > Surface Treatment... to open the Surface Treatment Properties dialog
box.
2. In the Type list box, select the type of surface treatment to use.
3. In the Surface treatment name list box, select the specific surface treatment.
4. Click the Select... to select a material from the catalog.
5. Enter the Thickness of the surface treatment.
6. Set the Color to use to display the surface treatment in rendered views.
7. In the At depth list box, select the location of the surface treatment. The options are Middle,
Front, and Behind.
8. If needed, define the properties of a tiled surface treatment:
a On the Attributes tab, select Tile surface from the Type list box.
b On the Pattern tab, select the pattern from the Pattern type list box.
c The Definition table lists the properties of the pattern type.
9. Click Apply or OK to save the surface treatment properties.
See also Surface treatment (109)

Adding surface treatment to parts
This section explains how to add surface treatment to a part.

Adding surface treatment to a selected area (111)
Adding surface treatment to a part face (111)
Adding surface treatment to all faces of a part (111)
Adding surface treatment to cut faces (111)
Surface treatment on chamfered parts (112)
Surface treatment on parts with openings and recesses (112)
Adding surface treatment to a selected area

To add surface treatment to a selected area on the face of a part:
1. Click Detailing > Create Surface Treatment > To Selected Area on Part Face.
2. Pick the origin of the surface treatment.
3. Pick a point to indicate the direction of the surface treatment.
4. Select an area of the part face to apply the surface treatment to.
a Move the mouse pointer over a part. The part faces that you can select appear in blue.
b Select the part face.
c Pick three or more points on the part face to define a polygonal area.
See also Adding surface treatment to parts (111)

Modifying surface treatment properties (110)
Adding surface treatment to a part face

To add surface treatment to the entire face of a part:
1. Click Detailing > Create Surface Treatment > To Part Face.
4. Select the part to apply the surface treatment to.
a Move the mouse cursor over a part. The faces that you can select appear in blue.

Adding surface treatment to all faces of a part

To add surface treatment to all faces of a part:
1. Click Detailing > Create Surface Treatment > To All Faces of Part.
2. Select the part to apply the surface treatment to.

Adding surface treatment to cut faces

To add surface treatment to cut faces:
1. Click Detailing > Create Surface Treatment, and then select either To Part Face or To Selected Area
on Part Face.

3. Pick the direction.
4. Select the cut face to apply the surface treatment to:
5. If you are using the To Selected Area on Part Face command, pick the points to define the area of
the surface treatment.

Surface treatment on chamfered parts

Take these things into account when adding surface treatment to chamfered parts:
• Surface treatment does not work on sketched profiles with chamfers.
• Add surface treatment before chamfering the part. If surface treatment is applied to a
chamfered part, the surface treatment chamfer cannot be modified later on.
• The chamfers for the main part and surface treatment are separate. Modifying the main part
chamfer does not affect the surface treatment chamfer.
• The orientation of unsymmetric chamfers depends on the face where it was created (such as
top, bottom, left, or right). To change the orientation of an unsymmetric chamfer, you must
swap the chamfer's x and y values.
Surface treatment on parts with openings and recesses

To force Tekla Structures to consider openings and recesses in parts when adding surface treatment,
select the Cut by father part cuts checkbox in the Surface Treatment Properties dialog box.

The green surface treatment has the Cut by father part cuts check
box selected
The tiled surface treatment is not cut by the cut in the part: Cut
by father part cuts is not selected.
If you use the To All Faces of Part command and select the Cut by
father part cuts checkbox, Tekla Structures automatically adds
surface treatment also to the cut faces.

Creating new surface treatment options
You can add new options to the Surface treatment name list box in the Surface Treatment Properties
dialog box.
To create new surface treatment options:
1. Open the product_finishes.dat file using any text editor.
The file is located in the ..\Tekla
The first section of the file defines the available types of surface treatment. Do not edit this
section:

// Product finishes
// -------------------------
//
// Type : Type of surfacing
// 1 = concrete finish
// 2 = special mix
// 3 = tile surface
// 4 = steel finishes
2. Go to the sections that define the options for each type of surface treatment:
// =========================================
// *** Concrete Finish
// =========================================
// WET FINISH
// ----------
1 MF "Magnesium Float"
1 SMF "Smooth Magnesium Float"
1 WT "Wet Trowel"
3. Add rows to define new options.

a Define the surface treatment type. For example, 1 for concrete finish.
b Define a code for the surface treatment option. For example, MF for Magnesium Float.
c Define the full name of the surface treatment option. For example, Magnesium Float.
Remember to enclose the name in double quotes " ".
4. Save the file.
Tiled surface treatment
Tekla Structures includes complex tile and brick surface treatment options, such as basketweave and
herringbone patterns. Tiled surface treatment options are based on repeating tile patterns that are
stored in XML format.

Creating new tile patterns (114)
Example pattern definition (115)
Creating new tile patterns

To create new tile patterns:
1. Open the TilePatternCatalog.xml file using any text editor.
The file is located in the ..\Tekla
2. Add a new <TilePattern> element to the file.

The <TilePattern> element must have <HOffset> and <VOffset> elements and at least one
<Tile> element. Other elements are optional.
You may find it easier to copy one of the existing elements, and
then modify it to suit your needs.
3. Repeat adding <TilePattern> elements for all the patterns you want to define.
4. Save the TilePatternCatalog.xml file.
See also Tiled surface treatment (114)

Example pattern definition (115)
Tile pattern definitions (117)
Tile pattern elements (118)
Example pattern definition

This example explains how the Basketweave tile pattern is defined in the
TilePatternCatalog.xml file.
The Basketweave pattern block is made up of eight tiles:
Tile width
Mortar width
VOffset
HOffset

Red marks indicate TileOrigin. Angle value for vertical tiles is 90
Tile height
Mortar height
The pattern is repeated in the x and y direction of the surface treatment, starting from the origin of
the surface treatment. You can run the pattern in different x directions:
In the TilePatternCatalog.xml file, the pattern is defined as follows:

The name of the pattern
The size of the pattern block in the x direction, after which the
pattern repeats
The size of the pattern block in the y direction, after which the
pattern repeats
The definition file uses the same symbols as the pattern definition table in the Surface Treatment
Properties dialog box:
See also Creating new tile patterns (114)

Tile pattern definitions (117)
Tile pattern elements (118)
Tile pattern definitions

The predefined tile patterns that are available in the Surface Treatment Properties dialog box are
stored in the following files:
File Description
TilePatternCatalog.xml • Contains the tile pattern definitions.
• Located in the ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\<env
ironment>\system folder.
TilePatternCatalog.dtd • Document Type Declaration (DTD) file that defines the

elements allowed in the
• Located in the same folder as the

File Description
Thumbnail images • The images that appear in the Picture field in the
Surface Treatment Properties dialog box.
• Located in the ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\nt\bitmaps folder.
• Filenames identify the pattern types. For example,
herringbone.bmp illustrates the herringbone
pattern type.
Tile pattern elements

The TilePatternCatalog.xml file can contain the following elements:
Element Description
TilePatternCatalog The container for tile patterns. Required.
TilePattern Tile pattern element. Required. This element can contain the
following elements listed in this table.
HOffset Horizontal offset of the tile pattern. Required.
VOffset Vertical offset of the tile pattern. Required.
Tile The individual tiles used in a tile pattern. At least one required.
Color Color of the tile or mortar, defined by the RGB values (0–255).
Optional.
Parameter Creates an attribute for any element in the TilePattern.
Optional.
Label The label that identifies a parameter in the dialog box. Optional.
TileOrigin The origin of an individual tile, defined from the origin of the
pattern. Optional.
6.5 Fine-tuning part shape

This section describes the various tools you can use to fine-tune the shape of a part.
See also Chamfers (119)

Fittings (122)
Cuts (123)
Modifying the shape of a polygon (126)
Warping concrete parts (127)
Cambering parts (129)
Combining parts (129)
Splitting parts (132)
Detailing structures 118 Fine-tuning part shape

Shortening and lengthening parts
Chamfers
Chamfers are modeling details that can be used to refine the shape of parts for aesthetic, practical,
and manufacturing reasons. In Tekla Structures, you can chamfer part corners and part edges.
Limitations Only the following parts have corner chamfers: contour plates, concrete slabs, and parts that you
create by picking more than two points (strip footings, steel and concrete polybeams, and concrete
panels).
The end points of a part do not have corner chamfers. The handles that you select must be at corner
points or between two segments of a part.
See also Fine-tuning part shape (118)

Chamfering part corners (119)
Chamfering part edges (121)
Chamfering part corners

When Tekla Structures creates a part, by default it has a rectangular chamfer at each corner, which
does not change the geometry of the part. You can modify the default chamfers.
To modify a corner chamfer:

1. Select the part.
2. Double-click the handle of any part corner.
The Chamfer Properties dialog box is displayed.
3. Modify the chamfer properties.
4. Select the handles of the part corners you want to modify.
5. Click Modify.
See also Chamfers (119)

Corner chamfer properties (345)
Corner chamfer types and dimensions (120)
Polybeam chamfers (120)

Corner chamfer types and dimensions
Straight chamfers can have different dimensions in two directions. Tekla Structures only uses one
dimension for curved chamfers.
The coordinates follow the part’s local coordinate system.
The table below describes the chamfer types and dimensions used with the Create Chamfer > For Part
Corner command.
Type Icon Dimensions

None x: not used
y: not used
Line x:the distance in the x coordinate direction from the corner
y: the distance in the y coordinate direction from the corner
Rounding x: the radius
y: not used
Arc x: the radius
y: not used
Arc point x: not used
y: not used
Square The chamfer is perpendicular to the edges.
x: the distance in the x coordinate direction from the corner
Square The chamfer is parallel to the opposite edge.
parallel x: the distance in the x coordinate direction from the corner
Line and arc x (if smaller than y): the arc radius
x (if bigger than y): the distance in the x coordinate direction
from the corner
y (if smaller than x): the arc radius
y (if bigger than x): the distance in the y coordinate direction
from the corner
See also Chamfering part corners (119)
Polybeam chamfers
By default, Tekla Structures places a rectangular corner chamfer between each polybeam segment.
You can modify the default chamfers.
Tekla Structures shows the status of polybeam chamfers using the following colors:

Color Description Example
Magenta Correct chamfer
Yellow Correct chamfer that cannot be

unfolded
Red Incorrect chamfer
To see the chamfer lines of polybeams, set the advanced option

XS_DRAW_CHAMFERS_HANDLES to CHAMFERS.
Chamfering part edges

To chamfer the edge of a part:
1. Click Detailing > Create Chamfer > For Part Edge.
2. Select the part you want to chamfer.
3. Pick a point where you want the chamfer to start on the part edge.
4. Pick a second point where you want the chamfer to end on the part edge.
Tekla Structures displays the chamfer in light blue color.
5. If needed, you can modify the chamfer.
a Double-click the chamfer to open the Edge Chamfer Properties dialog box.

b Modify the chamfer properties.
c Click OK.
6. Right-click the view and select Redraw View.
Tekla Structures removes the chamfered edge.
See also Edge chamfer properties (346)

Chamfers (119)
Fittings
You can fit the end of a part to a plane by creating a straight cutting line between two points you
pick.
You can use fittings to extend or shorten parts inside a component, which makes it easier to create
connections, details, and so on. Do not use fittings to otherwise change the length of a part in the
model.
A fitting adjusts the end of a beam on a plane, perpendicular to the view plane, which passes
through the cutting line you pick. Fittings cannot be used on contour plates.
Fitting symbol

Creating a fitting (122)
Creating a fitting
To create a fitting:
1. Click Detailing > Fit Part End.
2. Select the part you want to cut with a fitting.
3. Pick the first point of the cutting line.
4. Pick the second point of the cutting line.

Do not apply a second fitting on the same part end, because then
Tekla Structures will ignore the first fitting. This happens if you use
the Fit Part End command for cutting and try to make two cuts on
the same part end. In situations like this, use the Cut Part
commands instead.
See also Fittings (122)
Cuts
You can use cuts to shape a part. Do not use cuts for cutting the entire part end.
See also Cutting parts with a line (125)

Cutting parts with a polygon (125)
Cutting parts with another part (126)
Hiding cut lines in a view (354)
Cutting efficiently (354)
Line cuts
A line cut cuts the end of a beam on a plane that passes through the line you pick. Tekla Structures
displays the cut line using dash-and-dot lines.
Cut lines are hidden
By default, line cuts do not affect beam length in NC files. For more information on how to change
this, see Fittings affect NC data.
See also Cutting parts with a line (125)

Polygon cuts
A polygon cut cuts a part using a polygonal shape. Tekla Structures displays the cut using dash-and-
dot lines. You must create cuts in a plane view.
Polygon-shaped cut
You should always define the polygon so that there is some

tolerance between the edges. If the edge of a cutting polygon is in
exactly the same position as the edge of the part to be cut, it can be
unclear whether the edge should be cut away.
See also Cutting parts with a polygon (125)
Part cuts
You can cut a part using another part. Tekla Structures displays the cut using dash-and-dot lines.
You can cut parts that already have cuts. This can be useful, for example, when you want to create
more sophisticated cut shapes.

Do not create cuts with the same planes or vertices. This makes it
unclear what should be cut away.
See also Cutting parts with another part (126)
Cutting parts with a line

Use line cuts to shape the end of a beam or column.
To cut a part with a line:
1. Click Detailing > Cut Part > With Line.
2. Select the part you want to cut.
5. Pick the side you want to remove.
See also Cuts (123)

Line cuts (123)
Cutting parts with a polygon

To cut a part using a polygonal shape:
1. Ensure that the work plane is on the plane you are cutting on.
For example, if you are creating a polygonal cut on the yz plane, you should temporarily set your
work plane to the yz plane as well.
2. Click Detailing > Cut Part > With Polygon.
4. Pick positions to outline the polygon to be used for cutting.
5. To close the polygon, click the middle mouse button or click Edit > Finish Polygon Input.
See also Cuts (123)

Polygon cuts (124)

Cutting parts with another part
Before you start, create a cutting part and position it through the part you want to cut.
To cut a part with another part:
1. Click Detailing > Cut Part > With Another Part.
Tekla Structures cuts the selected main part. The part cut does not affect other parts.
4. Delete the cutting part.
a Ensure that the Select cuts and fittings selection switch is off.
b Select the cutting part and press Delete.
See also Cuts (123)

Part cuts (124)

You can modify the shape of the following polygonal parts: steel and concrete polybeams, contour
plates, concrete slabs, concrete panels, and strip footings.
To modify the shape of a polygonal part:
1. Select the part you want to modify.
3. Pick an existing corner (1).
4. Pick new corners for the polygon (2, 3).
5. Pick another existing corner (4).
6. Pick the corner to remove (5).
Alternatively, move the handles using drag-and-drop or the Move

command.
See also Moving an object

Moving an object using drag-and-drop

Part handles (69)
Warping concrete parts

Use the following methods to warp concrete parts:
To Do this
Warp a concrete beam Use the deforming options in the part properties dialog
box.
Warp a concrete slab Move the chamfers.
The warping functionality is available only in the Full, Precast

Concrete Detailing, and Steel Detailing configurations.

Warping a concrete beam using deformation angles (127)
Warping a concrete slab by moving chamfers (127)
Warping a Floor Bay (66) slab (128)
Warping a concrete beam using deformation angles

To warp a concrete beam:
1. Double-click a concrete beam to open the Concrete Beam Properties dialog box.
3. In the Start field, enter the angle of the beam at its start point, relative to the part handles.
4. In the End field, enter the angle of the beam at its end point, relative to the part handles.
For example, to warp the beam 45 degrees at the end point, type 0 in the Start angle field and
45 in the End angle field.
5. Click Modify to warp the beam.
See also Warping concrete parts (127)
Warping a concrete slab by moving chamfers

Before you start, create a concrete slab by using the Create concrete slab command.

To warp a concrete slab by moving the chamfers:
1. Double-click a chamfer to open the Chamfer Properties dialog box.
2. Modify the chamfer properties.
• To move the upper corner of the chamfer, use the dz1 field.
• To move the lower corner of the chamfer, use the dz2 field.
3. Click Modify to warp the slab.
Warping a Floor Bay (66) slab

Before you start, create a concrete slab by using the Modeling of floor bay (66) component.
To warp a Floor Bay (66) slab by moving chamfers:
1. Ensure that the Select components selection switch is on.
2. Select the chamfer you want to move.
For example, select the corner point of a slab component to warp that end of the slab:
3. Right-click and select Move Special > Linear from the pop-up menu.
4. In the Move - Linear dialog box, type a value in the appropriate direction field.
For example, type 100 in the dZ field to lift that corner up 100 mm.
5. Click Move.
Tekla Structures moves the point in the direction you selected, which warps the slabs.

6. Right-click and select Interrupt from the pop-up menu to finish.
7. Ensure that the Select objects in components selection switch is on.
8. To see the warping angle of a single slab, double-click a slab to open the Beam properties dialog
box, and go to the Deforming tab.
• The Start field shows the warping angle at the start point of the part.
• The End field shows the warping angle at the end point of the part.
Cambering parts
You can use cambering to pre-camber parts, in other words, to curve long heavy sections that will
settle on site and become flat.
Use cambering to show the natural camber of a prestressed part in a model. Cambering affects the
position of cuts, skews, and embeds in the model.
Tekla Structures cambers parts in the local z direction.

Cambering a part (129)
Cambering a part
To camber a part:
3. In the Cambering box, define the degree of camber.
4. Click Modify.
See also Cambering parts (129)
6.6 Combining parts

You can combine existing parts in Tekla Structures. This can be useful when you want to model
complex parts (such as folded plates) that are otherwise difficult to model, or when you want to
model prefabricated parts that are delivered to the workshop already attached to profiles.
When you select the parts you want to combine, the part properties of the part that is selected first
are used for the combined part.
You can add the new combined part to another combined part. Cuts and fittings can also be applied
to combined parts.
See also Combining two parts into one (130)

Attaching a part to another part (130)
Detaching an attached part (131)
Exploding attached parts (132)
Detailing structures 129 Combining parts

Combining two parts into one
To combine two parts into one:
2. Select the first part.
3. Select the second part.
If the centerlines of the part are not in line with each other, the centerlines are combined by taking
the largest distance between the start and end points from both parts.
Combining does not work for contour plates or polybeams.
When you combine parts, Tekla Structures retains the attached

objects and connections. Tekla Structures does not recreate
connections in the part that was selected first.
See also Combining parts (129)
Attaching a part to another part

Before you start, click View > View Properties... > Display... to ensure that the Cuts and added material
option is selected in the display settings.
You can show the attached parts of a single part even if the Cuts
and added material option is not selected in the display settings.
Click Tools > Customize... and add the Show added materials
command to a toolbar. Click the icon and select a part to show
the attached parts.
To attach a part to another part:

1. Click Detailing > Added Material > Attach to Part.
2. Select the part to attach to.

3. Select the part you want to attach.
You can attach more than one part at a time. The parts that are attached do not need to touch
the part to which they are attached.
4. Click the middle mouse button to attach the part.
You can modify the properties of attached parts. Note that some of
the part properties are taken from the main part. The main part is
the part that was selected first. These properties are not shown in
the properties of the attached part.
You can inquire the properties of the whole part and the properties
of each attached part separately. The part properties of the whole
part are reported as before, but the attached parts are taken into
account when calculating area, volume, and weight:
• Weight (Gross) compares the weight with fittings and without
fittings, and shows the biggest weight result without cuts and
with attached parts.
• Weight (Net) shows the weight with cuts and attached parts
based on the geometry volume of the modeled part.
• Weight shows the net weight.
You can use the Attach to Part command to have more than 100
corner points in a polygon plate. Each plate has a maximum number
of corner points. When you attach plates, the corner points of all
the plates are summed up, that is, the maximum number of points
in the whole part is ‘number of plates * maximum number of points’.
Limitations
• Connections must be added to the part to which other parts have been attached. You cannot
add connections to an attached part.
• All reinforcement components may not work correctly with parts that have been attached to
each other using the Added Material commands. The geometry of the parts is not always kept
suitable for adding a component. For example, the reference points of the attached part may be
lost and therefore the orientation information needed for adding the reinforcement is not
known anymore.
To ensure that the reinforcements work correctly, add them manually or use the Reinforcing Bar
Shape Catalog to place them.
Detaching an attached part


the attached parts.
To detach an attached part:

1. Click Detailing > Added Material > Detach from Part.
2. Select the attached part you want to detach.
You can detach more than one part from several different parts at a time. Select the parts either
by clicking them or by using area selection.
3. Click the middle mouse button to detach the part.
The detached part keeps the color it had as an attached part.
Exploding attached parts

the attached parts.
To explode a part that has attached parts:

1. Click Detailing > Added Material > Explode Part.
2. Select the part you want to explode.
3. Click the middle mouse button to explode the part.
6.7 Splitting parts

You can split a part into two parts in Tekla Structures.
You can use splitting with straight parts, curved beams without offsets, or normal and tapered
reinforcing bar groups. You can also split plates and slabs by using a polygon. You cannot split
polybeams.
See also Splitting a straight or curved part (132)

Splitting a plate or slab (133)
Splitting a straight or curved part

To split a straight or curved part:
Detailing structures 132 Splitting parts

2. Select the part you want to split.
3. Pick a point for the dividing line.
See also Splitting parts (132)
Splitting a plate or slab

To split a plate or slab by using a polygon:
1. Ensure that the Z axis is perpendicular to the plate or slab you want to split.
4. Pick positions to outline the polygon to be used for splitting.
5. Click the middle mouse button to close the polygon and to split the part.
When you pick the corner points of the polygon to be used for
splitting, make sure the starting and end points are:
• outside of the part, and
• on the same side of the part.
If you split contour plates that have bolts, welds or surface

treatments, check the result after splitting.
See also Splitting parts (132)

7 Examining the model
This section describes a variety of tools you can use to view the model and control the visibility of
objects in the model.
Contents • Viewing the model (135)

• Showing and hiding objects (141)
• Visualizing project status (153)
7.1 Viewing the model

To see your Tekla Structures model from virtually any angle, you can move and rotate the model.
See also Zooming the model (135)

Rotating the model (136)
Moving the model (137)
Flying through the model (138)
Creating a clip plane (138)
Creating a screenshot (139)
Keyboard shortcuts for viewing the model (140)
Zooming the model

The commands on the View > Zoom menu allow you to focus in on a particular area, or pull out for a
wider view. You can use a mouse, keyboard shortcuts, or a combination of both.
To zoom in or out in a model:
• Scroll with the mouse wheel.
Scroll forward to zoom in, and backward to zoom out.
If you do not have a wheel mouse, use the commands on the View >
Zoom menu to zoom in or out in the model. For more information on
each command, see the corresponding menu tooltip.
See also Viewing the model (135)

Modifying the zoom settings (136)
Examining the model 135 Viewing the model

Zooming with keyboard shortcuts (136)
Modifying the zoom settings

To modify zoom settings, do any of the following:
To Do this
Keep the center point of the view in the Click Tools > Options > Centered Zooms.
middle of the view window If this option is off, the mouse pointer position
determines the center point of zooming.
Define the zoom ratio when using a 3- Use the advanced option XS_ZOOM_STEP_RATIO.
button mouse
Define the zoom ratio when scrolling Use the advanced option
XS_ZOOM_STEP_RATIO_IN_MOUSEWHEEL_MODE.
Define the zoom ratio when scrolling Use the advanced option
and holding down the wheel XS_ZOOM_STEP_RATIO_IN_SCROLL_MODE.
Zooming with keyboard shortcuts

To zoom by using keyboard shortcuts:
1. Place the mouse pointer over the model.
• To zoom in, press Page Up.
• To zoom out, press Page Down.
Rotating the model

You can use the mouse, keyboard shortcuts, menu commands, or a combination of these techniques
to rotate the model in rendered views.
To rotate the model, use any of the following methods:
To Do this
Rotate using the middle mouse 1. Hold down Ctrl and click and drag with the middle
button mouse button to rotate the model.
2. To relocate the center of rotation, press v, and then
pick a position in the view.
Tekla Structures rotates the model around this view
point.
Rotate using the left mouse button 1. Press Ctrl+R.
2. Pick a position in the view.
Tekla Structures rotates the model around this view
point.
3. Click and drag with the left mouse button to rotate
the model.

To Do this
Rotate using menu commands or • Click View > Rotate and select one of the commands.
keyboard shortcuts
The center of rotation is fixed in the center of the work
area.
For more information on each command, see the
corresponding menu tooltip.
Automatically set the rotation 1. Click Tools > Options > Automatic Rotation Center to
center switch on automatic rotation centering.
2. Hold down Ctrl and click and drag with the middle
mouse button to rotate the model.
The rotation center is automatically set at the location
you clicked.
Tip: When Automatic Rotation Center is switched off,
you can temporarily activate it by holding down
Ctrl+Shift while you click and drag with the middle
mouse button.
Define a specific rotation angle 1. Double-click the view to open the View Properties
dialog box.
2. Type a rotation angle in the Rotation around Z or
Rotation around X field.
3. Click Modify.
See also Rotation settings (316)

Viewing the model (135)
Moving the model

To move the entire model, use any of the following methods:
To Do this
Move the model using the middle 1. To activate the middle button pan, click Tools > Options
mouse button > Middle Button Pan, or Shift+M. A checkmark appears
next to the menu command if the middle button pan is
already active.
2. Hold down the middle mouse button and drag the
model anywhere within the view.
Move the model using the Pan 1. Press P or click View > Move > Pan to activate dynamic
command panning.
The mouse pointer changes to a hand.
2. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse
anywhere within the view.
3. To stop panning, press Esc.

To Do this
Move the model using keyboard Do one of the following:
shortcuts or menu commands • Use the up, down, left and right arrows on the
keyboard.
• Click View > Move and then select one of the
commands.
Flying through the model

Using the Fly command, you can travel through a model, changing direction and varying the speed
as you go. You can also adjust the field of view setting, which can be useful when flying in a tight
space.
To fly through a model:
1. Set view projection to Perspective.
b In the Projection list box, select Perspective.
c Click Modify.
2. If needed, adjust the field of view setting.
a Click Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > Model View.
b Modify the advanced option XS_RENDERED_FIELD_OF_VIEW.
c Click OK.
3. Click View > Fly.
4. Select a view. The mouse pointer changes into an arrow and a cross. The arrow indicates the
current flying direction.
5. Drag the mouse to move around in the model.

• To fly forward, move the mouse forward.
• To change the flying direction, drag the mouse in the desired direction.
The flying speed grows exponentially when you are approaching the model from a distance.
• To move up or down, hold down Ctrl and drag the mouse forward or backward.
• To change the camera angle, scroll with the mouse wheel.
• To fly in the in the direction of the camera angle, hold down Shift and scroll forward or
backward.
6. To stop flying, press Esc.
See also XS_RENDERED_FIELD_OF_VIEW

Viewing the model (135)
Creating a clip plane

Clip planes enable you to focus in on the required detail in the model. You can create up to six clip
planes in any rendered model view.

To create a clip plane:
1. Click View > Create Clip Plane.
2. Select a plane. The clip plane symbol appears in the model:
3. Repeat step 2 to create as many clip planes as needed.

4. To finish creating clip planes, press Esc.
To move a clip plane, click the clip plane scissor symbol and drag it
to a new location.
5. To delete a clip plane, click the clip plane symbol and press Delete.
Creating a screenshot
A screenshot is a picture of a dialog box, view, or the entire Tekla Structures window. You can use
screenshots in posters, brochures, or other material to show projects carried out using Tekla
Structures.
To create a high resolution screenshot of a rendered view:
1. Ensure that the view type is set to Rendered.
2. Click Tools > Screenshot > Custom...
3. To define which view to create the screenshot from, click Pick view and select a view.
4. Under Capture, select Rendered view.
5. Click Options... The Screenshot Options dialog box appears.
6. Set the desired properties and click OK.
7. Click Capture.

See also Creating a screenshot in Windows Vista (140)
Screenshot settings (317)
Creating a screenshot in Windows Vista

Due to a performance problem in Windows Vista, the screenshot commands might not always work
properly. Use any of the following workarounds to solve this problem:
• Use the command Tools > Screenshot > Custom...
• Adjust the visual effects for best performance in the Performance Options dialog box in
Windows Vista.
• Use the built-in Snipping Tool in Windows Vista to capture screenshots.
See also Creating a screenshot (139)
Saving a screenshot in bitmap format

By default, screenshots are created as Portable Network Graphics (.png) files. You can also save a
screenshot in bitmap (.bmp) format to use it, for example, as a custom component thumbnail.
To save a screenshot in bitmap format:
2. Select Place on clipboard.
3. Click Capture.
4. Paste the screenshot in your graphics editor and save it in .bmp format.
The software that you use to open the screenshot may have a limit
for the number of pixels.
Printing a screenshot
You can have Tekla Structures automatically print out a screenshot using the default printer.
To print a screenshot:
1. Click Tools > Screenshot > Print Screenshot to activate automatic printing.
2. Click Tools > Screenshot and select one of the commands:
• To capture the entire Tekla Structures window, select Main Frame.
• To capture the last dialog box displayed, select Dialog.
• To capture the active view, select View.
• To capture the active view without borders, select View without Borders.
Keyboard shortcuts for viewing the model
Command Keyboard shortcut

Zoom original Home
Zoom previous End

Zoom in Page Up
Zoom out Page Down
Rotate using mouse Ctrl+R
Rotate using keyboard Ctrl+arrow keys
Shift+arrow keys
Disable view rotation F8
Set view rotation point V
Auto rotate Shift+R
Shift+T
Pan P
Middle button pan Shift+M
Move right arrow keys
Move left
Move down
Move up
3D/Plane view Ctrl+P
Fly Shift+F
Create clip plane Shift+X
Screenshot F9
F10
F11
F12
Center by cursor Ins

Assigning a keyboard shortcut for a command
7.2 Showing and hiding objects

The visibility of objects in a view depends on the following settings:
• work area
• view depth
• view settings
• view filter
• object representation settings
Work area and view depth are like two virtual boxes. Objects that have their handles partially or
totally inside both boxes are visible. Newly created objects are also visible outside the view depth
but never outside the work area. When you redraw a view, only the objects inside the view depth are
displayed.
Examining the model 141 Showing and hiding objects

See also Defining which objects are displayed (142)
Representation options (142)
Hiding selected parts (144)
Hiding unselected parts (144)
Showing parts with exact lines (145)
Showing parts with high accuracy (146)
Showing and hiding assemblies (146)
Showing and hiding components (147)
Object groups (148)
Object representation settings (149)
Keyboard shortcuts for part representation options (147)
Keyboard shortcuts for component representation options (148)
Defining which objects are displayed

To define which objects are visible and how they are displayed in a view:
2. Click Display... to open the Display dialog box.
3. Select or clear check boxes to specify which objects are visible in the view.
See also Showing and hiding objects (141)

Display settings (320)
Representation options
In rendered views, you can define separately how Tekla Structures displays parts and component
objects. The following options are available:
Option Description Example

Wireframe Part outlines are displayed,
surfaces are not, i.e. parts are
transparent.
In this example, component objects are

displayed as Rendered.

Shaded Wireframe Part outlines are displayed. Parts
are transparent, and their
surfaces are shaded.
In this example, component objects are

displayed as Rendered.
Hidden Lines Parts are not transparent, i.e.
underlying parts are not visible.
Rendered Part surfaces are displayed, i.e.

parts are not transparent.
Show Only Selected parts are displayed.

Selected Other parts are almost
completely transparent.
This option is useful, for example,
when viewing clash check results
in a large model.
Use the shortcuts Ctrl+1...5 and Shift+1...5 to set the desired

representation for parts in the model and components.

Keyboard shortcuts for part representation options (147)
Keyboard shortcuts for component representation options (148)
Hiding selected parts

You can quickly hide selected parts in a view. This can be useful, for example, when you want to
temporarily hide parts in order to see the parts behind them.
To hide selected parts:
1. Click View > Hide Part.
2. Select the parts you want to hide.
The selected parts become invisible.
3. To make the parts visible again, do one of the following:

• Click View > Redraw All.
• Right-click and select Redraw view.

Hiding unselected parts (144)
Hiding unselected parts

To hide all unselected parts in a view:
1. Select the parts that you want to keep visible.

2. Right-click and select Show Only Selected.
The unselected parts become almost transparent.
To completely hide the unselected parts, hold down the Shift key
when selecting the command.
To show the unselected parts as sticks, hold down the Ctrl key when
selecting the command.

• Right-click and select Redraw View.

Hiding selected parts (144)
Showing parts with exact lines

Use the Show Part with Exact Lines command to temporarily display a part with exact lines even if
you are using the Fast representation option for parts.
To display a part with exact lines:
1. Select the part.
2. Click View > Representation > Show Part with Exact Lines.
3. Click the view in which you want to display exact lines.
4. To clear the exact lines effect, click View > Redraw All.

Showing parts with high accuracy

You can temporarily display parts with the highest possible level of accuracy. This can be useful, for
example, when checking a large model, because the entire model can still be displayed in the Fast or
Exact representation mode but the individual part can be shown in more detail.
To display selected parts with high accuracy:
1. Select the parts.
2. Right-click, and then hold down the Shift key while selecting Show with Exact Lines from the
pop-up menu.
Tekla Structures displays the selected parts with the highest possible level of accuracy.
3. To clear the high accuracy effect, right-click and select Show with Exact Lines from the pop-up
menu.
Normal display mode
High accuracy mode
See also XS_SOLID_USE_HIGHER_ACCURACY

Showing and hiding objects (141)
Showing and hiding assemblies


To Do this
Display the contents of an • Right-click the assembly and select Assembly > Show
assembly Assembly from the pop-up menu.
Tekla Structures displays all parts, bolts, welds, cuts,
fittings, and other details belonging to the assembly,
even if you had defined them as hidden in the view
properties.
Hide an assembly 1. Select the assembly you want to hide.
2. Right-click and select Assembly > Hide from the pop-up
menu.
Make a hidden assembly visible Do one of the following:
again • Right-click and select Redraw View.

Showing and hiding components

To Do this
Display the contents of a • Click View > Representation > Show Component Content
component and select a component.
Tekla Structures displays all bolts, welds, and other
details belonging to the component, even if you had
defined them as hidden in the view properties.
Hide a component 1. Select the component you want to hide.
2. Right-click and select Hide from the pop-up menu.
Make a hidden component visible Do one of the following:
again • Right-click and select Redraw View.

Keyboard shortcuts for part representation options

Wireframe Ctrl+1
Shaded Wireframe Ctrl+2
Hidden Lines Ctrl+3

Rendered Ctrl+4
Show Only Selected Ctrl+5
See also Representation options (142)

Keyboard shortcuts for component representation options

Wireframe Shift+1
Shaded Wireframe Shift+2
Hidden Lines Shift+3
Rendered Shift+4
Show Only Selected Shift+5
See also Representation options (142)

Object groups
Object groups are sets of rules that can be used to group objects based on selected properties and
conditions.
Use object groups to control the transparency and coloring of model objects. Object groups are also
used in project status visualizations.

Creating an object group (148)
Copying an object group to another model (149)
Deleting an object group (149)
Visualizing project status (153)
Creating an object group

To create an object group:
1. Click View > Representation > Object Representation... to open the Object Representation dialog
box.
2. Click Object group... to open the Object Group - Representation dialog box.
3. Modify the object group settings.
a Click Add row.
b Select options from the Category, Property, and Condition list boxes.
c In the Value list box, type a value or select one from the model.
d Add more rows, and use the And/Or options or parentheses to create more complex
rules.
4. Select the check boxes next to all object group rules that you want to enable.
The check boxes define which rules are enabled and effective.

5. Type a unique name in the field next to the Save as button.
6. Click Save as to save the object group.
See also Object groups (148)

Selecting values from the model
Copying an object group to another model

To copy an object group to another model:
1. Select the object group you want to copy.
The object groups you have created are located in the model’s attributes folder, and they
have the file name extension *.PObjGrp.
2. Select where you want to copy the object group.
• To make an object group available in another model, copy the file to the attributes
folder of the destination model.
• To make an object group available in all models, copy the file to the folder defined by the
advanced option XS_PROJECT or XS_FIRM.
3. Restart Tekla Structures.

XS_FIRM
XS_PROJECT
Deleting an object group

To delete an object group:
1. Delete the object group file located in the model’s attributes folder.
Object groups have the file name extension *.PObjGrp.
Object representation settings

Use object representation settings to modify the color and transparency of objects in the model
view, and to create customized presentations of defined objects.
For example, the following images show the same model with different object representation
settings:

Standard object representation
Only parts whose profile name starts with IPE* or HEA* are visible
Objects whose user-defined attribute Planned erection date is set

to 01/05/2009 are displayed in blue, while all other parts are
90% transparent

Creating object representation settings (150)
Copying object representation settings to another model (152)
Deleting object representation settings (153)
Creating object representation settings

Create object representation settings to define the color and transparency of objects in a model.
To create object representation settings:
1. Click View > Representation > Object Representation...
2. Click Add row.
3. Select a predefined object group from the Object group list box.
4. Use the Color list box to define the color of the objects in the object group.
5. Use the Transparency list box to define the transparency of the objects in the object group.
6. Repeat steps 3–5 for each row you add.
7. Use the Move up and Move down buttons to change the order of the rows.
If an object belongs to several object groups, the coloring and visibility of the objects defined on
the top row is applied to that object.
8. Type a unique name in the field next to the Save as button

9. Click Save as to save the set of object representation settings.
If your object representation setting does not contain the group All,
Tekla Structures adds that row to the bottom of the list when you
click Modify, Apply, or OK.
See also Object representation settings (149)

Transparency settings for object groups (322)
Defining your own colors to model object groups (151)
Defining your own colors to model object groups

You can customize the color of model objects by selecting a specific color for each object group. You
can use an unlimited number of colors. This option gives you more freedom in visualizing the
different types of objects in the model.
To define colors for object groups:
1. Click View > Representation > Object Representation.
The Object Representation dialog box appears.
2. Load the object representation settings that you want to change.
3. Click Add row to add a new object group or select an existing object group from the Object
Group list.
4. Click the Color list arrow and then click Choose color....
• Click a color in the Basic colors palette or in the color window.
• Click Define Custom Colors and create a color of your own:

a Click a color in the color window and then click the desired color depth on the color bar
on the right, or enter RGB values.

b Click Add to Custom Colors.
c Click the color in the Custom colors palette to select it.
6. Click OK.
7. Select the desired Transparency option.
8. Click Save to save the changes.
9. Click Modify to change the representation of the objects.
When you open the Object Representation dialog box the next time, the Color list shows above the
dashed line a maximum of 10 colors that you last defined.
Information about the colors that you define for the object groups is stored in the
used_custom_colors.clr file, which is located in the attributes folder under the model
folder. Information about the colors that you add in the Custom colors palette is stored in the
xs_user.xxx file in the model folder (xxx is your user name).
See also Creating object representation settings (150)
Copying object representation settings to another model

To copy object representation settings to another model:
1. Select the object representation settings you want to copy.

The settings you have created are located in the model’s attributes folder, and they have the
file name extension *.rep.
2. Select where you want to copy the settings.
• To make the settings available in another model, copy them to the attributes folder of
the destination model.
• To make the settings available in all models, copy them to the system folder.
Deleting object representation settings

To delete object representation settings:
1. Delete the object representation file located in the model’s attributes folder.
Object representation settings have the file name extension *.rep.
7.3 Visualizing project status

Use the Project Status Visualization tool to review the status of modeling objects in a specific time
frame. For example, use this tool to:
• display the erection schedule for groups of parts using different colors
• identify the parts that are scheduled to be fabricated during a specific time period.
To create project status visualizations, you need to have predefined object representation settings
that include object groups based on date rules.
You can define tasks for parts and assemblies with Task Manager.
Project status visualization can then be based on the tasks.
See also Creating a visualization (153)

Copying visualization settings to another model (154)
Deleting visualization settings (154)
Example: Visualizing the erection schedule of a project (154)
Visualizing project status
Creating a visualization
To create a project status visualization:
1. Click Tools > Project Status Visualization... to open the Project Status Visualization dialog box.
2. Modify the visualization settings.
a In the Object representation list box, select one of the predefined object representation
settings.
b Define a start and end date for the time scale slider.
c Define the length of the time step.
Examining the model 153 Visualizing project status

3. Select the Refresh view automatically check box.
4. Type a unique name in the field next to the Save as button.
5. Click Save as to save the visualization settings.
6. To view the visualization in the model, click the step buttons.
See also Visualizing project status (153)

Example: Visualizing the erection schedule of a project (154)
Copying visualization settings to another model

To copy project status visualization settings to another model:
1. Select the visualization settings you want to copy.
The settings you have created are located in the model’s attributes folder, and they have the
file name extension *.4d.
2. Select where you want to copy the settings.
• To make the settings available in another model, copy them to the attributes folder of
the destination model.
• To make the settings available in all models, copy them to the system folder.
3. Include a copy of the object representation settings file (*.rep) and object group files
(*.PObjGrp) in the attributes and system folders to ensure that all the files will work
correctly.
Deleting visualization settings

To delete project status visualization settings:
1. Delete the visualization file located in the model’s attributes folder.
Project status visualization settings have the file name extension *.4d.
Example: Visualizing the erection schedule of a project

This section explains how to visualize erection schedules using the project status visualization tool
available in Tekla Structures.
In the following example, you will first define an erection schedule for parts using a specific user-
defined attribute. After that, you will create object groups to define which objects are shown in the
model, and object representation settings to define how the objects are shown in the model. Finally,
you will visualize the erection schedule using the project status visualization tool.

Example: Defining an erection schedule (155)
Example: Creating object groups (155)
Creating object representation settings (150)
Example: Creating visualization settings (156)
Example: Visualizing the erection schedule (157)

Example: Defining an erection schedule
In this example, you will define an erection schedule for parts using the user-defined attribute
Erection Planned start.
To define an erection schedule:
2. Click User-defined attributes...
3. On the Workflow tab, modify the value of the user-defined attribute Erection Planned start.
4. Ensure that all the check boxes are cleared.

5. Select the Erection Planned start check box.
6. Select all the parts for which you want to use the same erection date.
To make it easier to select parts, create a separate selection filter

for each group of parts.
7. Click Modify.
8. Repeat steps 1–7 for each group of parts in your model.
Example: Creating object groups

In this example, you will create an object group to define which objects are shown in the model.
To create the object group:
1. Click View > Representation > Object representation... to open the Object Representation dialog
box.
2. Click Object group... to open the Object Group - Representation dialog box.
3. Create an object group that includes all objects whose user-defined attribute Erection Planned
start is earlier than or equal to the review date.
a In the Category list box, select Object.
b In the Property list box, select PLANNED_START_E.
c In the Condition list box, select Earlier than or equal.
d In the Value list box, select Select date... The Select Date dialog box appears.
e Select Review date and click OK.
4. In the box next to the Save as button, enter a name for the group. For example,
plan_same_or_before_review_date.
5. Click Save as.


Example: Creating object representation settings
In this example, you will create object representation settings to define how the objects are shown
in the model.
1. Click View > Representation > Object Representation... to open the Object Representation dialog
box.
2. Define the color and transparency settings for the object group that you created in Example:
Creating object groups (155).
a Click Add row.
b In the Object group list box, select the object group you just created.
c In the Color list box, select Color by class.
d In the Transparency list box, select Visible.
3. Define the color and transparency settings for the object group All.
a Click Add row.
b In the Object group list box, select the object group All.
c In the Color list box, select Color by class.
d In the Transparency list box, select Hidden.
4. In the box next to the Save as button, enter a name for the object representation settings. For
example, planned_start_erection_date.
5. Click Save as.

Example: Creating visualization settings

In this example, you will create project status visualization settings.
To create visualization settings:
2. Define the length of the time step.
3. Define a start and end date for the time scale slider.
4. In the Object representation list box, select the object representation setting you created in
Example: Creating object representation settings (156).
5. Select the Refresh view automatically check box.
6. In the box next to the Save as button, enter a name for the visualization.
7. Click Save as to save the visualization settings.

Example: Visualizing the erection schedule

In this example, you will visualize the erection schedule using the Project Status Visualization tool.
To visualize the erection schedule:
2. In the list box next to the Load button, select the visualization setting you created in Example:
Creating visualization settings (156).
3. Click Load.
4. To view the visualization in the model, click the step buttons.
The images below show how the objects are shown when you change the review date:
Review date Visualization

November 02

November 05
November 08
November 11

November 14
November 17
November 20


8 Checking the model
This section describes a variety of tools you can use to ensure the model does not contain errors.
See also Inquiring the model (161)

Measuring objects (163)
Detecting clashes (166)
Diagnosing and repairing the model (176)
Comparing parts or assemblies (177)
Finding distant objects (177)
Keyboard shortcuts for checking the model (178)
8.1 Inquiring the model

Use the commands on the Tools > Inquire menu to display information about model objects and
model size.
See also Inquiring object properties (161)

Using the Custom Inquiry tool (162)
Inquiring object properties

Use the Inquire object command to display the properties of a particular object, or a group of
objects, within the model.
To inquire object properties:
2. Select an object.
Tekla Structures displays the object properties in a separate window.

Object property report templates (161)
Object property report templates

When you view object properties using the Inquire object command, Tekla Structures uses the
following report templates, available in the folder ..\Tekla
Structures\18.0\environments\common\system:
Checking the model 161 Inquiring the model

Part type Template
Parts TS_Report_Inquire_Part.rpt
Assemblies TS_Report_Inquire_Assembly.rpt
Cast units TS_Report_Inquire_Cast_Unit.rpt
Welds TS_Report_Inquire_Welding.rpt
Reference models TS_Report_Inquire_Reference.rpt
Reinforcement TS_Report_Inquire_Reinforcement.rpt
You can modify these templates according to your needs. For more information on how to use
templates, see the Template Editor user documentation.
See also Inquiring object properties (161)
Using the Custom Inquiry tool

Use the Custom Inquiry tool to display information of the selected model object in a separate
window that you can drag and drop to any position on the screen. By default, the tool shows the
total area, weight, and length of the selected model object.
To display object properties using the Custom Inquiry tool:
1. Click Tools > Inquire > Custom Inquiry....
The Custom Inquiry dialog box appears.
2. Select a part.
Tekla Structures displays the part properties in the tool window.

Modifying the contents of Custom Inquiry tool (162)
Adding attributes to Custom Inquiry tool (163)
Modifying the contents of Custom Inquiry tool

You can define what information is displayed in the Custom Inquiry dialog box.
To modify the contents of the tool window:
1. Click Tools > Inquire > Custom Inquiry....
The Custom Inquiry dialog box appears.
2. Click Manage contents...
The Manage Contents dialog box appears. The Attributes list contains all of the available
attributes. The Contents of Custom Inquiry list contains the attributes that are displayed in the
tool window.
3. If needed, define which attributes are shown in the Attributes list.
• To modify the default attributes, edit the InquiryTool.config file in the ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\common\macros\modeling\InquiryT
oolAttributes folder.
• To create new calculated attributes, click Add…. You can use standard mathematical
symbols (+, -, *, and /) to form equations.
• To modify the calculated attributes, click Edit....
4. Define which attributes are shown in the tool window.
Checking the model 162 Inquiring the model

• To add more attributes to the tool window, click an item in the Attributes list and then click
the right arrow button.
• To remove attributes from the tool window, click an item in the Contents of Custom Inquiry
list and then click the left arrow button.
• To change the order of the attributes, use the Up and Down buttons.
• To change the formula of an attribute, click the down arrow and select a different formula
(SUM, AVERAGE, MAX, or MIN) from the list box.
See also Using the Custom Inquiry tool (162)

Adding attributes to Custom Inquiry tool (163)
Adding attributes to Custom Inquiry tool
Use the InquiryTool.config file to control which attributes are shown as default attributes in
the Manage Contents dialog box in the Custom Inquiry tool. The file is located in the folder defined
with the advanced option XS_MACRO_DIRECTORY , and under
..\modeling\InquiryToolAttributes in that folder path.
For example, if XS_MACRO_DIRECTORY is set to C:\ProgramData\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\common\macros, the file InquiryTool.config
is located in the folder C:\ProgramData\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\common\macros\modeling\InquiryToolAtt
ributes.
To add new attributes to the InquiryTool.config file:
1. Open the InquiryTool.config file in any standard text editor.
2. Copy the entire contents of [ATTR_CONTENT_??] to the end of the file.
3. Change the position number of the new attribute.
For example, change [ATTR_CONTENT_??] to [ATTR_CONTENT_66].
4. Modify the NAME, DISPLAY_NAME, DATATYPE, UNIT, and DECIMAL values of the new attribute.
Use the attribute names and definitions that are included in the
contentattributes_global.lst file.
5. Change the TOTAL_ATTR_CONTENT value to reflect the total number of attributes in the file.
For example, change TOTAL_ATTR_CONTENT=65 to TOTAL_ATTR_CONTENT=66.
6. Save the file.
See also Using the Custom Inquiry tool (162)

XS_MACRO_DIRECTORY
8.2 Measuring objects

Use the commands on the Tools > Measure menu to measure angles, arcs, the distance between two
points and between bolts.
All measurements are temporary. The measurements appear in the rendered view window until you
update or redraw the window.
Checking the model 163 Measuring objects

See also Measuring distances (164)
Measuring angles (164)
Measuring arcs (164)
Measuring bolt spacing (165)
Measuring distances
To measure horizontal, vertical and user-defined distances:
1. Press Ctrl+P to switch to the plane view.
2. Click Tools > Measure and select a command that measures distances.
3. Pick the starting point.
5. Pick a point to indicate on which side of the dimension line you want the number to appear.
See also Measuring objects (163)
Measuring angles
To measure angles:
1. Click or Tools > Measure > Angle.

2. Pick the center point.
Measuring arcs
To measure the radius and length of an arc:
1. Click or Tools > Measure > Arc.

3. Pick the middle point.
This can be any point along the arc between the starting and end points.

Starting point
Middle point
End point
Arc radius
Arc length
Measuring bolt spacing

You can measure distances between bolts in a bolt group. Tekla Structures also gives you the edge
distances between the bolts and a selected part.
To measure bolt spacing:
1. Click or Tools > Measure > Bolt Spacing.

2. Select a bolt group.
3. Select a part.

8.3 Detecting clashes
Use the Clash Check Manager tool to find parts, bolts, or reference model objects that collide.
Clashes of objects that only touch one another are not included in the clash check results.
The following reference model file types are supported in clash checking:
• IFC
• DWG
• DGN
If you want to use another Tekla Structures model as a reference

model, you must export it in IFC format to be able to use it in clash
checking.
If you are checking reference model objects for clashes, you need
to use the Select objects in components selection switch .
If you are checking the reference model for clashes, you need to use the Select components selection
switch .
See also Clash Check Manager (166)

Defining a clash check clearance area for bolts (175)
Selecting a reference model
Selecting a reference model object
Clash Check Manager

Use Clash Check Manager to detect and manage clashes in a model. Use the sections and storys
created in the Model Organizer to run a controlled clash check.
Checking the model 166 Detecting clashes

In the Full and Construction Management configurations, you can
use all Clash Check Manager functions.
In other Tekla Structures configurations, you can use the basic clash
detection functions, such as run, re-run, and save.
Construction Management module offers the same functionality as
the Construction Management configuration. You can acquire the
Construction Management module for any modeling configuration.
The module allows you to utilize all Model Organizer, Task Manager,
and Clash Check Manager functions.
See also Finding clashes using Clash Check Manager (167)

Grouping clashes (170)
Viewing the details of a clash (171)
Searching for clashes (173)
Printing a list of clashes (173)
Opening and saving clash check sessions (174)
Finding clashes using Clash Check Manager

To find clashes in a model:
1. Click Tools > Clash Check Manager.
2. In the model, select the objects you want to include in the clash check.
Alternatively, if you are using Model Organizer, select the sections and storys for which you want
to run the clash check. Right-click and select Select in the Model.

Do not run the clash check for the entire model. For best results, run
the clash check only for appropriate sections and storys.
3. Click to check the objects.

You can continue working during the clash check. When the clash check is complete, the status
bar message changes from Clash checking in progress to Ready.
4. To highlight a clash in the model, select a row in the list of clashes.
The related model objects are selected.
If you cannot find the clashes in the model, change the

representation of objects to Show Only Selected (Ctrl+5) for better
visibility.
5. To zoom the active view so that the selected objects are shown in the center of the view,
double-click a row.
6. If you want to include more objects in the clash check, select the desired model objects and re-
run the clash check.
New clashes are appended to the end of the list.
After removing or modifying objects, you can re-run clash check to

see if the clash still exists. To do this, select the desired rows in the
list of clashes and re-run clash check.
See also Symbols used in clash checking (168)

Managing the list of clashes (169)
Changing the status of clashes (169)
Changing the priority of clashes (170)
Symbols used in clash checking

Clash Check Manager uses the following flags to indicate the state of clashes:
Flag State Description

(none) Active The default state. The clash is not new, modified, resolved,
or missing.
New All clashes are marked as new when they are found for
the first time.

Modified If the object has been modified (for example, if the profile
has been changed), the state changes to modified when
you re-run the clash check.
Only certain object properties affect this flag. To see
which properties have an effect, right-click one of the
column headings. Both visible and hidden properties
affect the flag.
Resolved If the objects no longer clash, the state changes to
resolved when you re-run the clash check.
Missing If one or both of the clashing objects have been removed
from the model, the state changes to missing when you
re-run the clash check.
Managing the list of clashes

To manage the list of clashes in Clash Check Manager:
To Do this
Change the sort order of clash Click the heading of the desired column to alternate
results between the ascending and descending sort order.
Select multiple rows in the list of Hold down Ctrl or Shift while selecting rows.
clashes
Show or hide a column 1. Right-click one of the column headings to open a pop-
up menu.
2. Click any of the list items to show or hide them.
A check mark in front of the item indicates that it
is visible.
Changing the status of clashes

To change the status of clashes:
1. In Clash Check Manager, select the clashes whose status you want to change.
2. Right-click one of the selected rows to open a pop-up menu.
3. Select Status and then one of the status options:
• Assign
• Fix
• Approve
• Ignore
• Reopen

Limitations
You can change the status of clashes only in the Full and
Construction Management configurations.
Changing the priority of clashes

To change the priority of clashes:
1. In Clash Check Manager, select the clashes whose priority you want to change.
3. Select Priority and then one of the status options:
• High
• Medium
• Low
Limitations
You can change the priority of clashes only in the Full and
Grouping clashes
You can combine several clashes into a group so that the clashes are treated as a single unit.
To group clashes:
1. In Clash Check Manager, select the clashes you want to group.
2. Right-click and select Group > Group from the pop-up menu.
3. If you want to add clashes to an already existing group, select the clashes and the group, and
then repeat step 2.
You cannot create nested groups of clashes.

Limitations
You can group clashes only in the Full and Construction

Management configurations.
See also Ungrouping clashes (171)
Ungrouping clashes
To ungroup clashes:
1. In Clash Check Manager, select the clash group you want to ungroup.
2. Right-click and select Group > Ungroup from the pop-up menu.
See also Grouping clashes (170)
Viewing the details of a clash

Use the Clash Information dialog box to view more detailed information about a clash. For example,
you can view the profile, material and class of the objects that collide. This can be useful especially
when you view clash groups that contain more than two objects.
To view the details of a clash:
1. Select the clash or clash group whose details you want to view.
2. Right-click and select Clash Information from the pop-up menu.
If more than one clash or clash group is being selected at the same
time, the Clash Information option appears dimmed in the pop-up
menu.
See also Adding comments to a clash (171)

Viewing the history of a clash (172)
Adding comments to a clash

You can add comments to clashes and clash groups. For example, you might use comments as
reminders to yourself and other users.
To add a comment:
1. Select the clash or clash group you want to comment on.
3. Go to the Comments tab.
4. Click to open the Add comment dialog box.

5. Enter your comment in the Comment box.
6. If needed, modify the author name and the date if needed.
7. Click OK.

Limitations
You can add, modify and remove comments only in the Full and
See also Modifying a clash comment (172)

Removing a clash comment (172)
Modifying a clash comment

To modify a comment:
1. Select the clash or clash group whose comment you want to modify.
4. Select the comment you want to modify.
5. Click to open the Edit comment dialog box.

6. Modify the comment.
7. Click OK.

Removing a clash comment (172)
Removing a clash comment

To remove a comment from a clash:
1. Select the clash or clash group whose comment you want to remove.
4. Select the comment you want to remove.
5. Click .

Modifying a clash comment (172)
Viewing the history of a clash

You can view the history of a particular clash. For example, you can see when and by whom the
clash was detected.
To view the history of a clash:
1. Select a clash or a clash group.
3. Go to the History tab.
The history information of the clash is displayed.
See also Viewing the details of a clash (171)

Searching for clashes
Use the Search box to find clashes based on search terms. The more search terms you enter, the
more refined your search will be. For example, if you enter column 8112, only the clashes that
match both of these terms are displayed.
To search for clashes:
1. Open the clash check session you want to find clashes from.
2. In the Search box, enter the words to search for.
The search results are displayed as you type.
3. To narrow your search, enter more characters.
4. To display all the clashes again, click next to the Search box.
Printing a list of clashes

You can print lists of clashes. You can control the print settings the same way as in any standard
Windows application.
To print a list of clashes:
1. Open the clash check session you want to print.
2. Click Print...
3. If needed, modify the print settings.
4. Click Print.
See also Previewing a list of clashes before printing (173)

Setting the paper size, margins and page orientation (174)
Previewing a list of clashes before printing

Use the options in the Print preview dialog box to see what a list of clashes will look like when it is
printed.
To preview a list of clashes:
To Do this
Open the Print preview dialog box
In Clash Check Manager, click the arrow button next to
the icon and select Print preview... from the pop-up

menu.
Select how many pages to view at
a time Click one of the Page Layout buttons:
If the list of clashes is very long, it might be spread out on
several pages.
Zoom the page in or out
Click the arrow button next to the button and select
an option from the pop-up menu.
Print the current page Click .
Close the Print preview dialog box. Click .

See also Printing a list of clashes (173)
Setting the paper size, margins and page orientation (174)
Setting the paper size, margins and page orientation

Before printing a list of clashes, you can set the paper size, margins, and page orientation in the
Page Setup dialog box.
The options for paper size and paper source are printer-dependent.
To use different paper options, select another printer in the Print
dialog box and click Apply.
To set up the page for printing:
1. Click the arrow button next to the icon and select Page setup... from the pop-up menu.
2. In the Size box, select the paper size you want to use.
3. In the Source box, select the correct paper source.
4. Under Orientation, select one of the page orientation options.
• Portrait: vertical page orientation
• Landscape: horizontal page orientation
5. Under Margins, enter values for the Left, Right, Top, and Bottom margins.
6. Click OK to save the changes.
See also Printing a list of clashes (173)

Previewing a list of clashes before printing (173)
Opening and saving clash check sessions

To open or save sessions in Clash Check Manager, do any of the following:
To Do this
Open a session
1. Click .
2. In the Open dialog box, select a session.
3. Click OK.
Start a new session
Click .
Clash Check Manager clears the list of clashes without
running clash check.
Save the current session
Click .

To Do this
Save the current session with a
another name or in another location 1. Click the arrow button next to the icon. A
pop-up menu appears.
2. Click Save as.

3. In the Save As dialog box, browse to the folder where
you want to save the session.
4. In the File name box, enter a new name.
5. Click Save.
Save only selected clashes 1. In the list of clashes, select the clashes you want to
save.
2. Click the arrow button next to the icon. A

pop-up menu appears.
3. Click Save selected.
By default, clash check sessions are saved as XML files in the

..\TeklaStructuresModels\<model>\Clashes folder.
Tekla Structures creates the folder automatically when you open
Clash Check Manager for the first time.
Defining a clash check clearance area for bolts

To check if bolts collide with profiles and if there is enough space to fix the bolt, you can define a
clash check clearance area for bolts.
To define a clearance area for bolts:
1. Click Tools > Options > Options...
2. In the Options dialog box, go to the Clash check page.
3. Modify the bolt clearance values.
If the fields are empty, Tekla Structures uses the default value 1.00.

d is the larger value of the bolt head or nut diameters
Clash check clearance area
4. Ensure that you have selected the check box in front of each field.
If you clear the check boxes, the clearance will be zero.
If Tekla Structures cannot find the bolt head or nut diameter in the
bolt catalog, it uses the shank diameter instead.
See also Detecting clashes (166)
Reverting to the old clash checking functionality

If you are working on a large model, running the clash check may sometimes be slow. In that case
you can use the old clash checking functionality, which does not recognize clashes with reference
models.
For more information on the old clash checking functionality, see XS_USE_NEW_CLASH_CHECK
and XS_CLASH_CHECK_BETWEEN_REFERENCES.
See also Detecting clashes (166)
8.4 Diagnosing and repairing the model

Use the Diagnose & Repair Model commands to check and to repair errors and inconsistencies in the
structure of model objects and the library database (xslib). By diagnosing and repairing the model
you can ensure, for example, that empty assemblies are removed and that unused points and
attributes are deleted. Repairing the model also corrects invalid object relations and hierarchies. We
recommend you to diagnose and to repair your model regularly to maintain the consistency and
integrity of your model databases.
To diagnose or repair a model or a library database:
1. Click Tools > Diagnose & Repair Model.
2. Select the appropriate Diagnose or Repair command.
The errors and inconsistencies found in the model are listed in a report. Some of them are
automatically corrected, some of them are warnings that you need to correct manually, for example,
change the unknown profiles.
If the model does not contain any errors or inconsistencies, a message is displayed in the status bar.
See also Checking the model (161)

Diagnose and repair model results (177)
Checking the model 176 Diagnosing and repairing the model

Diagnose and repair model results
The following table lists the most common errors and inconsistencies found when diagnosing and
repairing the model.
Diagnosis result Description Action needed

Empty assembly The assembly does not Click Tools > Diagnose & Repair Model >
contain any objects. Repair Model to delete the assembly.
Missing assembly A part is not included in Click Tools > Diagnose & Repair Model >
any assembly. Repair Model to create an assembly and
to move the part to it.
Illegal profile An unknown profile has Change the profile to an allowed profile.
been found.
See also Diagnosing and repairing the model (176)
8.5 Comparing parts or assemblies

To compare two parts or assemblies:
1. Select the objects you want to compare.
• To compare parts, select two parts in the model.
• To compare assemblies, select a part in each assembly.
2. Click Tools > Compare, and then select either Parts or Assemblies.
Tekla Structures displays the results on the status bar.
8.6 Finding distant objects

When the work area is huge, the model may contain some distant objects that are not easy to find.
Use the Find Distant Objects command to find these objects.
To find distant objects:
1. Click Tools > Diagnose & Repair Model > Find Distant Objects.
Tekla Structures displays a list of object IDs. At the end of the list, Tekla Structures displays
additional six objects that have the biggest and smallest x, y, or z coordinates.
Checking the model 177 Comparing parts or assemblies

2. Select an object in the list.
3. Right-click and select a command from the pop-up menu.
You can, for example, inquire or delete the object.
See also XS_DISTANT_OBJECT_FINDER_TOLERANCE

XS_RENDERED_FOG_START_VALUE
Checking the model (161)
8.7 Keyboard shortcuts for checking the model

Inquire object Shift+I
Free measure F
Clash check Shift+C
Create report Ctrl+B
Open the Views list Ctrl+I
Open Drawing list Ctrl+L
Print drawings Shift+P
Open component catalog Ctrl+F
Create AutoConnection Ctrl+J
Advanced options Ctrl+E
Phase manager Ctrl+H

Checking the model 178 Keyboard shortcuts for checking the model
9 Numbering the model
This section explains how to change numbering settings and apply numbering in Tekla Structures.
Contents • What is numbering and how to plan it (179)

• What affects numbering (180)
• Numbering objects (187)
• Defining numbering series (184)
• Viewing the numbering history (197)
9.1 What is numbering and how to plan it

Before you can make drawings or accurate reports, you need to number all parts in the model.
General arrangement drawings do not need to be numbered.
Numbering is the key to the production output, for example, drawings, reports, and NC files.
Numbers are also needed when you export models. Part numbers are vital in the fabrication,
shipping, and erection stages of construction. Tekla Structures assigns a mark to each part and
assembly/cast unit in a model. The mark includes part or assembly prefix and position number, and
other elements, such as profile or material grade. It is useful to identify the parts with numbers to
see which parts are similar and which different. Identical parts have the same number, which makes
the planning of the production easier.
We recommend that you plan the numbering in an early phase of the project. If other users are
using the same model, it is even more important to make a numbering plan that everybody in the
project follows. You should have the numbering ready before you create the first drawings and
reports.
When planning the numbering, it can be useful to number the model in phases, for example first
floor of the building first, then the second, and so on.
Give start numbers in wide ranges so that you do not run out of numbers. For example, start the first
floor with the start number 1000 and the second with start number 2000.
If the numbering of a part or assembly is not up to date, a question mark (?) is displayed in the part
label and in the Inquire Object dialog box, for example.
See also Numbering objects (187)

What affects numbering (180)
Numbering the model 179 What is numbering and how to plan it

Inquiring object properties (161)
9.2 What affects numbering

Tekla Structures treats objects as different, and therefore numbers them differently, if the following
properties differ:
• Beam orientation
• Column orientation
• Reinforcement
• Cast-in embeds
• Surface treatment (affects only assemblies)
• Pop marks
• Contour marking information
• Shortening
• User-defined attributes
To define which properties affect numbering in your model, modify the settings in the Numbering
Setup dialog box. For example, if two otherwise identical concrete parts have different names and
you select the Part name check box, Tekla Structures gives the parts different numbers.
By default, a part retains its number, as long as only one part has that particular number, regardless
of the settings in the Numbering Setup dialog box.
Always carry out full numbering on the model after you have
changed the numbering settings.
If the Renumber all option is selected in the Numbering Setup dialog
box, Tekla Structures will always carry out full renumbering.

Numbering settings (349)
Identical parts (180)
Identical reinforcements (181)
User-defined attributes in numbering (181)
Identical parts
Tekla Structures gives parts the same number if the parts are identical in the fabrication or
casting. If a part is deformed after fabrication or casting (for example if the part is cambered,
shortened, or warped), the final geometry on site and in the model may be different.
Tekla Structures treats parts as identical and gives them the same number if the following basic part
properties are the same:
• Part geometry
• Casting direction
• Numbering series
• Profile
• Material
• Finish
Numbering the model 180 What affects numbering

You can set the degree of tolerance for part geometry in the Numbering Setup dialog box. If the
geometry of parts differs within this degree of tolerance, Tekla Structures treats the parts as
identical for numbering purposes.
Class and phase do not affect numbering. Tekla Structures gives the same number to identical parts
that belong to different classes or phases.
See also Part properties (323)

Phases (209)
Casting direction (95)
What affects numbering (180)
Identical reinforcements
Tekla Structures treats reinforcing bars as identical, and gives them the same number, if the
following properties are the same:
• Bar geometry
• Numbering series
• Size
• Grade
• Bending radius
Tekla Structures uses the values of the rebar_config.inp file located in the ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\<environment>\system\ folder to round bar
dimensions up or down. For example, if you set the rounding accuracy for bar dimensions to 5 and
the rounding direction to up, Tekla Structures rounds all bar dimensions up to the nearest 5 mm. In
that case, two bars with dimensions of 131 mm and 133 mm would both round up to 135 mm. This
gives them identical bar geometry.
Class does not affect numbering. Tekla Structures gives the same number to identical reinforcing
bars that belong to different classes.
See also Reinforcement

Reinforcement settings for drawings
User-defined attributes in numbering

Tekla Structures treats parts and reinforcing bars as different, and therefore numbers them
differently, if the values of a user-defined attribute differ.
Parts If a user-defined attribute has the variable special_flag set to yes, Tekla Structures takes this
user-defined attribute into account when numbering parts.
Reinforcements If a user-defined attribute has the variable consider_in_numbering set to yes, Tekla Structures
takes this user-defined attribute into account when numbering reinforcements.
See also What affects numbering (180)

9.3 Numbering tips

• To save time, include the numbering series in the default part properties for each type of part
before you start modeling.
Numbering the model 181 Numbering tips

• It is a good idea to have some kind of a routine in numbering. For example, number the model
when you start your working day or when you finish for the day.
• Do not change the numbering system in the middle of the project.
• If the default numbering settings do not suit your needs, select Drawings & Reports > Numbering
> Numbering Settings... to open the Numbering Setup dialog box, and adjust the settings.
• If you have overlapping position numbers, you will get an error message about it.
You can have a closer look at the overlapping position numbers in the numbering history log. To
display the log, select Tools > Display Log Files > Numbering History.
• If you find errors in numbering, repair them by using Tools > Diagnose & Repair Model > Diagnose
& Repair Numbering: All or Diagnose & Repair Numbering: Series of Selected Objects. Check and
repair numbering in the model every now and then, especially before producing drawings or
reports.
• Numbering is not just another way of classifying parts. To classify, use Model Organizer, user-
defined attributes, or colors.
9.4 Checking the numbering

After the numbering has been done, Tekla Structures checks all parts in the model.
• the existing parts retain their numbers (if unmodified)
• the new parts added during modification are compared with existing parts
• the new parts that are the same as existing parts receive the same existing number
• the new parts that do not have a number receive a new number
You can check the position numbers in many places:
• In the model, double-click the background to open the Display dialog box, then go to the
Advanced tab and add Part position to the Part label. The part labels contain the position
numbers.
• You can check the part number in the Drawing List.
• The drawing label shows the position number and the amount of identical parts.
Numbering the model 182 Checking the numbering

• You can use the Inquire commands on the Tools menu.
• You can create reports that list your assembly and part positions.
Numbering the model 183 Checking the numbering

9.5 Defining numbering series
You can use a numbering series to divide steel parts, cast units, and assemblies into groups. For
example, you can allocate a separate numbering series to different phases or part types.
The name of a numbering series consists of a prefix and a start number. You do not have to define a
part prefix (for example, you may want to omit the part prefix for minor parts).
When you run numbering, Tekla Structures compares parts that belong to the same series with each
other. All identical parts in the same numbering series are given the same part number.
Numbering the model 184 Defining numbering series

Concrete parts are numbered according to the cast unit numbering
settings. For example, if the cast unit prefix is C and the start
number is 1, concrete parts will get the part prefix Concrete_C-1.
This applies also to concrete components whose part position prefix
is Concrete and start number is 1.
Example For example, if you define a numbering series with the prefix P and start number 1001, Tekla
Structures numbers that series P1001, P1002, P1003, ...
See also Planning your numbering series (185)

Assigning a numbering series to a part (185)
Assigning a numbering series to an assembly (186)
Family numbers (186)
Overlapping numbering series (187)
Planning your numbering series

Before you start modeling, it is good idea to plan the numbering prefixes and start numbers you will
use for the entire project. Careful planning prevents numbering conflicts.
To save time, include the numbering series in the default part properties for each type of part before
you start modeling.
You may want to omit the part prefix for minor parts, such as plates. If you do this, ensure that you
assign a Start number for that numbering series so that it will not overlap other parts.
Example One way to plan the numbering series is to create a table:
Part Part Assembly Assembly

Part type Prefix Start number Prefix Start number
Beam PB 1 AB 1
Vertical brace PVB 1 AVB 1
Horizontal brace PHB 1 AHB 1
Rafter PR 1 AR 1
Purlin PP 1 AP 1
Column PC 1 AC 1
Plate 1001 A 1
See also Defining numbering series (184)

Overlapping numbering series (187)
Assigning a numbering series to a part

To assign a numbering series to a part:
2. If you are modifying the properties of a concrete part, go to the Cast unit tab.

3. Under Numbering series, define a part prefix and a start number.
4. Click Modify.
See also Assigning a numbering series to an assembly (186)

Defining numbering series (184)
Assigning a numbering series to an assembly

To assign a numbering series to an assembly:

2. Double-click an assembly to open the assembly properties dialog box.
3. On the Assembly tab, define an assembly prefix and a start number.
4. Click Modify.
See also Assigning a numbering series to a part (185)

Defining numbering series (184)
Family numbers
With family numbering you can group objects within the same numbering series into different
“families”. This can be used, for example, to find similar cast units that can be cast in the same bed.
When you use family numbering, the cast unit position numbers consist of a family number and a
qualifier.
For example:
Family number
Qualifier
Assemblies and cast units that match the comparison criteria you define in the Numbering Setup
dialog box get the same family number. However, if they have the same family number but different
part geometry or materials, they get unique qualifier numbers.

Assigning family numbers (186)
Changing the family number of an object (187)
Example: Using family numbers (198)
Assigning family numbers

To assign family numbers to numbering series:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Numbering Settings... to open the Numbering Setup
dialog box.
2. Go to the Family numbering tab.

3. Define which numbering series to assign family numbers to.
a Click Add series to open the Add series dialog box.
Tekla Structures displays all the assembly and cast unit numbering series in the model.
b Select a numbering series from the list, and then click Add.
The numbering series appears in the family numbering list.
4. Under Compare, select the properties that need to be identical for the members of the same
family.
Define comparison criteria for each numbering series separately.
Select at least one check box, but not all of them. If you select all the check boxes, the family
number will be the same as the normal assembly position, and the qualifier number will be 1 for
all. If you do not select any check boxes, only one family number per series is assigned.
5. Click Apply.
Tekla Structures stores the settings in the numbering database file (<model_name>.db2) in
the current model folder the next time you save the model.
6. If you are assigning family numbers to parts that have already been numbered, clear the
existing numbers.
7. Update numbering in the model.
Tekla Structures assigns a family number to all objects in the numbering series.
See also Family numbers (186)

Clearing numbers (195)
Changing the family number of an object

To change the family number and/or family qualifier of an object:
1. Select the objects whose family numbers you want to change.
2. Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Change Number > Family Number...
3. In the Assign Family Number dialog box, type the desired values in the Family number and Family
qualifier fields.
4. Click Assign.
Overlapping numbering series

When you plan numbering, ensure that you reserve enough numbers for each series. If a series
overlaps another, Tekla Structures might allocate the same number to different parts.
Tekla Structures warns you about series overlaps. View the numbering history log to check which
numbers overlap.

Viewing the numbering history (197)
Overlapping part/assembly series
9.6 Numbering objects

To number objects in a model:
1. If needed, modify the numbering settings.
a Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Numbering Settings... to open the Numbering
Setup dialog box.
Numbering the model 187 Numbering objects

b Modify the settings.
c Click Apply or OK.
2. Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering and select one of the following commands:
See also Numbering settings (349)

Numbering assemblies and cast units (188)
Numbering reinforcements (189)
Saving preliminary numbers (189)
Control numbers (189)
Changing numbers (195)
Clearing numbers (195)
Creating a standard-part model (196)
Example: Numbering identical beams (198)
Numbering assemblies and cast units

Part numbering does not affect cast unit and assembly numbering. However, Tekla Structures
numbers assemblies and cast units in the same way as it does parts. The default start number is 1.
The prefix varies based on the part type.
Surface treatments affect the numbering of assemblies, if you select the Surface treatment check
box in the Numbering Setup dialog box.
Assembly and cast unit numbering may affect part numbering, if

the advanced option XS_USE_ASSEMBLY_NUMBER_FOR is set.

Assembly position numbers (188)
Assembly position numbers

Use the options in the Numbering Setup dialog box to sort the order in which assemblies are given
their position numbers. Sorting by user-defined attributes or by location does not affect the part
position.
The sort order can be based on the following criteria:
• The x, y or z coordinates of the main part of the assembly
The sorting is based on the center of gravity of the reference axis.
• The user-defined attribute of an assembly or the main part
If your sorting is based on user-defined attributes, Tekla Structures displays a list box that
includes all the available user-defined attributes.

If you add new parts, objects that have already been numbered are
not renumbered to suit the sorting order by, for example, the x
coordinate. In this case you should renumber the parts.
See also Numbering assemblies and cast units (188)
Numbering reinforcements
Tekla Structures numbers reinforcements in the same way as it does parts.
Reinforcements may affect the numbering of parts and cast units. To force Tekla Structures to give
otherwise identical concrete parts and cast units different numbers if they have different
reinforcements, select the Reinforcing bars check box in the Numbering Setup dialog box.
Part numbering and cast unit numbering do not affect the numbering of reinforcements.
See also Identical reinforcements (181)

Reinforcement
Saving preliminary numbers

A preliminary mark is a user-defined attribute that defines the part position number. You can save
the current part position numbers as preliminary marks for selected parts. The previous preliminary
numbers are overriden.
To save part position numbers for preliminary marks:
2. Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Save Preliminary Numbers.
Control numbers
Control numbers are additional numbers that can be used to identify parts in a model. Use control
numbers if you need to give additional, unique numbers to assemblies or cast units, regardless of
their position numbers.
Control numbers can be useful, for example, when delivering a large number of similar wall
elements to the site. To successfully pack and unpack the load, you need to plan the order of the
wall elements already when the order is shipped. Although all of the wall elements may have the
same cast unit position number, you can assign a unique control number to each individual wall
element.
Contents Assigning control numbers to parts (189)

Displaying control numbers in the model (191)
Removing control numbers (192)
Locking and unlocking control numbers (192)
Example: Using control numbers to indicate the erection order (193)
Control number settings (350)
Assigning control numbers to parts

To assign control numbers to parts:

1. Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Assign Control Numbers... to open the Create control
numbers dialog box.
2. Indicate which parts to assign control numbers to.
• To number the entire model, do not select any parts.
• To only number specific parts, select the parts you want to number.
3. If you want to assign control numbers only to parts in a specific numbering series:
a In the Numbering list, select By numbering serie.
b Enter the prefix and start number in the corresponding boxes.
4. Define the control numbers to be used.
a In the Start number of control numbers box, enter the first control number to be used.
b In the Step value box, define the control number interval.
For example, to assign the control numbers 2, 5, 8, 11, and so on, enter 2 in the Start
number of control numbers box and 3 in the Step value box.
5. Use the Renumber list to specify how to treat parts that already have control numbers.
• Select No to keep the existing control numbers.
• Select Yes to replace the existing control numbers with new ones.
6. Use the First direction, Second direction, and Third direction lists to define the order of control
numbers.
8. Click Create to number the parts.
See also Control number order (190)

Control number order

When you assign control numbers, you must define in what order to assign them. The order is based
on the location of each part on the global coordinate system. The options are:
• None
• X
• Y
• Z
• -X
• -Y
• -Z
With positive directions (X, Y, and Z), the parts with the lowest coordinate value are numbered first.
With negative directions (-X, -Y, and -Z), the parts with the highest coordinate value are numbered
first.
For example, if the first direction is X, the second direction is Y, and the third direction is Z,
numbering starts from the parts that have the lowest x coordinate value. If multiple parts have the
same x coordinate, also their y coordinates are compared. If multiple parts have the same x and y
coordinates, also their z coordinates are compared.
Example In the following example, the first direction is X and the second direction is Y. The numbers 1–8
indicate the control numbers.

See also Assigning control numbers to parts (189)
Displaying control numbers in the model

If the control numbers are not displayed in the model, you can set them visible using the display
settings.
To display control numbers in the model:
2. Click Display… and go to the Advanced tab.
3. Select the Part label check box.
4. In the Properties list, select User-defined attributes, and then click Add.
The Part label dialog box is displayed.
5. Enter ACN and click OK.
The property is moved to the Part label list.
6. Click Modify.
The control numbers are displayed in the model, right after the part position numbers.
Example In the following example, the numbers 1–8 indicate the control numbers.

See also Control numbers (189)
Removing control numbers

If needed, you can remove existing control numbers from all or some of the parts. Do not remove
control numbers unless you are absolutely sure that they are no longer needed.
Removing of control numbers is different than reassigning of

control numbers. If you only want to reassign new control numbers
to parts that already have control numbers, use the Renumber
option in the Create control numbers dialog box.
To remove existing control numbers:

1. Double-click the part to open the part properties dialog box.
The current control number of the part is displayed on the Parameters tab, next to the Control
Number box. For example:
3. Remove the existing control number from the box.

4. Click Modify to apply the change.
Locking and unlocking control numbers

To prevent other users from changing the control numbers of some or all of the parts in the model,
use the Lock/Unlock Control Numbers command. Later on, if the control numbers need to be changed,
you can use the same command for unlocking the numbers.
To lock or unlock control numbers:

1. Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Lock/Unlock Control Numbers to open the Lock/Unlock
control numbers dialog box.
2. Define which parts’ control numbers to lock or unlock.
• To lock or unlock the control numbers of all parts, do not select any parts in the model.
• To lock or unlock the control numbers of specific parts only, select the parts in the model.
3. In the Status list, select Lock or Unlock.
5. Click Create to lock or unlock the numbers.
Example: Using control numbers to indicate the erection order

This example shows how to assign control numbers to six concrete walls. As four of these walls have
the same cast unit position, you cannot make a clear distinction between the cast units based on
their position number. That is why each wall will get a unique identifier that indicates their erection
order at the site. The erection order also affects the order of shipping. For example, the wall number
1 needs to be shipped on top of the delivery, because it will be erected first on the site; the wall
number 2 should be the second on the bundle, because it will be erected next; and so on.
The following image represents the desired end result.
Erected as 1st
Erected as 2nd

Erected as 3rd
Erected as 4th
Erected as 5th
Erected as 6th
To assign control numbers to the concrete walls:

1. Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Assign Control Numbers... to open the Create control
numbers dialog box.
2. Select the six concrete walls.
3. Define that you want to assign control numbers only to parts in the numbering series S with the
start number 1.
a In the Numbering list, select By numbering serie.
b In the Prefix box, enter S.
c In the Start number box, enter 1.
4. Define that you want to use the numbers 1–6 as the control numbers for these concrete walls.
a In the Start number of control numbers box, enter 1.
b In the Step value box, enter 1.
5. Define that you want to first number the walls with identical z coordinates in the order they
appear in the positive x axis.
a In the First direction list, select Z.
b In the Second direction list, select X.
7. Click Create to number the concrete walls.
Each concrete wall gets a unique control number, as shown in the following image.
If you cannot see the control numbers in the model, modify the
display settings. For more information on the required settings, see
Displaying control numbers in the model (191).

Changing numbers
Use the Change Number command to change part, assembly, multi-position, or family numbers after
you run numbering. All objects with the same number will be given the number you specified. This
command does not change the numbering series.
To change the position numbers:
2. Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Change Number and select one of the commands.
3. Set the desired properties. The options you have vary depending on your selection in step 2.
If the number you specified is already in use, Tekla Structures displays a warning and does not
change the number.Tekla Structures also displays a warning if the position number is higher
than the highest current number. This is for information only and the number is still changed.
4. Click Assign.
Clearing numbers
Use the Clear Numbers command to permanently delete the assigned position numbers of objects.
Next time you run numbering, Tekla Structures assigns new numbers to the objects, irrespective of
what their previous numbers were.

To clear the position numbers:
1. Select the objects whose numbers you want to clear.
2. Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Clear Numbers and select one of the commands.
Creating a standard-part model

A standard-part model contains only standard parts with specific part prefixes. You can have Tekla
Structures use these prefixes when numbering parts in another model.
This functionality only applies to steel parts.
To create a standard-part model:

1. Create a new model and give it a descriptive name.
For example, StandardParts.
2. Create the objects you want to have as standard parts.
3. Explode all components.
4. Delete all unnecessary items.
5. Give the objects prefixes that are not used elsewhere (for example, STD1, STD2, and so on).
Ensure that the standard-part model does not contain duplicate prefixes.
6. Save the standard-part model.
7. Open another model.
8. Click Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > Numbering.
9. Check that the advanced option XS_STD_PART_MODEL is set, and that it points to the correct
standard-part model.
For example:
XS_STD_PART_MODEL=C:\TeklaStructuresModels\StandardParts
10. Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Numbering Settings... to display the Numbering Setup
dialog box.
11. If you have selected the Part name check box, ensure that the project model has the same part
names as the standard-part model.
12. Click Check for standard parts and Apply.
13. Number the model.
As Tekla Structures carries out the numbering, it compares all of the parts in the model to the
standard-part model. The numbering applies any part position numbers (only the part prefix)
found in the standard-part model to all identical parts found in the project model.

9.7 Viewing the numbering history
To view the numbering history:
• Click Tools > Display Log File > Numbering History....
Tekla Structures displays the numbering log file.
For information on how to interpret the log file, see Numbering

history log.
9.8 Repairing numbering errors

We recommend that you check and repair numbering in the model every now and then, especially
before producing drawings or reports.
To check and repair numbering in a model:
dialog box.
2. Ensure that one of the following options is being used:
• Compare to old
• Keep number if possible
3. Click OK to save the changes.
4. Unless you want to repair the entire model, select the objects whose numbering you want to
repair.
5. Click Tools > Diagnose & Repair Model and select one of the following commands:
• Diagnose & Repair Numbering: All
• Diagnose & Repair Numbering: Series of Selected Objects
Tekla Structures assigns the position number of the oldest part or

assembly to all identical parts, even if a newer part or assembly has
a smaller position number.
To force a certain position number on a part or assembly, use the

Change Number command after repairing numbering in the model.

Changing numbers (195)
Numbering the model 197 Viewing the numbering history

9.9 Numbering examples
This section gives some examples of numbering the model.
Contents Example: Numbering identical beams (198)

Example: Using family numbers (198)
Example: Numbering selected part types (199)
Example: Numbering parts in selected phases (200)
Example: Numbering settings during a project (201)
Example: Numbering identical beams

This example explains how different numbering settings result in different part numbers when you
modify a part.
To number identical beams:
1. Create three identical beams with the numbering series prefix P and start number 1.
2. Number the model. All the beams have the part position number P1.
3. Modify one of the beams.
4. Number the model. You should now have two beams P1 and one P2.
5. Change beam P2 to be identical to the others.
6. Number the model.
Depending on the numbering settings in the Numbering Setup dialog box, Tekla Structures
assigns one of the following part position numbers to the modified part:
• Compare to old: P1
• Keep number if possible: P2
• Take new number: P3
Example: Using family numbers

In this example, the following four beams have the numbering series prefix B and the start number
1. The parts have the same main profile, and each pair has the same length, but the holes are
different.
Numbering the model 198 Numbering examples

Assembly position: B/1
We use the following family numbering settings:

• Numbering series: B/1
• Compare: Main part profile and Overall length
With the given family numbering criteria, Tekla Structures divides the beams into two families. All
beams have the same profile, but each pair has a different length. Within both families the beams
get different qualifiers because they have different holes.
• The first beam gets the assembly position number B/1-1
• The second beam gets the assembly position number B/1-2
• The third beam gets the assembly position number B/2-1
• The fourth beam gets the assembly position number B/2-2
Example: Numbering selected part types

This example shows how different numbering settings can be used for different part types. We will
use one set of numbering settings for steel anchor rods, and another one for steel columns.
To number anchor rods and columns:
1. Create steel columns.
2. Create anchor rods with the numbering series prefix AR and start number 1.
Ensure that this numbering series is different to any other parts or assemblies in the model.
dialog box.
4. Ensure that the Column orientation check box is not selected, and then click Apply.

5. Select one of the anchor rods in the model.
6. Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Number Series of Selected Objects.
All parts with the AR prefix and start number at 1 are numbered.
7. After the anchor rod numbering is complete, click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Number
Series of Selected Objects.
8. Select the Column orientation check box, and then click Apply.
9. Select one of the steel columns in the model.
All columns belonging to the same numbering series as the selected column are numbered.
Example: Numbering parts in selected phases

This example shows how to number a model that consists of multiple phases, each phase having a
different detailing and submittal schedule. This enables you to release drawings for a particular
phase at any time.
Before you start, divide the model into phases.
To number parts in selected phases:
1. Apply a specific numbering series prefix and start number for parts in each phase.
For example:
• The beams in phase 1 get the numbering series prefix B and start number 1000.
• The beams in phase 2 get the numbering series prefix B and start number 2000.

Phase 1: green
Phase 2: magenta
2. Ensure that the numbering series are not overlapping.

For example, to avoid numbering overlaps with the beams in phase 2, phase 1 should not
contain more than 1000 position numbers.
3. Select the parts you want to number.
Use selection filters to easily select parts belonging to a certain

phase or parts with a specific start number series. You can also use
selection filters to ignore specific phases that are already
completed or phases that are not ready for numbering.
dialog box.
5. Modify the numbering settings, and then click Apply.
6. Select one of the parts you want to number.
All parts belonging to the same numbering series as the selected part are numbered.
See also Example: Numbering settings during a project (201)
Example: Numbering settings during a project

You can use different numbering settings at different times in a project. For example:
• Before releasing a phase of the project for fabrication, you might use the Re-use old numbers
option for numbering the entire model.
• If a phase has already been released for fabrication in a project, you might use the Take new
number option for new and modified parts.
• If you are numbering other phases of the project at earlier stages of detailing, you might use the
Compare to old option and try to combine as many position numbers as possible.
See also Example: Numbering parts in selected phases (200)

General numbering settings (349)

10 Advanced modeling
This section explains some advanced modeling techniques available in Tekla Structures.
Contents • Organizing the model (203)

• Phases (209)
• Sequences (210)
• Lotting (212)
• Parametric modeling (355)
• Sketched cross sections (281)
10.1 Organizing the model

Model Organizer is a tool for efficient construction management and planning.
With Model Organizer you can classify your model into several areas, and the objects in the model
into appropriate object type categories. The areas and object types can, for example, be the same as
your building schedules, lots, and erection sequences.
You can classify the model as follows:
• Logical areas
You can create projects, sites and buildings under logical areas. There can be several sites in a
project and several buildings in a site. Buildings can be further divided into sections and storys.
A section is a part of a building, for example, the east wing and the west wing of a building
could be such sections. Astory is a floor in a building, for example, the first floor could be story
1.
• Object types
You can create categories for object types in your model. Such object type categories could be,
for example, beams, columns, and footings. Under each category, you can create more detailed
categories according to your needs. Both nativeTekla Structures objects and reference model
objects can be categorized.
An object in the model can belong to one section and one story, for example, a certain footing can
be on a certain floor only. By contrast, the same object can be in more than one object type
category. You can, for example, have the same footing in several footing categories. The categories
could be based on the footing type, location in the model, and the supplier.
Advanced modeling 203 Organizing the model

You can use all Model Organizer functions in the Full and
In other Tekla Structures configurations, you can view the created
logical areas and object type categories, and for example show and
hide them in your model.
See also Creating logical areas (205)

Creating object type categories (205)
Modifying logical areas and object type categories (205)
Modifying the object pane (206)
Classifying objects in object type categories (207)

Importing an object type category (207)
Exporting an object type category (208)
Viewing logical areas and object type categories (208)
Deleting logical areas and object type categories (209)
Creating logical areas

Logical areas may already have been defined for the model. You can create new logical areas for
your own needs.
To create logical areas using Model Organizer:
1. Click Tools > Model Organizer....
2. Create a path structure.
a Right-click Logical Areas.
b Click New Building.
c Click New Section.
d Click New Story.
You may create as many sections and storys as you need. Note that sections and storys
are both created under buildings.
3. Select a section or story in Model Organizer.

4. In the model, select the area for the section or the story.
Each model object can belong to only one section and one story.
5. In Model Organizer, right-click the selected section or story, and select Add Selected to Category.
In large projects, you can create sites for your project by right-
clicking Logical Areas and selecting Show Site(s). You can hide the
sites by selecting Hide Site(s).
See also Organizing the model (203)
Creating object type categories

Object types may already have been defined for the model. You can create new object type
categories for your own needs.
To create object type categories using Model Organizer:
2. Create object type categories.
a Right-click Object Types.
b Click New Object Type or New Object Type for Assemblies.
You can also create subtypes for object types.
3. In the model, select the objects you want to add to an object type category.
4. In Model Organizer, right-click the object type category and select Add Selected to Category .
Modifying logical areas and object type categories

To modify logical areas or object type categories, do any of the following:

To Do this
Rename logical areas and object Right-click the name in Model Organizer and select Rename.
type categories
Redefine a logical area 1. Select the new area in the model.
2. Right-click the area name in Model Organizer and select
Add Selected to Category.
Change the type of object type 1. Select the object type category in Model Organizer.
categories 2. Right-click and select Set category for assemblies or Set
category for all objects, depending on the current category
type.
Copy categories 1. Select the object type category in Model Organizer.
2. Right-click and select Copy.
3. Go to another location, right-click and select Paste.
Move categories 1. Select the object type category in Model Organizer.
2. Drag the category to another location.
Add objects 1. Select the objects in the model.
2. Right-click the category name in Model Organizer and
select Add Selected to Category.
Move objects 1. Select the object type category in Model Organizer.
2. Hold down the Ctrl key and select the objects you want to
move.
3. Drag the objects to another category.
Remove objects 1. Select the object type category in Model Organizer.
2. Hold down the Ctrl key and select the objects you want to
remove.
3. Right-click and select Remove from Category.
Modifying the object pane

You can define for each object type category which properties are shown in the object pane. You
can save the properties as a file and use them for another object type category in the the same
model or in another model. The properties you can add are listed in the
ModelOrganizerProperties.xml file located in the model folder.
To modify the object pane:
2. Select an object type category.
3. Right-click and select Customize object properties.
4. Select the properties for the object pane. You can map more than one report property or user-
defined attribute to a property.

Select or unselect more than one property using the Ctrl or Shift key, right-click and select
Include selected or Exclude selected.
5. Define the correct type for the properties.
The list of allowed property types is in both the ModelOganizerPropertiesAll.xml file
and the ModelOrganizerProperties.xml file in the model folder.
6. If needed, click to load a file containing properties.
7. If needed, click to add a new row and enter the property information.
8. If needed, add reference model properties.
a Copy the properties you want to add from the Inquire object dialog box.
Remember to copy all the information of a property.
b Right-click in the Properties dialog box in Model Organizer.
c Select Paste external properties.
The property is shown as an external property.
9. Click OK.
If the object pane is not visible, click . To open the Properties

dialog box, click .
Classifying objects in object type categories

You can classify the objects in an object type category based on the properties of the category. The
properties of a category are defined in the Properties dialog box and shown in the object pane.
To classify objects:
1. Click Tools > Model Organizer...
3. Right-click and select Classify objects based on property.
4. Select a property from the list.
Model Organizer creates subcategories for the selected property under the object type category.

Modifying the object pane (206)
Importing an object type category

You can import a saved object type category to an object type category in the same or in another
model.
To import an object type category:
2. Right-click and select Export/Import.

3. Select Import....
4. Select the file to import.
5. Click Open.
The properties defined for the object type category are not imported.
Exporting an object type category

You can export any object type category and save it for later use in the same model or in another
model.
To import an object type category:
1. Select an object type category:
2. Right-click and select Export/Import.
3. Select Export....
4. Define a name for the export file.
By default, the file is saved in the .xml format.
5. Click Save.
The properties defined for the object type category are not exported.
Viewing logical areas and object type categories

To view logical areas and object type categories in the model, do any of the following:
To Do this
View a logical area or objects Select the logical area or the object type category.
belonging to an object type The logical area or objects belonging to the selected object
category type category are highlighted in the model.
View more than one logical area Hold down the Ctrl key and select the logical areas and
or object type category at a time object type categories you want to view.
View only the objects belonging Right-click a logical area or an object type category and
the selected category select Show Only Selected.
To show all objects again, right-click the category and select
Redraw View.
Hide the objects belonging to the Right-click a logical area or an object type category and
selected category select Hide.
To show all objects again, right-click the category and select
Redraw View.
View the classification Right-click the object in the model and select Model
information of an object Classification > Show Related Classification
or
in Model Organizer select an object and click .

To Do this
Filter objects and assemblies in Create a selection filter. Select the Logical area category in
logical areas the Object Group - Selection Filter dialog box.
Select the the area you want to use as the filtering property:
Site, Building, Section, or Story.
The same logical area filter properties are available for view
filters in the Object group - View filters dialog box.
Filter objects and assemblies in Create a selection filter. Select the Object types category in
object type categories the Object Group - Selection Filter dialog box.
Use the Entity name property to filter the objects by their
name in logical areas and in object type categories. You can
also use the Category name property to filter the objects by
their name in object type categories.
The same object type filter properties are available for view
filters in the Object group - View filters dialog box.
Deleting logical areas and object type categories

To delete a logical area or an object type category using Model Organizer:
2. Select a category under Logical Areas or Object Types.
3. Right-click and select Delete.
4. Click OK to confirm.
10.2 Phases
Use phases to break up a model into sections. Phases are often used to indicate erection sequences.
You can create reports and views, hide objects, and copy objects from other models, according to
their phase number.
For example, you might have a large project which several users work on simultaneously in single-
user mode. First create a basic model that includes, for example, the columns. This is phase 1. You
then copy this basic model to all users.
Each user then works on a separate part of the building. When a part of the model is completed, you
can copy it back to the basic model as a separate phase (phase 2, 3, etc.).
See also Dividing the model into phases (209)

Custom phase properties (210)
Dividing the model into phases

To divide a model into phases:
1. Click Tools > Phase Manager....
The Phase Manager dialog box appears.
2. Click Add to create new phases.
3. Click Set current to make the selected phase the current phase.
Advanced modeling 209 Phases

From now on, Tekla Structures assigns all objects you create to the current phase. The @
character in front of the phase number indicates the current phase.
4. Divide the model into phases.
a To identify the phase of an object, select an object and click Phases by objects.
Tekla Structures selects the phase of the object.
b To see which objects belong to a certain phase, select a phase from the list and then
click Objects by phases.
Tekla Structures highlights the corresponding objects in the model.
c To change the phase of one or more objects, select the objects, select a phase from the
list, and then click Modify phase.
See also Phases (209)
Custom phase properties

You can add custom phase properties, which will appear as extra columns in the Phase Manager
dialog box.
Define the names of phase properties in the objects.inp file. To use phase properties in reports
and templates, use the syntax PHASE.ATTRIBUTE_NAME in the phase property field name.
See also Phases (209)
10.3 Sequences
Use the Sequencer tool to name sequences and assign incremental numbers to parts. For example,
you can define the order in which to erect parts by creating erection sequences. You can define
several sequences for different purposes, and a part can belong to several sequences at the same
time.
Sequencer works by assigning a sequence number to a user-defined attribute of a part. The sequence
name that you enter in the Sequencer Properties dialog box is the name of the user-defined attribute
defined in the objects.inp file.
Limitations Sequencer does not work for objects that are inside a reference model.
See also Creating a sequence (210)

Adding parts to a sequence (211)
Checking the sequence of a part (211)
Modifying the sequence number of a part (212)
Deleting a sequence (212)
Creating a sequence
Use the Sequencer tool to assign sequence numbers to parts. If you want to view and modify the
sequence number afterwards, you must first create a user-defined attribute to which you assign
sequence numbers.
To create a new sequence:
1. Create a user-defined attribute to which you assign sequence numbers.
a Open the objects.inp file in any standard text editor.
b In the Part attributes section, add a new user-defined attribute.
Advanced modeling 210 Sequences

The value_type must be integer, and the field_format must be %d.
For example:
attribute("MY_INFO_1", "My Info 1", integer, "%d", no, none, "0.0",
"0.0")
c Save the file.
d Restart Tekla Structures.
2. Click Tools > Sequencer to display the Sequencer Properties dialog box.
3. Type a name for the sequence. Use exactly the same name as in the objects.inp file.
For example, MY_INFO_1.
4. Click Apply.
5. Select the parts you want to include in the sequence.
The first part gets the sequence number 1, the second part number 2, and so on.
If you select a part that has already been included in the sequence, Tekla Structures asks if you
want to override the existing number. If you click Yes, Tekla Structures gives the next available
number to the part.
6. To finish adding parts to the sequence, click Edit > Interrupt or press Esc.
See also Sequences (210)
Adding parts to a sequence

To add parts to an existing sequence:
1. Click Tools > Sequencer to display the Sequencer Properties dialog box.
2. Select a sequence name from the list.
4. Select the parts you want to add to the sequence.
5. To finish adding parts to the sequence, click Edit > Interrupt or press Esc.
You cannot add new parts to a sequence, unless the new part is at
the end of the sequence. If the sequence changes, you must
redefine the whole sequence.
Checking the sequence of a part

You can check the sequence name and number of a part by using the Inquire tool.
To check the sequence of a part:
2. Select a part.
Tekla Structures displays the properties of the part. The sequence name and number are
displayed under More. For example:
Advanced modeling 211 Sequences

Modifying the sequence number of a part
Before you start, assign a sequence number to a user-defined attribute of a part.
To modify the sequence number of a part:
The current sequence number is displayed next to the user-defined attribute to which you
assigned the sequence number. For example, MY_INFO_1.
3. Modify the sequence number.
4. Click Modify.
Deleting a sequence
To delete a sequence:
1. Click Tools > Sequencer....
2. Select a sequence name from the list.
3. Click Delete and then click Yes.
10.4 Lotting
With lots you can group assemblies for transporting to site. Lotting means that you evaluate
specific model parts with respect to the number of units that can be carried by a transfer vehicle.
For example, you can calculate how many concrete truck deliveries are needed to pour the footings
or slabs for a specific portion of the model. With this information, it is easier to determine area
requirements and create an erection schedule.
When you define lots, you must take into account the load-carrying capacity of the vehicle, because
a lot cannot exceed the maximum total load capacity. You can calculate truck load sizes based on
material weights and model quantities. For most model parts, the weight is based on the size,
length, and material of the part.
To view the properties of a part, right-click the part and then select
Inquire > Part or Properties...
You can use lotting in conjunction with the Sequencer tool. For example, you can load each part of
the model onto a specific truck based on the erection sequence of the part.
The basic lotting process is the same for steel and concrete parts. However, if you are using cast-in-
place concrete, remember that the concrete is transported in a volumetric container (for example, in
a ten-cubic-yard truck). In that case, you must calculate the weight-carrying capacity of the
concrete vehicle before defining the number of lots.
See also Creating a lot (213)

Adding parts to a lot (213)
Removing parts from a lot (213)
Deleting a lot (214)
Advanced modeling 212 Lotting

Sequences (210)
Creating a lot
To create a lot:
1. Click Tools > Lotting to display the Lotting dialog box.
2. Click Properties... to display the Lot Properties dialog box.
3. Enter a name in the box at the bottom of the dialog box.
4. Enter a lot number in the Number box.
5. Enter the maximum weight of the lot in the Max weight box.
6. Click Add.
Tekla Structures creates an empty lot with the defined properties.
See also Lotting (212)
Adding parts to a lot

After you have created the needed lots, you must select each part of the model and assign them to
a lot until the total load weight of the lot reaches the specified target.
To add parts to a lot:
2. Select an existing lot from the list.
Tekla Structures highlights the parts included in the lot. The total weight of the lot and the
number of assemblies it contains are displayed under Applied values.
3. Hold down Shift and select the parts that you want to add to the lot.
4. Click Apply selected.
The weight and number of the added parts is displayed under Current values. Tekla Structures
displays a warning message if the weight limit of the lot is exceeded.
When you re-open the dialog box, the Applied values include the weight and number of the
parts you added.
Parts can belong only to one lot at a time. If you add parts that are
already in an another lot, the parts will be removed from that lot.
Removing parts from a lot

To remove parts from a lot:
Tekla Structures highlights the parts included in the lot.
3. Hold down Ctrl and select the parts you want to remove from the lot.
Tekla Structures deselects the parts.
Advanced modeling 213 Lotting

Deleting a lot
To delete a lot:
2. Click Properties...
4. Click Delete.
10.5 The Profile Catalog

The Profile Catalog contains information on profiles and their rules, types, and materials, and the
analysis and design properties of the profiles.
There are two types of profiles:
• Fixed profiles . Fixed profiles can be obtained pre-manufactured, and you cannot change
their cross section dimensions.
Fixed profiles are environment-specific, and they conform to industry standards.
• Parametric profiles . Parametric profiles have a predefined shape, but you can change their
cross section dimensions using one or more parameters. Tekla Structures calculates the cross
section shape each time you open the model.
Profiles are displayed in a hierarchical tree and they are grouped according to rules , such as the
profile type (for example, I profiles) and the profile subtype (for example, HEA). A rule filters the
information in the profile tree according to criteria set in the rule filter. To change how the profiles
are grouped in the profile tree, you need to modify the rules.
Tekla Structures stores the Profile Catalog information in the profdb.bin file.
Important When you work with the profiles, note the usage of the Update, OK and Cancel buttons in the Modify
buttons in the Profile Catalog dialog box.
Modify Profile
Catalog dialog
box
Button Description
Saves the changes to the computer memory until you click OK.
Saves the changes on the hard disk.

Tekla Structures only saves the modified catalog on the hard disk when you
click OK to close the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box and then click OK in
the Save confirmation dialog box.
Closes the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box without saving the changes.
Note that all changes made to the catalog will be lost even if you have
clicked Update, because the changes have not been saved on the hard disk.
The changes made to the catalog are visible during one session, because the
catalog is using the computer’s memory. When you start Tekla Structures the
next time, the previous data is restored from the hard disk.
Advanced modeling 214 The Profile Catalog

When you first open a model, Tekla Structures reads the data from the Profile Catalog on the hard
disk and stores it in the computer’s memory.
When you select a profile, Tekla Structures reads the data from the Profile Catalog in the computer
memory and displays it in the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box. This is faster than accessing the
data from the hard disk.
See also Adding a rule (215)

Modifying the Profile Catalog (217)
User-defined cross sections (221)
Fixed user-defined profiles (226)
Parametric user-defined profiles (228)
Exporting and importing profiles (231)
System parametric profiles (236)
Folder search order
Adding a rule
Use rules to control how the profiles are grouped and displayed in the profile tree.
To add a rule:
1. Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog... to open the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box.
2. Right-click any existing rule and select Add Rule.
The Profile manager rules dialog box appears.
3. Define the rule properties.
a Enter a rule name in the Rule name box.
b Select the Profile type to which the rule is applied.
c Enter the Name filter string that defines the new rule.
By default, the wildcard symbol (*) is entered, meaning “all entries”.
For example, to group all catalog entries with names beginning with A, enter A* in the
Name filter string box, or to group all catalog entries with names containing 100, enter
*100*. Tekla Structures groups the catalog entries that meet your criteria under the
new rule.
4. Click OK to close the Profile manager rules dialog box.

5. Click OK to close the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box.
6. Click OK in the Save confirmation dialog box to save the changes.
You can add a next level rule that creates a subgroup under an
existing rule. Use the Add Next Level Rule command to add the next
level rule.

Tekla Structures reads the rules from top to bottom in the profile
tree. Profiles are in the highest group where they meet the criteria
defined in the rule. For example, that a rule that collects All profiles
empties all rules that are below it in the profile tree.
The order in which you create the rules does not matter, only the
location of the rules in the profile tree.
See also Editing a rule (216)

Editing a rule
To edit a rule:
2. Right-click any existing rule and select Edit Rule.
The Profile manager rules dialog box appears.
3. Modify the rule properties.
4. Click OK to close the Profile manager rules dialog box.
Profiles in the profile tree are listed in an alphabetical order, and rules are listed in the order you
specify. To change the order in which the rules appear, use the Move up and Move down commands.
If you want to delete a rule, select an existing rule and click Delete
Rule.

Changing the material of a profile type

You can associate profile types with a certain material. You can define which profiles are available
for steel parts, concrete parts, or both. This affects which profile types are shown in the Select
profile dialog box.
To define the material of a profile type:
2. Select a profile type, for example, L profiles.
3. To associate the profiles with steel, right-click and select Material > Steel from the pop-up
menu.
A check mark next to Steel indicates that the profiles are available for steel parts.

4. To make the selected profiles available also for concrete parts, right-click and select Material >
Concrete.
If needed, you can remove the check mark by clicking the material again.

Modifying the Profile Catalog

To modify the Profile Catalog:
2. Select a parametric profile in profile the tree and modify its properties.
Use the three tabs to modify the properties.
• The General tab contains information on profile types and dimensions.
• The Analysis tab contains information on the properties used in structural analysis. The
structure can be analyzed with different analysis software.
• The User attributes tab is for viewing or entering user attributes for profiles.
The modified Profile Catalog is saved in the current model folder and is available only for that model.
To make the modified catalog available for all the other models, use export and import.
Limitations It is possible to modify the properties of the fixed profiles on the General tab, but the changes do not
affect the profile size in the model.

Adding a new fixed profile (218)

Adding a new fixed profile
You can add a new fixed profile to the Profile Catalog either by modifying a copy of an existing,
similar profile, or by creating a new profile.
Select the profile type and profile dimensions so that they match
the cross section as closely as possible. Always enter values for
height h and width b, as these values can affect how Tekla
Structures displays the profiles.
Some connections only work for certain types of profiles. This
means that the profile type and the profile dimensions, such as
height h and width b, affect to which connections can be applied.
An unsuitable profile type or missing values may result in problems
with connections.
To add a new profile:

2. Select a fixed profile that is similar to the one you wish to create.
3. Right-click and select Copy Profile.
A new profile with the name <existing_profile_name COPY> is created.
4. Change the profile name by entering a new name in the Profile name box.
The profile name must be in upper case letters, with no spaces. Tekla Structures automatically
converts lower case letters to upper case letters.
5. Modify the profile properties.
6. Click Update.
OR
2. Right-click anywhere in the profile tree and select Add Profile.
A new fixed profile with the name PROFILE1 is created.
converts lower case letters to upper letters.
4. Select the profile type and profile subtype from the Profile type and Profile subtype lists.
5. Define the profile properties.
6. Click Update.
See also Modifying the Profile Catalog (217)

Deleting a profile (218)
Exporting a profile catalog (231)
Importing a profile catalog (233)
Deleting a profile
To delete a profile:

2. Select the profile that you want to delete.
3. Right-click and select Delete Profile.
See also The Profile Catalog (214)

Adding a user attribute to a profile

You can add your own attributes to profiles. For example, you can specify paint layer thickness,
define the maximum grain size of concrete, sort out different profile types by material, or create
profile aliases for converting imperial profiles to metric and vice versa.
To add a user attribute to a profile:
2. On the User attributes tab, click Definitions....
The Modify Profile Properties dialog box appears.
3. Click Add to add a new row.
4. To define a user attribute, click each item on a row.
a In the Profile type list, select a profile type to which the user attribute is applied.
b In the Quantity type list, select the type of information that the user attribute contains,
for example, weight, area, ratio, or string.
c In the Order list, define the order in which the user attributes are shown in the dialog
box. Larger values are shown first.
d In the Property name list, define a name for the property.
The name is saved in the catalog and can be used in reports and templates. When
Property name is used in a template, PROFILE.PROPERTY_NAME indicates where the
property name appears. For example, PAINT_LAYER_THICKNESS.
e In the Symbol column, define an abbreviation that can be used for the property, such as
Ix or ct.
f In the Label column, define a label for the attribute.
5. Click Update.
6. Click OK to close the Modify Profile Properties dialog box.
See also Example: Adding a user attribute to a profile and using it in a rule (219)
Example: Adding a user attribute to a profile and using it in a rule

You can add your own attributes and their values to profiles. The user attributes can then be used,
for example, in profile filtering.
In this example, you will add a user attribute for I profiles’ rule.
To add a user attribute to a profile and using it in a rule:
2. On the User attributes tab, click Definitions....
The Modify Profile Properties dialog box appears.
4. Select the row that was created and modify the properties as follows:
• Set Profile type to I profiles.
• Set Quantity type to String.

• Set Property name to HISTORICAL_SHAPE.
• Set Symbol to Hist.
• Set Label to Historical shape.
5. Click Update and OK.

6. In the profile tree, select I profiles and then HEA.
7. Right-click and select Add Next Level Rule.
8. In the Profile manager rules dialog box, set the rule properties as follows:
• Set Rule name to Historical shapes.
• In Profile type, clear the All profiles check box and select the I profiles check box.
• Enter HEA* in the Name filter string box.
• Set User attribute to HISTORICAL_SHAPE and Equals, and enter Yes in the box next to the
two other boxes.
9. Click OK.
Historical shapes appears in the profile tree.

10. Select the required historical profile, for example HEA120, in the profile tree.
11. Go to the User attributes tab and set Value of Historical shape to Yes.
12. Click Update.

13. Repeat the steps 10 and 11 for any other required profiles.
Next time you open the Profile Catalog, the profiles appear under Historical shapes in the profile tree.
See also Adding a user attribute to a profile (219)

Adding a rule (215)
User-defined cross sections

Use user-defined cross sections to create user-defined profiles. There are several methods how to
define a cross section.
Creation
method of the
cross section Description
Polygon Use this method for creating a cross section or a profile with fixed
dimensions.
In the Profile Catalog the Profile type will be User-defined, fixed.
Plate Use this method if you have a contour plate in the model.
DWG file Use this method if you have a .dwg file of the profile you want to define.
Sketch Editor Use this method if you want your profile to be parametric.
In the Profile Catalog the Profile type will be User-defined, parametric.
See also Defining a cross section using polygon (222)

Defining a cross section using a plate (223)
Defining a cross section using a DWG file (224)

Defining a cross section using polygon
Define a cross section by picking the shape of the cross section.
To define a cross section using polygon:
1. Click Modeling > Profiles > Define Cross Section Using Polygon.
2. Define a cross section without or with inner contours.
• To create a cross section with no inner contours:
a Pick the corner points of the cross section to define the shape. Start at the bottom-
right corner and pick the points counter clockwise.
b Pick the start point and click the middle mouse button to close the shape.
c Pick the center point of the cross section.
To make it easier to define the shape, insert a reference model of

the cross section in the model, and use the reference model as a
basis for picking the cross section shape.
Alternatively, you can create a few construction lines or points in
the model and use them to define the cross section shape.
If you do not have any actual points to pick, picking the center
point of the cross section becomes difficult. This is because the
cross section shape disappears after you have clicked the middle
mouse button to close the shape.
• To create a cross section with inner contours:

a Pick the corner points of the cross section to define the shape.
b Pick the start point to close the shape.
c Pick the corner points of the cross section inner contour.
d Pick the start point to close the shape
e Repeat until you have picked all inner contours.
f Click the middle mouse button.
g Pick the center point of the cross section.

3. When the User Profile Cross Section dialog box appears, enter a name for the cross section.
4. Click OK to close the User Profile Cross Section dialog box.
In the Profile Catalog the Profile type is User-defined, fixed.
See also Modifying a cross section (225)

Defining a cross section using a plate

Define a cross section using a contour plate.
To create a cross section using a plate:
1. Create a contour plate.
2. Click Modeling > Profiles > Define Cross Section Using Plate....
The Profile Cross-Section from Plate (10) dialog box appears.
3. On the Parameters tab, enter a name in the Section name and Profile name boxes.
Other properties are optional.
4. Click OK.
5. Select the contour plate.
Tekla Structures creates the cross section with the shape of the contour plate, and the in the
Profile Catalog the Profile type is User-defined, fixed.
See also Profile cross-section from plate (10) (223)

Defining a cross section using polygon (222)
Profile cross-section from plate (10)

Use the Parameters tab to define the profile properties in the Profile cross-section from plate (10)
modeling tool.
Option Description
Section name Name of the cross section shown in the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box.
If you leave this box empty, no profile is created.

Option Description
Profile name Name of the profile shown in the Beam Properties dialog box, and in the
Modify Profile Catalog dialog box.
If you leave this box empty, no profile is created.
Save to The location of the Profile Catalog.
Select one of the following options:
• Model directory: The current model folder.
• Global directory: ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\<environment>\p
rofil
• Don’t save: Does not save the profile. This is useful for testing.
Min distance The minimum distance between the corner points of the cross section.
between points To create simpler drawings of complicated cross sections, increase this
value.
Center point The origin of the plate defines the location of the profile reference line.
offset Enter an offset value to move the reference line, relative to the cross
section.
See also Defining a cross section using a plate (223)
Defining a cross section using a DWG file

If a cross section is available in DWG format, you can import the cross section and add it as a DWG
profile to the Profile Catalog.
Before you start defining a cross section using a DWG file:
• Save the outline of the cross section as a DWG file. Ensure that the DWG file only contains the
outline of the profile.
• Make sure that the cross section is created as a closed polyline.
• Make sure that the outline consists of only one closed polyline. You cannot, for example, define
holes to your cross section with this method. If you need holes or openings, use the polygon or
the plate creation method.
• Remove hatching and unnecessary lines from the DWG file. Tekla Structures imports all the lines
it finds in the DWG file.
• Make sure that the cross section has only 99 corner points or less. Typically rounded shapes
consist of many corner points. If needed, you can round the chamfers also afterwards.
To create a cross section using a DWG file:
1. Open a model.
2. Click Modeling > Profiles > Define Cross Section Using DWG File....
The DWG Profile to Library dialog box appears.
3. Define cross section properties and click OK.
4. In the model, pick the start and the end points of the cross section to be imported.
Tekla Structures imports the cross section and places the profile reference line at the origin of
the DWG file.
In the Profile Catalog the Profile type is User-defined, fixed.
See also DWG Profile to Library (6) (225)

Defining a cross section using polygon (222)

DWG Profile to Library (6)

Use the Parameters tab to define the profile properties in the DWG profile to library (6) modeling tool.
Option Description
Input file Browse for the DWG file to be imported.
Section name Name of the cross section shown in the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box.
Profile name Name of the profile shown in the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box.
Save to The location of the Profile Catalog.
Select one of the following options:
• Model directory: The current model folder.
• Global directory: ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\<environment>\p
rofil
• Don’t save: Does not save the profile. This is useful for testing.
Min distance The minimum distance between the corner points of the cross section.
between points To create simpler drawings of complicated cross sections, increase this
value.
Center point The origin of the plate defines the location of the profile reference line.
offset Enter an offset value to move the reference line, relative to the cross
section.
See also Defining a cross section using a DWG file (224)
Modifying a cross section

You can modify cross sections that have been defined using a polygon, a plate, or a DWG file.
To modify an existing cross section:
1. Click Modeling > Profiles > Edit Polygon Cross Section... to open the Modify Cross Section dialog
box.
2. Select the cross section you want to modify.
3. Modify the cross section point properties.
• Number refers to each point picked when the cross section was created, in numerical order.
The first point picked is 1, the second 2, and so on.
• Chamfer refers to the chamfer shape.
• x: and y: apply to the chamfer type. For example, if you want the chamfer to be equal on
both sides of the angle, only enter a value for x:.
For an uneven chamfer, enter values for x: and y:.
4. Click Update.
5. Click OK to close the Modify Cross Section dialog box.

If you want to delete a cross section, select the cross section and
click Delete.
See also Defining a cross section using polygon (222)

Fixed user-defined profiles

Only user-defined cross sections can be used to create user-defined profiles. Create the needed
cross sections before defining a fixed user-defined profile. You can define a profile with a single
cross section, or a profile with multiple cross sections.
Select the profile type and profile dimensions so that they match
the new cross section as closely as possible. Always enter values for
height h and width b, as these values can affect how Tekla
Structures displays the profiles. If the values are 0, the part is
drawn as a line.
Some connections only work for certain types of profiles. This
means that the profile type and the profile dimensions, such as
height h and width b, affect to which connections can be applied.
An unsuitable profile type or missing values may result in problems
with connections.
See also User-defined cross sections (221)

Creating a fixed user-defined profile with a single cross section (226)
Creating a fixed user-defined profile with multiple cross sections (227)
Creating a fixed user-defined profile with a single cross section

To create a user-defined profile with a single cross section:
2. Select an existing profile.
3. Right-click and select Add Profile.
A new profile with the name PROFILE1 is created.
5. In the Profile type list, select User-defined, fixed.
6. In the Profile subtype list, select the user-defined cross section you want to use.
7. Under Cross section, select 1 for Number and enter 0.0000 for Relative location.
8. Click OK to save the profile and close the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box.

Cross sections affect the total weight of the profile.
See also Fixed user-defined profiles (226)

Creating a fixed user-defined profile with multiple cross sections
When you create a profile with multiple cross sections, create the
cross sections with the same number of corner points and in the
same order.
To create a user-defined profile with multiple cross sections:

2. Select an existing profile.
A new profile with the name PROFILE1 is created.
5. In the Profile type list, select User-defined, fixed.
6. In the Profile subtype list, select the user-defined cross section you want to use.
7. Under Cross section, select the number of the cross section in the Number box and enter a new
location for Relative location.
Relative location values indicate the location of the cross section along the axis: 0.0 for start end
and 1.0 for second end.
8. Click Add to add more cross sections.
To use a different user-defined cross section in the profile, select a new cross section in the in
the Profile subtype list.
If you want to remove a cross section, select the cross section from the Number list and click
Remove.
9. Click Update after defining each cross section in the profile.
10. Click OK to save the profile and close the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box.
Cross sections affect the total weight of the profile.
Example In a pitched profile, the Relative location value for a cross section 1 is 0.0, for a cross section 2 the
value is 0.5, and for a cross section 3 that is 1.0.

See also Fixed user-defined profiles (226)
Creating a fixed user-defined profile with a single cross section (226)
Parametric user-defined profiles

You can define cross sections using the Sketch Editor and then define a parametric user-defined
profile with variable cross sections in the Profile Editor. You can use a profile with variable cross
sections like any other parametric profile.
You can:
• Use a sketched cross section with different dimensions at different locations in a profile.
• Modify the variables of the cross sections and the profile.
• Save the profile and use it as a parametric profile through the Profile Catalog.
• Import and export sketched variable cross section profiles.
Only the dimensions of a variable cross section can vary, not the
actual shape of the cross section.
If you want the to use several different cross section shapes in the
profile, create a user-defined fixed profile with multiple cross
sections.
See also Creating a profile with variable cross sections (229)

Modifying a profile with variable cross sections (230)

Creating a profile with variable cross sections

To create a profile with a sketched variable cross section:
1. Sketch a cross section using the Sketch Editor.
In the Variables dialog box in the Sketch Editor, set Visibility to Show
for the cross section variables you want to give different values
when you use the cross section in a profile.
2. Click Modeling > Profiles > Define Profile with Variable Cross Section....
The Define Profile with Variable Cross Section dialog box appears.
3. Select the cross section you want to use as the start and the end cross section of the profile.
4. Click OK.
The Profile Editor and the Profile preview view appear.
5. Under Cross sections of the profile, add cross sections to the profile, or remove selected cross
sections by clicking Add or Remove.
When you click Add, Tekla Structures adds a new cross section at the end of the profile, at the
location 1.0., and moves the existing cross sections towards the start of the profile.
By default, cross sections are located at 0.1 intervals in the profile.
6. Under Cross section variables, define the following:
• The relative location of each cross section in the profile.
Use the *.Location variables. For example, start=0.00, middle=0.5, end=1.00.
If you have added new cross sections, check that they do not overlap any existing cross
sections.
• How the cross sections are aligned in the horizontal and vertical direction.
Use the *.HorPos and *.VerPos variables.

• How much the cross sections are offset from the alignment.
Use the *.HorOffset and *.VerOffset variables.
Set Visibility to Show for the variables you want give different
values when you use the profile in a model.
If you want to use parameter variables and equations to define the
cross section dimension, click Add variable and define the variables
values.
7. Save the profile.

a Click Save.
b In the Save profile as dialog box, enter a unique name for the profile.
You cannot include numbers in the profile name, or use the name of a standard profile.
c Click OK.
Tekla Structures saves the profile in the current model folder.
See also Parametric user-defined profiles (228)

Modifying a profile with variable cross sections (230)
Modifying a profile with variable cross sections

To modify a profile that consists of variable cross sections:
1. Click Modeling > Profiles > Edit Cross Section in Sketch Editor....
The Component Catalog dialog box appears.
2. Select a sketched profile and double-click it to open it in the Profile Editor.
Sketched profiles have the symbol next to their name.

3. Modify the profile properties.

4. Click Save.
See also Parametric user-defined profiles (228)

Creating a profile with variable cross sections (229)
Exporting and importing profiles

Exporting and importing are used to merge profile catalogs. Profile catalogs are exported and
imported as .lis files
Exporting and importing is useful, when you:
• Upgrade to a newer version of Tekla Structures and you want to use a customized profile
catalog from a previous version.
• Want to combine profile catalogs that are stored in different locations.
• Want to share profile catalog information with other users.
See also Exporting a profile catalog (231)

Exporting a part of the Profile Catalog (231)
Exporting a profile catalog

Profile catalogs are exported from Tekla Structures models as .lis files.
To export a profile catalog:
2. Click Export....
3. Browse for the folder where you want to save the export file.
By default, the file is save to the current model folder.
4. Enter a name for the file.
5. Click OK.
The Export... and the Export Profile commands in the Profile Catalog
dialog box exports the fixed profiles and the fixed user-defined
profiles that have been created using a cross section defined with a
polygon, a plate or a DWG file.
If you want to export sketched cross sections created with the
Sketch Editor, use the Component Catalog for the export.

See also Exporting and importing profiles (231)

Example of profile export file (232)
Units used in export and import (234)
Exporting a part of the Profile Catalog

If you do not want to export the whole Profile Catalog, you can export a branch of the profile tree,
meaning all the profiles grouped under one rule, or a single profile.

To export a part of the Profile Catalog:
2. Select profiles to be exported.
• To export a branch of the profile tree, right-click the branch and select Export Profiles.
• To export a single profile, right-click the profile and select Export Profile.
3. Browse for the folder where you want to save the export files.
By default, the file is saved to the current model folder.
5. Click OK.

Example of profile export file (232)
Example of profile export file

The export .lis file is divided into specific sections.
The first row in the file is PROFILE CATALOG EXPORT VERSION = n, where n is the version number.
Do not delete this row. If the row does not appear in the file, the
import is canceled.
The next section defines the hierarchical tree structure that is used to display the contents of the
catalog.
The next section contains the profiles.
Fixed profiles
PROFILE_NAME = "HEA120";
{
TYPE = 1; SUB_TYPE = 1001; COORDINATE = 0.000;
{
"FLANGE_SLOPE_RATIO" 0.000000000E+000
"ROUNDING_RADIUS_2" 0.000000000E+000
"FLANGE_THICKNESS" 8.000000000E+000
"WEB_THICKNESS" 5.000000000E+000
"WIDTH" 1.200000000E+002
"HEIGHT" 1.140000000E+002
Fixed user- Fixed user-defined profiles can have more than one cross section. The profile type for fixed user-
defined profiles defined profiles is 998. SUB_TYPE refers to the name of the cross section definition. When importing
fixed user-defined profiles, the relevant cross section definitions must be in the same import file as
the profile.

PROFILE_NAME = "TAN_HK_TEST_2_CS";
{
TYPE = 998; SUB_TYPE = 253; COORDINATE = 0.000;
{
"EQUIVALENT_TYPE" 11
"FLANGE_SLOPE_RATIO" 0.000000000E+000
"ECCENTRICITY_Y" 0.000000000E+000
"ECCENTRICITY_X" 0.000000000E+000
"FLANGE_THICKNESS_2" 0.000000000E+000
"WEB_THICKNESS_2" 0.000000000E+000
Cross section
definitions
CROSS_SECTION_NAME = "MY_OWN_PROFILE"
POINT_NUMBER = 1;
POINT_X = 200.00;
POINT_Y = -200.00;
CHAMFER_TYPE = 0;
CHAMFER_X = 0.00;
CHAMFER_Y = 0.00;
POINT_NUMBER = 2;
POINT_X = 200.00;
POINT_Y = 200.00;
CHAMFER_TYPE = 0;
CHAMFER_X = 0.00;
CHAMFER_Y = 0.00;

Importing a profile catalog

Profile catalogs are imported to Tekla Structures models as .lis files. You can move an exported
.lis file to any model folder and import it into an existing profile catalog.
To import a profile catalog:
1. Open the model to which you want to import a profile catalog
3. Click Import....
4. Browse for the folder that contains the import file, and select the file.
5. Click OK.
If the import file contains the whole profile tree, the Replace tree definition? dialog box appears,
and you have two options:
• Yes: The existing profile tree is replaced with the imported profile tree. The profiles in the
existing profile tree are placed at the bottom of the profile tree without hierarchy.
• No: The existing profile tree maintains its hierarchy and the imported profiles are placed at
the bottom of the profile tree without hierarchy.
If a profile with a same name as the profile being imported already exists, the Import
confirmation dialog box appears, and you have three options:
• Replace: The existing profile is replaced with the imported profile.
• Merge: Profile properties that are different in the import file are added to the existing
profile. All the other properties remain unchanged.
Use this option to import only certain elements of the profile catalog, such as user
attributes.

• Leave: The existing profile is not replaced and the profile definitions in the import file are
ignored.
If you select the Apply for all check box, Tekla Structures uses the same option (Replace, Merge,
or Leave) for all the existing profiles that have the same name as the one being imported.
Each cross section definition has a unique name and ID number. If,
during an import, a cross section with the same name but different
properties is found in the existing profile catalog, the cross section
being imported is renamed by adding an incremental number at the
end of the existing name.

You cannot import the .lis files that have been created in a
previous Tekla Structures version. However, profile catalogs from
previous versions are automatically converted when a model is
opened in a newer version. To create a suitable export file, open the
relevant model in a new Tekla Structures version and export the
catalog.
Do not save your model in the new Tekla Structures version, or you
will not be able to open it in a previous version.

Units used in export and import

The table below lists the units Tekla Structures uses when exporting and importing profile catalogs
and material catalogs.
Type Unit (if blank, no unit)

Boolean
Integer
String
Ratio
Strain
Angle degree
Length mm
Deformation mm
Dimension mm
Radius of inertia mm

Type Unit (if blank, no unit)
Area mm2
Reinforcement area mm2
Transverse reinforcement area mm2/m
Area/unit length mm2/m
Volume mm3
Section modulus mm3
Moment of inertia mm4
Torsion constant mm4
Warping constant mm6
Force N
Weight kg
Distributed load N/m
Spring constant N/m
Mass/length kg/m
Surface load N/m2
Strength N/m2
Stress N/m2
Modulus N/m2
Density kg/m3
Moment Nm
Distributed moment Nm/m
Rotation spring constant Nm/rad
Temperature K (oC)
Thermal dilation coefficient 1/K (1/oC)
Factor

The Material Catalog (268)
Exporting a material catalog (271)
Importing a material catalog (272)

System parametric profiles
Parametric The profitab.inp file contains the predefined parametric profiles available in Tekla Structures.
profiles The file controls how the parametric profiles are displayed in the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box. If
you want to take a new system parametric profile into use, you can add the needed parametric
profile definitions, such as the profile type, prefix and the unit of measurement, to the file.
The profitab.inp file is located in the ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\common\inp folder. Tekla Structures searches for
the file in the standard search order and then from the folder indicated by the advanced option
XS_PROFDB.
Parametric cross The predefined parametric cross sections are defined in .clb files, located in the ..\Tekla
sections Structures\<version>\environments\common\inp folder.
The components.clb file collects all the .clb files that contain cross section definitions. If you
define a new cross section in a new .clb file, you need to add the name of the new .clb file to
the components.clb file.
The profitab.inp, components.clb and .clb files work together:
• The .clb file is where the profile cross section is defined.
• The components.clb file contains the list of used .clb files that contain the cross section
definitions.
• The profitab.inp file is the link between the .clb files and the Profile Catalog.
The Export… or the Export Profile commands in the Profile Catalog

dialog box do not export parametric profiles: profiles that have
been created using the Sketch Editor or the profitab.inp file.
See also Defining names of parametric profiles (236)

Converting a parametric profile to a standard fixed profile (236)
System parametric profiles available in Tekla Structures (238)
XS_PROFDB
XS_PARAMETRIC_PROFILE_SEPARATOR
XS_USER_DEFINED_PARAMETRIC_PROFILE_SEPARATORS
Converting a parametric profile to a standard fixed profile

To convert a parametric profile to a standard fixed profile:
1. Select a parametric profile in the Profile Catalog dialog box.
A new standard fixed profile is created, and it has the profile values of the parametric profile.
The new standard fixed profile can also be exported, if needed.
See also System parametric profiles (236)
Defining names of parametric profiles

Use the profitab.inp file to define the names of parametric profiles.

Copy the profitab.inp file to a model, project or firm folder and
then edit the file in the new location using a standard text editor,
such as Microsoft Notepad.
The parametric profiles are defined in the profitab.inp file in the following way:
Prefix ! Type ! SO ! Z ! MI ! MA ! G3-NAME ! Z3-NAME !
Prefix Prefix of the parametric profile. The prefix is shown in the Profile Catalog.
Type Type of the parametric profile, for example, I profile.
SO Sorting order. The options are:
• -1: Decreasing sorting order
• +1: Increasing sorting order
• 0: No sorting order
• -2: Name increasing, value decreasing
• +2: Value increasing, name decreasing
For example, if your profile is PLT200*10 or PLT10*200 and the sorting order is +2,
the result in the output (such as a report) for both cases is PLT200*10. If the
sorting order is -2, the result for both cases is PLT10*200.
Z Unit of measurement. The options are:
• 0: millimeters
• 1: inches
• 2: feet
• 3: centimeters
• 4: meters
MI Minimum number of parameters you can use with the parametric profile.
For example, a rectangular hollow section has the following Profile subtypes in the
Select Profile dialog box: h*t, h*b*t, h1*b1-h2*b2*t.
For example, if you define SHS with a minimum of two and a maximum of two
parameters, you will only have the option h*t available in the Select Profile dialog
box.
MA Maximum number of parameters you can use with the parametric profile.
G3-NAME Refers to a cross section file ( .clb file).
Combination of a library id and the name of a cross section.
Z3-NAME Defines how the profile parameters relate to the parameters in the cross section
file.
Parameters in the order of appearance in the .clb file, optional parameters are
inside brackets.
Can also be the name of the modeling tool.

Example To use parametric plate profiles with the name PLTE, enter the following line in the
profitab.inp file:
PLTE ! PL ! +2 ! ! 1 ! 2 ! ! !

Using standardized values for parametric profile dimensions

You can define standardized values for the dimensions of parametric profiles. The values are defined
in the industry_standard_profiles.inp file, located in the ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\<environment>\system folder. The standardized
values are visible in the Profile Catalog where you can select suitable dimension values for the
profiles.
To use standardized values for parametric profile dimensions:
2. Click the Select... button to open the Select Profile dialog box.
3. Select a parametric profile for which you have defined standardized values in the
industry_standard_profiles.inp file.
4. Select the Use industry standardized values only check box.
5. Select the profile dimensions from a list in the Value column.
Example You can edit the industry_standard_profiles.inp file using any standard text editor, for
example, Microsoft Notepad.
The file has the following format:
• profile and profile subtype
• parameters separated by spaces
• units for each parameter
• standardized values for each parameter.
Each dimension combination has its own row.
For example, the standardized combinations of dimension values for a C profile are as follows:
C h*b*t
h b t
mm mm mm
75 35 5
75 35 6
75 35 7
100 40 7
100 40 8
100 40 9
System parametric profiles available in Tekla Structures

The following system parametric profiles are available in Tekla Structures.
Contents I profiles (239)

I beams (steel) (239)
L profiles (240)
Z profiles (240)
U profiles (241)
C profiles (241)

T profiles (242)
Welded box profiles (242)
Box profiles (245)
WQ profiles (245)
Rectangular sections (246)
Circular sections (246)
Rectangular hollow sections (246)
Circular hollow sections (247)
Cold rolled profiles (247)
Folded plates (250)
Hat profiles (256)
I beams (concrete) (257)
Ledger beams (concrete) (258)
T profiles (concrete) (258)
Irregular beams (concrete) (260)
Panels (262)
Variable cross sections (264)
Others (266)
I profiles
HIh-s-t*b (symmetric)
HIh-s-t1*b1-t2*b2
HIh1-h2-s-t*b
HIh1-h2-s-t1*b1-t2*b2
I beams (steel)
I_BLT_Ah-b1-s1-t1*h2-b2-s2-t2

I_BLT_B h*b1*t1*s-b2*t2
I_HEMh*b*c*s*t
I_VAR_Ah1-ht*b1-bt*s*t
L profiles
Lh*b*t
Z profiles
Zh*b*t
Z_VAR_Ah1*b1*b2-s-h2*b3

Z_VAR_Bh1*b1*b2-s-h2*b3
Z_VAR_C h1*b1*b2-s-h2*b3
U profiles
Uh*b*t
C profiles
Ch*b*t
C_BUILTh*b*s*t
C_VAR_Ah1*b1-s-h2*b2

C_VAR_Bh1*b1-s-h2*b2
C_VAR_Ch1*b1-s-h2*b2
C_VAR_Dh-b-d-c-s
T profiles
Th-s-t-b
Welded box profiles
HK h-s-t*b-c
HKh-s-t1*b1-t2*b2-c

Welded beam profiles
B_WLD_A h*b*s*t
B_WLD_B h*b*s*t
B_WLD_C h*s
B_WLD_D h*b*s*t
B_WLD_E h*b*s*t
B_WLD_F h*b*s*[t]

B_WLD_G h*b*s*t*a
B_WLD_H h*bo*bu*s*to*tu
B_WLD_I h*bo*s*to*bu*tu*a
B_WLD_J h1/h2*b*s*t
B_WLD_K h1/h2*b*s*t
B_WLD_L h*wt*wb*s*tt*tb

Box profiles
B_BUILTh*b*s*t
B_VAR_Ah1-h2*t
B_VAR_Bh1-h2*t
B_VAR_Ch1-h2*t
WQ profiles
HQh-s-t1*t2*b2
HQh*s-t1*b1-t2*b2-c

Rectangular sections
PLh*b
h=height
b=thickness
(smaller=b)
Circular sections
Dd
ELDd1*r1*d2*r2
Rectangular hollow sections
Ph*t (symmetric)
Ph*b*t
Ph1*b1-h2*b2*t

Circular hollow sections
PDd
PDd1*d2*t
EPDd1*r1*d2*r2*t
Cold rolled profiles
ZZh-t-e-b (symmetric)
ZZh-t-e1-b1-e2-b2
CCh-t-e-b (symmetric)
CCh-t-e1-b1-e2-b2
CW h-t-e-b-f-h1 (symmetric)
CW h-t-e1*b1-f1-f2-e2*b2

CUh-t-h1-b-e (symmetric)
CUh-t-h1-b1-h2-b2-e
EBh-t-e-b-a
EBh-t-e1-b1-e2-b2-a
Reference points:1=right
2=left
3=top
BFh-s-b-h1
SPDd*t
SPDd2*d2*t
ESPD d1-d2*t
ECh-t-e-b-a
ECh-t-e1-b1-e2-b2-a

EDh-t-b-e-h1-h2-f1-f2-a
EEh-t-e-b-f1-f3-h1-f2-a
EFh-t-e-b1-b2-f1-f2/h1-a
EZh-t-e-b-f1-f3-h1-f2-a
EWh-t-e-b1-b2-f1-f2-h2-h1-a

Folded plates
FFLAa-b-t
FPANBh-b-t
FPANB_-b-t
FPANBAh-b-t
FPANBA_h-b-t
FPANBBh-c-d-t
FPANCVb-c-d-t
FPANGh-b-c-t
FPANGAh-b-c-t

FPANJa-b-c-t
FPANJa-b-c-t
FPAN a-b-c-t-g
FPANVVa-b-c-t-g
FP_Ah-b-c-d-g
FP_AAh*b2*t*a

FP_Bh-b-c-d-g-i
FP_BBh-b-d
FP_Cb-h-c
FP_CCh-b-a-d-s
FP_Db-h-c-d-f-g-i-j-s
FP_Eb-h-c-d-f-g-s

FP_Fb-h-c-d-f-g-s
FP_Gb-h-c-d-f-g-s
FP_Hb-h-c-d-f-s
FP_Ib-h-c-d-f-s
FP_Jb-h-c-d-a
FP_Kb-h-c-d

FP_Lb-h-c-d-f-s
FP_Mb-h-c-d-s
FP_Nb-h-c-d
FP_Ob-h-c-d-s
FP_Pa1*a2*h-b1*b2-Alpha1-Alpha2-Beta1-
Beta2-s
FP_Qb-h-c-d-s

FP_Rb-h-c-d
FP_Sb-h-c-s
FP_Tb-h-a-d-s
FP_Ub-h-a-d-s
FP_Vb-h-s-c
FP_Wb-h-a-d-s

FP_WWh-b-a-c-s
FP_Yh-b-c-d
FP_Zd-h-b-s-a-f
Hat profiles
HAT h*a*c*t
HATCa-b-c-b1-h-b3-b4-b5-s

HATAb1*h1*h2*h3*h4*h5*h6*b2*t*f*a*h*b
HATBb*b1*b2*h*h1*h2*h3*h4*t*f*a
I beams (concrete)
HIIh1*b1*t1-h2-s-b2*t2[-sft[-sfb]]
IIh*b1*t1-s-b2*t2[-sft[-sfb]]
SIIh1*b1*t1-h2-s-b2*t2[-sft[-sfb]]

Ledger beams (concrete)
RCLs*h-b*t
RCDLs*h-b*t
RCDLs*h-b*t1*t2
RCDXs*h-b*h2*h1
RCDXs*h-b*h4*h3*h2*h1
RCDXs*h-b*h4*h3*h2*h1-ex
RCXXs*h-b*t*h1-h2-ex
RCXs*h-b*h2*h1
T profiles (concrete)
HTTh*b-s-t-b2-h2

TCh-b-t-s
TRIh*b-b2*t1-h3-t2
TTh*b-s-t-b2
TTTh*b-bl-br-hw-bwmin-bwmax
T_VAR_Ah1*h2*s*b1*t1-sft
T_VAR_Bh-b-c-d

Irregular beams (concrete)
IRR_Ab-h-g-c-d
IRR_Bh-b-c-d-f-g
IRR_Ch-b-c-d
IRR_Db1*b2-h1*h2
IRR_Eh-b-c-d-h2-h3-h4
OCTB*b1-H*h1
REC_Ah-b

REC_Bh-b-b1
REC_Ch-b-b1
REC_Dh-b-b2
REC_Eh-b
REC_Fh-b
REC_Gh-b
REC_Hh-b
REC_I a-b*h

TRI_Ah-b
TRI_Ba1
TRI_Cb-h
Panels
PNL_Ah*b
PNL_Bh*b
PNL_Ch*b-a-ht*bt

PNL_Dh*b-a-ht*bt
PNL_Eh*b-a-ht*bt
PNL_Fh*b-a-ht*bt
PNL_Gh*b
PNL_Hh*b-a-ht
PNL_Ih*b-a-ht*bt

PNL_Jh*b-a-ht*bt
PNL_Kh*b
PNL_Lh-b-c-f
PNL_Mh-b-c-f-d
PNL_Nh-b-d-f-g-j
PNL_Oh-b-d-f-g-i-t
Variable cross sections
HEXRECTh-b-br-hr

HXGONb
OBLINCLh1-h2-h3-h4-b
OBLRIDh1*b1*b2-h2-h3-l2-l1
OBLVAR_Ah1*b1*b2-h2
OBLVAR_Bh1-h2-b
OBLVAR_Ch-b-a-i-j-k-m-n
OBLVAR_Dh-c-b

OBLVAR_Eh-b-a-c-d-i-j-k-l-
m-p-o
OCTAGONb-b2
PRMDASh*b-he*be
PL_Vh*b-he*be
PRMDh*b-h2*b2
ROUNDRECTd-Rb*Rh-t*ye-ze
Others
BLKSd1-d2

CAPd
HEMISPHERd
NUT_Md
RCRWh*b-b2*b3-b4-t1*t2-t3*t4
SKh*b-h2-t-b2-b3
SPHEREd
STBb-h-h1-b1-b2-d

STEPh-b*h1-b1-s
10.6 The Material Catalog

The Material Catalog contains information on material grades. Materials are displayed in a
hierarchical tree grouped according to material types, for example, steel and concrete. Material
grades are located under each material type in the tree.
By default, the Material Catalog contains standard, environment-specific materials. You can add,
modify, and delete material grades.
Tekla Structures stores the Material Catalog information in the matdb.bin file.
Important When you work with the material grades, note the usage of the Update, OK and Cancel buttons in
buttons in the the Modify Material Catalog dialog box.
Modify Material
Catalog dialog
box
Button Description
Saves the changes to the computer memory until you click OK.
Saves the changes on the hard disk.

Tekla Structures only saves the modified catalog on the hard disk when you
click OK to close the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box and then click OK in
the Save confirmation dialog box.
Closes the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box without saving the changes.
Note that all changes made to the catalog will be lost even if you have
clicked Update, because the changes have not been saved on the hard disk.
The changes made to the catalog are visible during one session, because the
catalog is using the computer’s memory. When you start Tekla Structures the
next time, the previous data is restored from the hard disk.
When you first open a model, Tekla Structures reads the data from the catalog on the hard disk and
stores it in the computer’s memory
When you select a profile, Tekla Structures reads the data from the Material Catalog in the computer
memory and displays it in the Modify Material Catalog dialog box. This is faster than accessing the
data from the hard disk.
See also Modifying the Material Catalog (269)

Adding a new material grade (269)
Deleting a material grade (270)
Adding a user attribute to a material grade (270)
Exporting a part of the Material Catalog (271)
Advanced modeling 268 The Material Catalog

Creating user-defined material symbols (273)
Modifying the Material Catalog

To modify the Material Catalog:
1. Click Modeling > Material Catalog... to open the Modify Material Catalog dialog box.
2. Select a material grade in the tree and modify its properties.
Use the four tabs to modify the properties.
• Use the General tab for entering three alternative names for the material. The names are
usually the material names used in different countries or standards. The tab also contains
the profile and plate density values.
• Use the Analysis tab for entering information on the properties used in structural analysis.
• Use the Design tab for entering information on the design-specific properties, such as
strengths and partial safety factors.
• Use the User attributes tab for creating your own attributes for material grades.
For example, you can define a paint layer thickness, or the maximum grain size of concrete
using a user-defined attribute.
The modified Material Catalog is saved in the current model folder and is available only for that
model. To make the modified catalog available for all the other models, use export and import.
See also The Material Catalog (268)

Adding a new material grade

You can add a new material grade either by modifying a copy of an existing, similar material grade,
or by creating a new material grade.
To add a new material grade:
2. Select a material grade that is similar to the one you wish to create.
3. Right-click and select Copy Grade.
A copy of the material grade with the name COPY is added to the material tree.
4. Change the material grade name by clicking the grade and entering a new name for it.
5. Modify the material grade properties.
6. Click OK to save the material grade and close the Modify Material Catalog dialog box.
OR
2. Select a material type, for example, steel.
3. Right-click and select Add Grade.
A new material grade is added under to the material type you selected.
4. Change the material grade name by clicking the grade and entering a new name for it.
5. Enter the material grade properties.
6. Click OK to save the material grade and close the Modify Material Catalog dialog box.
Limitations You cannot add material types. Only the following material types are available in the Material
Catalog:

• Steel
• Concrete
• Reinforcing bar
• Reinforcement mesh
• Timber
• Miscellaneous

Deleting a material grade

To delete a material grade:
2. Select the material grade that you want to delete.
3. Right-click and select Delete Grade.
4. Click OK to close the Modify Material Catalog dialog box.

Adding a user attribute to a material grade

You can add user attributes and their values to the material grades. The user attributes can then be
used, for example, in filtering.
To add a user attribute to a material grade:
2. On the User attributes tab, click Definitions... to open the Modify Material Properties dialog box.
4. To define a user attribute, click each item on a row.
a In the Category list, select a material category to which the user attribute is applied.
b In the Design code list, select a design code to which the attribute is added.
c In the Material type list, select a material type for the attribute.
d In the Quantity type list, select the type of information that the user attribute contains,
for example, weight, area, ratio, or string.
e In the Order column, define the order in which the user attributes are shown in the
dialog box. Smaller values are shown first.
f In the Property name column, define a name for the property.
The name is saved in the catalog and can be used in reports and templates. When
Property name is used in a template, MATERIAL.PROPERTY_NAME indicates where the
property name appears.
g In the Label column, define a label for the attribute.
5. Click Update.
6. Click OK to close the Modify Material Properties dialog box.

Exporting a material catalog
Exporting and importing are used to merge material catalogs. Material catalogs are exported from
Tekla Structures models as .lis files.
• Upgrade to newer version of Tekla Structures and you want to use a customized material
• Want to combine material catalogs that are stored in different locations.
• Want to share material catalog information with other users.
To export a material catalog:
2. Click Export....
3. Browse for the folder where you want to save the exported file.
By default, the file is save to the current model folder.
5. Click OK.
The Export... command exports the entire catalog.

See also Exporting a part of the Material Catalog (271)

Exporting a part of the Material Catalog

If you do not want to export the whole Material Catalog, you can export a branch of the material
tree, meaning all the material grades grouped under one material type, or a single material grade.
To export a part of the Material Catalog:
2. Select material grades to be exported.
• To export a branch of the material tree, right-click the branch and select Export Grades.
• To export a single material grade, right-click the material grade and select Export Grade.
3. Browse for the folder where you want to save the export files.
By default, the file is saved to the current model folder.
5. Click OK.
See also Exporting a material catalog (271)


Importing a material catalog

Exporting and importing are used to merge material catalogs. Material catalogs are imported to
Tekla Structures models as .lis files. You can move an exported .lis file to any model folder and
import it into an existing material catalog.
• Upgrade to newer version of Tekla Structures and you want to use a customized material
• Want to combine material catalogs that are stored in different locations.
• Want to share material catalog information with other users.
To import a material catalog:
1. Open the model to which you want to import a material catalog.
3. Click Import....
4. Browse for the folder that contains the import file, and select the file.
5. Click OK.
If a material with a same name as the material being imported already exists, the Import
confirmation dialog box appears and you have three options:
• Replace: The existing material is replaced with the imported material.
• Merge: Material properties that are different in the import file are added to the existing
material. All the other properties remain unchanged.
Use this option to import only certain elements of the material catalog, such as user
attributes.
• Leave: The existing material is not replaced and the material definitions in the import file
are ignored.
If you select the Apply for all check box, Tekla Structures uses the same option (Replace, Merge,
or Leave) for all the existing materials that have the same name as the one being imported.
If a user attribute with a different definition already exists, you are prompted to Replace or
Leave the existing attribute.
You cannot import the .lis files that have been created in a
previous Tekla Structures version. However, material catalogs from
previous versions are automatically converted when a model is
opened in a newer version. To create a suitable export file, open the
relevant model in a new Tekla Structures version and export the
catalog.
Do not save your model in the new Tekla Structures version, or you
will not be able to open it in a previous version.
See also Exporting a material catalog (271)

Exporting a part of the Material Catalog (271)

Creating user-defined material symbols
You can replace the existing material definitions with your own definitions and use them, for
example, in drawing part marks. Material definitions can contain text, numbers and symbols.
To create user-define material symbols:
1. Save the symbol file user_material_symbols.sym in the symbol folder (usually the folder
..\Tekla Structures\<version>\environments\common\symbols\).
2. Create a text file that contains your material definitions.
Create the file using a text editor, for example Microsoft Notepad.
Each row in the file defines a material. Use the following syntax: material_name
symbol_file_name@n, where
• material_name is the name of the material used in the material catalog

• symbol_file_name is the symbol file name to be used
• n is the number of the symbol.
For example:
S235JRG1 user_material_symbols@1 B
S235JRG2 user_material_symbols@2 C
S235JR user_material_symbols@0 A
S275JR user_material_symbols@3 D
S355JR user_material_symbols@4 E
The order of material names in the definition file is relevant to the

conversion. Materials with more specific names need to be listed
before the ones with similar, but simpler names, for example,
S235JRG1 must be listed before S235JR. Otherwise they both get
the same symbol.
3. Save the file for example with the name user_material_definitions.txt.

All the named materials in the Material Catalog will be replaced with the ones defined in this
file.
4. Set the name of the file as a value for the advanced option
XS_MATERIAL_SYMBOL_REPRESENTATION_FILE in Tools > Options > Advanced Option... >
Drawing Properties as follows:
set XS_MATERIAL_SYMBOL_REPRESENTATION_FILE=user_material_definitions.txt
You can also write a full path to the material definition file. Without the path Tekla Structures
searches for the file in the model, firm, project, and system folders.
See also The Material Catalog (268)

Symbols in drawings
10.7 The Bolt Catalog and the Bolt Assembly Catalog

The Bolt Catalog contains bolt assembly elements, for example, bolts of different sizes and lengths,
nuts and washers.
The Bolt Assembly Catalog contains bolt assemblies that are made up of bolts, washers and nuts.
Tekla Structures stores the Bolt Catalog information in the screwdb.db file and the Bolt Assembly
Catalog information in the assdb.db file.
Advanced modeling 273 The Bolt Catalog and the Bolt Assembly Catalog
You cannot use a bolt if it does not belong to a bolt assembly.
See also How the Bolt Catalog and the Bolt Assembly Catalog work together (275)
Adding bolts to the Bolt Catalog (276)
Adding bolt assemblies to the Bolt Assembly Catalog (276)
Merging bolt catalogs when you upgrade to a new Tekla Structures version (277)
Creating studs (278)
Exporting a bolt catalog (278)
Importing a bolt catalog (279)
Bolt Catalog properties (348)
Bolt Assembly Catalog properties (347)
How the Bolt Catalog and the Bolt Assembly Catalog work together
The Bolt standard options are read from the Bolt Assembly Catalog.
The Bolt Assembly Catalog defines which bolt standard is used in the bolt
assembly.
The Bolt Catalog contains the different bolt diameters used in the bolt
standard.
The Bolt size options are read from the Bolt Catalog depending on the selected
Bolt standard.
See also The Bolt Catalog and the Bolt Assembly Catalog (273)
Bolt Catalog properties (348)
Bolt Assembly Catalog properties (347)
Adding bolts to the Bolt Catalog

To add bolts to the Bolt Catalog:
1. Click Detailing > Bolts > Bolt Catalog... to open the Bolt Catalog dialog box.
2. Define the properties for a new bolt.
Name can be 40 characters long.
Standard can be 25 characters long.
3. Click Update.
4. Click Add to add the bolt to the Bolt Catalog.
5. Click OK.
The Save confirmation dialog box appears.
6. Select Save changes to model folder to save the changes in the current model folder, and click
OK.
See also Bolt Catalog properties (348)

How the Bolt Catalog and the Bolt Assembly Catalog work together (275)
Adding bolt assemblies to the Bolt Assembly Catalog

To add bolt assemblies to the Bolt Assembly Catalog:
1. Click Detailing > Bolts > Bolt Assembly Catalog... to open the Bolt Assembly Catalog dialog box.
2. Define the properties for a new bolt assembly.
Standard can be 30 characters long.
All the other properties can be 25 characters long.
You can add new bolt standards in the Bolt Assembly Catalog when
you are adding bolt assemblies. To do this, enter the new standard
in the Standard box.
3. Click Update.
4. Click Add to add the bolt assembly to the Bolt Assembly Catalog.
5. Click OK.
The Save confirmation dialog box appears.
6. Select Save changes to model folder to save the changes in the current model folder, and click
OK.
A bolt assembly can contain only bolts or studs, not both of them.
See also Bolt Assembly Catalog properties (347)
How the Bolt Catalog and the Bolt Assembly Catalog work together (275)
Merging bolt catalogs when you upgrade to a new Tekla Structures version
When you upgrade to a new Tekla Structures version, you can merge the new bolt catalog with an
existing bolt catalog, and retain any customizations made to the existing bolt catalog. Only the bolt
catalog additions from the new Tekla Structures version are merged. This prevents Tekla Structures
overwriting existing bolt catalog entries, or creating duplicate entries.
Do not simply copy and paste the bolt catalog from a previous Tekla
Structures version in the new Tekla Structures version. Copying
results to a bolt catalog where the additions made to the newer
Tekla Structures version are lost.
To merge the bolt catalogs:

1. In the new Tekla Structures version:
a Open the model that contains the bolt catalog you want to merge with another bolt
catalog.
Do not save the model, or you are not able to use it in previous Tekla Structures
versions.
b Click Detailing > Bolts > Export Bolt Catalog.
The bolt catalog file screwdb.lis is created in the current model folder.
2. In a previous Tekla Structures version:

a Open the same model.
b Click Detailing > Bolts > Import Bolt Catalog to import the bolt catalog file
screwdb.lis from the current model folder.
Tekla Structures does not replace the entries that have the same names as the entries
in the import file.
The merged catalog is now available.
3. In the new Tekla Structures version:

a Rename the screwdb.db bolt catalog file in the ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\<environment>\profil folder.
b Copy the screwdb.db bolt catalog file that contains the merged bolt catalog from the
previous Tekla Structures version folder ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\<environment>\profil and place
it to the new Tekla Structures version folder ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\<environment>\profil.
See also Exporting a bolt catalog (278)

Importing a part of the Bolt Catalog (280)
Creating studs
A stud is special type of bolt that is welded to steel parts to transfer loads between steel and
concrete. You cannot use studs unless you have defined a stud assembly that contains the
assembly's name and material.
To create studs:
1. Click Detailing > Bolts > Bolt Catalog... and define a stud bolt.
Enter values for the following properties:
• Name: Name for the stud bolt.
• Type:
• Standard: This name is needed when creating bolt assembly for the stud.
• Diameter: Shank diameter.
• Length: Stud length.
• Weight: Stud weight.
• top thick: Head thickness.
• top diameter: Head diameter.
2. Click Detailing > Bolts > Bolt Assembly Catalog and define a stud bolt assembly.
• Select the standard for the stud bolt.
• Set all the other bolt assembly parts to None.
3. To create studs in the model, create bolts and select the stud assembly standard.
See also The Bolt Catalog and the Bolt Assembly Catalog (273)
Exporting a bolt catalog

Exporting and importing are used to merge bolt catalogs. Bolt catalogs are exported from Tekla
Structures models as .lis files.
• Upgrade to newer version of Tekla Structures and you want to use a customized bolt catalog
from a previous version.
• Want to combine bolt catalogs that are stored in different locations.
• Want to share bolt catalog information with other users.
To export a bolt catalog:
1. Open the model that contains the bolt catalog you want to export.
2. Click Detailing > Bolts > Export Bolt Catalog.
The bolt catalog is as the screwdb.lis file in the current model folder.
The Export Bolt Catalog command exports the entire bolt catalog. To
export only part of the Bolt Catalog, edit the export file to contain
only the required elements.
The Bolt Assembly Catalog cannot be exported.
See also Importing a bolt catalog (279)

Importing a part of the Bolt Catalog (280)
Importing a bolt catalog

Exporting and importing are used to merge bolt catalogs. Bolt catalogs are imported to Tekla
Structures models as .lis files.
• Upgrade to newer version of Tekla Structures and you want to use a customized bolt catalog
from a previous version.
• Want to combine bolt catalogs that are stored in different locations.
• Want to share bolt catalog information with other users.
To import a bolt catalog:
1. Open the model to which you want to import a bolt catalog.
2. Copy the screwdb.lis file that you want to import to the current model folder.
3. Click Detailing > Bolts > Import Bolt Catalog to import the bolt catalog file screwdb.lis from
the current model folder.
Tekla Structures does not replace the entries in the existing Bolt Catalog that have the same
names as the entries in the import file.
4. Check the status bar for error messages.
To view errors, click Tools > Display Log File > Session History....
The Bolt Assembly Catalog cannot be imported.
See also Importing a part of the Bolt Catalog (280)

Importing a part of the Bolt Catalog
If you do not want to import the entire Bolt Catalog, you can select the parts to be imported.
To import a part of the Bolt Catalog:
1. Open the model that contains the Bolt Catalog you want to use.
2. Click Detailing > Bolts > Export Bolt Catalog.
The bolt catalog is saved as the screwdb.lis file in the current model folder.
3. Open the screwdb.lis file using a text editor, for example, Microsoft Notepad.
Each entry is listed on a separate row.
4. Delete the unwanted rows from the file.
Do not delete the STARTLIST and ENDLIST rows.
5. Save the file with the name screwdb.lis.

6. Open the model to which you want to import the Bolt Catalog.
7. Copy the screwdb.lis file that you want to import to the current model folder.
8. Click Detailing > Bolts > Import Bolt Catalog to import the bolt catalog file screwdb.lis from
the current model folder.
See also Importing a bolt catalog (279)

10.8 The Reinforcing Bar Catalog

The Reinforcing Bar Catalog contains details of the reinforcement used in concrete structures. It
includes both the standard bending radius and the standard hook dimensions.
Tekla Structures stores the Reinforcing Bar Catalog information in the rebar_database.inp file.
located in the ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\<environment>\profil folder.
See also Basic reinforcement properties
10.9 The Reinforcing Bar Shape Catalog

The Reinforcing Bar Shape Catalog contains a list of predefined reinforcement shapes. The predefined
shapes are based on the shapes that you have defined in Rebar Shape Manager and saved in the
RebarShapeRules.xml file.
The RebarShapeRules.xml is stored by default in the ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\<environment>\system folder. If you create
your own reinforcing bar bending shapes, Tekla Structures stores another RebarShapeRules.xml
file in the current model folder.
See also Creating reinforcement using the Reinforcing Bar Shape Catalog
Advanced modeling 280 The Reinforcing Bar Catalog

10.10 The Component Catalog
Tekla Structures contains the Component Catalog where all system components, custom components
and sketched cross sections are stored.
The content and the folder structure of Component Catalog are controlled with the
ComponentCatalogTreeView.txt and the ComponentCatalog.txt files, located in the
..\Tekla Structures\<version>\environments\<environment>\system folder.
Custom components and sketched cross sections are saved in the model folder in the xslib.db1
file.
See also Using the component catalog
10.11 Sketched cross sections

This section explains how to create and modify your own cross sections, and how to use them in a
model.
The cross sections you create using the cross section sketch editor can be parametric or fixed. You
can change the dimensions of parametric cross sections each time you use them in a model.
Contents Opening the cross section sketch editor (281)

Sketching the outline of a cross section (284)
Refining the shape of a sketched cross section (286)
Adding dimensions to a sketched cross section (289)
Defining positioning planes for a sketched cross section (293)
Checking a sketched cross section (297)
Saving a sketched cross section (298)
Modifying a sketched cross section (298)
Using sketched cross sections in a model (301)
Importing and exporting sketched cross sections (302)
Example: Creating a symmetric C-shaped cross section (303)
Opening the cross section sketch editor

Use the cross section sketch editor to create and modify your own profile cross sections.
To open the cross section sketch editor:
1. Open a Tekla Structures model.
2. Click Modeling > Profiles > Define Cross Section in Sketch Editor....
Tekla Structures opens the cross section sketch editor, the Sketch Browser, and the Variables
dialog box.
Advanced modeling 281 The Component Catalog

See also Sketch Browser (282)
Variables (283)
Sketch Browser
The Sketch Browser shows the objects (lines, arcs, circles, constraints, dimensions, and chamfers) of a
cross section sketch in a hierarchical, tree-like structure. The Sketch Browser automatically opens
when you open the cross section sketch editor.
When you click an object in the cross section sketch editor, Tekla Structures highlights the object in
the Sketch Browser, and vice versa.
Advanced modeling 282 Sketched cross sections

The Sketch Browser displays the following information about a cross section:
• Extrusion type (0, 1, or 2) and thickness of the sketch.
• Lines, arcs, and circles
• Constraints
• Distances and dimensions and their values
• Chamfers and their type (0=None, 1=Line ... 7=Line and arc) and dimensions.
See also Opening the cross section sketch editor (281)

Cross section extrusion types (300)
Variables
Use the Variables dialog box to define the properties of a sketched cross section. Variables can define
fixed properties, or they can include formulas, so that Tekla Structures calculates the property value
each time you use the profile in a model.
The Variables dialog box automatically opens when you open the cross section sketch editor.

Variables properties
About variables
Sketching the outline of a cross section

When you create a new cross section, start by sketching the outline and the holes of the cross
section using lines, arcs, and circles.
Ensure that you create a closed shape, unless you are creating a cross section of a consistent
thickness, such as a cold rolled section.
The maximum number of points in a sketched cross section is 100.
See also Sketching a polyline (284)

Sketching an arc (285)
Sketching a circle (285)
Sketching a polyline
You can create line segments in the cross section sketch editor by picking points. Tekla Structures
automatically creates coincident constraints between the line segments and displays a chamfer
symbol where line segments meet.
To sketch a polyline:
1. Open the cross section sketch editor.
2. Click the Sketch polyline icon:
3. Pick points to create each line segment.

4. Click the middle mouse button to create the polyline.

See also Sketching the outline of a cross section (284)
Sketching an arc
You can create an arc in the cross section sketch editor by picking three points.
To sketch an arc:
2. Click the Sketch arc icon:
3. Pick three points to define the arc.
You can use the advanced option XS_CS_CHAMFER_DIVIDE_ANGLE

to define the smoothness of the arc.

XS_CS_CHAMFER_DIVIDE_ANGLE
Sketching a circle
You can create a circle in the cross section sketch editor by picking two points.
To sketch a circle:
2. Click the Sketch circle icon:
3. Pick a point to indicate the center of the circle (1).

4. Pick a point to indicate the radius of the circle (2).
Refining the shape of a sketched cross section

After you have sketched the outline of a cross section, use constraints to refine your sketch and lock
the shape. For example, you can straighten lines, create 90 degree angles, force lines to meet, close
the shape, and add chamfers in corners.
To straighten the entire profile, use horizontal and vertical constraints in conjunction with other
constraints. Although the shape is locked, you can still rotate the profile in the model.
See also Adding a parallel constraint (286)

Adding a perpendicular constraint (287)
Adding a coincident constraint (287)
Adding a fixed constraint (288)
Adding a horizontal constraint (288)
Adding a vertical constraint (289)
Deleting a constraint (289)
Adding a parallel constraint

You can force two lines in a sketched cross section to be parallel to each other.
Before you start, sketch the shape of the cross section in the cross section sketch editor.
To add a parallel constraint:
1. Click the Parallel constraint icon:
2. Select a line in the sketch (1).

3. Select another line in the sketch (2).

See also Refining the shape of a sketched cross section (286)
Adding a perpendicular constraint

You can force a line in a sketched cross section to be at a 90 degree angle to another line you select.
The lines do not have to intersect.
To add a perpendicular constraint:
1. Click the Perpendicular constraint icon:
2. Select a line in the sketch (1).

3. Select another line in the sketch (2).
Adding a coincident constraint

You can force two lines in a sketched cross section to start or end at the same point, by extending or
shortening one or both lines. The lines do not have to intersect.
Tekla Structures automatically creates coincident constraints:

• Where two lines meet.
• Between line segments when you draw them with the Sketch
polyline tool.
• Between the start of the first line segment and the end of the
last line segment in a shape, if they are within a certain
distance of each other.
To add a coincident constraint:

1. Ensure that the Snap to end points snap switch is active.
2. Click the Coincident constraint icon:
3. Pick the end of the first line (1).

4. Pick the end of the second line. (2)
Adding a fixed constraint

You can lock the position and angle of a line in a sketched cross section so that other constraints do
not affect it.
To add a fixed constraint:
1. Click the Fixed constraint icon:
2. Select a line in the sketch.
Adding a horizontal constraint

Use horizontal constraints to force a line in a sketched cross section to be parallel to the local x axis.
Tekla Structures automatically creates horizontal constraints when you create lines that are nearly
horizontal.
To add a horizontal constraint:
1. Click the Horizontal constraint icon:
2. Select the lines you want to straighten (1, 2).

Adding a vertical constraint

Use vertical constraints to force a line in a sketched cross section to be parallel to the local y axis.
Tekla Structures automatically creates vertical constraints when you create lines that are nearly
vertical.
To add a vertical constraint:
1. Click the Vertical constraint icon:
2. Select the lines you want to straighten (1, 2).
Deleting a constraint
To delete a constraint from a sketched cross section:
1. Click to open the Sketch Browser.

2. Select the constraint you want to delete.
4. Click Refresh.
Adding dimensions to a sketched cross section

After you have sketched a cross section, use dimensions to make different distances in the cross
section parametric. You can use these dimensions to define the size of the profile cross section
when you use it in a model.

Tekla Structures also adds the dimensions you create to the list of variables that you can use in
calculations.
Do not create too many dimensions in a sketch, or the dimensions

will not be able to adjust when the values are changed.
In the following example, if you create the dimension marked in
red, the dimension b1 will no longer work:
See also Adding a radial dimension to a sketch (290)

Adding an angle dimension to a sketch (291)
Adding a dimension between two points in a sketch (291)
Adding a horizontal dimension to a sketch (292)
Adding a vertical dimension to a sketch (292)
Deleting a dimension from a sketch (293)
Adding a radial dimension to a sketch

You can create a radial dimension for an arc or a circle in a sketched cross section.
To add a radial dimension:
1. Click the Sketch radial dimension icon:
2. Select the arc or circle.
See also Adding dimensions to a sketched cross section (289)

Adding an angle dimension to a sketch
You can create an angle dimension between two lines in a sketched cross section. The angle is
calculated anti-clockwise from the first line you select.
To add an angle dimension:
1. Click the Sketch angle dimension icon:
2. Select the first line (1).

3. Select the second line (2).
If you are unable to see the angle symbol, scroll with the mouse
wheel to zoom in.
Adding a dimension between two points in a sketch

You can add a dimension to a sketched cross section, between two points you pick.
To add a dimension between two points in a sketch:
1. Click the Sketch free dimension icon:
2. Pick a point to indicate the starting point of the dimension (1).

3. Pick a point to indicate the end point of the dimension (2).
4. Pick a point to indicate the location of the dimension lines and text.

Adding a horizontal dimension to a sketch

You can add a horizontal dimension to a sketched cross section, between two points you pick.
To add a horizontal dimension to a sketch:
1. Click the Sketch horizontal dimension icon:

Adding a vertical dimension to a sketch

You can add a vertical dimension to a sketched cross section, between two points you pick.
To add a vertical dimension to a sketch:
1. Click the Sketch vertical dimension icon:


Deleting a dimension from a sketch

To delete a dimension from a sketched cross section:
1. Select the dimension you want to delete.
Defining positioning planes for a sketched cross section

When you sketch a cross section, you can define positioning planes for it. With positioning planes
you can determine the planes Tekla Structures will use for positioning parts and components.
See also Part positioning planes (293)

Connection positioning planes (294)
Showing and hiding positioning planes (295)
Moving positioning planes (295)
Moving positioning plane handles (296)
Reverting to default positioning planes (297)
Part positioning planes

With part positioning planes you can determine how Tekla Structures positions parts that have a
sketched profile cross section. These planes are used for the On plane and At depth settings for parts,
and also when placing custom components that are bound to boundary planes.
The part positioning planes are displayed in blue:

The On plane options Left and Right are set according to the vertical blue planes, and the Middle
option is halfway between them.
The same principle applies to the At depth setting: the Front and Behind options are set according to
the horizontal blue planes, and the Middle option is halfway between them.
Example You can define part positioning planes so that an asymmetric cross section will be positioned
according to its web only. In the following example, the Middle option is illustrated in gray dotted
lines:
Middle option
See also Defining positioning planes for a sketched cross section (293)
Connection positioning planes

With connection positioning planes you can determine how Tekla Structures positions components
in relation to the component main part that has a sketched profile cross section.
The connection positioning planes are displayed in green:

Example The following image shows the default connection positioning planes of a double tee slab that was
created as a sketched cross section. The green line illustrates the default connection positioning
planes.
To place connections according to the location of the stems of the double tee, move the connection
positioning planes as shown below.
Showing and hiding positioning planes

To show or hide the positioning planes, do one of the following:
To Do this
Show or hide the part
positioning planes Click .
Show or hide the connection
positioning planes Click .
Moving positioning planes

To move positioning planes:
1. Display the positioning planes you want to move.
2. Select the positioning planes.

3. Select one of the positioning plane handles.
The same handle controls both the vertical and horizontal plane, so
you can move them both at the same time.
4. Right-click and select a Move command from the pop-up menu.

5. Move the planes like any other object in Tekla Structures.
Showing and hiding positioning planes (295)
Moving an object
Moving positioning plane handles

You can move the handles of each positioning plane. If you move the handles away from the
outmost corners of the sketched cross section, you must bind them by adding a dimension to each
handle. Otherwise the positioning will not function correctly in the model.
To move the positioning plane handles:
1. Click the positioning plane to display the handles.
The handles are displayed in pink. By default, the handles are at the outmost corners of the
sketched cross section. For example:
2. Click a handle to select it.

3. Move the handle like any other object in Tekla Structures. For example:
a Right-click and select Move.
b Pick the origin for moving.
c Pick a destination point.
4. If the handle is not at the outmost corner of the cross section, add a dimension between the
handle and the corner.
Example In the following examples, the left handle of the positioning plane has been bound by using a
horizontal dimension (b1):

Reverting to default positioning planes

You can revert back to the default positioning planes of a sketched cross section if you have moved
the planes.
To revert to the default positioning planes, do one of the following:
To Do this
Revert to the default part
positioning planes 1. Click to show the part positioning planes.
2. Select the part positioning planes.
4. Click again to check that the planes have

reverted back to the default.
Revert to the default connection
positioning planes 1. Click to show the connection positioning planes.
2. Select the connection positioning planes.
4. Click again to check that the planes have

reverted back to the default.
Checking a sketched cross section

To check that the constraints and dimensions in a sketched cross section work correctly:
1. Double-click a dimension line to open the Distance Properties dialog box.
2. Change the Value field.
3. Click Modify.
Tekla Structures updates the cross section in the cross section sketch editor.
4. Check that the shape of the profile does not change and that the dimensions adjust correctly.
5. Click Cancel to close the Distance Properties dialog box.

See also Using sketched cross sections in a model (301)
Saving a sketched cross section

Tekla Structures saves the cross section in the current model folder. The sketched cross sections are
available in the Others section in the profile catalog.
Note the following limitations when naming cross sections:

• You cannot use the name of a fixed profile.
• You cannot include numbers, special characters, or blank spaces
in the cross section name.
• Lower case letters are automatically converted into upper case
letters.
To save a sketched cross section, do one of the following:
To Do this
Save a new cross section
1. Click Save sketch .
2. Type a name in the Prefix field, and then click OK.
Update an existing cross section
1. Click Save sketch .
2. Click Yes when prompted to update the existing cross
section.
Save a copy of the cross section
under a different name 1. Click Save sketch as .
2. Type a new name in the Prefix field, and then click OK.
Sketched cross sections are saved in the xslib.db1 file, which is

a library file that contains custom components and sketches.
Ordinary profiles are saved in the profdb.bin file.

Importing and exporting sketched cross sections (302)
Modifying a sketched cross section

You can modify existing cross section sketches, for example, by modifying chamfers or dimensions.
You can also move corners or holes by moving the handles. The chamfers are moved automatically
when you move the handles.
• You cannot change dimensions that have been calculated using

formulas in the Variables dialog box.
• Constraints may also prevent you from changing dimensions.

To modify a sketched cross section:
1. Click Modeling > Profiles > Edit Cross Section in Sketch Editor...
The Component Catalog dialog box opens.
2. Double-click a cross section to open it in the cross section sketch editor.
Sketched cross sections have the symbol next to their name.

3. Double-click an object to modify its properties.
The sketch objects you can modify appear in yellow.
4. Modify the object properties.
5. Click Modify in the object properties dialog box.
6. Close the object properties dialog box.
7. Click the Save sketch as icon to save the changes.
See also Modifying chamfers in a sketch (299)

Setting the sketch thickness (299)
Modifying chamfers in a sketch

You can change the shape and dimensions of chamfers in a sketched cross section. For example, you
can create rounded cross section corners.
To modify a chamfer:
1. Double-click a chamfer symbol in the cross section sketch editor.

2. In the Chamfer Properties dialog box, change the shape and dimensions of the chamfer.
3. Click Modify.
See also Modifying a sketched cross section (298)

Setting the sketch thickness

If you have sketched an open shape, such as a cold rolled section, you must define the extrusion
type and thickness of the sketch in the Sketch Browser. The thickness can be either fixed or
parametric.
To set the thickness of a sketch:

1. In the cross section sketch editor, sketch an open polyline.

• To set a fixed thickness:
a In the Sketch Browser, right-click Thickness and select Add Equation from the pop-up
menu.
b Type the value of the thickness after =.
• To define a parametric thickness:
a In the Variables dialog box, add a new parameter variable for Length (for example, P1).
b In the Formula column, define the default value for the parameter variable.
c In the Sketch Browser, right-click Thickness and select Add Equation from the pop-up
menu.
d Type the name of the parameter variable (for example, P1) after =.
3. To define the extrusion type:
a In the Sketch Browser, right-click Extrusion Type and select Add Equation from the pop-
up menu.
b Type the extrusion type number (0, 1, or 2) after =.

Cross section extrusion types

The extrusion type defines how a cross section of a consistent thickness is extruded. When you
change the thickness, the profile grows inwards, outwards, or symmetrically in both directions,
depending on the extrusion type. You must define the extrusion type for cross sections that consist
of an open polyline.
The extrusion types are:
Type Description Image

0 The sketch is extruded symmetrically
to the outside and inside of the
polyline.
(Default)
1 The sketch is extruded to the outside

of the polyline.

Type Description Image
2 The sketch is extruded to the inside
of the polyline.
See also Setting the sketch thickness (299)
Using sketched cross sections in a model

Once you have created a cross section and saved it in the profile catalog, you are ready to use it in
the model. If you have applied constraints correctly, the shape of the profile will be maintained
when you change its dimensions.
To use a sketched cross section for a new part in a model:
1. Double-click a toolbar button to open the part properties dialog box.
For example, to open the beam properties dialog box, double-click .

2. Open the Select Profile dialog box.
• For concrete parts, click the Select... button next to the Shape field.
3. Open the Others branch at the end of the profile tree.
4. Select a profile with the sketched cross section.
5. If the cross section is parametric, you can define its dimensions in the Value column on the
General tab.
6. Click OK to close the Select Profile dialog box.
7. Click Apply to use the selected profile in the model.
8. Pick points to place the part in the model.
See also Creating an image of a sketched cross section (301)
Creating an image of a sketched cross section

To illustrate the shape and dimensions of your profile cross section, you can create an image of the
cross section you have sketched. Tekla Structures displays the image when you browse for sketched
profiles in the profile catalog.
The image must be in Windows bitmap format (*.bmp) and can be created with any bitmap editor,
for example Microsoft Paint. You can also take a screenshot of your cross section in the cross
section sketch editor and use that image.
To create an image of a sketched cross section using a screenshot:
2. Click the sketch to ensure it is the active view.
3. Press F12 on your keyboard to take a screenshot of the sketch without the borders.
Tekla Structures saves the screenshot in the
..\TeklaStructuresModels\<model>\snapshots folder.
4. Open the screenshot in any graphics editor (for example, Microsoft Paint) and modify the image
if necessary.

5. Save the image in bmp format in the ..\Tekla Structures\<version>\nt\bitmaps
folder.
Use the cross section name as the filename, for example, mysketch.bmp.
See also Using sketched cross sections in a model (301)

Creating a screenshot (139)
Saving a screenshot in bitmap format (140)
Importing and exporting sketched cross sections

To use a sketched cross section in other Tekla Structures models, you have to export the cross
section to a file (*.uel), and then import the file into another Tekla Structures model.
Use the Component Catalog to import and export sketched cross sections. They have the following
symbols and numbers in the Component Catalog:
See also Importing sketched cross sections (302)

Exporting sketched cross sections (303)
Importing sketched cross sections

After you have exported sketched cross sections to a file, you can import the cross sections to
another Tekla Structures model.
To import sketched cross sections:
1. Open the Tekla Structures model you want to import to.
2. Press Ctrl+F to open the Component Catalog.
3. If you need to view the sketched cross sections and profiles already available in the current
model, select Sketched profiles from the list box.
4. In the component list, right-click and select Import... from the pop-up menu.

5. In the Import Components dialog box, browse for the folder which contains the exported file
(*.uel).
6. Select the file to import.
7. Click OK.
If you have created a profile using a sketched cross section and

want to use the profile in another model, you need to import both
the cross section and profile. To use profiles from a model, you can
either export and then import the entire profile catalog or a part of
it, or copy the profdb.bin file.
To automatically import all *.uel files from a folder when creating

a new model, use the advanced option XS_UEL_IMPORT_FOLDER.
See also Importing and exporting sketched cross sections (302)

Exporting the profile catalog
Exporting elements from the profile catalog
Exporting sketched cross sections

To export sketched cross sections:
1. Open the Tekla Structures model you want to export from.
3. Select Sketched profiles from the list.
Tekla Structures lists all the sketched cross sections available in the current model.
4. Select the cross sections you want to export. To export several cross sections, hold down the
Ctrl key when selecting.
5. Right-click and select Export... from the pop-up menu.
6. In the Export Components dialog box, enter a name for the export file in the Selection box.
7. If you want to save the export file to a specific location, browse for the folder.
By default, Tekla Structures saves the export file in the current model folder.
8. Click OK.
See also Importing and exporting sketched cross sections (302)
Example: Creating a symmetric C-shaped cross section

This example shows how to create a cross section using variables. You will create a symmetric C-
shaped cross section with the dimensions b1 = b2 and h2 = h3. When you use the profile in the
model, you can change the following dimensions:
• Width (b1)
• Total height (h1)
• Height (h2)
• Thickness (P1)
• Chamfers (P2)

In the following example, you will first sketch a C-shaped cross section and add dimensions to it.
After that, you will set the cross section thickness and modify the chamfers. Finally, you will use the
cross section in a model.
See also Example: Sketching a C-shaped cross section (304)

Example: Adding dimensions to the cross section (305)
Example: Setting the cross section thickness (306)
Example: Modifying the chamfers of the cross section (307)
Example: Using the cross section in a model (308)
Example: Sketching a C-shaped cross section

To sketch the outline of a C-shaped cross section:
2. Use the Sketch polyline command to create a rough C-shaped cross section.
At this stage, the cross section does not have to be symmetric or have the right dimensions.
3. Straighten the lines using the Add horizontal constraint and Add vertical constraint
commands.

4. Save the cross section and name it CSHAPE.

Sketching a polyline (284)
Adding a horizontal constraint (288)
Adding a vertical constraint (289)
Example: Adding dimensions to the cross section

To add dimensions to the cross section:
1. Use the Sketch horizontal dimension command to create the distances b1 and b2.
2. Use the Sketch vertical dimension command to create the distances h1, h2, and h3.

3. In the Variables dialog box, enter the following values for the distances:
4. Ensure that Visibility is set to Show for the distances b1, h1, and h2.
5. Save the cross section.
See also Adding a horizontal dimension to a sketch (292)

Adding a vertical dimension to a sketch (292)
Variables (283)
Example: Setting the cross section thickness

To set the cross section thickness:
1. In the Variables dialog box, do the following:
a Click Add to add a parameter variable P1.
b In the Formula box, enter 20.00.
c In the Visiblity box, select Show.
d In the Label in dialog box box, enter Thickness.
2. In the Sketch Browser, set the cross section thickness using the parameter variable P1.
a Right-click Thickness, select Add equation from the pop-up menu, and then enter =P1.
b Right-click ExtrusionType, select Add equation from the pop-up menu, and then enter
=2 to get the sketch extruded to the inside of the polyline.

See also Variables (283)

Sketch Browser (282)
Example: Modifying the chamfers of the cross section

To modify the chamfers of the cross section:
1. Double-click one of the cross section chamfers.
2. In the Chamfer Properties dialog box, do the following:
a Change the chamfer type to Line .

b Click Modify.
c Repeat steps a–b for all the cross section chamfers.
3. In the Variables dialog box, do the following:
a Click Add to add a parameter variable P2.
b In the Formula box, enter 10.00.
c In the Visiblity box, select Show.
d In the Label in dialog box box, enter Chamfer.
4. In the Sketch Browser, do the following:

a Double-click Chamfer constraint to open the chamfer properties.
b Right-click Chamfer X, select Add equation from the pop-up menu, and then enter =P2.
c Enter the same value for Chamfer Y.
d Repeat steps a–d for all the cross section chamfers.

See also Modifying chamfers in a sketch (299)

Variables (283)
Sketch Browser (282)
Example: Using the cross section in a model

To use the cross section in a model:
1. Double-click a toolbar button open the part properties dialog box.
2. Opent the Select Profile dialog box.
• For concrete parts, click the Select... button next to the Shape field.
3. Open the Others branch at the end of the profile tree, and select the CSHAPE profile.
4. If needed, modify the dimensions of the cross section profile on the General tab.
5. Click OK to apply the changes.

6. Pick points to place the part in the model.

Defining positioning planes for a sketched cross section (293)

10.12 Polybeam length calculation
This section explains how Tekla Structures calculates the length of a polybeam. Two template fields
control the length of a polybeam:
• LENGTH = total length - line cuts + fittings
Part and polygon cut do not affect the calculation.
• LENGTH_GROSS = total length + fittings
Tekla Structures calculates the length of a beam polygon line between its creation points. Chamfers
and fittings are taken into account. Polygon line is either the centerline or reference line, depending
on the settings of the advanced option
XS_CALCULATE_POLYBEAM_LENGTH_ALONG_REFERENCE_LINE.
If the beam ends are fitted or cut skew, Tekla Structures also checks the other edge, even if it would
not locate on the polygon line. If the other edge is longer, Tekla Structures adds the measure to the
length and if shorter, the length is unchanged. See the example below. This assures that the length
is the minimum length needed to fabricate the beam.
Cut
Creation point
LENGTH
Creation point
Fitting
The thick line represents the length of the polybeam.
Advanced modeling 309 Polybeam length calculation

The calculation gives a faulty result with a polybeam, which
includes cuts or fittings and where the extension of an end segment
intersects with another segment of the polybeam.
See also XS_CALCULATE_POLYBEAM_LENGTH_ALONG_REFERENCE_LINE

Advanced options and parameter settings affecting polybeam length calculation (310)
Advanced options and parameter settings affecting polybeam length

calculation
The chart below explains the process of polybeam length calculation. The following advanced
options and parameter settings affect how polybeam length is calculated:
• XS_CALCULATE_POLYBEAM_LENGTH_ALONG_REFERENCE_LINE
• XS_USE_OLD_POLYBEAM_LENGTH_CALCULATION
• XS_UNFOLDING_DONT_USE_NEUTRAL_AXIS_FOR_RADIUS
• unfolding parameters in the unfold_corner_ratios.inp
Advanced modeling 310 Polybeam length calculation

• If you have a polybeam with both curved and straight chamfers,
the length will be calculated using the calculation rules for
curved chamfers along the whole beam.
• This chart does not include information about polybeams with
cut lengths.
See also XS_CALCULATE_POLYBEAM_LENGTH_ALONG_REFERENCE_LINE

XS_USE_OLD_POLYBEAM_LENGTH_CALCULATION
XS_UNFOLDING_DONT_USE_NEUTRAL_AXIS_FOR_RADIUS
Unfolding parameters
10.13 Bolt length calculation

Tekla Structures uses values from the Bolt Catalog and the Bolt Assembly Catalog when calculating
the bolt length.
The chart and the detailed steps below explains the process of bolt length calculation.
Settings on the Bolt Properties dialog box affect the bolt length calculation process.
If the check box is selected, the part is used in the bolt assembly.
Advanced modeling 311 Bolt length calculation

Washer (1)
Washer (2)
Washer (3)
Nut (1)
Nut (2)
If the check box is clear, only a hole is

created
1. Tekla Structures calculates the minimum possible length of the bolt as follows:
washer (1) thickness (if the check box is selected) +
material thickness +
nut (1) thickness +
nut (2) thickness +
extra length
2. Tekla Structures searches for the closest match in the Bolt Catalog.
3. Tekla Structures calculates the number of washers required (must not exceed 10) so that the
length of the shaft is less than:
nut (1) thickness +
nut (2) thickness +
washer (1) thickness +
(number of washers*washer (3) thickness)
4. Tekla Structures checks that the bolt found in step 2 is longer than:
extra length +
nut (1) thickness +

nut (2) thickness +
add. dist (from the Bolt Catalog) +
(number of fitting washers * washer (3) thickness)
5. If the selected bolt does not fulfill the criteria in step 4, Tekla Structures returns to step 2,
otherwise it continues on to step 6.
6. Tekla Structures checks that the selected bolt fulfills all the following conditions:
• Can the thread be inside the material to be connected? Even if this is not allowed, the
calculation always allows 3 or 4 mm of thread to be inside the material, depending on the
bolt diameter. If the bolt diameter is ≥ 24 mm, it allows 4 mm, otherwise it allows 3 mm.
• Shaft length must be more than:
extra length +
washer (1) thickness (if checked) -
maximum thread in material allowed (if thread in material = no) = 3 mm or 4 mm
• Shaft length is calculated as:
Screw length - screw thread length - thread end.
• Thread end is the part of the bolt between the shaft and the thread. It is calculated as
follows:
Diameter of bolt (mm) Thread end (mm)

>33.0 10.0
>27.0 8.0
>22.0 7.0
>16.0 6.0
>12.0 5.0
>7.0 4.0
>4.0 2.5
≤4 1.5
7. If the selected bolt does not fulfill all the above conditions, Tekla Structures returns to step 2
and tries the next longest bolt.
8. If the advanced option XS_BOLT_LENGTH_EPSILON is set, the epsilon thickness is added to, or
subtracted from, the material thickness to avoid inaccurate bolt length calculation.
For example, if this value is not taken into account, and the calculated length is 38.001 mm, a
39 mm bolt might be selected.
See also Bolts (99)

XS_BOLT_LENGTH_EPSILON

11 Modeling settings
This section provides more information about the various settings you can modify in Tekla
Structures.
Contents • General settings (315)

• View and representation settings (318)
• Part properties (323)
• Detail properties (340)
• Numbering settings (349)
11.1 General settings

This section provides more information about some general modeling settings.
Contents Grid properties (315)

Point properties (316)
Rotation settings (316)
Screenshot settings (317)
Grid properties
Use the Grid dialog box to view and modify the grid properties.
Option Description
Coordinates The coordinates of the grid in the global x, y, and z directions (x and
y are relative, z is absolute).
• X - grid lines vertical to the work plane
• Y - grid lines horizontal to the work plane
• Z - elevations in the structure
Labels The names of the grid lines.
Line extensions Define how far the grid lines extend in the directions Left/Below and
Right/Above.
Origin The coordinates of the grid origin in the global x, y, and z directions.
Modeling settings 315 General settings

Option Description
Magnetic grid plane Select to bind objects to grid lines.
User-defined attributes... Click to access the user-defined properties of the grid.
See also Grids (30)
Grid line properties

Use the Grid Line Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of a single grid line.
Option Description
Label The name of the grid line.
Depth in view plane The height of the grid plane perpendicular to the view plane.
Extension Left/Below Define how far the grid lines extend in the directions Left/Below
and Right/Above.
Extension Right/Above
Magnetic grid plane Select to bind objects to the grid line.
User-defined attributes... Click to access the user-defined properties of the grid line.
Visible in drawings Select to make the grid line visible in drawings.
Grid line automatic Select to use single grid lines in grid dimensioning.
dimensioning
Point properties
Use the Point Information dialog box to view and modify the properties of a point.
Option Description
Phase The phase number.
You can filter objects by their phase numbers.
Id The ID number, which is used in log files.
You can filter objects by their ID numbers.
Coordinates The local (work plane) and global x, y, and z coordinates of a point.
Indicates the correct location of the point.
Rotation settings
Use the Copy - Rotate and Move - Rotate dialog boxes to view and modify the settings that are used
when you rotate objects in Tekla Structures.

Option Description
X0 The x and y coordinates of the starting point of the rotation axis.
Y0
Origin angle The angle of the rotation axis when rotating around a line on the work
plane.
Number of copies Defines the number of copies created.
dZ The difference in position between the original and copied object in the
z direction.
Rotation angle The rotation angle between the original and new position.
Around Defines whether the rotation axis is a line on the work plane or in the z
direction.
See also Rotating objects
Screenshot settings
Use the Screenshot dialog box to view and modify the screenshot settings.
Option Description
View name Shows the selected view name.
View Includes the view content and window borders in the screenshot.
View without borders Includes only the view content in the screenshot.
Rendered view For high resolution screenshots from rendered views. The Options...
button displays the Screenshot Options dialog box.
Place on clipboard Places the screenshot on the clipboard.
Print to file Saves the screenshot to a file.
The following screenshot options are only available in rendered views:
Option Description
Final width The width of the screenshot.
Uses the same unit as other dimensions in modeling.
Final height The height of the screenshot.
DPI The pixel density (DPI) of the screenshot.
There are limitations to pixel density. You can change the DPI using
a graphics editor.
White background Uses white background.
Smooth lines Uses smooth lines to decrease jagged edges.

Option Description
Line width Sets the line width.
11.2 View and representation settings

This section provides more information about specific view and representation settings.
Contents View properties (318)

Grid view properties (319)
Color settings for parts (321)
Transparency settings for object groups (322)
View properties
Use the View Properties dialog box to view and modify the view properties.
Option Description
Name The name of the view.
Angle Whether the view angle is Plane or 3D.
Projection The projection type of rendered views.
Orthogonal: All objects are of equal size (no perspective). When you
zoom, text and point size remains the same. In addition, the zoom
remains on part surfaces.
Perspective: Distant objects appear smaller than close ones, as do
text and points. You can zoom, rotate the model, or fly through it.
Rotation How the view is rotated around the z and x axes. Rotation is view-
specific.
Color and transparency in all The color and transparency setting that is used in all views
views (according to the status of the objects in the model).
Representation... Opens the Object Representation dialog box for defining color and
transparency settings.
View depth The thickness of the displayed slice of model. You can define the
depth separately upwards and downwards from the view plane.
Only objects positioned within the view depth are visible in the
model.
Display... Opens the Display dialog box for defining which objects are
displayed in the view and how.
Visible object group Which object group is displayed in the view.
Object group... Opens the Object Group - View Filter dialog box for creating and
modifying object groups.
Modeling settings 318 View and representation settings

See also Views (35)
Default part, component, custom component, assembly and cast unit view properties
Tekla Structures creates 3D and default part, component, custom component, assembly and cast
unit model views using the properties in the following files:
• 3D part view: part_basic_view
• Part front view: part_front_view
• Part top view: part_top_view
• Part end view: part_end_view
• Part perspective view: part_persp_view
• 3D component view: joint_basic_view
• Component front view: joint_front_view
• Component top view: joint_top_view
• Component end view: joint_end_view
• Component perspective view: joint_persp_view
• Custom component front view: custom_object_editor_front_view
• Custom component top view: custom_object_editor_top_view
• Custom component end view: custom_object_editor_end_view
• Custom component perspective view: custom_object_editor_perspective_view
• 3D assembly or cast unit view: assembly_basic_view
• Assembly or cast unit front view: assembly_front_view
• Assembly or cast unit top view: assembly_top_view
• Assembly or cast unit end view: assembly_end_view
• Assembly or cast unit back view: assembly_back_view
• Assembly or cast unit bottom view: assembly_bottom_view
• Assembly or cast unit perspective view: assebly_persp_view
You can modify the view properties before you create the views:
Load the desired view properties in the View Properties dialog box
and change the settings as required.

Grid view properties

Use the Creation of Views Along Grid Lines dialog box to view and modify the properties of grid views.
Option Description
View plane The plane of the view defined by two axes similarly to the default
view.

Option Description
Number of views Defines which grid lines the views will be created of.
None does not create any views.
One (First) only creates the view closest to the grid origin.
One (Last) only creates the view furthest from the grid origin.
All creates all views in grid planes in the relevant direction.
View name prefix The prefix to be used with the grid label in the view name. This
name overrides the name in the view properties.
View names consist of a prefix and a grid label, e.g. PLAN +3000. If
the View name prefix field is left empty, no prefix is used. Tekla
Structures adds a dash and a running number to the view name if
view names are otherwise identical.
View properties Defines which view properties (applied or saved) will be used.
Each view plane has its own view properties. You can load the
properties from the current view properties with the option <applied
values> or from saved view properties. The Show... button displays
the current view properties.
See also Creating grid views (39)
Display settings
Use the Display dialog box to define which object types Tekla Structures displays and how they
appear in the model. Some of these settings may affect system performance.
Option Description
Parts Defines how parts are displayed.
Fast uses a rapid drawing technique that displays internal hidden
edges, but skips cuts. The setting does not automatically affect
already modeled parts. When you switch this setting on, the fast
representation mode will be applied only to newly created parts and
to parts that are displayed with the Show with Exact Lines command.
Exact displays the cuts, but hides the internal hidden lines of parts.
Reference line shows parts as sticks. This option increases display
speed significantly, when viewing the entire model, or large parts of
it.
Bolts Defines how bolts are displayed.
Fast displays the axis and a cross to represent the bolt head. This is
the recommended representation mode for bolts, because it increases
display speed significantly and consumes less system memory.
Exact shows bolts, washers, and nuts as solids.

Option Description
Holes Defines how holes are displayed.
Fast only displays the circle in the first plane. When using this option,
Tekla Structures always displays fast holes on the first part (counting
from the head of the bolt). If there are slotted holes in any of the
parts, a slotted hole is displayed on the first part, even if the hole in
that part is not slotted. The new slotted hole has the same size and
rotation as the first slotted hole (counting from the head of the bolt).
Holes that are outside a part are always displayed as fast holes in
rendered views.
Exact shows holes as solids.
Exact long holes only displays slotted holes in exact mode and
ordinary holes in fast mode.
Point size Defines the size of points in views. You can also change the size of
the part handle using this field.
In model increases the point size on the screen when you zoom in.
In view does not increase the point size.
AutoStick Defines whether the objects are shown as sticks or as objects.
This option is only available in wire frame views. To enable the wire
frame, set the advanced XS_ENABLE_WIRE_FRAME to TRUE.
By dragging the sliders you can adjust the zoom distance where
objects should be shown as sticks.
This option increases performance significantly when viewing large
models. It still lets you zoom in on a small area and display it exactly.
See also Defining which objects are displayed (142)
Color settings for parts

Use the Class value to change the color of a part.
Class Color
1 light gray
2 or 0 red
3 green
4 blue
5 turquoise
6 yellow
7 magenta

Class Color
8 gray
9 rose
10 lime
11 aqua
12 pink
13 orange
14 light blue
See also Changing the color of a part (76)
Color settings for object groups

Use the Object Representation dialog box to define the color of object groups.
Option Description
As is The current color is used.
If the object belongs to one of the object groups defined in the
following rows, its color is defined by the settings that the object
group in question has on that row.
Colors Select color from the list.
Color by class All parts are colored according to their Class property.
Color by lot Parts belonging to different lots get different colors.
Color by phase Parts belonging to different phases get different colors.
Color by analysis type Displays parts according to the member analysis type.
Color by analysis utility Displays parts according to the utilization ratio in analysis.
check
Color by attribute Displays parts in different colors according to the values of a user-
defined attribute.
Transparency settings for object groups

Use the Object Representation dialog box to define the transparency of object groups.

Option Description
As is The current visibility.
If the object belongs to any object group whose visibility and color
settings have been defined, the settings will be read from that
object group.
Visible Object is shown in the views.
50% transparent Object is transparent in rendered views.
70% transparent
90% transparent
Hidden Object is not shown in the views.
11.3 Part properties

This section provides more information about the properties of specific steel and concrete parts.
Contents Steel column properties (323)

Steel beam properties (324)
Orthogonal beam properties (326)
Twin profile properties (326)
Pad footing properties (327)
Strip footing properties (328)
Concrete column properties (329)
Concrete beam properties (330)
Concrete panel properties (331)
Steel column properties

Use the Column Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of a steel column. The file
name extension of a column properties file is *.clm.
Option Description
Part prefix and start number The part mark series of the column.
Assembly prefix and start The assembly mark series of the column.
number
Name The user-definable name of the column.
Tekla Structures uses part names in reports and drawing lists, and
to identify parts of the same type.
Modeling settings 323 Part properties

Option Description
Profile The profile of the column.
Material The material of the column.
Finish The type of finish.
Finish is user-definable. It describes how the part surface has been
treated, e.g. with anti-corrosive paint, hot galvanized, fire
retardant coating, etc.
Class Used to group columns.
For example, you can display parts of different classes in different
colors.
User-defined attributes User-defined properties of the column.
Vertical The position of the column, relative to its handle.
Rotation How the column is rotated around its axis.
Horizontal The horizontal position of the column, relative to its handle.
Top The position of the second end of the column in the global z
direction.
Bottom The position of the first end of the column in the global z direction.
Deforming tab Warping, cambering, and shortening of the column.
See also Creating a steel column (77)
Steel beam properties

Use the Beam Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of a steel beam, steel
polybeam, or curved beam. The file name extension of a beam properties file is *.prt.
Option Description
Part prefix and start number The part mark series of a beam.
Assembly prefix and start The assembly mark series of the beam.
number
Name The user-definable name of a beam.
Profile The profile of a beam.
Material The material of a beam.
Finish The finish type.
Finish is user-definable. It describes how the part surface has
been treated, e.g. with anti-corrosive paint, hot galvanized, fire

Option Description
Class Used to group beams.
colors.
User-defined attributes User-defined properties of a beam.
On plane The position of a beam on the work plane.
Rotation How much a beam is rotated around its axis on the work plane.
At depth The position of a beam, in terms of depth perpendicular to the
work plane.
End offset The offsets of beam ends, relative to the beam’s handles.
Radius The plane of curvature and radius of a curved beam.
Number of segments The number of segments Tekla Structures uses when drawing a
curved beam.
Deforming tab Warping, cambering, and shortening of the beam.
See also Creating a steel beam (78)
Contour plate properties

Use the Contour Plate Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of a contour plate. The
file name extension of a contour plate properties file is *.cpl.
Option Description
Part prefix and start number The part mark series of the contour plate.
Assembly prefix and start The assembly mark series of the contour plate.
number
Name The user-definable name of the contour plate.
Profile The profile of the contour plate.
The format is PL+ thickness, for example PL20.
Material The material of the contour plate.
Class Used to group contour plates.
colors.
User-defined attributes User-defined properties of the contour plate.

Option Description
At depth The position of the contour plate, in terms of depth, perpendicular
to the work plane.
See also Creating a contour plate (79)
Orthogonal beam properties

Use the Orthogonal Beam Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of an orthogonal
steel beam. The file name extension of an orthogonal beam properties file is *.crs.
Option Description
Part prefix and start number The part mark series of the beam.
Assembly prefix and start The assembly mark series of the beam.
number
Name The user-definable name of the beam.
Profile The profile of the beam.
Material The material of the beam.
colors.
User-defined attributes User-defined properties of the beam.
Vertical The position of the beam, relative to its handle.
Rotation How much the beam is rotated around its axis.
Horizontal The horizontal position of the beam, relative to its handle.
Top The position of the second end of the beam in the z direction of
the work plane.
Bottom The position of the first end of the beam in the z direction of the
work plane.
See also Creating an orthogonal beam (80)
Twin profile properties

Use the Twin Profile Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of a twin steel profile.
The file name extension of a twin profile properties file is *.dia.

Option Description
Part prefix and start number The part mark series of the twin profile.
Assembly prefix and start The assembly mark series of the twin profile.
number
Name The user-definable name of the twin profile.
Profile The profile of both the beams in the twin profile.
Material The material of the beams.
Class Used to group twin profiles.
colors.
User-defined attributes User-defined properties of the twin profile.
On plane The position of the twin profile on the work plane.
Rotation Defines how the twin profile is rotated around its axis on the work
plane.
At depth The beam position, in terms of depth, perpendicular to the work
plane.
End offset The offsets of the ends of the beam, relative to the beam’s handles.
Twin profile type Defines how the profiles are combined.
Horizontal The horizontal clearance between the profiles.
Vertical The vertical clearance between the profiles.
See also Creating a twin profile (81)
Pad footing properties

Use the Pad Footing Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of a pad footing. The file
name extension of a pad footing properties file is *.cpf.
Option Description
Name The user-definable name of the pad footing.
Profile The profile of the pad footing.
Material The material of the pad footing.

Option Description
Class Used to group pad footings.
colors.
User-defined attributes User-defined properties of the pad footing.
Vertical The vertical position of the pad footing, relative to its handle.
Rotation How much the pad footing is rotated around its axis.
Horizontal The horizontal position of the pad footing, relative to its handle.
Top The position of the top surface of the pad footing in the global z
direction.
Bottom The position of the bottom surface of the pad footing in the global
z direction.
Cast unit prefix and start Define the cast unit series of the pad footing.
number
Cast unit type Indicates whether the footing is precast or cast in place.
See also Creating a pad footing (89)
Strip footing properties

Use the Strip Footing Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of a strip footing. The
file name extension of a strip footing properties file is *.csf.
Option Description
Name The user-definable name of the strip footing.
Tekla Structures uses part names in reports and drawing lists, and to
identify parts of the same type.
Shape The profile of the strip footing.
Material The material of the strip footing.
treated, e.g. with anti-corrosive paint, hot galvanized, fire retardant
coating, etc.
Class Used to group strip footings.
colors.
User-defined attributes User-defined properties of the strip footing.

Option Description
On plane The position of the strip footing on the work plane.
Rotation How much the strip footing is rotated around its axis on the work
plane.
At depth The position of the strip footing in terms of depth perpendicular to
the work plane.
End offset The offsets of the ends of the strip footing, relative to its handles.
Cast unit prefix and start Define the cast unit series of the strip footing.
number
Cast unit type Indicates whether the footing is precast or cast in place.
Radius The plane of curvature and radius of the curved strip footing.
Number of segments The number of segments required to draw a curved strip footing.
See also Creating a strip footing (89)
Concrete column properties

Use the Concrete Column Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of a concrete
column. The file name extension of a concrete column properties file is *.ccl.
Option Description
Name The user-definable name of the column.
Profile The profile of the column.
Material The material of the column.
Class Used to group columns.
colors.
User-defined attributes User-defined properties of the column.
Vertical The vertical position of the column, relative to its handle.
Rotation How much the column is rotated around its axis.
Horizontal The horizontal position of the column, relative to its handle.
Top The position of the second end of the column in the global z
direction.
Bottom The position of the first end of the column in the global z direction.

Option Description
Cast unit prefix and start Define the cast unit series of the column.
number
Cast unit type Indicates whether the column is precast or cast in place.
Deforming tab Warping, cambering and shortening of the column.
See also Creating a concrete column (89)
Concrete beam properties

Use the Concrete Beam Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of a concrete beam
or polybeam. The file name extension of a concrete beam properties file is *.cbm.
Option Description
Name The user-definable name of the beam.
Shape The profile of the beam.
Material The material of the beam.
colors.
User-defined attributes User-defined properties of the beam.
On plane The beam position on the work plane.
Rotation How much the beam is rotated around its axis on the work plane.
At depth The position of the beam in terms of depth perpendicular to the
work plane.
End offset The offsets of the ends of the beam, relative to its handles.
Radius The plane of curvature and radius of the curved beam.
Number of segments The number of segments required to draw a curved beam.
Cast unit prefix and start Define the cast unit series of the beam.
number
Cast unit type Indicates whether the beam is precast or cast in place.
Deforming tab Warping, cambering and shortening of the beam.
See also Creating a concrete beam (90)

Concrete slab properties
Use the Concrete Slab Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of a concrete slab. The
file name extension of a concrete slab properties file is *.csl.
Option Description
Name The user-definable name of the slab.
Thickness The thickness of the slab.
Material The material of the slab.
Class Used to group slabs.
colors.
User-defined attributes User-defined properties of the slab.
At depth The position of the slab, in terms of depth, perpendicular to the
work plane.
Cast unit prefix and start Define the cast unit series of the slab.
number
Cast unit type Indicates whether the slab is precast or cast in place.
See also Creating a concrete slab (91)
Concrete panel properties

Use the Concrete Panel Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of a concrete panel.
The file name extension of a concrete panel properties file is *.cpn.
Option Description
Name The user-definable name of the panel.
Shape The profile of the panel (thickness × height of the wall).
Material The material of the panel.

Option Description
Class Used to group panels.
colors.
User-defined attributes User-defined properties of the panel.
On plane The position of the panel on the work plane.
Rotation How much the panel is rotated around its axis on the work plane.
At depth The position of the panel, in terms of depth perpendicular to the
work plane.
End offset The offsets of the ends of the panel, relative to its handles.
Cast unit prefix and start Define the cast unit series of the panel.
number
Cast unit type Indicates whether the panel is precast or cast in place.
Radius The plane of curvature and radius of the curved panel.
Number of segments The number of segments required to draw a curved panel.
See also Creating a concrete panel (92)
User-defined attributes
User-defined attributes provide extra information about a part. Attributes can consist of numbers,
text, or lists. The following table gives some examples of what you can use attributes for:
Attribute Can be used...

Comment In part and weld marks in Tekla Structures drawings, or in projects.
Shorten When drawings of the parts are created, Tekla Structures decreases
the true length of the part by this value. This is useful when
creating assembly drawings of bracing bars that should always be
under tension.
Camber In part marks in Tekla Structures drawings.
Preliminary mark To obtain preliminary marks for parts in reports.
Locked To protect objects from being accidentally changed.
Shear, Tension, and To save reaction forces for AutoDefaults. You can enter forces
Moment separately for each end of a part.
User field 1...4 User-defined fields. You can change the names of these fields and
add new user-defined fields.
Connection code When importing information on connection types into Tekla
Structures. You can then use the connection codes as rules in
AutoConnection and AutoDefaults. Each end of a part can have a
different connection code.
Moment connection For selecting whether to show moment connection symbols in
drawings or not.

See also Common elements in marks
Part properties (323)
Adding properties
11.4 Part position settings

This section provides more information about specific part position settings. These settings can be
modified on the Position tab in the part properties dialog box, or by using the Mini Toolbar.
Contents Position on the work plane (333)

Rotation (334)
Position depth (335)
Vertical position (336)
Horizontal position (338)
End offsets (339)
Position on the work plane

Use the On plane option in the part properties dialog box to view and change the part’s position on
the work plane. The position is always relative to the part’s handles.

Middle The handles are in the middle
of the part.
Right The part is positioned

underneath its handles.
Left The part is positioned above its

handles.
Modeling settings 333 Part position settings

Examples
Position Example
Middle 300
Right 300
Left 300
Rotation
Use the Rotation option in the part properties dialog box to view and change the rotation of a part
around its axis on the work plane.
You can also define the angle of rotation. Tekla Structures measures positive values clockwise
around the local x axis.

Front The work plane is parallel to the
front plane of the part.
Top The work plane is parallel to the top

plane of the part.

Back The work plane is parallel to the back
plane of the part.
Below The work plane is parallel to the

bottom plane of the part.
Position depth
Use the At depth option in the part properties dialog box to view and change the position depth of
the part. The position is always perpendicular to the work plane.

Middle The part is positioned in the
middle of the work plane.
Front The part is positioned above the

work plane.
Behind The part is positioned underneath

the work plane.

Examples
Position Example
Middle 400
Front 400
Behind 400
Vertical position
Use the Vertical option in the part properties dialog box to view and change the vertical position of
the part. The position is always relative to the part’s handles.

Middle The handle is in the middle of the
part.

Down The part is positioned underneath
its handle.
Up The part is positioned above its

handle.
Examples
Position Example
Middle 200
Down 200
Up 200

Horizontal position
Use the Horizontal option in the part properties dialog box to view and change the horizontal
position of the part. The position is always relative to the part’s handle.

Middle The handle is in the middle of
the part.
Left The part is positioned on the

left side of its handle.
Right The part is positioned on the

right side of its handle.
Examples
Position Example
Middle 150

Position Example
Left 150
Right 150
End offsets
Use the Dx, Dy and Dz options in the part properties dialog box to move the ends of a part, relative to
its handles. You can enter positive and negative values.
Option Description
Dx Changes the length of the part by moving the part end point along the line
formed by the part handles.
Dy Moves the part end perpendicular to the part handles.
Dz Moves the part end in the z direction of the work plane.
Examples
Position Example
Dx
End point: 200
Dx
End point: -200

Position Example
Dy
End point: 300
Dy
End point: -300
Dz
End point: 400
Dz
End point: -400
11.5 Detail properties

This section provides more information about the properties of specific modeling details.
Contents Bolt properties (340)

List of weld types (344)
Corner chamfer properties (345)
Edge chamfer properties (346)
Bolt properties
Use the Bolt Properties dialog box to view or modify the properties of a bolt group.
Option Description
Bolt size Bolt diameter.
Bolt standard Bolt assembly standard/grade.
Bolt type Defines whether the bolts are assembled on-site or in the shop.
Connect part/assembly Indicates whether you are bolting a secondary part or a sub-assembly.
Modeling settings 340 Detail properties

Option Description
Thread in material Indicates if the thread of the bolt can be inside the bolted parts. Tekla
Structures does not use this value when calculating the length of full-
threaded bolts.
Cut length Indicates which parts the bolt connects. The value defines the area
Tekla Structures should search for parts that belong to the bolt group.
Using cut length you can determine whether the bolt will go through
one flange or two.
Tekla Structures searches for parts using half the cut length value, in
both directions from the bolt group plane. In the illustration below, A is
the cut length and B is the bolt origin. Tekla Structures calculates the
search area as A/2 in both directions from point B.
Tekla Structures warns you if the cut length is too small (i.e. the bolt
group contains no parts) and makes the bolt length 100 mm.
If there are large gaps between the connected parts, the gap is added to
the length of the bolt. Tekla Structures calculates bolt length using the
total distance between the first and last surfaces.
If you want to force a bolt to be a certain length, enter a negative value
for cut length (e.g. -150).
Extra length Additional bolt length.
Increases the material thickness that Tekla Structures uses when
calculating bolt length. For example, you might need extra bolt length
to allow for painting. You can also build additional lengths into bolt
assemblies.
Shape Bolt group shape.
Bolt dist X Bolt spacing, number, or co-ordinate, depending on the bolt group
shape.
Bolt dist Y Bolt spacing, group diameter, or coordinate, depending on the bolt
group shape.
Tolerance Tolerance = Hole diameter - Bolt diameter
Hole type Oversized or slotted. Field activates after you select the Parts with
slotted holes check boxes.

Option Description
Slotted hole X x allowance of a slotted hole. Zero for a round hole.
Slotted hole Y y allowance of a slotted hole. Zero for a round hole.
Rotate Slots If the bolt connects several parts, you may want to rotate alternate
holes by 90 degrees. This allows the bolt to move in different directions.
On plane Moves the bolt group perpendicular to the bolt group x axis.
Rotation Defines how far the bolt group is rotated around the x axis, relative to
the current work plane.
For example, you can use this field to indicate on which side of the
connected parts you want the bolt head to be.
At depth Moves the bolt group perpendicular to the current work plane.
Dx, Dy, Dz Offsets that move the bolt group by moving the bolt group x axis.
See also Bolts (99)
Weld properties
Use the Weld Properties dialog box to view or modify the properties of a weld.
Some of the properties are only displayed in reports, not in

drawings.
Option Description
Prefix See Weld size prefixes (107).
Size The size of the weld.
If you enter a zero or negative weld size, Tekla Structures creates the
weld, but does not display it drawings.
To display the weld object in the model in both Fast and Exact mode,
remember to give the weld Size and Type in weld properties.
Type See List of weld types (344).

Option Description
Angle The angle of weld preparation, bevels, or groove.
Tekla Structures displays the angle between the weld type symbol and
the fill type contour symbol.
Contour The fill type contour of a weld can be:
• None
• Flush
• Convex
• Concave
Finish Tekla Structures displays the finish symbol above the weld type symbol
in drawings. The options are:
• G (Grind)
• M (Machine)
• C (Chip)
• (Flush finished weld)

• (Smooth blended weld face)
Length The length of a regular weld depends on the length of the connection
between the welded parts. You can set the exact length of a polygon
weld by, for example, defining the start and end points of the weld.
Pitch The center-to-center spacing of welds for non-continuous welds. Pitch
is shown in the weld mark if the value is greater than 0.0.
To create a non-continuous weld, define the center-to-center spacing
and the pitch of the welds. Tekla Structures calculates the distance
between the welds as the pitch minus the length of the weld.
Tekla Structures uses the – character by default to separate weld length
and pitch, for example 50–100. To change the separator to @, for
example, set the advanced option
XS_WELD_LENGTH_CC_SEPARATOR_CHAR to @.
Root face Root face thickness is the height of the narrowest part inside the root
opening. The RFT fields in the connection dialog boxes also refer to the
root face thickness.
Neither root face nor RFT values appear in drawings, but you can use
the WELD_ROOT_FACE_THICKNESS field in reports to show the root face
dimension in the weld list.
Effective throat The weld size used in weld strength calculation.
Root opening The space between the welded parts.
Reference text Additional information to appear in the weld symbol. For example,
information about the weld specification or process.

Option Description
Stitch weld Set this option to Yes to create a staggered, intermittent weld.
Stitch welds are s are staggered on both sides of the welded part. Tekla
Structures shows the weld type symbols as staggered in weld symbols.
If you set this option to No, a non- staggered intermittent weld is
created. To show the pitch in a weld mark, set Pitch to a value greater
than 0.0.
Edge/Around Indicates whether only one edge or the entire perimeter of a face
should be welded.
A circle in the weld symbol in drawings indicates the Around option has
been used.
Workshop/Site Indicates where the weld should be made. This setting affects
assemblies and drawings.
Tekla Structures indicates site welds in the weld symbol using a flag.
NDT inspection level Defines the non-desctructive testing and inspection level.
Connect part/assembly See Using welds to create assemblies (83).
Position See Weld position (106).
Electrode classification Defines the weld electrode classification.
Electrode strength Defines the electrode strength.
Electrode coefficient Defines the electrode strength coefficient.
Welding process type Defines the process type.

XS_AISC_WELD_MARK
List of weld types

Use the Weld Properties dialog box to define the weld type. Some weld types also automatically
prepare the parts to be welded. The following table shows the available weld types:
Weld type Name Number Preparation

None 0 No
Fillet weld 10 No
Bevel-groove (single-V butt 3 Both parts

weld)
Bevel-groove (single-bevel butt 4 Secondary part
weld)
Square-groove (square butt 2 No
weld)
Single-V butt weld with broad 5 Both edges
root face

Weld type Name Number Preparation
Single-bevel butt weld with 6 Secondary part
broad root face
U-groove weld (single-U butt 7 Both parts
weld)
J-groove weld (single-J butt 8 Secondary part
weld)
Flare V-groove weld 16 Both parts
Flare-bevel-groove weld 15 Secondary part
Edge-flange weld 1 No
Corner-flange weld 17 No
Plug weld 11 No
Bevel backing weld 9 No
Spot weld 12 No
Seam weld 13 No
Slot weld 14 No
Partial penetration weld (single- 18 Secondary part

bevel butt + fillet)
Partial penetration weld (square 19 No
groove + fillet)
Melt-through weld 20 No
Steep-flanked single-V butt weld 21 No
Steep-flanked single-bevel butt 22 No

weld
Edge weld 23 No
Surfacing weld 24 No
Fold joint 25 No
Inclined joint 26 No
Corner chamfer properties

Use the Chamfer Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of a corner chamfer.

Option Description
Type The shape of the chamfer.
x The dimensions of the chamfer. The dimension depends on the
chamfer type.
y
dz1 Only used for contour plates and concrete slabs.
dz2 Moves the top or bottom surface of the part corner in the part’s
local z direction.
Use these fields, for example, to give plates varying thicknesses.
Edge chamfer properties

Use the Edge Chamfer Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of an edge chamfer.

Type The shape of the chamfer.
Name The name of the chamfer.
Cutting distance Defines how far away from
in X direction the chamfered edge the
chamfer will end in the x
direction.
Cutting distance Defines how far away from
in Y direction the chamfered edge the
chamfer will end in the y
direction.
First end type The shape and position of the The options are:
first end point. • Full: The end point is
Second end type The shape and position of the positioned at the end of
second end point. the part (moving along the
nearest edge), and the
shape is straight.
• Straight: The end point is
positioned at the point you
pick, and the shape is
straight.
• Bevelled: The end point is
positioned at the point you
pick, and the shape is
angled.
Dimension The distance between the
(picked) end point and the
bevelled points.
See also Chamfering part edges (121)

Bolt Assembly Catalog properties
Use the Bolt Assembly Catalog dialog box to view and modify the properties bolt assemblies.
Option Description
Short name This name is used in drawings and reports. It is usually the commercial
name for a specific bolt.
Standard This name is the full name which is shown in the bolt assemblies list in
the Bolt Assembly Catalog dialog box, and in the Bolt standard list box in
the Bolt Properties dialog box.
The value is used in bolt length calculation.
Material The material of the bolt assembly.
Finish The type of the finish.
Grade The grade of the bolt assembly.
Tolerance The tolerances of the bolt assembly.
Additional length
for bolt
calculation Option Description
Add. dist... The Additional Distance option controls how much of the bolt protrudes
from the nut.
Additional Distance updates the Additional Distance values of all bolts that
use the selected bolt standard and have the selected diameter.
Select whether the value of the additional length affects all or

individual diameters of one bolt assembly.
Enter the additional length value.

Select whether the value is absolute or relative to the diameter.
See also Adding bolt assemblies to the Bolt Assembly Catalog (276)
Bolt Catalog properties

Use the Bolt Catalog dialog box to view and modify the properties of individual bolt elements, such
as bolts, washers, and nuts.
Option Description
Type The type of the bolt part.
Standard This name is the full name which is shown in the bolt assemblies list in the
Bolt Assembly Catalog dialog box, and in the Bolt standard list in the Bolt
Diameter The diameter of the bolt part.
Length The length of the bolt part.
Weight The weight of the bolt part.
add. dist The length of the part of the bolt that protrudes from the nut.
top thick The thickness of the bolt head.
thread len The length of the threaded part of the bolt shaft.
The value is not used in bolt length calculation (value is 0) if the bolt is
fully-threaded.
washer tol The tolerance between the washer inner diameter and the bolt diameter.
The value is used when searching for the correct-sized washer for the bolt.
Not used in bolt length calculation.
span size The size of the wrench needed.
calc thick The calculation thickness of a nut or a washer.
This value is used in bolt length calculation.
real thick The true thickness of a nut or a washer.
This is for information only.
inner diam The inner diameter of a nut or a washer.
outer diam The outer diameter of a nut or a washer.
top diam The diameter of the hexagon.
See also Adding bolts to the Bolt Catalog (276)

11.6 Numbering settings
This section provides more information about specific numbering settings.
Contents General numbering settings (349)

Weld numbering settings (350)
General numbering settings

Use the Numbering Setup dialog box to view and modify some general numbering settings.
Option Description
Renumber all All parts get a new number. All information on previous numbers
is lost.
Re-use old numbers Tekla Structures reuses the numbers of parts that have been
deleted. These numbers may be used to number new or modified
parts.
Check for standard parts If a separate standard-part model has been set up, Tekla
Structures compares the parts in the current model to those in
the standard-part model.
If the part to be numbered is identical to a part in the standard-
part model, Tekla Structures uses the same part number as in the
standard-part model.
Compare to old The part gets the same number as a previously numbered similar
part.
Take new number The part gets a new number even if a similar numbered part
already exists.
Keep number if possible Modified parts maintain their previous numbers if possible. Even
if a part or assembly becomes identical with another part or
assembly, the original position number is maintained.
For example, you might have two different assemblies, B/1 and B/
2, in the model. Later on you modify B/2 so that it becomes
identical with B/1. If the Keep number if possible option is used, B/
2 will maintain its original position number when you renumber
the model.
Synchronize with master Use this setting when working in multi-user mode. Tekla
model Structures locks the master model and performs a save,
numbering, and save sequence, so that all other users can
continue working during the operation.
Automatic cloning If the main part of a drawing is modified and therefore gets a new
assembly position, the existing drawing is automatically assigned
to another part of the position.
If the modified part moves to an assembly position that does not
have a drawing, the original drawing is automatically cloned to
reflect the changes in the modified part.
Holes The location, size, and number of holes affects numbering.
Modeling settings 349 Numbering settings

Option Description
Part name The part name affects numbering.
Beam orientation The orientation of beams affects numbering of assemblies.
Column orientation The orientation of columns affects numbering of assemblies.
Reinforcing bars The orientation of reinforcing bars affects numbering.
Embedded objects The orientation of equal embedded objects affects numbering.
Surface treatment Surface treatments affect the numbering of assemblies.
Tolerance Parts get the same number if their dimensions differ less than the
value entered in this box.
Assembly position sort order See Assembly position numbers (188).

Creating a standard-part model (196)
Numbering examples (198)
Weld numbering settings

Use the Weld Numbering dialog box to view and modify the weld numbering settings. The weld
number is displayed in drawings and weld reports.
Option Description
Start number The number from which the numbering starts.
Tekla Structures automatically suggests the
following free number as the start number.
Apply for Defines which objects are affected by the
change.
All welds changes the number of all welds in
the model.
Selected welds changes the number of the
selected welds without affecting others.
Renumber also welds that have a number Tekla Structures replaces existing weld
numbers.
Re-use numbers of deleted welds If some welds have been removed, Tekla
Structures uses their numbers when numbering
other welds.
Control number settings

Use the Create control numbers (S9) dialog box to view and modify the control number settings.

Option Description
Numbering Defines which parts get control numbers.
All creates consecutive numbers for all parts.
By numbering series creates control numbers for
parts in a specific numbering series.
Assembly/Cast unit numbering series Defines the prefix and start number of the
numbering series for which to create control
numbers.
Needed only with the By numbering series
option.
Start number of control numbers The number from which the numbering starts.
Step value Defines the interval between two control
numbers.
Renumber Defines how to treat parts that already have
control numbers.
Yes replaces the existing control numbers.
No keeps the existing control numbers.
First direction Defines in what order to assign control
numbers.
Second direction
Third direction

12 Modeling tips
This section provides useful hints and tips that help you to model structures more quickly and
accurately, and avoid potential problems with templates and drawings.
Contents • General modeling tips (353)

• Tips for creating and positioning parts (358)
12.1 General modeling tips

These tips will help you to use some basic modeling functionalities more efficiently.
Contents Right-hand rule (353)

Activating an overlapping view (354)
Hiding cut lines in a view (354)
Cutting efficiently (354)
Showing part reference lines in model views (357)
Defining the autosave interval for all models (357)
Using an autosaved model (357)
Right-hand rule
Right-hand rule indicates the direction of the coordinate axes. When you hold the thumb, index
finger, and middle finger of your right hand so that they form three right angles, then the thumb
symbolizes the x axis, the index finger the y axis, and the middle finger the z axis.
Modeling tips 353 General modeling tips

Activating an overlapping view
When you want to pick positions from two views that partly overlap, you can use the Xmouse option.
With Xmouse active, simply moving the mouse pointer over a view activates the view.
To activate a view using Xmouse:
1. Click Tools > Options > Xmouse to switch on Xmouse.
A check mark appears next to the menu option if Xmouse is already switched on.
2. To activate a view, do one of the following:
• Move the mouse pointer over the view.
• Use the Page Up, Page Down and arrow keys.
See also Views (35)
Hiding cut lines in a view

To hide all cut lines in a view:
3. Clear the Cuts check box.
4. Click Modify.
See also Cuts (123)
Cutting efficiently
Follow these guidelines when cutting objects in the model:
• Avoid part faces
Avoid creating cuts that are exactly on the part planes or go through vertices. Try to position
the cut at least 0.3 mm outside of the part planes.
• Use polygon cuts
Whenever possible, use polygon cuts. The Cut part with polygon command automatically extends
the cut slightly outside of the part face. Note that after creating the polygon, you may have to
adjust the position of the handles manually.
• Use edge chamfers
Whenever possible, use edge chamfers instead of small cuts, especially in components.
• Tips for flange cuts
When cutting a flange, if the cutting part cuts very slightly the web as well (at least 0.3 mm),
the cut is more likely to succeed. For example, if you are cutting a beam that has roundings, it
may be useful to cut even further onto the web than just the flange thickness.
• Tips for round tube cuts
Use the Round tube (23) component for round tube cuts. The component automatically rotates
the cutting part until a successful cut position is found. If the component fails, rotate the
cutting part slightly until you find a successful cut position.

If a cut fails, Tekla Structures displays the cutting part using dash-
and-dot lines. An error notification is printed in the session history
log stating which part and which cut caused the failure.
To locate the failure in the model, click a row that contains an ID
number in the session history log. Tekla Structures selects the
corresponding part and cut in the model.
See also Cuts (123)

Viewing log files
Useful shortcuts in viewing logs and reports
Parametric modeling
Tekla Structures models are parametric, which means that each model object has parameters that
define various properties, including its geometry, location and relationship to other parts.
You can use these parameters to:
• Create variables that define the properties of the model object, such as a beam or column.
Variables can define fixed properties, such as the name of a column. They can also include
formulas, so that Tekla Structures calculates the property value each time you use the model
object.
• Create dependencies, or relationships, between model objects, so the properties of one model
object adjust if you change the related model object.
For example, you might create a dependency that offsets a column a fixed distance from a
plane on a wall, so that when you move the wall, the column follows.
See also About variables

Creating a distance variable manually
Creating a reference distance variable
Creating a radial grid

You can create a radial grid using a modeling tool called Radial Grid (1). You can preview the grid
before creating it.
To create a radial grid:
2. Select Plugins from the list.
3. Double-click RadialGrid to open the properties dialog box.

In the coordinate properties
• X defines the location of the arched grid lines and the distance
between the grid lines.
The first value is the radius of the innermost arc.
• Y (degrees) defines the location of the straight grid lines and
the distance between the grid lines in degrees.
The first value defines how the grid is rotated. The grid is
rotated counter-clockwise from the x axis in the current work
plane.
5. Click OK.
6. Pick a point to indicate the origin of the grid.
The grid is created automatically.
Limitations You cannot edit the radial grid using the general grid properties dialog box.
See also Grid properties (315)
Finding RGB values for colors

To find RGB values for colors:
1. Log in to the Tekla Extranet.
2. Click Tekla Structures > Self learning > Questions and answers.
3. Open the Background color in model editor document.
4. Download and install the application.

Showing part reference lines in model views
The part reference line is formed between the part handles. By default, the part reference line is
invisible in the model. It may be useful to display it when snapping to the middle points of parts, for
example.
To show the part reference lines in the model:
1. Click View > View Properties...
3. On the Advanced tab, select the Part reference line check box.
The part reference lines are displayed.
See also Part handles (69)
Defining the autosave interval for all models

You can define that all your models are saved at the same autosave interval.
To define the autosave interval for all models:
1. Go to the ..\Tekla
2. Open the standard.opt file with a standard text editor, for example, Notepad.
3. Search the following rows in the file: dia_autosave.autos_interval and
dia_autosave.autos_draw_interval.
4. Define the intervals at which models and drawings are saved.
For example, to have Tekla Structures save the model after 20 modeling commands and after
creating every 10 drawings:
dia_autosave.autos_interval 20
dia_autosave.autos_draw_interval 10
5. Save the file.
See also Saving a model (19)
Using an autosaved model

You can select to use an autosaved model if there are errors when trying to open a model.
• When you open a model, Tekla Structures automatically checks if the previous session exited
normally. If it did not, Tekla Structures prompts whether you want to continue by using the
autosaved model or the original model.

• If Tekla Structures displays the warning Fatal: Model memory corrupted by read, it means that
hardware problems have damaged the model database. Your hard disk may be damaged. Use
autosave or system backup files to restore the model.
See also Opening a model (19)
12.2 Tips for creating and positioning parts

These tips will help you to efficiently create and position parts in a model view.
Contents Defining default part properties (358)

Creating curved parts (359)
Creating horizontal parts (360)
Creating beams close to each other (360)
Alternative way of creating a round plate or slab (360)
Positioning columns, pad footings, and orthogonal beams (360)
Positioning objects in a radial or circular pattern (361)
Optional ways of placing objects in a model (361)
Modeling identical areas (363)
Defining default part properties

Save time by saving a default set of properties for each part you plan to create before you start
modeling.
To define default sets of part properties for a project:
2. Enter the part properties you want to use as defaults.
3. In the box next to the Save as button, enter a name for the set of properties. For example, enter
BEAM.
4. Click Save as to save the set of properties.
5. Click OK to close the part properties dialog box.
6. Continue to save sets of properties for each type of part you intend to create.
7. To make the sets of part properties you have defined the default sets for this project, click Tools
> Defaults > Save Defaults.
To use a default set of part properties, open the part properties

dialog box and select an option from the list next to the Load
button. Click Load to load the properties.
Modeling tips 358 Tips for creating and positioning parts

Creating curved parts
You can create curved parts by defining a radius and the number of segments for a part. The number
of segments determines how realistic the curved part looks: the more segments, the less angular the
part appears.
To create a curved part:
1. Create a part that can be bent: a beam, panel, or strip footing.
3. Go to the Curved beam settings area.
These settings can be found either on the Position tab or on the Bending tab, depending on the
part type.
4. In the Radius box, enter the radius.
5. In the Number of segments box, enter the number of segments you want to use.
6. If needed, define the plane of curvature, which is relative to the current work plane.
7. Click Modify to bend the part.
Examples
Number of segments: 2

Creating horizontal parts
When creating horizontal parts, such as beams, always pick points in the same direction. For
example, pick positions from left to right, and from bottom to top (in positive x, y directions). This
ensures that Tekla Structures places and dimensions the parts in the same way in drawings, and that
part marks automatically appear at the same part end.
To ensure that beam rotation is correct in drawings, set part Rotation to Top in the part properties
dialog box.
Creating beams close to each other

When you create beams so that they are located very close to each other Tekla Structures may
consider them as a twin profile. To prevent this from happening, use the user attribute
MAX_TWIN_SEARCH_DIST in the profile catalog.
To create beams close to each other:
1. Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog... to open the profile catalog.
2. Select the desired profile in the profile tree.
3. Go to the User attributes tab and set the property Twin profile detection distance to a larger value
than 0, for example to 0.1.
4. Click OK.
5. Create the beams using the profile.
See also Creating a steel beam (78)

Creating a twin profile (81)
Alternative way of creating a round plate or slab

This example shows an alternative method for creating round plates and slabs.
To create a round plate or slab:
1. Create a diamond-shaped plate or slab with four equal sides.
2. To round the corners, use the arc point chamfer type .
See also Creating a round contour plate (79)

Creating a round slab (91)
Positioning columns, pad footings, and orthogonal beams

For parts that you create by picking only one point (such as columns), you can define the top and
bottom level of the part in the global z direction. The part is created at the defined level, not at the
level you picked in the model. This can be useful when creating multi-story structures, as you can
define exact levels for each part you create.
To define the top and bottom levels of a part:

1. Create a part that requires you to pick only one point.
For example, a column.
3. Go to the Position tab.
4. Modify the top and bottom levels of the part.
• Top: Use to define the top level of the part.
• Bottom: Use to define the bottom level of the part.
5. Click Modify.
Example In this example, the concrete columns form a two-story structure. To position the upper columns
correctly, you must modify their bottom level position.
Top level = 1000, Bottom level = 0
Top level = 1700, Bottom level = 1200
Slab thickness = 200
Positioning objects in a radial or circular pattern

To position objects in a radial or circular pattern, do one of the following:
• Create a grid line and use the Copy Special > Rotate command to copy it.
• Use construction lines and circles to position the objects.
See also Creating a single grid line (34)

Rotating objects
Construction objects (43)
Optional ways of placing objects in a model

When you want to place an object to a position where no lines or objects intersect, you have the
following options:
• Use the snapping commands.
• Use construction planes, lines and circles.

• Create points.
See also Snapping to positions

Construction objects (43)
Points (45)
Displaying objects connected to a part

In some cases it is useful to see all the objects that are connected to a part, such as components,
welds and fittings. You can then examine, for example, whether parts are welded correctly.
To display the objects connected to a part:
1. Select the part.
2. Delete the part.
3. Click Edit > Undo, or click .

The part and the accompanying objects are displayed.

Modeling identical areas
Most structures contain identical areas, from simple frames to entire floors. Save time by modeling
these areas once, then copying them throughout the model. For example, create a column with a
base plate and cap plate, then copy the column to all the locations where it occurs in the model.
You can use this technique to create and reproduce any identical area. Depending on the project,
you may even be able to add connections before copying the area of the building.
For a project that has several identical floors, try modeling an entire
floor, then copying it to several levels.
See also Copying and moving objects

Index
# using bolts to create assemblies .......................... 82

using welds to create assemblies......................... 83
3D attaching parts................................................................130
models..........................................................................17 autosave
views.............................................................................42 error............................................................................357
3D views opening model.........................................................357
property files ............................................................319 saving a model ........................................................357
4D tool, see visualizing project status......................153
a b
background color
absolute coordinates........................................................32 changing...................................................................... 25
accuracy examples ..................................................................... 25
in modeling...............................................................146 beams
of parts.......................................................................146 cambering .................................................................129
accuracy, see high accuracy ........................................146 concrete beams ............................................... 90, 330
adding concrete polybeams ................................................. 90
bolt assemblies to bolt assembly catalog ........276 curved beams............................................................. 78
bolts to bolt catalog ..............................................276 orthogonal beams..................................................... 80
new material grade ................................................269 steel beams....................................................... 78, 324
new profile................................................................218 steel polybeams......................................................... 78
rule..............................................................................215 warping......................................................................127
user attribute to material grade.........................270 bending..............................................................................359
user attribute to profile ........................................219 bolt assembly catalog..........................................273, 275
angle dimensions ............................................................291 adding bolt assemblies to bolt assembly
angles .................................................................................164 catalog...............................................................276
arcs......................................................................................285 creating studs ..........................................................278
measuring .................................................................164 properties..................................................................347
assemblies...........................................................................81 bolt catalog ............................................................273, 275
adding objects ................................................... 83, 85 adding bolts to bolt catalog ................................276
changing the main assembly.................................86 creating studs ..........................................................278
changing the main part ..........................................86 exporting bolt catalog...........................................278
comparing .................................................................177 importing bolt catalog ..........................................279
creating........................................................................81 importing part of bolt catalog............................280
examples......................................................................87 merging bolt catalogs ...........................................277
exploding.....................................................................87 properties..................................................................348
highlighting ................................................................86 bolts.................................................................... 82, 99, 340
joining ..........................................................................86 adding bolt assemblies to bolt assembly
lotting ........................................................................212 catalog...............................................................276
nested assemblies ............................................. 84, 85 adding bolts to bolt catalog ................................276
numbering...................................................... 186, 188 bolt assembly catalog..................................273, 275
removing objects.......................................................86 bolt catalog ....................................................273, 275
showing and hiding................................................146 bolt group position.................................................101
sub-assemblies ..........................................................82 bolt group shape.....................................................100
364
bolt offsets................................................................102 exporting bolt catalog...........................................278
bolt spacing..............................................................165 exporting material catalog ..................................271
bolting sub-assemblies ...........................................82 exporting part of material catalog ....................271
clash checking .........................................................175 exporting part of profile catalog........................231
creating........................................................... 100, 102 exporting profile catalog......................................231
creating studs ..........................................................278 fixed user-defined profile with multiple
exporting bolt catalog...........................................278 cross sections...................................................227
importing catalog ...................................................279 fixed user-defined profile with single cross
importing part of bolt catalog ............................280 section ...............................................................226
length calculation...................................................311 fixed user-defined profiles...................................226
merging bolt catalogs............................................277 importing bolt catalog ..........................................279
modifying ..................................................................102 importing material catalog..................................272
box profiles .......................................................................245 importing part of bolt catalog............................280
importing profile catalog .....................................233
material catalog......................................................268
c merging bolt catalogs ...........................................277
modifying material catalog .................................269
c profiles............................................................................241
cambering parts ..............................................................129 modifying polygon cross section........................225
cast in place .......................................................................95 modifying profile catalog.....................................217
cast units.............................................................................93 modifying profile with variable cross
adding non-concrete objects ................................94 sections..............................................................230
adding objects ................................................... 93, 94 parametric profiles.................................................236
cast unit type .............................................................95 profile catalog .....................................214, 215, 216
casting direction ........................................95, 96, 97 profile with variable cross sections...................229
changing the main part ..........................................94 profiles with variable cross sections .................228
creating........................................................................93 reinforcing bar catalog .........................................280
exploding.....................................................................95 reinforcing bar shape catalog .............................280
highlighting ................................................................94 rules..................................................................215, 216
lotting ........................................................................212 studs ...........................................................................278
numbering.................................................................188 units used in export and import.........................234
removing objects.......................................................94 user-defined cross sections .................................221
top-in-form face.......................................................97 user-defined material symbols ...........................273
catalogs chamfering .......................................................................119
adding bolt assemblies to bolt assembly corner chamfer dimensions .................................120
catalog ...............................................................276 corner chamfer types.............................................120
adding bolts to bolt catalog ................................276 corner chamfers ......................................................119
adding new material grade..................................269 edge chamfers .........................................................121
adding new profile .................................................218 in sketches ................................................................299
adding user attribute to material grade...........270 checking
adding user attribute to profile ..........................219 sketched cross sections.........................................297
bolt assembly catalog................................. 273, 275 checking the model........................................................161
bolt assembly catalog properties .......................347 keyboard shortcuts.................................................178
bolt catalog ................................................... 273, 275 circles .................................................................................285
bolt catalog properties..........................................348 circular hollow sections................................................247
component catalog ................................................281 circular sections ..............................................................246
defining cross section using DWG file... 224, 225 Clash Check Manager..........................................166, 167
defining cross section using plate .....................223 clash checking .............................................166, 167, 176
defining cross section using polygon................222 bolts............................................................................175
deleting material grade.........................................270 changing priority ....................................................170
deleting profile ........................................................218 changing status.......................................................169
example of adding user attribute to comments .......................................................171, 172
profile.................................................................219 grouping clashes .....................................................170
example of profile export file..............................232 history ........................................................................172
exporting and importing profile catalog..........231 list of clashes ...........................................................169
managing results ....................................................169
365
previewing before printing...................................173 construction objects ........................................................ 43
printing lists of clashes .............................. 173, 174 construction circles.................................................. 45
saving clashes ..........................................................174 construction lines..................................................... 44
searching...................................................................173 construction planes.................................................. 44
sessions......................................................................174 contour plates.......................................................... 79, 325
symbols ......................................................................168 control numbers..............................................................189
ungrouping clashes ................................................171 assigning to parts ...................................................189
class ............................................................................76, 321 directions ..................................................................190
classifying information .................................................203 displaying in model ................................................191
classifying objects example .....................................................................193
Model Organizer......................................................207 locking .......................................................................192
clip planes .........................................................................138 order ...........................................................................190
coincident contraints.....................................................287 removing ...................................................................192
cold rolled profiles..........................................................247 settings ......................................................................350
colliding objects ..............................................................166 unlocking...................................................................192
colors coordinates
background color ......................................................25 coordinate system .................................................... 30
background color examples ...................................25 copying
color settings for object groups..........................322 object groups ...........................................................149
color settings for parts..........................................321 object representation settings............................152
finding RGB values .................................................356 project status visualizations................................154
for parts.......................................................................76 corner chamfers ....................................................119, 345
grid color ............................................................. 30, 33 types and dimensions ............................................120
object groups ...........................................................151 creating
columns assemblies................................................................... 81
concrete columns............................................89, 329 beams close to each other ...................................360
positioning................................................................360 bolts............................................................................100
steel columns ...................................................77, 323 cast units..................................................................... 93
combining parts ............................... 129, 130, 131, 132 clip planes.................................................................138
comments concrete beams ......................................................... 90
in clash checking ......................................... 171, 172 concrete columns ..................................................... 89
comparing parts or assemblies ...................................177 concrete panels ......................................................... 92
component catalog ........................................................281 concrete polybeams ................................................. 90
components concrete slabs............................................................ 91
keyboard shortcuts.................................................148 construction circles.................................................. 45
showing and hiding................................................147 construction lines ..................................................... 44
concrete parts....................................................................88 construction planes.................................................. 44
beams .................................................................90, 330 contour plates............................................................ 79
cast units.....................................................................93 curved beams............................................................. 78
casting direction .......................................................96 fittings .......................................................................122
columns .............................................................89, 329 fixed user-defined profile with multiple
pad footings .....................................................89, 327 cross sections...................................................227
panels .................................................................92, 331 fixed user-defined profile with single cross
polybeams ...................................................................90 section ...............................................................226
slabs....................................................................91, 331 grid lines...................................................................... 34
strip footings....................................................89, 328 grid views.................................................................... 39
warping......................................................................127 grids.............................................................................. 31
constraints ........................................................................286 holes .................................................................103, 104
coincident .................................................................287 logical areas .............................................................205
deleting......................................................................289 lots ..............................................................................213
fixed............................................................................288 models.......................................................................... 18
horizontal..................................................................288 nested assemblies..................................................... 85
parallel .......................................................................286 object groups ...........................................................148
perpendicular ...........................................................287 object representation settings............................150
vertical .......................................................................289 object type categories...........................................205
366
orthogonal beams.....................................................80 deleting
pad footings ...............................................................89 logical areas .............................................................209
parts..............................................................................71 material grade .........................................................270
profile with variable cross sections ...................229 object types ..............................................................209
project status visualizations................................153 profile.........................................................................218
screenshots...............................................................139 detaching parts ...............................................................131
sections......................................................................205 detail properties..............................................................340
sequences..................................................................210 detailing parts
single bolts................................................................102 attaching.........................................................131, 132
sketched cross sections.........................................284 detaching ........................................................131, 132
slabs..............................................................................91 exlopding...................................................................132
standard-part models ............................................196 exploding...................................................................131
steel beams.................................................................78 DGN
steel columns .............................................................77 supported objects ..................................................... 66
steel polybeams.........................................................78 diagnosing model .................................................176, 177
storys ..........................................................................205 dimensions
strip footings..............................................................89 angle...........................................................................291
sub-assemblies ..........................................................82 between two points ...............................................291
tile patterns..............................................................114 deleting from a sketch ..........................................293
twin profiles ...............................................................81 horizontal..................................................................292
views.............................................................................36 in sketching..............................................................289
welds ..................................................... 105, 107, 108 radial ..........................................................................290
creating studs ..................................................................278 vertical.......................................................................292
cross sections display settings................................................................320
cross section sketch editor...................................281 displaying
defining using DWG file........................................224 control numbers......................................................191
defining using plate ...............................................223 distances
defining using polygon..........................................222 measuring .................................................................164
modifying ..................................................................225 dividing models ...............................................................209
modifying profile with variable cross DWG profile to library (6).............................................225
sections..............................................................230
profile with variable cross sections ...................229
profiles with variable cross sections .................228
sketching cross sections .......................................281
e
edge chamfers .............................................119, 121, 346
user-defined .............................................................221 editing
curved parts..............................................................78, 359 rules............................................................................216
Custom Inquiry ................................................................162 end offsets ........................................................................339
adding attributes ....................................................163 erection schedules................................................155, 157
modifying contents ................................................162 erection sequences.........................................................209
cuts .....................................................................................123 exact lines.........................................................................145
hints and tips ...........................................................354 examining
line cuts .......................................................... 123, 125 reference model contents ...................................... 64
part cuts ......................................................... 124, 126 examining the model.....................................................135
polygon cuts.................................................. 124, 125 examples
adding user attribute to profile..........................219
assemblies................................................................... 87
d background colors .................................................... 25
default views creating object groups ..........................................155
property files ............................................................319 creating object representation settings ...........156
defining creating project status visualization
cross section using DWG file...............................224 settings ..............................................................156
cross section using plate ......................................223 creating symmetric C-shaped cross section ...303
cross section using polygon.................................222 defining erection schedules.................................155
defining object group properties................................206 numbering........................ 193, 198, 199, 200, 201
367
profile export file ....................................................232 grid color............................................................. 30, 33
tile pattern definition ............................................115 labels .................................................................... 30, 32
visualizing erection schedules ............................157 line extensions........................................................... 30
visualizing project status......................................154 modifying.................................................................... 32
exploding origin ............................................................................ 30
assemblies...................................................................87 properties..................................................................315
cast units.....................................................................95 work plane grid ......................................................... 28
exploding parts................................................................132 grouping
exporting clashes .......................................................................170
bolt catalog ..............................................................278
material catalog ......................................................271
object type categories ...........................................208
part of material catalog........................................271
h
handles ................................................................................ 69
part of profile catalog ...........................................231 of positioning planes .............................................296
profile catalog..........................................................231 hat profiles .......................................................................256
sketched cross sections.........................................303 hiding
extrusion types ................................................................300 assemblies.................................................................146
components..............................................................147
cut lines.....................................................................354
f grid labels ................................................................... 32
family numbers................................................................186 part labels ................................................................... 71
example .....................................................................198 positioning planes ..................................................295
modifying ..................................................................187 reference lines .........................................................357
finding reference models ...................................................... 61
clashes .......................................................................167 selected parts...........................................................144
finding distant objects ..................................................177 top-in-form face....................................................... 97
fittings................................................................................122 unselected parts......................................................144
fixed constraints .............................................................288 work area .................................................................... 28
fixed profile ......................................................................214 high accuracy...................................................................146
fixed user-defined profile.............................................226 highlighting
fixed user-defined profile with multiple cross assemblies................................................................... 86
sections cast units..................................................................... 94
creating......................................................................227 reference models ...................................................... 61
fixed user-defined profile with single cross section hints and tips, see tips ..................................................353
creating......................................................................226 history
flying through model .....................................................138 of clashes ..................................................................172
folded plates.....................................................................250 holes .........................................................................103, 104
footings............................................................89, 327, 328 horizontal constraints ...................................................288
horizontal dimensions ...................................................292
horizontal position .........................................................338
g
global coordinate system................................................30
grid lines..............................................................................33 i
creating........................................................................34 i beams (concrete)..........................................................257
deleting........................................................................35 i beams (steel) .................................................................239
modifying ....................................................................34 i profiles.............................................................................239
properties ..................................................................316 identical
grid views areas ...........................................................................363
creating........................................................................39 parts............................................................................180
properties ..................................................................319 reinforcements ........................................................181
grids importing
coordinates .................................................................32 bolt catalog ..............................................................279
creating........................................................................31 material catalog......................................................272
deleting........................................................................33 object type categories...........................................207
368
part of bolt catalog ................................................280 units used in export and import.........................234
points ...........................................................................53 user-defined material symbols ...........................273
profile catalog............................................... 231, 233 material catalog..............................................................268
sketched cross sections.........................................302 adding new material grade..................................269
inquiring adding user attribute to material grade ..........270
models........................................................................161 deleting material grade ........................................270
object properties .......................................... 161, 162 exporting...................................................................271
irregular beams (concrete) ...........................................260 exporting part of material catalog ....................271
importing ..................................................................272
modifying..................................................................269
j units used in export and import.........................234
user-defined material symbols ...........................273
joining assemblies ............................................................86
material grades
exporting part of material catalog ....................271
measuring objects ..........................................................163
k angles.........................................................................164
keyboard shortcuts arcs .............................................................................164
for checking the model .........................................178 bolt spacing..............................................................165
for component representation options.............148 distances ...................................................................164
for part representation options ..........................147 merging
for viewing the model ...........................................140 bolt catalogs ............................................................277
Mini Toolbar
modifying part position .......................................... 72
l Model Editor
l profiles.............................................................................240 screen layout.............................................................. 23
labels model objects
part labels ...................................................................70 colors..........................................................................151
ledger beams (concrete) ...............................................258 Model Organizer .............................................................203
length classifying .................................................................207
modifying part length..............................................74 model template
levels...................................................................................360 modifying.................................................................... 22
line cuts .................................................................. 123, 125 modeling
lines hints and tips...........................................................353
exact...........................................................................145 identical areas .........................................................363
local coordinate system ..................................................30 more accurately ......................................................146
logical areas .......................................................... 203, 205 parametric modeling .............................................355
viewing ......................................................................208 rendered or plan view?............................................ 36
lotting.................................................................................212 Modeling of floor bay (66)...........................................128
adding parts .............................................................213 modeling views
creating......................................................................213 surface views ............................................................. 39
deleting......................................................................214 models
removing....................................................................213 about 3D models....................................................... 17
checking for errors .................................................161
creating ....................................................................... 18
m dividing into phases...............................................209
examining .................................................................135
main entry
flying through model.............................................138
subentry.....................................................................171
inquiring....................................................................161
material .............................................................................268
moving .......................................................................137
adding new material grade..................................269
numbering.................................................................179
adding user attribute to material grade...........270
organizing.................................................................203
deleting material grade.........................................270
rotating......................................................................136
exporting material catalog ..................................271
saving........................................................................... 19
importing material catalog ..................................272
viewing ......................................................................135
modifying material catalog..................................269
zooming.....................................................................135
369
modifying object representation settings ....................................149
logical areas .............................................................205 copying ......................................................................152
material catalog ......................................................269 creating .....................................................................150
object types ..............................................................205 deleting......................................................................153
parts..............................................................................71 example .....................................................................156
polygon cross section ............................................225 object type
profile catalog..........................................................217 exporting...................................................................208
profile with variable cross sections ...................230 importing ..................................................................207
modifying model template.............................................22 object type categories...................................................207
moving object types ......................................................................203
models in a view .....................................................137 viewing ......................................................................208
positioning planes ..................................................295 objects
multi-story structures ...................................................360 clash checking .........................................................166
connected to a part ...............................................362
defining visibility ....................................................142
n finding distant objects ..........................................177
inquiring properties......................................161, 162
nested assemblies ..................................................... 84, 85
numbering.............................................................. 179, 187 measuring .................................................................163
about numbering ....................................................179 numbering.................................................................187
assemblies.................................................................188 placing objects in model ......................................361
cast units...................................................................188 positioning................................................................361
checking and repairing..........................................197 showing and hiding................................................141
clearing ......................................................................195 offsets ................................................................................339
control numbers............. 189, 190, 191, 192, 193 opening
examples..................................... 198, 199, 200, 201 models.......................................................................... 19
family numbers................................... 186, 187, 198 opening a model
history ........................................................................197 autosave ....................................................................357
identical parts..........................................................180 error............................................................................357
modifying ..................................................................195 organizing properties.....................................................206
numbering series.......................................... 185, 186 organizing the model.....................................................203
preliminary numbers ..............................................189 orthogonal beams...........................................................326
reinforcement ............................................... 181, 189 positioning................................................................360
sequences..................................................................210 others .................................................................................266
series...................................................... 184, 185, 187 overlapping
settings ........................................................... 349, 350 numbering series.....................................................187
standard-part model..............................................196 views...........................................................................354
user-defined attributes .........................................181 oversized holes ................................................................104
what affects .............................................................180
numbering settings ........................................................349
p
pad footings ............................................................. 89, 327
o positioning................................................................360
page margins ...................................................................174
object groups ...................................................................148
color settings ...........................................................322 page orientation..............................................................174
colors..........................................................................151 panels......................................................................... 92, 262
copying to another model ....................................149 panning..............................................................................137
creating......................................................................148 paper size ..........................................................................174
deleting......................................................................149 parallel constraints.........................................................286
example .....................................................................155 parametric cross section...............................................236
transparency settings ............................................322 parametric modeling......................................................355
object properties profiles.......................................................................238
defining properties .................................................206 parametric profile.................................................214, 236
object group properties.........................................206 parametric profiles ........................................................... 75
object property report templates ...............................161 part add, see attaching parts ......................................130
370
part labels ...........................................................................70 at the intersection of a part and a line.............. 51
showing and hiding..................................................71 at the intersection of a plane and a
part properties .................................................................323 line ........................................................................ 51
part reference lines ........................................................357 at the intersection of two lines............................ 50
parts at the intersection of two part axes ................... 52
adding to assembly ..................................................85 importing .................................................................... 53
assemblies...................................................................81 on line .......................................................................... 47
bending......................................................................359 on plane....................................................................... 48
cambering .................................................................129 parallel to two points .............................................. 46
changing the color ...................................................76 projected points on line.......................................... 48
changing the material .............................................76 properties..................................................................316
changing the material of profile type...............216 tangent to circle ....................................................... 50
changing the profile.................................................74 polybeams................................................................... 78, 90
colors..........................................................................321 calculation................................................................310
combining .................................................................129 polygon cuts...........................................................124, 125
comparing .................................................................177 polygon shapes................................................................126
concrete parts............................................................88 polygon welds..................................................................107
creating........................................................................71 polylines ............................................................................284
curved parts..............................................................359 position
cutting with another part ......................... 124, 126 depth ..........................................................................335
default properties ...................................................358 end offsets................................................................339
handles.........................................................................69 horizontal..................................................................338
hiding .........................................................................144 on the work plane ..................................................333
horizontal parts.......................................................360 part position settings ............................................333
identical parts..........................................................180 rotation......................................................................334
keyboard shortcuts.................................................147 vertical.......................................................................336
labels .................................................................... 70, 71 positioning planes ..........................................................293
lotting ........................................................................213 handles ......................................................................296
modifying ....................................................................71 moving .......................................................................295
modifying part length..............................................74 reverting to default................................................297
modifying part shape...............................................73 prefixes
numbering...................................................... 185, 187 profile name prefixes.............................................236
position................................................................ 69, 72 weld size prefix .......................................................107
position settings......................................................333 preliminary numbers......................................................189
properties ....................................................................69 preparing parts for welding ...............................108, 109
sequences....................................................... 210, 211 previewing
showing only selected parts ................................144 lists of clashes .........................................................173
showing with exact lines......................................145 printing
showing with high accuracy................................146 lists of clashes .........................................................173
splitting......................................................................132 screenshots...............................................................140
steel parts ...................................................................77 priority
user-defined attributes .........................................332 in clash checking ....................................................170
warping......................................................................127 profile catalog
perpendicular constraints.............................................287 adding new profile .................................................218
phases ..................................................................... 209, 210 adding rule................................................................215
in numbering............................................................200 adding user attribute to profile..........................219
plane of curvature ..........................................................359 defining cross section using DWG file....224, 225
plane views .........................................................................42 defining cross section using plate .....................223
points....................................................................................45 defining cross section using polygon................222
along arc using center and arc points ................49 deleting profile ........................................................218
along arc using three arc points ..........................49 editing rule ...............................................................216
along extension of two points ..............................46 example of adding user attribute to
at any position...........................................................52 profile.................................................................219
at the intersection of a circle and a example of profile export file..............................232
line ........................................................................51 exporting...................................................................231
371
exporting part of profile catalog........................231 twin profiles ............................................................... 81
fixed profile ..............................................................214 units used in export and import.........................234
fixed user-defined profile with multiple user-defined............................................................... 76
cross sections...................................................227 user-defined cross sections .................................221
fixed user-defined profile with single cross profitab.inp
section................................................................226 properties..................................................................236
fixed user-defined profiles...................................226 project setup
importing...................................................................231 updating project information................................ 55
importing profile catalog......................................233 project status visualizations........................................153
modifying ..................................................................217 copying ......................................................................154
modifying polygon cross section........................225 creating .....................................................................153
modifying profile with variable cross deleting......................................................................154
sections..............................................................230 example ...........................................................154, 156
parametric profile ........................................ 214, 236 properties
profile with variable cross sections ...................229 bolt assembly catalog............................................347
profiles with variable cross sections .................228 bolt catalog ..............................................................348
units used in export and import.........................234 default........................................................................358
user-defined cross sections .................................221 profitab.inp...............................................................236
Profile cross section from plate (10) .........................223 project properties ..................................................... 55
Profile Editor ....................................................................229
profiles .......................................................................74, 216
adding new profile .................................................218
adding rule................................................................215
r
radial dimensions............................................................290
adding user attribute to profile ..........................219 Radial Grid (1)..................................................................355
defining cross section using DWG file... 224, 225 radius..................................................................................359
defining cross section using plate .....................223 rebar shape catalog........................................................280
defining cross section using polygon................222 rectangular hollow sections ........................................246
deleting profile ........................................................218 rectangular sections ......................................................246
editing rule ...............................................................216 redrawing views ................................................................ 43
example of adding user attribute to reference lines .................................................................357
profile.................................................................219 reference model objects ................................................. 65
example profile export file...................................232 reference models............................................................... 59
exporting ...................................................................231 clash checking .........................................................166
exporting part of profile catalog........................231 contents....................................................................... 64
fixed profile ..............................................................214 examining ................................................................... 64
fixed user-defined profile with multiple hiding ........................................................................... 61
cross sections...................................................227 highlighting................................................................ 61
fixed user-defined profile with single cross inserting ...................................................................... 59
section................................................................226 modifying properties................................................ 61
fixed user-defined profiles...................................226 splitting into reference objects ............................ 66
importing...................................................................231 supported DGN objects ........................................... 66
importing profile catalog......................................233 updating ...................................................................... 62
modifying polygon cross section........................225 viewing changes ....................................................... 62
modifying profile catalog .....................................217 viewing layers............................................................ 63
modifying profile with variable cross refreshing views ................................................................ 43
sections..............................................................230 reinforcement
parametric.........................................................75, 238 identical.....................................................................181
parametric profile ........................................ 214, 236 numbering.......................................................181, 189
prefixes ......................................................................236 shape catalog...........................................................280
profile with variable cross sections ...................229 reinforcing bar.................................................................280
profiles with variable cross sections .................228 reinforcing bar catalog .................................................280
separators..................................................................236 reinforcing bar shape catalog .....................................280
sketched profiles .....................................................301 relative coordinates ......................................................... 32
standard.......................................................................75 rendered views
standardized values for parametric profile .....238
372
representation options ..........................................142 bolt catalog properties..........................................348
repairing bolt properties .........................................................340
numbering errors ....................................................197 color settings .................................................321, 322
repairing model .................................................... 176, 177 concrete beam properties.....................................330
report templates concrete column properties.................................329
for inquiring object properties............................161 concrete panel properties.....................................331
representation options ..................................................142 concrete slab properties .......................................331
restoring default work plane .........................................29 contour plate properties.......................................325
reverting corner chamfer properties....................................345
to default positioning planes ..............................297 detail properties......................................................340
to old clash checking functionality ...................176 display settings........................................................320
RGB values........................................................................356 edge chamfer properties.......................................346
right-hand rule ................................................................353 general modeling settings....................................315
rotating grid line properties .................................................316
models........................................................................136 grid properties .........................................................315
parts............................................................................334 grid view properties ...............................................319
rotation settings......................................................316 numbering settings ......................................349, 350
rotation angle knob..........................................................72 orthogonal beam properties ................................326
round pad footing properties...........................................327
holes ...........................................................................103 part position settings ............................................333
plates..................................................................79, 360 part properties.........................................................323
slabs....................................................................91, 360 point properties.......................................................316
rules ....................................................................................214 rotation settings .....................................................316
adding ........................................................................215 screenshot settings ................................................317
editing........................................................................216 steel beam properties ............................................324
steel column properties ........................................323
strip footing properties .........................................328
s transparency settings ............................................322
twin profile properties ..........................................326
saving
clashes .......................................................................174 view properties........................................................318
models.................................................................. 19, 20 view settings............................................................318
sketched cross sections.........................................298 weld properties........................................................342
saving a model shape
autosave ....................................................................357 modifying part shape............................................... 73
screen layout shifting the work plane................................................... 29
in Model Editor..........................................................23 showing
screenshots assemblies.................................................................146
creating......................................................................139 components..............................................................147
in Windows Vista ....................................................140 cut lines.....................................................................354
printing ......................................................................140 parts labels ................................................................. 71
saving in bitmap format .......................................140 parts with exact lines............................................145
settings ......................................................................317 parts with high accuracy......................................146
searching positioning planes ..................................................295
clashes .......................................................................173 reference lines .........................................................357
sections..............................................................................205 top-in-form face....................................................... 97
selection dial ......................................................................72 views............................................................................. 41
sequences..........................................................................210 work area .................................................................... 28
adding parts .............................................................211 single bolts .......................................................................102
creating......................................................................210 single grid lines ................................................................. 33
deleting......................................................................212 single-part welds ............................................................108
inquiring ....................................................................211 Sketch Browser................................................................282
modifying ..................................................................212 sketch editor ....................................................................281
settings sketched cross sections.................................................281
bolt assembly catalog properties .......................347 adding constraints..................................................286
adding dimensions .................................................289
373
arcs..............................................................................285 on chamfered parts................................................112
chamfers....................................................................299 on cut faces..............................................................111
checking ....................................................................297 on part face..............................................................111
circles .........................................................................285 on parts with openings and recesses................112
creating......................................................................284 on selected areas ....................................................111
creating images.......................................................301 tiled surface treatment ...............................110, 114
example .....................................................................303 surface views ..................................................................... 39
exporting ........................................................ 302, 303 switching between
extrusion types ........................................................300 views............................................................................. 42
importing...................................................................302
modifying ..................................................................298
polylines.....................................................................284
positioning planes ............................. 293, 294, 296
t
t profiles ............................................................................242
profiles .......................................................................301 t profiles (concrete)........................................................258
refining the shape...................................................286 testing
saving .........................................................................298 sketched cross sections.........................................297
sketch thickness ......................................................299 tiled surface treatment .................................................114
using in models .......................................................301 creating new tile patterns....................................114
variables ....................................................................283 pattern definition example ..................................115
slabs......................................................................................91 pattern definitions .................................................117
warping........................................................... 127, 128 pattern elements.....................................................118
slotted holes.....................................................................103 tips
snapping activating overlapping views...............................354
to middle points ......................................................357 creating beams close to each other ..................360
snapshots, see screenshots ..........................................139 creating curved parts.............................................359
splitting creating horizontal parts......................................360
parts............................................................................132 creating round plates and slabs .........................360
plates and slabs.......................................................133 cutting efficiently...................................................354
standard fixed profile ....................................................236 defining default part properties .........................358
standard profiles ...............................................................75 displaying objects connected to a part ............362
standardized values for parametric profile .............238 finding RGB values for colors..............................356
standard-part models ....................................................196 hiding cut lines........................................................354
status modeling identical areas ......................................363
in clash checking ......................................... 169, 170 placing objects in model ......................................361
steel parts ...........................................................................77 positioning columns, pad footings and
assemblies...................................................................81 orthogonal beams...........................................360
beams .................................................................78, 324 positioning objects in radial or circular
columns .............................................................77, 323 pattern ...............................................................361
contour plates..................................................79, 325 right-hand rule........................................................353
curved beams .............................................................78 showing part reference lines...............................357
orthogonal beams...........................................80, 326 top-in-form face............................................................... 97
polybeams ...................................................................78 transparency settings ....................................................322
twin profiles .....................................................81, 326 twin profiles ............................................................. 81, 326
storys ..................................................................................205
creating multi-story structures ..........................360
strip footings............................................................89, 328
studs ...................................................................................278 u
sub-assemblies ..................................................................82 u profiles ...........................................................................241
bolting to existing assembly..................................82 ungrouping
welding to existing assembly ................................83 clashes .......................................................................171
surface treatment ...........................................................109 units used in export and import
adding ........................................................................111 material catalog......................................................234
creating new surface treatments.......................113 profile catalog .........................................................234
modifying ..................................................................110 user interface
on all faces of part .................................................111 in Model Editor.......................................................... 23
374
user-defined attributes .................................................332 view planes................................................................. 37
in numbering............................................................181 visibility of objects ...............................................141, 142
user-defined material symbols visualizing project status..............................................153
creating......................................................................273
user-defined profiles........................................................76
w
warping
v beams.........................................................................127
variable cross sections........................................ 228, 264 concrete parts..........................................................127
variables concrete slabs................................................127, 128
in parametric modeling.........................................355 weld preparation...................................................108, 109
in sketching ..............................................................283 welded beam profiles ....................................................243
vertical constraints.........................................................289 welded box profiles........................................................242
vertical dimensions ........................................................292 welds ........................................................................105, 342
vertical position...............................................................336 between parts..........................................................105
view depth ........................................................................141 creating .................................................105, 107, 108
view planes .........................................................................37 numbering.................................................................350
moving .........................................................................38 polygon welds..........................................................107
view settings ....................................................................318 single-part welds ....................................................108
viewing weld position ...........................................................106
keyboard shortcuts.................................................140 weld preparation...........................................108, 109
logical areas .............................................................208 weld size prefixes ...................................................107
models............................................................. 135, 138 weld types.................................................................344
numbering history ..................................................197 welding sub-assemblies.......................................... 83
object types ..............................................................208 work area .................................................................. 27, 141
reference model contents.......................................64 defining ....................................................................... 27
sequence numbers..................................................211 hiding ........................................................................... 28
views.....................................................................................35 work plane .......................................................................... 28
3D views ....................................................................319 restoring ...................................................................... 29
arranging.....................................................................43 shifting......................................................................... 29
closing..........................................................................43 workspace
creating........................................................................36 in Model Editor.......................................................... 23
default views............................................................319 wq profiles ........................................................................245
deleting........................................................................42
modifying ....................................................................42
naming.........................................................................37
opening........................................................................41
z
z profiles............................................................................240
overlapping...............................................................354 zooming
properties ..................................................................318 with keyboard shortcuts.......................................136
refreshing ....................................................................43 zoom settings ..........................................................136
surface views..............................................................39 zooming in or out ...........................................................135
switching between views .......................................42
temporary....................................................................36
375
Primary Training
First Steps
Description
Author Tekla UK
Date July 2012
Tekla (UK) Limited
Tekla House, Cliffe Park Way Tel. +44 113 307 1200
Morley, Leeds, LS27 0RY Fax +44 113 307 1201
U.K.
First Steps 2 (17)
This first exercise will involve the creation of a new model; the setting out and
creation of grids; working with views and; inserting basic steel and concrete
members into the model. We’ll also look at the different snapping options and the
effects they have.
Creating a Model
When creating a new model, there will be several options to choose from:
The Save in option is where the model folder will be saved, and is usually the default
<TeklaStructuresModels> folder created during installation.
The Model name is what this model will be called. It’s a good idea to try and decide on a permanent
name at this point which will not change. Changing the name of the model can be done afterwards, but
involves changing several file names.
Model template allows you to start a model with a company’s templates and settings predefined. This is
especially useful for sub-contractors. For this model we can set to ’(None)’.
Model type refers to whether the model will be a single or multi-user model. Multi-user is where several
people can work on the same model simultaneously. Here we’ll be using ’Single-user’.
Tekla (UK) Limited
U.K.
First Steps 3 (17)
After creating the model you should have in front of you a 3d view and a default grid.
The mouse pointer should be an arrow, which means it’s in ’selection’ mode. When the pointer is an
arrow it means you can ’pick’ or ’select’ something with the left mouse button. After it is selected, clicking
the right mouse button will bring up a menu related to that item. The general rule in Tekla is that you can
’select’ or ’pick’ something with one click, and bring up its properties with a double-click - as long as
you’re in ’selection’ mode. This goes for objects in the model, views and also toolbar commands.
Controlling Views
Firstly, we’ll see how the view navigation works. By holding the middle mouse button and dragging the
mouse you can pan the view around. By rotating the mouse wheel you can zoom in and out of where the
pointer is placed. By holding Ctrl and the middle mouse button you can rotate the view around by
moving the mouse. Note - The point of rotation (the dashed purple circle) can be set at any time by
pressing V on the keyboard and ’selecting’ a new point. You can also tick the Automatic Rotation
Centre option through the Tools>Options menu, which means a new centre of rotation is specified with
each press.
Workarea
The dashed box around the grid is the work area. In a view, you will only be able to see the parts that are
within this workarea. This can be reduced at any time to allow you to work in a specific area, and also
extended to include the whole model by choosing the Fit Work Area to Entire Model option from the
right click menu of the view. The view needs to be ’selected’ to do this. A selected view will have a red
border around it, meaning it is the active view. Double clicking on the background of a view will bring up
the view properties, which allows you to change various options related to the view.
Tekla (UK) Limited
U.K.
First Steps 4 (17)
Creating a Grid
Now we’ll alter the default grid. Double click the grid to bring up its properties. The ’Grid’ dialogue box
will appear. The first three options are for the coordinates of the grid - or where you want the lines to be -
and the second three allow you to label the grid lines. Note – these must correspond to be correct when
using the Create Views Along Gridlines tool. Change the coordinates and labels as shown and Modify
the grid properties.
Tekla (UK) Limited
U.K.
First Steps 5 (17)
Inserting Members
Now we can put into the model some basic members. Firstly we’ll put in some concrete columns to form
the pad-stones. This command can be started by either clicking the toolbar icon once
or by selecting the option from the Modeling drop down menu (Modeling>Create Concrete
Part>Column). Double clicking the icon or holding Shift when selecting from the drop down menu will
bring up the Concrete Column Properties box.
Bring up the properties and change the profile in the Attributes tab to 1000*1000, and the top and
bottom levels in the Position tab to -450 and -1000 respectively.
Tekla (UK) Limited
U.K.
First Steps 6 (17)
Pressing OK or Apply will then set these properties for this command. The only difference between the
two is that OK will close the dialogue box and Apply will leave it open, allowing you to insert different
members into the model with the same command.
After starting a command the cursor will change to a cross, meaning that command is now active. The
text at the bottom left corner of the screen will give you the instructions related to that command, in this
case ’Pick position’. Place a concrete column at each of the grid intersections. You should notice that the
cursor is ’Snapping’ to various points of the grid with the shape of the yellow symbol changing. This
shape represents the snapping point. What the cursor will automatically snap to is determined by which
snaps are selected on the Snapping toolbar.
You can overide these and pick a specific point at any time by right clicking whilst in a command and
selecting from the menu.
The command will remain active until you Interrupt, which ends the command and takes you back to
’Selection’ mode. You can interrupt by pressing Esc or choosing from the right click menu.
Tekla (UK) Limited
U.K.
First Steps 7 (17)
After interrupting, the cursor will change back to an arrow, allowing you to select any objects in the
model. Multiple items can be selected by holding Shift or Ctrl when selecting. Shift will only allow you to
select, while Ctrl will also allow you to deselect. You can also use a window to pick multiple items. The
direction which you create the window affects what is included in the selection – left to right means the
whole object must be in the window, while right to left will include the object in the selection as long as
any part of it is in the window.
Next we’ll put in some steel columns. Double click the Create Column icon
or select the command from the drop down menu while holding Shift (Modeling>Create Steel
Part>Column) to bring up the Column properties. Change the Profile to UC203*203*46 and the top and
bottom levels to 6000 and -425 respectively, then press OK, which will set these properties to the
command.
Tekla (UK) Limited
U.K.
First Steps 8 (17)
Now place a column at each of the grid intersections over the pad stones, Interrupting when finished to
end the command.
Next we’ll alter the rotation of the four columns at grids B/1, B/4, C/1 and C/4. This can be done either by
bringing up the properties of the member, changing the properties and pressing Modify, or by using the
Mini Toolbar. For this we’ll use the Mini Toolbar, which allows you to easily modify objects and copy
their properties elsewhere. Selecting one of the columns should bring up a transparent menu just next to
it, which will become solid as you hover the cursor over it.
Tekla (UK) Limited
U.K.
First Steps 9 (17)
There will be several properties available to change. Click on the Position icon and move the green dot
around the outer circle 90 degrees, which you will see will rotate the column in the model.
Then double click the Copy properties icon and pick the other three columns.
Tekla (UK) Limited
U.K.
First Steps 10 (17)
When an object in the model is selected, you will notice a yellow and purple dot appear at each end of
the member.
These are the start and end points of that member, with the theoretical line between them the reference
line. When placing an item into the model, the point or points picked represent where this reference line
will be. The object can be positioned relative to this line by changing the various Position settings in the
object properties. Note – it is good idea when modeling in Tekla to position the parts relative to the
reference line where you would like the dimensions on the drawings to be from i.e. centrally in both
directions for columns and bracings, and centrally on plan and below or Behind on elevation for beams.
Now we’ll put some beams between the columns. Bring up the Beam properties (Modeling>Create Steel
Part>Beam)
Change the profile to a UB305*165*40 and press OK.
We want to place the beams from the centre line of each column along the top level. It will make this
easier to do by turning off Snap to geometry lines
Tekla (UK) Limited
U.K.
First Steps 11 (17)
This will mean you’re only able to snap to the reference lines of parts, not the part itself. It is a good idea
to have this switched off when positioning the members as it greatly reduces the risk of picking a wrong
point. With the beam command started, note the difference between this being switched on and off and
what you can snap to.
Snap to geometry lines switched on
Snap to geometry lines switched off
With Snap to geometry lines switched off, place 3 beams between the columns along grid line 1, and 3
between the columns along grid line A.
Tekla (UK) Limited
U.K.
First Steps 12 (17)
Now interrupt, select the 3 beams on grid line 1, right click and select Copy.
Tekla (UK) Limited
U.K.
First Steps 13 (17)
Copy the beams from grid 1 to grids 2, 3 and 4, then do the same for the beams on grid A, copying them
to grids B, C and D.
Next we’ll put some diagonal members in between grids 3 and 4, and C and D. Open the Beam
properties, change the profile to UB254*146*31 and press OK.
Tekla (UK) Limited
U.K.
First Steps 14 (17)
Now we need to select a point to reference from, so with Ctrl held pick the top of the column on grid C/4.
Now we can enter a distance from this reference point. Pressing R on the keyboard will bring up the
Numeric Location box.
Tekla (UK) Limited
U.K.
First Steps 15 (17)
Here we can specify a distance from the point just picked. The first figure will be in the X direction and
the second in Y. If a Z direction is needed then this will come third, however if not there is no need to
enter one. So we want to type in the box ’2000,0’. Pressing OK or the Enter key will then make the first
point of the beam 2000 along grid 4 from the column.
Then do the same for the second point, this time entering values of 0,-2000 to set the second point 2000
back along grid C from the same point.
Tekla (UK) Limited
U.K.
First Steps 16 (17)
Instead of putting the other 3 members in the same way, it would be easier and quicker to copy them
around the centre point of the bay. Pick the diagonal member, right click and select Copy
Special>Rotate.
With the command started we now need to specify a point of rotation. This will be the centre point of the
bay. Again, holding Ctrl, pick the top of the column on grid B/4. Now press R and enter the values
’2500,-2500’. Press OK or Enter and the point of rotation should now be set, filling in the origin values on
the left of the Copy – Rotate box.
Tekla (UK) Limited
U.K.
First Steps 17 (17)
Change the number of copies to 3, the rotaion angle to 90 and then press Copy. This will create 3
copies of the beam around that point.
Tekla (UK) Limited
U.K.
Tekla Structures
Cast-in-place Concrete Detailing
Modeling
Training Manual
January 2011

reserved.
Contents
Introduction 1
LESSON 1 3
1 Starting Tekla Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2 Creating a new model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3 Saving a model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3.1 Saving a model with a different name..................................................................................................... 6
4 Opening a model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4.1 Model created in a previous version ....................................................................................................... 8
5 Moving around in the view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
5.1 Zooming.................................................................................................................................................. 8
5.2 Panning................................................................................................................................................... 9
5.3 Rotating .................................................................................................................................................. 9
6 Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
6.1 View properties ....................................................................................................................................... 9
6.2 Display .................................................................................................................................................. 11
6.3 Creating a basic view............................................................................................................................ 12
6.4 Creating a top view ............................................................................................................................... 12
Moving a plane in a top view............................................................................................................ 13
6.5 Creating a grid view using two points ................................................................................................... 13
6.6 Opening, closing, and deleting named views ....................................................................................... 14
6.7 Changing part representation in model views....................................................................................... 15
Rollover highlight.............................................................................................................................. 16
7 Common buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
LESSON 2 17
8 Grids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
8.1 Creating a grid ...................................................................................................................................... 18
8.2 Creating a second grid.......................................................................................................................... 19
8.3 Creating a grid on a shifted work plane ................................................................................................ 20
8.4 Adding a grid line to an existing grid...................................................................................................... 20
8.5 Modifying a grid line............................................................................................................................... 21
9 Work area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
10 Creating plane views along grid lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
LESSON 3 25
11 Concrete parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
11.1 Creating a concrete column................................................................................................................... 26
11.2 Creating a concrete beam ..................................................................................................................... 26
11.3 Creating a concrete pad footing ............................................................................................................ 27
11.4 Creating a concrete strip footing............................................................................................................ 27
11.5 Creating a concrete panel ..................................................................................................................... 27
11.6 Creating a concrete slab........................................................................................................................ 28
11.7 Creating a concrete polybeam............................................................................................................... 28
12 Snapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
12.1 Snap switches ....................................................................................................................................... 28
12.2 Dimensions in snapping ........................................................................................................................ 30
12.3 Orthogonal snapping ............................................................................................................................. 31
12.4 Measuring distances, angles, and bolt spaces...................................................................................... 31
13 Mini Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
13.1 Mini Toolbar examples .......................................................................................................................... 32
13.2 Customizing Mini Toolbar ...................................................................................................................... 34
14 Part properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
14.1 Attributes tab ......................................................................................................................................... 35
14.2 Position tab............................................................................................................................................ 36
14.3 Modifying part properties ....................................................................................................................... 37
15 Selecting multiple objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
15.1 Hiding unselected parts ......................................................................................................................... 39
15.2 Hiding selected parts ............................................................................................................................. 40
16 Part modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
16.1 Moving start and end points .................................................................................................................. 41
Extending and shortening parts ........................................................................................................ 42
16.2 Creating curved parts ............................................................................................................................ 43
16.3 Adding recesses to concrete parts ........................................................................................................ 44
16.4 Cambering and warping parts ............................................................................................................... 45
Cambering........................................................................................................................................ 45
Warping ............................................................................................................................................ 46
17 Corner chamfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
17.1 Chamfering example............................................................................................................................. 47
18 Selection switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
18.1 Selection filters...................................................................................................................................... 50
Selection filter example .................................................................................................................... 50
18.2 Selection examples............................................................................................................................... 51
19 Steel parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
19.1 Creating a steel column ........................................................................................................................ 55
19.2 Creating a steel beam........................................................................................................................... 55
19.3 Creating a curved steel beam ............................................................................................................... 55
19.4 Creating a steel polybeam .................................................................................................................... 56
19.5 Creating an orthogonal steel beam....................................................................................................... 57
19.6 Creating a steel twin profile................................................................................................................... 57
19.7 Creating a steel contour plate ............................................................................................................... 57
Setting the contour plate orientation................................................................................................. 57
Adding a corner to a contour plate ................................................................................................... 59
Removing a corner from a contour plate .......................................................................................... 60
LESSON 4 61
20 Copying and moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
20.1 Copying................................................................................................................................................. 63
20.2 Copying linearly..................................................................................................................................... 63
20.3 Copying and rotating............................................................................................................................. 64
20.4 Copying and mirroring........................................................................................................................... 65
Mirroring an asymmetrical column ................................................................................................... 66
20.5 Copying to another plane...................................................................................................................... 66
20.6 Copying to another object ..................................................................................................................... 68
20.7 Copying from another model................................................................................................................. 69
20.8 Moving................................................................................................................................................... 69
20.9 Moving linearly ...................................................................................................................................... 70
20.10 Moving and rotating............................................................................................................................... 71
20.11 Moving and mirroring ............................................................................................................................ 71
20.12 Moving to another plane........................................................................................................................ 72
20.13 Moving to another object....................................................................................................................... 72
21 Fine-tuning part shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
21.1 Fittings ................................................................................................................................................... 73
Creating a fitting................................................................................................................................ 73
21.2 Cutting parts with a line ......................................................................................................................... 73
21.3 Cutting parts with another part .............................................................................................................. 74
Errors in part cuts.............................................................................................................................. 75
21.4 Cutting parts with a polygon .................................................................................................................. 76
21.5 Creating welds and fittings in multiple objects....................................................................................... 76
21.6 Surface treatment .................................................................................................................................. 77
Adding surface treatment to a selected area .................................................................................... 77
21.7 Chamfering part edges .......................................................................................................................... 78
22 Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
22.1 Bolt properties ....................................................................................................................................... 79
Holes................................................................................................................................................. 81
22.2 Creating a bolt group ............................................................................................................................. 82
22.3 Creating a divided bolt group................................................................................................................. 83
22.4 Modifying bolt groups ............................................................................................................................ 84
22.5 Creating slotted holes............................................................................................................................ 84
22.6 Bolts on cast-in embeds ........................................................................................................................ 85
23 Splitting and combining parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
23.1 Splitting parts......................................................................................................................................... 86
23.2 Combining parts .................................................................................................................................... 86
24 Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
24.1 Creating points along a line ................................................................................................................... 88
25 Cast units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
25.1 Defining the cast unit type ..................................................................................................................... 88
25.2 Creating a cast unit................................................................................................................................ 89
25.3 Adding objects to cast units................................................................................................................... 89
25.4 Modifying cast units ............................................................................................................................... 89
25.5 Highlighting objects in a cast unit .......................................................................................................... 89
25.6 Changing the cast unit main part........................................................................................................... 90
25.7 Creating a cast unit view ....................................................................................................................... 90
25.8 Removing objects from a cast unit ........................................................................................................ 91
26 Modeling tips for concrete parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
26.1 Overlapping part lines in cast units........................................................................................................ 91
26.2 Defining top-in-form face....................................................................................................................... 92
26.3 Orienting parts for drawings.................................................................................................................. 93
LESSON 5 97
27 Modifying the work area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
27.1 Fit work area to selected parts.............................................................................................................. 98
27.2 Fit work area using two points............................................................................................................... 98
27.3 Fit work area to entire model in selected views .................................................................................... 99
27.4 Finding distant objects .......................................................................................................................... 99
27.5 Finding distant points .......................................................................................................................... 100
27.6 Finding distant reference models........................................................................................................ 100
27.7 Hiding the work area ........................................................................................................................... 101
28 Clip planes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
28.1 Creating a clip plane ........................................................................................................................... 101
28.2 Moving a clip plane ............................................................................................................................. 102
28.3 Deleting a clip plane............................................................................................................................ 104
29 Work plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
29.1 Set work plane parallel to a plane....................................................................................................... 104
29.2 Set work plane using three points....................................................................................................... 105
29.3 Set work plane parallel to view plane.................................................................................................. 105
29.4 Set work plane to top plane of a part .................................................................................................. 105
29.5 Shifting the work plane........................................................................................................................ 106
30 Advanced snapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
30.1 Numeric snapping ............................................................................................................................... 106
30.2 Numeric location coordinates.............................................................................................................. 107
30.3 Creating a temporary reference point ................................................................................................. 108
30.4 Locking a coordinate........................................................................................................................... 109
30.5 Snapping examples............................................................................................................................. 109
Creating a beam with a certain length............................................................................................ 110
Creating a shifted beam with a certain length ................................................................................ 110
Creating two parallel and equally long beams................................................................................ 111
Creating a beam using a temporary reference point ...................................................................... 113
Creating a beam using snap override ............................................................................................ 114
LESSON 6 117
31 Component catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
32 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
32.1 Creating a component ......................................................................................................................... 120
32.2 Component status ............................................................................................................................... 120
32.3 Modifying component properties ......................................................................................................... 120
32.4 Saving component properties.............................................................................................................. 121
32.5 Conceptual components...................................................................................................................... 121
Converting a conceptual component to a detailed component ....................................................... 121
32.6 Example............................................................................................................................................... 122
Inserting a pad footing reinforcement ............................................................................................. 122
Modifying the pad footing reinforcement......................................................................................... 122
33 Creating component default views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
34 Material catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
34.1 Adding a material grade ...................................................................................................................... 125
34.2 Deleting a material grade .................................................................................................................... 126
35 Profile catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
35.1 Adding a profile.................................................................................................................................... 128
35.2 Modifying a profile ............................................................................................................................... 128
35.3 Deleting a profile.................................................................................................................................. 128
36 Parametric profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
36.1 Parametric concrete profiles................................................................................................................ 129
LESSON 7 131
37 Entering project information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
38 Switching between single-user and multi-user modes . . . . . . . 133
39 Checking the model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
39.1 Finding clashes in a model .................................................................................................................. 134
39.2 Flying through the model ..................................................................................................................... 135
39.3 Checking using reports........................................................................................................................ 135
40 Inquiring the model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
40.1 Inquiring object properties ................................................................................................................... 136
Inquiring bolts.................................................................................................................................. 137
40.2 Inquiring cast unit objects .................................................................................................................... 137
Displaying all objects connected to a part....................................................................................... 137
40.3 Inquiring welded parts ......................................................................................................................... 138
40.4 Inquiring the center of gravity .............................................................................................................. 138
41 Representing objects in model views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
41.1 Creating object representation settings............................................................................................... 139
41.2 Defining your own colors to model object groups ............................................................................... 140
42 Phase Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
42.1 Dividing the model into phases ........................................................................................................... 143
LESSON 8 145
43 Custom components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
43.1 Custom component types ................................................................................................................... 146
43.2 Exploding a component....................................................................................................................... 147
43.3 Defining a custom component............................................................................................................. 147
43.4 Exporting and importing ...................................................................................................................... 148
44 Reference models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
44.1 Inserting a reference model ................................................................................................................ 149
44.2 Hiding a reference model.................................................................................................................... 150
44.3 Updating a reference model................................................................................................................ 150
44.4 Detecting changes in reference models.............................................................................................. 151
Example ......................................................................................................................................... 152
44.5 Handling large reference models ........................................................................................................ 153
45 Recording a macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
45.1 Running a macro................................................................................................................................. 154
45.2 Editing a macro ................................................................................................................................... 154
46 WebViewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
46.1 Publishing a model as a web page ..................................................................................................... 155
47 Tekla Structures Model Reviewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
47.1 Opening a model in Model Reviewer .................................................................................................. 156
LESSON 9 157
48 Reinforcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
48.1 Reinforcing bar group.......................................................................................................................... 158
Reinforcing bar group types ........................................................................................................... 158
Creating a reinforcing bar group..................................................................................................... 159
Distribution area ............................................................................................................................. 159
Distribution of bars ......................................................................................................................... 160
48.2 Reinforcing bar.................................................................................................................................... 162
Creating a reinforcing bar............................................................................................................... 162
Defining a hook for a reinforcing bar............................................................................................... 164
Defining the reinforcing bar cover thickness ................................................................................... 165
Modifying reinforcing bars............................................................................................................... 166
48.3 Curved reinforcing bar group............................................................................................................... 167
48.4 Creating a circular reinforcing bar group ............................................................................................. 168
48.5 Creating a reinforcement mesh ........................................................................................................... 169
48.6 Creating a reinforcement splice........................................................................................................... 170
48.7 Attaching reinforcing bars to another part ........................................................................................... 171
49 Custom reinforcement component example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
49.1 Creating a reinforcement for a column ................................................................................................ 172
49.2 Defining a custom reinforcement component ...................................................................................... 176
50 Reinforcement tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
51 Reinforcement components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
51.1 Adding a reinforcement component..................................................................................................... 178
51.2 Reinforcement component examples .................................................................................................. 178
LESSON 10 183
52 Modeling the building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
52.1 Create the grids ................................................................................................................................... 184
Create the grid ................................................................................................................................ 184
Create the grid line.......................................................................................................................... 185
Create the grid views ...................................................................................................................... 186
52.2 Create the foundation elements .......................................................................................................... 186
Create the pad footings................................................................................................................... 186
Create the strip footings.................................................................................................................. 187
52.3 Create the concrete frame elements ................................................................................................... 189
Create the concrete columns.......................................................................................................... 189
Create the concrete panels............................................................................................................. 192
Create the concrete beams............................................................................................................. 196
52.4 Create the additional elements............................................................................................................ 198
Create the mat foundation .............................................................................................................. 198
Create the concrete slabs ............................................................................................................... 200
Create the openings........................................................................................................................ 203
Create the piles and the pilecaps.................................................................................................... 206
52.5 Create the steel frame elements ......................................................................................................... 207
Create the steel columns ................................................................................................................ 207
Create the steel beams................................................................................................................... 209
52.6 Create the reinforced concrete to steel interface................................................................................. 212
Create the base plates and the anchor bolts.................................................................................. 212
Create the cast-in-plate connections.............................................................................................. 213
53 Reinforcing the building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
53.1 Create reinforcements manually ......................................................................................................... 215
Create the reinforcing bars............................................................................................................. 215
Create the reinforcing bar group .................................................................................................... 217
Reinforce the curved wall ............................................................................................................... 219
53.2 Create reinforcements using components .......................................................................................... 219
Reinforce the pad footings ............................................................................................................. 219
Reinforce the strip footings............................................................................................................. 220
Reinforce pilecaps.......................................................................................................................... 220
Create the starter bars ................................................................................................................... 221
Reinforce the rectangular columns................................................................................................. 222
Create the reinforcement mesh...................................................................................................... 222
Reinforce the openings in the slabs and the wall ........................................................................... 223
LESSON 11 225
54 Concrete components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
54.1 Concrete foundation (1030) ................................................................................................................ 226
54.2 Create hole around part (92)............................................................................................................... 226
54.3 Border rebar (93)................................................................................................................................. 227
54.4 Inbedded (1008).................................................................................................................................. 228
54.5 Opening in wall (40) ............................................................................................................................ 229
54.6 Braced girders (88 and 89) ................................................................................................................. 230
54.7 Rebar in beam (90) ............................................................................................................................. 231
54.8 Border rebar (92)................................................................................................................................. 232
54.9 Longitudinal reinforcement (70) .......................................................................................................... 232
54.10 Beam reinforcement (63) .................................................................................................................... 233
54.11 Pad footing reinforcement (77)............................................................................................................ 233
54.12 Beam end reinforcement (79) ............................................................................................................. 233
54.13 Lifting anchor (80) ............................................................................................................................... 234
54.14 Round column reinforcement (82)....................................................................................................... 234
54.15 Rectangular column reinforcement (83).............................................................................................. 234
54.16 Hole reinforcement for slabs and walls (84)........................................................................................ 235
54.17 Hole creation and reinforcement (85).................................................................................................. 235
54.18 Starter bars for pillar (86) .................................................................................................................... 235
54.19 Starter bars for footing (87)................................................................................................................. 236
54.20 Slab bars (18)...................................................................................................................................... 236
54.21 Reinforcement mesh array in area (89)............................................................................................... 236
54.22 Stairwells and elevation shafts (90)..................................................................................................... 237
55 Steel components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
55.1 End plate (144) .................................................................................................................................... 237
55.2 Cranked beam (41).............................................................................................................................. 238
55.3 Haunch (40)......................................................................................................................................... 239
55.4 Joining plates (14) ............................................................................................................................... 239
55.5 Base plate (1004) ................................................................................................................................ 239
55.6 Stiffened base plate (1014) ................................................................................................................. 240
55.7 Stiffeners (1003) .................................................................................................................................. 241
55.8 Stub (1011).......................................................................................................................................... 241
55.9 End plate detail (1002) ........................................................................................................................ 242
55.10 Stanchion weld (85)............................................................................................................................. 243
55.11 Manlock column (1032) ....................................................................................................................... 243
55.12 Manlock beam (1033).......................................................................................................................... 244
55.13 Array of objects (29) ............................................................................................................................ 244
LESSON 12 247
56 Using Tekla Structures Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
56.1 Opening Tekla Structures Help ........................................................................................................... 248
56.2 Browsing Help topics by subject.......................................................................................................... 248
56.3 Finding Help topics using the index..................................................................................................... 249
56.4 Searching for Help topics .................................................................................................................... 249
Viewing the search results.............................................................................................................. 249
Using search filters ......................................................................................................................... 250
56.5 Saving favorite Help topics .................................................................................................................. 250
Introduction
Tekla Structures is Building Information Modeling (BIM) software that enables the creation
and management of accurately detailed and highly constructable 3D structural models
regardless of material or structural complexity. Tekla models can be used to cover the entire
building process from conceptual design to fabrication, erection, and construction
management.
The 3D structural model includes the geometry and design of the structure, and all the
information about profiles and cross sections, connection types, materials, structural analysis,
etc. Tekla Structures drawings and reports are integrated with the models. Consequently,
dimensions and marks are always correct. Drawings and reports can be created at any stage of
the project and updated according to the changes in the model.
Tekla helps all new Tekla Structures users to get started and to maintain their development. Our
well-defined training course is a jump start to Tekla Structures software and helps to maximize
using Tekla Structures to its full potential. During the basic training course, you will be taught
the basic principles of Tekla Structures. Each training day contains several exercises so you
will learn to apply what you have learned in theory. The instructor will show the correct
solution to each exercise. You can freely ask the the instructor questions to make sure you have
understood each point correctly.
This training manual is intended to be used during a basic Tekla Structures training course, but
you can also use it on your own after the training course. In addition, Tekla provides online
learning material so the users can learn how to benefit from version improvements and adapt to
using the new features.
The following learning and support material is available on the Tekla Extranet (https://
extranet.tekla.com) for all our customers with a valid maintenance agreement. When the
material is available also in the Tekla Structures software via the help menu, it is separately
indicated.
Type Material Language Location

Training manuals Steel Detailing, English, French, Extranet:
Modeling German, Dutch, Italian,
Self-learning > Manuals &
Spanish, Russian,
Steel Detailing, instructions
Japanese, Chinese
Drawings
Precast Concrete
Detailing, Modeling
Precast Concrete
Detailing, Drawings
Engineering, Modeling
Engineering, Drawings
Construction
Management
Cast-in-place Concrete
Detailing, Modeling
Detailing, Drawings
Product Help file English, French, Help > Tekla Structures Help
documentation German, Dutch, Italian,
Manuals in PDF Extranet:
Spanish, Russian,
format
Japanese, Chinese Self-learning > Manuals &
instructions
Release Notes Help > Release Notes
Quick reference guide Extranet:
to Tekla Structures
instructions
Keyboard shortcuts Extranet:
instructions
Videos and First Steps with Tekla English, Finnish, Help > Learning Center > First Steps
tutorials Structures - Interactive Swedish, German, with Tekla Structures
Tutorial Dutch, French, Spanish,
Extranet:
Italian, Russian,
Japanese, Chinese Self-learning > Interactive tutorials
& videos
http://www.tekla.com/firststeps
Top New Features English, German, Help > Learning Center > Top New
Videos Dutch, French, Spanish, Features
Italian, Russian,
Extranet:
Japanese, Chinese
Self-learning > Interactive tutorials
& videos
http://www.tekla.com/
topnewfeatures
First steps with BIM - English http://www.tekla.com/bimlessons
interactive tutorials
More videos and English Extranet:
tutorials
& videos
Other support Frequently Asked English Extranet:
material Questions
Self-learning > Questions & answers
Tekla Structures Extranet:
Glossary
Self-learning > Tekla Structures
Glossary
Start-up checklist Extranet:
Self-learning > Start-up checklist
Discussion Forum Extranet:
Discussion Forum
Product Information English, French, Extranet:
German, Japanese,
Product
Chinese
LESSON 1
In this lesson, you will learn the following things:
• how to start Tekla Structures
• how to create, open, and save a model
• how to move around in the model
• what views are and how they are created
• how to use the common buttons in the dialog boxes
> LESSON 1
1 Starting Tekla Structures
To start Tekla Structures:
1. Click the Windows Start button.
2. Click All Programs.
3. Go to the Tekla Structures 17.0 menu item and click Tekla Structures 17.0.
The Tekla Structures - Login dialog box opens.
4. In the dialog box, select the license, role and environment you want to use.
5. Click OK to start Tekla Structures.
2 Creating a new model

When Tekla Structures starts, the Learn Tekla Structures dialog box opens. The dialog box
contains useful links to, for example, tutorials and quick guides.
Creating a new model

1. Click Create a new model in the Learn Tekla Structures dialog box, or click File >
LESSON 1
New....
The New dialog box opens.
2. Enter the name of the model in the Model name box.
Do not use special characters ( / \ . ; : | ) in model names.
3. Define the folder where you want to save your model.

By default, Tekla Structures saves the models in the
..\TeklaStructuresModels folder. If you want to save the model in another
folder, click Browse... to browse for the model folder.
4. In the Model type list, select either Single-user or Multi-user.

If you select Multi-user, enter the server name.
5. Click OK.
Tekla Structures creates a 3D view using standard view properties.
LESSON 1
3 Saving a model
Tekla Structures prompts you to save the open model when you close Tekla Structures. You
should also save your model regularly to avoid losing any work. Autosave also automatically
To save the model, click File > Save, or click . Tekla Structures saves the model and the
message database stored appears on the status bar.
Autosave automatically saves your model and drawings at set intervals.

To set the autosave interval, click Tools > Options > Options... >
General.
3.1 Saving a model with a different name

To save a copy of a model with a different name:
Saving a model
1. Click File > Save as... to open the Save as dialog box.
LESSON 1
2. Enter the new model name in the Model name box.
3. If you want to save the model in a different folder, click Browse... to browse for the
folder.
4. In the Save as dialog box, click OK to save the model.
4 Opening a model
To open a model:
1. Click File > Open..., or click .

The Open dialog box opens.
The information in the Designer and Description columns comes from

the Project Properties dialog box.
2. Select the model.

By default, Tekla Structures searches for models in the
..\TeklaStructuresModels folder. If your model is in another folder, click
Browse... to browse for the model folder, or use the Look in list with the recently used
folders.
The Model name list contains the recently used models.

Opening a model

LESSON 1
4.1 Model created in a previous version
Tekla Structures displays a warning when you open a model that was created in a previous
You can open the model by clicking OK.

If you edit the model and want to save it, the following warning appears:
You have two options:

• If you click Yes, the model is saved and it cannot be opened with the previous Tekla
Structures version anymore.
• If you click No, the model is not saved. You can open and edit the model with the Tekla
Structures version in which the model was initially created.
We recommend that you complete any models you have started using
your current Tekla Structures version. Custom components and drawings
created in an older version may not work properly in the new Tekla
Structures version.
5 Moving around in the view

There are several tools you can use to change what you see in a view. This topic introduces
some of them.
5.1 Zooming
Moving around in the view
The zoom tools allow you to focus in on a particular area, or pull out for a wider view.
LESSON 1
Use the mouse wheel to zoom in and out in the model: scroll forward to zoom in, scroll
backward to zoom out.
You can also zoom by clicking View > Zoom and selecting an option.
5.2 Panning
To pan, hold down the middle mouse button. When the pointer changes to a hand symbol, click
and drag the model to move it anywhere in the view window.
To activate or disable the middle button pan, click Tools > Options > Middle Button Pan, or
Shift + M. There is a checkmark next to the menu option when the middle button pan is active.
5.3 Rotating
To rotate the model:
1. To set the center of rotation, press the V key.
2. Pick the center of rotation.
3. Hold down the Ctrl key and drag with the middle mouse button to rotate the model.
6 Views
A view is a representation of a model from a specific location. Each view is displayed in its
own window in the Tekla Structures. There are several types of views. For example, you can
create views
• of the entire model
• of selected assemblies and cast units
• along grid lines.
6.1 View properties

To define the view properties, click View > View Properties.... The View Properties dialog
box opens.
LESSON 1
Views
The View Properties dialog box contains the following options:
Option Description
Name Name of the view. You should give a view a unique name if
you need to open it in later sessions. When you exit the
model, Tekla Structures only saves named views.
Angle Switch between the 3D and Plane angle.
Projection Switch between the Orthogonal and Perspective projection.
The options are available only in the rendered view type.
Rotation around Z Rotation angle around the z axis.
Rotation around X Rotation angle around the x axis.
View type View type defines the appearance of the view. The view type
options are Rendered and Wire frame.
Color and transparency Color and transparency settings that are applied to object
in all views groups in all views.
View depth: Up View depth upwards from the view plane. The objects within
the displayed depth and the work area are visible in the
model
View depth: Down View depth downwards from the view plane. The objects
within the displayed depth and the work area are visible in
the model
Visibility of object types Define the visibility and representation of object types.
Visible object group Define the visibility of object groups.
LESSON 1
Views
6.2 Display
You can define visibility and representation settings of object types in the Display dialog box.
To open the Display dialog box, click View > View Properties..., and then click Display... in
the View Properties dialog box.
The Display dialog box contains the Settings and Advanced tabs.
Settings tab You can define the visibility of object types on the Settings tab. You can also define the
representation settings of model parts and components.
LESSON 1
Views
The default representation mode for bolts is Exact. It shows bolts, washers, and nuts as solids.
The Fast option displays the axis and a cross to represent the bolt head. Fast is the
recommended representation mode for bolts, because it increases display speed significantly
and consumes less system memory.
Advanced tab You can define the visibility of a part center line, part reference line, part labels and connection
texts on the Advanced tab.
You can also define the size of points in views. In model increases the point size on the screen
when you zoom in. In view does not.
Sometimes the work area in the model can be huge because points are
positioned far away from the origin of the model. To easily locate these
points for deletion, change the Point size to 1000 or 1500.
6.3 Creating a basic view

Basic views are views parallel to the global basic planes, i.e. xy, xz, and zy. In basic views two
axes always define the view plane and they appear in the plane name. The third axis is
perpendicular to the view plane. It does not appear in the plane name. In the basic plane view,
the model is shown from the direction of that third axis.
To create a basic view:
1. Click View > Create View of Model > Basic View... or .

The Create Basic View dialog box opens.
2. Select the plane parallel to the view plane.

3. Enter the level coordinate of the view plane.
4. Click Create.
Tekla Structures creates the basic view. The active properties of the View Properties dialog
box are used in the view.
6.4 Creating a top view

To create a top view:
1. Click View > View Properties... to open the View Properties dialog box.
2. Select plane from the list next to the Load button. Click Load.
The properties are changed.
LESSON 1
Views
3. Click OK.
4. Click View > Create View of Model > Basic View... or to open the Create Basic
View dialog box.
5. Enter the level distance in the Coordinate box.
For example, if you want that the plane view is at level +4500, enter 4500 in the box.
6. Click Create to create the top view.
Moving a plane in a top view

To move a plane in a top view:
1. Click the view.
A red frame appears in the edge of the view. The view is now selected.
2. Right-click and select Move Special > Linear....
The Move - Linear dialog box opens.
3. Enter the moving distance in the dZ box and click Move.
The Confirm View Move dialog box opens.
4. Click Yes.
The plane moves.
If you want to change the name of the view, double-click the view and enter the name in the
View Properties dialog box.
6.5 Creating a grid view using two points

To create a grid view using two points:
1. Hold down the Shift key and click View > Create View of Model > Using Two Points
or click .
The View Properties dialog box opens.
LESSON 1
2. Select plane from the list next to the Load button and click Load.
The view properties are changed.
Views
3. Click OK.
4. Pick the first point on a grid line.
Two arrows appear. The arrows indicate the direction of the view.
5. When the direction is correct, pick the second point on the grid line.
A new view is created.
6.6 Opening, closing, and deleting named views

You can open, close, and delete named views in the Views dialog box. To open the dialog box,
click View > View List... or .
The Named views list contains the named views that are closed.
Opening views To open views, select them and click the arrow to move the views to the Visible views list.
LESSON 1
Views
The number of the named views is unlimited, but the maximum number
of open views is nine.
Closing views To close a view, move the view to the Named views list.
Deleting views To delete a view, select the view and click Delete.
To select multiple views on lists, use the Shift and Ctrl keys when you
select views. To deselect views, hold down the Ctrl key.
6.7 Changing part representation in model views

In rendered views, you can define separately how Tekla Structures displays parts and
component objects.
Use the shortcuts Ctrl + 1...5 and Shift + 1...5 to set the desired representation for parts in the
model and components.
Example
Shaded wireframe (Ctrl + 2)
Rendered (Ctrl + 4)
LESSON 1
Views
Rollover highlight
When you move the mouse pointer over objects in rendered model views, Tekla Structures
highlights the objects in yellow, so that you can easily see which objects you can select.
To switch rollover highlight on or off, do one of the following:

• Press H.
• Click Tools > Options > Rollover Highlight.
7 Common buttons
Most of the Tekla Structures dialog boxes contain common buttons. These buttons mean the
same thing in all dialog boxes. The common buttons are:
Button Description
Retains the properties in the dialog box without closing the
dialog box. Tekla Structures uses these properties the next time
you create an object of this type.
Closes the dialog box without retaining the properties in the
dialog box or modifying objects.
Creates a new object using the properties in the dialog box.
Fills the dialog box with the properties of the selected object.
When you select several objects, Tekla Structures takes the
properties at random from one of the selected objects.
Displays the help topics for the dialog box.
Modifies the selected objects using the properties in the dialog

box, but does not retain the properties in the dialog box.
Retains the properties in the dialog box and closes the dialog
box. Tekla Structures uses these properties the next time you
create an object of this type.
Switches all the check boxes in the dialog box on and off.
Common buttons
LESSON 1
LESSON 2
• how to create and modify grids
• what the work area is
• how to create plane views along grid lines
> LESSON 2
8 Grids
The Tekla Structures grids are rectangular and they are shown on the view plane by dash-and-
dot lines. Using grids makes it easy to create a model and to locate objects in the model.
When you create a new model, Tekla Structures creates a default grid which can be modified.
You can have one or more grids for one model. You can create one large grid for the entire
model and one or more smaller grids for detailed sections. You can also create single grid lines
and attach them to an existing grid.
8.1 Creating a grid

To create a grid:
1. Click Modeling > Create Grid..., or click .

The Grid dialog box opens.
LESSON 2
2. Adjust the grid properties by entering the x, y, and z coordinates and the labels for the
grid lines.
The coordinates in the x and y directions are relative distances. The coordinates in the z
direction are absolute distances.
Use spaces to separate the coordinate values. Enter zero as the first
coordinate value to show the first grid line on the 0,0 coordinate.
3. Adjust other grid properties if necessary.

• Select Magnetic grid plane to bind objects to grid lines.
• You can lock the grid parameters to prevent accidental changes. To lock the grid
parameters, click the User-defined attributes... button and choose Yes from the
Locked list.
4. Click Create.
5. Click Close.
8.2 Creating a second grid

You can create a second grid with a different origin.
You must have already created a grid before you begin creating a second grid.
To create a second grid:
1. Click Modeling > Create Grid....

2. Enter the origin coordinate values in the X0, Y0, and Z0 boxes in the Origin area. You
can also pick a point in the view and set it as the origin.
The origin of the second grid must be different from the origin of the
first grid.
3. Enter the grid coordinates and labels.

4. Click OK.
You now have two grids with different origins.
LESSON 2
8.3 Creating a grid on a shifted work plane
The current work plane defines the local coordinate system of a Tekla Structures model. You
can shift the work plane to any position by picking points, parallel to one of the global basic
planes, or on a part or view plane. The current work plane is model specific so it is related to all
views.
You can create a new grid and rotate the grid according to a shifted work
plane. This makes it easier to model in the shifted work plane.
8.4 Adding a grid line to an existing grid

To add a single grid line to an existing grid:
LESSON 2
2. Select an existing grid and attach the grid line to it.
3. Pick the start point of the grid line.
8.5 Modifying a grid line


9 Work area
The work area is the main area where you can edit the model. Tekla Structures indicates the
work area of a view using green dashed lines.
LESSON 2
Work area
Work area
The arrow symbol indicates the work plane.

The green cube in a model view represents the global coordinate system. It is located
at the global point of origin.
10 Creating plane views along grid lines

To create plane views along grid lines:
1. Click View > Create View of Model > Along Grid Lines....
The Creation of Views Along Grids Lines dialog box opens.
2. Define the settings you need.

For instance, you can define the number of views and the view name prefixes.
3. Click Create.
The Views dialog box opens.
Creating plane views along grid lines
LESSON 2
4. Move views from the Named views list to the Visible views list.
The direction of all views is -x, +y, and -z.

LESSON 2
24
LESSON 2
TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
LESSON 3
• how to create parts such as columns and beams
• how to snap on points
• how to check distances and angles
• how to use and customize Mini Toolbar
• how to modify parts
• how to create chamfers in part corners
• how to control the selection of objects.
> LESSON 3
11 Concrete parts
You can create concrete parts by using the buttons in the Concrete toolbar, or selecting a
command from the Modeling menu.
Button Command Description

Pad Footing Creates a pad footing at a picked position.
Strip Footing Creates a strip footing that traverses the picked points.
Column Creates a concrete column at a picked position.
Beam Creates a concrete beam between two picked points.
Polybeam Creates a concrete beam consisting of straight and curved

segments.
Slab Creates a concrete slab based on picked positions forming a

contour.
Panel Creates a concrete panel that traverses the picked points.
11.1 Creating a concrete column

1. Click the Create concrete column button.

The column is created.
11.2 Creating a concrete beam

LESSON 3
1. Click the Create concrete beam button.
The beam is created.
When you create horizontal parts such as beams be consistent and

always pick points from left to right and from bottom to top. This
ensures that Tekla Structures places and dimensions the parts in the same
way in drawings, and that part marks automatically appear at the same
part end.
11.3 Creating a concrete pad footing

To create a concrete pad footing:
1. Click the Create pad footing button.

11.4 Creating a concrete strip footing

To create a concrete strip footing:
1. Click the Create strip footing button.

2. Pick the points you want the strip footing to go through.
The strip footing is created.
Curved sections You can create curved sections for strip footings. Use the chamfer feature to create the curved
sections. For more information, see Corner chamfers (p. 46).
11.5 Creating a concrete panel

1. Click the Create concrete panel button.

The concrete panel is created.
Curved sections You can create curved sections for concrete panels. Use the chamfer feature to create the
curved sections. For more information, see Corner chamfers (p. 46).
LESSON 3
11.6 Creating a concrete slab
1. Click the Create concrete slab button.

4. Pick the start point again.
The concrete slab is created.
You can also model floors, walls and panels with the concrete slabs.
11.7 Creating a concrete polybeam

1. Click the Create concrete polybeam button.

2. Pick the points you want the polybeam to go through.
The polybeam is created.
Curved sections You can create curved sections for polybeams. Use the chamfer feature to create the curved
12 Snapping
Most Tekla Structures commands ask you to pick points to position objects.
Snap switches specify exact locations on objects, for example, end points, midpoints, and
intersections. Snap switches help you to pick points to position objects precisely without
having to know the coordinates or create additional lines or points. You can use snap switches
any time Tekla Structures prompts you to specify a point, for example, if you are creating a
beam.
12.1 Snap switches

LESSON 3
The snap switches are located in the Snapping toolbar.

Snapping
Main snap The two main snap switches define whether you can snap to reference points or any other
switches points on objects. If both these switches are off, you cannot snap to any positions, even if all the
other switches are on.
Snap
Button positions Description Symbol
Reference lines You can snap to Large
and points object reference
points (points that
have handles).
Geometry lines You can snap to any Small

and points points on objects.
Other snap You can have Tekla Structures display the snap symbols when you move the mouse pointer
switches over objects. The snap symbol is yellow for model objects and green for objects inside
components.
Snap
Points Snaps to points and grid line
intersections.
End points Snaps to end points of lines,

polyline segments, and arcs.
Centers Snaps to centers of circles and

arcs.
Midpoints Snaps to midpoints of lines,

LESSON 3
Snapping
Snap
Intersections Snaps to intersections of lines,
polyline segments, arcs, and
circles.
Perpendicular Snaps to points on objects that
form a perpendicular
alignment with another object.
Line extensions Snaps to the line extensions of
nearby objects, and reference
and geometry lines of drawing
objects.
Free Snaps to any position.
Nearest point Snaps to the nearest points on

objects, e.g. any point on part
edges or lines.
Lines Snaps to grid lines, reference
lines, and the edges of existing
objects.
12.2 Dimensions in snapping

When you create objects, you can see the dimensions when you snap to points. This is useful
for creating beams of certain length, for example.
LESSON 3
Snapping
Zoom level affects the precision of snapping. To snap on smaller
distances, zoom in.
12.3 Orthogonal snapping

Use the shortcut O or click Tools > Ortho to activate orthogonal snapping. The mouse pointer
locks to the closest orthogonal point on the plane (0, 45, 90, 135, 180 degrees, and so on). The
mouse pointer automatically snaps to positions at even distances in the given direction.
12.4 Measuring distances, angles, and bolt spaces

You can measure distances, angles, radius and length of an arc, and bolt spaces. All
measurements are temporary. The measurements appear in the rendered view window until you
update or redraw the window. Before you start measuring, make sure that you are using
appropriate snap settings.
The following measurement options are available:
• Horizontal distance
• Vertical distance
• Distance
• Angle
• Arc
• Bolt spaces
To measure distances, angles, arcs, and bolt spaces:
1. Click Tools > Measure, or click one of the measurement buttons.
2. Follow the instructions that vary according to the measurement option you selected.
When you measure horizontal and vertical distances, use a plane view.
To switch to a plane view, press Ctrl + P.
13 Mini Toolbar
Mini Toolbar
LESSON 3
You can modify the most common properties of modeling objects with the Mini Toolbar.
The Mini Toolbar appears next to the mouse pointer when you select an object and fades out
when you move the mouse further away or change the selection. You can change the position of
the toolbar by dragging it and locking it to a new position with the lock button in the top right
corner.
13.1 Mini Toolbar examples

Modifying the In this example we modify the profile of a column using the Mini Toolbar:
profile
1. Select the column.
The Mini Toolbar appears next to the mouse pointer.
Mini Toolbar
LESSON 3
2. Move the pointer over the Mini Toolbar.
3. Modify the profile in the Mini Toolbar and press enter.
The profile of the column is changed.
Changing the part In this example we modify the position of a beam using the Mini Toolbar:
position
A window with additional options appears.
Part orientation
Position selection dial
Rotation angle knob
Angle
Plane offset
Depth offset
Mini Toolbar
LESSON 3
2. To change the overall position of the beam, use the round selection dial. Click and drag to
select a position.
3. To change the rotation angle, click and drag the green rotation angle knob.
4. To change the Angle, Plane offset, or Depth offset, enter a value in the corresponding
box.
13.2 Customizing Mini Toolbar

You can customize the Mini Toolbar by selecting which commands are visible, and by adding
macros and user-defined attributes to the toolbar.
To customize the Mini Toolbar:
1. Move the mouse pointer on the Mini Toolbar to display it.
2. Click to open the Customize Mini Toolbar dialog box.
3. Select the elements you wish to show or hide.
The Preview field shows what the toolbar will look like.
4. Include macros and user-defined attributes in the Mini Toolbar.
a Select a macro or user-defined attribute in the list of macros and user-defined
attributes.
b Click Add to Mini Toolbar after each selected macro and user-defined attribute.
The added macros and user-defined attributes are shown in the list of visible
elements.
c To remove macros and user-defined attributes from the Mini Toolbar, unselect
them in the list of visible elements.
5. Click OK.
Mini Toolbar
LESSON 3
14 Part properties
In addition to the Mini Toolbar, you can use the part properties dialog box to view or modify
the properties of a part.
The basic options of the Attributes and Position tabs are described in this section. In addition,
instructions on how to modify part properties are provided.
To open a part properties dialog box, double-click the button of the part, or click Modeling >
Properties and select an option.
14.1 Attributes tab

The Attributes tab includes options for entering the name and defining the material of the part,
for example.
Part properties
LESSON 3
Option Description
Name The name of the part is user-definable. Tekla Structures uses part
names in reports and drawing lists, and to identify parts of the same
type, for example, beams or columns
Profile / Shape Enter the profile of the part. Click the button next to the box to select
the profile from the catalog.
Material Enter the material of the part. Click the button next to the box to
select the material from the catalog.
Finish Finish is user-definable. It describes how the part surface has been
treated, for example, with fire retardant coating.
Class Use Class to group parts wit different colors.
User-defined User-defined attributes provide extra information about a part. Attri-
attributes butes can consist of numbers, text, or lists. Click User-defined attri-
butes... to enter user-defined attrubutes.
14.2 Position tab

The Position tab contains options for defining the placement of the part. The available options
Part properties
vary from part to part.

LESSON 3
Option Description
Position The Position area contains options for defining the location of the
part relative to its reference point or the work plane.
Levels For parts that you create by picking only one point (for example,
columns), you can enter the positions of the part ends, relative to the
picked point, in the global z direction. Use Bottom to define the
position of the first end. Use Top to define the position of the second
end. For example, the height of a column is defined with the entered
values.
End offset Use end offsets to move the ends of a part, relative to its reference
line. You can enter positive and negative values.
Curved beam Define the curvature of the part by entering the radius and the plane
of curvature.
14.3 Modifying part properties

You can modify part properties before you create parts. You can also modify properties of
created parts.
Part properties
Modifying 1. Open the part properties dialog box either by

LESSON 3
properties before
creating parts • double-clicking the button of the part,
• holding down the Shift key and clicking the button of the part, or
• clicking Modeling > Properties and selecting an option.
The modified properties are used when you create parts of the same type.
Modifying 1. Double-click a part.

properties of a
created part The part properties dialog box opens.
3. Click Modify to apply the modified properties to the part.
If you click OK to close the dialog box, the modified properties are
retained and will be used the next time you create parts of the same type.
A quick way to modify the properties of a part is using the mini toolbar.
For more information, see Mini Toolbar (p. 31).
15 Selecting multiple objects

You can select multiple objects simultaneously. To select multiple objects (area selection), do
one of the following:
• Hold down the mouse button and drag the mouse from left to right to select the objects
that are completely within that rectangular area.
Selecting multiple objects
• Hold down the mouse button and drag the mouse from right to left to select the objects
that are completely or partly within that rectangular area.
LESSON 3
To define how area selection works, click Tools > Options > Crossing
Selection.
When the option is off, the dragging direction affects the selection of
objects, as described above. By default, the option is off.
When the option is on, all objects that fall at least partially inside the
rectangular area are selected, regardless of the dragging direction.
15.1 Hiding unselected parts


LESSON 3
To completely hide the unselected parts, hold down the Shift key when

15.2 Hiding selected parts

You can quickly hide selected parts in a view. This can be useful, for example, when you want
to temporarily hide parts in order to see the parts behind them.
The selected parts become invisible.


LESSON 3
16 Part modifications
This section provides information on part modifications. The following topics are explained:
• Moving start and end points
• Bending parts
• Adding recesses to cast units
• Tubular sections
• Cambering and warping
16.1 Moving start and end points

Structures highlights the handles. The handle of the start point is yellow, the rest are magenta.
Start point
End point
You can move the start and end points by using the End offset options in the part properties
dialog box.
Part modifications
LESSON 3
Do not use the Dx, Dy and Dz options on the Position tab for extending
or shortening a part.
Extending and shortening parts

To extend and shorten parts:
1. Ensure that the Snap to part extension lines switch is active.

2. Select the part which you want to extend or shorten.
You can see the part handles when the part is selected.
3. Drag a handle to extend or shorten the part.
Part modifications
LESSON 3
You can see the dimension of extension or shortening when you drag the handle.
Drag the handle along the blue dashed line (the line extension of the
part). This way you do not change the orientation of the part.
To extend or shorten parts by dragging, the Drag and Drop feature must
be enabled. When Drag and Drop is enabled, the D letter is displayed in
the status bar.
To activate Drag and Drop, click Tools > Options > Drag and Drop, or
press the D key.
16.2 Creating curved parts

You can create curved parts by defining a radius and the number of segments for a part. The
number of segments determines how realistic the curved part looks: the more segments, the less
angular the part appears.
These settings can be found either on the Position tab or on the Bending tab, depending
on the part type.
Part modifications
LESSON 3
16.3 Adding recesses to concrete parts
To add recesses to concrete parts, you can use the Cut part with polygon and Cut part with
another part commands. You can create more sophisticated recess shapes with the Cut part
with another part command.
To cut a recess with a part:
1. Create a recess-shaped part and position it through the concrete part you want to cut.
3. Select the concrete part to be cut.
The recess is created.
You can move, copy and modify the recess.
Part modifications
LESSON 3
Recess-shaped cutting part
16.4 Cambering and warping parts

The Deforming tab in part properties dialog box contains the options for cambering and
warping parts.
Warping
Cambering
Cambering
You can use cambering to pre-camber parts, in other words, to curve long heavy sections that
will settle on site and become flat.
Use cambering to show the natural camber of a prestressed part in a model. Cambering affects
the position of cuts, skews, and embeds in the model.
Tekla Structures cambers parts in the local z direction.
To camber a part:
3. In the Cambering field, define the degree of camber.
4. Click Modify.
Part modifications
LESSON 3
Warping
To warp a beam:
1. Double-click the beam to open the part properties dialog box.
3. In the Start box, enter the angle of the beam at its start point, relative to the part
reference line.
4. In the End box, enter the angle of the beam at its end point, relative to the part reference
line.
For example, to warp the beam 45 degrees at the end point, enter 0 in the Start angle box
and 45 in the End angle box.
5. Click Modify to warp the beam.
17 Corner chamfers
Some part corners can be chamfered. You can use the Chamfer command to shape the
following parts: concrete and steel polybeams, contour plates, strip footings, concrete slabs,
and concrete panels.
The end points of a part do not have corner chamfers. The handles that
you select must be at corner points or between two segments of a part.
When Tekla Structures creates a part, by default it has a rectangular chamfer at each corner,
which does not change the geometry of the part.
Default chamfer
Modified chamfers
Corner chamfers
Tekla Structures creates chamfers using the active properties in the Chamfer Properties dialog
box. Click Detailing > Properties > Chamfer > Part Corner Chamfer... to open the dialog box,
LESSON 3
or double-click an existing chamfer.
The Chamfer Properties dialog box contains the following options:
Option Description
Type Defines the shape of the chamfer.
x The dimension of the chamfer.
y The second dimension of straight chamfers.
dz1 Moves the top surface of the part corner in the local z direction of
the part.
dz2 Moves the bottom surface of the part corner in the local z direction
of the part.
17.1 Chamfering example

To modify the thickness of a slab corner:
1. Double-click the handle on the slab corner to open the Chamfer Properties dialog box.
2. Enter the values in the dz1 and dz2 boxes.
3. Click Modify.
The thickness of the corner is modified.
Corner chamfers
LESSON 3
18 Selection switches
You can control object selection by using the selection switches. The selection switches are
located in the Selecting toolbar.
The selection switches are described below:
Button Description
Turns all switches on. Select all object types, except for
single bolts.
Select component symbols.
Select parts, such as columns, beams, and plates.
Select surface treatments.
Select points.
Selection switches
LESSON 3
Button Description
Select entire grids by selecting one line in the grid.
Select single grid lines.
Select welds.
Select line, part, and polygon cuts, and fittings.
Select model views.
Select entire bolt groups by selecting one bolt in the group.
Select single bolts.
Select reinforcing bars and bar groups.
Select planes.
Select distances.
When you click any object belonging to a component, Tekla

Structures selects the component symbol and highlights (does
not select) all component objects.
Objects created automatically by a component can be
selected.
When you click any object in an assembly or a cast unit,

Tekla Structures selects the assembly or cast unit and
highlights all objects in the same assembly or cast unit.
Select single objects in assemblies and cast units.
Select selection filters. The list lists both standard and user-
defined selection filters.
Create your own selection filters.

Selection switches
LESSON 3
18.1 Selection filters
By using selection filters you can select particular objects. Tekla Structures contains several
selection filters by default. If you use, for example, the columns filter, you can only select
columns in the model. The Selection Filter list lists the standard and user-defined filters.
Selection filters
Click to open the Object Group - Selection Filter dialog box
Defining your To define your own filters:

own filters
1. Click the Selection Filter button, or click Edit > Selection Filter... to open the
Object Group - Selection Filter dialog box.
2. Find a filter which has close to the same settings as you need.
3. Modify the settings, then enter a new name in the Save as box.
4. Click Save as, then OK to exit.
You can now choose the new filter from the list.
Selection filter example

In this example we create a selection filter that selects parts whose class is two:
Selection switches
2. Select a row and click Delete row to remove the row.
LESSON 3
Repeat this to every row.
3. Click Add row.
Now the Object Group - Selection Filter dialog box contains one row where you can
define the filter.
4. In the Property list, select Class.
5. In the Value list, enter 2.
6. Enter a unique name in the box next to the Save as button.
7. Click Save as to save the selection filter.
Use the selection filter to select the parts whose class is two.
18.2 Selection examples

Selecting a cast In this example, a cast unit consists of two beams in different spans. A reinforcement (the
unit Rebar in beam (90) component) is added to the cast unit.
Selection switches
LESSON 3
If you want to select the whole cast unit (the two beams with the reinforcement), ensure that the
Select assemblies switch is active.
Scrolling cast To define the level on which to select objects in cast unit, hold down the Shift key and scroll
unit levels with the mouse wheel. Level 0 is the highest cast unit level.
Selection switches
LESSON 3
Level 0
Level 1
The level of the selected assembly is displayed in the status bar.

Level 0:
Level 1:
Selection switches
Selecting objects This cast unit consists of two beams and reinforcement.
LESSON 3
for reports and

drawings
When you generate reports, drawings or other types of output of the cast unit, ensure that the
Select objects in components switch is active. You can then select all the objects.
The Select components switch selects objects at the highest level. The reinforcement
is highlighted but not selected, and the information of the reinforcement is not displayed in the
report or drawing.
19 Steel parts
You can create steel parts by using the buttons in the Steel toolbar, or select a command from
the Modeling menu.

Column Creates a steel column at a picked position.
Beam Creates a steel beam between two picked points.
Polybeam Creates a steel beam consisting of straight and curved

segments.
LESSON 3
Steel parts
Curved Beam Creates a steel beam with its radius defined by three picked
points.
Contour Plate Creates a contour plate based on picked positions forming a

contour.
Orthogonal Creates a steel beam orthogonal to the work plane in a picked

Beam position.
Twin Profile Creates a twin profile between two picked points. A twin
profile consists of two beams.
19.1 Creating a steel column

1. Click the Create column button.

19.2 Creating a steel beam

You can create steel beams, compression bars, wind bracings, plates and tubes with the Create
beam command.
1. Click the Create beam button.

When you create horizontal parts, such as beams, be consistent and

always pick points from left to right, and from bottom to top. This
part end.
19.3 Creating a curved steel beam

A curved beam is a beam which runs through three points. The radius of the curved beam is
automatically calculated on the basis of the picked points.
LESSON 3
Steel parts
1. Click the Create curved beam button.
3. Pick a point on the arc.
The curved steel beam is created.
19.4 Creating a steel polybeam

A polybeam is a part which runs through several points.
1. Click the Create polybeam button.

Do not enter any values for the Radius or the Number of segments in
the polybeam properties dialog box.
Curved sections You can create curved segments for polybeams. Use chamfering to create the curved segments.
For more information, see Corner chamfers (p. 46).
To ensure that you will have correct information in NC files, create

polybeams a little shorter than needed (1). Fit them afterwards or
connect them by using a component (2).
Folded plates Folded plates need to be modeled as polybeams. You can modify the shape of a folded plate by
selecting an appropriate chamfer symbol in the Chamfer Properties dialog box.
LESSON 3
Steel parts
19.5 Creating an orthogonal steel beam
Orthogonal beams are positioned orthogonally to the work plane.
To create an orthogonal steel beam:
19.6 Creating a steel twin profile

A twin profile consists of two identical beams. You define the positions of both beams by
selecting the twin profile type and setting the clearance between the beams in two directions.
To create a steel twin profile:
The twin profile is created.
19.7 Creating a steel contour plate

Contour plates are free-form shaped plates.
To create a steel contour plate:
1. Click the Create contour plate button.

Setting the contour plate orientation

You can set the contour plate main axis to follow the line created by the first and second points
you have picked. This enables you to manually define the plate orientation in drawings and
reports.
LESSON 3
Steel parts
To set the contour plate orientation:
1. Create the contour plate.
The first and second points you pick define the main axis of the plate.
First picked point
Second picked point
2. Double-click the plate to open the Contour Plate Properties dialog box.
3. Click the User-defined attributes... button and go to the Orientation tab.
4. Select From 1st to 2nd creation point from the Main axis direction list.
5. Click Modify and OK to close the dialog box.

6. Click OK to close the Contour Plate Properties dialog box.
7. Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Number Modified Objects to update
numbering.
8. Create a single-part drawing of the contour plate to view the orientation.
LESSON 3
Steel parts
Main axis direction is Automatic.
Main axis direction is From 1st to 2nd creation point.
Adding a corner to a contour plate

To add a corner to a contour plate:
1. Select the contour plate to which you want to add a corner.
4. Pick a new corner (2).
LESSON 3
Steel parts
command.
Removing a corner from a contour plate

To remove a corner from a contour plate:
1. Select the contour plate from which you want to remove a corner.
5. Pick the corner to be removed (3).

command.
LESSON 3
Steel parts
LESSON 4
• how to copy and move objects
• how to fine-tune the part shape
• how to use bolts
• how to split and combine parts
• how to create points
• how to work with cast units
> LESSON 4
20 Copying and moving
You can copy and move objects linearly, with rotation, and with mirroring. Copying creates a
new object, leaving the existing object in its original position. Moving relocates the existing
object.
Copy
Move
Tekla Structures has the following options for copying and moving objects:
Command Description
Edit > Copy or Ctrl + C Copies selected objects.
Edit > Copy Special > Linear... Creates copies of selected objects at a
specified distance from the original.
Edit > Copy Special > Rotate... Creates a copy and rotates it around any
line or around the work plane z axis.
Edit > Copy Special > Mirror... Creates a mirrored copy of an object
through a specified plane.
Edit > Copy Special > To Another Creates a copy on another plane using
Plane three specified points.
Edit > Copy Special > To Another Copies selected objects from one object
Object to another.
Edit > Copy Special > From Another Copies selected objects from another
Model... model.
Command Description
Edit > Move or Ctrl + M Moves selected objects.
Edit > Move Special > Linear... Moves selected objects a specified
distance.
Edit > Move Special > Rotate... Moves the object and rotates it around
any line or around the work plane z
axis.
Edit > Move Special > Mirror... Mirrors the object and moves it through
a specified plane.
Edit > Move Special > To Another Moves the object using three specified
Plane points.
Edit > Move Special > To Another Moves selected objects from one object
Object to another.
LESSON 4
20.1 Copying
To copy an object:
1. Select the objects you want to copy.
2. Click Edit > Copy, or click .

3. Pick the origin for the copying.
4. Pick one or more destination points.
The objects are copied immediately.

5. To stop copying, click Edit > Interrupt or right-click and select Interrupt.
20.2 Copying linearly

Linear copying creates one or several copies of a selected object at a specified distance from
the original. Use linear copying when you want to make many copies of objects at equal
distances. For example, use linear copying to create floors of a building.
LESSON 4
To copy an object linearly to a new position:
2. Click Edit > Copy Special > Linear....
The Copy - Linear dialog box opens.
3. Use one of the two options for entering the desired distance:
• Enter the distance directly in the Copy - Linear dialog box, or
• Pick an origin point and a destination point to set the distance.
4. Enter the number of copies.
5. Click Copy.
The selected objects are copied in the selected destination.
If the dialog box is open but the command is not active anymore, click
the Pick button to re-activate the command.
20.3 Copying and rotating

You can copy objects in a model by rotating them around any line you choose, or around the
work plane z axis.
To rotate an object:
2. Click Edit > Copy Special > Rotate....
The Copy-Rotate dialog box opens.
3. Select Z or line in the Around list box to define whether you want to rotate around the z
axis or around a line.
4. Pick a point to define the rotation axis, or enter its coordinates in the Origin area.
6. If required, enter the dZ value, which is the difference in position between the original
and copied object in the z direction.
7. Enter the rotation angle.
8. Click Copy to copy and rotate the objects.
LESSON 4
Example
Rotation point
20.4 Copying and mirroring

When you copy an object, you can mirror it through a plane that is perpendicular to the work
plane and passes through a line you specify.
The Rotate command is always more preferable than the Mirror

command.
Tekla Structures cannot create mirrored copies of component properties.
The Edit > Copy Special > Mirror... command does not fully mirror
objects if they include components with, for example, asymmetrically
positioned parts.
To copy and mirror an object:

1. Select the objects you want to copy and mirror.
2. Click Edit > Copy Special > Mirror....
The Copy - Mirror dialog box opens.
LESSON 4
3. Pick the start point of the mirroring plane, or enter its coordinates.
4. Pick the end point of the mirroring plane, or enter its coordinates.
5. Enter the angle.
6. Click Copy.
The objects are copied and mirrored.
Example
Start point
End point
Mirror axis
Mirroring an asymmetrical column

When you mirror an asymmetrical column, the properties of the mirrored column are not
automatically correct.
To set the properties of a mirrored asymmetrical column:
1. Select the mirrored column.
2. Click Modeling > Properties > Steel Parts > Orthogonal Beam....
3. Click Get.
4. Click Modify.
5. Click OK.
The properties of the mirrored column are correct.
20.5 Copying to another plane

You can copy objects from the first plane you specify to the second (and third, etc.) plane using
three specified points.
To copy an object to another plane:
LESSON 4
2. Click Edit > Copy Special > To Another Plane.
3. Pick the point of origin of the first plane.
4. Pick a point on the first plane in the positive x direction.
5. Pick a point on the first plane in the positive y direction.
6. Repeat steps 3–5 for all destination planes.
LESSON 4
Select the objects.
Define the origin and the position of the source object.
Define the origin and position of the target object.
Copied objects.
20.6 Copying to another object

You can copy objects from an object to other similar objects. This is useful, for example, when
you detail previously modeled parts. The objects that you can copy between can have different
dimensions, length, and rotation.
LESSON 4
To copy an object to another object:
2. Right-click and select Copy Special > To Another Object from the pop-up menu.
3. Select the object to copy from (source object).
4. Select the objects to copy to (target object).
20.7 Copying from another model

You can copy whole phases from an existing model to another one. You can copy from another
model even when more than one person is working on the model. Tekla Structures only copies
secondary parts from the model if they belong to the same phase as their main part. This applies
to both model and component parts.
Drawings cannot be imported with the model.
To copy objects from another model:

1. Click Edit > Copy Special > From Another Model....
2. Select the model to copy from in the Model directories list.
3. Enter the numbers of the phases from which to copy objects, separated by spaces.
For example, 2 7.
4. Click Copy.
When you enter several phases, separate the different phase numbers
with a space. If additional phases are not created, all the objects in the
model are in phase one.
20.8 Moving
To move an objects:
1. Select the objects you want to move.
2. Click Edit > Move, or click .

3. Pick the origin for moving.
LESSON 4
4. Pick a destination point.
5. The objects are moved immediatelly.
20.9 Moving linearly

Linear moving moves the selected object a specified distance.
To move an object linearly to a new position:
2. Click Edit > Move Special > Linear....
• Enter the distance directly in the Move - Linear dialog box, or
4. Click Move.
The selected objects are moved in the selected destination.
LESSON 4
20.10 Moving and rotating

You can move objects in a model by rotating them around any line you choose, or around the
work plane z axis.
2. Click Edit > Move Special > Rotate....
3. The Move - Rotate dialog box opens.
7. Click Move to rotate the objects around the defined line or axis to a new location.
20.11 Moving and mirroring

When you move an object, you can mirror it through a plane that is perpendicular to the work

command.
LESSON 4
To move and mirror an object:
1. Select the objects you want to move and mirror.
2. Click Edit > Move Special > Mirror....
The Move - Mirror dialog box opens.
3. Pick the start point of the mirroring plane, or enter its coordinates and angle.
4. Click Move.
The objects are moved and mirrored.
20.12 Moving to another plane

You can move objects from the first plane you specify to another plane, which you specify by
picking three points. The moved objects remain in the same position on the second plane as the
original objects on the first plane.
To move an object to another plane:
2. Click Edit > Move Special > To Another Plane.
6. Repeat steps 3–5 for the destination plane.
20.13 Moving to another object

You can move objects from an object to other, similar objects. This is useful, for example,
when you detail previously modeled parts. The objects that you move between can have
different dimensions, length, and rotation.
To move an object to another object:
2. Right-click and select Move Special > To Another Object from the pop-up menu.
3. Select the object to move from (source object).
4. Select the objects to move to (target object).
21 Fine-tuning part shape

You can use Tekla Structures to fine-tune the part shape in the following ways:
• fit part end to fit a part to the selected fitting line
• cut part with line to reshape the end of a part
• cut part with another part to create part-shaped cuts
Fine-tuning part shape
• cut part with a polygon to cut a polygon shape into a part

LESSON 4
21.1 Fittings
You can fit the end of a part by creating a straight cutting line between two points you pick. The
shortest part of the part is deleted automatically.
When you fit parts, ensure that the cutting plane is perpendicular to the model view. Use a
plane view when fitting.
Use the Snap to neareast points (point on line) snap switch

when fitting.
Creating a fitting
To fit a part end:
Do not apply a second fitting on the same part end, because then Tekla
Structures will ignore the first fitting. This happens if you use the Fit
Part End command for cutting and try to make two cuts on the same part
end. In situations like this, use the Cut Part commands instead.
Fitting symbol
21.2 Cutting parts with a line

You can shape the end of a part by using the Cut part with line command. A line cut cuts the
end of a beam on a plane that passes through a line you pick. Several line cuts can be applied to
one part end. In addition, a combination of one fitting and one or more line cuts can be applied.
When you use the line cut for shortening, you have to select the side of the part which has to be
removed.
LESSON 4
When you shorten parts in the longitudinal direction using a fitting or a
line cut, the size of the profile is not changed in reports.
1. Click Detailing > Cut Part > With Line or click .

5. Select the side to be removed.
Fitting
Line cut
following reasons:
• Cuts may cause shop errors, because cuts do not always affect part
length when you export information to NC files.
21.3 Cutting parts with another part

You can create a part-shaped cut by cutting a part with another part.
You can create circular holes with the Cut part with another part
command. Circular holes are also dimensioned in drawings. However,
when creating circular holes, it is better to use the Create bolts
command. For larger holes, increase the tolerance of the holes.

LESSON 4
Cuts are displayed using dash-and-dot lines. It is possible to double-click the cutting line and
change its shape and size.
Errors in part cuts

Occasionally erros may occur when the part is cut. In such cases, the cut part is highlighted in a
transparent color.
To have a cut created correctly, rotate the cut part.
incorrect
correct
An error can also occur when you use the Round tube (23) component. To avoid any errors, set
a slight rotation for the component. Unsolved errors may result in wrong part lengths and
problems in drawing creation.
LESSON 4
21.4 Cutting parts with a polygon
You can cut a polygon shape into a part with a polygon cut. You must create the cuts in a plane
view.
To cut a part with a polygonal shape:
1. Click Detailing > Cut Part > With Polygon or click .

2. Select the part you wan to cut.
4. To close the polygon, click the middle mouse button.
The dash-and-dot lines are cutting lines. They can be used for copying the cutting shape.
21.5 Creating welds and fittings in multiple objects

LESSON 4
You can create welds and fittings in multiple objects with one selection.
To create welds and fittings in multiple objects:
1. Click Detailing > Weld > Create Weld Between Parts.
2. Select the main part and the secondary parts using area selection.
All five objects are now welded. You can now also fit all the five objects with one
command.

You can add surface treatment to parts. Surface treatment for concrete parts include, for
example, flat finishes, surface mixes, and tiles. Surface treatments are visible only in rendered
views.
When you redefine the properties of a part (for example, you change the size of a part), the
surface treatment is automatically modified to fit the part.
To define the properties of the surface treatment, click Detailing > Properties > Surface
Treatment....
For more information on surface treatment, see Tekla Structures Help.

To add surface treatment to a selected area:
LESSON 4
21.7 Chamfering part edges
To chamfer the edge of a part:
1. Click Detailing > Create Chamfer > For Part Edge.
2. Select the part you want to chamfer.
3. Pick a point where you want the chamfer to start on the part edge.
4. Pick a second point where you want the chamfer to end on the part edge.
Tekla Structures displays the chamfer in light blue color.
5. Optional: Modify the chamfer.
a Double-click the chamfer to open the Edge Chamfer Properties dialog box.
b Modify the chamfer properties.
c Click OK.
6. Right-click the view and select Redraw View.
Tekla Structures removes the chamfered edge.
22 Bolts
To create bolts, you can either create a single bolt group or apply a component that
automatically creates bolt groups.
LESSON 4
Bolts
You cannot use bolt elements (such as screws, washers, and nuts) while creating holes, as Tekla
Structures uses the same command for creating bolts and holes.
22.1 Bolt properties
Double-click the Create bolts button to open the Bolt Properties dialog box.
LESSON 4
Bolts
Option Description
Bolt size Bolt diameter. Available diameters depend on the bolt
standard chosen.
Bolt standard Bolt assembly standard that is defined in the bolt
catalog.
Bolt type Defines whether the bolts are assembled on-site or in
the shop. Default setting is Site.
Connect part/assembly Indicates whether you are bolting a secondary part or
a sub-assembly.
LESSON 4
Thread in material Indicates if the thread of the bolt can be inside the
bolted parts.
Bolts
Option Description
Cut length Indicates which parts the bolt connects. Tekla
Structures searches for parts using half the cut length
value, in both directions from the bolt group plane. If
you want to force a bolt to a certain length, enter a
negative value for cut length.
Shape The shape of the bolt group. The options are Array,
Circle, and xy list.
Bolt dist X Bolt spacing, number, or coordinate, depending on the
bolt group shape.
Bolt dist Y Bolt spacing, group diameter, or coordinate,
depending on the bolt group shape.
Hole type Oversized or slotted. This list activates after you
select Parts with slotted holes check boxes.
Slotted hole X X allowance of a slotted hole. Zero for a round hole.
Slotted hole Y Y allowance of a slotted hole. Zero for a round hole.
Rotate slots If the bolt connects several parts, you may want to
rotate alternate holes by 90 degrees.
Options are Odd, Even, and Parallel.
On plane Bolt group location relative to the bolt group x axis on
the work plane.
Rotation Defines how far the bolt group is rotated around the x
axis, relative to the current work plane.
At depth Bolt group location relative to work plane.
Dx, Dy, Dz Offsets that move the bolt group by moving the bolt
group x axis.
Holes
Tekla Structures uses the same command for creating bolts and holes. Before creating holes,
you need to change some of the properties in the Bolt Properties dialog box.
If you want to create only holes without any bolts, clear all the Include in bolt assembly check
boxes:

• Round
• Oversized
LESSON 4
Bolts
• Slotted
• Tapped
22.2 Creating a bolt group

Bolt groups are used to connect parts. Bolts can penetrate one part or multiple parts. By default,
bolt groups are rectangular, but it is also possible to make circular bolt groups. When you insert
a bolt group, you need to pick two points. These two points determine the local x direction of
the bolt group. It is important that the points you pick to create the bolt group are close enough
to the parts you want to connect. The cut length property of a bolt group defines how far along
the bolt axis the parts must be in order to hit the bolt group.
A bolt group can contain a maximum of 100 bolts or holes.
1. Click Detailing > Bolts > Create Bolts or click .

2. Select the shape of the bolt group in the Shape list.
Bolt groups are rectangular by default, but you can also select Circle to create a circular
bolt group.
3. Select the main part to which the secondary parts will be bolted.
An example of a rectangular bolt group:
An example of a circular bolt group:

LESSON 4
Bolts
22.3 Creating a divided bolt group
You can connect multiple parts together with a bolt group. For example, you can connect two
beams with a plate that is bolted to the beams.
To connect beams with a plate and a bolt group:
1. Double-click the Create bolts button to open the Bolt Properties dialog box.
2. Modify the values in the Bolt Dist X box.
You can define the number of bolt rows that are created and the spacing between them.
3. Click OK.
4. Select the parts that you want to connect together.
Select first the beams and then the plate.
5. Pick the start and end points.
The divided bolt group is created.
LESSON 4
Bolts
22.4 Modifying bolt groups
If the bolts in a bolt group are too short, you can modify them.
To modify a bolt group:
2. Right-click the bolt group and select Bolt parts.
The parts are highlighted.
3. Follow the instructions on the status bar to select the connected parts.
The bolt length is adjusted to the new material thickness.
22.5 Creating slotted holes

In addition to circular holes, you can also create slotted holes. Slotted holes can be set either in
x or in y direction.
To create a slotted hole:
1. Double-click the Create Bolts button.

The Bolt Properties dialog box opens.
2. To indicate which parts should be slotted, select the desired Parts with slotted holes
check boxes.
When a bolt penetrates more than one part, you can define whether slotted holes are
created for each part individually.
3. Set the length of the slotted holes in the Slotted hole X and Slotted hole Y boxes in the
Bolt Properties dialog box.
4. If the bolt connects several parts, you can rotate alternate holes by 90 degrees by
selecting one of the rotating options in the Rotate Slots list.
LESSON 4
Options to rotate the slots:

Bolts
• even
• odd
• parallel
22.6 Bolts on cast-in embeds

You can use the Create bolts command to connect two or more parts. The bolt length is
calculated by means of a formula using the material thickness of the connected parts. You can
also determine the bolt length manually.
23 Splitting and combining parts

Splitting and combining parts
You can split and combine parts in Tekla Structures. Tekla Structures retains the properties,
attached objects, and connections even when parts are split.
LESSON 4
23.1 Splitting parts
polybeams.
To split a part:
If necessary, you can create the points before selecting the parts. New start and end points are
placed on the splitting points.
If you have already carried out the numbering, the part and assembly number is allocated to the
part that was closest to the initial start point of the part. The other part gets a new number.
You cannot split bolt groups.
23.2 Combining parts

When you select the parts you want to combine, the part properties of the part that is selected
first are used for the combined part.
To combine parts:

LESSON 4
The space is filled when parts are combined.
The furthest distance between the start and the end point.
If the centerlines of the part are not in line with each other, the centerlines are combined by
taking the largest distance between the start and end points from both parts.
When you combine parts, Tekla Structures retains the attached objects
and connections. Tekla Structures does not recreate connections in the
part that was selected first.
24 Points
To place an object in a model you may need to pick points. To place an object where no lines or
objects intersect, you have the following options:
• Use snapping commands. See Snapping (p. 28).
• Create points.
To create points, use the buttons in the Points toolbar, or select a command from Modeling >
Add Points.
For more information on creating points and using construction planes, lines and circles, see
Tekla Structures Help.
LESSON 4
Points
24.1 Creating points along a line
The Add points on line command creates points at equal intervals along a line. You define the
number of points and pick the line.
To create points along a line:
1. Double-click the Add points on line button.

The Divided Line Points dialog box opens.
2. Enter the number of dividing points.
3. Click OK.
4. Pick the start point of the line.
5. Pick the end point of the line.
25 Cast units
The concrete structures in Tekla Structures are modeled as single parts. By default, each part is
considered a separate cast unit. For construction purposes you may need to merge several
concrete parts into one cast unit. For example, a single cast unit could consist of a column with
corbels.
You need to specify which parts form the cast unit. Cast units can include reinforcement, as
well as concrete parts.
The main part in a concrete cast unit is the one with the largest volume of concrete. You can
change the main part in a cast unit.
There are two cast unit types:
Cast unit type Description

Precast Cast units that are built at another location and
transported to their final location for placement
in the full structure.
Cast-in-place Cast units that are constructed fully in their final
location.
Tekla Structures checks the cast unit type of the main part each time you create or modify a cast
unit. Tekla Structures does not mix precast and cast-in-place parts within a cast unit.
25.1 Defining the cast unit type

To define whether a concrete part is precast or cast-in-place part:
1. Double-click a concrete part to open the concrete part properties dialog box.
2. Go to the Cast unit tab.
3. In the Cast unit type box, select Precast or Cast in place.
LESSON 4
Cast units
25.2 Creating a cast unit
To create a cast unit:
1. Click Modeling > Cast unit > Create or click .

2. Select the objects you want to include in the cast unit.
3. Click the middle mouse button to create the cast unit.
25.3 Adding objects to cast units

To add objects to cast units:
1. Click Modeling > Cast Unit > Add to.
2. Select the objects you want to add.
3. Select an object in the cast unit.
25.4 Modifying cast units

The shape of the cast unit is determined by the used profile (width and height) and the length
(except contour plates). The height and width can be changed by modifying the part properties.
The length is determined by the picked points. These points can be moved afterwards and
length can also be modified by applying fittings possibly by using components.
Do not use fittings, line cuts, or polygon cuts to change the width of a
cast unit.
25.5 Highlighting objects in a cast unit

Use the Inquire tool to check which objects belong to a particular cast unit.
To highlight objects in a cast unit:
2. Select a part that belongs to a cast unit.
Tekla Structures highlights the other parts that belong to the same cast unit. The
following colors are used:

LESSON 4
Reinforcement blue
Cast units
25.6 Changing the cast unit main part

To change the main part in a cast unit:
1. Check what is currently the main part of the cast unit.
c Select the cast unit.

4. Right-click and select Set as New Main Part of Assembly from the pop-up menu.
25.7 Creating a cast unit view

You can create cast unit views to display only the selected cast unit. Working with the cast unit
is easier when only the relevant information is displayed. For example, you can perform
checking and review operations more easily.
To create a cast unit view:
1. Ensure that the Select assemblies switch is active.

2. Select the cast unit in the model.
3. Right-click and select Create View, then select one of the options.
Tekla Structures creates the cast unit view.
LESSON 4
Cast units
25.8 Removing objects from a cast unit
To remove objects from a cast unit:
1. Click Modeling > Cast Unit > Remove From.
2. Select the objects you want to remove.
26 Modeling tips for concrete parts

This section contains modeling tips of concrete parts. The following modeling cases are
explained:
• Overlapping part planes in cast units
• Defining top-in-form face
• Orienting parts for drawings.
26.1 Overlapping part lines in cast units

When you model cast units, the overlapping part lines are displayed in the model but can be
Modeling tips for concrete parts
invisible in drawings. If the parts do not overlap, the part edges are visible in drawings.
LESSON 4
The overlapping lines are visible in the model.
The overlapping lines are invisible in the drawing.
Displaying To display the overlapping lines in drawings:

overlapping lines
in drawings 1. Click Tools > Options > Advanced Options... to open the Advanced Options dialog
box.
2. Select Concrete Detailing.
3. Set the XS_DRAW_CAST_UNIT_INTERNAL_LINES advanced option to TRUE.
4. Click OK.
Setting hidden You can set the distance within which Tekla Structures treats part lines inside cast units as
lines tolerance overlapping lines. To do that:
1. Go to the ..\Tekla Structures\<version>\nt\bin folder.
2. Open the user.ini file with a text editor.
3. Enter the set XS_HIDDEN_LINES_CHECK_TOLERANCE=0.1 advanced option.
By changing the number the tolerance value is changed.
4. Save the changes and close the text editor.
The change comes into effect when you restart Tekla Structures.
26.2 Defining top-in-form face

To indicate the pouring side of a concrete part, you can define the top-in-form face of the part
and show it in model views. The top-in-form face will appear in the front view in drawings.
Use the Rendered, Rendered (dark colors), or Hidden lines

representation for parts when you define the top-in-form face in rendered
views.
Defining top-in- To define the top-in-form face of a concrete part:

form faces
1. Click Modeling > Cast Unit > Set Top in Form Face.
2. Select the part face which will face upwards in the form.
Showing top-in- To show the top-in-form faces of concrete parts in a model view:
form faces
1. Click Modeling > Cast Unit > Show Top in Form Face.
Tekla Structures highlights the top-in-form faces in red.
LESSON 4
26.3 Orienting parts for drawings
Usually the top-in-form face of a concrete wall is the front side in a drawing. It is useful to
know how the part is orientated in a drawing. When you model the parts, you should take the
orientation into account.
Parts are orientated in drawings according to the direction of the parts. This means that the
direction of the reference points (start point -> end point) defines the orientation in the
drawings.

LESSON 4
Start point
End point
If the pouring side needs to be on the other side of the building, you have to take that into
account when you model the building.
Start point
End point
To switch the side of the top-in-form face after a cast unit has been completed:
1. Double-click the part to open the properties dialog box.
2. Click User-defined attributes....
3. Select Back from the Top in form face list.
LESSON 4
4. Click OK
5. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > Cast Unit Drawing... to open the
Cast Unit Drawing Properties dialog box.
6. Click the View... button to open the Cast Unit - View Properties dialog box.
7. Go to the Attributes tab.
8. Select Fixed from the Coordinate system list.

LESSON 4
9. Close the dialog boxes by clicking OK.
LESSON 4
LESSON 5
• how to modify the work area
• how to create, move, and delete clip planes
• how to use work planes
• how to use more advanced snapping features
> LESSON 5
27 Modifying the work area
You can modify the work area to suit particular situations. You can fit the work area and locate,
for example, distant objects from an oversized work area. It is also possible to hide the work
area lines.
27.1 Fit work area to selected parts

To fit work area to selected parts:
1. Select the model objects you want to see in the work area.
2. Click View > Fit Work Area > To Selected Parts in Selected Views.
The work area includes the selected objects. The objects outside the work area still exist,
but they are not visible.
27.2 Fit work area using two points

You have to be working with a plane view in order to fit work area using two points. If you are
currently working in 3D view, press Ctrl + P to switch to plane view.
To fit work area using two points:
1. Click View > Fit Work Area > Using Two Points or click .
LESSON 5
2. Pick the two points you want as corner points for the work area.
27.3 Fit work area to entire model in selected views

To fit the work area to the entire model, click View > Fit Work Area > To Entire Model in
Selected Views. The work area includes all model objects in selected views.

The work area in a model view can be oversized if, for example, one or more objects have been
positioned too far from the origin. You can use the Find Distant Objects command to correct
the situation.
Tekla Structures displays a list of object IDs. At the end of the list, Tekla Structures
displays additional six objects that have the biggest and smallest x, y, or z coordinates.
LESSON 5
27.5 Finding distant points

The work area in a model view can be oversized if, for example, one or more points have been
positioned too far from the origin.
To find distant points:
1. Ensure that the Select points and Select objects in components

selection switches are active.
The other switches in the Selecting toolbar must not be active.
2. Click Edit > Select All Objects or press Ctrl + A to select all points.
3. Check the number of selected points in the status bar and press Delete.
4. Click View > Fit Work Area > To Entire Model in Selected Views to fit the model in the
work area.
27.6 Finding distant reference models

The work area in a model view can be oversized if, for example, one or more reference models
have been positioned too far from the origin.
To find distant reference models:
1. Click File > Reference Model List... and select the reference model in the list.
The work area is resized to the reference model.
3. Move the reference model.
LESSON 5

27.7 Hiding the work area
If you want, you can hide the green work area box. This can be useful, for example, when
creating screenshots.
To hide the work area:
Alternatively, hold down the Ctrl and Shift keys when clicking View >
28 Clip planes
Clip planes enable you to focus in on the required detail in the model. For example, you can use
clip planes to see what is inside the model.
You can create up to six clip planes in any rendered model view.
28.1 Creating a clip plane

1. Click View > Create Clip Plane, or click .

2. Select a plane.
The clip plane symbol appears in the model.

Clip planes
LESSON 5

4. To finish creating clip planes, press Esc, or right-click and select Interrupt.
28.2 Moving a clip plane

To move a clip plane:
1. Select the clip plane you want to move.
2. Click the clip plane symbol and drag it to a new location.
Clip planes
LESSON 5

You can change the location of the clip plane symbol by holding
down the Shift key and dragging the symbol.
Clip planes
LESSON 5

28.3 Deleting a clip plane
To delete a clip plane:
1. Select the clip plane you want to delete.
2. Click the clip plane symbol and press Delete.
29 Work plane
The red coordinate arrow symbol indicates the work plane, which is the local coordinate system
of the model. The work plane also has its own grid, which can be used for positioning parts.
Tekla Structures displays the work plane grid in dark red color.
To display the work plane grid, select Work plane from the second list box on the Snapping
toolbar.
You can shift the work plane to any position by picking points, parallel to one of the global
basic planes, or on a part or view plane. When modeling sloped parts, shifting the work plane
helps you to place parts accurately.
If you cannot see the arrow symbol because the parts block the view,
press Ctrl + 2 to make the parts transparent.
29.1 Set work plane parallel to a plane

You can set the work plane parallel to the xy, xz, or zy directions.
To set the work plane parallel to a plane:
Work plane
LESSON 5
1. Click View > Set Work Plane > Parallel to XY(Z) Plane..., or click .

The Work plane dialog box opens.
2. Select the Plane and enter the Depth coordinate.

The depth coordinate defines the distance of the work plane from the global origin along
a line that is perpendicular to the plane parallel to the third axis. The default depth
coordinate value is 0.
3. Click Change.
29.2 Set work plane using three points

You can set the work plane by picking three points. The first point you pick is the origin, the
second point defines the x direction, and the third point point defines the y direction of the
work plane. Tekla Structures fixes the z direction according to the right-hand rule.
To set a work plane using three points:
1. Click View > Set Work Plane > Using Three Points, or click .
2. Pick the origin for the work plane.
3. Pick a point in the positive x direction.
4. Pick a point in the positive y direction.
29.3 Set work plane parallel to view plane

You can use this command to set the work plane to be the same as the view plane of a selected
view.
To set a plane parallel to a view plane:
1. Click View > Set Work Plane > Parallel to View Plane, or click .
2. Select the view you want to modify.
29.4 Set work plane to top plane of a part

When a view is created, you initially work in the plane that belongs to that view. If you want to
work in, for example, the roof plane that is sloping, you need to change the work plane. For
example, you can set the work plane to top plane of a selected part.
Work plane
LESSON 5
To set a work plane to top plane of a part:

1. Click View > Set Work Plane > To Part Top Plane, or click .
2. Select the part.
29.5 Shifting the work plane

helps you to place parts accurately. For example, to model horizontal bracing and purlins in a
sloped roof, you need to shift the work plane to the slope of the roof.
3. Optional: In the second list box on the Snapping toolbar, select Work plane to display
the work plane grid.
30 Advanced snapping
You can use advanced snapping features to control snapping accurately.
30.1 Numeric snapping

Advanced snapping
Use the Enter a numeric location toolbar to enter position coordinates you want to snap to.
LESSON 5

To display the toolbar, initiate a command that requires you to pick positions, and then do one
of the following:
• Start entering the coordinates using the keyboard
• Click Tools > Enter a Numeric Location and select an option.
See Numeric location coordinates (p. 107) for information on location coordinates.
30.2 Numeric location coordinates

The following table explains the types of information you can enter in the Enter a Numeric
Location toolbar.
You can
enter Description Example
Cartesian The x, y, and z coordinates of a position
coordinates separated by commas.
Polar A distance, an angle on the xy plane, and an

coordinates angle from the xy plane separated by angle
brackets.
Angles increase in the counterclockwise
direction.
Absolute The coordinates based on the origin of the
coordinates work plane.
Relative The coordinates relative to the last position

coordinates picked.
One value A distance to an indicated direction.

Advanced snapping
LESSON 5

You can
Two If you omit the last coordinate (z) or angle,
coordinates Tekla Structures assumes that the value is 0.
Three In drawings, Tekla Structures ignores the third

coordinates coordinate.
30.3 Creating a temporary reference point

You can create a temporary reference point to use as a local origin when snapping in models.
To create a temporary reference point:
1. Initiate a command that requires you to pick positions. For example, create a beam.
3. Hold down the Ctrl key and pick a position.
A green cross indicates that this position is now a temporary reference point.
4. Repeat step 3 to create as many reference points as needed.

5. Release the Ctrl key and pick the end point.
Tekla Structures creates the object between the starting point and the end point.
Advanced snapping
LESSON 5

30.4 Locking a coordinate
You can lock the x, y, and z coordinates on a line. This is useful when you need to determine a
point to pick and the needed point does not exist on the line. When a coordinate is locked, you
can snap to points only in that direction.
To lock the x coordinate, for example, press X on the keyboard. To unlock the coordinate, press
X again.
Creating a beam 1. Click Modeling > Create Concrete Part > Beam and pick the start point.
at a certain level
2. Snap to the start point and press Z to lock the z direction.
3. Pick the end point to create the beam at a locked level.
30.5 Snapping examples

Advanced snapping
Following examples show how snapping can be used.

LESSON 5

Creating a beam with a certain length
To create a beam with a certain length:
1. Click Modeling > Create Steel Part > Beam.
2. Pick a start point for the beam.
3. Move the pointer.
The dimension changes as you move the pointer. The zooming level affects the precision
of snapping.
4. When the dimension is correct, click to create the beam.
Creating a shifted beam with a certain length

To create a shifted beam with a certain length:
2. Pick the first point.
3. Enter the length and the angle of the shifted beam relative to the workplane. Use the
shortcut R and the symbol < as a separating character.
The direction of the x axis of the workplane is always 0°.

Advanced snapping
LESSON 5

4. Press Enter or click OK to create the beam.
Creating two parallel and equally long beams

To create two equally long beams:
1. Ensure that the Snap to line extensions switch is active.

3. Pick the start point for the beam.
4. Pick the end point for the beam.
The first beam is created.
5. Snap to the start point of the first beam.
You can now snap to the extension line of the first beam’s start point. Advanced snapping
LESSON 5

6. Pick the start point for the second beam on the extension line.
7. Snap to the end point of the first beam.
You can now snap on the extension line of the first beam end point. The snap point is
parallel to the first beam, when a blue line runs through the beam.
8. Pick the end point for the second beam on the extension line.
You have created two parallel and equally long beams.
Advanced snapping
LESSON 5

Creating a beam using a temporary reference point
To create a beam using a temporary reference point:
2. Hold down the Ctrl key to pick a temporary reference point as an origin.
3. Move the pointer in the direction of the start point of the beam.
Advanced snapping
4. Enter a distance from the temporary reference point and press Enter or click OK.
The start point of the beam is picked.
5. Move the pointer in the direction of the end point of the beam.
LESSON 5

6. Pick the end point to create the beam.
Creating a beam using snap override

To create a beam using snap override:
2. Use a temporary reference point to pick the start point of the beam at the center of the
grid line.
Advanced snapping
LESSON 5

3. Right-click to select an option from the pop-up menu or use the Snap Override toolbar
to temporarily override the snap settings.
Advanced snapping
LESSON 5

5. Enter the length of the beam and press Enter or click OK.
Advanced snapping
LESSON 5

LESSON 6
• how to use the component catalog
• how to create and modify components
• how to create component default views
• how to use the material catalog
• how to use the profile catalog
> LESSON 6

31 Component catalog
The component catalog contains all the components. To open the component catalog, click
Detailing > Component > Component Catalog... (Create Component) or press Ctrl + F.
You can browse for the components or search by using terms and keywords.
Search
View folders
View details
View thumbnails
Show / hide descriptions

active properties.
Enter the search term here.
Use the list to view component groups, such as bracing connections
and reinforcements.
LESSON 6

It is useful to view the thumbnail images in the component catalog. Most

system components have a default thumbnail image, which shows you a
typical situation where the component can be used.
32 Components
Components are tools that you can use to automatically create parts, embeds, or reinforcements
required to connect parts. You can also use components to add reinforcing bars to parts. They
are linked to main parts, so, when you modify a main part, the associated component also
changes.
Components are divided into three sub-types:
Componen
welds.
Corbel connection
(14)
Tekla Structures prompts you to Beam
locate the detail.
footing
reinforcement
Using the components has the following advantages:

• The settings of a component can be saved to a file. The settings can be used in other
projects.
• When you modify a part, all details and connections attached to that part are updated
automatically.
• When you copy or move objects, all associated details and components are also copied or
moved.
Components
LESSON 6

32.1 Creating a component
Use components to create a detail, a connection or a structural element in a model.
To create a component:
1. Click Detailing > Component > Component Catalog... (Create Component), or click
to open the component catalog.

2. Click the component name in the component catalog.
3. Follow the instructions on the status bar to select the parts or points required to create
the component.
4. If required, click the middle mouse button to end the command.
5. Check that the component symbol is green, which indicates that the component was
6. Examine the component in the model to check if you need to make any changes.
32.2 Component status

Tekla Structures uses different-colored component symbols to show the status of connections
and details:
Color Status Tip

Component created
successfully
Green
Component created, Often occurs when bolts or holes have an edge
but has problems distance less than the default value for that
component.
Yellow
Component creation A common reason is that the up direction is not
failed appropriate.
For more information, see Tekla Structures Help.
Red
32.3 Modifying component properties

When you create a component you are unfamiliar with, you should use the default properties.
Create the component and check it to see what needs to be modified.
For more information on component properties, see Tekla Structures Help.
Components
LESSON 6

32.4 Saving component properties
You can save the modified component properties.
To save the component properties:
1. In the component dialog box, enter the name of the properties in the Save as box.
2. Click Save as.
The properties file is saved in the model folder.
You can recognize the properties file by checking the file extension. For example, if you save
the properties of the End plate detail (1002) component, the file extension is j1002.
32.5 Conceptual components

The Tekla Structures configuration you have determines which components you can create:
Symb
Type ol Configuration Description
Conceptual Engineering Conceptual component does not create
Reinforced
Concrete The dialog box is the same as in
Detailing detailed component, but does not
contain options for part and assembly
positions.
Detailed Full Detailed component contains part and

assembly numbering fields and creates
Steel Detailing
needed assemblies and cast units.
Precast Concrete
Detailing

Components
LESSON 6

32.6 Example
Two examples of using a component are presented here. In the first example, a reinforcement is
inserted in a pad footing. In the second example, the pad footing reinforcement is modified.
Inserting a pad footing reinforcement

Use the Pad footing reinforcement (77) component for reinforcing a concrete pad footing.
To insert a pad footing reinforcement:
1. Create a pad footing.
For more information, see Creating a concrete pad footing (p. 27)
2. Click Detailing > Component > Component Catalog... (Create Component) to open
the Component Catalog dialog box.
3. Search the Pad footing reinforcement (77) component from the Component Catalog.
4. Select Pad footing reinforcement (77) in the Component Catalog.
The status bar displays instructions.
5. Click the pad footing.
Tekla Structures inserts the lacer and bottom reinforcement in the pad footing.
Modifying the pad footing reinforcement

In this example we remove the lacer bars from the pad footing reinforcement.
To remove the lacer bars:
1. Ensure that the Select components switch is active.

2. Double-click the reinforcement component in the pad footing.
The component properties dialog box opens.
3. Go to the Lacer bar tab.
Components
4. Select No from the Lacer bar option list.

LESSON 6
5. Click Modify.

The lacer bars are removed from the pad footing reinforcement.
33 Creating component default views


Creating component default views
LESSON 6

34 Material catalog
The material catalog contains information on material grades. You can open the Modify
Material Catalog dialog box by clicking Modeling > Material Catalog.... Materials are
displayed in a hierarchical tree grouped according to, for example, steel and concrete. Material
Material catalog
grades are located under the materials in the tree. You can view material grade properties by
clicking them in the tree.
LESSON 6

The Modify Material Catalog dialog box contains information on the materials on four tabs:
• The General tab
• The Analysis tab
• The Design tab
• The User attributes tab
Tab Description
The General tab The General tab has boxes for three alternative
names for the material. These are usually the
material names used in different countries or
standards. It also contains the profile and plate
density values.
The Analysis tab The Analysis tab has information on the
properties used in structural analysis. The
structure is analyzed using the Finite Element
Method.
The Design tab The Design tab has information on the design-
specific properties such as strengths and partial
safety factors.
The User attributes tab The User attributes tab can be used to create
your own attributes for material grades.
34.1 Adding a material grade

Material catalog
You can add a new material grade in two alternate ways.

LESSON 6
Option 1 1. Click Modeling > Material Catalog....

The Modify Material Catalog dialog box opens.
2. Select a material grade that is similar to the one that you want to create.
3. Right-click the material grade and select Copy Grade from the pop-up menu.
4. Change the material name.
6. Click OK to save the material grade and exit the dialog box.
7. Click OK in the save confirmation dialog box to save the changes in the Material
Catalog.

2. Change the material grade name in the Selected grade box.
Catalog.
34.2 Deleting a material grade

You can delete material grades from the Material Catalog dialog box.
1. Click Modeling > Material Catalog.
2. Right-click a material grade of your choice and select Delete.
3. Click OK.
4. Click OK again in the save confirmation dialog box.
The material grade is deleted.
35 Profile catalog
The profiles in the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box are displayed in a tree structure. They are
grouped according to rules such as profile type (for example, I profiles) and profile sub-type
(for example, HEA).
Profile catalog
LESSON 6

Different icons denote profile types, rules and profiles within the tree:
Icon Description
Profile type rule. Different icons show different types.
Rule
Individual standard profile
Individual parametric profile

Profile catalog
LESSON 6

35.1 Adding a profile
You can add profiles to the profile catalog. The simplest way to create a new profile is by
modifying a copy of an existing profile.
To add a profile:
1. Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog....
The Modify Profile Catalog opens.
2. Select an existing profile that matches best with the new profile.
3. Right-click the profile.
4. Select Copy Profile from the menu.
The copied profile name is added with COPY after its name.
5. Edit the profile name in the Profile name box.
6. Enter the correct values in the Value column.
8. Click OK in the Save confirmation dialog box.
35.2 Modifying a profile

You must have the Profile Catalog open before you can start modifying profiles.
To modify a profile:
2. Select the profile you want to modify.
3. Modify dimensions in the Value column.
35.3 Deleting a profile

2. Select the profile you want to delete.
4. Click OK
Profile catalog
LESSON 6
The profile is deleted.

36 Parametric profiles
You can use parametric profiles to model profiles that are standard in a specific environment,
but do not exist in the Tekla Structures profile catalog. Parametric profiles are partly user-
definable and they have a predefined shape, but you determine their size by giving one or more
parameters.
Tekla Structures includes several parametric profiles, such as gutter profiles or spheres.
Parametric profiles are not polybeams. They cannot be unfolded and a

flat pattern cannot be created.
User-defined Tekla Structures includes a cross section sketch editor that you can use to create and modify
profiles your own profile cross sections. The cross sections you create using the cross section sketch
editor can be parametric or fixed. You can change the dimensions of parametric cross sections
each time you use them in a model.
36.1 Parametric concrete profiles

The profile catalog contains various parametric profiles that can be used with concrete parts.
They are called RCDL, RCXX, RCL, RCDX, and RCX profiles.
If these profile types are used frequently, it is useful to add them to the profile library where
these shapes are also predefined.
Parametric profiles
LESSON 6

LESSON 6
130
Parametric profiles
TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
LESSON 7
• how to enter project information
• how to switch between single and multi-user modes
• how to check the model
• how to make inquiries about objects
• how to represent objects in model views
• how to use the phase manager
> LESSON 7

37 Entering project information
When you start a project, enter project information to display the information automatically in
reports and drawings.
To enter the project information:
1. Click File > Project Properties... to open the Project Properties dialog box.
2. Enter the project information you want to use. All the boxes are optional.
3. Click User-defined attributes to open the Tekla Structures Project (1) dialog box,
where you can enter additional information.
LESSON 7

The contents of the Tekla Structures Project (1) dialog box depend on
the Tekla Structures environment. The default tabs and options of the
dialog box are different in different Tekla Structures environments.
4. Click OK to save your changes and close the Tekla Structures Project (1) dialog box.
5. Click OK to save your changes and close the Project Properties dialog box.
38 Switching between single-user and

multi-user modes
You can switch between single-user and multi-user modes by using the different options in the
Open dialog box.
Opening multi- To open a multi-user model in single-user mode:

user model in
single-user mode 1. Click File > Open... to open the Open dialog box.
2. Select the multi-user model.
The Model type column indicates whether the model is a single-user or a

multi-user model. The button with three men indicates a multi-user
model.
3. Right-click and select Open as single-user model from the pop-up menu.
Opening single- To open a single-user model in multi-user mode:

user model in
multi-user mode 1. Click File > Open... to open the Open dialog box.
2. Select the single-user model.
3. Right-click and select Open as multi-user model from the pop-up menu.
4. Tekla Structures prompts for the name of the server. In the Open as multi-user model
dialog box, enter the server name or select it from the list, and then click OK. Switching between single-user and multi-user modes

When the model is complete, you need to check it. There are several methods available for
checking the model:
• Clash checking
• Flying through the model
LESSON 7
• Checking using reports

• Checking the views
39.1 Finding clashes in a model

You can run a clash check to find parts, reinforcements, bolts, or reference model objects that
collide.
• IFC
• DWG
• DGN
Alternatively, if you are using Model Organizer, select the sections and storys for which
you want to run the clash check. Right-click and select Select in the Model.
Do not run the clash check for the entire model. For best results, run the
clash check only for appropriate sections and storys.

You can continue working during the clash check. When the clash check is complete, the
status bar message changes from Clash checking in progress to Ready.
If you cannot find the clashes in the model, change the representation of
objects to Show Only Selected (Ctrl+5) for better visibility.
double-click a row.
6. If you want to include more objects in the clash check, select the desired model objects
and re-run clash check.
After removing or modifying objects, you can re-run clash check to see
if the clash still exists. To do this, select the desired rows in the list of
clashes and re-run clash check.
Checking the model
LESSON 7

39.2 Flying through the model
Use the Fly command to travel through the model. You can change the direction and vary the
speed as you go.
The Fly command only works rendered views with Projection set to
Perspective.

c Click Modify.
3. Select a view. The mouse pointer changes into an arrow and a cross. The arrow indicates
the current flying direction.

The flying speed grows exponentially when you are approaching the model from a
distance.
• To fly in the in the direction of the camera angle, hold down Shift and scroll
forward or backward.
39.3 Checking using reports

You can check models using reports. Reports can be lists of drawings, bolts, or parts. Reports
can contain information from selected parts or the entire model.
You can generate the following types of reports:
• Bolt, nut, washer, and material lists
• ID lists
The main feature of the ID lists is that the lines that contain profiles can be selected. As a
result, the accompanying profile will be highlighted in the model. This is useful if a profile
Checking the model
is hard to locate.
• User-defined attributes list
LESSON 7
A user-defined attribute list can be used to check that the correct profiles are shortened.

To check using reports:
2. Click Drawings & Reports > Create Report..., or click .

The Report dialog box opens.
3. Select a report from the report templates
4. Click Create from all or Create from selected button.
40 Inquiring the model

The inquire tool displays the properties of a particular object, or a group of objects, within the
model.
The Inquire Object dialog box displays information relevant to the objects you select.
40.1 Inquiring object properties

Use the Inquire object command to display the properties of a particular object, or group of
Inquiring the model

LESSON 7

1. Click Tools > Inquire > Object, or click .
The object can be, for example, a part, a bolt, a component, or a weld.
The Inquire object dialog box opens. It displays the relevant information regarding the
object. The information displayed depends on the selected object.
The selected object and all parts of the object are highlighted.
Inquiring bolts
You can use the Bolt Parts command to display parts that belong to a bolt group. With this
command you can also change the parts that belong to a bolt group.
To inquire parts in bolt groups:
1. Select the bolts.
2. Right-click and select Bolt Parts from the pop-up menu.
Main parts are highlighted with red and secondary parts with yellow.
40.2 Inquiring cast unit objects

To inquire cast unit objects:
2. Select a cast unit.
The main part, that is, the part with the largest volume, is highlighted in magenta and all
concrete additions are highlighted in cyan. Embeds that contain non-conrete material are
highlighted in yellow and parts welded to the embeds are highlighted in yellow as well.
Displaying all objects connected to a part

1. Select the part.
2. Delete the part.

Inquiring the model

LESSON 7

40.3 Inquiring welded parts
Click Tools > Inquire > Primary Welded Part to highlight the main
part when you select the secondary part.
Tools > Inquire > Welded Parts to highlight the selected part and
all the parts that are welded to it.
40.4 Inquiring the center of gravity

You can inquire an object’s center of gravity. The object can be a part or an assembly.
When calculating the center of gravity of an object, bolts and welds are
not taken into account whereas polygon cuttings, part cuttings, fittings,
and line cuts are taken into account in the calculation.
To inquire the center of gravity:

2. Click Tools > Inquire > Center of Gravity.
Inquiring the model
LESSON 7

41 Representing objects in model views
view. Objects are grouped by a set of rules and conditions which can be used to control how the
objects are displayed. Changing the object representation settings in the Object
Representation dialog box affect all model views.
To set object representation settings in a model view:
1. Click View > Representation > Object Representation....
The Object Representation dialog box opens.
2. Load the setting you want to use.
The objects are displayed according to the settings. By default, several standard settings
are included, but you can also create object representation settings yourself.
41.1 Creating object representation settings

By default, several standard settings are included in the object representation, but you can also
create object representation settings by yourself.
Changing the settings in the Object Representation dialog box affects

all model views.
This example shows how to create a new object group where all columns will be represented in
blue with 70% transparency.
2. Click the Add row button.
A second object group is added. Initially, the new object group has the same properties
as the first object group.
3. In the Object group list box, select All to activate the arrow button.
4. Click the arrow button to open a drop down menu.
The drop down menu contains all the default options for object groups.
5. Select Create new group... from the list.
The Object Group - Representation dialog box opens.
6. In the Category list box, select Part.
Representing objects in model views
7. In the Property list box, select Name.

The part name is used for selecting columns.
8. In the Condition list box, select Equals.
9. In the Value list box, enter COLUMN.
Note that all the letters must be capitalized.
column.
LESSON 7
You will be able to reuse the new object condition in other models.

11. Click Close.
The Object Group - Representation dialog blox closes. Note that the Object
Representation dialog box is still open.
12. In the Object Representation dialog box, in the Color list box, click Color by class to
activate the arrow button.
13. Click the arrow button and select blue color from the drop down menu.
14. In the Transparency list box, click Visible list box to activate the arrow button.
15. Click the arrow button and select 70% transparent from the drop down menu.
16. Click Modify.
41.2 Defining your own colors to model object

groups
You can customize the color of model objects by selecting a specific color for each object
group. You can use an unlimited number of colors.
The Object Representation dialog box is displayed.
3. Click Add row to add a new object group or select an existing object group from the
Object Group list.
LESSON 7

a Click a color in the color window and then click the desired color depth on the
color bar on the right, or enter RGB values.

6. Click OK.
When you open the Object Representation dialog box the next time, the Color list shows a
maximum10 colors that you last defined above the dashed line.

LESSON 7

42 Phase Manager
Use phases to break up a model into sections. Only parts can be split into phases.
Phases are often used to indicate erection sequences. You can create reports and views, hide
objects, and copy objects from other models, according to their phase number.
Used the Phase Manager dialog box to create phases. You can open the Phase Manager
dialog box from Tools > Phase Manager... or by using the shortcut Ctrl + H.
Phase Manager
LESSON 7

Option Description
The Number box You can enter the number of the phase
in the Number box.
The Name box You can enter the name of the phase in
the Name box.
The Filter button You can use the Filter button to filter
the listed phases by the number and/or
criteria that has been entered in the
Number and Name boxes.
The Set Current button The Set Current button determines to
which phase the object belongs. The
current phase is indicated by @
character.
The Add button The Add button can be used to create
new phases.
The Delete button The Delete button can be used to delete
phases.
The Phases by objects button The Phases by objects button can be
used to determine in which phase(s) the
selected object(s) belong to. If you
select objects that belong to several
phases, they are highlighted in the
Phase Manager.
The Objects by phases button The Objects by phases button can be
used to determine which objects belong
to the selected phase. The object will be
highlighted in the model.
The Modify phase button The Modify phase button can be used
to change the phase for one or more
objects.
42.1 Dividing the model into phases

b To see which objects belong to a certain phase, select a phase from the list and
then click Objects by phases.
Phase Manager
c To change the phase of one or more objects, select the objects, select a phase from
LESSON 7
the list, and then click Modify phase.

Phase Manager
LESSON 7

LESSON 8
• how to define custom components
• how to use reference models
• how to publish models as web pages
• how to open models in Model Reviewer
> LESSON 8

43 Custom components
Tekla Structures contains lots of predefined components that can be used for creating details
and connections. However, you can create your own custom components, if Tekla Structures
does not contain required components. When you have created a custom component, you can
use it the same way as any Tekla Structures system component.
43.1 Custom component types

You can create four types of custom components:

n objects and
connects secondary
part(s) to a main
part.
Component symbol
is green.

objects and
connects them to a
main part at a
picked location.
Component symbol
is green.
LESSON 8

Seam Creates seam
objects and
connects parts
along a line picked
with two points.
Component symbol
is green.

objects which may
contain connections
and details.
Gets no symbol,
has same position
properties as
beams.
Main part
Secondary part
43.2 Exploding a component

Exploding components is very useful when defining custom components. Exploding ungroups
the objects in an existing component. You can then remove and modify parts and other objects
in the component.
When you create a custom component, it is recommended to create a similar existing
component and then explode it. Then you can modify the objects to suit your needs and use
them in your custom component.
2. Select the component you want to explode.
Tekla Structures ungroups the objects in the component.
43.3 Defining a custom component

LESSON 8
model containing all the necessary component objects, such as parts, fittings, and bolts.

To define a custom component:
Component Wizard.
2. Select the Type and enter other properties as required. Click Next.
4. Click Next.
5. The next step depends on the Type you selected. Follow the instructions in the Custom
Component Wizard.
6. Click Finish to create the custom component.
The custom component appears in the component catalog.
43.4 Exporting and importing

Exporting To export a custom component to a file:

1. Click Detailing > Component > Component Catalog... (Create Component) or press
Ctrl + F to open the component catalog.
2. Select Custom from the list to display all the custom components.
3. Right-click the custom component and select Export... from the pop-up menu.
The Export components dialog box opens.
4. Enter the name for the file and select the folder where the file is saved in.
By default, the file extension is .uel.
5. Click OK to export the file.
Importing To import a custom component:

2. Right-click the component list and select Import... from the pop-up menu.
The Import Components dialog box opens.
3. Browse for the file you want to import, select the file and click OK.
The custom component is available in the component catalog.
44 Reference models
A reference model is a file which helps you to build a Tekla Structures model. A reference
model is created in Tekla Structures or another software or modeling tool and imported to Tekla
Structures.
conditioning (HVAC) model can be used as a reference model. Reference models can also be
simple 2D drawings that are imported and then used as a layout to directly build the model on.
Reference models
• AutoCAD (*.dxf)
LESSON 8
• AutoCAD (*.dwg)

You can snap to reference model geometry. Tekla Structures loads the reference model from the
file each time you open your model. It does not save the reference model when you save the
current model. The filename extension of a saved reference model properties file is *.rop.

1. Click File > Insert Reference Model..., or click .

The Reference Model Properties dialog box opens.
2. Click Browse... next to the File name box to browse for the reference model file.
3. Set the scale of the reference model, if it is different from the one in the Tekla Structures
define the measurement unit for a DWG or a DXF file and save the file
in AutoCAD, the unit is recognized in Tekla Structures and the reference
model is scaled correctly.
Reference models
4. Click OK.
LESSON 8
5. Pick the position for the reference model origin.

Tekla Structures inserts the reference model.

1. Click File > Reference Model List... to open the Reference Models dialog box.
44.3 Updating a reference model

You can update the reference models in your Tekla Structures model if there have been changes
in the original reference models after you have imported them to Tekla Structures.
2. In the Reference Model Properties dialog box, browse for the modified file by clicking
the Browse... button next to the File name field.
4. Click Modify.
Reference models
LESSON 8

dialog box.
regenerates the reference models that have a newer modified date
than the one already in the cache.
However, this is not the recommended way to update reference models
since it is time-consuming and affects the system performance.
44.4 Detecting changes in reference models

changes between an old and new reference model by using commands in the Reference Object
Properties dialog box. You can detect changes in reference models that are of the following
file formats:
• IFC (.ifc)
• Cadmatic (.3dd)
• DWG (.dwg)
To detect changes in a reference model:
1. Select the reference model and double-click it to display the Reference Object
2. Browse for the name of the old file by clicking the Browse... button next to the Old file
name box.
3. Select an option in the Show list in the Change detection section.
For example, select Changed to see the changed objects in a reference model.
Reference models
LESSON 8

4. Click Display....
Tekla Structures highlights the changed reference model objects.
Example
The following example shows how the changes are displayed in the reference model:
The old file:
The new file:

Reference models
LESSON 8

The Show option has been set to Changed in the Reference Object Properties dialog box:
44.5 Handling large reference models

These are some tips for speeding up large reference models:
• Large, highly-detailed reference models contain lots of snap points. To speed up snapping,
activate only the snap switches you need.
• Split large reference models into smaller ones and display only the parts you need in the
model.
45 Recording a macro
Recording a macro
Tekla Structures enables you to record a series of actions from menu, dialog boxes, and
LESSON 8
shortcuts.

To record a macro:
1. Click Tools > Macros... to open the Macros dialog box.
2. Enter a Macro name.
3. Click Record.
4. Perform the actions you want to record.
5. Click Stop to stop recording.
Macros are saved as *.cs files, in the folder defined with the advanced option
XS_MACRO_DIRECTORY in the environment-specific initialization files.
The recorded macro is saved in the drawings or modeling folders,

depending on in which mode the macro was recorded in.
45.1 Running a macro

To run a macro:
2. Select the macro and click Run.
45.2 Editing a macro

To view or edit a macro:
1. First check that the file type .cs is associated with suitable text editor.
3. Select the macro and click Edit.
4. The macro opens in the associated text editor.
Macros are based on C# commands and in case you want to edit macros,
knowledge of C# programming is needed.
Recording a macro
LESSON 8

46 WebViewer
You can publish your Tekla Structures models as web pages that can be viewed via the Internet
using a web browser. The WebViewer files can also be used as reference models.
46.1 Publishing a model as a web page

To publish a model as a web page:
1. Click File > Publish as Web Page... to open the Publish as Web Page dialog box.
2. If you want to publish a web page of selected parts, select Selected parts.
3. Change the page title if required.
4. In the File name box, enter the destination path and file name for the published model.
By default, Tekla Structures creates a PublicWeb folder with sub-folders in the current
model folder, and places the published model there.
5. Click Publish. If you select the Open in browser check box, the model opens in your
WebViewer
LESSON 8
web browser.

47 Tekla Structures Model Reviewer
Tekla Structures Model Reviewer is a free and improved tool based on the Tekla Structures
Web Viewer. Model Reviewer includes excellent model navigation and mark up functionality.
With it you can:
• Easily pan, rotate, zoom, and fly through the model
• See important part information
• Fly through a set of saved locations in the model to present it to the project team
• Use clip planes to slice through walls and crowded areas of the model
• Email models easily to other parties
• Create and manage markups (redlines) of specific areas in the model
• Visually track project statuses with different colors in the model
You can use the Model Reviewer tool to improve project communication.
In Tekla Structures, you can publish a model in .wrm, .xml or .zsol format. You can then send
the published model to other project participants. After installing the tool, those involved in the
project can open the model and add comments to it.
You can download and install Model Reviewer from Tekla’s website. Go to http://
www.tekla.com/international/solutions/building-construction/Pages/web-models-model-
reviewer.aspx and click the Free Download link.
To learn more, watch the introductory video on the download page.
47.1 Opening a model in Model Reviewer

To open a model in Model Reviewer:
1. Click Windows Start > All Programs > Tekla Structures > Tekla Structures Model
Reviewer.
2. Browse for a published model file.
Supported file formats are: .wmr, .xml, and .zsol.
When you save the model and the markups in Model Reviewer, the file is saved in .wmr
format.
Tekla Structures Model Reviewer
LESSON 8

LESSON 9
• how to use reinforcements
> LESSON 9

48 Reinforcements
You can add reinforcements to concrete parts to strengthen the parts. The Concrete toolbar
contains three commands used for reinforcement:
Reinforcing bar
Reinforcement mesh
48.1 Reinforcing bar group

A reinforcing bar group includes several identical, or very similar, reinforcing bars. Tekla
Structures creates reinforcing bar groups using the properties in the Reinforcing Bar
Properties dialog box. The file name extension of a saved reinforcing bar group file is .rbg.
Reinforcing bar group types

Tekla Structures has several reinforcing bar group types:
Type Description
Normal Not tapered
Tapered One bar dimension changes linearly in the group.
Tapered ridge One bar dimension changes linearly. The dimension is
longest in the middle of the group.
Tapered curved One bar dimension changes along a curve. The
dimension is longest in the middle of the group.
Tapered N One bar dimension changes linearly between N
ridges. Enter the number of ridges in the Number of
cross sections box in the Group tab of the
Reinforcing Bar Properties dialog box.
Spiral The reinforcing bars rise in a polygonal or circular
shape along the longitudinal axis of the part.
You can use the Group tab in the Reinforcing Bar Properties dialog box for selecting and
LESSON 9
modifying the reinforcing group types.

Creating a reinforcing bar group
To create a reinforcing bar group:
1. Click Detailing > Properties > Reinforcement > Reinforcing Bar Group..., or double-
click the Create reinforcing bar group button.

The Reinforcing Bar Properties dialog box opens.
3. Click OK to save the properties.
4. Select the part to reinforce.
Tekla Structures attaches the reinforcing bar group to the part.
5. Pick the reinforcing bar start point.
6. Pick the other reinforcing bar reference point.
8. Pick the start point of the bar group.
Distribution area
In addition to the shape of the reinforcing bars, you need to define the distribution area of the
reinforcing bars. The distribution area points can be positioned on the outer contour of the
concrete part. Usually, the distribution area is perpendicular to the plane so the cover thickness
on the sides can be defined in the From plane box in the Reinforcing Bar Properties dialog
box.
The selection order of the handles, which determines the cover area, is important when the bars
LESSON 9
are placed. The bars are placed on the right side of a line that is defined by the two selected
handles.

The example shows the placing of the handles for the top and bottom reinforcements in a beam:
First handle
Plane
The example on right shows the reinforcing bars outside the concrete. You can prevent this by
entering a negative value in the On plane box in the Reinforcing Bar Properties dialog box.
The General tab in the Reinforcing Bar Properties dialog box contains the same options for
both a single reinforcing bar and a reinforcing bar group. However, the Group tab contains
additional options for defining the properties of a reinforcing bar group. If you open the
Reinforcing Bar Properties dialog box for a single reinforcing bar, the Group tab is disabled.
Distribution of bars
You can define the way the bars are distributed over the cover area by selecting the Creation
method list.
The creation method options are:

• Equal distribution by number of reinforcing bars: This option is used for main
reinforcement bars in beams. The spacing of the bars is based on the number of the bars.
The spacing is the available distance divided by the number of the bars. The available
distance is cover area minus two times the value in the On plane box.
LESSON 9

Available distance
Value in the On plane box
• Equal distribution by target spacing value: You can enter a spacing value. Tekla
Structures aims the spacing value as closely as possible at the user-defined spacing value.
The spacing value is set to 150. The available distance for the bars is 1150 mm. This makes
1150/150 = 7,6 bars. The value will be rounded to 8. 1150/8 = 143.75. The calculated
spacing value of the bars is 143.75 mm.
• By exact spacing value with flexible first/last/middle space: Creates fixed, regular
spaces between the bars. One space adjusts to even out the bar distribution. You can
choose whether the adjusted space is the first, last, or the middle space.
• By exact spacing value with flexible first and last space:Tekla Structures calculates the
number of bars and places with the defined spacing. The remaining spacing value is
divided equally to the first and last bar spacing.
• By exact spacing: You can enter every spacing value manually. Use the multiplication
character to repeat spacings, for example, 5*200 to create five spaces of 200.
Equally distributed reinforcing bars
Exact spacing with flexible first space
Exact spacing with flexible first and last space
Exact spacing
LESSON 9

You have the following options for omitting reinforcing bars:
• None
• First
• Last
• First and last
The following example displays two reinforcing bar groups that have been added to a concrete
beam.
Two reinforcing bar groups with flexible end and/or start value.
The last and first bar omitted
48.2 Reinforcing bar

You can create a single reinforcing bar with the Create Reinforcing Bar command. A
reinforcing bar can be a straight bar, but also a hair pin, a former, or a bracket. Any shape with
random dimensions can be modeled.
Creating a reinforcing bar

To create a reinforcing bar:
1. Click Detailing > Properties > Reinforcement > Reinforcing Bar... or double-click the
Create Reinforcing Bar button.

LESSON 9

2. Make the necessary modifications in the Reinforcing Bar Properties dialog box.
You can set the series and start numbers for the reinforcing bars. In addition, you can
enter values for Size (diameter), Grade, and Bending radius.
3. Select the reinforcing bar color by entering the color number in the Class box.
We recommend you use this feature, because the 3D view will be clearer if all
reinforcing bars are the same color.
4. Define a hook or a splice for the reinforcing bar.
5. Modify the values displayed in the Select Reinforcing Bar dialog box.
6. Define the reinforcing bar cover thickness.
7. Click OK.
Tekla Structures attaches the reinforcing bar to the part.
LESSON 9

9. Pick the start point for the reinforcing bar.
10. Pick the other reinforcing bar reference points.
Defining a hook for a reinforcing bar

You can define a hook or a splice for the reinforcing bar under the Hooks area in the
To define a hook or a splice:
1. Double-click the Create Reinforcing Bar button.

The Reinforcing Bar Properties dialog box opens. The Hooks area of the dialog box
can be used for defining hooks and splices.
2. Select a hook type from the Shape lists.

A hook does not have to be modeled. It is added to the reinforcing bar automatically. If a
standard hook is selected, the Angle, Radius, and Length boxes are not active. These
values are read from the rebar_database.inp file. If a Custom hook selected,
you can define the values.
3. Define the values for the custom hook
a Enter a value between -180 and +180 degrees in the Angle box.
b Enter the internal bending radius of the hook in the Radius box.
c Enter the length of the straight part in the hook to the Length box.
LESSON 9

Defining the reinforcing bar cover thickness
Reinforcing bars need a concrete cover to protect them against harmful elements, such as the
weather and fire.
To define the concrete cover thickness for a reinforcing bar or reinforcing bar group:
1. Click Detailing > Properties > Reinforcement, and select either Reinforcing Bar... or
Reinforcing Bar Group....
Alternatively, you can double-click the Create Reinforcing Bar or the
Reinforcing Bar Group button.

2. Define the reinforcing bar cover thickness in the Cover thickness area of the
The cover thickness can be defined in three directions:
• On plane, that is, the distance from beam’s bottom, top, and side surfaces to the bar.
• From plane, that is, the distance from the end surface of the beam to the bar.
• In the longitudinal direction of the bar, that is, start and end.
To define different cover thicknesses on the different legs of a reinforcing bar, enter a
thickness value for each leg in the On plane field, in the order you pick points to create
the bar.
3. Click OK.
LESSON 9

First and last handle
From plane
Modifying reinforcing bars

To modify reinforcing bars:
1. Click Detailing > Properties > Reinforcement > Reinforcing Bar..., or double-click the

2. Click the Select button in the Reinforcing Bar Properties dialog box.
The Select Reinforcing Bar dialog box opens.
LESSON 9

3. Select the bar size for the chosen grade. You can also define whether the bar is a main
bar or a stirrup or tie.
You can modify the values displayed in the Select Reinforcing Bar dialog box in
rebar_database.inp file. The file is located in ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\<environment>\profil
folder. You can edit the file with any standard text editor.
For steel grades, every diameter is listed twice in the file: once as main and once as tie/
stirrup. The column Min bend radius contains the bending mandrel that is used if the
bar is bended in the model. If a bar is bended with an angle of 90, 135, or 180 degrees,
the column r contains the accompanying mandrels.
If you change the values in the Size column, you can change the diameter of the
reinforcing bar. The mandrel will keep its original diameter.
4. Click OK to close the Select Reinforcing Bar dialog box.
5. Click OK to close the Reinforcing Bar Properties dialog box.
Next time you open Reinforcing Bar Properties, the active settings are
used. If you have stored several sets of properties, you need to select an
option from the list next to the Load button and load the appropriate set
of properties.
48.3 Curved reinforcing bar group

Curved reinforcing bar groups are created using the same reinforcing properties as the straight
bar groups. The only difference is that you need to pick three points instead of two to define the
reinforcing bar shape. After defining the shape, do not click the middle-mouse button but
continue to define the distribution area.
LESSON 9

If the concrete part is created using multiple points and with the intention to create a curved
part by changing the chamfer properties, then it is recommended to create snap points to create
the curved reinforcing bars. Always place the curved reinforcing bars using the working points
of the concrete part and set the On plane option to the correct position.
48.4 Creating a circular reinforcing bar group

To create a circular reinforcing bar group:
1. Click Detailing > Create Reinforcement > Circular Reinforcing Bar Group.
3. Pick three points on the outer countour of the concrete part.
The radius is automatically calculated from these three points.

The circular reinforcing bar group is created.
5. Click Detailing > Properties > Reinforcement > Reinforcing Bar....
To define the splice length of the round stirrups, enter negative values in the Start and
End boxes.
LESSON 9

6. Click OK.
48.5 Creating a reinforcement mesh

You can create a reinforcement mesh that consists of two perpendicular bar groups.
To create a reinforcement mesh:
1. Click Detailing > Properties > Reinforcement > Reinforcement Mesh..., or double-
click the Create reinforcement mesh button.

The Reinforcement Mesh Properties dialog box opens. It can be used to set the length,
width, diameter, mesh size, and cover area of the reinforcement mesh.
2. Click the Select button.
The Select Mesh dialog box opens.
LESSON 9

You can select various meshes in the Reinforcement Mesh Properties dialog box.
The standard mesh properties are in defined in the mesh_database_inp file located in the
..\Tekla Structures\<version>\environments\<environment>\profil
folder.
48.6 Creating a reinforcement splice

You can join reinforcing bars or reinforcing bar groups together with reinforcement splices.
The blue splice symbols indicate reinforcement splices in the models:
To create a reinforcement splice:

4. Optional: Modify the splice properties.
a Click Detailing > Properties > Reinforcement > Reinforcement Splice....
The Reinforcement Splice Properties dialog box opens.
LESSON 9

b Modify the splice properties.
c Click Modify.
Moving a splice If needed, you can move the splice along reinforcing bars.
To move the splice:
48.7 Attaching reinforcing bars to another part

When you model reinforcing bars, you need to select a part to which the bars are attached.
However, a modeled reinforcing bar may need to be attached to another part at a later stage.
To attach a reinforcing bar to another part:
1. Select the reinforcing bar you want to attach.
2. Right-click and select Attach to part from the pop-up menu.
3. Select the part to which you want to attach the reinforcement.
LESSON 9

49 Custom reinforcement component
example
You can create two reinforcing bar groups to place staggered stirrups with hooks at opposite
edges in a concrete column. Then define a custom component of the reinforcement.
49.1 Creating a reinforcement for a column

To create a reinforcement for a column:
1. Create a concrete column that is 3000 millimeters high.
For more information, see Creating a concrete column (p. 26).
2. Hold down the Shift key and click Detailing > Create Reinforcement > Reinforcing
Bar Group.
3. Modify the properties on the General tab as shown below.
Custom reinforcement component example
LESSON 9

4. Go to the Group tab.
5. Modify the properties on the Group tab as shown below.
LESSON 9

6. Click Apply.
8. Pick the corners of the column to define the shape of the reinforcement. Follow the
sequence shown below. Click the middle mouse button to finish.
9. Pick the top and bottom levels to define the range of the reinforcement. Click the middle
mouse button to create the first reinforcing bar group.
LESSON 9

10. Modify the properties under the Cover thickness area in the Reinforcing Bar
Properties dialog box as shown below.
11. Click Apply.

sequence shown below. Click the middle mouse button to finish. Custom reinforcement component example
mouse button to create the second reinforcing bar group.
LESSON 9

49.2 Defining a custom reinforcement component
To define a custom reinforcement component:
1. Click Detailing > Component > Define Custom Component.
The Custom Component Wizard dialog box opens.
2. Select Detail from the Type list.
3. Enter a name and a short description for the component. Click Next.
4. Hold down the Ctrl key and select the two reinforcing bar groups as the component
objects. Click Next.
5. Select the column as the main part. Click Next.
6. Pick the end point at the top level of the column as the reference point.
The custom component only works correctly for columns with the same profile and
height.
LESSON 9

For more information on custom components, see Custom components (p. 146).
50 Reinforcement tips
Adding reinforcements to identical cast units is not always necessary. For example, if there are
20 cast units in a model, you can add reinforcements to all twenty cast units. In some cases, it is
possible to reinforce just one cast unit.
Advantages of reinforcing just one cast unit:
• The model is better organized because it contains less reinforcements.
• The database is smaller because the model contains less reinforcements.
• Less chance on numbering differences because there are less reinforcements.
• Numbering of the model is faster.
• Copying reinforcements and using custom components is not needed.
• Applying model changes is quick. There is no need to modify multiple reinforcements.
Disadvantages of reinforcing just one cast unit:
• Incorrect reinforcement weight.
• Elements that have identical shapes but different reinforcements receive identical cast unit
numbers.
You can create cast unit drawings of the reinforced cast units. If the drawing has already been
created and the reinforcements need to be added in at a later stage, you can find the ID number
of the cast unit by using the Inqure Object command and add the reinforcing bars in the
particular cast unit.
Reinforcement tips
LESSON 9

51 Reinforcement components
Tekla Structures contains various reinforcing components that you can use to create reinforcing
bars and bar groups.
51.1 Adding a reinforcement component

To add a reinforcement component:
1. Click Detailing > Component > Component Catalog...
2. Click the arrow button and select Reinforcements from the list.
The reinforcement components are displayed in the Component Catalog.
3. Double-click a component.
The properties dialog box opens.
4. Define the properties and click OK.
5. Select the part that you want to reinforce.
51.2 Reinforcement component examples

Beam The Beam reinforcement (63) component creates the stirrups and the top, bottom, and side
reinforcement reinforcements in one go. If the size of the beam changes, the reinforcement adapts to the new
(63)
dimensions.
For the main reinforcement (top and bottom), the number and diameter of bars can be set
Reinforcement components
individually. For T profiles or beams with a ridge, multiple stirrup groups can be generated.
The cover thickness for the stirrups needs to be defined in the properties dialog box. The
positioning of the bars in longitudinal direction is automatically determined by the component.
LESSON 9

The stirrup distances can be defined on the Stirrup spacing tab. You can add more stirrups on
places where bigger shear forces occur. You can set the number of stirrups and stirrup distances
for the different zones.
It is possible to create different stirrups in two ledges. To do so, select Different Each Ledge
from the Ledge stirrups list to activate the Upper ledge stirrups boxes.
The Ledge Stirrup Spacing Type list contains two options to define the spacing of ledge
stirrups:
• Target: Tekla Structures creates equal spaces between the bars aiming the spacing value as
closely as possible to the value you specify. This is the default option.
• Exact: The first and last space of a zone adjust themselves to even out bar distribution.
The spaces in the middle of each zone are exactly the size you specify.
LESSON 9

Rebar in beam The Rebar in beam (90) component is a versatile component that is used to add reinforcement
(90) bars to a beam. Besides all the options that are available with the Beam reinforcement (63)
component, the Rebar in beam (90) can also bend the bars at the start or end part of the beam.
LESSON 9

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
LESSON 9
181
Starter bars for
pillar (86) and
Slab bars (18)
Starter bars for pillar (86)
Slab bars (18)
Hole
reinforcement for
slabs and walls
(84), Beam end
reinforcement
(79), and
Rectangular
column
reinforcement
(83)
Hole reinforcement for slabs and walls (84)
Beam end reinforcement (79)
Rectangular column reinforcement (83)

LESSON 9

LESSON 10
In this lesson, you will use some of the modeling skills you have just learned to create a building. You will
also reinforce the building both manually and by using select components.
1. Modeling athe building:
a Create the grids
b Create the foundation elements
c Create the concrete frame elements
d Create the additional elements
e Create the steel frame elements
f Create the reinforced concrete to steel interface
2. Reinforcing the building:
a Create the reinforcements manually
b Create the reinforcements using components
> LESSON 10

52 Modeling the building
52.1 Create the grids

Create the grid
Create the following grid:
LESSON 10

See also Creating a grid (p. 18)
Create the grid line

Create a single grid line between the grid lines B and C as shown below.
LESSON 10

See also Adding a grid line to an existing grid (p. 20)
Create the grid views

Create grid views to make it easier to model the building.
See also Creating plane views along grid lines (p. 22)
52.2 Create the foundation elements

Create the pad footings
Create four pad footings according to the following pictures.
LESSON 10

See also Creating a concrete pad footing (p. 27)
Create the strip footings

LESSON 10
Create strip footings according to the following pictures.

Position the strip footings and then fit them to the pad footings. You can use the Fitting (13)
component.
LESSON 10
See also Creating a concrete strip footing (p. 27)

Component catalog (p. 118)
52.3 Create the concrete frame elements

Create the concrete columns
Create nine concrete columns according to the following pictures.
Columns at B/2,
B/3, C/1 and C/3
LESSON 10

Columns at B/4
and C/4
LESSON 10

Columns at B/5,
B.5/5 and C/5
LESSON 10

See also Creating a concrete column (p. 26)
Create the concrete panels

Create concrete panels according to the following pictures.
LESSON 10

LESSON 10

Use the Fit Part End command to fit the panel ends to columns.
Curved panel To make a curved panel, use the options in the Bending tab in the part properties dialog box.
See the picture below.
LESSON 10

Panels at second Create panels also at the second level.
level
LESSON 10

See also Creating a concrete panel (p. 27)
Creating a fitting (p. 73)
Creating curved parts (p. 43)
Create the concrete beams

Primary concrete Create primary conrete beams according to the following picture.
beams
Create the diagonal beams so that the reference points of the beams are
at the midpoints of the part edges.
Secondary Create secondary conrete beams according to the following picture.

conrete beams
LESSON 10

First, create a beam and apply fitting to the beam. Then copy the beam.
LESSON 10

The fittings are not copied to the skewed intersections. In the case of the
diagonal beams, move the reference point of the secondary beam to the
center line of the diagonal primary beam. Then apply the fitting.
See also Creating a concrete beam (p. 26)
52.4 Create the additional elements

Create the mat foundation
Create a mat foundation according to the following pictures.
LESSON 10

Use temporary reference points when you pick the corners for the mat
foundation.
LESSON 10

See also Creating a concrete slab (p. 28)
Create the concrete slabs

Create concrete slabs on two levels according to the following pictures.
Slabs at first level Create concrete slabs on top of the mat foundation.
LESSON 10

Curved slab To add the curve to the slab by the curved panel, create a round chamfer on the slab edge.
edge
LESSON 10

Sloping slabs To make the two slabs sloping, modify the thickness of the three slab corners at the grid
intersections B/2 and B/3. See the pictures below.
LESSON 10

Slabs at second Create two concrete slabs at the second level so that the top levels of the slabs and the beams
level are the same.
Cut the slabs so that they do not clash with the columns and panels.
See also Creating a concrete slab (p. 28)

Corner chamfers (p. 46)
Cutting parts with another part (p. 74)
Create the openings

LESSON 10
Create openings on floors and walls according to the following pictures.

Floor access Create one opening on the first level.
opening on the
first level
Floor access Create two openings on the second level.

openings on the
second level
LESSON 10

Doorway Create one doorway on the panel B/1-C/1.
LESSON 10

Create a separate front view of the panel and move the work plane to the
view plane to cut the door opening more easily.
See also Cutting parts with a polygon (p. 76)

Adding recesses to concrete parts (p. 44)
Create the piles and the pilecaps

Use the CIP_FO_003 component to create piles and pilecaps at each of the grid intersection
under the mat foundation. Use the component properties shown below.
LESSON 10

The component is available in the Finland environment. When you have
installed the environment, go to the
..\TeklaStructures\<version>\environments\finlan
d\component_sketches folder and unzip the
ConcreteComponents.zip file. Then import the
CIP_components.uel file to your component catalog.
To achieve the result shown above, move the component downwards by

the thickness of the slab.
See also Component catalog (p. 118)

Exporting and importing (p. 148)
52.5 Create the steel frame elements

Create the steel columns
Create six steel columns according to the following pictures.
LESSON 10

LESSON 10

Create all the steel columns at the same level.
See also Creating a steel column (p. 55)
Create the steel beams

Create steel beams at two levels.
LESSON 10

Beams at level Create the beams at level +7600 according to the following picture.
+7600
LESSON 10

Beams at level Create the beams at level +10500 according to the following picture.
+10500
LESSON 10

See also Creating a steel beam (p. 55)
52.6 Create the reinforced concrete to steel interface

Create the base plates and the anchor bolts
Create base plates and anchor bolts to connect steel columns to concrete panels and columns.
Use the U.S. Base plate (1047) component with the properties provided below.
The Parts tab Enter the plate dimensions shown below.

LESSON 10

The Anchor rods Select Anchor rods from the Base plate with list.
tab
Select the anchor rod type shown below.
Base plate with

anchor rods
Create the cast-in-plate connections

Connect steel beams to concrete panels using the Cast-in-plate (1069) component.
LESSON 10

LESSON 10

53 Reinforcing the building
53.1 Create reinforcements manually

Create the reinforcing bars
Creating the Create a reinforcing bar in the corner of one of the columns so that the cover thickness is 100
reinforcing bar mm on both sides.
Reinforcing the building
LESSON 10

Copying the Copy the reinforcing bar using the Copy Special > Rotate option to create additional
reinforcing bar reinforcing bars in each corner.
LESSON 10

See also Creating a reinforcing bar (p. 162)
Copying and rotating (p. 64)
Create the reinforcing bar group

Create a reinforcing bar group according to the following pictures.

LESSON 10

LESSON 10
218
TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Follow the instructions on the status bar when you create the reinforcing
bar group.
See also Reinforcing bar group (p. 158)

Creating a reinforcing bar group (p. 159)
Reinforce the curved wall

Reinforce the curved wall according to the following picture.
See also Curved reinforcing bar group (p. 167)
53.2 Create reinforcements using components

Reinforce the pad footings

Reinforce the pad footings using the Pad footing reinforcement (77) component.
LESSON 10

See also Inserting a pad footing reinforcement (p. 122)
Reinforce the strip footings

Reinforce the strip footings using the Strip footing reinforcement (75) component. See the
following picture for guidance.
Reinforce pilecaps
Reinforce the pilecaps using the Pilecap reinforcement (76) component. See the following
picture for guidance.
To be able to pick the pilecap and the two piles needed to create the pile
cap reinforcement, you need to activate the Select objects in
components switch. See the help file for more information.
LESSON 10

Create the starter bars
Create starter bars using the Starter bars for pillar (86) component. Use the following picture
for guidance.
You have to pick both the footing and the column.

LESSON 10

Reinforce the rectangular columns
Reinforce the rectangular columns using the Rectangular column reinforcement (83)
component. See the following picture for more guidance.
Create the reinforcement mesh

Create a reinforcement mesh in the wall with the opening by using the Slab bars (18)
component.
LESSON 10

Reinforce the openings in the slabs and the wall
Reinforce openings in slabs and walls by using the Hole reinforcement for slabs and walls
(84) component.
• Create construction lines to aid in locating the midpoint of the

opening.
• The dialog box in the picture below shows how to add the
dimensions of the opening.
• To add the diagonal reinforcing bars, modify the properties in the
Diagonal bars tab.

LESSON 10

LESSON 10
224
TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
LESSON 11
This lesson contains reference material that you can use when needed.
> LESSON 11

54 Concrete components
54.1 Concrete foundation (1030)
footing with two posts column and starter bars
54.2 Create hole around part (92)
column penetrates floor

LESSON 11

54.3 Border rebar (93)
default beam default panel
border reinforcing bars
default floor
LESSON 11

54.4 Inbedded (1008)
anchor bars
lifting and bolt anchors
several anchors
socket rectangle and tubes
LESSON 11

54.5 Opening in wall (40)
define rabbet several openings
adding insulation braced girders
LESSON 11

54.6 Braced girders (88 and 89)
floor panel
plate
geometry
LESSON 11

54.7 Rebar in beam (90)
beam
column and anchor bars
ledge beam
sloped angles
stirrup extension
reinforcement along the main axis
LESSON 11

54.8 Border rebar (92)
default beam
default panel
default plate pins on top
54.9 Longitudinal reinforcement (70)
default longitudinal reinforcement pins

LESSON 11

54.10 Beam reinforcement (63)
RCL profile
default reinforcement in beam
54.11 Pad footing reinforcement (77)
default footing plate and lacer bars
54.12 Beam end reinforcement (79) LESSON 11
beam end teeth

54.13 Lifting anchor (80)
default lifting anchor and trenching
54.14 Round column reinforcement (82)
round column reinforcement and pins

round column reinforcement
54.15 Rectangular column reinforcement (83)

LESSON 11
reinforcement and pins

reinforcement

54.16 Hole reinforcement for slabs and walls (84)
panel and reinforcement floor and reinforcement
54.17 Hole creation and reinforcement (85)
hole and reinforcement in beam hole and reinforcement
54.18 Starter bars for pillar (86)
pins and border reinforcing bars

LESSON 11
footing plate

54.19 Starter bars for footing (87)
default footing plate

pins and starter reinforcing bars
54.20 Slab bars (18)
default bottom and top bars bars in a set direction
54.21 Reinforcement mesh array in area (89)
reinforcement direction
LESSON 11
default mesh

54.22 Stairwells and elevation shafts (90)
default
55 Steel components
55.1 End plate (144)
Steel components
LESSON 11

55.2 Cranked beam (41)
Steel components
LESSON 11

55.3 Haunch (40)
55.4 Joining plates (14)
55.5 Base plate (1004)

This component includes an option to create one or more filler plates.
Steel components
LESSON 11

55.6 Stiffened base plate (1014)
With the standard setting, a base plate is created with a leveling plate including grout holes. A
plain base plate is also an option (leveling plate t=0) with or with-out grout holes. Additional
stiffeners can also be added.
Steel components
LESSON 11

55.7 Stiffeners (1003)
55.8 Stub (1011)

Use the bolt delete option to determine which holes are deleted from the stub.
Steel components
LESSON 11

55.9 End plate detail (1002)
Steel components
LESSON 11

55.10 Stanchion weld (85)
55.11 Manlock column (1032)
Steel components
LESSON 11

55.12 Manlock beam (1033)
55.13 Array of objects (29)

This component can be used to copy model objects.
Steel components
LESSON 11

one truss
copied
If you modify the original objects, for example, a column, Tekla Structures
changes the copied objects as well.
Steel components
LESSON 11

LESSON 11
246
Steel components
TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
LESSON 12
• how to use Tekla Structures Help
• how to save your favorite Help topics
> LESSON 12

56 Using Tekla Structures Help
Tekla Structures Help is a detailed guide to Tekla Structures concepts, tools, commands, and
features, with plenty of examples.
56.1 Opening Tekla Structures Help

To open Help, do one of the following:
• Click Help > Tekla Structures Help.
• Press F1.
If you have a dialog box open, pressing F1 takes you straight to the related topic.
If you want to quickly learn how to use Help and its seach functionalities efficiently, watch the
Using Help video tutorial on the Help homepage.
56.2 Browsing Help topics by subject

Use the Contents tab to browse through Help topics using a hierarchical list of topics.
LESSON 12
To browse Help topics by subject:

1. Go to the Contents tab.
2. Click a Help topic to open it, or double-click a closed book icon to display the subtopics.
3. Use the red arrow buttons to move to the next or previous topic.
To open or close all books on the Contents tab, right-click one of the
topics and select Open all or Close all from the pop-up menu.
56.3 Finding Help topics using the index

Use the Index tab to search for Help topics using an alphabetical list of keywords.
To find a Help topic using the index:
1. Go to the Index tab.
2. Enter a keyword, or scroll through the list of keywords.
3. Double-click a title to display that topic, or click a topic title and then click Display.
If a keyword is associated with more than one topic, a list of topics appears and you are
prompted to select one of them.
56.4 Searching for Help topics

Use the Search tab to find Help topics based on search terms. You can refine your search using
wildcard characters, search operators, nested search terms, and search filters.
To search for a Help topic:
1. Go to the Search tab.
2. Enter the words to search for.
3. Click List Topics to start the search.
A list of results appears.
If you want to find an exact phrase, or if the search term contains special
characters, enclose the phrase in double quotation marks. For example,
"bolt catalog" or "objects.inp".
Viewing the search results

To view and sort the search results, do any of the following:
LESSON 12

To Do this
Display the search results in Click the Title column heading.
alphabetical order
Display the location of a topic in Click Locate on the Help toolbar.
the hierarchical list of topics
Find a specific word or phrase in Click the topic and press Ctrl + F.
the open topic
Move forward and backward Click Forward or Back on the Help toolbar.
through previously viewed topics
Show or hide the navigation pane Click Show or Hide on the Help toolbar.
Disable the highlighting of Click Options > Search Highlight Off.
search terms in the search results
Return to the Help cover page Click Home on the Help toolbar.
Using search filters

Use any of the following search filters to narrow or broaden your search results:
Search filter Description

Search previous results Narrows down the search results. The next search will be
performed within the topics that were found in the
previous search.
Match similar words Includes topics that contain words similar to your search
term. For example, also the plural form of the word is
included in the search.
Search titles only Searches for words only in topic titles. If the search term
appears only in the body of a topic, it is not included in
the search results.
To enable or disable a search filter, select or clear the corresponding check box on the Search
tab.
56.5 Saving favorite Help topics

Use the Favorites tab to save Help topics that you might want to visit again.
To add a topic to your list of favorites:
1. Display the topic you want to save.
2. Go to the Favorites tab.
3. Optional: If you want to save the topic under a different name, enter a new name in the
Current topic box, and then press Enter.
4. Click Add.
LESSON 12

Tekla Structures
Construction Management and Task Manager
Training Manual
January 2011

reserved.
Contents
Introduction 1
LESSON 1 3
2 Saving a model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3 Opening a model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.2 Importing a model ................................................................................................................................... 6
4.1 Zooming.................................................................................................................................................. 7
4.2 Panning................................................................................................................................................... 7
4.3 Rotating .................................................................................................................................................. 7
5 Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
5.1 View properties ....................................................................................................................................... 8
5.2 Display .................................................................................................................................................... 9
5.6 Creating a view using three points........................................................................................................ 13
6 Work area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
7 Creating plane views along grid lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
8 Common buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
LESSON 2 21
9 Snapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
9.1 Snap switches....................................................................................................................................... 22
9.3 Numeric snapping.................................................................................................................................. 23
9.4 Numeric location coordinates ................................................................................................................ 24
9.5 Creating a temporary reference point.................................................................................................... 25
10 Mini Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
11 Selection switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
11.1 Selection filters ...................................................................................................................................... 29
Selection filter example..................................................................................................................... 30
11.2 Selection examples ............................................................................................................................... 30
12 Modifying the work area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
12.1 Fit work area to selected parts .............................................................................................................. 32
12.2 Fit work area using two points ............................................................................................................... 33
12.3 Fit work area to entire model in selected views..................................................................................... 33
12.4 Hiding the work area.............................................................................................................................. 33
13 Creating a clip plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
13.1 Moving a clip plane................................................................................................................................ 34
13.2 Deleting a clip plane .............................................................................................................................. 35
LESSON 3 37
14 Entering project information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
15 Switching between single-user and multi-user modes . . . . . . . . 39
16 Reference models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
16.1 Inserting a reference model................................................................................................................... 40
16.2 Hiding a reference model ...................................................................................................................... 41
16.3 Updating a reference model .................................................................................................................. 41
16.4 Detecting changes in reference models ................................................................................................ 42
Example............................................................................................................................................ 43
16.5 Handling large reference models........................................................................................................... 44
17 Model Organizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
17.1 Creating logical areas............................................................................................................................ 45
17.2 Creating object type categories ............................................................................................................. 46
17.3 Viewing logical areas and object type categories.................................................................................. 46
18 Checking the model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
18.1 Finding clashes in a model.................................................................................................................... 47
Changing the status of clashes ........................................................................................................ 48
Changing the priority of clashes ....................................................................................................... 48
Symbols used in clash checking ...................................................................................................... 48
Grouping and ungrouping clashes ................................................................................................... 49
Adding comments to a clash ............................................................................................................ 49
Opening and saving clash check sessions....................................................................................... 49
18.2 Flying through the model....................................................................................................................... 50
18.3 Checking using reports ......................................................................................................................... 51
19 Inquiring the model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
19.1 Inquiring object properties..................................................................................................................... 52
19.2 Inquiring assembly objects.................................................................................................................... 53
Displaying all objects connected to a part ........................................................................................ 53
19.3 Inquiring welded parts........................................................................................................................... 54
19.4 Inquiring the center of gravity................................................................................................................ 54
20 Representing objects in model views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
20.1 Creating object representation settings................................................................................................. 55
20.2 Defining your own colors to model object groups ................................................................................. 56
21 Project status visualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
21.1 Adding planned erection dates.............................................................................................................. 58
21.2 Creating object groups and object representation settings ................................................................... 59
21.3 Using project status visualization .......................................................................................................... 61
22 Phase Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
22.1 Dividing the model into phases ............................................................................................................. 64
23 Lotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
23.1 Creating a lot......................................................................................................................................... 64
23.2 Adding parts to a lot .............................................................................................................................. 65
23.3 Removing parts from a lot..................................................................................................................... 65
23.4 Deleting a lot ......................................................................................................................................... 66
24 Watch how to use BIM in a live project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
LESSON 4 67
25 Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
25.1 Searching drawings............................................................................................................................... 68
25.2 Filtering Drawing List contents.............................................................................................................. 69
25.3 Opening a drawing................................................................................................................................ 69
25.4 Editing a drawing ................................................................................................................................... 70
25.5 Printing a drawing.................................................................................................................................. 70
26 Screenshots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
26.1 Creating a screenshot ........................................................................................................................... 70
26.2 Screenshot settings ............................................................................................................................... 71
27 WebViewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
27.1 Publishing a model as a web page........................................................................................................ 72
28 Tekla Structures Model Reviewer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
28.1 Opening a model in Model Reviewer..................................................................................................... 73
LESSON 5 75
29 Using Tekla Structures Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
29.1 Opening Tekla Structures Help ............................................................................................................. 76
29.2 Browsing Help topics by subject............................................................................................................ 76
29.3 Finding Help topics using the index....................................................................................................... 77
29.4 Searching for Help topics ...................................................................................................................... 77
Viewing the search results................................................................................................................ 77
Using search filters ........................................................................................................................... 78
29.5 Saving favorite Help topics .................................................................................................................... 78
Introduction
management.
Tekla helps all new Tekla Structures users to get started and to maintain their development.
Our well-defined training course is a jump start to Tekla Structures software and helps to
maximize using Tekla Structures to its full potential. During the basic training course, you will
be taught the basic principles of Tekla Structures. Each training day contains several exercises
so you will learn to apply what you have learned in theory. The instructor will show the correct
indicated.

Spanish, Russian,
Japanese, Chinese
Drawings
Precast Concrete
Detailing, Modeling
Precast Concrete
Detailing, Drawings
Construction
Management
Detailing, Modeling
Detailing, Drawings
Spanish, Russian,
format
instructions
to Tekla Structures
instructions
instructions
Extranet:
Italian, Russian,
& videos
Italian, Russian,
Extranet:
Japanese, Chinese
& videos
topnewfeatures
tutorials
& videos
material Questions
Glossary
Glossary
Discussion Forum
German, Japanese,
Product
Chinese
LESSON 1
• how to open and save a model
> LESSON 1
2 Saving a model

General.

folder.
Saving a model
LESSON 1
3 Opening a model
To open a model:



folders.

Opening a model

LESSON 1

Structures version.
3.2 Importing a model

If you receive a detailed model, you can import it to Tekla Structures. Importing a model
retains the numbering information and eases the file sharing because you do not need to upload
or e-mail large model folders.
To import a model:
1. Enable the model import.
a Open the user.ini file in a text editor, for example Microsoft Notepad. The
file is located in the ..\Users\<username>\AppData\Local\Tekla
Structures\<version>\UserSettings folder.
b Add the advanced option set XS_ENABLE_MODEL_IMPORT=TRUE to the file.
c Restart Tekla Structures to activate the advanced option.
2. Click File > Import > Model....
3. Browse to the correct model folder to locate the model database (.db1) file that you
want to import.
4. Click Yes to continue.
5. Click Yes to import all drawings that are associated with the mdoel.
Opening a model
LESSON 1
some of them.
4.1 Zooming
4.2 Panning
4.3 Rotating
5 Views
create views

LESSON 1
5.1 View properties
box opens.
Option Description
model
LESSON 1
Views
Option Description
the model
5.2 Display
LESSON 1
Views
LESSON 1
Views



4. Click Create.

3. Click OK.
View dialog box.
LESSON 1
Views

1. Click the view.
4. Click Yes.
The plane moves.

or click .
3. Click OK.
LESSON 1
Views
5.6 Creating a view using three points

You can use the Create View of Model > Using Three Points command to create, for
example, views perpendicular to a plane of a part.
To create a view:
1. Hold down the Shift key and click View > Create View of Model > Using Three Points
to open the View Properties dialog box.
3. Pick the first point to indicate the origin of the view plane.
4. Pick the second point to indicate the direction of the view x axis.
5. Pick the third point to indicate the direction of the view y axis.
LESSON 1
Views
The view is created.
LESSON 1
Views

component objects.
LESSON 1
Views
Example
Rendered (Ctrl + 4)
6 Work area
LESSON 1
Work area
Work area



LESSON 1
3. Click Create.
LESSON 1
8 Common buttons
Button Description
dialog box. Tekla Structures uses these properties the next
time you create an object of this type.

Common buttons
LESSON 1
20
LESSON 1
Common buttons
TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
LESSON 2
• how to use and customize the Mini Toolbar
> LESSON 2
9 Snapping
beam.
9.1 Snap switches

Snap
points (points that
have handles).

LESSON 2
components.
Snap
intersections.


arcs.


circles.
objects.

edges or lines.
objects.


LESSON 2
of the following:

Location toolbar.
You can

brackets.
direction.

coordinates picked.


LESSON 2


• Distance
• Angle
•
LESSON 2
Arc
• Bolt spaces
10 Mini Toolbar
You can use the Mini Toolbar to inquire objects and check the properties of the objects.
when you move the mouse further away or change the selection. You can change the position
of the toolbar by dragging it and locking it to a new position with the lock button in the top
right corner.

Mini Toolbar
LESSON 2
attributes.
elements.
5. Click OK.
Selection switches

LESSON 2
Button Description
single bolts.
Select points.
Select welds.
Select model views.
Select planes.
Select distances.

selected.
Selection switches

LESSON 2
Button Description
Select tasks.

Selection filters

Selection switches

own filters
LESSON 2

3. Click Add row.
define the filter.

Selection switches
Scrolling
assembly levels
Ensure that the Select assemblies selection switch is active.
LESSON 2
To define the level on which to select objects in nested components or assemblies, hold down
the Shift key and scroll with the mouse wheel. Level 0 is the highest assembly level.
Level 0
Level 1

Level 0:
Level 1:
Selecting objects A beam has two end plates.

for reports and
drawings
When you generate reports, drawings, NC files or other types of output of the beam, ensure that
the Select objects in components switch is active. You can then select all the objects.
The report displays information of the beam and the end plates.
Selection switches
LESSON 2
The Select components switch selects objects at the highest level. The end plates
created by a component are highlighted but are not selected, and the information of them is not
displayed in the report.

You can modify the work area to suit particular situations. You can fit the work area and it is
also possible to hide the work area lines.

Modifying the work area
LESSON 2


Modifying the work area
LESSON 2
13 Creating a clip plane


2. Select a plane.


LESSON 2

LESSON 2
36
LESSON 2
TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
LESSON 3
• how to use the Model Organizer
• how to use the project status visualization tool
• how to create and define lots
> LESSON 3
LESSON 3

multi-user modes
Open dialog box.

user model in

model.

user model in
16 Reference models
model is created in Tekla Structures or another software or modeling tool and imported to
Tekla Structures.
LESSON 3
• AutoCAD (*.dxf)
• AutoCAD (*.dwg)
You can snap to reference model geometry. Tekla Structures loads the reference model from
the file each time you open your model. It does not save the reference model when you save the


Reference models
LESSON 3
4. Click OK.


You can update the reference models in your Tekla Structures model if there have been
changes in the original reference models after you have imported them to Tekla Structures.
Reference models
LESSON 3
4. Click Modify.
dialog box.

file formats:
• IFC (.ifc)
• Cadmatic (.3dd)
• DWG (.dwg)
name box.
Reference models
LESSON 3
Example
The old file:
The new file:

Reference models
LESSON 3

model.
17 Model Organizer
Model Organizer
Use Model Organizer to manage and view different logical areas and object types in your
LESSON 3
model. You can classify information according to your needs.
Model Organizer can be used in construction planning and management. You can divide a
large model into logical sections and floors to help create building schedules, lots, and erection
sequences, and categorize object types, for example, based on purchasing contracts. You can
categorize both native Tekla Structures objects and reference objects.
Each part can belong to only one section and one story, but to several object type categories.
To open the Model Organizer, click Tools > Model Organizer....
17.1 Creating logical areas

Logical areas may already have been defined for the model. You can create new logical areas
for your own needs and add objects to the logical areas.
To create logical areas and add objects to them:
2. Create a path structure.
a Right-click Logical Areas.
b Click New Building.
c Click New Section.
d Click New Story.
You may create as many sections and storys as you need. Note that sections and
storys are both created under buildings.
3. Select a section or story in Model Organizer.

4. In the model, select the area for the section or the story.
Each model object can belong to only one section and one story.
5. In Model Organizer, right-click the selected section or story, and select Add Selected to
Category.
Model Organizer
LESSON 3
You can also add objects to the selected section or story by right-clicking
the object in the model and selecting Model Classification > Add to
Selected Classification from the pop-up menu.
In large projects, you can create sites for your project by right-clicking
Logical Areas and selecting Show Site(s). You can hide the sites by
selecting Hide Site(s).
17.2 Creating object type categories

To create object type categories:
2. Create object type categories.
a Right-click Object Types.
b Click New Object Type.
You can also create subtypes for object types.
3. In the model, select the objects you want to add to an object type category.
4. In Model Organizer, right-click the object type category and select Add Selected to
Category .
17.3 Viewing logical areas and object type categories

To view logical areas and object type categories:
The Model Organizer opens.
2. Select a logical area or an object type category.
The logical area or objects belonging to the selected object type category are highlighted
in the model.
3. To view the classification information of an object, right-click the object in the model
and select Model Classification > Show Related Classification, or in the Model
Organizer, select an object and click .

Model Organizer
LESSON 3
checking the model:
• Clash checking

collide.
• IFC
• DWG
• DGN

You can continue working during the clash check. When the clash check is complete,
the status bar message changes from Clash checking in progress to Ready.
double-click a row.
Checking the model
LESSON 3
Changing the status of clashes

To change the status of clashes:
1. In Clash Check Manager, select the clashes whose status you want to change.
3. Select Status and then one of the status options:
• Assign
• Fix
• Approve
• Ignore
• Reopen
Changing the priority of clashes

To change the priority of clashes:
1. In Clash Check Manager, select the clashes whose priority you want to change.
3. Select Priority and then one of the status options:
• High
• Medium
• Low
Symbols used in clash checking

Clash Check Manager uses the following flags to indicate the state of clashes:

(none) Active The default state. The clash is not new, modified,
resolved, or missing.
New All clashes are marked as new when they are
found for the first time.
Modified If the object has been modified (for example, if the
profile has changed), the state changes to modified
when you re-run clash check.
Only certain object properties affect this flag. To
see which properties have an effect, right-click one
of the column headings. Both visible and hidden
properties affect the flag.
Checking the model
LESSON 3
Resolved If the objects no longer clash, the state changes to
resolved when you re-run clash check.
Missing If one or both of the clashing objects have been
removed from the model, the state changes to
missing when you re-run clash check.
Grouping and ungrouping clashes

You can combine several clashes into a group so that the clashes are treated as a single unit.
You can also ungroup the grouped clashes.
Grouping clashes To group clashes:

1. In Clash Check Manager, select the clashes you want to group.
2. Right-click and select Group > Group from the pop-up menu.
3. If you want to add clashes to an already existing group, select the clashes and the group,
and then repeat step 2.
You cannot create nested groups of clashes.
Ungrouping To ungroup clashes:

clashes
1. In Clash Check Manager, select the clash group you want to ungroup.
2. Right-click and select Group > Unroup from the pop-up menu.
Adding comments to a clash

You can add comments to clashes and clash groups. For example, you might use comments as
reminders to yourself and other users.
To add a comment:
1. Select the clash or clash group you want to comment on.
4. Click to open the Add comment dialog box.

5. Enter your comment in the Comment box.
6. Click OK.
Opening and saving clash check sessions

To open or save sessions in Clash Check Manager, do any of the following:
Checking the model
LESSON 3
To Do this
Open a session
1. Click .
2. In the Open dialog box, select a session.
3. Click OK.
Start a new session
Click .
Clash Check Manager clears the list of clashes
without running clash check.
Save the current session
Click .
Save the current session under a
different name or in a different 1. Click the arrow button next to the icon.
location A pop-up menu appears.
2. Click Save as.

3. In the Save As dialog box, browse to the folder
where you want to save the session.
4. In the File name box, enter a new name.
5. Click Save.
Save only selected clashes 1. In the list of clashes, select the clashes you want
to save.
2. Click the arrow button next to the icon.

A pop-up menu appears.
3. Click Save selected.
By default, clash check sessions are stored as XML files in the

..\TeklaStructuresModels\<model>\Clashes folder.
Tekla Structures creates the folder automatically when you open Clash
Check Manager for the first time.

speed as you go.
Perspective.

Checking the model

LESSON 3
c Click Modify.

distance.

• ID lists
is hard to locate.

Checking the model
LESSON 3
model.


Inquiring the model
LESSON 3
19.2 Inquiring assembly objects
To inquire assembly objects:
2. Select the assembly.

1. Select the part.
2. Delete the part.

Inquiring the model

LESSON 3
Click Tools > Inquire > Primary Welded Part to highlight the
main part when you select the secondary part.



LESSON 3

all model views.
column.

LESSON 3
11. Click Close.
16. Click Modify.

groups
Object Group list.
LESSON 3

6. Click OK.

LESSON 3
21 Project status visualization
Use the Project Status Visualization tool to review the status of modeling objects in a specific
time frame. For example, use this tool to:
• display the erection schedule for groups of parts using different colors
• identify the parts that are scheduled to be fabricated during a specific time period.
You can define tasks for parts and assemblies with Task Manager.
Project status visualization can then be based on the tasks.
The following example demonstrates how the project status visualization tool works. In the
example, we
• add planned erection dates
• create object representation settings
• review the status of objects in the time scale with the project status visualization tool.
21.1 Adding planned erection dates

Project status visualization
We add planned erection dates for parts.

To add planned erection dates:
LESSON 3
3. On the Status tab, modify the value of the user-defined attribute Erection Scheduled.
4. Ensure that all the check boxes are cleared.
5. Select the Erection Scheduled check box.
6. Select all the parts for which you want to use the same erection date.
To make it easier to select parts, create a separate selection filter for each
group of parts.
7. Click Modify.
8. Repeat steps 1–7 for each group of parts in your model.
You can select the dates but allocate them at least for the time period of one month.
21.2 Creating object groups and object representa-

tion settings
Next we create several settings that define which objects are shown in the model and how they
are shown. The settings are:
• Objects which have been erected over a week before the review date will be displayed in
gray.
• Objects which have been erected in the previous week will be displayed in blue.
• Objects which are planned to be erected in the following week will be displayed in red.
• Objects which are planned to be erected in the future will be displayed in transparent
yellow.
• All objects without a set erection date will be displayed in transparent white.
To create the representation settings:
1. Click View > Representation > Object Representation... to open the Object
Representation dialog box.
2. Click Object group... button to open the Object Group - Representation dialog box.
3. Create an object group whose planned erection date is over a week before than the
review date:
• In the Category list box, select Task.
• In the Property list box, select Planned Start Date.
• In the Condition list box, select Earlier than.
• In the Value list box, select Select date... to open the Select Date dialog box. Enter
7 in the day(s) before the review date box and click OK.
LESSON 3
Planned erection over week before review date.
5. Click Save as.
6. In the same way, define and save the settings for the Planned erection one
week before review date, Planned erection one week after
review date, and Planned erection two weeks after review date
object groups.
7. Define the color and transparency settings for the object groups in the Object
Representation dialog box.
a Click the Add row button.
b In the Object group list box, select the Planned erection over week
before review date object group.
c In the Color list box, select gray as the color.
d In the Transparency list box, select Visible.
8. Define the color and transparency settings for the rest of the object groups.
9. In the box next to the Save as button, enter a name for the object representation settings.
For example, Planned erection dates.
10. Click Save as.
LESSON 3
21.3 Using project status visualization

When you have defined the object representation settings, you can review the status of the
objects on a time scale.
To review the status:
1. Close all the other views except the 3D view to make updates faster.
2. Click Tools > Project Status Visualization to open the Project Status Visualization
dialog box.
3. Select suitable dates.
• Select a date that is just before the first planned erection date from the Review date
list .
• Select the scale start and end dates.
4. Select the Refresh view automatically check box
5. Select Planned erection dates from the Object representation list.
LESSON 3
6. Click Refresh.
7. Click the step buttons to review the status changes in the model.
8. Click Close when you have finished reviewing the status changes.
22 Phase Manager
Phase Manager
LESSON 3
Option Description
in the Number box.
the Name box.
character.
new phases.
phases.
Phase Manager.
Phase Manager
objects.
LESSON 3
23 Lotting
With lots you can group assemblies for transporting to site. Lotting means that you evaluate
specific model parts with respect to the number of units that can be carried by a transfer
vehicle. For example, you can calculate how many concrete truck deliveries are needed to pour
the footings or slabs for a specific portion of the model. With this information, it is easier to
determine area requirements and create an erection schedule.
When you define lots, you must take into account the load-carrying capacity of the vehicle,
because a lot cannot exceed the maximum total load capacity. You can calculate truck load
sizes based on material weights and model quantities. For most model parts, the weight is based
on the size, length, and material of the part.
To view the properties of a part, right-click the part and then select
Inquire > Part or Properties...
The basic lotting process is the same for steel and concrete parts. However, if you are using
cast-in-place concrete, remember that the concrete is transported in a volumetric container (for
example, in a ten-cubic-yard truck). In that case, you must calculate the weight-carrying
capacity of the concrete vehicle before defining the number of lots.
23.1 Creating a lot

LESSON 3
To create a lot:
Lotting
2. Click Properties... to display the Lot Properties dialog box.
3. Type a name in the field at the bottom of the dialog box.
4. Type a lot number in the Number field.
5. Type the maximum weight of the lot in the Max weight field.
6. Click Add.
Tekla Structures creates an empty lot with the defined properties.
23.2 Adding parts to a lot

After you have created the needed lots, you must select each part of the model and assign them
to a lot until the total load weight of the lot reaches the specified target.
To add parts to a lot:
Tekla Structures highlights the parts included in the lot. The total weight of the lot and
the number of assemblies it contains are displayed under Applied values.
3. Hold down Shift and select the parts that you want to add to the lot.
The weight and number of the added parts is displayed under Current values. Tekla
Structures displays a warning message if the weight limit of the lot is exceeded.
When you re-open the dialog box, the Applied values include the weight and number of
the parts you added.
Always use the Shift key when adding parts to an existing lot. If you
simply select parts, you will overwrite the contents of the lot. When you
hold down Shift, you cannot select parts that already belong to another
lot.
23.3 Removing parts from a lot

To remove parts from a lot:
Tekla Structures highlights the parts included in the lot.
3. Hold down Ctrl and select the parts you want to remove from the lot.
Tekla Structures deselects the parts.
LESSON 3
Lotting
23.4 Deleting a lot
To delete a lot:
2. Click Properties...
4. Click Delete.
24 Watch how to use BIM in a live project

First steps with Learn more about how to use Tekla Structures for Construction Management by watching
BIM - Interactive interactive video tutorials. The models used in the tutoriasl are from a live project, and you can
tutorials
watch each of the nine videos or just the most interesting ones.
The First steps with BIM - Interactive tutorials are available on the Tekla website, at
www.tekla.com/bimlessons.
The videos are available only in English.
The videos are divided into three categories:

Getting started
• Bringing in project model
• Classifying models
• Investigating models
Clash detection & management
• Clash Check
• Clash Communication
• RFI management
Construction management
• Quantity take off and estimating
• Model based scheduling, part1
• Model based scheduling, part2
Watch how to use BIM in a live project
Top New Feature Do not forget to watch the Top New Feature videos that are published with each Tekla
videos Structures main version. Top New Feature videos introduce the new features and show how to
use them.
The Top New Feature videos are available on the Tekla website, at www.tekla.com/
topnewfeatures.
See also www.tekla.com/bimlessons

LESSON 3
www.tekla.com/topnewfeatures
LESSON 4
• how to display the drawings in the model
• how to create screenshots
> LESSON 4
25 Drawings
All drawings in a Tekla Structures model are displayed in the Drawing List dialog box. You
can open and print drawings, and search and sort drawings on the list according to different
criteria. You can also modify the drawings, but you cannot save your changes.
You can open the Drawing List in the model by selecting Drawings & Reports > Drawing List
(Ctrl + L) or, when a drawing is open, by clicking Drawing File > Open (Ctrl + O).
You need to have the templates used in the drawings, otherwise the
drawings are not displayed correctly.
25.1 Searching drawings

1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing List....
The Drawing List dialog box opens. You can quickly find the drawings by using the
text-based search by entering the desired criteria in the Enter search criteria box.
2. Enter search criteria.

You can limit the search:
• by selecting an option from the Search in list
• by selecting the Search within the currently visible drawings check box.
LESSON 4
25.2 Filtering Drawing List contents
In addition to using search, you can select which drawings you want to see in the list and in
which order.
To filter the Drawing List contents, do any of the following:
To Do this
Display a predefined set of drawings Select a set of drawings from the select drawing
set list.
Saved search results are also displayed in this list.
List all drawings Click Show all.
Invert the contents of the current list Click Invert.
This feature allows you to list the opposite of the
current content.
For example, if you had selected to display
Locked drawings, clicking Invert shows all
drawings except the locked ones.
List selected drawings only Select the drawings and click Selected.
List up-to-date drawings only Click Up to date.
List drawings that need to be updated 1. Click Up to date.
2. Click Invert.
Lists only drawings associated with the 1. Select objects in the model.
objects you have selected in the model. 2. Click By parts.
Selecting parts that have drawings. 1. In the Drawing List, press Ctrl + A to select
all drawings.
Select parts that do not have drawings.
2. To highlight the parts that have drawings,
Select objects does not work in click Select objects.
general arrangement drawings.
After completing the previous step you can
highlight the parts that do not have drawings by
holding down the Ctrl key and selecting the entire
model (hold down the left mouse button and drag
all the way from left to right).
Sort the list according to Column name Click the column name.
25.3 Opening a drawing

You can open drawings from the Drawing List. You can only have one drawing open at a time.
To Do this
Open a drawing from the model While you have the Drawing List open, double-click the
or when a drawing is open drawing on the list.
Open the next or the previous Press Ctrl + Page Down (next) or Ctrl + Page Up
drawing on the list (previous).
LESSON 4
25.4 Editing a drawing
You can edit a drawing, but you cannot save it. Editing may sometimes be helpful, for example,
if you want to emphasize something in a printed drawing.
To Do this
Add dimensions in the drawing Use the dimensioning commands on the toolbar.
Edit part properties 1. Double-click the part.

2. Edit the properties.
3. Click Modify.
Change the color mode Press B.
25.5 Printing a drawing

To print a drawing:
1. In the Drawing List, double-click the drawing you want to print.
2. Click Drawing File > Print Drawings... to open the Print Drawings dialog box.
3. Select the printer you want to use.
4. Click Print to print the drawing.
26 Screenshots
A screenshot is a picture of a dialog box, view, or the entire Tekla Structures window. You can
use screenshots in posters, brochures, or other material to show projects carried out using Tekla
Structures.
26.1 Creating a screenshot

To create a high resolution screenshot of a rendered view:
1. Ensure that the view type is set to Rendered.
3. To define which view to create the screenshot from, click Pick view and select a view.
4. Under Capture, select Rendered view.
5. Click Options... The Screenshot Options dialog box appears.
Screenshots
6. Set the desired properties and click OK.

LESSON 4
7. Click Capture.
For more information on screenshot settings, see Screenshot settings (p. 71).
26.2 Screenshot settings

Use the Screenshot dialog box to view and modify the screenshot settings.
Option Description
View name Shows the selected view name.
View Includes the view content and window borders in the
screenshot.
View without borders Includes only the view content in the screenshot.
Rendered view Use for high resolution screenshots from rendered views. The
Options... button displays the Screenshot Options dialog
box.
Place on clipboard Places the screenshot on the clipboard.
Print to file Saves the screenshot to a file.
The following screenshot options are only available in rendered views:
Option Description
Final width The width of the screenshot.
Final height The height of the screenshot.
DPI The pixel density (DPI) of the screenshot.
There are limitations to pixel density. You can change the
DPI using a graphics editor.
White background Uses white background.
Smooth lines Uses smooth lines to decrease jagged edges.
Line width Sets the line width.
27 WebViewer
WebViewer
LESSON 4
By default, Tekla Structures creates a PublicWeb folder with sub-folders in the
current model folder, and places the published model there.
web browser.
WebViewer
LESSON 4
With it you can:

Reviewer.
format.

LESSON 4
74
LESSON 4
TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
LESSON 5
> LESSON 5

• Press F1.

LESSON 5



LESSON 5
To Do this
alphabetical order
the open topic


previous search.
the search results.
tab.

4. Click Add.
LESSON 5
Tekla Structures
Task Manager Guide

December 2010

reserved.
conventions
Font Usage
for the first time.

things.
useful.
time.

Contents
1 Introduction to Task Manager .................................................................. 7

2 Installing and running Task Manager ...................................................... 9
2.1 Installation............................................................................................................................................... 9
2.2 Starting Task Manager ........................................................................................................................... 9
2.3 Exiting Task Manager ........................................................................................................................... 10
3 Task Manager user interface .................................................................. 11

3.1 Task list................................................................................................................................................. 11
3.2 Gantt chart ............................................................................................................................................ 11
Gantt chart symbols ......................................................................................................................... 12
3.3 How to run commands.......................................................................................................................... 13
4 Changing view settings .......................................................................... 15

4.1 Enlarging icons ..................................................................................................................................... 15
4.2 Showing and hiding task list items........................................................................................................ 15
4.3 Keeping Task Manager window on top................................................................................................. 16
4.4 Modifying Gantt chart appearance........................................................................................................ 16
4.5 Modifying Gantt chart timescale ........................................................................................................... 16
4.6 Modifying Gantt chart colors ................................................................................................................. 17
4.7 Modifying the appearance of dates and months................................................................................... 17
5 Creating and modifying tasks ................................................................ 19

5.1 Creating a task...................................................................................................................................... 19
5.2 Creating a subtask................................................................................................................................ 20
5.3 Defining a task type .............................................................................................................................. 20
5.4 Defining a contractor............................................................................................................................. 21
5.5 Modifying a task.................................................................................................................................... 21
Defining general task properties ...................................................................................................... 22
Defining a task schedule .................................................................................................................. 22
Managing individual objects in a task............................................................................................... 23
Defining the order of objects in a task.............................................................................................. 24
Defining a production rate for a task ................................................................................................ 25
Tracking a task schedule ................................................................................................................. 25
Defining additional information for a task ......................................................................................... 26
5.6 Saving a task ........................................................................................................................................ 26
5.7 Removing a task ................................................................................................................................... 26
5.8 Selecting multiple tasks in the task list ................................................................................................. 27
5.9 Selecting multiple tasks in the Gantt chart............................................................................................ 27
5.10 Arranging tasks..................................................................................................................................... 27
6 Managing task dependencies................................................................. 29

6.1 Task dependencies............................................................................................................................... 29
6.2 Creating a dependency between tasks................................................................................................. 30
6.3 Modifying a dependency between tasks............................................................................................... 30
6.4 Removing a dependency between tasks .............................................................................................. 31
7 Linking tasks to the model ..................................................................... 33

7.1 Adding objects to a task........................................................................................................................ 33
7.2 Removing objects from a task .............................................................................................................. 34
7.3 Copying objects to another task ........................................................................................................... 34
7.4 Linking a task to user-defined attributes ............................................................................................... 34
8 Importing and exporting tasks ............................................................... 37

8.1 Imported task information ..................................................................................................................... 37
8.2 Importing tasks ..................................................................................................................................... 37
8.3 Exporting tasks ..................................................................................................................................... 38
8.4 Importing task types.............................................................................................................................. 38
8.5 Exporting task types ............................................................................................................................. 39
9 Managing scenarios ................................................................................ 41

9.1 Creating a scenario............................................................................................................................... 41
9.2 Removing a scenario ............................................................................................................................ 42
10 Viewing tasks........................................................................................... 43
10.1 Highlighting a task ................................................................................................................................ 43
10.2 Viewing related tasks............................................................................................................................ 44
10.3 Viewing related model objects .............................................................................................................. 44
10.4 Viewing selected tasks ......................................................................................................................... 44
10.5 Filtering visible tasks............................................................................................................................. 45
10.6 Creating a view or selection filter for tasks ........................................................................................... 45
11 Customizing the calendar....................................................................... 47
11.1 Non-working time .................................................................................................................................. 47
11.2 Adding non-working time to the calendar.............................................................................................. 47
11.3 Removing non-working time from the calendar..................................................................................... 48
11.4 Importing a holiday file .......................................................................................................................... 48
11.5 Importing calendar information.............................................................................................................. 48
12 Visualizing project status ....................................................................... 51

12.1 Example: Creating object groups.......................................................................................................... 51
12.2 Example: Creating object representation settings................................................................................. 52
12.3 Example: Visualizing the task schedule ................................................................................................ 53
13 Printing task schedules .......................................................................... 55

13.1 Task information reports ....................................................................................................................... 55
13.2 Previewing a schedule before printing .................................................................................................. 55
13.3 Printing a schedule................................................................................................................................ 56
1 Introduction to Task
Manager
Task Manager is a tool for contractors, sub-contractors, and project managers. Task Manager
allows you to incorporate time-sensitive data into 3D Tekla Structures models and to control
the schedule at various stages and levels of detail throughout the project.
With Task Manager, you can create, store and manage scheduled tasks, and link the tasks to
their corresponding model objects. On the basis of the tasks, you can create customizable
model views and comprehensive 4D simulations of the progression of the project.
You can create tasks interactively or by importing tasks from external project management
tools such as Microsoft Office Project or Primavera P6. The import functionality allows you to
preserve any schedules that you have created outside the model environment, and thereby
maintain schedule intelligence and organization. You can supplement imported schedules with
more detail in Task Manager.
The above workflow matches what can be found in a normal project delivery – an increasing
awareness of activities that support higher level project objectives and milestones. Task
Manager gives you a logical storage space for this information, and helps you extend schedule
control into powerful 3D representations.
Introduction to Task Manager
Introduction to Task Manager
2 Installing and running Task
Manager
This section explains how to install and run Task Manager.
You can use all Task Manager functions in the Full and Construction
In other Tekla Structures configurations, you can view the created task
schedules and task information.
Contents • Installation (p. 9)

• Starting Task Manager (p. 9)
• Exiting Task Manager (p. 10)
2.1 Installation
Task Manager is delivered with your Tekla Structures product package. No special installation
is required.
2.2 Starting Task Manager

To start Task Manager:
1. Start Tekla Structures.
2. On the Tools menu, click Task Manager...
Installing and running Task Manager
2.3 Exiting Task Manager

To exit Task Manager, click the button in the upper right corner of the Task Manager
dialog box.
You do not need to save the tasks separately when exiting Task
Manager. When you save the model in Tekla Structures, the related tasks
are automatically saved with the model.
Installing and running Task Manager
3 Task Manager user
interface
This section introduces the Task Manager user interface and explains how to run commands in
Task Manager.
Contents • Task list (p. 11)

• Gantt chart (p. 11)
• How to run commands (p. 13)
3.1 Task list

The task list contains all the tasks included in the current Tekla Structures model and shows the
properties of each task. If the task list is not visible in Task Manager, click > Task List.
See also Modifying a task (p. 21)

Showing and hiding task list items (p. 15)
3.2 Gantt chart

The Gantt chart shows the timescale of the project. If the Gantt chart is not visible, click
> Gantt Chart.
Task Manager user interface
See also Gantt chart symbols (p. 12)
Modifying Gantt chart appearance (p. 16)
Gantt chart symbols

The following symbols are used in the Gantt chart:
Symbol Description More information

Task that is not linked to any Adding objects to a task (p.
model object. 33)
Planned start and end dates.
Actual start and end dates.
Completeness of the task.
Summary task. Summary tasks Creating a subtask (p. 20)

can contain other summary tasks
as subtasks.
Dependency between tasks. Task dependencies (p. 29)
Milestone. Defining general task

properties (p. 22)
Locked task. The task is marked as locked
in the task list.
3.3 How to run commands
To run a command in Task Manager, do one of the following:
• Click the appropriate icon. If the icon contains more than one command, click the icon
and then select a command from the pop-up menu that appears:
• In the task list or Gantt chart, select the task you want to modify; then right-click and
select a command from the pop-up menu.
See also Selecting multiple tasks in the task list (p. 27)
Selecting multiple tasks in the Gantt chart (p. 27)
4 Changing view settings
This section explains how to change some general view settings in Task Manager.
Contents • Enlarging icons (p. 15)

• Showing and hiding task list items (p. 15)
• Keeping Task Manager window on top (p. 16)
• Modifying Gantt chart appearance (p. 16)
• Modifying Gantt chart timescale (p. 16)
• Modifying Gantt chart colors (p. 17)
• Modifying the appearance of dates and months (p. 17)
4.1 Enlarging icons

You can enlarge the icons in Task Manager by using the Large Icons option.
To enlarge the icons, click > Large Icons.
4.2 Showing and hiding task list items

You can define which task list items are visible.
To show or hide task list items:
1. Click > Task List Items.

2. Click any of the task list items to show or hide them.
A check mark in front of the item indicates that the item is visible.
When you open Task Manager the next time, the selections you made in the previous Task
Manager session are in use.
Changing view settings
See also Task list (p. 11)
4.3 Keeping Task Manager window on top

You can have Task Manager always stay on top of other windows on the screen by using the
Stay On Top option.
To keep Task Manager on top of other windows, click > Stay On Top.
4.4 Modifying Gantt chart appearance

To modify the appearance of the Gantt chart:
1. Click > Gantt Chart Settings.

2. Click any of the options to switch them on or off. A check mark in front of the
option indicates that it is visible.
To Do this
Show or hide the name of the Click Contractors.
contractor assigned to the task
Show or hide non-working days Click Non-Working Days.
Show or hide the actual start and end Click Actual Dates.
dates
You must define the actual start and end dates in
the task list to be able to show them in the Gantt
chart.
Show or hide the planned start and end Click Planned Dates.
dates
See also Gantt chart (p. 11)

Gantt chart symbols (p. 12)
4.5 Modifying Gantt chart timescale

You can change the timescale in the Gantt chart and zoom to selected tasks.
To modify the timescale of the Gantt chart, do one of the following:
• Click and select the timescale setting. You have the following options:
• Days/Hours
• Weeks/Days
• Months/Weeks
• Quarters/Months
• Years/Quarters
• On the Gantt chart, hold down the right mouse button.
• To make the timescale wider, for example from weeks to months, drag the mouse to
the right.
• To make the timescale narrower, for example from weeks to days, drag the mouse to
the left.
To zoom to a task in the Gantt chart, select a task and press Ctrl + 1.
To zoom back to the whole scenario, press Ctrl + 2.
To place the Gantt chart symbol of the selected task in the middle of the
chart, press Ctrl + 3.

4.6 Modifying Gantt chart colors

You can change the colors of Gantt chart symbols for tasks linked to the model, tasks not
linked to the model, and actual dates.
To modify the colors of Gantt chart symbols:
1. Click > Set Colors....

2. Click the color you want to change.
3. Select a color in the Color dialog box.

4.7 Modifying the appearance of dates and months

Task Manager shows the dates and months as defined in the Windows regional and language
settings.
To change how dates and months are shown:
2. Click Control Panel.
3. Go to Regional and Language Options and select the format you want to use.
4. Click OK.
5. Restart Tekla Structures for the change to take effect.
See also Task list (p. 11)

Gantt chart (p. 11)
Modifying Gantt chart appearance (p. 16)
5 Creating and modifying
tasks
This section explains how to create, modify and remove tasks.
Contents • Creating a task (p. 19)

• Creating a subtask (p. 20)
• Defining a task type (p. 20)
• Defining a contractor (p. 21)
• Modifying a task (p. 21)
• Saving a task (p. 26)
• Removing a task (p. 26)
• Selecting multiple tasks in the task list (p. 27)
• Selecting multiple tasks in the Gantt chart (p. 27)
• Arranging tasks (p. 27)
5.1 Creating a task

Each new task must have at least a name and a planned timeline. You can also define other
properties such as a task type, a contractor responsible for the task, and the actual timeline for
completing the task, and link the task to model objects.
To create a new task, do one of the following:
• In Tekla Structures, select one or more model objects, then right-click and select Task >
Create Task from the pop-up menu.
The task is automatically linked to the selected model objects.
• In Task Manager, click .

You can now link the task to one or more model objects.
• In the Gantt chart, right-click and select Create task from the pop-up menu.
Creating and modifying tasks
If the task list already contains tasks, Task Manager uses the properties
of the selected task as a basis when creating new tasks.
If the newly created task is not shown in Task Manager, click anywhere
in the task list to update the view.
You can use Model Organizer when creating tasks. Select logical areas
and object types in Model Organizer. In Task Manager, select a task,
right-click and select Add selected objects.
You can use all Task Manager and Model Organizer functions only in
the Full and Construction Management configurations.

Adding objects to a task (p. 33)
Importing and exporting tasks (p. 37)
Selecting objects
5.2 Creating a subtask

To create a subtask:
1. In the task list, select the task under which you want to create a subtask.
2. Click .
5.3 Defining a task type

You can create new task types, and rename and remove existing task types. You can also define
a production rate for a task type and link the task type to user-defined attributes.
To define a task type:
1. Click > Task Types....

2. Click Add to add a new task type.
3. Enter a name for the task type.
To rename a task, select the task and click Rename. Then enter the new name.
4. Define a production rate for the task type.
a Select a unit.
b Define the quantity.
c Define the time.
5. Link the task type to the user-defined attributes for planned and actual dates.
6. Click Modify to apply the changes.
To remove a task type, select the task type and click Remove.
See also Linking a task to user-defined attributes (p. 34)

Defining a production rate for a task (p. 25)
Importing task types (p. 38)
Exporting task types (p. 39)
5.4 Defining a contractor

You can add new contractors, and rename and remove existing contractors.
To define a contractor:
1. Click > Contractors....

2. Click Add to add a new contractor.
3. Enter the name of the contractor.
To rename a contractor, select the contractor and click Rename. Then enter the new
name.
To remove a contractor, select the contractor and click Remove.
5.5 Modifying a task

To modify an existing task:
1. Select a task in the task list.
2. Right-click and select Task Information... to display the current properties of the task.
If you have selected multiple tasks, only the common basic properties are shown in the
dialog box. The properties that have different values are shown as <Not equal>.
3. Modify the task properties.
Alternatively, you can modify tasks directly in the task list.
To modify a task property, click the field to activate it and then enter a
new value. With some task properties you need to select the value from a
list.
To modify a date field, click the field. Click the down arrow and
select a date from the pop-up calendar that appears.
The gray fields in the task list cannot be modified. Task Manager selects
or clears these check boxes automatically depending on the task
properties.
See also Defining general task properties (p. 22)

Defining a task schedule (p. 22)
Managing individual objects in a task (p. 23)
Selecting multiple tasks in the task list (p. 27)
Defining general task properties

You can define general properties, such as a name, task type, dependency, and contractor for a
task.
To define general task properties:
2. Right-click and select Task Information....
3. Enter a name for the task.
4. Mark the task as a milestone task by selecting the check box.
Task Manager selects this check box automatically if you set the task duration to zero.
5. Define the dependency.
a Successor moved only forward moves the dependent task forward only when
the preceding task is moved forward. If the preceding task is moved to an earlier
date, the dependent task is not moved.
b Successor moved always when predecessor moved moves the dependent task
in the same direction as the preceding task, according to the dependency type and
possible lag time.
6. Select the task type.
7. Select the contractor.
See also Defining a task schedule (p. 22)

Tracking a task schedule (p. 25)
Task dependencies (p. 29)
Defining a task schedule

You can plan a schedule for a task. You can define both the start and the end date for the task,
or enter the start date and duration and allow Task Manager to calculate the end date. Task
workload shows the total workload and production rate of the task.
Before you define the planned schedule, make sure that you have defined the needed general
properties for the task.
To define a task schedule:
1. Select the task in the task list.
2. Right-click and select Task Information... > Scheduling.
3. Select the scheduling mode.
a Fixed start and end allows you to select both the planned start date and the
planned end date.
b Fixed start allows you to select the planned start date.
4. Define the planned start date.
5. Define the planned end date.
6. Optional: Define the planned length of the task.
You can define the planned length instead of the end date in the Fixed start and end
scheduling mode. Shift corresponds to working day, defined in > Non-working
Periods > Set working day.
7. Optional: Define the work duration in hours in the Fixed start mode.
You can also modify the duration of the task in the Gantt chart. Place the
mouse pointer over the edge of the task bar in the Gantt chart. The
mouse pointer changes into a double-ended arrow. Hold down the left
mouse button, and then drag the egde to the right or left.
To modify the start date of the whole project, click > Change
Project Start Date. Select a new date in the dialog box that opens. All
the start dates in the current scenario are changed.
See also Tracking a task schedule (p. 25)
Managing individual objects in a task

You can manage the planned dates, actual dates, and the duration of each object belonging to a
task.
Make sure that you have defined task types and linked them to user-
defined attributes for planned and actual dates.
To define planned and actual dates for individual objects in a task:

2. Right-click and select Task Information... > General.
3. Select a task type in the Task Type list.
4. Go to the Objects tab.
The objects belonging to the selected task are shown.
5. Select the date for an object in the Planned date or Actual date list.
You can define both the planned and actual date, or only either of them. The information
you define here is also shown when you open the properties of the object in Tekla
Structures.
If you have manually entered dates for objects, you can check that the dates are within
task dates. In Task Manager, click > Check Dates. Conflicting dates are shown in
red in the task list.
If you link an object to a user-defined attribute, you are recommended to

keep the object within one scenario. If the dates in a task change, the
user-defined attribute dates change as well. The changed dates are then
used in all the scenarios the object belongs to.
6. Optional: Define the actual or planned work duration for an object.

See also Defining the order of objects in a task (p. 24)

Defining a task type (p. 20)
Defining the order of objects in a task

You can define and save the order in which objects are stored in tasks.
To define the order of objects in a task:
2. Right-click and select Task Information... > Objects.
3. Define the order of objects belonging to the task in any of the following ways:
a Drag the objects in the list manually to the desired order.
The selected objects are highlighted in the list during the dragging.
b Click a column heading to sort the objects.
The order column shows the saved order of the objects.
c Select the objects in the list, click Select order from model, and in the model,
click the objects in the desired order.
You can use all of the above when defining the order within one task.
You can show the order information in the model. On the Objects tab,
select one or more objects and press Ctrl + D. The order information is
shown on the selected objects in the model. For example, 2-1 means the
object belongs to the second task in the task list and that it is the first
object in the task.
To clear the numbers from the model, right-click and select Update
Window.
When you define the cast-in-place work order or work groups within a
task, the Custom Inquiry tool is useful for planning the appropriate
quantities for each group or lot.
See also Managing individual objects in a task (p. 23)
Defining a production rate for a task
You can define a production rate for tasks. First, define a production rate for a task type and
then assign the task type to a task.
To define a production rate for a task:

2. Select a task type in the list.
If the task list is empty, click Add to enter a new task type.
3. Select a unit in the Unit column for calculating the production rate.
The default unit is PIECES.
4. Enter the quantity and time.
By default, quantity and time is units per one hour. However, you can set the time to be,
for example, the length of the working shift.
5. Click OK to close the Task Types dialog box.
6. In the task list, select the task type for the task.
7. Click the task list to show the rate in the Planned Production Rate column.
When you assign the task type for a task, the production rate is shown in the Planned
Production Rate column in the task list. It is also useful to show the overall quantity for a task,
for example the number of objects or the size of an area linked to the task. To do this, click
>Task List Items > Quantity.
To show the actual production rate in the task list, click > Task
List Items > Actual Production Rate.
If you change the duration of the task, the production rate is changed.
Also, if you change the production rate, the duration of the task is
changed.
See also Defining a task type (p. 20)
Tracking a task schedule

You can track how a task is progressing by defining the actual schedule and task completeness
information.
Make sure that you have defined the needed general information, planned schedule and object
information for the task.
To track a task schedule:
2. Right-click and select Task Information... > Tracking.
3. Select the tracking mode.
a Manual allows you to enter the actual start and end dates, and task completeness
information.
b Linked to objects shows the schedule and completeness information calculated
from the individual objects in the task. You do no need to define any information
on the Tracking tab.
4. Define the actual start date.
5. Define the actual end date.
6. Optional: Define the actual length of the task.
Defining the actual length affects the actual end date.
7. Define the completed workload.
8. Define the actual production rate.
9. Define the actual work duration.
See also Defining general task properties (p. 22)

Defining a task schedule (p. 22)
Defining additional information for a task

You can define additional information for a task, such as links to web pages, relevant
documents, project schedules, and contracts.
To define additional information for a task:
2. Right-click and select Task Information... > Additional Information.
3. Optional: Add a link to a document in the Documents field. Click the Add button, select
the link to be added, and click Open.
To remove a link, select it in the Documents field and click Remove.
4. Optional: Write additional notes in the Notes field.
5.6 Saving a task

Task Manager is part of the Tekla Structures product. When you save the model in Tekla
Structures, the related tasks are automatically saved with the model. You cannot save tasks
directly through the Task Manager user interface.
5.7 Removing a task

To remove a task:
3. Click Yes to confirm.
5.8 Selecting multiple tasks in the task list
To select multiple tasks at a time, do one of the following:
• Drag across the rows that you want to select.
• Click a single row, and then hold down the Ctrl key while you click other rows that you
want to select.
• Click the first row of the selection and then hold down the Shift key while you click the
last row of the selection.
See also Selecting multiple tasks in the Gantt chart (p. 27)
5.9 Selecting multiple tasks in the Gantt chart

To select multiple tasks at a time, do one of the following:
• Select an area in the Gantt chart.
• Select a time period in the Gantt chart by dragging the mouse on the header line.
The tasks within the selected area are highlighted in the task list.
Selecting an area in the Gantt chart or a time period in the Gantt chart
header line functions in the same way as selecting an area in a model.
5.10 Arranging tasks

There are several ways to arrange tasks in Task Manager. You can change the order and
hierarchy of tasks, and the sort order of columns. When you move a task, the related subtasks
are also moved to the new location.
To Do this
Change the order of tasks
Select a task and click or until the
task is in the desired location.
Place tasks in hierarchical order To make a summary task or change a subtask to a
task, select a task and click .
To make a subtask, select a task and click .
To Do this
Expand task hierarchies
Select a task and click . This expands the
hierarchies that are on the same level.
To expand the hierarchies of all tasks, hold down
the Ctrl key and click .

Collapse task hierarchies
Select a summary task and click . This
collapses the hierarchies that are on the same level.
To collapse the hierarchies of all tasks, hold down
the Ctrl key and click .

Change the sort order of tasks Click the column heading you want to sort by.
To reverse the sort order, click the column heading
again.
Save the sort order of tasks
Click and select Save Current Order.
Revert to the saved sort order of tasks
Click and select Return to Saved Order.
6 Managing task
dependencies
This section explains how to create dependencies between tasks.
Contents • Task dependencies (p. 29)

• Creating a dependency between tasks (p. 30)
• Modifying a dependency between tasks (p. 30)
• Removing a dependency between tasks (p. 31)
6.1 Task dependencies

A task can be dependent on another task or a milestone. For example, you can define that Task1
must be completed five days before Task2 can be started. Tasks can be dependent on one
another in four different ways:
• Finish-to-Start (FS): The preceding task must finish before the dependent task can start.
• Start-to-Start (SS): The preceding task must start before the dependent task can start.
• Finish-to-Finish (FF): The preceding task must finish before the dependent task can finish.
• Start-to-Finish (SF): The preceding task must start before the dependent task can finish.
The dependencies are represented by arrows in the Gantt chart. The arrow points to the start or
the end of the other task, depending on their relationship.
A predecessor is a task that must be completed before the dependent task. It is not possible to
create circular dependencies in Task Manager.
You can define whether the dependent task is always moved when the preceding task is moved
or whether the dependent task is only moved forward when the preceding task is moved
forward.
See also Creating a dependency between tasks (p. 30)

Modifying a dependency between tasks (p. 30)
Managing task dependencies
Removing a dependency between tasks (p. 31)
Defining general task properties (p. 22)
6.2 Creating a dependency between tasks

Use the Dependencies tab in the Task Information dialog box to create dependencies between
tasks. You can create dependencies only for one task at a time. If more than one task is
selected, the tab is not displayed.
To create a dependency between tasks:
2. Right-click and select Task Information... > Dependencies.
3. Select the preceding task from the Task Name list.
You cannot select the summary task of the current task, or a task that already has a
dependency with the current task.
4. Select a dependency type from the Type list. The options are:
• Finish-to-Start (FS): The preceding task must finish before the dependent task can
start.
• Start-to-Start (SS): The preceding task must start before the dependent task can
start.
• Finish-to-Finish (FF): The preceding task must finish before the dependent task can
finish.
• Start-to-Finish (SF): The preceding task must start before the dependent task can
finish.
5. Optional: To add a delay between the tasks, enter a value in the Lag list.
Define the value on a scale of 1 to 100. The time unit of the delay is always Days.
6. Go to the General tab.
7. Define in General properties > Dependency the direction the dependent task is moved
to when the preceding task is moved.
8. Click OK to save.
Alternatively, drag a task bar onto another task bar in the Gantt chart to
create a basic Finish-to-Start dependency with no lag time.
See also Task dependencies (p. 29)
6.3 Modifying a dependency between tasks

Use either the Dependencies tab in the Task Information dialog box or right-click a
dependency in the Gantt chart to modify a dependency. You can modify the dependency only
for one task at a time. If more than one task is selected, the Dependencies tab is not displayed.
To modify a dependency using the Task Information dialog box:
3. Select the preceding task from the Task Name list.
4. Select the dependency type from the Type list.
5. Optional: To change the delay between the tasks, enter a new value (days) in the Lag
list.
7. Optional: Go to the General tab, General properties > Dependency to define the
direction the dependent task is moved to when the preceding task is moved.
or
To modify a dependency in the Gantt chart:
1. In the Gantt chart, right-click a dependency.
2. Modify a dependency in the Gantt chart.
3. In the pop-up menu that appears, select the dependency type.
4. Optional: Change the lag value (days) and press the Enter key.
The changed dependency is immediately visible in the Gantt chart.
6.4 Removing a dependency between tasks

Use either the Dependencies tab in the Task Information dialog box or right-click a
dependency in the Gantt chart to remove a dependency.
To remove a dependency using the Task Information dialog box:
3. Select the task and click Remove.
or
To remove a dependency in the Gantt chart:
1. In the Gantt chart, right-click a dependency.
2. In the pop-up menu that appears, select Delete.
7 Linking tasks to the model
This section explains how to link a task to one or more model objects. It also explains how to
remove existing objects from the task.
Contents • Adding objects to a task (p. 33)

• Removing objects from a task (p. 34)
• Copying objects to another task (p. 34)
• Linking a task to user-defined attributes (p. 34)
7.1 Adding objects to a task

To add objects to a task:
2. In Tekla Structures, select the objects you want to add.
• In Tekla Structures, right-click and select Task > Add to Selected Task from the
pop-up menu.
• In Task Manager, click > Add Selected Objects.

• In Task Manager, right-click the selected task and click Add Selected Objects.
4. Click the view in Tekla Structures and then click the task again in Task Manager to
verify that the objects were successfully added.
As a result, Task Manager changes the color of the task bar in the Gantt chart and selects the
Task linked to model check box.
See also Removing objects from a task (p. 34)

Copying objects to another task (p. 34)
Linking tasks to the model
7.2 Removing objects from a task
To remove the selected objects from a task:
2. Optional: In Tekla Structures, select the objects you want to remove.
If you do not select any model objects, all objects are removed from the task.
• In Tekla Structures, right-click and select Task > Remove from Selected Task
• In Task Manager, click > Remove Selected Objects.

• In Task Manager, right-click the selected task and click Remove Selected Objects.
• In Task Manager, right-click the selected task and select Task Information... >
Objects. Select the objects you want to remove and press the Delete key.
4. Click the view in Tekla Structures and then click the task again in Task Manager to
verify that the objects were successfully removed.
See also Adding objects to a task (p. 33)

Copying objects to another task (p. 34)
7.3 Copying objects to another task

You can copy objects from one task to another in Task Manager. If you want to move objects
completely from one task to another, you must manually remove the objects from the original
task after copying.
To copy objects to another task:
2. Click > Keep Selection.

All objects linked to the task stay selected.
3. Select the task you want to copy the objects to.
4. Click > Add Selected Objects.
See also Adding objects to a task (p. 33)

Removing objects from a task (p. 34)
7.4 Linking a task to user-defined attributes

You can connect higher-level schedules to lower-level schedules with user-defined attributes.
To do this, link user-defined attributes to a task type to define planned and actual dates. Then
assign the task type to a task.
When you modify the schedule of a task in Task Manager, the value of the related user-defined
attribute is automatically changed.
To link a task to user-defined attributes:
2. Select the user-defined attribute from the list for each task type.
See also Defining a task type (p. 20)

Adding properties
8 Importing and exporting
tasks
This section explains how to import and export information between Task Manager and
external project management software.
Contents • Imported task information (p. 37)

• Importing tasks (p. 37)
• Exporting tasks (p. 38)
• Importing task types (p. 38)
• Exporting task types (p. 39)
8.1 Imported task information

You can import general building schedules from external project management software, for
example Microsoft Office Project, and then make them more specific using Task Manager.
By default, scheduled dates are imported to Task Manager as planned

dates. To import baseline dates to planned dates, you need to select this
option in the Import Tasks dialog box.
See also Importing tasks (p. 37)

Exporting tasks (p. 38)
8.2 Importing tasks

You can import tasks to Task Manager from external project management software.
To import tasks:
1. Click > Import....
Importing and exporting tasks
2. Click Browse... to locate the file to import.
3. In the Open dialog box, browse for the import file (.xml), and then click Open.
4. Define the import options:
a Append imported tasks to scenario adds the imported tasks at the end of the
task list.
b Override existing tasks replaces the existing tasks with the imported tasks.
c Override selected properties of existing tasks imports certain task properties.
When you select this option, a list where you can select the properties is
displayed.
5. Click OK.
Imported tasks are marked as imported and locked in Task Manager to make it easier to see
what has changed.
Dependencies between tasks are imported and exported.

The links between Task Manager and the model are imported and
exported.
See also Imported task information (p. 37)
8.3 Exporting tasks

If the tasks contain only planned dates, they are exported as scheduled dates. If the tasks
contain planned dates and actual dates, the planned dates are exported as baseline dates and the
actual dates as scheduled dates.
To export tasks:
1. Click > Export...

2. In the Save As dialog box, browse for the export file and select it.
3. Click Save.
8.4 Importing task types

In addition to importing tasks, you can import task types to Task Manager.
To import task types:
2. Click >Task Types....

3. Click Import....
4. In the Import task types dialog box, browse for the import file, and then click Open.
5. Select the import option:
a Override task types using the same name replaces the existing task types that
have the same task type name as the imported task types.
b Append imported task types adds the imported task types at the end of the task
type list.
8.5 Exporting task types

You can export task types from Task Manager to external project management software.
To export task types:

3. Click Export....
4. In the Save As dialog box, browse for the export file and select it, or enter a file name in
the File name field.
5. Click Save.
9 Managing scenarios
Contents This section explains how to create and remove scenarios in Task Manager.
• Creating a scenario (p. 41)
• Removing a scenario (p. 42)
9.1 Creating a scenario

You can create different task scenarios for your purposes, for example, design, fabrication and
erection schedules to help in project planning. You can also create separate weekly scenarios,
for example, for easier project follow-up.
To create a scenario:
1. Click .
2. Click Add and enter a name for the new scenario.
3. Click Open to modify the new scenario.
The new scenario is created based on the existing scenario that you had selected in the
Scenario list.
To move between the different scenarios, click , select the scenario

you want to view or modify, and click Open.
If you link an object to a user-defined attribute, you are recommended to

keep the object within one scenario. If the dates in a task change, the
user-defined attribute dates change as well. The changed dates are then
used in all the scenarios the object belongs to.
See also Removing a scenario (p. 42)

Managing scenarios
9.2 Removing a scenario
To remove a scenario:
1. Click .
2. Select the scenario you want to remove.
4. In the dialog box that opens, click Yes to confirm.
See also Creating a scenario (p. 41)
Managing scenarios
10 Viewing tasks
This section explains the different methods you can use to view, highlight, and filter tasks.
Contents • Highlighting a task (p. 43)

• Viewing related tasks (p. 44)
• Viewing related model objects (p. 44)
• Viewing selected tasks (p. 44)
• Filtering visible tasks (p. 45)
• Creating a view or selection filter for tasks (p. 45)
10.1 Highlighting a task

Tekla Structures contains a selection switch that can be used for highlighting tasks in the
model. When you place the mouser pointer over a model object that belongs to a task, Tekla
Structures highlights the task and the related subtasks. The green box shows the boundaries of
the task.
To highlight a task in the model:
Viewing tasks
1. In Tekla Structures, click to activate the Select Tasks switch.
2. Place the mouse pointer over a model object. If the object belongs to a task, Tekla
Structures highlights the task.
See also Viewing related tasks (p. 44)

Viewing related model objects (p. 44)
Creating a view or selection filter for tasks (p. 45)
10.2 Viewing related tasks

The Show Related Task command selects all the tasks the model object belongs to in the task
list. The tasks are highlighted but not selected in the model.
To view the related tasks:
1. Ensure that the Select Tasks switch is not active.
2. Select a model object.
3. Right-click and select Task > Show Related Task from the pop-up menu.
Task Manager highlights all the tasks the object belongs to in the task list.
See also Highlighting a task (p. 43)

Viewing related model objects (p. 44)
10.3 Viewing related model objects

You can view the model objects related to a certain task by using the Remove Other
Selections command. The command highlights the model objects that belong to the task
selected in the task list. All other model objects are removed from the selection, even if they
were previously selected.
To view related model objects:
2. Click > Remove Other Selections.
See also Highlighting a task (p. 43)

Viewing related tasks (p. 44)
10.4 Viewing selected tasks

You can define that only the selected tasks are shown in the task list.
To show only the selected tasks in the task list:
1. Select a task in the task list. You can also select multiple tasks.
Viewing tasks
2. Click to show only the selected tasks.
3. Click to show all tasks again.
See also Filtering visible tasks (p. 45)
10.5 Filtering visible tasks

You can filter tasks in Task Manager by status, contractor, task type, and start and end dates.
The filter you select determines which tasks are visible in the task list.
To filter tasks:
1. Click .
2. Select the filters you want to use.
3. Click Filter.
4. Click Show all to show all tasks.
You can also filter the task list by using the search field. To start the
search, enter two characters in the search field. The search covers all
visible fields in the task list.
10.6 Creating a view or selection filter for tasks

You can use the filtering functionality available in Tekla Structures to create view and selection
filters for tasks. The filters are based on the object group functionality. The filters you create
determine which objects are shown in the model and which objects can be selected.
Example
Only the tasks in the current scenario in Task Manager are used for
filtering.
To create a selection filter for tasks that have a start date and a task type:
1. In Tekla Structures, click Edit > Selection Filter....
2. Click Add row.
3. Enter the planned start date, for example 15.01.2009.
4. Enter the task type, for example Fabrication.
5. Enter the filter name next to the Save as button, then click Save as.
See also Creating a view filter

Creating a selection filter
Object groups
Viewing tasks
Viewing tasks
11 Customizing the calendar
This section explains how to customize the Task Manager calendar by adding non-working
time such as vacations and public holidays.
Contents • Non-working time (p. 47)

• Adding non-working time to the calendar (p. 47)
• Removing non-working time from the calendar (p. 48)
• Importing a holiday file (p. 48)
• Importing calendar information (p. 48)
11.1 Non-working time

You can define non-working time, such as vacations and public holidays, in the Non-working
Periods dialog box. Non-working time is taken into account when calculating task length in
Task Manager. Weekends are non-working days by default. You can also define recurring non-
working days.
When you add or modify a non-working day, the task duration (Planned
End Date or Actual End Date) is not automatically changed. This means
that the workload of a task may change because of the non-working
days.
See also Adding non-working time to the calendar (p. 47)

Removing non-working time from the calendar (p. 48)
Importing a holiday file (p. 48)
11.2 Adding non-working time to the calendar

You can add non-working time to Task Manager calendar.
Customizing the calendar
To add non-working time:
1. Click > Non-working Periods....

2. Click Add...
3. Enter a descriptive name for the non-working time.
4. Enter the day of the week.
5. Enter the start date and the end date.
6. Set the recurrence frequency. You have the following options: Non-recurring, Weekly,
and Yearly.
7. If the non-working time is recurring, set the recurrence range.
8. Click OK.
See also Removing non-working time from the calendar (p. 48)
Importing a holiday file (p. 48)
11.3 Removing non-working time from the calendar

You can remove non-working time from Task Manager’s calendar.
To remove non-working time:

2. Select an item from the list.
3. Click Remove.
See also Adding non-working time to the calendar (p. 47)
11.4 Importing a holiday file

You can import holiday files (.hol) from Microsoft Outlook.
To import an Outlook holiday file:

2. Click Import Holidays....
3. Browse for the holiday file.
4. Select your country from the list.
5. Click OK.
See also Non-working time (p. 47)

Removing non-working time from the calendar (p. 48)
11.5 Importing calendar information

You can import a calendar to Task Manager, for example, from Microsoft Project.
To import calendar information from Microsoft Project:
1. Click > Import... .
2. Click Browse to locate the file to import.
3. In the Open dialog box, browse for the import file, and then click Open.
4. Select the Import calendar check box.
The imported calendar information will overwrite the existing calendar information.
5. Click OK.
See also Importing tasks (p. 37)
12 Visualizing project status
This section explains how to visualize task schedules using the project status visualization tool
available in Tekla Structures.
In the following example, you will first create object groups to define which tasks are shown in
the model. After that you will create object representation settings to define how the tasks are
shown in the model. Finally, you will visualize the task schedule using the project status
visualization tool.
Contents • Example: Creating object groups (p. 51)

• Example: Creating object representation settings (p. 52)
• Example: Visualizing the task schedule (p. 53)
12.1 Example: Creating object groups

In this example, you will create object groups to define which tasks are shown in the model.
The object groups created here are related to the Task Manager scenario currently in use.
To create object groups:
1. In Tekla Structures, click View > Representation > Object representation....
2. Click Object group....
3. In the Object group - Representation dialog box, create an object group with the
following settings:
4. Enter a name for the group, for example Completed. Enter the name in the field next
to the Save as button, and then click Save as.
5. Repeat steps 3 - 4 to create an object group called Started. Use the following
settings:
6. Repeat steps 3 - 4 to create an object group called NotStarted. Use the following
settings:
7. Repeat steps 3 - 4 to create an object group called All. Use the following settings:
8. When you have created all the required object groups, click Close.
See also Example: Creating object representation settings (p. 52)

Example: Visualizing the task schedule (p. 53)
Object groups
12.2 Example: Creating object representation settings

In this example, you will create object representation settings to define how the tasks are shown
in the model.
1. In Tekla Structures, click View > Representation > Object representation....
2. In the Object Representation dialog box, click Add row to add a new row.
3. In the Object group column, select the object group Completed from the list.
4. In the Color column, select a color for the object group, for example White.
5. In the Transparency column, select a transparency setting for the object group, for
example Visible.
6. Repeat steps 2 - 5 to define the color and transparency settings for the other object
groups (Started, NotStarted, and All).
For example, you can use the following settings:
7. Enter a name for the object representation settings, for example Tasks, and then click
Save as.
See also Example: Creating object groups (p. 51)

Example: Visualizing the task schedule (p. 53)
Object representation settings
12.3 Example: Visualizing the task schedule
In this example, you will visualize the task schedule using the Project Status Visualization
tool.
To visualize the task schedule:
1. In Tekla Structures, click Tools > Project Status Visualization....
2. Select Tasks from the Object representation list.
3. Click the step buttons to change the Review date and to view the changes in the model.
See also Example: Creating object groups (p. 51)

Example: Creating object representation settings (p. 52)
13 Printing task schedules
This section explains how to create reports from task information and how to print task
schedules that include both the task list and the Gantt chart.
Contents • Task information reports (p. 55)

• Previewing a schedule before printing (p. 55)
• Printing a schedule (p. 56)
13.1 Task information reports

You can create reports from the task information in Task Manager and list various details about
the tasks, such as task name, task type, planned and actual start and end dates, and task
completeness.
When you create a report, you can use the existing Task Manager template in the report
template list in Drawings & Reports > Create Report.... You can customize the report for your
needs by modifying the existing template or creating a new template in Template Editor.
See also Creating a report

Viewing a report
Creating a template
13.2 Previewing a schedule before printing

You can use the Print Preview command to see what a task schedule will look like when it is
printed.
To preview a schedule:
1. Click > Print Preview....

2. Do any of the following:
Printing task schedules
To Do this
Select how many pages to view at a Click one of the Page Layout buttons:
time
If the task list is very long, it is spread out on several

pages.
Zoom the page in or out
Click .
Print the current page
Click .
Return to Task Manager
Click .
See also Printing a schedule (p. 56)
13.3 Printing a schedule

You can print a schedule from Task Manager.
To print a task schedule:
1. Click .
2. Optional: Click Page Setup to modify the page settings.
3. Optional: Select Print to the project end date to print the whole schedule.
4. Optional: Adjust the page size or fit the print to a page.
5. Click Print to print the schedule.
6. Modify the printer settings if needed.
7. Click Print.
Printing starts from the first date visible in the Gantt chart and ends to
the last date visible in the Gantt chart. Selecting Print to the project end
date prints the whole schedule even if the end date is not visible.
See also Previewing a schedule before printing (p. 55)
Printing task schedules
Index
a dependencies ...............................................................31
dependencies between tasks ................................ 29, 30
actual schedule ............................................................ 25

adding
e
days to calendar.................................................... 47
objects................................................................... 33 enlarging icons .............................................................15
additional information ................................................... 26 exiting Task Manager ...................................................10
adjusting summary tasks.............................................. 20 expand..........................................................................27
alternative scenarios .................................................... 41 exporting
arranging tasks............................................................. 27 task types ..............................................................39
exporting tasks ...................................................... 37, 38
c
f
calendar..................................................................47, 48
customizing ........................................................... 47 filtering
importing ............................................................... 48 tasks ......................................................................43
Task Manager ....................................................... 47 filtering tasks.................................................................45
changing colors
Gantt chart ............................................................ 17
changing view settings ................................................. 15 g
collapse ........................................................................ 27
commands.................................................................... 13
Gantt chart....................................................................11
Task Manager ....................................................... 11
changing................................................................17
contractors.................................................................... 21
colors.....................................................................17
copying objects
showing and hiding items ......................................16
task........................................................................ 34
symbols .................................................................12
creating
timescale ...............................................................16
tasks...................................................................... 19
creating reports ............................................................ 55
task information..................................................... 55
customizing calendar.................................................... 47
h
d hiding
Gantt chart items ...................................................16
task list items.........................................................15
hierarchy of tasks .........................................................27
date fields ..................................................................... 21
highlighting tasks ..........................................................43
defining order ............................................................... 24
holiday files...................................................................48
defining task properties ................................................ 22
defining task schedule
planned end date .................................................. 22
planned start date ................................................. 22
i non-working time....................................... 16, 37, 47, 48
importing
o
calendar.................................................................48
holiday files............................................................48 object groups
non-working time ...................................................37 tasks ......................................................................51
schedules ..............................................................37 object representation settings
task types ..............................................................38 tasks ......................................................................52
tasks ................................................................. 7, 37 order of objects
importing tasks..............................................................37 task ........................................................................24
indentation ....................................................................27 organizing tasks ............................................................27
installing
Task Manager..........................................................9
installing Task Manager..................................................9 p
l predecessors ................................................................29
printing schedules .................................................. 55, 56
printing task schedules .................................................55
lag time .........................................................................30 printing tasks.................................................................55
language settings..........................................................17 production rate ..............................................................20
linking task ........................................................................25
model objects to task.............................................33 project status visualization ............................................53
tasks ......................................................................34
user-defined attributes...........................................34
r
m regional settings............................................................17
removing
managing dates dependencies ........................................................31
actual dates ...........................................................23 non-working days...................................................48
planned dates ........................................................23 objects ...................................................................34
work duration .........................................................23 scenarios ...............................................................42
managing hours ............................................................23 tasks ......................................................................26
managing individual objects..........................................23 unrelated objects ...................................................44
model objects reports
adding....................................................................33 creating ..................................................................55
linking to task.........................................................33 tasks ......................................................................55
task ........................................................................33
modifying
appearance of dates and months ..........................17 s
date fields ..............................................................21
dependencies ........................................................30
saving tasks ..................................................................26
task properties .......................................................21
scenarios................................................................ 41, 42
tasks ......................................................................19
tasks ......................................................................41
modifying timescale ......................................................16
schedules........................................................................7
exporting ................................................................38
n importing ................................................................37
previewing..............................................................55
printing ............................................................ 55, 56
non-working days..........................................................48 visualizing ..............................................................53
searching tasks ............................................................ 45 tasks ...............................................................................7
selecting arranging ...............................................................27
commands............................................................. 13 changing the order ................................................27
task........................................................................ 27 creating..................................................................19
tasks...................................................................... 27 dependencies ................................................. 29, 30
selection switch ......................................................43, 44 exporting......................................................... 37, 38
showing filtering............................................................ 43, 45
tasks...................................................................... 44 hierarchy................................................................27
sort order ...................................................................... 27 highlighting ............................................................43
starting Task Manager.................................................... 9 importing................................................................37
subtasks ....................................................................... 20 linking to model object.................................... 19, 33
symbols ........................................................................ 12 modifying ...............................................................19
modifying the properties ........................................21
t object groups.........................................................51
object representation.............................................52
organizing..............................................................27
task previewing .............................................................55
copying objects ..................................................... 34 printing............................................................ 55, 56
duration ................................................................. 25 removing................................................................26
production rate ...................................................... 25 saving ....................................................................26
removing objects ................................................... 34 searching...............................................................45
selecting ................................................................ 27 selecting ................................................................27
task completeness........................................................ 25 showing .................................................................44
task dependencies ....................................................... 29 sort order ...............................................................27
task information ............................................................ 26 subtasks ................................................................20
reports ................................................................... 55 viewing ........................................................... 43, 44
task list ......................................................................... 11 viewing related tasks .............................................44
hiding items ........................................................... 15 visualizing..............................................................53
showing items ....................................................... 15 workload ................................................................47
Task Manager timescale ............................................................... 11, 16
commands............................................................. 11 Gantt chart.............................................................16
installing .................................................................. 9 tracking task schedule ..................................................25
view settings.......................................................... 15
task properties.............................................................. 22
task scenarios .............................................................. 41
u
task schedule
defining schedule .................................................. 22 user-defined attributes........................................... 20, 34
tracking schedule .................................................. 25
vizualising.............................................................. 51
task types ..................................................................... 20 v
exporting ............................................................... 39
importing ............................................................... 38 view settings
large icons .............................................................15
stay on top.............................................................16
Task Manager .......................................................15
viewing
related model objects ............................................44
related tasks ..........................................................44
selected tasks........................................................44
tasks ............................................................... 43, 44
visualizing project status...............................................53
vizualising schedule......................................................51
vizualizing project status
Task Manager........................................................51 w
workload........................................................................47
Tekla Structures
Engineering
Modeling
Training Manual
January 2011

reserved.
Contents
Introduction 1
LESSON 1 3
2 Reference models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.1 Inserting a reference model .................................................................................................................... 4
2.2 Hiding a reference model........................................................................................................................ 5
2.3 Updating a reference model ................................................................................................................... 5
2.4 Detecting changes in reference models ................................................................................................. 6
Example ............................................................................................................................................. 7
2.5 Handling large reference models............................................................................................................ 9
4 Saving a model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.1 Saving a model with a different name................................................................................................... 11
5 Opening a model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
5.1 Model created in a previous version ..................................................................................................... 13
6 Moving around in the view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
6.1 Zooming................................................................................................................................................ 13
6.2 Panning................................................................................................................................................. 14
6.3 Rotating ................................................................................................................................................ 14
7 Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
7.1 View properties ..................................................................................................................................... 14
7.2 Display .................................................................................................................................................. 16
Rollover highlight .............................................................................................................................. 22
8 Common buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
LESSON 2 25
9 Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
9.1 Creating a grid ....................................................................................................................................... 26
9.2 Creating a second grid .......................................................................................................................... 27
9.3 Creating a grid on a shifted work plane ................................................................................................. 28
10 Work area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
LESSON 3 33
12 Steel parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
12.1 Creating a steel column......................................................................................................................... 34
12.2 Creating a steel beam ........................................................................................................................... 34
12.3 Creating a curved steel beam................................................................................................................ 35
12.4 Creating a steel polybeam..................................................................................................................... 35
12.5 Creating an orthogonal steel beam ....................................................................................................... 36
12.6 Creating a steel twin profile ................................................................................................................... 36
12.7 Creating a steel contour plate................................................................................................................ 36
Setting the contour plate orientation ................................................................................................. 37
Adding a corner to a contour plate.................................................................................................... 38
Removing a corner from a contour plate........................................................................................... 39
13 Snapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
13.1 Snap switches ....................................................................................................................................... 40
14 Mini Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
15 Part properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
15.1 Attributes tab ......................................................................................................................................... 47
15.2 Position tab............................................................................................................................................ 48
15.3 Modifying part properties....................................................................................................................... 49
16.1 Hiding selected parts............................................................................................................................. 51
16.2 Hiding unselected parts......................................................................................................................... 51
17.1 Moving start and end points.................................................................................................................. 53
Extending and shortening parts........................................................................................................ 54
17.2 Creating curved parts............................................................................................................................ 55
18 Corner chamfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
20 Concrete parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
20.1 Creating a concrete column .................................................................................................................. 63
20.2 Creating a concrete beam..................................................................................................................... 64
20.3 Creating a concrete pad footing............................................................................................................ 64
20.4 Creating a concrete strip footing ........................................................................................................... 64
20.5 Creating a concrete panel..................................................................................................................... 65
20.6 Creating a concrete slab ....................................................................................................................... 65
20.7 Creating a concrete polybeam .............................................................................................................. 65
LESSON 4 67
21.1 Copying................................................................................................................................................. 69
21.8 Moving................................................................................................................................................... 74
21.9 Moving linearly ...................................................................................................................................... 75
21.10 Moving and rotating ............................................................................................................................... 75
21.11 Moving and mirroring............................................................................................................................. 76
21.12 Moving to another plane ........................................................................................................................ 76
21.13 Moving to another object ....................................................................................................................... 77
22.1 Fittings ................................................................................................................................................... 77
Creating a fitting................................................................................................................................ 77
22.2 Cutting parts with a line ......................................................................................................................... 78
22.3 Cutting parts with another part .............................................................................................................. 79
Errors in part cuts.............................................................................................................................. 79
22.4 Cutting parts with a polygon .................................................................................................................. 80
22.5 Surface treatment .................................................................................................................................. 81
Adding surface treatment to a selected area .................................................................................... 81
23 Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
23.1 Bolt properties ....................................................................................................................................... 82
Holes................................................................................................................................................. 84
24.1 Splitting parts......................................................................................................................................... 88
24.2 Combining parts .................................................................................................................................... 89
25 Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
LESSON 5 91
26 Modifying the work area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
26.4 Finding distant objects........................................................................................................................... 93
26.5 Finding distant points............................................................................................................................. 94
26.6 Finding distant reference models .......................................................................................................... 94
27 Clip planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
27.1 Creating a clip plane ............................................................................................................................. 95
27.2 Moving a clip plane ............................................................................................................................... 96
27.3 Deleting a clip plane.............................................................................................................................. 97
28 Work plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
28.1 Set work plane parallel to a plane......................................................................................................... 98
28.2 Set work plane using three points......................................................................................................... 99
28.3 Set work plane parallel to view plane.................................................................................................... 99
28.4 Set work plane to top plane of a part .................................................................................................... 99
LESSON 6 111
31 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
31.1 Creating a component......................................................................................................................... 114
31.2 Component status............................................................................................................................... 114
31.4 Saving component properties ............................................................................................................. 115
31.5 Conceptual components ..................................................................................................................... 115
Converting a conceptual component to a detailed component ...................................................... 115
31.6 Example .............................................................................................................................................. 116
Creating a base plate detail............................................................................................................ 116
Modifying the base plate detail....................................................................................................... 116
33 Material catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
33.1 Adding a material grade...................................................................................................................... 119
33.2 Deleting a material grade.................................................................................................................... 120
34 Profile catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
34.1 Adding a profile.................................................................................................................................... 122
LESSON 7 125
Inquiring bolts.................................................................................................................................. 131
40.1 Creating object representation settings ............................................................................................... 132
40.2 Defining your own colors to model object groups................................................................................ 133
41 Phase Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
41.1 Dividing the model into phases............................................................................................................ 136
LESSON 8 139
42 Custom components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
42.1 Custom component types.................................................................................................................... 140
42.2 Exploding a component ....................................................................................................................... 141
42.3 Defining a custom component ............................................................................................................. 141
42.4 Exporting and importing....................................................................................................................... 142
43.1 Running a macro ................................................................................................................................. 143
43.2 Editing a macro.................................................................................................................................... 143
44 WebViewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
44.1 Publishing a model as a web page...................................................................................................... 144
45 Tekla Structures Model Reviewer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
LESSON 9 147
46 Reinforcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
46.1 Reinforcing bar group.......................................................................................................................... 148
Reinforcing bar group types ........................................................................................................... 148
Creating a reinforcing bar group..................................................................................................... 149
Distribution area ............................................................................................................................. 149
Distribution of bars ......................................................................................................................... 150
46.2 Reinforcing bar.................................................................................................................................... 152
Creating a reinforcing bar............................................................................................................... 152
Defining a hook for a reinforcing bar .............................................................................................. 154
Defining the reinforcing bar cover thickness .................................................................................. 155
Modifying reinforcing bars .............................................................................................................. 156
46.3 Curved reinforcing bar group .............................................................................................................. 157
46.4 Creating a circular reinforcing bar group............................................................................................. 158
46.5 Creating a reinforcement mesh........................................................................................................... 159
46.6 Creating a reinforcement strand pattern ............................................................................................. 160
46.7 Reinforcement strand example ........................................................................................................... 162
Creating a point array..................................................................................................................... 162
Creating a reinforcement strand for a beam................................................................................... 163
46.8 Creating a reinforcement splice .......................................................................................................... 165
46.9 Attaching reinforcing bars to another part........................................................................................... 166
47 Custom reinforcement component example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
47.1 Creating a reinforcement for a column................................................................................................ 167
47.2 Defining a custom reinforcement component...................................................................................... 171
48 Reinforcement tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
49 Reinforcement components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
49.1 Adding a reinforcement component .................................................................................................... 173
49.2 Reinforcement component examples.................................................................................................. 173
50 Windbracing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
50.1 Windbracing in a front plane ............................................................................................................... 178
50.2 Windbracing in a straight roof plane.................................................................................................... 179
50.3 Windbracing in a sloping roof plane.................................................................................................... 180
Moving the work plane parallel to the roof plane ........................................................................... 181
Creating a view parallel to the sloping roof plane........................................................................... 181
Creating a windbracing using the roof plane view .......................................................................... 181
Creating a windbracing without using the roof plane view .............................................................. 182
50.4 Shortening a windbracing .................................................................................................................... 182
Checking a windbracing.................................................................................................................. 184
50.5 Shortening examples........................................................................................................................... 184
50.6 Windbracing examples ........................................................................................................................ 185
LESSON 10 187
51 Component examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
51.1 Steel components................................................................................................................................ 188
End plate (144) ............................................................................................................................... 188
Two-sided end plate (142) .............................................................................................................. 189
Stiffened end plate (27)................................................................................................................... 189
Partial stiff end plate (65) ................................................................................................................ 190
Bolted gusset (11)........................................................................................................................... 190
Central gusset (169) ....................................................................................................................... 191
Seating (39) .................................................................................................................................... 192
Cranked beam (41)......................................................................................................................... 192
Haunch (40) .................................................................................................................................... 193
Joining plates (14)........................................................................................................................... 193
Stub (28) ......................................................................................................................................... 193
Base plate (1004)............................................................................................................................ 194
Stiffened base plate (1014)............................................................................................................. 194
Stiffeners (1003) ............................................................................................................................. 195
Stub (1011) ..................................................................................................................................... 195
End plate detail (1002).................................................................................................................... 196
Stanchion weld (85) ........................................................................................................................ 196
Round tube (23).............................................................................................................................. 196
Manlock column (1032)................................................................................................................... 197
Manlock beam (1033) ..................................................................................................................... 197
Array of objects (29)........................................................................................................................ 197
LESSON 11 201
52.5 Saving favorite Help topics.................................................................................................................. 204
Introduction
management.
Tekla helps all new Tekla Structures users to get started and to maintain their development. Our
well-defined training course is a jump start to Tekla Structures software and helps to maximize
using Tekla Structures to its full potential. During the basic training course, you will be taught
the basic principles of Tekla Structures. Each training day contains several exercises so you
will learn to apply what you have learned in theory. The instructor will show the correct
indicated.

Spanish, Russian,
Japanese, Chinese
Drawings
Precast Concrete
Detailing, Modeling
Precast Concrete
Detailing, Drawings
Construction
Management
Detailing, Modeling
Detailing, Drawings
Spanish, Russian,
format
instructions
to Tekla Structures
instructions
instructions
Extranet:
Italian, Russian,
& videos
Italian, Russian,
Extranet:
Japanese, Chinese
& videos
topnewfeatures
tutorials
& videos
material Questions
Glossary
Glossary
Discussion Forum
German, Japanese,
Product
Chinese
LESSON 1
> LESSON 1
2 Reference models
model is created in Tekla Structures or another software or modeling tool and imported to Tekla
Structures.
• AutoCAD (*.dxf)
• AutoCAD (*.dwg)
You can snap to reference model geometry. Tekla Structures loads the reference model from the
file each time you open your model. It does not save the reference model when you save the


Reference models
LESSON 1
4. Click OK.


Reference models
You can update the reference models in your Tekla Structures model if there have been changes
in the original reference models after you have imported them to Tekla Structures.
LESSON 1
4. Click Modify.
dialog box.

file formats:
Reference models
• IFC (.ifc)
• Cadmatic (.3dd)
LESSON 1
• DWG (.dwg)
name box.
Example
The old file: Reference models
LESSON 1
The new file:
Reference models
LESSON 1
model.


New....

LESSON 1


5. Click OK.
LESSON 1
4 Saving a model

General.

Saving a model
LESSON 1
folder.
5 Opening a model
To open a model:



folders.

Opening a model

LESSON 1


Structures version.

some of them.
6.1 Zooming
LESSON 1
6.2 Panning
6.3 Rotating
7 Views
create views
7.1 View properties

box opens.
LESSON 1
Views
Option Description
model
the model
LESSON 1
Views
7.2 Display
LESSON 1
Views



4. Click Create.

LESSON 1
Views
3. Click OK.
View dialog box.

1. Click the view.
4. Click Yes.
The plane moves.

or click .
LESSON 1
Views
3. Click OK.

To create a view:
LESSON 1
Views
LESSON 1
Views

component objects.
LESSON 1
Views
Example
Rendered (Ctrl + 4)
Rollover highlight
LESSON 1
Views
• Press H.
8 Common buttons
Button Description
dialog box. Tekla Structures uses these properties the next time
you create an object of this type.
Common buttons

LESSON 1
Button Description

Common buttons
LESSON 1
LESSON 2
> LESSON 2
9 Grids
9.1 Creating a grid

To create a grid:

LESSON 2
grid lines.

Locked list.
4. Click Create.
5. Click Close.


first grid.

4. Click OK.
LESSON 2
views.

LESSON 2


10 Work area
Work area

LESSON 2
Work area
For more information, see Modifying the work area (p. 92).

3. Click Create.
LESSON 2
TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
LESSON 2
31
32
LESSON 2
TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
LESSON 3
> LESSON 3
12 Steel parts
the Modeling menu.


segments.
points.

contour.

Beam position.



beam command.
LESSON 3

part end.




LESSON 3





LESSON 3

reports.
First picked point
Second picked point
LESSON 3
numbering.

LESSON 3
command.

LESSON 3
command.
13 Snapping
beam.
13.1 Snap switches

LESSON 3
Snapping
Snap
points (points that
have handles).

components.
Snap
intersections.


arcs.


circles.
objects.
LESSON 3
Snapping
Snap

edges or lines.
objects.


distances, zoom in.
LESSON 3
Snapping

• Distance
• Angle
• Arc
• Bolt spaces
14 Mini Toolbar
when you move the mouse further away or change the selection. You can change the position of
the toolbar by dragging it and locking it to a new position with the lock button in the top right
corner.
Mini Toolbar
LESSON 3
profile

Mini Toolbar
LESSON 3
position
Part orientation
Rotation angle knob
Angle
Plane offset
Depth offset
Mini Toolbar
LESSON 3
select a position.
box.

attributes.
elements.
5. Click OK.
Mini Toolbar
LESSON 3
15 Part properties
15.1 Attributes tab

for example.
Part properties
LESSON 3
Option Description
15.2 Position tab

Part properties
LESSON 3
Option Description
values.
of curvature.
Mutual The Position tab in the Twin Profile Properties dialog box contains
position of the Mutual postion of members area. Select an option from the
members Twin profile type list to define how the profiles are combined. To
define the clearances between the profiles, enter values in the
Horizontal and Vertical boxes.

created parts.

properties before

properties of a
Part properties
LESSON 3
For more information, see Mini Toolbar.

Selection.

LESSON 3
The selected parts become invisible


LESSON 3

• Bending parts
Part modifications
LESSON 3
Start point
End point
dialog box.
Part modifications
LESSON 3


Part modifications
LESSON 3
the status bar.
press the D key.

on the part type.
Part modifications
LESSON 3
18 Corner chamfers
Corner chamfers
LESSON 3
Default chamfer
Modified chamfers
Option Description
the part.
of the part.

3. Click Modify.
Corner chamfers
LESSON 3
Button Description
single bolts.
Select points.
Selection switches
LESSON 3
Button Description
Select welds.
Select model views.
Select planes.
Select distances.

selected.


Selection switches
LESSON 3
Selection filters

own filters

Selection switches
LESSON 3
3. Click Add row.
define the filter.

Scrolling
assembly levels
Selection switches
LESSON 3
Level 0
Level 1

Level 0:
Level 1:

for reports and
drawings
Selection switches
LESSON 3
20 Concrete parts
You can create concrete parts by using the buttons in the Concrete toolbar, or selecting a
command from the Modeling menu.

Pad Footing Creates a pad footing at a picked position.
Strip Footing Creates a strip footing that traverses the picked points.
Column Creates a concrete column at a picked position.
Beam Creates a concrete beam between two picked points.
Polybeam Creates a concrete beam consisting of straight and curved

segments.
Slab Creates a concrete slab based on picked positions forming a

contour.
Panel Creates a concrete panel that traverses the picked points.
20.1 Creating a concrete column

Concrete parts
LESSON 3
1. Click the Create concrete column button.
The column is created.
20.2 Creating a concrete beam

1. Click the Create concrete beam button.

When you create horizontal parts such as beams be consistent and

always pick points from left to right and from bottom to top. This
part end.
20.3 Creating a concrete pad footing

To create a concrete pad footing:
1. Click the Create pad footing button.

20.4 Creating a concrete strip footing

To create a concrete strip footing:
1. Click the Create strip footing button.

2. Pick the points you want the strip footing to go through.
The strip footing is created.
Curved sections You can create curved sections for strip footings. Use the chamfer feature to create the curved
Concrete parts
LESSON 3
20.5 Creating a concrete panel
1. Click the Create concrete panel button.

The concrete panel is created.
Curved sections You can create curved sections for concrete panels. Use the chamfer feature to create the
curved sections. For more information, see Corner chamfers (p. 56).
20.6 Creating a concrete slab

1. Click the Create concrete slab button.

4. Pick the start point again.
The concrete slab is created.
You can also model floors, walls and panels with the concrete slabs.
20.7 Creating a concrete polybeam

1. Click the Create concrete polybeam button.

2. Pick the points you want the polybeam to go through.
Curved sections You can create curved sections for polybeams. Use the chamfer feature to create the curved
Concrete parts
LESSON 3
66
LESSON 3
Concrete parts
TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
LESSON 4
> LESSON 4
object.
Copy
Move
Command Description
Object to another.
Model... model.
Command Description
distance.
axis.
a specified plane.
Plane points.
Object to another.
LESSON 4
21.1 Copying
To copy an object:



LESSON 4
5. Click Copy.

work plane z axis.
LESSON 4
Example
Rotation point


command.
positioned parts.

LESSON 4
5. Enter the angle.
6. Click Copy.
Example
Start point
End point
Mirror axis

3. Click Get.
4. Click Modify.
5. Click OK.

LESSON 4
Select the objects.
Copied objects.

LESSON 4

For example, 2 7.
4. Click Copy.
21.8 Moving
To move an objects:

LESSON 4

4. Click Move.

work plane z axis.
LESSON 4


command.

4. Click Move.

original objects on the first plane
LESSON 4


22.1 Fittings
You can fit the end of a part by creating a straight cutting line between two points you pick. The
shortest part of the part is deleted automatically.

when fitting.
Creating a fitting
To fit a part end:
LESSON 4
Fitting symbol

removed.


LESSON 4
Fitting
Line cut
following reasons:


Errors in part cuts

LESSON 4
transparent color.
incorrect
correct

view.

LESSON 4

You can add surface treatment to parts. Surface treatment for steel parts include, for example,
fire-proofing and unpainted areas. Surface treatments are visible only in rendered views.
Treatment....

23 Bolts
LESSON 4
Bolts
You cannot use bolt elements (such as screws, washers, and nuts) while creating holes, as Tekla
Structures uses the same command for creating bolts and holes.
LESSON 4
Bolts
Option Description
standard chosen.
catalog.
a sub-assembly.
LESSON 4
bolted parts.
Bolts
Option Description
bolt group shape.
the work plane.
group x axis.
Holes
boxes:

• Round
• Oversized
LESSON 4
Bolts
• Slotted
• Tapped


bolt group.

LESSON 4
Bolts
3. Click OK.
LESSON 4
Bolts


check boxes.
LESSON 4

Bolts
• even
• odd
• parallel


polybeams.
To split a part:
LESSON 4

To combine parts:

LESSON 4
25 Points
• Create points.
Add Points.


3. Click OK.
LESSON 4
Points
LESSON 5
> LESSON 5
area lines.


LESSON 5
The work area is changed according to the points you picked.


the situation.
LESSON 5


4. Click View > Fit Work Area > To Entire Model in Selected Views to fit the model in the
work area.

LESSON 5
27 Clip planes


2. Select a plane.

Clip planes
LESSON 5

Clip planes
LESSON 5

Clip planes
LESSON 5
28 Work plane
toolbar.

Work plane
LESSON 5
3. Click Change.


view.

2. Select the part.
Work plane
LESSON 5

Advanced snapping
of the following:
LESSON 5


Location toolbar.
You can

brackets.
direction.

coordinates picked.



Advanced snapping
LESSON 5



X again.
Creating a beam 1. Click Modeling > Create Steel Part > Beam and pick the start point.
at a certain level
Advanced snapping
LESSON 5



Advanced snapping

LESSON 5
of snapping.



Advanced snapping
LESSON 5



LESSON 5

Advanced snapping
LESSON 5

Advanced snapping
LESSON 5


grid line.
Advanced snapping
LESSON 5

Advanced snapping
LESSON 5

Advanced snapping
LESSON 5

LESSON 6
> LESSON 6

Search
View folders
View details
View thumbnails

active properties.
and reinforcements.
LESSON 6


31 Components
Components are tools that you can use to automatically create the parts, welds, and bolts
Componen
(14)
Beam
locate the detail. footing
reinforcement

projects.
automatically.
moved.
Components
LESSON 6


the component.

and details:
Color Status Tip

Component created
successfully
Green
component.
Yellow
failed appropriate.
Red

Components
LESSON 6

2. Click Save as.

Symb
Reinforced
positions.

Steel Detailing
Precast Concrete
Detailing

Components
LESSON 6

31.6 Example
Two examples of using a component are presented here. In the first example, a base plate detail
is created. In the second example, the geometry of the base plate detail is modified.
Creating a base plate detail

The component catalog contains several base plate details. In this example, you use one of
them.
Create a steel column before creating the base plate detail. For information on creating a steel
column, see Creating a steel column (p. 34).
To create a base plate detail:

2. Enter "base plate" in the Search box and click Search.
The search results appear in the list.
3. Select Base plate (1004).
5. Pick a point at the base of the column to indicate where to create the base plate.
The base plate is created.
Modifying the base plate detail

In this example, you modify the geometry of the base plate detail.
To modify a base plate detail:

2. Double-click the base plate detail to open the component properties dialog box.
3. On the Picture tab, enter values in boxes to modify the base plate geometry.
Components
LESSON 6

4. Click Modify.
The geometry of the base plate detail changes.


LESSON 6

33 Material catalog
Material catalog
LESSON 6

• The General tab
• The Design tab
Tab Description
density values.
Method.
safety factors.

Material catalog

LESSON 6

Catalog.

Catalog.

3. Click OK.
34 Profile catalog
(for example, HEA).
Profile catalog
LESSON 6

Icon Description
Rule

Profile catalog
LESSON 6

To add a profile:


4. Click OK
Profile catalog
LESSON 6

parameters.

Parametric profiles
LESSON 6

LESSON 6
124
Parametric profiles
TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
LESSON 7
> LESSON 7

LESSON 7


multi-user modes
Open dialog box.

user model in

model.

user model in

checking the model:
• Clash checking
LESSON 7


collide.
• IFC
• DWG
• DGN

You can continue working during the clash check. When the clash check is complete, the
status bar message changes from Clash checking in progress to Ready.
double-click a row.
Checking the model
LESSON 7

speed as you go.
Perspective.

c Click Modify.

distance.

• ID lists
Checking the model
is hard to locate.
LESSON 7



model.

Inquiring the model

LESSON 7

Inquiring bolts




LESSON 7



all model views.
column.
LESSON 7

11. Click Close.
16. Click Modify.

groups
Object Group list.
LESSON 7


6. Click OK.
LESSON 7

41 Phase Manager
Phase Manager
LESSON 7

Option Description
in the Number box.
the Name box.
character.
new phases.
phases.
Phase Manager.
objects.

Phase Manager
LESSON 7

Phase Manager
LESSON 7

Phase Manager
LESSON 7

LESSON 8
> LESSON 8



n objects and
connects secondary
part(s) to a main
part.
Component symbol
is green.

objects and
connects them to a
main part at a
picked location.
Component symbol
is green.
LESSON 8

Seam Creates seam
objects and
connects parts
along a line picked
with two points.
Component symbol
is green.

objects which may
contain connections
and details.
Gets no symbol,
has same position
properties as
beams.
Main part
Secondary part

in the component.

LESSON 8

Component Wizard.
4. Click Next.
Component Wizard.



shortcuts.
To record a macro:
3. Click Record.
Recording a macro

LESSON 8



To run a macro:

44 WebViewer
WebViewer
LESSON 8

By default, Tekla Structures creates a PublicWeb folder with sub-folders in the current
model folder, and places the published model there.
web browser.
WebViewer
LESSON 8

With it you can:

Reviewer.
format.

LESSON 8

LESSON 8
146
TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
LESSON 9
• how to use reinforcements
• how to use windbracing
> LESSON 9

46 Reinforcements
You can add reinforcements to concrete parts to strengthen the parts. The Concrete toolbar
contains three commands used for reinforcement:
Reinforcing bar
Reinforcement mesh
46.1 Reinforcing bar group

A reinforcing bar group includes several identical, or very similar, reinforcing bars. Tekla
Structures creates reinforcing bar groups using the properties in the Reinforcing Bar
Properties dialog box. The file name extension of a saved reinforcing bar group file is .rbg.
Reinforcing bar group types

Tekla Structures has several reinforcing bar group types:
Type Description
Normal Not tapered
Tapered One bar dimension changes linearly in the group.
Tapered ridge One bar dimension changes linearly. The dimension is
longest in the middle of the group.
Tapered curved One bar dimension changes along a curve. The
dimension is longest in the middle of the group.
Tapered N One bar dimension changes linearly between N
ridges. Enter the number of ridges in the Number of
cross sections box in the Group tab of the
Spiral The reinforcing bars rise in a polygonal or circular
shape along the longitudinal axis of the part.
You can use the Group tab in the Reinforcing Bar Properties dialog box for selecting and
LESSON 9
modifying the reinforcing group types.

Creating a reinforcing bar group
To create a reinforcing bar group:
1. Click Detailing > Properties > Reinforcement > Reinforcing Bar Group..., or double-
click the Create reinforcing bar group button.

3. Click OK to save the properties.
Tekla Structures attaches the reinforcing bar group to the part.
5. Pick the reinforcing bar start point.
6. Pick the other reinforcing bar reference point.
8. Pick the start point of the bar group.
Distribution area
In addition to the shape of the reinforcing bars, you need to define the distribution area of the
reinforcing bars. The distribution area points can be positioned on the outer contour of the
concrete part. Usually, the distribution area is perpendicular to the plane so the cover thickness
on the sides can be defined in the From plane box in the Reinforcing Bar Properties dialog
box.
The selection order of the handles, which determines the cover area, is important when the bars
LESSON 9
are placed. The bars are placed on the right side of a line that is defined by the two selected
handles.

The example shows the placing of the handles for the top and bottom reinforcements in a beam:
First handle
Plane
The example on right shows the reinforcing bars outside the concrete. You can prevent this by
entering a negative value in the On plane box in the Reinforcing Bar Properties dialog box.
The General tab in the Reinforcing Bar Properties dialog box contains the same options for
both a single reinforcing bar and a reinforcing bar group. However, the Group tab contains
additional options for defining the properties of a reinforcing bar group. If you open the
Reinforcing Bar Properties dialog box for a single reinforcing bar, the Group tab is disabled.
Distribution of bars
You can define the way the bars are distributed over the cover area by selecting the Creation
method list.
The creation method options are:

• Equal distribution by number of reinforcing bars: This option is used for main
reinforcement bars in beams. The spacing of the bars is based on the number of the bars.
The spacing is the available distance divided by the number of the bars. The available
distance is cover area minus two times the value in the On plane box.
LESSON 9

Available distance
Value in the On plane box
• Equal distribution by target spacing value: You can enter a spacing value. Tekla
Structures aims the spacing value as closely as possible at the user-defined spacing value.
The spacing value is set to 150. The available distance for the bars is 1150 mm. This makes
1150/150 = 7,6 bars. The value will be rounded to 8. 1150/8 = 143.75. The calculated
spacing value of the bars is 143.75 mm.
• By exact spacing value with flexible first/last/middle space: Creates fixed, regular
spaces between the bars. One space adjusts to even out the bar distribution. You can
choose whether the adjusted space is the first, last, or the middle space.
• By exact spacing value with flexible first and last space:Tekla Structures calculates the
number of bars and places with the defined spacing. The remaining spacing value is
divided equally to the first and last bar spacing.
• By exact spacing: You can enter every spacing value manually. Use the multiplication
character to repeat spacings, for example, 5*200 to create five spaces of 200.
Equally distributed reinforcing bars
Exact spacing with flexible first space
Exact spacing with flexible first and last space
Exact spacing
LESSON 9

You have the following options for omitting reinforcing bars:
• None
• First
• Last
• First and last
The following example displays two reinforcing bar groups that have been added to a concrete
beam.
Two reinforcing bar groups with flexible end and/or start value.
The last and first bar omitted
46.2 Reinforcing bar

You can create a single reinforcing bar with the Create Reinforcing Bar command. A
reinforcing bar can be a straight bar, but also a hair pin, a former, or a bracket. Any shape with
random dimensions can be modeled.
Creating a reinforcing bar

To create a reinforcing bar:
1. Click Detailing > Properties > Reinforcement > Reinforcing Bar... or double-click the

LESSON 9

2. Make the necessary modifications in the Reinforcing Bar Properties dialog box.
You can set the series and start numbers for the reinforcing bars. In addition, you can
enter values for Size (diameter), Grade, and Bending radius.
3. Select the reinforcing bar color by entering the color number in the Class box.
We recommend you use this feature, because the 3D view will be clearer if all
reinforcing bars are the same color.
4. Define a hook or a splice for the reinforcing bar.
5. Modify the values displayed in the Select Reinforcing Bar dialog box.
6. Define the reinforcing bar cover thickness.
7. Click OK.
Tekla Structures attaches the reinforcing bar to the part.
LESSON 9

9. Pick the start point for the reinforcing bar.
10. Pick the other reinforcing bar reference points.
Defining a hook for a reinforcing bar

You can define a hook or a splice for the reinforcing bar under the Hooks area in the
To define a hook or a splice:
1. Double-click the Create Reinforcing Bar button.

The Reinforcing Bar Properties dialog box opens. The Hooks area of the dialog box
can be used for defining hooks and splices.
2. Select a hook type from the Shape lists.

A hook does not have to be modeled. It is added to the reinforcing bar automatically. If a
standard hook is selected, the Angle, Radius, and Length boxes are not active. These
values are read from the rebar_database.inp file. If a Custom hook selected,
you can define the values.
3. Define the values for the custom hook
a Enter a value between -180 and +180 degrees in the Angle box.
b Enter the internal bending radius of the hook in the Radius box.
c Enter the length of the straight part in the hook to the Length box.
LESSON 9

Defining the reinforcing bar cover thickness
Reinforcing bars need a concrete cover to protect them against harmful elements, such as the
weather and fire.
To define the concrete cover thickness for a reinforcing bar or reinforcing bar group:
1. Click Detailing > Properties > Reinforcement, and select either Reinforcing Bar... or
Reinforcing Bar Group....
Alternatively, you can double-click the Create Reinforcing Bar or the
Reinforcing Bar Group button.

2. Define the reinforcing bar cover thickness in the Cover thickness area of the
The cover thickness can be defined in three directions:
• On plane, that is, the distance from beam’s bottom, top, and side surfaces to the bar.
• From plane, that is, the distance from the end surface of the beam to the bar.
• In the longitudinal direction of the bar, that is, start and end.
To define different cover thicknesses on the different legs of a reinforcing bar, enter a
thickness value for each leg in the On plane field, in the order you pick points to create
the bar.
3. Click OK.
LESSON 9

First and last handle
From plane
Modifying reinforcing bars

To modify reinforcing bars:
1. Click Detailing > Properties > Reinforcement > Reinforcing Bar..., or double-click the

2. Click the Select button in the Reinforcing Bar Properties dialog box.
The Select Reinforcing Bar dialog box opens.
LESSON 9

3. Select the bar size for the chosen grade. You can also define whether the bar is a main
bar or a stirrup or tie.
You can modify the values displayed in the Select Reinforcing Bar dialog box in
rebar_database.inp file. The file is located in ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\<environment>\profil
folder. You can edit the file with any standard text editor.
For steel grades, every diameter is listed twice in the file: once as main and once as tie/
stirrup. The column Min bend radius contains the bending mandrel that is used if the
bar is bended in the model. If a bar is bended with an angle of 90, 135, or 180 degrees,
the column r contains the accompanying mandrels.
If you change the values in the Size column, you can change the diameter of the
reinforcing bar. The mandrel will keep its original diameter.
4. Click OK to close the Select Reinforcing Bar dialog box.
5. Click OK to close the Reinforcing Bar Properties dialog box.
Next time you open Reinforcing Bar Properties, the active settings are
used. If you have stored several sets of properties, you need to select an
option from the list next to the Load button and load the appropriate set
of properties.
46.3 Curved reinforcing bar group

Curved reinforcing bar groups are created using the same reinforcing properties as the straight
bar groups. The only difference is that you need to pick three points instead of two to define the
reinforcing bar shape. After defining the shape, do not click the middle-mouse button but
continue to define the distribution area.
LESSON 9

If the concrete part is created using multiple points and with the intention to create a curved
part by changing the chamfer properties, then it is recommended to create snap points to create
the curved reinforcing bars. Always place the curved reinforcing bars using the working points
of the concrete part and set the On plane option to the correct position.
46.4 Creating a circular reinforcing bar group

To create a circular reinforcing bar group:
1. Click Detailing > Create Reinforcement > Circular Reinforcing Bar Group.
3. Pick three points on the outer countour of the concrete part.
The radius is automatically calculated from these three points.

The circular reinforcing bar group is created.
5. Click Detailing > Properties > Reinforcement > Reinforcing Bar....
To define the splice length of the round stirrups, enter negative values in the Start and
End boxes.
LESSON 9

6. Click OK.
46.5 Creating a reinforcement mesh

You can create a reinforcement mesh that consists of two perpendicular bar groups.
To create a reinforcement mesh:
1. Click Detailing > Properties > Reinforcement > Reinforcement Mesh..., or double-
click the Create reinforcement mesh button.

The Reinforcement Mesh Properties dialog box opens. It can be used to set the length,
width, diameter, mesh size, and cover area of the reinforcement mesh.
2. Click the Select button.
The Select Mesh dialog box opens.
LESSON 9

You can select various meshes in the Reinforcement Mesh Properties dialog box.
The standard mesh properties are in defined in the mesh_database_inp file located in the
..\Tekla Structures\<version>\environments\<environment>\profil
folder.
46.6 Creating a reinforcement strand pattern

To create a reinforcement strand pattern:
1. Click Detailing > Properties > Reinforcement > Reinforcement Strand Pattern....
The Strand Pattern Properties dialog box opens.
LESSON 9

2. Enter or modify the strand properties.
3. Define the pre-stress load in the Pull per strand box.
4. In the Number of cross sections box, enter a number based on the strand profile.
There are four strand profile options:
Strand profile Number of patterns

pattern 1
pattern 2
LESSON 9

Strand profile Number of patterns
pattern 3
pattern 4
5. Define the lengths of the debonding zones.

6. Click OK.
7. Click Detailing > Create Reinforcement > Reinforcement Strand Pattern.
8. Select the part to which you are creating strands.
9. Pick points to position the strands, for example, at the end of a part.
46.7 Reinforcement strand example

You can create a reinforcement strand in a beam. First create an array of points to aid in the
positioning of the reinforcement strand.
Creating a point array

Create a concrete beam before creating a point array. For more information, see Creating a
concrete beam (p. 64).
To create a point array:

1. Click Modeling > Add Points > On Plane... to open the Point Array dialog box.
2. Pick a corner of the beam.
LESSON 9

The corner is used as an origin for defining the location of the points.
3. Enter the coordinates for points under the Coordinates area in the Point Array dialog
box.
4. Click Create to create the point array.
Creating a reinforcement strand for a beam

You must have added a point array to the beam before creating a reinforcement strand. For
more information, see Creating a point array (p. 162).
To create a reinforcement strand:

1. Hold down the Shift key and click Detailing > Create Reinforcement > Reinforcement
Strand Pattern.
The Strand Pattern Properties dialog box opens.
2. Modify the properties if required and click OK.
LESSON 9
3. Select the beam to reinforce.

4. Pick all the points which are positioned on the beam end.

6. Pick two points to define the length of the strands.

The reinforcement strand is created.
LESSON 9

46.8 Creating a reinforcement splice
You can join reinforcing bars or reinforcing bar groups together with reinforcement splices.
The blue splice symbols indicate reinforcement splices in the models:
To create a reinforcement splice:

4. Optional: Modify the splice properties.
a Click Detailing > Properties > Reinforcement > Reinforcement Splice....
The Reinforcement Splice Properties dialog box opens.
LESSON 9

b Modify the splice properties.
c Click Modify.
Moving a splice If needed, you can move the splice along reinforcing bars.
To move the splice:
46.9 Attaching reinforcing bars to another part

When you model reinforcing bars, you need to select a part to which the bars are attached.
However, a modeled reinforcing bar may need to be attached to another part at a later stage.
To attach a reinforcing bar to another part:
1. Select the reinforcing bar you want to attach.
2. Right-click and select Attach to part from the pop-up menu.
3. Select the part to which you want to attach the reinforcement.
LESSON 9

47 Custom reinforcement component
example
You can create two reinforcing bar groups to place staggered stirrups with hooks at opposite
edges in a concrete column. Then define a custom component of the reinforcement.
47.1 Creating a reinforcement for a column

To create a reinforcement for a column:
1. Create a concrete column that is 3000 millimeters high.
For more information, see Creating a concrete column (p. 63).
2. Hold down the Shift key and click Detailing > Create Reinforcement > Reinforcing
Bar Group.
3. Modify the properties on the General tab as shown below.

LESSON 9

4. Go to the Group tab.
5. Modify the properties on the Group tab as shown below.
LESSON 9

6. Click Apply.
mouse button to create the first reinforcing bar group.
LESSON 9

10. Modify the properties under the Cover thickness area in the Reinforcing Bar
Properties dialog box as shown below.
11. Click Apply.

mouse button to create the second reinforcing bar group.
LESSON 9

47.2 Defining a custom reinforcement component
To define a custom reinforcement component:
1. Click Detailing > Component > Define Custom Component.
The Custom Component Wizard dialog box opens.
2. Select Detail from the Type list.
3. Enter a name and a short description for the component. Click Next.
4. Hold down the Ctrl key and select the two reinforcing bar groups as the component
objects. Click Next.
5. Select the column as the main part. Click Next.
6. Pick the end point at the top level of the column as the reference point.
The custom component only works correctly for columns with the same profile and
height.
LESSON 9

For more information on custom components, see Custom components (p. 140).
48 Reinforcement tips
Adding reinforcements to identical cast units is not always necessary. For example, if there are
20 cast units in a model, you can add reinforcements to all twenty cast units. In some cases, it is
possible to reinforce just one cast unit.
Advantages of reinforcing just one cast unit:
• The model is better organized because it contains less reinforcements.
• The database is smaller because the model contains less reinforcements.
• Less chance on numbering differences because there are less reinforcements.
• Numbering of the model is faster.
• Copying reinforcements and using custom components is not needed.
• Applying model changes is quick. There is no need to modify multiple reinforcements.
Disadvantages of reinforcing just one cast unit:
• Incorrect reinforcement weight.
• Elements that have identical shapes but different reinforcements receive identical cast unit
numbers.
You can create cast unit drawings of the reinforced cast units. If the drawing has already been
created and the reinforcements need to be added in at a later stage, you can find the ID number
of the cast unit by using the Inqure Object command and add the reinforcing bars in the
particular cast unit.
Reinforcement tips
LESSON 9

49 Reinforcement components
Tekla Structures contains various reinforcing components that you can use to create reinforcing
bars and bar groups.
49.1 Adding a reinforcement component

To add a reinforcement component:
1. Click Detailing > Component > Component Catalog...
2. Click the arrow button and select Reinforcements from the list.
The reinforcement components are displayed in the Component Catalog.
3. Double-click a component.
The properties dialog box opens.
5. Select the part that you want to reinforce.
49.2 Reinforcement component examples

Beam The Beam reinforcement (63) component creates the stirrups and the top, bottom, and side
reinforcement reinforcements in one go. If the size of the beam changes, the reinforcement adapts to the new
(63)
dimensions.
For the main reinforcement (top and bottom), the number and diameter of bars can be set
individually. For T profiles or beams with a ridge, multiple stirrup groups can be generated.
The cover thickness for the stirrups needs to be defined in the properties dialog box. The
positioning of the bars in longitudinal direction is automatically determined by the component.
LESSON 9

The stirrup distances can be defined on the Stirrup spacing tab. You can add more stirrups on
places where bigger shear forces occur. You can set the number of stirrups and stirrup distances
for the different zones.
It is possible to create different stirrups in two ledges. To do so, select Different Each Ledge
from the Ledge stirrups list to activate the Upper ledge stirrups boxes.
The Ledge Stirrup Spacing Type list contains two options to define the spacing of ledge
stirrups:
• Target: Tekla Structures creates equal spaces between the bars aiming the spacing value as
closely as possible to the value you specify. This is the default option.
• Exact: The first and last space of a zone adjust themselves to even out bar distribution.
The spaces in the middle of each zone are exactly the size you specify.
LESSON 9

Rebar in beam The Rebar in beam (90) component is a versatile component that is used to add reinforcement
(90) bars to a beam. Besides all the options that are available with the Beam reinforcement (63)
component, the Rebar in beam (90) can also bend the bars at the start or end part of the beam.
LESSON 9

LESSON 9
176
TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Starter bars for
pillar (86) and
Slab bars (18)
Starter bars for pillar (86)
Slab bars (18)
Hole
reinforcement for
slabs and walls
(84), Beam end
reinforcement
(79), and
Rectangular
column
reinforcement
(83)
Hole reinforcement for slabs and walls (84)
Beam end reinforcement (79)
Rectangular column reinforcement (83)

LESSON 9

50 Windbracing
All buildings must be designed to resist wind load. Wind load is different than, for example,
snow and other vertical loads. Wind load acts horizontally and in any direction. Using
windbracing, you can create buildings that can resist loads acting parallel and perpendicular to
any wall of a building.
50.1 Windbracing in a front plane

To create a windbracing to a front plate:
1. Double-click the Create Beam button.
The Beam Properties dialog box opens.
2. Load bracing in the Beam Properties dialog box.
By default, an angle steel profile is loaded. In case of windbracings in front planes, flat
bracings are often used. Therefore, change the Profile to, for example, FL10*60.
4. Select Middle in the On plane list and enter 5 in the box.
Windbracing
The windbracing will be positioned on the right side with an extra distance of 5 mm.
LESSON 9

5. Click OK.
6. Click the Create Beam button and place a windbracing profile from the left bottom side
towards the right upper side.
7. Position the windbracings in the center of the columns.
8. Select a component, for example Bolted gusset (11), and connect the braces to the
columns.
50.2 Windbracing in a straight roof plane

To create a windbracing in a straight roof plane:
By default, an angle steel profile is loaded. This is the best option for modeling
windbracings in a straight roof plane, because of their better resistance against
deflection.
4. Select Middle in the On plane list.
5. To let the bracings cross each other correctly, increase the values for the On plane list.
For example, for a profile L60/6, the offset has to be set to 30, or the At depth has to bet
set to Front or Behind.
Usually, in case of crossing angle steel windbracings, the bracings are positioned with
the closed sides towards each other. That means that one bracing has to be rotated 180
degrees by changing the Rotation from Below to Top.
Windbracing
LESSON 9

6. Click OK.
9. Select the components and connect the braces to the columns.
50.3 Windbracing in a sloping roof plane

You can model windbracings for a sloping roof using Tekla Structures. The following steps
lead to longer tasks explaining each phase needed to complete windbracings for a sloping roof.
To create a windbracing in a sloping roof plane:
1. Move the work plane parallel to the roof plane.
2. Create a view parallel to the sloping roof plane.
3. Create the windbracings.
• Create the windbracing with the roof plane view.
• Create the windbracing without the roof plane view.
Windbracing
LESSON 9

Moving the work plane parallel to the roof plane
Before you insert windbracings in a sloping roof plane, we recommend you move the work
plane parallel to the roof plane.
To move the work plane:
1. Click View > Set Work Plane > To Part Top Plane.
2. Select a roof beam.
The view is moved accordingly.
Creating a view parallel to the sloping roof plane

When the work plane is parallel to the roof beams, a view which is parallel to the sloping roof
plane can be created. There are two ways of doing this:
Option 1 1. Set the work plane parallel to the roof beam.

2. Click View > Creat View of Model > On Work Plane.
A new view looking perpendicularly to the roof plane is created.
3. Change the name of the view if you want to store it for later use.

2. Click View > View Properties....
3. Load the plane settings and change the name of the view.
4. Click View > Create View of Model > Using Three Points.
5. Pick points to create the view.
a Pick origin.
b Pick a point in the positive x direction.
c Pick a point in the y direction.
Creating a windbracing using the roof plane view

To create a windbracing using the roof plane view:
1. Insert reference points on the roof beam for positioning the windbracing.
2. Double-click the Create Beam button to open the Beam Properties dialog box.
Windbracing
LESSON 9
3. Load the bracing setting and position the windbracing.

4. Change the position of the bracings so that they do not intersect with each other.
5. Connect the bracing to the roof beams, for example, with the component Bolted gusset
(11).
Creating a windbracing without using the roof plane view

To create a windbracing without using the roof plane view:
1. In a plane view, create reference points on the roof beam.
For more information on creating points, see Creating points along a line (p. 90).
2. Copy the reference points to the next grid line.

3. In a 3D view, set the work plane parallel to the roof plane.
4. Model the windbracings in the 3D view by snapping to the reference points.
50.4 Shortening a windbracing

Windbracing
LESSON 9
To shorten a windbracing:

1. Double-click a windbracing to open the Beam Properties dialog box.
2. Click User-defined attributes button in the Attributes tab.
The Tekla Structures Beam dialog box opens.
When entering values to the Tekla Structures Beam dialog box, there is
a difference between entering the value 0 (zero) and leaving the box
empty.
3. Enter the shortening value in the Shorten box.

4. Click Modify and Cancel, or click Modify and close the dialog box.
Do not click Apply and OK, because the value you defined for the
shortening will be saved as the default value for the Shorten box and it
may affect other beams.
Windbracing
LESSON 9

Checking a windbracing
• Reports
You can use the reports User Defined Attributes (UDA) and id_part_list. In these reports,
the Shorten column displays which profiles are shortened.
• Object representation
You can create object representation settings to display shortened components.
50.5 Shortening examples

Examples 1 and 2 are both examples on how to shorten windbracing using Tekla Structures.
Example 1 is a case where the windbracing is long and the shortening is therefore directed only
to the distance between the bolts. Example 2 is a shorter windbracing so the shortening is
divided equally to the whole windbracing.
Example 1 In this example, we have a windbracing that is 6000 mm in length. The windbracing has holes
at a bolt distance of 60 mm and an edge distance of 40 mm. Without shortening, the distances
would be: 40-60-5800-60-40.
If we shorten the windbracing by 4 mm, the total length should be 5996 mm. However, also the
holes have to be taken into consideration. Tekla Structures divides the total length after
shortening by the initial length of the bracing, that is, 5996 / 6000 = 0.9993. Each individual
distance is multiplied with this factor:
• 0.9993*40 = 39.973 mm
• 0.9993*60 = 59.960 mm
• 0.9993*5800 = 5796.133 mm
By default, the dimensions are rounded off in millimeters. The dimensioning in this example
will be: 40-60-5796-60-40. The shortening value of 4 mm will be applied to the largest
distance, that is the distance between the two bolt groups.
Example 2 In this example, we have a windbracing that is 2000 mm in length. It is shortened by 20 mm.
Tekla Structures divides the total length after shortening by the initial length of the bracing, that
is, 1980 / 2000 = 0.99. Each individual distance is multiplied with this factor:
• 0.99*40 = 39.6 mm
• 0.99*60 = 59.4 mm
• 0.99*1800 = 1782 mm
will be: 40-59-1782-59-40. The shortening of 20 mm is not only applied to the biggest distance,
but also to the bolt distances.
Windbracing
LESSON 9

50.6 Windbracing examples
Welded connections
Cross bolted
Cross welded
Cross welded and bolted

Windbracing
LESSON 9

Flat bar
Windbracing
LESSON 9

LESSON 10
> LESSON 10

51 Component examples
You can browse the component examples in this lesson to see the various component options
Tekla Structures offers. This material is presented as reference only.
51.1 Steel components

End plate (144)
LESSON 10

Two-sided end plate (142)
Stiffened end plate (27)
LESSON 10

Partial stiff end plate (65)
Bolted gusset (11)

LESSON 10

Central gusset (169)
LESSON 10

Seating (39)
Cranked beam (41)

LESSON 10

Haunch (40)
Joining plates (14)
Stub (28)
LESSON 10

Base plate (1004)
Stiffened base plate (1014)

LESSON 10

Stiffeners (1003)
Stub (1011)
LESSON 10

End plate detail (1002)
Stanchion weld (85)
Round tube (23)

LESSON 10

Manlock column (1032)
Manlock beam (1033)
Array of objects (29)

LESSON 10

one truss
copied
LESSON 10

LESSON 10

LESSON 10

LESSON 11
> LESSON 11


• Press F1.

LESSON 11




LESSON 11

To Do this
alphabetical order
the open topic


previous search.
the search results.
tab.

4. Click Add.
LESSON 11

Tekla Structures
Steel Detailing
Modeling
Training Manual
January 2011

reserved.
Contents
Introduction 1
LESSON 1 3
3 Saving a model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4 Opening a model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
5.1 Zooming.................................................................................................................................................. 8
5.2 Panning................................................................................................................................................... 9
5.3 Rotating .................................................................................................................................................. 9
6 Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
6.1 View properties ....................................................................................................................................... 9
6.2 Display .................................................................................................................................................. 11
Rollover highlight.............................................................................................................................. 17
7 Common buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
LESSON 2 21
8 Grids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
8.1 Creating a grid ...................................................................................................................................... 22
8.2 Creating a second grid.......................................................................................................................... 23
8.3 Creating a grid on a shifted work plane ................................................................................................. 24
9 Work area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
LESSON 3 29
11 Steel parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
11.1 Creating a steel column......................................................................................................................... 30
11.2 Creating a steel beam ........................................................................................................................... 30
11.3 Creating a curved steel beam................................................................................................................ 31
11.4 Creating a steel polybeam..................................................................................................................... 31
11.5 Creating an orthogonal steel beam ....................................................................................................... 32
11.6 Creating a steel twin profile ................................................................................................................... 32
11.7 Creating a steel contour plate................................................................................................................ 32
Adding a corner to a contour plate.................................................................................................... 33
Removing a corner from a contour plate........................................................................................... 33
Setting the contour plate orientation ................................................................................................. 34
12 Snapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
12.1 Snap switches ....................................................................................................................................... 36
13 Mini Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
14 Part properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
14.1 Attributes tab ......................................................................................................................................... 42
14.2 Position tab............................................................................................................................................ 43
14.3 Modifying part properties ....................................................................................................................... 45
15.1 Hiding selected parts ............................................................................................................................. 46
15.2 Hiding unselected parts ......................................................................................................................... 47
16.1 Moving start and end points .................................................................................................................. 48
Extending and shortening parts ........................................................................................................ 50
16.2 Creating curved parts............................................................................................................................ 51
17 Corner chamfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
LESSON 4 59
19.1 Copying................................................................................................................................................. 61
19.8 Moving................................................................................................................................................... 66
19.9 Moving linearly ...................................................................................................................................... 67
19.10 Moving and rotating............................................................................................................................... 67
19.11 Moving and mirroring ............................................................................................................................ 68
19.12 Moving to another plane........................................................................................................................ 68
19.13 Moving to another object....................................................................................................................... 69
20.1 Fittings................................................................................................................................................... 69
Creating a fitting ............................................................................................................................... 69
20.2 Cutting parts with a line......................................................................................................................... 70
20.3 Cutting parts with another part.............................................................................................................. 71
Errors in part cuts ............................................................................................................................. 71
20.4 Cutting parts with a polygon.................................................................................................................. 72
20.5 Creating welds and fittings in multiple objects ...................................................................................... 73
20.6 Surface treatment.................................................................................................................................. 73
Adding surface treatment to a selected area.................................................................................... 74
21 Welds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
21.1 Creating a weld between parts.............................................................................................................. 75
22 Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
22.1 Bolt properties ....................................................................................................................................... 76
Holes................................................................................................................................................. 77
23.1 Splitting parts......................................................................................................................................... 81
23.2 Combining parts .................................................................................................................................... 82
24 Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
25 Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
25.1 Creating an assembly............................................................................................................................ 84
25.2 Creating a sub-assembly....................................................................................................................... 85
25.3 Adding objects to assemblies ................................................................................................................ 85
25.4 Removing objects from an assembly..................................................................................................... 85
25.5 Highlighting objects in an assembly ...................................................................................................... 86
25.6 Assembly hierarchy ............................................................................................................................... 86
25.7 Changing the assembly main part ......................................................................................................... 87
25.8 Changing the main assembly ................................................................................................................ 88
25.9 Creating assembly views....................................................................................................................... 88
25.10 Assembly examples............................................................................................................................... 89
LESSON 5 91
26 Modifying the work area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
26.4 Finding distant objects........................................................................................................................... 93
26.5 Finding distant points............................................................................................................................. 94
26.6 Finding distant reference models .......................................................................................................... 94
27 Clip planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
27.1 Creating a clip plane.............................................................................................................................. 95
27.2 Moving a clip plane ............................................................................................................................... 96
27.3 Deleting a clip plane.............................................................................................................................. 97
28 Work plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
28.1 Set work plane parallel to a plane......................................................................................................... 98
28.2 Set work plane using three points......................................................................................................... 99
28.3 Set work plane parallel to view plane.................................................................................................... 99
28.4 Set work plane to top plane of a part .................................................................................................... 99
LESSON 6 111
31 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
31.1 Creating a component......................................................................................................................... 114
31.2 Component status............................................................................................................................... 114
31.4 Saving component properties ............................................................................................................. 115
31.5 Conceptual components ..................................................................................................................... 115
Converting a conceptual component to a detailed component ...................................................... 115
31.6 Example .............................................................................................................................................. 116
Creating a base plate detail............................................................................................................ 116
Modifying the base plate detail....................................................................................................... 116
33 Material catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
33.1 Adding a material grade...................................................................................................................... 119
33.2 Deleting a material grade.................................................................................................................... 120
34 Profile catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
34.1 Adding a profile.................................................................................................................................... 122
LESSON 7 125
Inquiring bolts.................................................................................................................................. 131
39.2 Inquiring assembly objects .................................................................................................................. 131
Displaying all objects connected to a part....................................................................................... 131
39.3 Inquiring welded parts ......................................................................................................................... 132
40.1 Creating object representation settings ............................................................................................... 133
40.2 Defining your own colors to model object groups................................................................................ 134
41 Phase Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
41.1 Dividing the model into phases............................................................................................................ 137
LESSON 8 139
42 Custom components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
42.1 Custom component types.................................................................................................................... 140
42.2 Exploding a component ....................................................................................................................... 141
42.3 Defining a custom component ............................................................................................................. 141
42.4 Exporting and importing....................................................................................................................... 142
43 Reference models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
43.1 Inserting a reference model................................................................................................................. 143
43.2 Hiding a reference model .................................................................................................................... 144
43.3 Updating a reference model ................................................................................................................ 144
43.4 Detecting changes in reference models.............................................................................................. 145
Example ......................................................................................................................................... 146
43.5 Handling large reference models ........................................................................................................ 147
44.1 Running a macro................................................................................................................................. 148
44.2 Editing a macro ................................................................................................................................... 148
45 WebViewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
45.1 Publishing a model as a web page ..................................................................................................... 149
46 Tekla Structures Model Reviewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
LESSON 9 151
47 Windbracing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
47.1 Windbracing in a front plane ............................................................................................................... 152
47.2 Windbracing in a straight roof plane.................................................................................................... 153
47.3 Windbracing in a sloping roof plane.................................................................................................... 154
Moving the work plane parallel to the roof plane ........................................................................... 155
Creating a view parallel to the sloping roof plane........................................................................... 155
Creating a windbracing using the roof plane view.......................................................................... 155
Creating a windbracing without using the roof plane view ............................................................. 156
47.4 Shortening a windbracing.................................................................................................................... 156
Checking a windbracing ................................................................................................................. 158
47.5 Shortening examples .......................................................................................................................... 158
47.6 Windbracing examples........................................................................................................................ 159
LESSON 10 161
48 Component examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
48.1 Steel components ............................................................................................................................... 162
End plate (144)............................................................................................................................... 162
Two-sided end plate (142).............................................................................................................. 163
Stiffened end plate (27) .................................................................................................................. 163
Partial stiff end plate (65) ............................................................................................................... 164
Bolted gusset (11) .......................................................................................................................... 164
Central gusset (169)....................................................................................................................... 165
Seating (39).................................................................................................................................... 166
Cranked beam (41) ........................................................................................................................ 166
Haunch (40).................................................................................................................................... 167
Joining plates (14) .......................................................................................................................... 167
Stub (28) ......................................................................................................................................... 167
Base plate (1004)............................................................................................................................ 168
Stiffened base plate (1014)............................................................................................................. 168
Stiffeners (1003) ............................................................................................................................. 169
Stub (1011) ..................................................................................................................................... 169
End plate detail (1002).................................................................................................................... 170
Stanchion weld (85) ........................................................................................................................ 170
Round tube (23).............................................................................................................................. 170
Manlock column (1032)................................................................................................................... 171
Manlock beam (1033) ..................................................................................................................... 171
Array of objects (29)........................................................................................................................ 171
LESSON 11 175
49.5 Saving favorite Help topics .................................................................................................................. 178
Introduction
management.
Tekla helps all new Tekla Structures users to get started and to maintain their development.
Our well-defined training course is a jump start to Tekla Structures software and helps to
maximize using Tekla Structures to its full potential. During the basic training course, you will
be taught the basic principles of Tekla Structures. Each training day contains several exercises
so you will learn to apply what you have learned in theory. The instructor will show the correct
indicated.

Spanish, Russian,
Japanese, Chinese
Drawings
Precast Concrete
Detailing, Modeling
Precast Concrete
Detailing, Drawings
Construction
Management
Detailing, Modeling
Detailing, Drawings
Spanish, Russian,
format
instructions
to Tekla Structures
instructions
instructions
Extranet:
Italian, Russian,
& videos
Italian, Russian,
Extranet:
Japanese, Chinese
& videos
topnewfeatures
tutorials
& videos
material Questions
Glossary
Glossary
Discussion Forum
German, Japanese,
Product
Chinese
LESSON 1
> LESSON 1


LESSON 1
New....


5. Click OK.
LESSON 1
3 Saving a model

General.

Saving a model
LESSON 1
folder.
4 Opening a model
To open a model:



folders.

Opening a model

LESSON 1


Structures version.

some of them.
5.1 Zooming
LESSON 1
5.2 Panning
5.3 Rotating
6 Views
create views
6.1 View properties

box opens.
LESSON 1
Views
Option Description
model
the model
LESSON 1
Views
6.2 Display
LESSON 1
Views



4. Click Create.

LESSON 1
Views
3. Click OK.
View dialog box.

1. Click the view.
4. Click Yes.
The plane moves.

or click .
LESSON 1
Views
3. Click OK.

To create a view:
LESSON 1
Views
LESSON 1
Views

component objects.
LESSON 1
Views
Example
Rendered (Ctrl + 4)
Rollover highlight
LESSON 1
Views
• Press H.
7 Common buttons
Button Description
dialog box. Tekla Structures uses these properties the next
time you create an object of this type.
Common buttons

LESSON 1
Button Description

Common buttons
LESSON 1
20
LESSON 1
Common buttons
TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
LESSON 2
> LESSON 2
8 Grids
8.1 Creating a grid

To create a grid:

LESSON 2
grid lines.

Locked list.
4. Click Create.
5. Click Close.


first grid.

4. Click OK.
LESSON 2
views.

LESSON 2


9 Work area
Work area

LESSON 2
Work area
For more information, see Modifying the work area (p. 92).

3. Click Create.
LESSON 2
TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
LESSON 2
27
28
LESSON 2
TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
LESSON 3
> LESSON 3
11 Steel parts
the Modeling menu.


segments.
points.

contour.

Beam position.



beam command.
LESSON 3

part end.




LESSON 3





LESSON 3


command.

LESSON 3

command.

reports.
LESSON 3
First picked point
Second picked point

numbering.
12 Snapping
LESSON 3
Snapping
beam.
12.1 Snap switches

Snap
points (points that
have handles).

components.
LESSON 3
Snapping
Snap
intersections.


arcs.


circles.
objects.

edges or lines.
objects.

LESSON 3
Snapping
distances, zoom in.


• Distance
• Angle
• Arc
• Bolt spaces
LESSON 3
Snapping
13 Mini Toolbar
when you move the mouse further away or change the selection. You can change the position
of the toolbar by dragging it and locking it to a new position with the lock button in the top
right corner.

profile
Mini Toolbar
LESSON 3
position
Mini Toolbar
LESSON 3
Part orientation
Rotation angle knob
Angle
Plane offset
Depth offset
select a position.
box.

attributes.
elements.
Mini Toolbar

LESSON 3
5. Click OK.
14 Part properties
14.1 Attributes tab

for example.
Part properties
LESSON 3
Option Description
14.2 Position tab

Part properties

LESSON 3
Option Description
values.
of curvature.
Mutual The Position tab in the Twin Profile Properties dialog box contains
position of the Mutual postion of members area. Select an option from the
members Twin profile type list to define how the profiles are combined. To
define the clearances between the profiles, enter values in the
Horizontal and Vertical boxes.
Part properties
LESSON 3
created parts.

properties before

properties of a
For more information, see Mini Toolbar.

LESSON 3
Selection.

LESSON 3
The selected parts become invisible


LESSON 3

• Bending parts

Part modifications
LESSON 3
Start point
End point
dialog box.
Part modifications
LESSON 3


the status bar.
press the D key.
Part modifications
LESSON 3
on the part type.
17 Corner chamfers
Corner chamfers
LESSON 3
Default chamfer
Modified chamfers
Option Description
the part.
of the part.
Corner chamfers
LESSON 3
3. Click Modify.
Button Description
single bolts.
Selection switches

LESSON 3
Button Description
Select points.
Select welds.
Select model views.
Select planes.
Select distances.

selected.

Selection switches
LESSON 3
Button Description

Selection filters

own filters
Selection switches
LESSON 3

3. Click Add row.
define the filter.

Scrolling
assembly levels
Selection switches
LESSON 3
Level 0
Level 1

Level 0:
Level 1:

for reports and
drawings
Selection switches
LESSON 3
Selection switches
LESSON 3
LESSON 4
• how to create welds
• how to work with assemblies
> LESSON 4
object.
Copy
Move
Command Description
Object to another.
Model... model.
Command Description
distance.
axis.
a specified plane.
Plane points.
Object to another.
LESSON 4
19.1 Copying
To copy an object:



LESSON 4
5. Click Copy.

work plane z axis.
LESSON 4
Example
Rotation point


command.
positioned parts.

LESSON 4
5. Enter the angle.
6. Click Copy.
Example
Start point
End point
Mirror axis

3. Click Get.
4. Click Modify.
5. Click OK.

LESSON 4
Select the objects.
Copied objects.

LESSON 4

For example, 2 7.
4. Click Copy.
19.8 Moving
To move an objects:

LESSON 4

4. Click Move.

work plane z axis.
LESSON 4


command.

4. Click Move.

original objects on the first plane
LESSON 4


20.1 Fittings
You can fit the end of a part by creating a straight cutting line between two points you pick.
The shortest part of the part is deleted automatically.

when fitting.
Creating a fitting
To fit a part end:
LESSON 4
Fitting symbol

removed.


LESSON 4
Fitting
Line cut
following reasons:


Errors in part cuts

LESSON 4
transparent color.
incorrect
correct

view.

LESSON 4
20.5 Creating welds and fittings in multiple objects

You can create welds and fittings in multiple objects with one selection.
To create welds and fittings in multiple objects:
1. Click Detailing > Weld > Create Weld Between Parts.
2. Select the main part and the secondary parts using area selection.
All five objects are now welded. You can now also fit all the five objects with one
command.

LESSON 4
You can add surface treatment to parts. Surface treatment for steel parts include, for example,
fire-proofing and unpainted areas. Surface treatments are visible only in rendered views.
Treatment....

21 Welds
The Create Weld between Parts command is used to form assemblies. An assembly always
consists of one main part and one or more secondary parts. The welding order determines
which part of the assembly is the main part. When you create welds, you need to select the
main part first and then select the secondary part(s).
If the weld type and size are vital, the settings in the Weld Properties dialog box are important.
In case the welds are less important, for example, a weld that is not displayed in drawings, only
the weld size is important. If the weld will not be displayed in drawings, the weld size has to be
set smaller than the default size.
In most cases, workshop welds are used. It is also possible that on-site, or field welds, are
required. For example, when parts need to be welded to an existing structure. In such cases, you
must also select on-site or field welds in your model.
When you select on-site or field welds, the parts are not actually welded.
In the drawings, a flag indicates the on-site welds.
Do not use the Create Weld between Parts command to create sub-
assemblies or parent assemblies. For example, do not weld a stud into a
beam.
LESSON 4
Welds
On-site or field welds
Workshop weld
21.1 Creating a weld between parts

To create a weld between parts:
1. Double-click the Create welds between parts button.

2. Enter or modify the weld properties.
3. Click Apply or OK to make these the active properties.
4. Select the part to which you want to weld (main part in workshop welds).
5. Select the part to be welded (secondary part in workshop welds).
Changing the In some cases, for example, after welding a complex truss, it may occur that the main part of
main part in an the assembly is not the correct main part anymore. In such cases you can set a new main part
assembly
for the assembly. To change the assembly main part, select the new main part. Right-click and
select Set as New Main Part of Assembly from the popup menu.
22 Bolts
You cannot use bolt elements (such as screws, washers, and nuts) while creating holes, as
LESSON 4
Tekla Structures uses the same command for creating bolts and holes.
Bolts
Option Description
standard chosen.
LESSON 4
catalog.
Bolts
Option Description
a sub-assembly.
bolted parts.
bolt group shape.
the work plane.
group x axis.
Holes
boxes:
LESSON 4
Bolts
• Round
• Oversized
• Slotted
• Tapped


bolt group.
LESSON 4
Bolts

LESSON 4
Bolts
3. Click OK.



check boxes.
LESSON 4
Bolts
• even
• odd
• parallel


polybeams.
To split a part:
LESSON 4

You can combine existing parts in Tekla Structures. This can be useful when you want to
model complex parts (such as folded plates) that are otherwise difficult to model, or when you
want to model prefabricated parts that are delivered to the workshop already attached to
profiles.
To combine parts:
LESSON 4
24 Points
• Create points.
Add Points.
LESSON 4
Points


3. Click OK.
25 Assemblies
Tekla Structures creates basic assemblies of steel parts when you use a workshop weld or bolt
to join parts together. Assemblies and their main parts are automatically defined when you:
• Create single workshop welds or bolts.
• Apply automatic connections which create workshop welds or bolts.
You can also create nested assemblies by adding sub-assemblies to existing assemblies, or by
joining assemblies together.
The main part in a steel assembly has other parts welded or bolted to it. By default, the main
part is not welded or bolted to any other parts. You can change the main part in an assembly.
25.1 Creating an assembly

To create an assembly:

2. Select the parts and/or assemblies that you want to join together.
3. Right-click and select Assembly > Make into Assembly from the pop-up menu.
Assemblies
LESSON 4
25.2 Creating a sub-assembly
You can create a sub-assembly of parts that are already in an assembly.
To create a sub-assembly:

2. Select the parts you want to include in the sub-assembly.
3. Right-click and select Assembly > Add as Sub-Assembly from the pop-up menu.
25.3 Adding objects to assemblies

You can add objects to assemblies in the following ways:
To Do this
Create a basic assembly Do one of the following:
• Add parts to an existing assembly as secondary
parts.
• Bolt or weld parts to an existing assembly as
secondary parts.
Create a nested assembly Do one of the following:
• Add parts to an existing assembly as secondary
parts.
• Bolt or weld assemblies to an existing assembly as
sub-assemblies.
• Add assemblies to an existing assembly as sub-
assemblies.
• Join existing assemblies together without adding
any loose parts.
Sub-assemblies in a nested assembly retain their own assembly

information and main part. You can also define properties separately for
the sub-assemblies and the nested assembly by using the part properties
dialog box.
25.4 Removing objects from an assembly

To remove objects from an assembly:
1. Select the part or sub-assembly you want to remove.
2. Right-click and select Assembly > Remove from Assembly from the pop-up menu.
Assemblies
LESSON 4
25.5 Highlighting objects in an assembly
Use the Inquire tool to check which objects belong to a particular assembly.
To highlight objects in an assembly:
2. Select a part that belongs to an assembly.
Tekla Structures highlights the other parts that belong to the same assembly. The
following colors are used:

Reinforcement blue
25.6 Assembly hierarchy

You can work on any level of a nested assembly, from single parts and bolts, through the basic
and sub-assemblies, up to the highest level of the nested assembly.
To work with nested assemblies, you need to know how to use the Shift key and mouse
scrolling to select objects on different levels in assembly hierarchy.
Assemblies
LESSON 4
Assembly hierarchy in nested assemblies affects drawings and reports. You can create separate
drawings and reports of the sub-assemblies and the nested assembly, and still produce
dimensions, marks, fabrication information, etc. for all assembly levels.
25.7 Changing the assembly main part

To change the main part in an assembly:
1. Check what is currently the main part of the assembly.
c Select the assembly.

3. Click Modeling > Assembly > Set as New Main Object of Assembly.
Tekla Structures changes the main part.
Assemblies
LESSON 4
25.8 Changing the main assembly
When you join two or more assemblies together, the assembly with the largest volume becomes
the main assembly. You can change the main assembly at any time.
To change the main assembly in a nested assembly:
1. Select the new main assembly.
2. Right-click and select Assembly > Set as New Main Sub-Assembly from the pop-up
menu.
25.9 Creating assembly views

You can create assembly views to display only the selected assembly. Working with the
assembly is easier when only the relevant information is displayed. For example, you can
perform checking and review operations more easily.
To create an assembly view:
1. Ensure that the Select assemblies switch is active.

2. Select the assembly in the model.
3. Right-click and select Create View, then select one of the options.
Tekla Structures creates the assembly view.
Assemblies
LESSON 4
25.10 Assembly examples
Column corbel A column corbel is fabricated in one workshop, and then attached to the column in another
workshop. Model the corbel as a sub-assembly of the column. Then create an assembly
drawing for each workshop: one assembly drawing showing how the corbel is welded together,
another assembly drawing showing how the corbel and the other part are welded to the column.
Complex truss Model the halves of a complex truss as assemblies. Create assembly drawings for the workshop
to fabricate the truss halves. Then create another assembly drawing showing how the halves
should be joined on site.
Built-up profile In a frame of built-up columns and beams, each built-up profile can be a sub-assembly. You
can create an assembly drawing showing the entire frame, and separate drawings showing how
the columns and beams are constructed.
Assemblies
LESSON 4
Assemblies
LESSON 4
LESSON 5
> LESSON 5
area lines.


LESSON 5
The work area is changed according to the points you picked.


the situation.
LESSON 5


4. Click View > Fit Work Area > To Entire Model in Selected Views to fit the model in
the work area.

LESSON 5
27 Clip planes


2. Select a plane.

Clip planes
LESSON 5

Clip planes
LESSON 5

Clip planes
LESSON 5
28 Work plane
toolbar.

Work plane
LESSON 5
3. Click Change.


view.

2. Select the part.
Work plane
LESSON 5

Advanced snapping
of the following:
LESSON 5


Location toolbar.
You can

brackets.
direction.

coordinates picked.



Advanced snapping
LESSON 5



X again.
Creating a beam 1. Click Modeling > Create Steel Part > Beam and pick the start point.
at a certain level
Advanced snapping
LESSON 5



Advanced snapping

LESSON 5
of snapping.



Advanced snapping
LESSON 5



LESSON 5

Advanced snapping
LESSON 5

Advanced snapping
LESSON 5


grid line.
Advanced snapping
LESSON 5

Advanced snapping
LESSON 5

Advanced snapping
LESSON 5

LESSON 6
> LESSON 6

Search
View folders
View details
View thumbnails

active properties.
and reinforcements.
LESSON 6


31 Components
Components are tools that you can use to automatically create the parts, welds, and bolts
Componen
(14)
Beam
locate the detail. footing
reinforcement

projects.
automatically.
moved.
Components
LESSON 6


the component.

and details:
Color Status Tip

Component created
successfully
Green
component.
Yellow
failed appropriate.
Red

Components
LESSON 6

2. Click Save as.

Symb
Reinforced
positions.

Steel Detailing
Precast Concrete
Detailing

Components
LESSON 6

31.6 Example
Two examples of using a component are presented here. In the first example, a base plate detail
is created. In the second example, the geometry of the base plate detail is modified.
Creating a base plate detail

The component catalog contains several base plate details. In this example, you use one of
them.
Create a steel column before creating the base plate detail. For information on creating a steel
column, see Creating a steel column (p. 30).
To create a base plate detail:

2. Enter "base plate" in the Search box and click Search.
The search results appear in the list.
3. Select Base plate (1004).
5. Pick a point at the base of the column to indicate where to create the base plate.
The base plate is created.
Modifying the base plate detail

In this example, you modify the geometry of the base plate detail.
To modify a base plate detail:

2. Double-click the base plate detail to open the component properties dialog box.
3. On the Picture tab, enter values in boxes to modify the base plate geometry.
Components
LESSON 6

4. Click Modify.
The geometry of the base plate detail changes.


LESSON 6

33 Material catalog
Material catalog
LESSON 6

• The General tab
• The Design tab
Tab Description
density values.
Method.
safety factors.

Material catalog

LESSON 6

Catalog.

Catalog.

3. Click OK.
34 Profile catalog
(for example, HEA).
Profile catalog
LESSON 6

Icon Description
Rule

Profile catalog
LESSON 6

To add a profile:


4. Click OK
Profile catalog
LESSON 6

parameters.

Parametric profiles
LESSON 6

LESSON 6
124
Parametric profiles
TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
LESSON 7
> LESSON 7

LESSON 7


multi-user modes
Open dialog box.

user model in

model.

user model in

checking the model:
• Clash checking
LESSON 7


collide.
• IFC
• DWG
• DGN

You can continue working during the clash check. When the clash check is complete,
the status bar message changes from Clash checking in progress to Ready.
double-click a row.
Checking the model
LESSON 7

speed as you go.
Perspective.

c Click Modify.

distance.

• ID lists
Checking the model
is hard to locate.
LESSON 7



model.

Inquiring the model

LESSON 7

Inquiring bolts
39.2 Inquiring assembly objects

To inquire assembly objects:
2. Select the assembly.

1. Select the part.
Inquiring the model
2. Delete the part.

LESSON 7

Click Tools > Inquire > Primary Welded Part to highlight the
main part when you select the secondary part.


Inquiring the model
LESSON 7



all model views.

column.
LESSON 7

11. Click Close.
16. Click Modify.

groups
Object Group list.
LESSON 7


6. Click OK.

LESSON 7

41 Phase Manager
Phase Manager
LESSON 7

Option Description
in the Number box.
the Name box.
character.
new phases.
phases.
Phase Manager.
objects.

Phase Manager
LESSON 7

Phase Manager
LESSON 7

LESSON 8
> LESSON 8



n objects and
connects secondary
part(s) to a main
part.
Component symbol
is green.

objects and
connects them to a
main part at a
picked location.
Component symbol
is green.
LESSON 8

Seam Creates seam
objects and
connects parts
along a line picked
with two points.
Component symbol
is green.

objects which may
contain connections
and details.
Gets no symbol,
has same position
properties as
beams.
Main part
Secondary part

in the component.

LESSON 8

Component Wizard.
4. Click Next.
Component Wizard.



43 Reference models
model is created in Tekla Structures or another software or modeling tool and imported to
Tekla Structures.
Reference models
• AutoCAD (*.dxf)
LESSON 8
• AutoCAD (*.dwg)

You can snap to reference model geometry. Tekla Structures loads the reference model from
the file each time you open your model. It does not save the reference model when you save the


Reference models
4. Click OK.
LESSON 8



You can update the reference models in your Tekla Structures model if there have been
changes in the original reference models after you have imported them to Tekla Structures.
4. Click Modify.
Reference models
LESSON 8

dialog box.

file formats:
• IFC (.ifc)
• Cadmatic (.3dd)
• DWG (.dwg)
name box.
Reference models
LESSON 8

Example
The old file:
The new file:

Reference models
LESSON 8


model.
Recording a macro
LESSON 8
shortcuts.

To record a macro:
3. Click Record.


To run a macro:

Recording a macro
LESSON 8

45 WebViewer

By default, Tekla Structures creates a PublicWeb folder with sub-folders in the
current model folder, and places the published model there.
WebViewer
LESSON 8
web browser.

With it you can:

Reviewer.
format.
LESSON 8

LESSON 9
• how to use windbracing
> LESSON 9

47 Windbracing
All buildings must be designed to resist wind load. Wind load is different than, for example,
snow and other vertical loads. Wind load acts horizontally and in any direction. Using
windbracing, you can create buildings that can resist loads acting parallel and perpendicular to
any wall of a building.
47.1 Windbracing in a front plane

To create a windbracing to a front plate:
By default, an angle steel profile is loaded. In case of windbracings in front planes, flat
bracings are often used. Therefore, change the Profile to, for example, FL10*60.
4. Select Middle in the On plane list and enter 5 in the box.
The windbracing will be positioned on the right side with an extra distance of 5 mm.
LESSON 9

5. Click OK.
8. Select a component, for example Bolted gusset (11), and connect the braces to the
columns.
47.2 Windbracing in a straight roof plane

To create a windbracing in a straight roof plane:
By default, an angle steel profile is loaded. This is the best option for modeling
windbracings in a straight roof plane, because of their better resistance against
deflection.
4. Select Middle in the On plane list.
5. To let the bracings cross each other correctly, increase the values for the On plane list.
For example, for a profile L60/6, the offset has to be set to 30, or the At depth has to bet
set to Front or Behind.
Usually, in case of crossing angle steel windbracings, the bracings are positioned with
the closed sides towards each other. That means that one bracing has to be rotated 180
degrees by changing the Rotation from Below to Top.
LESSON 9

6. Click OK.
9. Select the components and connect the braces to the columns.
47.3 Windbracing in a sloping roof plane

You can model windbracings for a sloping roof using Tekla Structures. The following steps
lead to longer tasks explaining each phase needed to complete windbracings for a sloping roof.
To create a windbracing in a sloping roof plane:
1. Move the work plane parallel to the roof plane.
2. Create a view parallel to the sloping roof plane.
3. Create the windbracings.
• Create the windbracing with the roof plane view.
• Create the windbracing without the roof plane view.
LESSON 9

Moving the work plane parallel to the roof plane
Before you insert windbracings in a sloping roof plane, we recommend you move the work
plane parallel to the roof plane.
To move the work plane:
1. Click View > Set Work Plane > To Part Top Plane.
2. Select a roof beam.
The view is moved accordingly.
Creating a view parallel to the sloping roof plane

When the work plane is parallel to the roof beams, a view which is parallel to the sloping roof
plane can be created. There are two ways of doing this:

2. Click View > Creat View of Model > On Work Plane.
A new view looking perpendicularly to the roof plane is created.
3. Change the name of the view if you want to store it for later use.

2. Click View > View Properties....
3. Load the plane settings and change the name of the view.
4. Click View > Create View of Model > Using Three Points.
5. Pick points to create the view.
a Pick origin.
b Pick a point in the positive x direction.
c Pick a point in the y direction.
Creating a windbracing using the roof plane view

To create a windbracing using the roof plane view:
1. Insert reference points on the roof beam for positioning the windbracing.
2. Double-click the Create Beam button to open the Beam Properties dialog box.
LESSON 9
3. Load the bracing setting and position the windbracing.

4. Change the position of the bracings so that they do not intersect with each other.
5. Connect the bracing to the roof beams, for example, with the component Bolted gusset
(11).
Creating a windbracing without using the roof plane view

To create a windbracing without using the roof plane view:
1. In a plane view, create reference points on the roof beam.
For more information on creating points, see Creating points along a line (p. 84).
2. Copy the reference points to the next grid line.

3. In a 3D view, set the work plane parallel to the roof plane.
4. Model the windbracings in the 3D view by snapping to the reference points.
47.4 Shortening a windbracing

LESSON 9
To shorten a windbracing:

1. Double-click a windbracing to open the Beam Properties dialog box.
2. Click User-defined attributes button in the Attributes tab.
The Tekla Structures Beam dialog box opens.
When entering values to the Tekla Structures Beam dialog box, there is
a difference between entering the value 0 (zero) and leaving the box
empty.
3. Enter the shortening value in the Shorten box.

4. Click Modify and Cancel, or click Modify and close the dialog box.
Do not click Apply and OK, because the value you defined for the
shortening will be saved as the default value for the Shorten box and it
may affect other beams.
LESSON 9

Checking a windbracing
• Reports
You can use the reports User Defined Attributes (UDA) and id_part_list. In these reports,
the Shorten column displays which profiles are shortened.
• Object representation
You can create object representation settings to display shortened components.
47.5 Shortening examples

Examples 1 and 2 are both examples on how to shorten windbracing using Tekla Structures.
Example 1 is a case where the windbracing is long and the shortening is therefore directed only
to the distance between the bolts. Example 2 is a shorter windbracing so the shortening is
divided equally to the whole windbracing.
Example 1 In this example, we have a windbracing that is 6000 mm in length. The windbracing has holes
at a bolt distance of 60 mm and an edge distance of 40 mm. Without shortening, the distances
would be: 40-60-5800-60-40.
If we shorten the windbracing by 4 mm, the total length should be 5996 mm. However, also the
holes have to be taken into consideration. Tekla Structures divides the total length after
shortening by the initial length of the bracing, that is, 5996 / 6000 = 0.9993. Each individual
distance is multiplied with this factor:
• 0.9993*40 = 39.973 mm
• 0.9993*60 = 59.960 mm
• 0.9993*5800 = 5796.133 mm
will be: 40-60-5796-60-40. The shortening value of 4 mm will be applied to the largest
distance, that is the distance between the two bolt groups.
Example 2 In this example, we have a windbracing that is 2000 mm in length. It is shortened by 20 mm.
Tekla Structures divides the total length after shortening by the initial length of the bracing,
that is, 1980 / 2000 = 0.99. Each individual distance is multiplied with this factor:
• 0.99*40 = 39.6 mm
• 0.99*60 = 59.4 mm
• 0.99*1800 = 1782 mm
will be: 40-59-1782-59-40. The shortening of 20 mm is not only applied to the biggest distance,
but also to the bolt distances.
LESSON 9

47.6 Windbracing examples
Welded connections
Cross bolted
Cross welded
Cross welded and bolted

LESSON 9

Flat bar
LESSON 9

LESSON 10
> LESSON 10

48 Component examples
You can browse the component examples in this lesson to see the various component options
Tekla Structures offers. This material is presented as reference only.
48.1 Steel components

End plate (144)
LESSON 10

Two-sided end plate (142)
Stiffened end plate (27)
LESSON 10

Partial stiff end plate (65)
Bolted gusset (11)

LESSON 10

Central gusset (169)
LESSON 10

Seating (39)
Cranked beam (41)

LESSON 10

Haunch (40)
Joining plates (14)
Stub (28)
LESSON 10

Base plate (1004)
Stiffened base plate (1014)

LESSON 10

Stiffeners (1003)
Stub (1011)
LESSON 10

End plate detail (1002)
Stanchion weld (85)
Round tube (23)

LESSON 10

Manlock column (1032)
Manlock beam (1033)
Array of objects (29)

LESSON 10

one truss
copied
LESSON 10

LESSON 10

LESSON 10

LESSON 11
> LESSON 11


• Press F1.

LESSON 11




LESSON 11

To Do this
alphabetical order
the open topic


previous search.
the search results.
tab.

4. Click Add.
LESSON 11

Tekla - Document

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Tekla - Document

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Basic Modeling 2

Tekla Structures 19.1

3 Basic Modeling 2 ............................................................................... 3

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

1. Make sure these options are selected, and click OK.

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

Start a New Model

5. Click OK to create the new model.

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

2. Close the Views dialog box by clicking OK.

Save the Model

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

There are several ways to execute commands in Tekla Structures:

Setting Up Job Specific Information

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

3.3 Create the Grid

Create the Grid

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

7. Click Close to close the dialog box.

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

To restart the last tool used, press Enter.

Fit Work Area

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

10. De-activate the Snap to geometry lines / points command.

Create Plane Views along Gridlines

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

4. Click OK in the Pad footing (1) (User-defined attributes) dialog box.

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

At Grid Lines 2, 4, & 6

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

Model Strip Footings

3. Load the StripFooting attribute and change the Shape to 24"*24".

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

Fitting the Strip Footings to the Pad Footings

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

Model Concrete Columns

Model Rectangular Columns on Grid Line 1

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

Model Square Columns on Grid Line 1

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

Copy the Square Columns

Model Concrete Beams

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

Model Ledger Beams on Grid Lines 1 & 3

3. Select the LBEAM parametric profile from the Others category.

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

Copy the Ledger Beams

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

Mirroring objects is strongly discouraged, though it can be used in certain situations

Model Foundation Walls

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

Model Wall along Grid 1

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

Model Wall Along Grid 7

Engineering: Basic Modeling 2

Modify Strip Footings

5. Select the box next to the Shape field.

Model the Main Level Slabs